UTO - Souriau - Farnell Element 14
- Revenir à l'accueil
Farnell Element 14 :
![[TXT]](http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/icons/text.gif)
Farnell-HIP4081A-Int..> 07-Jul-2014 19:47 1.0M
Farnell-ISL6251-ISL6..> 07-Jul-2014 19:47 1.1M
Farnell-DG411-DG412-..> 07-Jul-2014 19:47 1.0M
Farnell-3367-ARALDIT..> 07-Jul-2014 19:46 1.2M
Farnell-ICM7228-Inte..> 07-Jul-2014 19:46 1.1M
Farnell-Data-Sheet-K..> 07-Jul-2014 19:46 1.2M
Farnell-Silica-Gel-M..> 07-Jul-2014 19:46 1.2M
Farnell-TKC2-Dusters..> 07-Jul-2014 19:46 1.2M
Farnell-CRC-HANDCLEA..> 07-Jul-2014 19:46 1.2M
Farnell-760G-French-..> 07-Jul-2014 19:45 1.2M
Farnell-Decapant-KF-..> 07-Jul-2014 19:45 1.2M
Farnell-1734-ARALDIT..> 07-Jul-2014 19:45 1.2M
Farnell-Araldite-Fus..> 07-Jul-2014 19:45 1.2M
Farnell-fiche-de-don..> 07-Jul-2014 19:44 1.4M
Farnell-safety-data-..> 07-Jul-2014 19:44 1.4M
Farnell-A-4-Hardener..> 07-Jul-2014 19:44 1.4M
Farnell-CC-Debugger-..> 07-Jul-2014 19:44 1.5M
Farnell-MSP430-Hardw..> 07-Jul-2014 19:43 1.8M
Farnell-SmartRF06-Ev..> 07-Jul-2014 19:43 1.6M
Farnell-CC2531-USB-H..> 07-Jul-2014 19:43 1.8M
Farnell-Alimentation..> 07-Jul-2014 19:43 1.8M
Farnell-BK889B-PONT-..> 07-Jul-2014 19:42 1.8M
Farnell-User-Guide-M..> 07-Jul-2014 19:41 2.0M
Farnell-T672-3000-Se..> 07-Jul-2014 19:41 2.0M
See the trailer for the next exciting episode of The Ben Heck show. Check back on Friday to be among the first to see the exclusive full show on element…
Connect your Raspberry Pi to a breadboard, download some code and create a push-button audio play project.
Puce électronique / Microchip :
Sans fil - Wireless :
Texas instrument :
Ordinateurs :
Logiciels :
Tutoriels :
Autres documentations :
Farnell-SL59830-Inte..> 06-Jul-2014 10:07 1.0M
Farnell-ALF1210-PDF.htm 06-Jul-2014 10:06 4.0M
Farnell-AD7171-16-Bi..> 06-Jul-2014 10:06 1.0M
Farnell-Low-Noise-24..> 06-Jul-2014 10:05 1.0M
Farnell-ESCON-Featur..> 06-Jul-2014 10:05 938K
Farnell-74LCX573-Fai..> 06-Jul-2014 10:05 1.9M
Farnell-1N4148WS-Fai..> 06-Jul-2014 10:04 1.9M
Farnell-FAN6756-Fair..> 06-Jul-2014 10:04 850K
Farnell-Datasheet-Fa..> 06-Jul-2014 10:04 861K
Farnell-ES1F-ES1J-fi..> 06-Jul-2014 10:04 867K
Farnell-QRE1113-Fair..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03 879K
Farnell-2N7002DW-Fai..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03 886K
Farnell-FDC2512-Fair..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03 886K
Farnell-FDV301N-Digi..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03 886K
Farnell-S1A-Fairchil..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03 896K
Farnell-BAV99-Fairch..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03 896K
Farnell-74AC00-74ACT..> 06-Jul-2014 10:03 911K
Farnell-NaPiOn-Panas..> 06-Jul-2014 10:02 911K
Farnell-LQ-RELAYS-AL..> 06-Jul-2014 10:02 924K
Farnell-ev-relays-ae..> 06-Jul-2014 10:02 926K
Farnell-ESCON-Featur..> 06-Jul-2014 10:02 931K
Farnell-Amplifier-In..> 06-Jul-2014 10:02 940K
Farnell-Serial-File-..> 06-Jul-2014 10:02 941K
Farnell-Both-the-Del..> 06-Jul-2014 10:01 948K
Farnell-Videk-PDF.htm 06-Jul-2014 10:01 948K
Farnell-EPCOS-173438..> 04-Jul-2014 10:43 3.3M
Farnell-Sensorless-C..> 04-Jul-2014 10:42 3.3M
Farnell-197.31-KB-Te..> 04-Jul-2014 10:42 3.3M
Farnell-PIC12F609-61..> 04-Jul-2014 10:41 3.7M
Farnell-PADO-semi-au..> 04-Jul-2014 10:41 3.7M
Farnell-03-iec-runds..> 04-Jul-2014 10:40 3.7M
Farnell-ACC-Silicone..> 04-Jul-2014 10:40 3.7M
Farnell-Series-TDS10..> 04-Jul-2014 10:39 4.0M
Farnell-03-iec-runds..> 04-Jul-2014 10:40 3.7M
Farnell-0430300011-D..> 14-Jun-2014 18:13 2.0M
Farnell-06-6544-8-PD..> 26-Mar-2014 17:56 2.7M
Farnell-3M-Polyimide..> 21-Mar-2014 08:09 3.9M
Farnell-3M-VolitionT..> 25-Mar-2014 08:18 3.3M
Farnell-10BQ060-PDF.htm 14-Jun-2014 09:50 2.4M
Farnell-10TPB47M-End..> 14-Jun-2014 18:16 3.4M
Farnell-12mm-Size-In..> 14-Jun-2014 09:50 2.4M
Farnell-24AA024-24LC..> 23-Jun-2014 10:26 3.1M
Farnell-50A-High-Pow..> 20-Mar-2014 17:31 2.9M
Farnell-197.31-KB-Te..> 04-Jul-2014 10:42 3.3M
Farnell-1907-2006-PD..> 26-Mar-2014 17:56 2.7M
Farnell-5910-PDF.htm 25-Mar-2014 08:15 3.0M
Farnell-6517b-Electr..> 29-Mar-2014 11:12 3.3M
Farnell-A-True-Syste..> 29-Mar-2014 11:13 3.3M
Farnell-ACC-Silicone..> 04-Jul-2014 10:40 3.7M
Farnell-AD524-PDF.htm 20-Mar-2014 17:33 2.8M
Farnell-ADL6507-PDF.htm 14-Jun-2014 18:19 3.4M
Farnell-ADSP-21362-A..> 20-Mar-2014 17:34 2.8M
Farnell-ALF1210-PDF.htm 04-Jul-2014 10:39 4.0M
Farnell-ALF1225-12-V..> 01-Apr-2014 07:40 3.4M
Farnell-ALF2412-24-V..> 01-Apr-2014 07:39 3.4M
Farnell-AN10361-Phil..> 23-Jun-2014 10:29 2.1M
Farnell-ARADUR-HY-13..> 26-Mar-2014 17:55 2.8M
Farnell-ARALDITE-201..> 21-Mar-2014 08:12 3.7M
Farnell-ARALDITE-CW-..> 26-Mar-2014 17:56 2.7M
Farnell-ATMEL-8-bit-..> 19-Mar-2014 18:04 2.1M
Farnell-ATMEL-8-bit-..> 11-Mar-2014 07:55 2.1M
Farnell-ATmega640-VA..> 14-Jun-2014 09:49 2.5M
Farnell-ATtiny20-PDF..> 25-Mar-2014 08:19 3.6M
Farnell-ATtiny26-L-A..> 13-Jun-2014 18:40 1.8M
Farnell-Alimentation..> 14-Jun-2014 18:24 2.5M
Farnell-Alimentation..> 01-Apr-2014 07:42 3.4M
Farnell-Amplificateu..> 29-Mar-2014 11:11 3.3M
Farnell-An-Improved-..> 14-Jun-2014 09:49 2.5M
Farnell-Atmel-ATmega..> 19-Mar-2014 18:03 2.2M
Farnell-Avvertenze-e..> 14-Jun-2014 18:20 3.3M
Farnell-BC846DS-NXP-..> 13-Jun-2014 18:42 1.6M
Farnell-BC847DS-NXP-..> 23-Jun-2014 10:24 3.3M
Farnell-BF545A-BF545..> 23-Jun-2014 10:28 2.1M
Farnell-BK2650A-BK26..> 29-Mar-2014 11:10 3.3M
Farnell-BT151-650R-N..> 13-Jun-2014 18:40 1.7M
Farnell-BTA204-800C-..> 13-Jun-2014 18:42 1.6M
Farnell-BUJD203AX-NX..> 13-Jun-2014 18:41 1.7M
Farnell-BYV29F-600-N..> 13-Jun-2014 18:42 1.6M
Farnell-BYV79E-serie..> 10-Mar-2014 16:19 1.6M
Farnell-BZX384-serie..> 23-Jun-2014 10:29 2.1M
Farnell-Battery-GBA-..> 14-Jun-2014 18:13 2.0M
Farnell-C.A-6150-C.A..> 14-Jun-2014 18:24 2.5M
Farnell-C.A 8332B-C...> 01-Apr-2014 07:40 3.4M
Farnell-CC2560-Bluet..> 29-Mar-2014 11:14 2.8M
Farnell-CD4536B-Type..> 14-Jun-2014 18:13 2.0M
Farnell-CIRRUS-LOGIC..> 10-Mar-2014 17:20 2.1M
Farnell-CS5532-34-BS..> 01-Apr-2014 07:39 3.5M
Farnell-Cannon-ZD-PD..> 11-Mar-2014 08:13 2.8M
Farnell-Ceramic-tran..> 14-Jun-2014 18:19 3.4M
Farnell-Circuit-Note..> 26-Mar-2014 18:00 2.8M
Farnell-Circuit-Note..> 26-Mar-2014 18:00 2.8M
Farnell-Cles-electro..> 21-Mar-2014 08:13 3.9M
Farnell-Conception-d..> 11-Mar-2014 07:49 2.4M
Farnell-Connectors-N..> 14-Jun-2014 18:12 2.1M
Farnell-Construction..> 14-Jun-2014 18:25 2.5M
Farnell-Controle-de-..> 11-Mar-2014 08:16 2.8M
Farnell-Cordless-dri..> 14-Jun-2014 18:13 2.0M
Farnell-Current-Tran..> 26-Mar-2014 17:58 2.7M
Farnell-Current-Tran..> 26-Mar-2014 17:58 2.7M
Farnell-Current-Tran..> 26-Mar-2014 17:59 2.7M
Farnell-Current-Tran..> 26-Mar-2014 17:59 2.7M
Farnell-DC-Fan-type-..> 14-Jun-2014 09:48 2.5M
Farnell-DC-Fan-type-..> 14-Jun-2014 09:51 1.8M
Farnell-Davum-TMC-PD..> 14-Jun-2014 18:27 2.4M
Farnell-De-la-puissa..> 29-Mar-2014 11:10 3.3M
Farnell-Directive-re..> 25-Mar-2014 08:16 3.0M
Farnell-Documentatio..> 14-Jun-2014 18:26 2.5M
Farnell-Download-dat..> 13-Jun-2014 18:40 1.8M
Farnell-ECO-Series-T..> 20-Mar-2014 08:14 2.5M
Farnell-ELMA-PDF.htm 29-Mar-2014 11:13 3.3M
Farnell-EMC1182-PDF.htm 25-Mar-2014 08:17 3.0M
Farnell-EPCOS-173438..> 04-Jul-2014 10:43 3.3M
Farnell-EPCOS-Sample..> 11-Mar-2014 07:53 2.2M
Farnell-ES2333-PDF.htm 11-Mar-2014 08:14 2.8M
Farnell-Ed.081002-DA..> 19-Mar-2014 18:02 2.5M
Farnell-F28069-Picco..> 14-Jun-2014 18:14 2.0M
Farnell-F42202-PDF.htm 19-Mar-2014 18:00 2.5M
Farnell-FDS-ITW-Spra..> 14-Jun-2014 18:22 3.3M
Farnell-FICHE-DE-DON..> 10-Mar-2014 16:17 1.6M
Farnell-Fastrack-Sup..> 23-Jun-2014 10:25 3.3M
Farnell-Ferric-Chlor..> 29-Mar-2014 11:14 2.8M
Farnell-Fiche-de-don..> 14-Jun-2014 09:47 2.5M
Farnell-Fiche-de-don..> 14-Jun-2014 18:26 2.5M
Farnell-Fluke-1730-E..> 14-Jun-2014 18:23 2.5M
Farnell-GALVA-A-FROI..> 26-Mar-2014 17:56 2.7M
Farnell-GALVA-MAT-Re..> 26-Mar-2014 17:57 2.7M
Farnell-GN-RELAYS-AG..> 20-Mar-2014 08:11 2.6M
Farnell-HC49-4H-Crys..> 14-Jun-2014 18:20 3.3M
Farnell-HFE1600-Data..> 14-Jun-2014 18:22 3.3M
Farnell-HI-70300-Sol..> 14-Jun-2014 18:27 2.4M
Farnell-HUNTSMAN-Adv..> 10-Mar-2014 16:17 1.7M
Farnell-Haute-vitess..> 11-Mar-2014 08:17 2.4M
Farnell-IP4252CZ16-8..> 13-Jun-2014 18:41 1.7M
Farnell-Instructions..> 19-Mar-2014 18:01 2.5M
Farnell-KSZ8851SNL-S..> 23-Jun-2014 10:28 2.1M
Farnell-L-efficacite..> 11-Mar-2014 07:52 2.3M
Farnell-LCW-CQ7P.CC-..> 25-Mar-2014 08:19 3.2M
Farnell-LME49725-Pow..> 14-Jun-2014 09:49 2.5M
Farnell-LOCTITE-542-..> 25-Mar-2014 08:15 3.0M
Farnell-LOCTITE-3463..> 25-Mar-2014 08:19 3.0M
Farnell-LUXEON-Guide..> 11-Mar-2014 07:52 2.3M
Farnell-Leaded-Trans..> 23-Jun-2014 10:26 3.2M
Farnell-Les-derniers..> 11-Mar-2014 07:50 2.3M
Farnell-Loctite3455-..> 25-Mar-2014 08:16 3.0M
Farnell-Low-cost-Enc..> 13-Jun-2014 18:42 1.7M
Farnell-Lubrifiant-a..> 26-Mar-2014 18:00 2.7M
Farnell-MC3510-PDF.htm 25-Mar-2014 08:17 3.0M
Farnell-MC21605-PDF.htm 11-Mar-2014 08:14 2.8M
Farnell-MCF532x-7x-E..> 29-Mar-2014 11:14 2.8M
Farnell-MICREL-KSZ88..> 11-Mar-2014 07:54 2.2M
Farnell-MICROCHIP-PI..> 19-Mar-2014 18:02 2.5M
Farnell-MOLEX-39-00-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:19 1.9M
Farnell-MOLEX-43020-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:21 1.9M
Farnell-MOLEX-43160-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:21 1.9M
Farnell-MOLEX-87439-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:21 1.9M
Farnell-MPXV7002-Rev..> 20-Mar-2014 17:33 2.8M
Farnell-MX670-MX675-..> 14-Jun-2014 09:46 2.5M
Farnell-Microchip-MC..> 13-Jun-2014 18:27 1.8M
Farnell-Microship-PI..> 11-Mar-2014 07:53 2.2M
Farnell-Midas-Active..> 14-Jun-2014 18:17 3.4M
Farnell-Midas-MCCOG4..> 14-Jun-2014 18:11 2.1M
Farnell-Miniature-Ci..> 26-Mar-2014 17:55 2.8M
Farnell-Mistral-PDF.htm 14-Jun-2014 18:12 2.1M
Farnell-Molex-83421-..> 14-Jun-2014 18:17 3.4M
Farnell-Molex-COMMER..> 14-Jun-2014 18:16 3.4M
Farnell-Molex-Crimp-..> 10-Mar-2014 16:27 1.7M
Farnell-Multi-Functi..> 20-Mar-2014 17:38 3.0M
Farnell-NTE_SEMICOND..> 11-Mar-2014 07:52 2.3M
Farnell-NXP-74VHC126..> 10-Mar-2014 16:17 1.6M
Farnell-NXP-BT136-60..> 11-Mar-2014 07:52 2.3M
Farnell-NXP-PBSS9110..> 10-Mar-2014 17:21 1.9M
Farnell-NXP-PCA9555 ..> 11-Mar-2014 07:54 2.2M
Farnell-NXP-PMBFJ620..> 10-Mar-2014 16:16 1.7M
Farnell-NXP-PSMN1R7-..> 10-Mar-2014 16:17 1.6M
Farnell-NXP-PSMN7R0-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:19 2.1M
Farnell-NXP-TEA1703T..> 11-Mar-2014 08:15 2.8M
Farnell-Nilï¬-sk-E-..> 14-Jun-2014 09:47 2.5M
Farnell-Novembre-201..> 20-Mar-2014 17:38 3.3M
Farnell-OMRON-Master..> 10-Mar-2014 16:26 1.8M
Farnell-OSLON-SSL-Ce..> 19-Mar-2014 18:03 2.1M
Farnell-OXPCIE958-FB..> 13-Jun-2014 18:40 1.8M
Farnell-PADO-semi-au..> 04-Jul-2014 10:41 3.7M
Farnell-PBSS5160T-60..> 19-Mar-2014 18:03 2.1M
Farnell-PDTA143X-ser..> 20-Mar-2014 08:12 2.6M
Farnell-PDTB123TT-NX..> 13-Jun-2014 18:43 1.5M
Farnell-PESD5V0F1BL-..> 13-Jun-2014 18:43 1.5M
Farnell-PESD9X5.0L-P..> 13-Jun-2014 18:43 1.6M
Farnell-PIC12F609-61..> 04-Jul-2014 10:41 3.7M
Farnell-PIC18F2455-2..> 23-Jun-2014 10:27 3.1M
Farnell-PIC24FJ256GB..> 14-Jun-2014 09:51 2.4M
Farnell-PMBT3906-PNP..> 13-Jun-2014 18:44 1.5M
Farnell-PMBT4403-PNP..> 23-Jun-2014 10:27 3.1M
Farnell-PMEG4002EL-N..> 14-Jun-2014 18:18 3.4M
Farnell-PMEG4010CEH-..> 13-Jun-2014 18:43 1.6M
Farnell-Panasonic-15..> 23-Jun-2014 10:29 2.1M
Farnell-Panasonic-EC..> 20-Mar-2014 17:36 2.6M
Farnell-Panasonic-EZ..> 20-Mar-2014 08:10 2.6M
Farnell-Panasonic-Id..> 20-Mar-2014 17:35 2.6M
Farnell-Panasonic-Ne..> 20-Mar-2014 17:36 2.6M
Farnell-Panasonic-Ra..> 20-Mar-2014 17:37 2.6M
Farnell-Panasonic-TS..> 20-Mar-2014 08:12 2.6M
Farnell-Panasonic-Y3..> 20-Mar-2014 08:11 2.6M
Farnell-Pico-Spox-Wi..> 10-Mar-2014 16:16 1.7M
Farnell-Pompes-Charg..> 24-Apr-2014 20:23 3.3M
Farnell-Ponts-RLC-po..> 14-Jun-2014 18:23 3.3M
Farnell-Portable-Ana..> 29-Mar-2014 11:16 2.8M
Farnell-Premier-Farn..> 21-Mar-2014 08:11 3.8M
Farnell-Produit-3430..> 14-Jun-2014 09:48 2.5M
Farnell-Proskit-SS-3..> 10-Mar-2014 16:26 1.8M
Farnell-Puissance-ut..> 11-Mar-2014 07:49 2.4M
Farnell-Q48-PDF.htm 23-Jun-2014 10:29 2.1M
Farnell-Radial-Lead-..> 20-Mar-2014 08:12 2.6M
Farnell-Realiser-un-..> 11-Mar-2014 07:51 2.3M
Farnell-Reglement-RE..> 21-Mar-2014 08:08 3.9M
Farnell-Repartiteurs..> 14-Jun-2014 18:26 2.5M
Farnell-S-TRI-SWT860..> 21-Mar-2014 08:11 3.8M
Farnell-SB175-Connec..> 11-Mar-2014 08:14 2.8M
Farnell-SMBJ-Transil..> 29-Mar-2014 11:12 3.3M
Farnell-SOT-23-Multi..> 11-Mar-2014 07:51 2.3M
Farnell-SPLC780A1-16..> 14-Jun-2014 18:25 2.5M
Farnell-SSC7102-Micr..> 23-Jun-2014 10:25 3.2M
Farnell-SVPE-series-..> 14-Jun-2014 18:15 2.0M
Farnell-Sensorless-C..> 04-Jul-2014 10:42 3.3M
Farnell-Septembre-20..> 20-Mar-2014 17:46 3.7M
Farnell-Serie-PicoSc..> 19-Mar-2014 18:01 2.5M
Farnell-Serie-Standa..> 14-Jun-2014 18:23 3.3M
Farnell-Series-2600B..> 20-Mar-2014 17:30 3.0M
Farnell-Series-TDS10..> 04-Jul-2014 10:39 4.0M
Farnell-Signal-PCB-R..> 14-Jun-2014 18:11 2.1M
Farnell-Strangkuhlko..> 21-Mar-2014 08:09 3.9M
Farnell-Supercapacit..> 26-Mar-2014 17:57 2.7M
Farnell-TDK-Lambda-H..> 14-Jun-2014 18:21 3.3M
Farnell-TEKTRONIX-DP..> 10-Mar-2014 17:20 2.0M
Farnell-Tektronix-AC..> 13-Jun-2014 18:44 1.5M
Farnell-Telemetres-l..> 20-Mar-2014 17:46 3.7M
Farnell-Termometros-..> 14-Jun-2014 18:14 2.0M
Farnell-The-essentia..> 10-Mar-2014 16:27 1.7M
Farnell-U2270B-PDF.htm 14-Jun-2014 18:15 3.4M
Farnell-USB-Buccanee..> 14-Jun-2014 09:48 2.5M
Farnell-USB1T11A-PDF..> 19-Mar-2014 18:03 2.1M
Farnell-V4N-PDF.htm 14-Jun-2014 18:11 2.1M
Farnell-WetTantalum-..> 11-Mar-2014 08:14 2.8M
Farnell-XPS-AC-Octop..> 14-Jun-2014 18:11 2.1M
Farnell-XPS-MC16-XPS..> 11-Mar-2014 08:15 2.8M
Farnell-YAGEO-DATA-S..> 11-Mar-2014 08:13 2.8M
Farnell-ZigBee-ou-le..> 11-Mar-2014 07:50 2.4M
Farnell-celpac-SUL84..> 21-Mar-2014 08:11 3.8M
Farnell-china_rohs_o..> 21-Mar-2014 10:04 3.9M
Farnell-cree-Xlamp-X..> 20-Mar-2014 17:34 2.8M
Farnell-cree-Xlamp-X..> 20-Mar-2014 17:35 2.7M
Farnell-cree-Xlamp-X..> 20-Mar-2014 17:31 2.9M
Farnell-cree-Xlamp-m..> 20-Mar-2014 17:32 2.9M
Farnell-cree-Xlamp-m..> 20-Mar-2014 17:32 2.9M
Farnell-ir1150s_fr.p..> 29-Mar-2014 11:11 3.3M
Farnell-manual-bus-p..> 10-Mar-2014 16:29 1.9M
Farnell-propose-plus..> 11-Mar-2014 08:19 2.8M
Farnell-techfirst_se..> 21-Mar-2014 08:08 3.9M
Farnell-testo-205-20..> 20-Mar-2014 17:37 3.0M
Farnell-testo-470-Fo..> 20-Mar-2014 17:38 3.0M
Farnell-uC-OS-III-Br..> 10-Mar-2014 17:20 2.0M
Sefram-7866HD.pdf-PD..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46 472K
Sefram-CAT_ENREGISTR..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46 461K
Sefram-CAT_MESUREURS..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46 435K
Sefram-GUIDE_SIMPLIF..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46 481K
Sefram-GUIDE_SIMPLIF..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46 442K
Sefram-GUIDE_SIMPLIF..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46 422K
Sefram-SP270.pdf-PDF..> 29-Mar-2014 11:46 464K
21
UT0
Metal circular
connector
Description
“UT0” industrial circular connectors are a range
of multiway connectors available in 8 shell sizes
and 8 insert arrangements all intermateable,
interchangeable and intermountable with the
TRIM TRIO “UTG” and “UTP industrial connector
families.
“UT0” is equipped with identical shells from
military connectors complying to MIL-C-26482
spec.
Strong and rugged built to resist every
environmental and mechanical requirement for
indoor and outdoor applications.
Amongst several characteristics, “UT0” offers
possibilities on: Shielding, High levels on sealing
and salt spray. UT0 is also the perfect solution
to connect cat5e Ethernet applications in
combination with other signals, using the same
TRIM TRIO contacts (consult factory for more info).
Features and benefits (see p2)
• Suitable for shielding applications
• Available in 8 shell sizes and 8 insert
arrangements.
• Available in plug and receptacle versions for
both male and female contacts.
• Different insert orientations possible.
• Plastic inserts with flammability rating: UL94-V0.
• 2 levels of water protection: Dynamic IP67 and
IP68 both versions are IP69K
• 2 levels of salt spray: 48h and 96h
Higher salt spray resistance (200/500h) upon
request
• Cat5e Ethernet compatible. Can be combined
with other signals offering the advantage to use
same contacts (consult factory).
• UL recognition in process.
• Metal bayonet ring:
- Metal wave spring loaded
- Locks with audible positive “click”
- Assures 500 matings and unmatings
• RoHS compliant
Performance characteristics
Operating temp: -40°C to +105°C
Insulation
resistance: 5000 MΩ min.
Test potential: 2000 VAC
Durability: 500 matings and unmatings.
Vibration Per MIL-STD202
resistance: method 204
Thermal shock: Per MIL-STD202
method 207
Corrosion: Salt spray per MIL-STD 202
method 101
48h (standard version)
96h (black anodised
coupling ring)
Higher salt spray resistance (200/500h) upon
request
Shielding effectiveness: 95 dB at 1 Mhz
Degree of water protection per DIN 40050:
Dynamic IP67 / IP68 / IP69K in mated condition
and in combination with sealed back shell.
How to order
H or H6 – – – –
H
––
PS
12
12
14
14
06
UT0
UT0
Body variation: 0 : Wall mounting receptacle
6 : Cable plug
7 : Jam nut receptacle for rear panel mounting
Shell size:
Insert arrangement:
Type of contacts: P : Pin contacts
S : Socket contacts
Insert polarisation: No letter : Standard version
W, X, Y, Z: Different orientations (consult factory)
Application: H : Standard version, water protected IP 67 & IP 69K
H6 : Water protected IP 68 & IP 69K (only needed for wall mounting & jam nut receptacles)
Design variation: No letter : Standard version
Others : Special versions
Plating: No letter : Standard is nickel plating (48h salt spray)
01: Black anodised jam nut (96h salt spray)
02: Black anodised coupling ring (96h salt spray)
new
Construction
Shells: Zinc alloy
Backshells and cable glands: Brass
Coupling ring: Aluminium alloy
Coupling spring: Spring stainless steel
Insert: Glass-filled thermoplast UL94-V0
RoHS compliant
Contact accommodation
• “UT0” connectors accept TRIM TRIO size 16
crimp-type removable snap-lock contacts (see
contacts section)
• Contacts to be ordered seperately.
Dynamic IP68 / IP69K
High salt spray resistance
RoHS compliant
2
New UT0 - UT0W series
New UT0 – UT0W series:
• The exclusive new product range in the TRIM TRIO broadline.
• Aesthetic and top class performances
UT0 – UT0W series major technical features & benefits
For detailed information on UT0 and UT0W series offering see pages 21 to 31
• Full metal bayonet connector
– Enabling 500 mating-unmating without wear out
– Secure locking device: audible “click” when mating
• In accordance with following standards
– UT0 is Ethernet Cat5e compatible (consult factory)
– UTO-UTOW ranges are upgradeable to highspeed solutions
• RoHS compliant
– Cadmium and lead free materials are used
• High salt spray resistance*
– Can be used in severe environment
* Exists in 48 and 96 hours salt spray version
* Higher salt spray resistance (e.g. 200 or 500 hours) upon request
• Dynamic IP68*
Connector will remain IP68 even when:
– Pulling on the cable
– Bending the cable
* With appropriate back shell
* Exists also in IP67 version
• Dynamic IP69K*
Connector withstands high pressure water
cleaning.
* With appropriate back shell
New UT0-UT0W series
22
UT0
Cable plug for pin contacts (UT06- - - -PH)
Part number Shell Ø A ±0.2 B max. Ø C ±0.15 Ø D ±0.15 E ±0.25
size
UT06104PH 10 21.80 10.2 20.00
UT06128PH 12 26.10 13.4 23.60
UT061412PH 14 29.30 16.7 26.80 23.25
UT061619PH 16 32.45 33.00 19.7 30.00
UT061823PH 18 35.25 21.7 33.30
UT062028PH 20 38.80 24.9 36.55
UT062235PH 22 42.00 28.1 39.50 25.20
UT062448PH 24 45.05 31.2 42.60
Cable plug for socket contacts (UT06- - - -SH)
Part number Shell Ø A ±0.2 B max. Ø C ±0.15 Ø D ±0.15 E ±0.25
size
UT06104SH 10 21.80 10.2 20.00
UT06128SH 12 26.10 13.4 23.60
UT061412SH 14 29.30 33.00 16.7 26.80 23.25
UT061619SH 16 32.45 19.7 30.00
UT061823SH 18 35.25 21.7 33.30
UT062028SH 20 38.80 24.9 36.55
UT062235SH 22 42.00 27.30 28.1 39.50 25.20
UT062448SH 24 45.05 31.2 42.60
Part numbers are suitable for both IP67 and IP68 water protection
For 96h salt spray version add ”02” behind “H” e.g. UT061412PH02 (only bayonet ring will be black anodised)
Part numbers are suitable for both IP67 and IP68 water protection
For 96h salt spray version add ”02” behind “H” e.g. UT061412SH02 (only bayonet ring will be black anodised)
new
E ± 0,25
E ± 0,25
Dynamic IP68 / IP69K
High salt spray resistance
RoHS compliant
23
UT0
Wall mounting receptacle for pin contacts (UT00----PH/PH6)
Wall mounting receptacle for socket contacts (UT00----SH/SH6)
Part number
IP67 IP68
Shell
size
A
max.
B
± 0.3
C
± 0.2
Ø D
± 0.15
E
± 0.25
F
± 0.25
Ø G
± 0.1
Ø H
± 0.1
Ø J
± 0.1
UT00104PH UT00104PH6 10
33.23 1.6 11.35
15.0 18.3 23.8
3.2
17.3 14.2
UT00128PH UT00128PH6 12 19.0 20.6 26.2 21.8 18.4
UT001412PH UT001412PH6 14 22.2 23.0 28.6 25.0 21.5
UT001619PH UT001619PH6 16 25.3 24.6 31.0 28.1 24.6
UT001823PH UT001823PH6 18 28.5 26.9 33.3 31.3 27.8
UT002028PH UT002028PH6 20
34.75 2.4
14.55
31.7 29.4 36.5 34.5 30.9
UT002235PH UT002235PH6 22 34.9 31.8 39.7 37.7 34.1
UT002448PH UT002448PH6 24 15.35 38.0 34.9 42.9 3.9 40.9 37.3
Part numbers are suitable for both 48h and 96h salt spray.
A square sealing has to be ordered separately to guarantee a sealing with equipment. Refer to “Circular accessories” section (UTFD--).
Part numbers are suitable for both 48h and 96h salt spray.
A square sealing has to be ordered separately to guarantee a sealing with equipment. Refer to “Circular accessories” section (UTFD--).
Part number
IP67 IP68
Shell
size
A
max.
B
± 0.3
C
± 0.2
Ø D
± 0.15
E
± 0.25
F
± 0.25
Ø G
± 0.1
Ø H
± 0.1
Ø J
± 0.1
UT00104SH UT00104SH6 10
25.20 1.6 11.35
15.0 18.3 23.8
3.2
17.3 14.2
UT00128SH UT00128SH6 12 19.0 20.6 26.2 21.8 18.4
UT001412SH UT001412SH6 14 22.2 23.0 28.6 25.0 21.5
UT001619SH UT001619SH6 16 25.3 24.6 31.0 28.1 24.6
UT001823SH UT001823SH6 18 28.5 26.9 33.3 31.3 27.8
UT002028SH UT002028SH6 20
29.00 2.4
14.55
31.7 29.4 36.5 34.5 30.9
UT002235SH UT002235SH6 22 34.9 31.8 39.7 37.7 34.1
UT002448SH UT002448SH6 24 15.35 38.0 34.9 42.9 3.9 40.9 37.3
new
B ± 0,3
B ± 0,3
Ø G ± 0,1
Dynamic IP68 / IP69K
High salt spray resistance
RoHS compliant
24
UT0
Jam nut receptacle for pin contacts (UT07----PH/PH6) - suitable for rear panel mounting
Jam nut receptacle for socket contacts (UT07---SH/SH6) - suitable for rear panel mounting
Part number
IP67 IP68
Shell
size
Ø A
± 0.15
B
± 0.2
D
Max.
F
Max.
G
± 0.25
H
± 0.3
K
± 0.25
L
± 0.2
Ø M
± 0.2
UT07104PH UT07104PH6 10 14.9
19.30 33.90 3.2
27.0 22.2 16.6 17.0 17.7
UT07128PH UT07128PH6 12 19.0 31.8 27.0 20.8 21.2 22.5
UT071412PH UT071412PH6 14 22.2 34.9 30.2 23.9 24.3 25.7
UT071619PH UT071619PH6 16 25.3 38.1 33.3 27.1 27.5 28.7
UT071823PH UT071823PH6 18 28.5 41.3 36.5 30.3 30.6 32.0
UT072028PH UT072028PH6 20 31.7 24.70
39.00
6.4
46.1 39.7 33.4 33.8 35.2
UT072235PH UT072235PH6 22 34.9 49.2 42.9 36.6 37.0 38.4
UT072448PH UT072448PH6 24 38.0 25.50 40.50 53.4 46.0 39.8 40.1 41.5
For 96h salt spray version add ”01” at the end of the part number e.g. UT071412PH601 (only jam nut will be black anodised)
For 96h salt spray version add ”01” at the end of the part number e.g. UT071412PH601 (only jam nut will be black anodised)
Part number
IP67 IP68
Shell
size
Ø A
± 0.15
B
± 0.2
D
Max.
F
Max.
G
± 0.25
H
± 0.3
K
± 0.25
L
± 0.2
Ø M
± 0.2
UT07104SH UT07104SH6 10 14.9
19.30 33.00 3.2
27.0 22.2 16.6 17.0 17.7
UT07128SH UT07128SH6 12 19.0 31.8 27.0 20.8 21.2 22.5
UT071412SH UT071412SH6 14 22.2 34.9 30.2 23.9 24.3 25.7
UT071619SH UT071619SH6 16 25.3 38.1 33.3 27.1 27.5 28.7
UT071823SH UT071823SH6 18 28.5 41.3 36.5 30.3 30.6 32.0
UT072028SH UT072028SH6 20 31.7 24.70
39.00
6.4
46.1 39.7 33.4 33.8 35.2
UT072235SH UT072235SH6 22 34.9 49.2 42.9 36.6 37.0 38.4
UT072448SH UT072448SH6 24 38.0 25.50 40.50 53.4 46.0 39.8 40.1 41.5
new
Dynamic IP68 / IP69K
High salt spray resistance
RoHS compliant
connectors
on request
on request
on request
41
Circular accessories
Plastic cable clamp with strain relief (UTG--AC)
Part number Shell Cable range Ø A ± 0.4 L ± 0.5
size Ø
UTG10AC 10 3.0 - 8.70 21.0 40.0
UTG12AC 12 3.0 - 12.8 24.0 40.0
UTG14AC 14 4.0 - 13.8 27.0 46.0
UTG16AC 16 5.0 - 17.0 30.2 46.0
UTG18AC 18 5.0 - 19.0 33.3 50.0
UTG20AC 20 5.0 - 21.0 36.5 55.0
UTG22AC 22 5.0 - 23.0 39.7 60.0
UTG24AC 24 8.0 - 27.0 42.9 65.0
Plastic cable clamp with strain relief nut for waterprotected (IP65) applications (UTG--PG)
Part number Shell Sealing* L ± 1 A ± 0.5
size outer dia x inner dia’s
UTG10PG 10 13.5 x 5 x 8 54 21.0
UTG12PG 12 16 x 7 x 10.5 x 13 x 16 57 24.0
UTG14PG 14 18.5 x 7 x 105 x 13 x 16 62 27.0
UTG16PG 16 20.5 x 8 x 10.5 x 13 x 16 68 30.2
UTG18PG 18 20.5 x 8 x 10.5 x 13 x 16 71 33.3
UTG20PG 20 26 x 11 x 15 x 18 x 22 82 36.5
UTG22PG 22 26 x 11 x 15 x 18 x 22 88 39.7
UTG24PG 24 35 x 19 x 23 x 27 x 31 103 42.9
*In order to accommodate different cable dia’s, the sealing exisits of different layers which can be pulled out easily.
Cable clamp has a PG style cable gland. For threading specifications see last page of this section “Circular accessories”
For threading specifications see last page of this section “Circular accessories”
Suitable for UTP-UTG
Suitable for UTP-UTG
42
Circular accessories
Plastic cable clamp with strain relief nut for waterprotected (IP65) applications (UTG--ST)
Part number Shell Cable range Dia. A ± 0.5 L ± 1
size
UTG10ST 10 2 - 6 21.0 64
UTG12ST 12 3 - 7 24.0 64
UTG14ST 14 6 - 9 27.0 69
UTG16ST 16 7 - 12 30.2 72
UTG18ST 18 33.3 76
UTG20ST 20 9 - 16 36.5 80
UTG22ST 22 39.7 86
UTG24ST 24 13 - 20 42.9 91
Metal cable clamp with strain relief (UT0--AC)
Cable clamp has a PG style cable gland. For threading specifications see last page of this section “Circular
Part number Shell size Max cable dia.
Excl. sealing Ø A±0.2 B maxi C maxi
UT010AC 10 5.0 16.3 21.6 31.0
UT012AC 12 8.2 19.4 25.0 31.5
UT014AC 14 10.0 22.5 27.4 34.0
UT016AC 16 13.0 25.8 29.4 34.0
UT018AC 18 16.0 29.2 35.2 31.4
UT020AC 20 16.0 32.5 35.2 32.0
UT022AC 22 19.3 35.7 41.1 31.0
UT024AC 24 20.6 38.8 42.4 31.0
For threading specifications see last page of this section “Circular accessories”
Suitable for UTP-UTG
Suitable for UT0-UT0W
43
Circular accessories
Short cable clamp with strain relief nut for waterprotected applications (IP68). (UT0--JCS)
Long cable clamp with strain relief nut for waterprotected applications (IP68). (UT0--JC)
Part number
Shell
size
Clamping range
(Ø en mm) min / max
L± 1
Short Thread A
version
Long
version
Short
version
Long
version
UT010JCS UT010JC 10 03 / 06 48.5 60.5 9/16 – 24 UNEF Class 2A
UT012JCS UT012JC 12 06 / 10 49.5 61.5 11/16 – 24 UNEF Class 2A
UT014JCS UT014JC 14 06 / 10 53.5 67.5 13/16 – 20 UNEF Class 2A
UT016JCS UT016JC 16 9.5 / 14 62.5 73.5 15/16 – 20 UNEF Class 2A
UT018JCS UT018JC 18 9.5 / 14 65.5 76.0 1’’ 1/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A
UT020JCS UT020JC 20 11.5 / 18 70.5 84.0 1’’ 3/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A
UT022JCS UT022JC 22 11.5 / 18 76.5 88.0 1’’ 5/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A
UT024JCS UT024JC 24 11.5 / 18 82.0 92.0 1’’ 7/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A
Short cable clamp with large strain relief nut for waterprotected applications (IP68). (UT0--JCSL)
Long cable clamp with large strain relief nut for waterprotected applications (IP68). (UT0--JCL)
Part number
Shell
size
Clamping range
(Ø en mm) min / max
L± 1
Short Thread A
version
Long
version
Short
version
Long
version
UT010JCSL UT010JCL 10 05 / 08 49.5 61.5 9/16 – 24 UNEF Class 2A
UT012JCSL UT012JCL 12 08 / 12 49.5 62.5 11/16 – 24 UNEF Class 2A
UT014JCSL UT014JCL 14 08 / 12 54.5 68.5 13/16 – 20 UNEF Class 2A
UT016JCSL UT016JCL 16 11.5 / 18 68.5 79.5 15/16 – 20 UNEF Class 2A
UT018JCSL UT018JCL 18 11.5 / 18 71.5 82.0 1’’ 1/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A
UT020JCSL UT020JCL 20 15 / 24 77.5 91.0 1’’ 3/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A
UT022JCSL UT022JCL 22 15 / 24 83.5 95.0 1’’ 5/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A
UT024JCSL UT024JCL 24 15 / 24 89.0 99.0 1’’ 7/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A
Cable clamp has a Metric style cable gland. For threading specifications see last page of this section “Circular accessories”
Cable clamp has a Metric style cable gland. For threading specifications see last page of this section “Circular accessories”
Suitable for UT0-UT0W
Suitable for UT0-UT0W
44
Circular accessories
Short shielded cable clamp with strain relief nut for waterprotected applications (IP68). (UT0S----JCS)
Long shielded cable clamp with strain relief nut for waterprotected applications (IP68). (UT0S----JC)
Part number
Shell
size
Clamping range
(Ø en mm) min / max
L± 1
Short Thread A
version
Long
version
Short
version
Long
version
UT0S10JCS UT0S10JC 10 04 / 6.5 58.5 70.5 9/16 – 24 UNEF Class 2A
UT0S12JCS UT0S12JC 12 07 / 10.5 61.5 74.5 11/16 – 24 UNEF Class 2A
UT0S14JCS UT0S14JC 14 07 / 10.5 66.5 80.5 13/16 – 20 UNEF Class 2A
UT0S16JCS UT0S16JC 16 10 / 14.5 72.5 83.5 15/16 – 20 UNEF Class 2A
UT0S18JCS UT0S18JC 18 10 / 14.5 75.5 86.0 1’’ 1/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A
UT0S20JCS UT0S20JC 20 13.5 / 18 84.5 97.5 1’’ 3/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A
UT0S22JCS UT0S22JC 22 13.5 / 18 90.0 101.5 1’’ 5/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A
UT0S24JCS UT0S24JC 24 13.5 / 18 95.5 105.5 1’’ 7/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A
Short shielded cable clamp with large strain relief nut for waterprotected applications (IP68). (UT0S----JCSL)
Long shielded cable clamp with large strain relief nut for waterprotected applications (IP68). (UT0S----JCL)
Part number
Shell
size
Clamping range
(Ø en mm) min / max
L± 1
Short Thread A
version
Long
version
Short
version
Long
version
UT0S10JCSL UT0S10JCL 10 05 / 8.5 59.5 71.5 9/16 – 24 UNEF Class 2A
UT0S12JCSL UT0S12JCL 12 08 / 12.5 61.5 74.5 11/16 – 24 UNEF Class 2A
UT0S14JCSL UT0S14JCL 14 08 / 12.5 66.5 80.5 13/16 – 20 UNEF Class 2A
UT0S16JCSL UT0S16JCL 16 13.5 / 18 82.5 93.5 15/16 – 20 UNEF Class 2A
UT0S18JCSL UT0S18JCL 18 13.5 / 18 85.5 96.0 1’’ 1/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A
UT0S20JCSL UT0S20JCL 20 17 / 24 93.0 106.5 1’’ 3/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A
UT0S22JCSL UT0S22JCL 22 17 / 24 99.0 110.5 1’’ 5/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A
UT0S24JCSL UT0S24JCL 24 17 / 24 104.5 114.5 1’’ 7/16 – 18 UNEF Class 2A
Cable clamp has a Metric style cable gland. For threading specifications see last page of this section “Circular accessories”
Cable clamp has a Metric style cable gland. For threading specifications see last page of this section “Circular accessories”
Suitable for UT0-UT0W
Suitable for UT0-UT0W
45
Circular accessories
Metal right angle cable clamp with strain relief nut (UTG--LPGN / UTO--LPGN)
Part number Part number Shell A max B max Cable range
For UTP / UTG For UT0 / UT0W size
UTG10LPGN UT010LPGN 10 48.0 30.0 13.5 x 5 x 8
UTG12LPGN UT012LPGN 12 50.0 33.5 16 x 7 x 10.5 x 13
UTG14LPGN UT014LPGN 14 52.0 36.5 18.5 x 7 x 10.5 x 13 x 16
UTG16LPGN UT016LPGN 16 55.0 39.5 20.5 x 8 x 10.5 x 13 x 16
UTG18LPGN UT018LPGN 18 60.0 46.0 20.5 x 8 x 10.5 x 13 x 16
UTG20LPGN UT020LPGN 20 58.0 47.0 26 x 11 x 15 x 18 x 22
UTG22LPGN UT022LPGN 22 58.0 48.5 26 x 11 x 15 x 18 x 22
UTG24LPGN UT024LPGN 24 67.0 54.5 35 x 19 x 23 x 27 x 31
Cable clamp has a PG style cable gland. For threading specifications see last page of this section “Circular accessories”
Metal shrink boot adaptor (UTG--AD) for UTP and UTG
Part number Shell size Ø A±0.2 B
UTG10AD 10 21.0
UTG12AD 12 24.0 19.2
UTG14AD 14 27.0
UTG16AD 16 30.0 21.5
UTG18AD 18 33.3
UTG20AD 20 36.5 22.8
UTG22AD 22 39.7
UTG24AD 24 42.9 21.9
Standard plating is anodised black. For tin plating add “T” at the end of the part number e.g. UTG12ADT
For threading specifications see last page of this section “Circular accessories”
46
Circular accessories
Environmental dustcap for plugs (UTG6--DCG)
Part number Shell size A max. B
UTG610DCG 10 20.0
UTG612DCG 12 24.0
UTG614DCG 14 27.5 20.8
UTG616DCG 16 30.5
UTG618DCG 18 33.5
UTG620DCG 20 36.5
UTG622DCG 22 40.0 22.5
UTG624DCG 24 43.0
For dustcap without chain skip “G” e.g. UTG612DC
Metal shrink boot adaptor for UTO and UTOW
Part number Shell size Ø A±0.2 B
For threading specifications see last page of this section “Circular accessories”
UT010AD 10 21
UT012AD 12 24 24.7
UT014AD 14 27
UT016AD 16 30
UT018AD 18 33.3
UT020AD 20 36.5 27
UT022AD 22 39.7
UT024AD 24 42.9
Suitable for UTP-UTG-UT0-UT0W
47
Circular accessories
Plastic environmental dustcap for receptacles (UTP--DCG)
Part number Shell size Ø A ±0.2 B max.
UTP10DCG 10 26.7 19.3
UTP12DCG 12 31.4 20.0
UTP14DCG 14 34.5
UTP16DCG 16 37.8 20.2
UTP18DCG 18 40.8
UTP20DCG 20 43.9
UTP22DCG 22 47.0 21.8
UTP24DCG 24 50.1
For dustcap without chain skip “G” e.g. UTP12DC
For jam dustcap consult factory
Metal environmental dustcap for receptacles (UT0--DCG)
Part number Shell size A max.
UT010DCG 10 20.8
UT012DCG 12 24.9
UT014DCG 14 28.1
UT016DCG 16 31.3
UT018DCG 18 34.4
UT020DCG 20 37.6
UT022DCG 22 40.8
UT024DCG 24 43.9
For dustcap without chain skip “G” e.g. UTG12DC
For jam dustcap consult factory
Suitable for UTP-UTG-UT0-UT0W
Suitable for UTP-UTG-UT0-UT0W
48
Sealing for wall mounting receptacle (UTFD1-B)
Part number Shell size Ø F ±0.1 R ±0.25 S ±0.25 Ø V
UTFD12B 10 15.9 18.3 23.8
UTFD13B 12 19.0 20.6 26.2
UTFD14B 14 22.2 23.0 28.6
UTFD15B 16 25.4 24.6 31.0 3.3
UTFD16B 18 28.6 27.0 33.3
UTFD17B 20 31.8 29.4 36.5
UTFD18B 22 34.9 31.8 39.7
UTFD19B 24 38.1 34.9 42.9 4.0
Cable gland threadings used on cable clamps
Shell size Thread size on connectors PG threading Metric threading
10 9/16 - 24 UNEF PG9 M16 x 1.5
12 11/16 - 24 UNEF PG11 M20 x 1.5
14 13/16 - 20 UNEF PG13.5 M20 x 1.5
16 15/16 - 20 UNEF PG16 M25 x 1.5
18 1-1/16 - 18 UNEF PG16 M25 x 1.5
20 1-3/16 - 18 UNEF PG21 M32 x 1.5
22 1-5/16 - 18 UNEF PG21 M32 x 1.5
24 1-7/16 - 18 UNEF PG29 M32 x 1.5
Circular accessories
Adaptors for flexible cable protection systems (conduits)
Adaptors for flexible cable protections
systems that fit to the TRIM TRIO circular
connectors are available from cable
protection systems manufacturers (e.g.
PMA).
2 solutions are offered:
• UNEF Adaptors that fit directly onto the
connectors (left picture)
• METRIC Adaptors that fit onto the metal
cable clamp tubes as indicated on pages
43 and 44 (right picture)
These types of adaptors offer extra
protection to single wire applications
(electrical, coax, Fibre optic … etc.)
Note: the adaptors are not available from
Souriau. They must be ordered directly from
the manufacturers
Suitable for UTP-UTG-UT0-UT0W
0,8 ± 0,2
Clipper
Industrial Plastic Connectors
2
Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors
Connectors and interconnect systems for harsh environments
The company designs, manufactures and markets high performance interconnect solutions for severe environments from
industrial broadline and universal ranges to complex system with integrated functions:
filtering, high speed data transmission, hermetic seal, separation mechanism, remote handling, underwater mating, …
The dedicated end markets for SOURIAU’s products are aeronautical, defense-space and industrial.
Industrial
Railway
Geophysics
Manufacturing environment
Instrumentation
Automation & process
Civil & military aircraft
Helicopter
Weapon delivery system
Avionics
Military marine
Communications
Satellites
Launcher & missile
Aeronautical Equipment & system
SOURIAU was established in 1917 and has been created by successive acquisitions of the industrial, aeronautical, defense
and space activities of SOURIAU, JUPITER and BURNDY.
The Group’s products are engineered and manufactured in the USA and Dominican Republic, Europe and Morocco, Japan
and India, and sold by a worldwide sales and marketing organization, and in addition to SOURIAU’s offices,
a large network of licensed distributors and agents.
SOURIAU complies with most of national and international Quality Assurance Standards, production unit with ISO 14001.
3
Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors
Description/Features/Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Square flange receptacle and in-line receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Plug and backnut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Electrical thread backshell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Stamped and formed contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Machined contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
IP68 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
IP67 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Mated and unmated connectors (with backshells) overall dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Dimensions (receptacle and plug) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Manual crimping tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Automatic crimping tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Panel mounting/panel cut-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Wiring instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Assembly instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
General technical information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Contents
Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors
4
Presentation
CLIPPER is a plastic low cost range of
industrial connectors, UL & CSA approved.
Complementing SOURIAU product range
CLIPPER offers :
• a high sealing level :
- IP67 for the sealed plug (with o’ring
and mating seal)
- IP68 for the enhanced sealed plug
(with o’ring and a special mating seal).
This version allows a permanent waterproof
level when immersed at depths down
to 30 meters.
• a retention plate system allowing
insertion/extraction of the contacts without
the need for tooling,
• facilities to use trade backshells with the
electrical thread adaptor (PG).
CLIPPER range
is composed of :
• 4 sizes of shell in molded black
thermoplastic material
(size 1/2/3/4).
• 7 contact layouts
(4/9/14/18/26/31/40 contacts).
• #20, #16 contacts, machined or stamped
and formed, crimp, solder or PC tail
termination.
• An adaptor with electrical PG thread for PG
backshells.
• Backnut with grommet facilities.
Locked, the retention plate holds the contacts firmly in position
Unlocked, the retention plate allows
the insertion/extraction of contacts without tooling
Locked
plate
Unlocked
plate
Description
Retention plate principle
Features
Mechanical
• Monobloc shell and insulator in
thermoplastic material self-extinguishing to
UL 94 V0.
• 180° screw coupling with positive audible
safety latch.
• Scoop proof.
• Copper alloy contacts, machined or stamped
and formed
• plating : gold on active
part over nickel.
• Mechanical endurance :
- connector : 250 cycles mating / unmating,
- retention plate : 50 cycles mating /
unmating.
• Retention force :
- # 20 → 70 N
- # 16 → 90 N.
• Vibration :
- frequency range :
10-2000 Hz, 20 g
- 10 cycles in accordance with CEI 68-2-6
Electrical
• Withstand voltage : 1500 Vrms min or in
accordance with DIN 57110b.
• Contact resistance < 10 mW.
• Current rating per contact :
- machined contacts :
# 20 (7 Amps), # 16 (13 Amps)
- stamped and formed contacts :
# 20 (5 Amps), # 16 (10 Amps).
Environmental
• Sealing :
- up to IP68
• Working temperature :
-40°C to +125°C. (-40°F to +257°F)
• Resistance to salt spray :
- 48 h min
- > 1000 h (sealed mated connectors).
• Resistance to fluids :
- oil,
- petrol, fuel,
- lubricants
- other fluids : consult us.
Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors
5
CL1M1100 CL1R1100 CL1R1101 CL1R1102
CL1R2102
CL1R3102
CL1R4202
CL1R2101
CL1R3101
CL1R4201
CL1M1101 CL1M1102 CL1C1100 CL1C1101
CL1C1201
CL1C2101
CL1C2201
CL1C3101
CL1C3201
CL1C4101
CL1C1200
CL1C2100
CL1C2200
CL1C3100
CL1C3200
CL1C4100
CL1C4200
CL1M1202
CL1M2102
CL1M2202
CL1M3102
CL1M3202
CL1M4102
CL1M4202
CL1M1201
CL1M2101
CL1M2201
CL1M3101
CL1M3201
CL1M4101
CL1M4201
CL1R2100
CL1R3100
CL1R4200
CL1M1200
CL1M2100
CL1M2200
CL1M3100
CL1M3200
CL1M4100
CL1M4200
Receptacle
types without
contacts
Contacts
layouts
Unsealed receptacle
(without o’ring)
for
male
contacts
for
female
contacts
for
male
contacts
for
female
contacts
for
male
contacts
for
female
contacts
unsealed
for male
contacts
sealed
for male
contacts
Sealed receptacle
(with o’ring)
for use with
backshell
Sealed receptacle
(with o’ring and
panel gasket)
In-line
receptacle
Shell sizes
1
2
3
4
4 cts
# 16
9 cts
# 20
9 cts
# 16
14 cts
# 20
18 cts
# 16
31 cts
# 20
26 cts
# 16
40 cts
# 16
Available Style Square flange receptacle and in-line receptacle
Part number
CL1C4201
Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors
6
Part number
Grommet
Thrust ring
O ring
CL1P1100 CL1F1100
CL1F1200
CL1F1101
(IP67)
CL1F1103
(IP68)
CL1F1201
(IP67)
CL1F1203
(IP68)
CL111101
CL111201
CL112101
CL113101
CL113201
CL114101
CL114201
CL1F2101
(IP67)
CL1F2103
(IP68)
CL1F2201
(IP67)
CL1F2203
(IP68)
CL1F3101
(IP67)
CL1F3103
(IP68)
CL1F3201
(IP67)
CL1F3203
(IP68)
CL1F4101
(IP67)
CL1F4103
(IP68)
CL1F4201
(IP67)
CL1F4203
(IP68)
CL1P1101 CL111102
CL111000
CL112000
CL113000
CL111202
CL112102
CL113102
CL113202
CL114102
CL114202
CL1P2101
CL1P3101
CL1P4201
CL1F2100
CL1F2200
CL1F3100
CL1F3200
CL1F4100
CL1F4200
CL1P2100
CL1P3100
CL1P4200
Plug types
without
contacts
Contact
layouts
Unsealed plug
(without o’ring
and mating seal)
for
male
contacts
for
female
contacts
for
male
contacts
for
female
contacts
for
male
contacts
for
female
contacts
for male
and female contacts
Sealed plug
(with o’ring
and mating seal)
Sealed backnut Unsealed backnut
Shell sizes
1
2
3
4
4 cts
# 16
9 cts
# 20
9 cts
# 16
14 cts
# 20
18 cts
# 16
31 cts
# 20
26 cts
# 16
40 cts
# 16
Plug and backnut
CL114000
Unsealed (IP40)
Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors
7
Note : Electrical thread backshells are always supplied complete with the adaptor.
Part numbers
Description 1 2 3 4
(PG 13,5) (PG 16) (PG 21) (PG 36) (PG 36)
Straight
backshell
for flexible CL101040 CL102040 CL103040 CL124040 CL104040
conduit
systems
Straight
cable CL101030 CL102030 CL103030 CL124030 -
clamp
Sealed
Part numbers
Description 1 2 3 4
(PG 13,5) (PG 16) (PG 21) (PG 36) (PG 36)
Elbow
backshell
with sealing
CL101051 CL102051 CL103051 CL124051 -
gland
Straight
backshell
for flexible CL101041 CL102041 CL103041 CL124041 CL104041
conduit
systems
Antidecoupling
sealing CL101021 CL102021 CL103021 CL124021 CL104021
gland
backshell
Electrical thread backshells (PG)
Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors
Shell Part number
1 CL141001
2 CL142001
3 CL143001
4 CL144001
Dim. (inches) / Shell sizes A B C D E
1 .84 .96 1.52 .13 1.15
2 .97 1.10 1.56 .13 1.21
3 1.12 1.20 1.69 .15 1.40
4 1.44 1.55 1.95 .15 1.87
90° sealed adaptors for receptacles Shell 1 to 4
* with panel gasket
Shell
Part numbers
Sealed*
1 CL131001
2 CL132001
3 CL133001
4 CL134001
IP67 Dust cap for receptacle
90° adaptors for receptacles
Accessories
8
90° adaptors for receptacles
Panel gasket (for square flange receptacle)
Shell sizes 1 2 3 4
Part numbers CL191001 CL192001 CL193001 CL194001
Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors
9
Assembly
male
2 mm to 3 mm
(0.08" to 0.12")
female
16 0.7 to 1.5 mm2
male
female
CF16PC10RF
CF16SC10RF
CF16PC18RF
CF16SC18RF
Bulk
Reel
5,000
pcs.
male
1.2 mm
to 2.1 mm
(0.05" to 0.08")
female
female
20 0.35 to 0.6 mm2
male
CF10PC10RF
CF10SC10RF
CF10PC18RF
CF10SC18RF
Bulk
Reel
5,000
pcs.
Filler plug # 16 Part number : 8500 479 CL
(for un-used contact cavities)
Polarization Contact Part number : CP16SW9700
(instruction for polarizing
connector - see page 23)
Filler plug # 20 Part number : 8500 4144
(for un-used contact cavities)
18 to 16
22 to 20
CM16PT10LY
CM10PT10LY
16
20
male
male
Bulk
Print Circuit (PC) Tail Machined Contact
Admissible
section mm2
AWG
Ø mm over
insulation (inches)
Part numbers Size
Crimp Contact
with strain relief
Packaging
Plating RF : gold flash on active part for standard version (For other platings, consult FCI)
Stamped and formed contacts
Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors
10
CM16PC10MQ
CM16PC20MQ*
CM16SC10MQ
CM16SC20MQ*
CM16PS10MQ
CM16SS10MQ
Part numbers
CM16PC10MQ
CM16SC10MQ
CM16PS10MQ
CM16SS10MQ
CM10PS10MQ
male
female
male
female
Plating MQ : 0.4μ mm gold on active part (.016μ inches) * Up to 1.91 mm2
Packaging
male
female
male CM16PC20MQ
female CM16SC20MQ
male CM10PC20MQ
female CM10SC20MQ
Bulk
solder
8501 9641
8501 9642 CL
16
20
male
male
Bulk
Extended ground contact-crimp (Length + .039 inch = +1 mm)
0.08" to 0.12" 18 to 14
0.05" to 0.08" 24 to 18
2 mm to 3 mm
16 (0.08" to 0.12")
0.93
to 1.91 mm2
16 2 to 3 mm
(0.08" to 0.12") 20
0.21
to 0.60 mm2
1.2 to 2.1 mm
(0.05" to 0.08") 30 to 24
0.06
to 0.21 mm2 20
Contact types Size
Ø mm over
insulation (inches)
Admissible
section mm2
male
female
CM10PC10MQ
CM10SC10MQ
20 1.2 mm to 2.1 mm
(0.05" to 0.08")
18 to 14
AWG
0.21
to 0.93 mm2
crimp
male
female
CM16PC00MQ
CM16SC00MQ
16 2 mm to 3 mm
(0.08" to 0.12")
0.93
to 2.60 mm2
crimp
solder
crimp
CM10SS10MQ
14*
Max
24 to 18
18 Max
18 to 13
Machined contacts
Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors
11
IP68 Configuration (temporary water tightness down to 100 feet)
IP68 Configuration
Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors
Part numbers
CL1C2201
CL1C4201
CL1C4101
CL1C3201
CL1C3101
CL1C2101
CL1C1201
CL1C1101
CL101021
(pg 13.5)
CL1F1103
CL1F1203
CL1F2103
CL1F2203
CL1F3103
CL1F3203
CL1F4103
CL1F4203
CL1M1102
CL1M1202
CL1M2102
CL1M2202
CL1M3102
CL1M3202
CL1M4102
CL1M4202
for male
contacts
Sealed receptacle
(with o’ring and
panel gasket)
for female
contacts
Sealed plug
(with o’ring
and mating seal)
Anti-decoupling sealing
gland backshell
CL102021
(pg 16)
CL103021
(pg 21)
CL124021
(pg 29)
Shell types
(without
contacts)
and
Backshell
type
Contacts
layouts
Shell sizes
1
2
3
4
4 cts
# 16
9 cts
# 20
9 cts
# 16
14 cts
# 20
18 cts
# 16
31 cts
# 20
26 cts
# 16
40 cts
# 16
for male
contacts
o’ring
Sealed In-line
receptacle
IP68 Configuration
CL104021
(pg 36)
12
IP67 Configuration (temporary water tightness)
Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors
IP67 Configuration
13
Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors
Part numbers
CL1F2201
CL1F4101
CL1F3201
CL1F3101
CL1F2101
CL1F1201
CL1F1101 CL1C1101
CL1C1201
CL1C2101
CL1C2201
CL1C3101
CL1C3201
CL1C4101
CL1M1102
CL1M1202
CL1M2102
CL1M2202
CL1M3102
CL1M3202
CL1M4102
Sealed receptacle
(with o’ring and
panel gasket)
for
male
contacts
Sealed plug
(with o’ring
and mating seal)
o’ring
Sealed In-line
receptacle
CL1M1102 CL1R1102 CL1P1101
CL1P2101
CL1P3101
CL1P4201
CL1R2102
CL1R3102
CL1R4202 CL1F4201
CL1M2102
CL1M3102
CL1M4202
Shell types
without
contacts
Contact
layouts
for
male
contacts
for
female
contacts
Shell sizes
1
2
3
4
4 cts
# 16
9 cts
# 20
9 cts
# 16
14 cts
# 20
18 cts
# 16
31 cts
# 20
26 cts
# 16
40 cts
# 16
for
male
contacts
for
female
contacts
IP67 Configuration
CL1C4201
14
Part numbers
Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors
Grommet
Thrust ring
O ring
CL111102 CL111101
CL111201
CL112101
CL113101
CL113201
CL114101
CL114201
CL101051
(pg 13.5)
CL101041
(pg 13.5)
CL101021
(pg 13.5)
CL102021
(pg 16)
CL103021
(pg 21)
CL124021
(pg 29)
CL124051
(pg 29)
CL124041
(pg 29)
CL111202
CL112102
CL113102
CL113202
CL114102
CL114202
CL102051
(pg 16)
CL102041
(pg 16)
CL103051
(pg 21)
CL103041
(pg 21)
CL104041
(pg 36)
Backshell
types
Contact
layouts
for
male
contacts
for
female
contacts
Elbow backshell
with sealing gland
Straight backshell for
flexible conduit systems
Anti-decoupling sealing
gland backshell
Sealed backnut
Shell sizes
1
2
3
4
4 cts
# 16
9 cts
# 20
9 cts
# 16
14 cts
# 20
18 cts
# 16
31 cts
# 20
26 cts
# 16
40 cts
# 16
IP67 Configuration
CL104021
(pg 36)
15
Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors
LD
LV
A
B
ADAPTOR
BACKNUT
C
STRAIGHT CABLE CLAMP
D
J
STRAIGHT BACKSHELL FOR CONDUIT SYSTEM
F
SEALING GLAND BACKSHELL WITH ANTI-DECOUPLING SYSTEM
G
ELBOW BACKSHELL WITH SEALING GLAND
KL
R
N
Q
* For other needs, consult FCI.
Dimensions
1 2 3 4
(PG 29)(PG 36)
LDA 2.01 2.09 2.09 2.17 2.17
LVA 2.29 2.33 2.33 2.41 2.41
LDB 1.81 1.85 1.85 - 1.85
LVB 2.09 2.09 2.09 - 2.09
LDC 2.68 2.85 3.03 3.41 -
LVC 2.97 3.09 3.27 3.60 -
LDD 3.41 3.50 3.62 3.70 4.25
LVD 3.70 3.74 3.86 3.94 4.47
LDF 3.15 3.27 3.35 3.74 4.02
LVF 3.43 3.50 3.58 3.98 4.25
LDG 3.31 3.46 3.77 4.29 -
LVG 3.58 3.70 4.01 4.52 -
R Max. 2.24 2.34 2.87 3.58 -
Dim. (inches)
Shell
Cable acceptance*
1 2 3 4
(PG 29) (PG 36)
J .24/.55 .24/.63 .31/.83
.39/
-
1.10
Conduit L .67 .67 .91 1.14 1.42
Pmaflex
K Max .63 .63 .85 1.08 1.42
N .24/47 .39/.55 .51/.71 .71/.98
.87/
1.26
Q .24/.47 .39/.55 .51/.71 .71/.98 -
Dim.
(inches)
Shell
Mated and unmated connectors with backshells
Overall dimensions in inches
16
Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors
17
Square flange receptacle Plug
Dimensions in inches
1 2 3 4
A .8 .8 .8 .8
B 1.15 1.28 1.46 1.92
C .81 .94 1.12 1.57
D 1.52 1.56 1.56 1.56
Dim.
(inches)
Shell
sizes
1 2 3 4
A 1.67 1.67 1.67 1.67
B .83 .96 1.14 1.59
C .71 .71 .71 .71
D .16 .16 .16 .16
E .81 .94 1.12 1.57
F 1.17 1.23 1.42 1.89
G
min. .83 .96 1.11 1.43
Max. .92 .98 1.17 1.57
H .13 .13 .15 .15
Dim.
(inches)
Shell
sizes
Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors
• Squeeze the plier handles until a final click sounds, release, the pliers should
open by themselves.
• Fully insert the contact into the locator (corresponding gauge), the contact
crimping lugs should be directed upwards, according to the drawing.
• Put the stripped wire in the crimping part until it comes in contact with the
stopper plate. Make sure that no strands stick out of the crimping part.
• Squeeze the plier handles until a final click sounds, release, the pliers should
open by themselves.
• Check the overall aspect of the crimping.
• Push the cable into the contact barrel and make sure the cable strands stick out
of the inspection hole.
• The pliers must be used on the jaws side.
• Squeeze the plier handles until a final click sounds, release, the pliers should
open by themselves.
• Insert both wire and contact (or wire, reducing sleeve and contact) between the
4 jaws until stopped by the locator.
• Fully squeeze until a final click sounds, the pliers should open once the crimping
is performed
• Extract the wire and crimped contact, then check the overall aspect of the
crimping.
Stamped and Formed Contacts
(#16 and #20)
Y16SCMCL3
Machined Crimping Contacts
(#16 and #20)
8365
with
locator
8365-02
Manual Crimping Tool
18
Crimping Mechanism
(left side miniapplicators)
Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors
UTM2
Automatic crimping tool
for Clipper
Description
Electromechanical high speed semi automatic
press is designed for mass production and is
realized totally in assembled steel parts.
Voltage: 115VAC - 60 Hz
Power.: 700 Watts
Weight: 300 lbs. (including one
crimp mechanism)
Dimensions: 939.8x533.4x711.2 mm
(37.0"x21.0"x28.0")
Contacts AWG Contact P/N Crimp Mech. P/N
16 16-18 CF16 PS 18RF CM30-R
CF16 SC 18RF
20 20-22 CF10 PS 18RF CM31-R
CF10 SC 18RF
Press and crimping mechanism are rental.
Please contact Customer Service.
Automatic crimping tool
19
Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors
20
Panel mounting
There are two types of mounting possible: through the front or through
the back of the panel.
Panel cut-out
• For a sealed mounting, the seal gasket shall be used, making sure the
surface is in good condition.
• Observe the drilling hole diameters indicated below.
• Use the recommended screws :
M3 (all shells)
or # 4.40 (shells 1 and 2)
# 6.32 (shells 3 and 4)
• Respect the coupling torques indicated M3
(all shells) : 0.70 N.m Max
Rear Mounting
.157" max
(4 mm max)
Front Mounting
.157" max
(4 mm max)
Panel mounting / Panel cut-out
1 2 3 4
H .85 .98 1.22 1.61
I .84 .97 1.13 1.44
J .13 .13 .15 .15
Dim.
(inches)
Shell
sizes
Wire Stripping Length
• With machined crimping contacts • With stamped and formed crimping contacts
Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors
21
Jacketed Cable Stripping Length
Make a 90° cut at the cable end.
carefully make an incision in order to remove the cable protection on a
length LD as described.
Caution : This operation should be realized without deterioration
of wires insulation.
Then, follow the normal stripping instructions :
- single wire with machined crimping contacts,
- single wire with stamped and formed crimping contacts
Stripping Instructions
Use the upmost care with stripping operation :
• Use stripping pliers appropriate for the cable gauge and which are in perfect condition.
• In order to obtain a correct crimping and to maintain all of the connector sealing characteristics, the wires must have the dimensions described below.
l
Shell
size 1 2 3 4
layouts Indifferent 26 40
LD mm 60 65 65 80 100
(inch) (2.36’) (2.56’) (2.56’) (3.15") (3.94")
Contact
size I = Wire stripping lenght
layouts 6 mm (.236")
#20 Ø over insulation > 2 mm l = 5 (> .08" l = .20")
Ø over insulation > 2 mm l = 7 (> .08" l = .27")
Contact
diameter I = Wire stripping lenght
#16 4 mm (.157")
#20 4 mm (.157")
Wiring Instruction
Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors
22
Instruction For Assembly
Insertion and extraction of contacts
Single wires
Contact insertion and extraction is performed without a tool thanks to te retainer plate system.
Insertion
1) With the thumb and index finger, squeeze the
retainer plate flaps and pull backwards : the plate is
then in
the unlocked position.
2) Fully insert the wired contact in the cavity.
3) Repeat the same procedure for the other contacts.
4) Once again squeeze the retainer plate flaps and
push forwards: the plate is then locked and retains
the contacts (90 N of retention force for contacts of
1.6 mm dia.)
5) The plate can only be pushed backed if the
contacts are correctly engaged (backup security)
Extraction
1) With the thumb and index finger, squeeze the
retainer plate flaps and pull backwards : the plate is
then in
the unlocked position.
2) Pull the contact wire: the the contact comes out of
the cavity.
3) Repeat the same procedure for the other contacts.
Special case of jacketed cables
1) Locate the first contact and the corresponding cavity.
2) The wire should described a buckle as describe below.
3) Unlock the retainer plate as described above.
4) Fully insert the wired contact in the cavity.
5) Respect the same procedure for the other contacts
6) Once again squeeze the retainer plate flaps and push forwards : the
plate is then locked
Special case of jacketed cables
7) Manually fully screw the adaptor and the backshell on the connector.
Caution : In the sealed version don’t forget the O-ring.
8) Push forwards the cable of 10 mm in the backshell.
9) Fully screw on the backshell with a wrench while keeping the adaptor
with another wrench.
Note : The plate can only be pushed back if the contacts are correctly
engaged (backup- security)
Adaptor and PG electrical thread backshells
The CLIPPER connector must be equipped with an adaptor in order
to use a PG electrical thread backshell (e.g.: cable clamp or sealing
gland, or flexible conduits system backshells, etc.)
1) Manually, fully screw the adaptor on the
connector, the hexagonal nut towards the
rear.
2) In the sealed version, cover the
O-ring.
3) Manually, fully screw the PG thread backshell
of your choice.
Note: In the case of an elbow backshell, it is
possible to adjust the position according to the
angle desired.
1) Position the O-ring at the bottom of the backnut.
2) Run the backnut around the cable.
3) Unlock the retainer plate.
4) Position the grommet in the thrust ring, resting against the
retainer plate.
5) Insert the contacts through the grommet and the retainer plate.
6) Lock the retainer plate.
7) Screw the backshell.
Instruction For Assembly
Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors
23
When the insert is partially filled with contacts, place polarization
contact into selected hole location in the FEMALE INSERT and
push in until seated.
• Polarization contacts are used to provide keying capabilities for
the CLIPPER series.
• Polarization contacts are used in the socket-cavities of standard
plugs and reverse receptacles.
In order to lock the couple of chosen connectors, you have to let
free the cavity in front of the polarization contact.
To avoid the connection with other connectors, you have to insert a
contact in the cavity in front of the polarization contact.
Heat shrink boot
Shrink sleeve as follows :
1) Use heat gun with an air deflector nozzle.
2) Adjust air deflector opening to accommodate tubing size. Turn
switch ON. Wait until full heat output is reached.
3) Position the air deflector over section of tubing to be shrunk.
Start at pre-shrunk section and work towards open end.
4) When tubing begins to shrink, move gun so that air is distributed
in a band around the tubing circumference causing it to shrink
evenly around the cable.
5) Move nozzle to adjacent section and shrink in the same manner.
Repeat process on section at a time until entire length is shrunk.
Avoid excessive heat. Direct heat away from connector assembly
to prevent damage.
Instruction
for polarizing connector mounting
CP16SW9700
Grommet Backshell Assembly
Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors
EXAMPLE : IP66-5 means: - Total protection against dust
- Proof against temporary flooding
- Proof against impact strength of 2 Joule
Degree of protection in accordance with CEI 529, DIN 40050, NF EN 60529
General technical information
24
Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors
Conversion Table
(mm) (inches)
8.2 0.32308
8.4 0.33096
8.6 0.33884
8.8 0.34672
9.0 0.35460
9.2 0.36248
9.4 0.37036
9.6 0.37824
9.8 0.38612
10.0 0.39400
10.5 0.41370
11.0 0.43340
11.5 0.45310
12.0 0.47280
12.5 0.49250
13.0 0.51220
13.5 0.53190
14.0 0.55160
14.5 0.57130
15.0 0.59100
15.5 0.61070
16.0 0.63040
16.5 0.65010
17.0 0.66980
17.5 0.68950
18.0 0.70920
18.5 0.72890
19.0 0.74860
19.5 0.76830
20.0 0.78800
20.5 0.80770
21.0 0.82740
21.5 0.84710
22.0 0.86680
22.5 0.88650
23.0 0.90620
23.5 0.92590
24.0 0.94560
24.5 0.96530
25.0 0.98500
25.5 1.00470
26.0 1.02440
26.5 1.04410
27.0 1.06380
27.5 1.08350
28.0 1.10320
28.5 1.12290
29.0 1.14260
29.5 1.16230
30.0 1.18200
30.5 1.20170
31.0 1.22140
31.5 1.24110
32.0 1.26080
32.5 1.28050
33.0 1.30020
33.5 1.31990
34.0 1.33960
34.5 1.35930
35.0 1.37900
35.5 1.39870
36.0 1.41840
36.5 1.43810
37.0 1.45780
37.5 1.47750
(°C) (°F)
- 70 - 94
- 65 - 85
- 55 - 67
- 50 - 58
- 40 - 40
0 32
37 98.6
80 176
125 257
150 302
170 338
200 392
250 482
(1) 6145DJ - Câbles multipaires (armés, paires blindées) 250 MZH.
(2) 6145DJ - Câbles multipaires (armés, paires non blindées) 250 MZH.
(mm) (inches)
0.1 0.00394
0.2 0.00788
0.3 0.01182
0.4 0.01576
0.5 0.01970
0.6 0.02364
0.7 0.02758
0.8 0.03152
0.9 0.03546
1.0 0.03940
1.1 0.04334
1.2 0.04728
1.3 0.05122
1.4 0.05516
1.5 0.05910
1.6 0.06304
1.7 0.06698
1.8 0.07092
1.9 0.07486
2.0 0.07880
2.1 0.08274
2.2 0.08668
2.3 0.09062
2.4 0.09456
2.5 0.09850
2.6 0.10244
2.7 0.10638
2.8 0.11032
2.9 0.11426
3.0 0.11820
3.1 0.12214
3.2 0.12608
3.3 0.13002
3.4 0.13396
3.5 0.13790
3.6 0.14184
3.7 0.14578
3.8 0.14972
3.9 0.15366
4.0 0.15760
4.1 0.16154
4.2 0.16548
4.3 0.16942
4.4 0.17336
4.5 0.17730
4.6 0.18124
4.7 0.18518
4.8 0.18912
4.9 0.19306
5.0 0.19700
5.2 0.20488
5.4 0.21276
5.6 0.22064
5.8 0.22852
6.0 0.23640
6.2 0.24428
6.4 0.25216
6.6 0.26004
6.8 0.26792
7.0 0.27580
7.2 0.28368
7.4 0.29156
7.6 0.29944
7.8 0.30732
8.0 0.31520
(mm) (inches)
38.0 1.49720
38.5 1.51690
39.0 1.53660
39.5 1.55630
40.0 1.57600
40.5 1.59570
41.0 1.61540
41.5 1.63510
42.0 1.65480
42.5 1.67450
43.0 1.69420
43.5 1.71390
44.0 1.73360
44.5 1.75330
45.0 1.77300
45.5 1.79270
46.0 1.81240
46.5 1.83210
47.0 1.85180
47.5 1.87150
48.0 1.89120
48.5 1.91090
49.0 1.93060
49.5 1.95030
50.0 1.97000
51.0 2.00940
52.0 2.04880
53.0 2.08820
54.0 2.12760
55.0 2.16700
56.0 2.20640
57.0 2.24580
58.0 2.28520
59.0 2.32460
60.0 2.36400
61.0 2.40340
62.0 2.44280
63.0 2.48220
64.0 2.52160
65.0 2.56100
66.0 2.60040
67.0 2.63980
68.0 2.67920
69.0 2.71860
70.0 2.75800
71.0 2.79740
72.0 2.83680
73.0 2.87620
74.0 2.91560
75.0 2.95500
80.0 3.15200
85.0 3.34900
90.0 3.54600
100.0 3.94000
200.0 7.88000
400.0 15.76000
600.0 23.64000
800.0 31.52000
1000.0 39.40000
1200.0 47.28000
1600.0 63.04000
2000.0 78.80000
3200.0 126.08000
bar psi mmHg
(torr)
10 145.0 7600
5 72.5 3800
2 29.0 1520
1 14.5 760
0.5 7.2 380
0.1 1.4 76
mbar psi torr
(mmHg)
10 145.0 7600
5 72.5 3800
2 29.0 1520
1 14.5 760
0.5 7.2 380
0.1 1.4 76
25
Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors
26
Notes
Clipper Industrial Plastic Connectors
27
Notes
www.souriau.com
FSOURIAUCLIPPERJANVIER2007E © Copyright SOURIAU - Réalisation En Toute Transparence.
UTS Series
Dynamic IP68/69K • UV Resistant • UL/IEC Compliant
© 2011 – SOURIAU 3
How to read our catalogue ........................................ 06
UTS range overview ..................................................... 07
General technical characteristics ............................. 10
Cable assembly ............................................................... 14
2 contacts ....................................................................... 20
2 + ground contacts ................................................... 28
3 contacts ........................................................................ 36
3 + ground contacts .................................................... 52
4 contacts ........................................................................ 60
5 contacts ........................................................................ 72
6 contacts ........................................................................ 76
6 + ground contacts .................................................... 88
7 contacts ........................................................................ 92
8 contacts ........................................................................ 96
10 contacts ..................................................................... 104
12 contacts ...................................................................... 108
14 contacts ...................................................................... 116
15 contacts ...................................................................... 120
18 contacts ..................................................................... 124
19 contacts ..................................................................... 128
23 contacts ..................................................................... 132
32 contacts ..................................................................... 136
Contents
UTS Series
Overview
Mechanics
Description ...................................................................... 142
Contact plating selector guide .................................. 143
Contact selector guide ................................................ 144
Packaging ........................................................................ 144
Crimp contacts ............................................................... 145
#16 coaxial contacts ................................................... 147
PCB contacts .................................................................. 148
Fibre optic contacts ...................................................... 149
Contacts
Tooling .............................................................................. 154
Assembly instruction .................................................... 156
Dimensions overmoulded harnesses ..................... 162
Extraction tools .............................................................. 162
Rated current & working voltage .............................. 163
UV resistance ................................................................. 164
UL94 + UL1977 ............................................................ 165
IEC 61984 with IP code explanation ...................... 168
What is NEMA rating ? ................................................ 170
Ethernet for the layman ............................................... 171
Technical information
#16 coaxial contacts - cabling notices .................. 176
Glossary of terms .......................................................... 183
Discrimination/Keying methods ............................... 184
Part number Index.......................................................... 185
Appendices
Appendices Technical information Contacts Mechanics Overview
UTS Series
© 2011 – SOURIAU 5
Overview
UTS Series
How to read our catalog .............................................................................................................. 06
UTS range overview ...................................................................................................................... 07
General technical characteristics .............................................................................................. 10
6 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
Overview
SOURIAU is pleased to announce the arrival of a brand new catalog
containing some signifi cant improvements to simplify the connector selection
process and provide easy access to key information. In this version you can
see all layouts at a glance, download 2D drawings and 3D models.
Then, when your choice is made, you can click on the part number and buy
online.
Step 3
Step 2
Easy access to supporting material such as prints and CAD models. In just two pages
you can gather together details of all accessories, contacts, tools etc required for
your application.
Interactive zones. Clearer understanding of the range.
Step 1
© 2011 – SOURIAU 7
UTS range overview
The UTS series is a plastic connector
range but rugged enough to withstand
industrial applications.
The philosophy of the UTS series is built around three key elements:
Dynamic IP68/69K UV Resistant UL/IEC Compliant
In most applications, our connectors are
exposed to extreme climatic conditions;
it was therefore key for us to select the
materials best able to cope with the
targeted environment.
Part of our product qualifi cation process
involved subjecting connectors to a
simulated fi ve years of exposure to various
elements including Temperature, UV and
Humidity.
The results were positive in that there
were no visible signs of weakness, such as
cracking or crazing.
The outmost priority for any electrical
installation is to protect personnel from any
shock hazard.
In North America, Underwriters Laboratories
insisted that connector manufacturers,
depending of the application, respect
their standards. The UTS series had thus
been qualifi ed and is certifi ed by this
organisation.
In Europe and in Asia, IEC standards are
better known and trusted by end users. Like
its American equivalent, the IEC refers to
safety rules. The UTS series was obviously
designed to respect these rules.
UTS series is rated at IP68/69K… even
in dynamic conditions. This means
that it remain sealed even when used
continuously underwater or cleaned using
a high pressure hose and cable is moving.
This extreme level of performance is
achievable with jacketed cable or discrete
wires.
If this same level of performance is
required even when connectors are not
mated, we have UTS Hi Seal; a product
designed to remain watertight if an
environmental cap is not fi tted or if the
equipment is likely to get wet when cables
have been disconnected.
Screw termination version
UTS series is a wide range...
Based on multiple power & signal connectors and offers
everything from box mounted receptacles and cable mounted
plugs to cable mounted in-line and PCB mounted receptacles.
Almost all ways to accommodate wires exist: Crimp, Solder,
Screw termination.
UTS Series
Overview
The bayonet coupling system makes it simple to use.
With only a 1/3 twist of the coupling ring, connectors are mated
with an audible and sensitive “click”.
Overview
8 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Just screw the wires
to the connector !
No special tools
required, use a
standard screwdriver
UTS screw
termination
UTS range
UTS discrete
wire sealing
See page 9
Sealed: IP68/69K
UV resistant
UL/IEC compliant
Corrosion-proof
Plastic housing
UTS Series
Plug
Corrosion-proof
Plastic housing
UTS Hi seal
Sealed
Unmated
Sealed unmated: IP68/69K
MIL-C-26482 compatible
UV resistant
UL/IEC compliant
Screw
termination
contact
Solder contact
Crimp
contact
• machined
• stamped and
formed
• coaxial
• fibre optics
UTS Series
Overview
© 2011 – SOURIAU 9
overview
Metal hold down clips
- to lock the connector easily on
the PCB and to release stress on
solder joints
- suitable for soldering in a
metalised hole
Pre-assembled PCB contacts
- machined or stamped versions
available
- different solder tails lengths
possible
- different plating options
Low profi le housing to
limit space between
panel and PCB
Stand-offs to allow
cleaning after
soldering
UTS PCB contacts
Receptacle
No fi ller
plug needed
Grommet
Containment
ring
Backnut
or Easy handling
backshell
UTS discrete wire sealing
Double
Sealing
UTS Series
Overview
Overview
10 © 2011 – SOURIAU
General technical
Mechanical
• Durability:
250 matings & unmatings per MIL-C-26482
• Vibration resistance (all UTS versions except UTS Screw
termination contacts):
Sinusoidal vibrations per CEI 60512-4 - from 10 to 2000 Hz
• Thermal shock:
5 cycles 30 min. from -40°C to 105°C per MIL-STD1344
method 1003
Environmental
• Operating temperature:
from -40°C to +105°C
40/100/21 per NFF 61-030
• Flammability rating:
UL94-V0 (all UTS except the Hi seal) - see page 165
UL94-HB (UTS Hi seal only) - see page 165
I2F3 according to NFF 16101 and NFF 16102
• Salt spray:
500 hours
• UV resistant:
No mechanical degradation or important variation of colour
after 5 years of exposure in natural environment (equivalence
exposure to sun and moisture as per ISO4892)
• Sealing:
- UTS Standard: IP68/IP69K (mated)
- UTS Hi seal: IP68/IP69K (mated and unmated)
- UTS Discrete wire sealing: IP67/69K (up to IP68 with easy
handling backshell)
- UTS Screw termination contacts: IP68/IP69K
Note: IPx8: 10m underwater during 1 week
• Fluid resistance:
- Gasoil
- Mineral oil
- Acid bath
- Basic bath
1
2
3
4
5
1
3
UTS Series
Overview
© 2011 – SOURIAU 11
characteristics
Material
• Body connector + Backshell:
Thermoplastic
• Insert:
- UTS Standard, UTS Discrete wire sealing, UTS Screw
termination contacts:
Thermoplastic
- UTS Hi seal handsolder & UTS Hi seal with PC tails contacts:
Elastomer
• Contacts:
See page 140
• Nut:
Metal
• Halogen free
• RoHS compliant & conform to the Chinese standard
SJ/T1166-2006 (Chinese RoHS equivalent)
• In accordance with:
- UL 1977:
Certifi cat ECBT2
File number: E169916
- CSA C22.2 n°182.3:
Certifi cat ECBT8
File number: E169916
Electrical
• See each layout page
1
2
4
5
UTS Series
Overview
Overview
UTS Series
© 2011 – SOURIAU 13
UTS Series
Mechanics
Cable assembly ................................................................................................. 14
2 contacts
8E2/8D2: 7A 32V ............................................................................................. 20
12E2/12D2: 16A 150V ............................................................................................ 24
2 contacts + ground
103: 16A 300V ............................................................................................ 28
142G1: 40A 300V ............................................................................................ 32
3 contacts
8E3/8D3: 7A 32V ............................................................................................. 36
8E3A/8E98
8D3A/8D98: 7A 50V ............................................................................................. 40
8E33/8D3.: 7A 50V ............................................................................................. 44
12E3/12D3: 16A 150V ............................................................................................ 48
3 contacts + ground
124 - 12E4/12D4: 16A 300V ............................................................................................ 52
183G1: 32A 300V ............................................................................................ 56
4 contacts
8E4/8D4: 7A 32V ............................................................................................. 60
102W2: 25A 150V ............................................................................................ 64
104: 13A 150V ............................................................................................ 68
5 contacts
14E5/14D5: 16A 150V ............................................................................................ 72
6 contacts
103W3: 5A 32V ............................................................................................. 76
106 - 10E6/10D6: 7A 32V ............................................................................................. 80
10E98/10D98: 7A 50V ............................................................................................. 84
6 contacts + ground
147 - 14E7: 16A 300V ............................................................................................ 88
7 contacts
10E7/10D7: 7A 50V ............................................................................................. 92
8 contacts
128: 10A 80V ............................................................................................. 96
12E8/12D8: 6A 32V ............................................................................................. 100
10 contacts
1210 - 12E10/12D10: 6A 50V ............................................................................................. 104
12 contacts
1412: 10A 63V ............................................................................................. 108
14E12/14D12: 4A 50V ............................................................................................. 112
14 contacts
12E14/12D14: 5A 32V ............................................................................................. 116
15 contacts
14E15/14D15: 4A 50V ............................................................................................. 120
18 contacts
14E18/14D18: 5A 50V ............................................................................................. 124
19 contacts
1419 - 14E19/14D19: 5A 32V ............................................................................................. 128
23 contacts
1823: 9A 63V ............................................................................................. 132
32 contacts
1832: 4A 32V ............................................................................................. 136
14 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OUTDOOR (black outer jacket)
INDOOR
Cable assembly
Souriau provides connectors in various applications for more than 90 years in the most extreme environment. Being conscious
about the diffi culty to fi nd a quick and a reliable harness manufacturer, we decided years ago to start in house cable
assembly production. It allows customers to reduce the number of suppliers, and to take advantage of the "best in class" quality of the
Souriau group. Overmoulding is a process that further enhances the sealing properties of the UTS range, especially over many years
of use. Overmoulding provides the opportunity to change the cable exit from straight through 90 degrees and avoid any stress on the cable
terminated to the connector. Also, as the wires are encapsulated inside the moulding, a barrier is created which prevents from any liquid from
entering the equipment through the connector if the cable jacket is breached.
UV resistance
Ambient temperature
PVC
PUR
PTFE
FEP
SILICON
TPE
70°C
Static installation
Static installation Static installation
Static
installation
Static installation
Static or dynamic
installation
Wet
Cleaner,
Immerged chlorine
90°C 180°C 205°C 260°C
Chemical agression
How to choose the outer jacket material
UTS Series
Mechanics
© 2011 – SOURIAU 15
Overmolding description
Discrete connector
Overmoulded connector
Compound
Thermoplastic insert
O ring Overmolding adapter
PVC or PUR
overmolding
...water ingress unhampered, leading to damage.
...prevents water ingress via capillary action.
If cable jacket is breached...
If cable jacket is breached...
UTS Series
Mechanics
Mechanics
16 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
Mechanics
Harnesses
Overmoulded harnesses, straight ending
Connector
type
Number
of ways
Voltage
Current
UL
Current
IEC
Harmonised cable
part number*
Part number (length: 1m.)
Male Female
UTS
standard
2+PE 600 V 44 A 40 A HO5 VV - F 3Gg10 HAUTS0V142G1PST100 HAUTS0V142G1SST100
2+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 3x1.5 HAUTS0V103PST100 HAUTS0V103SST100
3+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 3G1.5 HAUTS0V103PEPST100 HAUTS0V103PESST100
3+PE 250 V 24 A 32 A HO5 VV - F 40G0.5 HAUTS0V183G1PST100 HAUTS0V183G1SST100
3+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 4G1.5 HAUTS0V124PEPST100 HAUTS0V124PESST100
4 500 V 10 A 13 A HO5 VV - F 4x1.5 HAUTS0V104PST100 HAUTS0V104SST100
3 500 V 10 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 7G0.5 HAUTS0V103W3PST100 HAUTS0V103W3SST100
6 250 V 5 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V106PST100 HAUTS0V106SST100
6+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 7G1.5 HAUTS0V147PEPST100 HAUTS0V147PESST100
8 500 V 10 A 10 A HO5 VV - F 8x1.5 HAUTS0V128PST100 HAUTS0V128SST100
10 250 V 5 A 6 A HO5 VV - F 10G0.5 HAUTS0V1210PST100 HAUTS0V1210SST100
12 500 V 10 A 10 A HO5 VV - F 12x1.5 HAUTS0V1412PST100 HAUTS0V1412SST100
19 250 V 5 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 21G0.5 HAUTS0V1419PST100 HAUTS0V1419SST100
23 500 V 10 A 9 A HO5 VV - F 25G1.5 HAUTS0V1823PST100 HAUTS0V1823SST100
32 250 V 5 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 40G0.5 HAUTS0V1832PST100 HAUTS0V1832SST100
UTS
Hi seal
2 250 V 7 A 7 A H05 VV - F 2x0.5 HAUTS0V8E2PST100 HAUTS0V8E2SST100
2 650 V 13 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 2x1.5 HAUTS0V12E2PST100 HAUTS0V12E2SST100
3 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 3x0.5 HAUTS0V8E3PST100 HAUTS0V8E3SST100
3 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 3x0.5 HAUTS0V8E3APST100 HAUTS0V8E3ASST100
3 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 3x0.5 HAUTS0V8E33PST100 HAUTS0V8E33SST100
3 650 V 13 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 3x1.5 HAUTS0V12E3PST100 HAUTS0V12E3SST100
4 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 4x0.5 HAUTS0V8E4PST100 HAUTS0V8E4SST100
5 650 V 12 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 4G1.5 HAUTS0V14E5PST100 HAUTS0V14E5SST100
6 250 V 5 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V10E6PST100 HAUTS0V10E6SST100
6 250 V 6 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V10E98PST100 HAUTS0V10E98SST100
6+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 7G1.5 HAUTS0V14E7PEPST100 HAUTS0V14E7PESST100
7 250 V 6 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V10E7PST100 HAUTS0V10E7SST100
8 250 V 5 A 6 A HO5 VV - F 10G0.5 HAUTS0V12E8PST100 HAUTS0V12E8SST100
10 250 V 5 A 6 A HO5 VV - F 10G0.5 HAUTS0V12E10PST100 HAUTS0V12E10SST100
12 250 V 5 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 12G0.5 HAUTS0V14E12PST100 HAUTS0V14E12SST100
14 250 V 5 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 14G0.5 HAUTS0V12E14PST100 HAUTS0V12E14SST100
15 650 V 12 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 18G0.5 HAUTS0V14E15PST100 HAUTS0V14E15SST100
18 250 V 4 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 18G0.5 HAUTS0V14E18PST100 HAUTS0V14E18SST100
19 250 V 4 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 40G0.5 HAUTS0V14E19PST100 HAUTS0V14E19SST100
* see page 18
3 m & 5 m version available on demand
Eg: 3m HAUTS0V...300
5m HAUTS0V...500
© 2011 – SOURIAU 17
UTS Series
Mechanics
Harnesses
Overmoulded harnesses, right angle ending
Connector
type
Number
of ways
Voltage
Current
UL
Current
IEC
Harmonised cable
part number*
Part number (length: 1m.)
Male Female
UTS
standard
2+PE 600 V 44 A 40 A HO5 VV - F 3Gg10 HAUTS0V142G1PRA100 HAUTS0V142G1SRA100
2+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 3x1.5 HAUTS0V103PRA100 HAUTS0V103SRA100
3+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 3G1.5 HAUTS0V183G1PRA100 HAUTS0V183G1SRA100
3+PE 250 V 24 A 32 A HO5 VV - F 40G0.5 HAUTS0V183G1PRA100 HAUTS0V183G1SRA100
3+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 4G1.5 HAUTS0V124PEPRA100 HAUTS0V124PESRA100
4 500 V 10 A 13 A HO5 VV - F 4x1.5 HAUTS0V104PRA100 HAUTS0V104SRA100
3 500 V 10 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 7G0.5 HAUTS0V103W3PRA100 HAUTS0V103W3SRA100
6 250 V 5 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V106PRA100 HAUTS0V106SRA100
6+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 7G1.5 HAUTS0V147PEPRA100 HAUTS0V147PESRA100
8 500 V 10 A 10 A HO5 VV - F 8x1.5 HAUTS0V128PRA100 HAUTS0V128SRA100
10 250 V 5 A 6 A HO5 VV - F 10G0.5 HAUTS0V1210PRA100 HAUTS0V1210SRA100
12 500 V 10 A 10 A HO5 VV - F 12x1.5 HAUTS0V1412PRA100 HAUTS0V1412SRA100
19 250 V 5 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 21G0.5 HAUTS0V1419PRA100 HAUTS0V1419SRA100
23 500 V 10 A 9 A HO5 VV - F 25G1.5 HAUTS0V1823PRA100 HAUTS0V1823SRA100
32 250 V 5 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 40G0.5 HAUTS0V1832PRA100 HAUTS0V1832SRA100
UTS
Hi seal
2 250 V 7 A 7 A H05 VV - F 2x0.5 HAUTS0V8E2PRA100 HAUTS0V8E2SRA100
2 650 V 13 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 2x1.5 HAUTS0V12E2PRA100 HAUTS0V12E2SRA100
3 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 3x0.5 HAUTS0V8E3PRA100 HAUTS0V8E3SRA100
3 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 3x0.5 HAUTS0V8E3APRA100 HAUTS0V8E3ASRA100
3 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 3x0.5 HAUTS0V8E33PRA100 HAUTS0V8E33SRA100
3 650 V 13 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 3x1.5 HAUTS0V12E3PRA100 HAUTS0V12E3SRA100
4 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 4x0.5 HAUTS0V8E4PRA100 HAUTS0V8E4SRA100
5 650 V 12 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 4G1.5 HAUTS0V14E5PRA100 HAUTS0V14E5SRA100
6 250 V 5 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V10E6PRA100 HAUTS0V10E6SRA100
6 250 V 6 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V10E98PRA100 HAUTS0V10E98SRA100
6+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 7G1.5 HAUTS0V14E7PEPRA100 HAUTS0V14E7PESRA100
7 250 V 6 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V10E7PRA100 HAUTS0V10E7SRA100
8 250 V 5 A 6 A HO5 VV - F 10G0.5 HAUTS0V12E8PRA100 HAUTS0V12E8SRA100
10 250 V 5 A 6 A HO5 VV - F 10G0.5 HAUTS0V12E10PRA100 HAUTS0V12E10SRA100
12 250 V 5 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 12G0.5 HAUTS0V14E12PRA100 HAUTS0V14E12SRA100
14 250 V 5 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 14G0.5 HAUTS0V12E14PRA100 HAUTS0V12E14SRA100
15 650 V 12 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 18G0.5 HAUTS0V14E15PRA100 HAUTS0V14E15SRA100
18 250 V 4 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 18G0.5 HAUTS0V14E18PRA100 HAUTS0V14E18SRA100
19 250 V 4 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 40G0.5 HAUTS0V14E19PRA100 HAUTS0V14E19SRA100
* see page 18
3 m & 5 m version available on demand
Eg: 3m HAUTS0V...300
5m HAUTS0V...500
Mechanics
18 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
Mechanics
Standardization of European cable - DIN VDE 0281/DIN VDE 0282/DIN VDE 0292
1.
Basic type
2.
Working
voltage
3.
Insulating
4.
Sheathcladding
material
5.
Special
features
6.
Conductor
types
7.
Number of
conductors
8.
Protective
conductor
9.
Conductor
crosssectional
H:
Harmonized
Type
03:
300/300 V.
V:
PVC
V:
PVC
H:
Ribbon cable,
separable
U:
Single wire
X:
Without
protective
conductor
Area specifi ed
in mm2
A:
National Type
05:
300/500 V.
R:
Rubber
R:
Rubber
H2: Ribbon
cable
non-separable
R:
Multi-wire
G:
With
protective
conductor
07:
450/750 V.
S:
Silicone
Rubber
N:
Cloroprene
Rubber
K:
Fine wire
(permanently
installed)
J:
Glass-fi lament
braiding
F:
Fine wire
(fl exible)
T:
Textile
braiding
H:
Super fi ne wire
Y:
Tinsel strand
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Harmonized wire coding system
Example: Harmonized type, 300/500V, PVC insulating, PVC sheath- cladding, Fine wire, 3x1.5 cross-sectional: H05VVF3x1.5
Cable information
Range of temperature: Occasional fl exing: -5°C up to +70°C
Fixed installation: -40°C up to +80°C
Rated voltage: U0/U: 300/500 V
Wire section : Arrangement with #16 contact: wire section 1.5 mm²
Arrangement with #20 contact: wire section 0.5 mm²
Harmonized reference: H05 VVF XX
© 2011 – SOURIAU 19
UTS Series
Mechanics
Standardization of American cable
Nomenclature Key
Defi nitions of Cable Types
S: Service Grade (also means extra hard service when not followed by J, V, or P)
J: Hard Service
V: Vacuum cleaner cord (also light duty cable)
P: Parallel cord (also known as zip cord) – Always light duty
E: Thermoplastic Elastomer (UL/NEC designation ONLY)
O: Oil Resistant*
T: Thermoplastic
W: Outdoor-includes sunlight resistant jacket and wet location rated conductors (formerly "W-A")
H: Heater cable
VW-1: Flame retardant
FT2: Flame retardant
SVT: Thermoplastic insulated vacuum cleaner cord, with or without 3rd conductor for grounding purposes; 300V. (PVC)
SJT: Junior hard service, thermoplastic insulated conductors and jacket. 300V. (PVC)
SJTW: Same as SJT except outdoor rated. (PVC)
SJTO: Same as SJT but oil resistant outer jacket. (PVC)
SJTOW: Same as SJTO except outdoor rated. (PVC)
ST: Hard service cord with all thermoplastic construction, 600V. (PVC)
STW: Same as ST except outdoor rated. (PVC)
STO: Same as ST but with oil resistant outer jacket. (PVC)
STOW: Same as STO except outdoor rated. (PVC)
Mechanics
20 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR OR
WITH
Layout
Specifi cations
UTS Series
8E2/8D2
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.1) UTS08E2P UTS08E2S
Plug
Without (Fig.6) UTS68E2P UTS68E2S
Cable gland (Fig.7) UTS6JC8E2P UTS6JC8E2S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.3) UTS78E2P UTS78E2S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.2) UTS08D2P UTS08D2S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.5) UTS78D2P32 UTS78D2S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
withouthold down clip
Without (Fig.4) UTS78D2P UTS78D2S
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 21
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
UTS Series
8E2/8D2
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front view
11.7 11.7 20.7
Ø12
Ø12
15.3
2.4 2.4
Ø3.2
7.5 7.5 7.8
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
24.2
24.2
18
Ø12
3.5
3.4
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
18 4.2
Ø12
3.5
3.4
18
Ø12
3.5
3.4
Plug - UTS6
25.3
54
Fig. 7
Fig. 6
Ø22.5
Mated connector length
61.1
66.6
UTS7
UTS0
Drilling pattern
1.5
Ø13.5
Ø22
Ø17.7
15°
15°
Ø4
Ø3.1
1.5
Panel cut out
15.3
15.3
Ø3.3
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
13.7
14.6
Front mounting
Ø12.5
Rear mounting
Ø14.5
Mechanics
2 contacts
7A/32V
per IEC 61984
22 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Jam nut sealing caps Square fl ange sealing cap Plug protective cap
Accessories
Electrical characteristics
UL
7A 250V UL94 HB
CSA
7A 250V UL94 HB
IEC
7A 32V 1.5kV 3
UTS 8E2/8D2 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
6
10
18
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
12
14
16
2
4
8
Metal terminal IP40
Part number
UTS8DCGE
Part number
UTS68C
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS8DCG
Part number
UTS8DCGR
UTS Series
8E2/8D2
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005585A 85005594
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD11B
Gasket
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
© 2011 – SOURIAU 23
UTS Series
8E2/8D2
Mechanics
24 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR
WITH
OR
Layout
UTS Series
12E2/12D2
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.1) UTS012E2P UTS012E2S
Plug
Without (Fig.6) UTS612E2P UTS612E2S
Cable gland (Fig.7) UTS6JC12E2P UTS6JC12E2S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.3) UTS712E2P UTS712E2S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.2) UTS012D2P UTS012D2S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.5) UTS712D2P32 UTS712D2S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.4) UTS712D2P UTS712D2S
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 25
UTS Series
12E2/12D2
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
2 contacts
16A/150V
per IEC 61984
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front view
11.7 11.7 26.4
Ø19
Ø19
20.8
2.4 2.4
Ø3.2
7.5 7.5 7.8
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
Plug - UTS6 Mated connector length
25.3
66.7
75.3
81.7
Fig. 7
Fig. 6
Ø30.1
UTS7
UTS0
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
20.8
15.3
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
21.4
22.7
2.3
Ø22
Ø30.5
Ø26.2
30°
68°
10
Ø3.1
2.3
1.4
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 22°
Front mounting
Ø18.3
Rear mounting
Ø22.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
27.2
31.9
18 18 18
Ø19
Ø19
Ø19
3.5 3.5 3.5
3 3 3
4.2
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
Mechanics
26 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Metal terminal
UTS Series
12E2/12D2
Accessories
Metal terminal
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
10
20
30
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
Color coding rings
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS712CCRR UTS612CCRR
UTS712CCRY UTS612CCRY
UTS712CCRG UTS612CCRG
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Part number
UTS612DCG
Part number
UTS12DCGE
Jam nut sealing caps
Part number
UTS12DCG
Part number
UTS12DCGR
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005587A 85005596
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD13B
Gasket
Electrical characteristics
UL
13A 650V UL94 HB
CSA
13A 650V UL94 HB
IEC
16A 150V 2.5kV 3
UTS 12E2/12D2 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
1.31mm²
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
© 2011 – SOURIAU 27
UTS Series
12E2/12D2
Mechanics
28 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR OR
WITH
Layout
UTS Series
103
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Crimp
contacts supply
separately
see page 31
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig.1) UTS1JC103P UTS1JC103S
Plug
Without (Fig.2) UTS6103P UTS6103S
Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC103P UTS6JC103S
PCB
contacts supply
separately
see page 31
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.4) UTS7103P UTS7103S
© 2011 – SOURIAU 29
UTS Series
103
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
2 + ground
16A/300V
per IEC 61984
Free hanging - UTS1
70
Ø15.1
Fig. 1
Mated connector length - UTS7
77.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Fig. 4
18.3
12.3 27.2
22.5
Ø15.1
3.5
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
16.7
17.9
2.6 2.6
1.5 3
Plug - UTS6
Female
Male
Fig. 2 Fig. 3
33 63.2
25.3
Ø26.2
Ø26.2
Mechanics
30 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
103
Accessories and tooling
Crimp tooling
Contacts Contact size
Part number
of head
RM/RC 28M1K(1)
Standard contacts
#16
Ø 1.6mm
S16RCM20
RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16
RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450
RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14
SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11
RMDXK10D28K
Coaxial contacts
M10S-1J
RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DXK10D28 +
york090 M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J
(1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143
Jam nut sealing caps
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS10DCG
Part number
UTS10DCGR
Plug sealing cap
Part number
UTS610DCG
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005586A 85005595
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD12B
Gasket
Color coding rings
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS710CCRR UTS610CCRR
UTS710CCRY UTS610CCRY
UTS710CCRG UTS610CCRG
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
Handle Tool kit
Part number
TOOLKIT
Part number
SHANDLES
© 2011 – SOURIAU 31
Contacts
UTS Series
103
UL
10A 500V UL94 V-0
CSA
7A 500V UL94 V-0
IEC
16A 300V 4kV 3
Temperature elevation: 50°C
Electrical characteristics UTS 103 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
1.31mm²
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
0 20 40 60 80 100
0
3
5
8
10
13
15
18
20
23
25
28
30
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
120
#16 Contact type AWG
Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
Male Female insulator Ø
Crimp
Machined
30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1
26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6
22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8
22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2
20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2
16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2
16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2
Stamped & formed
reeled contacts
26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 -
22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 -
18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 -
18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 -
14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 -
PCB
Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - -
Coaxial
Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - -
Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Twisted pair Multipiece -
RMDXK10D28 +
york090
RCDXK1D28 +
york090 - -
Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Fiber
optic
POF contacts
Plastic optical fi bre
- RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - -
(1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143
(2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6
(3): For dimensions see page 148
Mechanics
2 + ground
16A/300V
per IEC 61984
32 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR
WITH
OR
OR
UTS Series
142G1
Specifi cations
Layout
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Crimp
contacts supplied
separately
see page 35
Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig. 1) UTS0142G1P
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig. 6) UTS1JC142G1P UTS1JC142G1S
Plug
Without (Fig. 3) UTS6142G1P UTS6142G1S
Cable gland (Fig. 4) UTS6JC142G1P UTS6JC142G1S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig. 2) UTS7142G1P UTS7142G1S
NPT threaded
receptacle
Without (Fig. 5) UTS7142G1SNPT
© 2011 – SOURIAU 33
UTS Series
142G1
NPT threaded receptacle - UTS7
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Plug - UTS6
Female
Male
Fig. 3 Fig. 4
33 70
25.3
Ø31.5
Ø35.1
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Free hanging - UTS1
70
Ø31.5
Fig. 6
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Fig. 2
18
1.6 35.1
30.4
Ø22.3
3.5
Panel cut out
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
24.15
25.55
Drilling pattern
3.6 3.6
2.1 4.2
Fig. 5
25.4
25.4
35.3
Ø22.3
23.1
NPT - 1/2˝
11.7
Ø19
2.4
7.5
Fig. 1
20.8
26.4
Ø3.2
Fig. 1 Front view
Mechanics
2 + ground
40A/300V
per IEC 61984
34 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
142G1
Accessories and tooling
Jam nut sealing caps
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS14DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGR
Hand tool
Part number
M317
Positioner + locator setting
Part number
VGE10078A
Extraction tool
Part number
51060210936
Plug sealing cap
Part number
UTS614DCG
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005588A 85005597
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD14B
Gasket
Color coding rings
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR
UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY
UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
© 2011 – SOURIAU 35
UL
44A 600V UL94 V-0
CSA
30A 600V UL94 V-0
IEC
40A 300V 4kV 3
Electrical characteristics UTS 142G1 derating curves
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
UTS Series
142G1
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
8.37mm²
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
5
Contacts
#8 Contact type AWG
Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
Male Female insulator Ø
Crimp
Machined
16 82913601A(1) 82913600A(1) -
6.5
14 82913603A(1) 82913602A(1) -
12 82913605A(1) 82913604A(1) -
10 82913607A(1) 82913606A(1) -
8 82913609A(1) 82913608A(1) -
(1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143
Mechanics
2 + ground
40A/300V
per IEC 61984
36 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
8E3/8D3
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.1) UTS08E3P UTS08E3S
Plug
Without (Fig.6) UTS68E3P UTS68E3S
Cable gland (Fig.7) UTS6JC8E3P UTS6JC8E3S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.3) UTS78E3P UTS78E3S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.2) UTS08D3P UTS08D3S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.5) UTS78D3P32 UTS78D3S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.4) UTS78D3P UTS78D3S
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 37
UTS Series
8E3/8D3
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
3 contacts
7A/32V
per IEC 61984
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front view
11.7 11.7 20.7
Ø12
Ø12
15.3
2.4 2.4
Ø3.2
7.5
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
7.5 7.8
Plug - UTS6
25.3
54
Fig. 7
Fig. 6
Ø22.5
Mated connector length
61.1
66.6
UTS7
UTS0
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
15.3
15.3
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
13.7
14.6
1.6
Ø13.5
Ø22
Ø17.7
15°
15°
Ø4
Ø3.1
1.6
1.9
0.9
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front mounting
Ø12.5
Rear mounting
Ø14.5
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
24.2
24.2
18
Ø12
3.5
3.4
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
18 4.2
Ø12
3.5
3.4
18
Ø12
3.5
3.4
Mechanics
38 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS 8E3/8D3 derating curves
UTS Series
8E3/8D3
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
6
10
18
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
12
14
16
2
4
8
Jam nut sealing caps Square fl ange sealing cap Plug protective cap
Accessories
Electrical characteristics
Metal terminal IP40
Part number
UTS8DCGE
Part number
UTS68C
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS8DCG
Part number
UTS8DCGR
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005585A 85005594
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD11B
Gasket
UL
7A 250V UL94 HB
CSA
7A 250V UL94 HB
IEC
7A 32V 1.5kV 3
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
© 2011 – SOURIAU 39
UTS Series
8E3/8D3
Mechanics
40 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
8E3A/8E98 - 8D3A/8D98
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.1)
UTS08E3AP UTS08E3AS
UTS08E98P UTS08E98S
Plug
Without (Fig.6)
UTS68E3AP UTS68E3AS
UTS68E98P UTS68E98S
Cable gland (Fig.7)
UTS6JC8E3AP UTS6JC8E3AS
UTS6JC8E98P UTS6JC8E98S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.3)
UTS78E3AP UTS78E3AS
UTS78E98P UTS78E98S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.2)
UTS08D3AP UTS08D3AS
UTS08D98P UTS08D98S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.5)
UTS78D3AP32 UTS78D3AS32
UTS78D98P32 UTS78D98S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.4)
UTS78D3AP UTS78D3AS
UTS78D98P UTS78D98S
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 41
UTS Series
8E3A/8E98 - 8D3A/8D98
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
24.2
24.2
18
Ø12
3.5
3
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
18 4.2
Ø12
3.5
3
18
Ø12
3.5
3
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front view
11.7 11.7 20.7
Ø12
Ø12
15.3
2.4 2.4
Ø3.2
7.5
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
7.5 7.8
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
15.3
15.3
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
13.7
14.6
1.6
Ø13.5
Ø22
Ø17.7
15°
15°
Ø4
Ø3.1
1.6
1.9
0.9
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front mounting
Ø12.5
Rear mounting
Ø14.5
Plug - UTS6 Mated connector length
25.3
54
Fig. 7
Fig. 6
Ø22.5
66.6
UTS7
UTS0
61.1
Mechanics
3 contacts
7A/50V
per IEC 61984
42 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
8E3A/8E98 - 8D3A/8D98
UTS 8E3A/98 - 8D3A/98 derating curves
Jam nut sealing caps Square fl ange sealing cap Plug protective cap
Accessories
Electrical characteristics
Metal terminal IP40
Part number
UTS8DCGE
Part number
UTS68C
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS8DCG
Part number
UTS8DCGR
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005585A 85005594
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD11B
Gasket
UL
7A 250V UL94 HB
CSA
7A 250V UL94 HB
IEC
7A 50V 1.5kV 3
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
6
10
18
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
12
14
16
2
4
8
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
© 2011 – SOURIAU 43
UTS Series
8E3A/8E98 - 8D3A/8D98
Mechanics
44 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
8E33/8D33
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.1) UTS08E33P UTS08E33S
Plug
Without (Fig.6) UTS68E33P UTS68E33S
Cable gland (Fig.7) UTS6JC8E33P UTS6JC8E33S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.3) UTS78E33P UTS78E33S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.2) UTS08D33P UTS08D33S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.5) UTS78D33P32 UTS78D33S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.4) UTS78D33P UTS78D33S
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 45
UTS Series
8E33/8D33
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
24.2
24.2
18
Ø12
3.5
3.4
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
18 4.2
Ø12
3.5
3.4
18
Ø12
3.5
3.4
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front view
11.7 11.7 20.7
Ø12
Ø12
15.3
2.4 2.4
Ø3.2
7.5
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
7.5 7.8
Plug - UTS6 Mated connector length
25.3
54
61.1
66.6
Fig. 7
UTS7
Fig. 6
Ø22.5
UTS0
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
15.3
15.3
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
13.7
14.6
1.6
Ø13.5
Ø22
Ø17.7
15°
15°
Ø4
Ø3.1
1.6
1.9
0.9
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front mounting
Ø12.5
Rear mounting
Ø14.5
Mechanics
3 contacts
7A/50V
per IEC 61984
46 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
8E33/8D33
UTS 8E33/8D33 de-rating curves
Jam nut sealing caps Square fl ange sealing cap Plug protective cap
Accessories
Electrical characteristics
Metal terminal IP40
Part number
UTS8DCGE
Part number
UTS68C
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS8DCG
Part number
UTS8DCGR
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005585A 85005594
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD11B
Gasket
UL
7A 250V UL94 HB
CSA
7A 250V UL94 HB
IEC
7A 50V 1.5kV 3
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
6
10
18
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
12
14
16
2
4
8
© 2011 – SOURIAU 47
UTS Series
8E33/8D33
Mechanics
48 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
12E3/12D3
OR
WITH
Specifi cations
OR
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.6) UTS012E3P UTS012E3S
Plug
Without (Fig.1) UTS612E3P UTS612E3S
Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC12E3P UTS6JC12E3S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.3) UTS712E3P UTS712E3S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.7) UTS012D3P UTS012D3S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.5) UTS712D3P32 UTS712D3S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.4) UTS712D3P UTS712D3S
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 49
UTS Series
12E3/12D3
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
27.2
31.9
18
Ø19
3.5
3
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
18 4.2
Ø19
3.5
3
18
Ø19
3.5
3
Plug - UTS6
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
66.7
Ø30.1
Ø30.1
25.3
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
11.7
Ø19
2.4
7.5
7.8
20.8
26.4
Ø3.2
Front view
75.3
81.7
UTS7
UTS0
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
20.8
20.8
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
21.4
22.7
2.3
Ø22
Ø30.5
Ø26.2
30°
68°
10
Ø3.1
2.3
2.8 1.4
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 22°
Front mounting
Ø18.3
Rear mounting
Ø22.3
7
Mechanics
3 contacts
16A/150V
per IEC 61984
50 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
12E3/12D3
Metal terminal
Accessories
Metal terminal
Color coding rings
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS712CCRR UTS612CCRR
UTS712CCRY UTS612CCRY
UTS712CCRG UTS612CCRG
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Part number
UTS612DCG
Part number
UTS12DCGE
Jam nut sealing caps
Part number
UTS12DCG
Part number
UTS12DCGR
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005587A 85005596
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD13B
Gasket
Electrical characteristics
UL
13A 650V UL94 HB
CSA
13A 650V UL94 HB
IEC
16A 150V 2.5kV 3
UTS 12E3/12D3 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
1.31mm²
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
10
30
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
20
© 2011 – SOURIAU 51
UTS Series
12E3/12D3
Mechanics
52 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
124 - 12E4/12D4
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Crimp
contacts supply
separately
see page 55
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.1) UTS0124P
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.5) UTS7124P UTS7124S
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig.13) UTS1JC124P UTS1JC124S
Plug
Without (Fig.11) UTS6124P UTS6124S
Cable gland (Fig.12) UTS6JC124P UTS6JC124S
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.3) UTS012E4P UTS012E4S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.10) UTS712E4P UTS712E4S
Plug Without (Fig.11) UTS612E4P UTS612E4S
Plug Cable gland (Fig.12) UTS6JC12E4P UTS6JC12E4S
Screw
contacts loaded
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.7 & 8) UTS7124PSCR UTS7124SSCR
Plug
Without (Fig.11) UTS6124PSCR UTS6124SSCR
Cable gland (Fig.12) UTS6JC124PSCR UTS6JC124SSCR
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig.13) UTS1JC124PSCR
PCB contacts supply
separately
see page 55
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.4) UTS0124P
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.6) UTS7124P UTS7124S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.2) UTS012D4P UTS012D4S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.9) UTS712D4P UTS712D4S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.9) UTS712D4P32 UTS712D4S32
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 53
UTS Series
124 - 12E4/12D4
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Hold
down clip
Male
Female
Fig. 6 Fig. 8 Fig. 10 Front view
Fig. 5 Fig. 7 Fig. 9
31.9
18 18 18 27.2
Ø19
Ø19
Ø19
3.5 3.5 3.5
2.4 2.4 4.2
3
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
11.7 11.7 11.7
Ø19
Ø19
Ø19
20.8
26.4
2.4 2.4
4
2.4
7.5
9.1
7.5
Ø3.2
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Front view
Fig. 2
Fig. 1
7.5 7.8
Free hanging - UTS1 / Plug - UTS6 Mated connector length
25.3
74
66.7
Fig. 13
Fig. 11 Fig. 12
Ø30.1
75.3
81.7
UTS7
UTS0
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
20.8
20.8
Front mounting
Ø18.3
Ø3.3
Rear mounting
Ø22.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
21.4
22.7
3.1
Ø22
Ø30.5
Ø26.2
30°
68°
10
Ø3.1
3.1
3.1 3.1
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 22°
Mechanics
3 + ground
16A/300V
per IEC 61984
54 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Accessories and tooling
(1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143
Metal terminal
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
UTS Series
124 - 12E4/12D4
Crimp tooling
Contacts Contact size
Part number
of head
RM/RC 28M1K(1)
Standard contacts
#16
Ø 1.6mm
S16RCM20
RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16
RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450
RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14
SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11
RMDXK10D28K
Coaxial contacts
M10S-1J
RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DXK10D28 +
york090 M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J
Jam nut sealing caps
Part number
UTS12DCG
Part number
UTS12DCGR
Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Part number
UTS612DCG
Part number
UTS12DCGE
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005587A 85005596
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD13B
Gasket
Color coding rings
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS712CCRR UTS612CCRR
UTS712CCRY UTS612CCRY
UTS712CCRG UTS612CCRG
Handle Tool kit
Part number
TOOLKIT
Part number
SHANDLES
Metal terminal
© 2011 – SOURIAU 55
UL
10A 500V UL94 V-0
CSA
7A 500V UL94 V-0
IEC
16A 300V 4kV 3
Temperature elevation: 50°C
UTS Series
124 - 12E4/12D4
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
10
30
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
20
18
15
13
28
25
23
8
5
3
Contacts
Electrical characteristics UTS 124 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
1.31mm²
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
#16 Contact type AWG
Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
Male Female insulator Ø
Crimp
Machined
30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1
26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6
22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8
22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2
20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2
16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2
16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2
Stamped & formed
reeled contacts
26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 -
22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 -
18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 -
18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 -
14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 -
PCB
Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - -
Coaxial
Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - -
Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Twisted pair Multipiece -
RMDXK10D28 +
york090
RCDXK1D28 +
york090 - -
Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Fiber
optic
POF contacts
Plastic optical fi bre
- RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - -
(1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143
(2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6
(3): For dimensions see page 148
Mechanics
3 + ground
16A/300V
per IEC 61984
56 © 2011 – SOURIAU
WITH
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Crimp
contacts supply
separately
see page 59
NPT threaded
receptacle
Without (Fig.1) UTS7183G1SNPT
Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS6183G1P
Plug Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC183G1P
Layout
UTS Series
183G1
© 2011 – SOURIAU 57
Dimensions
UTS Series
183G1
Note: all dimensions are in mm
NPT threaded receptacle - UTS7
17.3 14.5 31.8
NPT - 3/4˝
Ø28.6
Ø19.6
Fig. 1
Plug - UTS6
Fig. 2 Fig. 3
37.5 81.3
Ø42
Ø42
Mated connector length - UTS6JC
90.5
Drilling pattern
5.1 5.1
5.1 5.1
Mechanics
3 + ground
32A/300V
per IEC 61984
58 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Accessories and tooling
Metal terminal
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
UTS Series
183G1
Jam nut sealing caps
Part number
UTS14DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGR
Hand tool
Part number
M317
Positioner + locator setting
Part number
VGE10078A
Extraction tool
Part number
51060210936
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005590A 85005599
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD14B
Gasket
Color coding rings
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR
UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY
UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG
Plug sealing cap
Part number
UTS614DCG
© 2011 – SOURIAU 59
UL
23A 600V UL94 V-0
CSA
23A 600V UL94 V-0
IEC
32A 300V 4kV 3
Electrical characteristics UTS 183G1 derating curves
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
8.37mm²
UTS Series
183G1
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
Contacts
#8 Contact type AWG
Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
Male Female insulator Ø
Crimp
Machined
16 82913601A(1) 82913600A(1) -
6.5
14 82913603A(1) 82913602A(1) -
12 82913605A(1) 82913604A(1) -
10 82913607A(1) 82913606A(1) -
8 82913609A(1) 82913608A(1) -
(1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143
Mechanics
3 + ground
32A/300V
per IEC 61984
60 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR OR
WITH
UTS Series
8E4/8D4
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.1) UTS08E4P UTS08E4S
Plug
Without (Fig.6) UTS68E4P UTS68E4S
Cable gland (Fig.7) UTS6JC8E4P UTS6JC8E4S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.3) UTS78E4P UTS78E4S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.2) UTS08D4P UTS08D4S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.5) UTS78D4P32 UTS78D4S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.4) UTS78D4P UTS78D4S
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 61
UTS Series
8E4/8D4
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
24.2
24.2
18
Ø12
3.5
3.4
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
18 4.2
Ø12
3.5
3.4
18
Ø12
3.5
3.4
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front view
11.7 11.7 20.7
Ø12
Ø12
15.3
2.4 2.4
Ø3.2
7.5
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
7.5 7.8
Plug - UTS6 Mated connector length
25.3
54
Fig. 7
Fig. 6
Ø22.5
61.1
66.6
UTS7
UTS0
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
15.3
15.3
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
13.7
14.6
1.4
Ø13.5
Ø22
Ø17.7
15°
15°
Ø4
Ø3.1
1.4
1.4
1.4
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front mounting
Ø12.5
Rear mounting
Ø14.5
Mechanics
4 contacts
7A/32V
per IEC 61984
62 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
8E4/8D4
UTS 8E4/8D4 derating curves
Jam nut sealing caps Square fl ange sealing cap Plug protective cap
Accessories
Electrical characteristics
Metal terminal IP40
Part number
UTS8DCGE
Part number
UTS68C
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS8DCG
Part number
UTS8DCGR
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005585A 85005594
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD11B
Gasket
UL
7A 250V UL94 HB
CSA
7A 250V UL94 HB
IEC
7A 32V 1.5kV 3
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
4
2
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
© 2011 – SOURIAU 63
UTS Series
8E4/8D4
Mechanics
64 © 2011 – SOURIAU
WITH
UTS Series
102W2 (2x#12 + 2x#20)
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Crimp
contacts supply
separately
see page 67
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig.1) UTS1JC102W2P UTS1JC102W2S
Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS6102W2P UTS6102W2S
Plug Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC102W2P UTS6JC102W2S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.4) UTS7102W2P UTS7102W2S
Layout
© 2011 – SOURIAU 65
UTS Series
102W2 (2x#12 + 2x#20)
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Free hanging - UTS1
70
Ø15.1
Fig. 1
Plug - UTS6
Fig. 2 Male Fig. 2 Female Fig. 3
33 63.2
Ø26.2
Ø26.2
Ø26.2
25.3
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
16.7
17.9
3 3
3 3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Mated connector length - UTS7
Fig. 4
18.3
27.2
22.5
Ø15.1
3.5
2.4
77.3
Mechanics
4 contacts
25A/150V
per IEC 61984
66 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
102W2 (2x#12 + 2x#20)
Metal terminal
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
Jam nut sealing caps
Part number
UTS10DCG
Part number
UTS10DCGR
Plug sealing cap
Part number
UTS610DCG
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005586A 85005595
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD12B
Gasket
Color coding rings
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS710CCRR UTS610CCRR
UTS710CCRY UTS610CCRY
UTS710CCRG UTS610CCRG
Accessories and tooling
Crimp tooling #20
Crimp tooling #12
Part number
TOOLKIT
Part number
extraction tool
51060210924
(1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 148
(2): contact reeled (3): loose contact
Part number
SHANDLES
Contacts Contact size
Part number
of head
RM/RC 24W3K(1)
Standard contacts
#20
Ø 1mm
S20RM
RM/RC 20W3K(1) S20RM
RM/RC 18W3K(1) S20RM
SM/SC 24W3S(2) S20SCM20
SM/SC 24WL3S(3) S20SCM20
SM/SC 20W3S(2) S20SCM20
SM/SC 20WL3S(3) S20SCM20
Part number
positioner + locator setting
VGE10078A
Part number hand tool
M317
© 2011 – SOURIAU 67
UTS Series
102W2 (2x#12 + 2x#20)
Contacts
#20 Contact type AWG
Part number
Max insulator Ø
Male Female
Crimp
Machined
26-24 RM24W3K(1) RC24W3K(1) 1.58
22-20 RM20W3K(1) RC20W3K(1) 1.58
20-18 RM18W3K(1) RC18W3K(1) 2.1
stamped & formed
reeled contacts
26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) 0.89-1.58
26-24 SM24W3S26(2) SC24W3S25(2) 0.89-1.58
22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) 1.17-2.08
22-20 SM20W3S26(2) SC20W3S25(2) 1.17-2.08
PCB
Machined (3) - RMW5016K RCW5016K -
(1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143
(2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6
(3): For dimensions see page 148
1) E l f l ti f th l ti #12
Crimp
Machined
22 82911457NA 82911456A
4.9
20 82911459NA 82911458A
18 82911461NA 82911460A
16 82911463NA 82911462A
14 82911465NA 82911464A
12 82911467NA 82911466A
UL
20A 500V UL94 V-0
CSA
18A 500V UL94 V-0
IEC
25A 150V 2.5kV 3
Temperature elevation: 50°C
Electrical characteristics UTS 102W2 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
Mechanics
4 contacts
25A/150V
per IEC 61984
68 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR OR OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
104
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Crimp
contact supply
separately
see next page 71
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.1) UTS0104P UTS0104S
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland and grommet
(Fig.2) UTS1GJC104P
Free hanging
receptacle
Nut and grommet (Fig.3) UTS1GN104P
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS1JC104P UTS1JC104S
Plug Without (Fig.4) UTS6104P UTS6104S
Plug
Cable gland and grommet
(Fig.5) UTS6GJC104S
Plug Nut and grommet (Fig.6) UTS6GN104S
Plug Cable gland (Fig.5) UTS6JC104P UTS6JC104S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.7) UTS7104P UTS7104S
Jam nut
receptacle
Cable gland and grommet
(Fig.9) UTS7GJC104P
Jam nut
receptacle
Nut and grommet (Fig.8) UTS7GN104P
Layout
© 2011 – SOURIAU 69
UTS Series
104
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Free hanging - UTS1
11.5
70
40.9
Ø15.1
Ø15.1
20.8
24
2.4
10.5
Ø3.2
Fig. 1 Front view Fig. 3
Fig. 2
Plug - UTS6
Female
Male
Fig. 4 Fig. 5 Fig. 6
33 63.2 32.5
25.3
Ø26.2
Ø26.2
Ø26.2
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
18.5
18.5
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
16.7
17.9
3
3
3
3
Front mounting
Ø15.2
Rear mounting
Ø17.9
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Mated connector length
Fig. 7 Fig. 9
Fig. 8
18.3
18.3
41
70.7
Ø15.1
Ø15.1
3.5 3.5
2.4 70.9
77.3
UTS7
UTS0
Mechanics
4 contacts
13A/150V
per IEC 61984
70 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
104
Accessories and tooling
(1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143
Metal terminal
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
Crimp tooling
Contacts Contact size
Part number
of head
RM/RC 28M1K(1)
Standard contacts
#16
Ø 1.6mm
S16RCM20
RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16
RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450
RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14
SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11
RMDXK10D28K
Coaxial contacts
M10S-1J
RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DXK10D28 +
york090 M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J
Jam nut sealing caps
Part number
UTS10DCG
Part number
UTS10DCGR
Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Part number
UTS610DCG
Part number
UTS10DCGE
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005586A 85005595
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD12B
Gasket
Color coding rings
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS710CCRR UTS610CCRR
UTS710CCRY UTS610CCRY
UTS710CCRG UTS610CCRG
Handle Tool kit
Part number
TOOLKIT
Part number
SHANDLES
Metal terminal
© 2011 – SOURIAU 71
UTS Series
104
Contacts
UL
10A 500V UL94 V-0
CSA
7A 500V UL94 V-0
IEC
13A 150V 2.5kV 3
Electrical characteristics UTS 104 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
1.31mm²
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
0 20 40 60 80 100
0
3
5
8
10
13
15
18
20
23
25
28
30
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
120
#16 Contact type AWG
Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
Male Female insulator Ø
Crimp
Machined
30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1
26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6
22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8
22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2
20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2
16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2
16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2
Stamped & formed
reeled contacts
26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 -
22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 -
18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 -
18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 -
14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 -
PCB
Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - -
Coaxial
Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - -
Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Twisted pair Multipiece -
RMDXK10D28 +
york090
RCDXK1D28 +
york090 - -
Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Fiber
optic
POF contacts
Plastic optical fi bre
- RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - -
(1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143
(2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6
(3): For dimensions see page 148
Mechanics
4 contacts
13A/150V
per IEC 61984
72 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
14E5/14D5
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.6) UTS014E5P UTS014E5S
Plug
Without (Fig.1) UTS614E5P UTS614E5S
Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC14E5P UTS6JC14E5S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.3) UTS714E5P UTS714E5S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.6) UTS014D5P UTS014D5S
Jam nut receptacle
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.4) UTS714D5P32 UTS714D5S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.5) UTS714D5P UTS714D5S
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 73
UTS Series
14E5/14D5
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
30.4
35.1
18
Ø22.3
3.5
3
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
4.2 18
Ø22.3
3.5
3
18
Ø22.3
3.5
3
Plug - UTS6
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
70
Ø35.1
Ø35.1
25.3
Mated connector length
75
82
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Fig. 6
11.3
Ø22.3
2.3
7.5
7.8
23.2
28.8
Ø3.2
Front view
UTS7
UTS0
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
23.2
23.2
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
24.5
25.9
4
Ø22
Ø30.5
Ø26.2
30°
68°
10
Ø3.1
2.3
3.7
0.6
2.5
22°
Front mounting
Ø21.5
Rear mounting
Ø25.1
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Mechanics
5 contacts
16A/150V
per IEC 61984
74 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
14E5/14D5
UTS 14E5/14D5 derating curves
Jam nut sealing caps Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Accessories
Electrical characteristics
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS614DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGE
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS14DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGR
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005588A 85005597
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD14B
Gasket
UL
12A 650V UL94 HB
CSA
12A 650V UL94 HB
IEC
16A 150V 2.5kV 3
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
1.31mm²
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
4
2
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
Color coding rings
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR
UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY
UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
© 2011 – SOURIAU 75
UTS Series
14E5/14D5
Mechanics
76 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
103W3 (3x#16 + 3x#20)
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Crimp
contacts supply
separately
see page 79
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig.1) UTS1JC103W3P UTS1JC103W3S
Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS6103W3P UTS6103W3S
Plug Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC103W3P UTS6JC103W3S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.4) UTS7103W3P UTS7103W3S
PCB
contacts supply
separately
see page 79
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.4) UTS7103W3P UTS7103W3S
OR
WITH
OR
Layout
© 2011 – SOURIAU 77
UTS Series
103W3 (3x#16 + 3x#20)
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Plug - UTS6
Fig. 2 Male Fig. 2 Female Fig. 3
33 63.2
Ø26.2
Ø26.2
Ø26.2
25.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Mated connector length - UTS7
Fig. 4
18.3
27.2
22.5
Ø15.1
3.5
2.4
77.3
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
3 2.5
2.5
0.7 0.8
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
16.7
17.9
Free hanging - UTS1
70
Ø15.1
Fig. 1
Mechanics
6 contacts
5A/32V
per IEC 61984
78 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
103W3 (3x#16 + 3x#20)
Accessories and tooling
Metal terminal
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
Crimp tooling
Jam nut sealing caps
Part number
UTS10DCG
Part number
UTS10DCGR
Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Part number
UTS610DCG
Part number
UTS10DCGE
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005586A 85005595
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD12B
Gasket
Color coding rings
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS710CCRR UTS610CCRR
UTS710CCRY UTS610CCRY
UTS710CCRG UTS610CCRG
Handle Tool kit
Part number
TOOLKIT
Part number
SHANDLES
Metal terminal
Contacts Contact size
Part number
of head
RM/RC 28M1K(1)
Standard contacts
#16
Ø 1.6mm
S16RCM20
RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16
RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450
RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14
SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11
RMDXK10D28K
Coaxial contacts
M10S-1J
RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DXK10D28 +
york090 M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J
RM/RC 24W3K(1)
Standard contacts
#20
Ø 1mm
S20RCM
RM/RC 20W3K(1) S20RCM
RM/RC 18W3K(1) S20RCM
SM/SC 24W3S(2) S20SCM20
SM/SC 24WL3S(3) S20SCM20
SM/SC 20W3S(2) S20SCM20
SM/SC 20WL3S(3) S20SCM20
(1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143
(2): contact reeled
(3): loose contac
© 2011 – SOURIAU 79
UTS Series
103W3 (3x#16 + 3x#20)
UL
10A 500V UL94 V-0
CSA
7A 500V UL94 V-0
IEC
5A 32V 1.5kV 3
Temperature elevation: 50°C
Electrical characteristics UTS 103W3 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
1.31mm²
0.518mm²
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
0 20 40 60 80 100
0
3
5
8
10
13
15
18
20
23
25
28
30
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
Contacts
120
(1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 (2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6 (3): For dimensions see page 148
#16 Contact type AWG
Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
Male Female insulator Ø
Crimp
Machined
30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1
26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6
22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8
22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2
20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2
16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2
16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2
Stamped & formed
reeled contacts
26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 -
22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 -
18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 -
18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 -
14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 -
PCB
Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - -
Coaxial
Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - -
Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Twisted pair Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 +
york090
RCDXK1D28 +
york090 - -
Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Fiber
optic
POF contacts
Plastic optical fi bre - RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - -
plating L SM20ML1 #20
Crimp
Machined
26-24 RM24W3K(1) RC24W3K(1) - 1.58
22-20 RM20W3K(1) RC20W3K(1) - 1.58
20-18 RM18W3K(1) RC18W3K(1) - 2.1
Stamped & formed
reeled contacts
26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58
26-24 SM24W3S26(2) SC24W3S25(2) - 0.89-1.58
22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08
22-20 SM20W3S26(2) SC20W3S25(2) - 1.17-2.08
PCB
Machined (3) - RMW5016K RCW5016K - -
Mechanics
6 contacts
5A/32V
per IEC 61984
80 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
106 - 10E6/10D6
Specifi cations
OR OR
WITH
OR
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Crimp
contacts supply
separately
see page 83
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig.1) UTS1JC106P UTS1JC106S
Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS6106P UTS6106S
Plug Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC106P UTS6JC106S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.4) UTS7106P UTS7106S
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.9) UTS010E6P UTS010E6S
Plug
Without (Fig.2) UTS610E6P UTS610E6S
Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC10E6P UTS6JC10E6S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.5) UTS710E6P UTS710E6S
PCB contacts
supply separately
see page 83
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.4) UTS7106P UTS7106S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.8) UTS010D6P UTS010D6S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.6) UTS710D6P32 UTS710D6S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.7) UTS710D6P UTS710D6S
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 81
UTS Series
106 - 10E6/10D6
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
6 contacts
7A/32V
per IEC 61984
Free hanging - UTS1
70
Ø15.1
Fig. 1
Plug - UTS6
Female
Male
Fig. 2 Fig. 3
33 63.2
Ø26.2
Ø26.2
25.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
22.5
27.2
18.3
Ø15.1
3.5 3
12.3
Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7
Fig. 4
4.2 18.3
Ø15.1
3.5
3
18.3
Ø15.1
3.5
3
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
18.5
18.5
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
16.7
17.9
2.8
Ø13.5
Ø22
Ø17.7
15°
15°
Ø4
Ø3.1
3.3 1.6
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front mounting
Ø15.2
Rear mounting
Ø17.9
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Fig. 9
Fig. 8
11.7
Ø15.1
2.3
16.2
20.8
24
Ø3.2
Front view
Mated connector length
70.9
77.3
UTS7
UTS0
7.5
Mechanics
82 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
106 - 10E6/10D6
Metal terminal
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
Crimp tooling
Contacts Contact size
Part number
of head
RM/RC 24W3K(1)
Standard contacts
#20
Ø 1mm
S20RM
RM/RC 20W3K(1) S20RM
RM/RC 18W3K(1) S20RM
SM/SC 24W3S(2) S20SCM20
SM/SC 24WL3S(3) S20SCM20
SM/SC 20W3S(2) S20SCM20
SM/SC 20WL3S(3) S20SCM20
Jam nut sealing caps
Part number
UTS10DCG
Part number
UTS10DCGR
Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Part number
UTS610DCG
Part number
UTS10DCGE
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005586A 85005595
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD12B
Gasket
Color coding rings
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS710CCRR UTS610CCRR
UTS710CCRY UTS610CCRY
UTS710CCRG UTS610CCRG
Handle Tool kit
Part number
TOOLKIT
Part number
SHANDLES
(1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143
(2): contact reeled
(3): loose contact
Accessories and tooling
Metal terminal
© 2011 – SOURIAU 83
UTS Series
106 - 10E6/10D6
Contacts
#20 Contact type AWG
Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
Male Female insulator Ø
Crimp
Machined
26-24 RM24W3K(1) RC24W3K(1) - 1.58
22-20 RM20W3K(1) RC20W3K(1) - 1.58
20-18 RM18W3K(1) RC18W3K(1) - 2.1
stamped & formed
reeled contacts
26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58
26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58
22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08
22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08
PCB
Machined (3) - RMW5016K RCW5016K - -
(1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143
(2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6
(3): For dimensions see page 148
IEC
7A 32V 1.5kV 3
Electrical characteristics UTS 106 - 10E6/10D6 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
4
2
6
8
10
12
14
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
UTS 106
UL
5A 250V UL94 V-0
CSA
4A 250V UL94 V-0
UTS 10E6/10D6
UL
6A 250V UL94 HB
CSA
6A 250V UL94 HB
Mechanics
6 contacts
7A/32V
per IEC 61984
84 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR
WITH
OR
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.6) UTS010E98P UTS010E98S
Plug
Without (Fig.1) UTS610E98P UTS610E98S
Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC10E98P UTS6JC10E98S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.3) UTS710E98P UTS710E98S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.7) UTS010D98P UTS010D98S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.4) UTS710D98P32 UTS710D98S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.5) UTS710D98P UTS710D98S
Layout
UTS Series
10E98/10D98
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 85
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
UTS Series
10E98/10D98
Plug - UTS6
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
70
Ø26.2
Ø26.2
25.3
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
18.3
Ø15.1
2.3
16.2
20.8
24
Ø3.2
Front view
70.9
77.3
UTS7
UTS0
Drilling pattern
3.3 1.6
Ø13.5
Ø22
Ø17.7
Ø4
2.8 3.3
Panel cut out
18.5
18.5
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
16.7
17.9
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front mounting
Ø15.2
Rear mounting
Ø17.9
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
22.4
27.2
18.3
3.5
3
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
4.2 18.3
Ø15.1
3.5
3
18.3
Ø15.1
3.5
3
Ø15.1
7.5
30°
Ø3.1 68°
22°
Mechanics
6 contacts
7A/50V
per IEC 61984
86 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
10E98/10D98
UTS 10E98/10D98 derating curves
Jam nut sealing caps Plug protective cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Accessories
Electrical characteristics
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS610DCG
Part number
UTS10DCGE
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS10DCG
Part number
UTS10DCGR
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005586A 85005595
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD12B
Gasket
UL
6A 250V UL94 HB
CSA
6A 250V UL94 HB
IEC
7A 50V 1.5kV 3
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
Color coding rings
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS710CCRR UTS610CCRR
UTS710CCRY UTS610CCRY
UTS710CCRG UTS610CCRG
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
4
2
6
8
10
12
14
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
© 2011 – SOURIAU 87
UTS Series
10E98/10D98
Mechanics
88 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR OR
WITH
OR OR OR
UTS Series
147 - 14E7/14D7
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Crimp
contacts supply
separately
see page 91
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.2) UTS0147P
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland and grommet
(Fig.3) UTS1GJC147P
Free hanging
receptacle
Nut and grommet (Fig.4) UTS1GN147P
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS1JC147P UTS1JC147S
Plug Without (Fig.5) UTS6147P UTS6147S
Plug
Cable gland and grommet
(Fig.6) UTS6GJC147S
Plug Nut and grommet (Fig.7) UTS6GN147S
Plug Cable gland (Fig.6) UTS6JC147P UTS6JC147S
Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.8) UTS7147P UTS7147S
Jam nut receptacle
Cable gland and grommet
(Fig.10) UTS7GJC147P
Jam nut receptacle Nut and grommet (Fig.9) UTS7GN147P
Handsolder
electrical contacts loaded
Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.2) UTS014E7P UTS014E7S
Plug Cable gland (Fig.6) UTS6JC14E7P UTS6JC14E7S
Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.11) UTS714E7P UTS714E7S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.1) UTS014D7P UTS014D7S
Jam nut receptacle with stand
off and hold down clips
Without (Fig.11) UTS714D7P32 UTS714D7S32
Jam nut receptacle with stand
off and without hold down clip
Without (Fig.11) UTS714D7P UTS714D7S
Jam nut receptacle
With stand off and hold down clip
(Fig.11) UTS7147PSEK9
Screw
contacts loaded
Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.8) UTS7147PSCR UTS7147SSCR
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS1JC147PSCR
Plug Cable gland (Fig.6) UTS6JC147PSCR UTS6JC147SSCR
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 89
UTS Series
147 - 14E7/14D7
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Plug - UTS6
Female
Male
Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7
33 70 32
23.5
Ø35.1
Ø35.1
Ø35.1
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Fig. 11 Fig. 10
Fig. 8 Fig. 9
18
18
49
70.7
Ø31.8
Ø22.3
3.5
3.5
1.6
4.2
3
Mated connector length
75
82
UTS7
UTS0
Drilling pattern
6.4 3.2
Ø13.5
Ø22
Ø17.7
Ø4
Ø3.1
5.2
Panel cut out
23.2
23.2
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
24.5
25.9
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front mounting
Ø21.5
Rear mounting
Ø25.1
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Free hanging - UTS1
11.3
Ø22.3
23.2
28.8
2.3
29.1
22
Ø3.2
Fig. 2 Front view
Fig. 1
78.5
43
Ø22.3
Fig. 4
Fig. 3
Mechanics
6 + ground
16A/300V
per IEC 61984
90 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
147 - 14E7/14D7
Accessories and tooling
(1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143
Metal terminal
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
Crimp tooling
Contacts Contact size
Part number
of head
RM/RC 28M1K(1)
Standard contacts
#16
Ø 1.6mm
S16RCM20
RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16
RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450
RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14
SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11
RMDXK10D28K
Coaxial contacts
M10S-1J
RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DXK10D28 +
york090 M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J
Jam nut sealing caps
Part number
UTS14DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGR
Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Part number
UTS614DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGE
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005588A 85005597
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD14B
Gasket
Color coding rings
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR
UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY
UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG
Handle Tool kit
Part number
TOOLKIT
Part number
SHANDLES
Metal terminal
© 2011 – SOURIAU 91
Contacts
#16 Contact type AWG
Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
Male Female insulator Ø
Crimp
Machined
30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1
26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6
22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8
22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2
20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2
16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2
16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2
Stamped & formed
reeled contacts
26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 -
22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 -
18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 -
18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 -
14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 -
PCB
Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - -
Coaxial
Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - -
Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Twisted pair Multipiece -
RMDXK10D28 +
york090
RCDXK1D28 +
york090 - -
Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Fiber
optic
POF contacts
Plastic optical fi bre
- RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - -
(1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143
(2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6
(3): For dimensions see page 148
UTS Series
147 - 14E7/14D7
UL
10A 500V UL94 V-0
CSA
7A 500V UL94 V-0
IEC
16A 300V 4kV 3
Temperature elevation: 50°C
Electrical characteristics UTS 147 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
1.31mm²
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
5
3
8
10
20
18
15
13
23
25
28
30
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
6 + ground
16A/300V
per IEC 61984
Mechanics
92 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
10E7/10D7
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.6) UTS010E7P UTS010E7S
Plug
Without (Fig.1) UTS610E7P UTS610E7S
Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC10E7P UTS6JC10E7S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.3) UTS710E7P UTS710E7S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.7) UTS010D7P UTS010D7S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.4) UTS710D7P32 UTS710D7S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.5) UTS710D7P UTS710D7S
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 93
UTS Series
10E7/10D7
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Plug - UTS6
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
70
Ø26.2
Ø26.2
25.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
22.4
27.2
18.3
3.5
3
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
4.2 18.3
Ø15.1
3.5
3
18.3
Ø15.1
3.5
3
Ø15.1
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
11.7
Ø15.1
2.3
16.2
7.5
20.8
24
Ø3.2
Front view
Mated connector length
70.9
77.3
UTS7
UTS0
Drilling pattern
2.8
Ø13.5
Ø22
Ø17.7
15°
15°
Ø4
Ø3.1
3.3
1.6
Panel cut out
18.5
18.5
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
16.7
17.9
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front mounting
Ø15.2
Rear mounting
Ø17.9
Mechanics
7 contacts
7A/50V
per IEC 61984
94 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
10E7/10D7
UTS 10E7/10D7 derating curves
Jam nut sealing caps Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Accessories
Electrical characteristics
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS610DCG
Part number
UTS10DCGE
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS10DCG
Part number
UTS10DCGR
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005586A 85005595
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD12B
Gasket
UL
6A 250V UL94 HB
CSA
6A 250V UL94 HB
IEC
7A 50V 1.5kV 3
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
Color coding rings
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS710CCRR UTS610CCRR
UTS710CCRY UTS610CCRY
UTS710CCRG UTS610CCRG
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
6
10
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
12
14
2
4
8
© 2011 – SOURIAU 95
UTS Series
10E7/10D7
Mechanics
96 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR OR OR OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
128
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Crimp
contacts supply
separately
see page 99
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.1) UTS0128P UTS0128S
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland and grommet
(Fig.2) UTS1GJC128P
Free hanging
receptacle
Nut and grommet (Fig.3) UTS1GN128P
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS1JC128P UTS1JC128S
Plug Without (Fig.4) UTS6128P UTS6128S
Plug
Cable gland and grommet
(Fig.5) UTS6GJC128S
Plug Nut and grommet (Fig.6) UTS6GN128S
Plug Cable gland (Fig.5) UTS6JC128P UTS6JC128S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.8) UTS7128P UTS7128S
Jam nut
receptacle
Cable gland and grommet
(Fig.10) UTS7GJC128P
Jam nut
receptacle
Nut and grommet (Fig.9) UTS7GN128P
PCB
contacts loaded
Jam nut receptacle
With stand off and hold down clip
(Fig.11) UTS7128PSEK9
Layout
© 2011 – SOURIAU 97
UTS Series
128
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Free hanging - UTS1
11.7
Ø19.1
20.8
26.4
2.3 10.5
18.1
Ø3.2
Fig. 1 Front view
74.5
40.9
Ø19.1
Fig. 3
Fig. 2
Plug - UTS6
Female
Male
Fig. 4 Fig. 5 Fig. 6
33 65.7 33
25.3
Ø30.1
Ø30.1
Ø30.1
Drilling pattern
4.4 3.4
2
4.5 4
2.8 0.9
Panel cut out
20.8
20.8
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
21.4
22.7
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front mounting
Ø18.3
Rear mounting
Ø22.3
Mated connector length
75.3
81.7
UTS7
UTS0
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Fig. 11 Fig. 10
Fig. 8 Fig. 9
18
18
49.1
74.5
Ø19.1
Ø19.1
3.5
3.5
1.6
4.2
3
Mechanics
8 contacts
10A/80V
per IEC 61984
98 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
128
Accessories and tooling
(1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143
Metal terminal
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
Crimp tooling
Contacts Contact size
Part number
of head
RM/RC 28M1K(1)
Standard contacts
#16
Ø 1.6mm
S16RCM20
RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16
RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450
RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14
SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11
RMDXK10D28K
Coaxial contacts
M10S-1J
RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DXK10D28 +
york090 M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J
Jam nut sealing caps
Part number
UTS12DCG
Part number
UTS12DCGR
Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Part number
UTS612DCG
Part number
UTS12DCGE
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005587A 85005596
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD13B
Gasket
Color coding rings
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS712CCRR UTS612CCRR
UTS712CCRY UTS612CCRY
UTS712CCRG UTS612CCRG
Handle Tool kit
Part number
TOOLKIT
Part number
SHANDLES
Metal terminal
© 2011 – SOURIAU 99
UTS Series
128
Contacts
UL
10A 500V UL94 V-0
CSA
7A 500V UL94 V-0
IEC
10A 80V 1.5kV 3
Electrical characteristics UTS 128 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
1.31mm²
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
0 20 40 60 80 100
0
3
5
8
10
13
15
18
20
23
25
28
30
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
120
#16 Contact type AWG
Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
Male Female insulator Ø
Crimp
Machined
30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1
26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6
22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8
22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2
20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2
16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2
16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2
Stamped & formed
reeled contacts
26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 -
22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 -
18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 -
18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 -
14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 -
PCB
Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - -
Coaxial
Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - -
Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Twisted pair Multipiece -
RMDXK10D28 +
york090
RCDXK1D28 +
york090 - -
Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Fiber
optic
POF contacts
Plastic optical fi bre
- RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - -
(1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143
(2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6
(3): For dimensions see page 148
Mechanics
8 contacts
10A/80V
per IEC 61984
100 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
12E8/12D8
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.6) UTS012E8P UTS012E8S
Plug
Without (Fig.1) UTS612E8P UTS612E8S
Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC12E8P UTS6JC12E8S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.3) UTS712E8P UTS712E8S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.7) UTS012D8P UTS012D8S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.4) UTS712D8P32 UTS712D8S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.5) UTS712D8P UTS712D8S
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 101
UTS Series
12E8/12D8
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Plug - UTS6
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
27.2
31.9
18
Ø19
3.5
3
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
4.2 18
Ø19
3.5
3
18
Ø19
3.5
3.1
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
66.7
Ø30.1
Ø30.1
25.3
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
11.7
Ø19
2.4
7.5
7.8
20.8
26.4
Ø3.2
Front view
75.3
81.7
UTS7
UTS0
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
20.8
20.8
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
21.4
22.7
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front mounting
Ø18.3
Rear mounting
Ø22.3
4.3
Ø22
Ø30.5
Ø26.2
30°
68°
10
Ø3.1
3
1.6
3
4.3
1.1
3.9
22°
Mechanics
8 contacts
6A/32V
per IEC 61984
102 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
12E8/12D8
UTS 12E8/12D8 derating curves
Jam nut sealing caps Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Accessories
Electrical characteristics
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS612DCG
Part number
UTS12DCGE
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS12DCG
Part number
UTS12DCGR
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005587A 85005596
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD13B
Gasket
UL
4.5A 250V UL94 HB
CSA
4.5A 250V UL94 HB
IEC
6A 32V 1.5kV 3
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
Color coding rings
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS712CCRR UTS612CCRR
UTS712CCRY UTS612CCRY
UTS712CCRG UTS612CCRG
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
4
2
6
8
10
12
14
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
© 2011 – SOURIAU 103
UTS Series
12E8/12D8
Mechanics
104 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
1210 - 12E10/12D10
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Crimp
contacts supply
separately
see page107
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig.1) UTS1JC1210P UTS1JC1210S
Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS61210P UTS61210S
Plug Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC1210P UTS6JC1210S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.4) UTS71210P UTS71210S
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.6) UTS012E10P UTS012E10S
Plug
Without (Fig.2) UTS612E10P UTS612E10S
Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC12E10P UTS6JC12E10S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.5) UTS712E10P UTS712E10S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.7) UTS012D10P UTS012D10S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.6) UTS712D10P32 UTS712D10S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.7) UTS712D10P UTS712D10S
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 105
UTS Series
1210 - 12E10/12D10
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Free hanging - UTS1 Plug - UTS6
74
Ø19.1
Fig. 1
Female
Male
Fig. 2 Fig. 3
33 66.7
Ø30.1
Ø30.1
25.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
27.2
31.9
18
Ø19.1
3.5 3
12.3
Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7
Fig. 4
4.2 18
Ø19.1
3.5
3
18
Ø19.1
3.5
3.1
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
11.7
Ø19.1
2.3
7.5
7.8
20.8
26.4
Ø3.2
Front view
75.3
81.7
UTS7
UTS0
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
20.8
20.8
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
21.4
22.7
3.3
1.6
Ø22
Ø30.5
Ø26.2
22°
30°
68°
10
Ø3.1
4.9
3
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front mounting
Ø18.3
Rear mounting
Ø22.3
Mechanics
10 contacts
6A/50V
per IEC 61984
106 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
1210 - 12E10/12D10
Metal terminal
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
Crimp tooling
Contacts Contact size
Part number
of head
RM/RC 24W3K(1)
Standard contacts
#20
Ø 1mm
S20RM
RM/RC 20W3K(1) S20RM
RM/RC 18W3K(1) S20RM
SM/SC 24W3S(2) S20SCM20
SM/SC 24WL3S(3) S20SCM20
SM/SC 20W3S(2) S20SCM20
SM/SC 20WL3S(3) S20SCM20
Jam nut sealing caps
Part number
UTS12DCG
Part number
UTS12DCGR
Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Part number
UTS612DCG
Part number
UTS12DCGE
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005587A 85005596
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD13B
Gasket
Color coding rings
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS712CCRR UTS612CCRR
UTS712CCRY UTS612CCRY
UTS712CCRG UTS612CCRG
Handle Tool kit
Part number
TOOLKIT
Part number
SHANDLES
(1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143
(2): contact reeled
(3): loose contact
Accessories and tooling
Metal terminal
© 2011 – SOURIAU 107
UTS Series
1210 - 12E10/12D10
Contacts
IEC
6A 50V 1.5kV 3
Electrical characteristics UTS 1210 - 12E10/12D10 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
UTS 1210
UL
5A 250V UL94 V-0
CSA
4A 250V UL94 V-0
UTS 12E10/12D10
UL
4.5A 250V UL94 HB
CSA
4.5A 250V UL94 HB
0 20 40 60 80 100
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
120
#20 Contact type AWG
Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
Male Female insulator Ø
Crimp
Machined
26-24 RM24W3K(1) RC24W3K(1) - 1.58
22-20 RM20W3K(1) RC20W3K(1) - 1.58
20-18 RM18W3K(1) RC18W3K(1) - 2.1
stamped & formed
reeled contacts
26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58
26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58
22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08
22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08
PCB
Machined (3) - RMW5016K RCW5016K - -
(1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143
(2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6
(3): For dimensions see page 148
Mechanics
10 contacts
6A/50V
per IEC 61984
108 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR OR OR OR
WITH
OR
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Crimp
contacts supply
separately
see page 111
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.1) UTS01412P UTS01412S
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland and grommet
(Fig.2) UTS1GJC1412P
Free hanging
receptacle
Nut and grommet (Fig.3) UTS1GN1412P
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS1JC1412P UTS1JC1412S
Plug Without (Fig.4) UTS61412P UTS61412S
Plug
Cable gland and grommet
(Fig.5) UTS6GJC1412S
Plug Nut and grommet (Fig.6) UTS6GN1412S
Plug Cable gland (Fig.5) UTS6JC1412P UTS6JC1412S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.7) UTS71412P UTS71412S
Jam nut
receptacle
Cable gland and grommet
(Fig.9) UTS7GJC1412P
Jam nut
receptacle
Nut and grommet (Fig.8) UTS7GN1412P
PCB
contacts supply
separately
see page 111
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.1) UTS01412P UTS01412S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.7) UTS71412P UTS71412S
Layout
UTS Series
1412
© 2011 – SOURIAU 109
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
UTS Series
1412
Plug - UTS6
Female
Male
Fig. 4 Fig. 5 Fig. 6
33 70 32
25.3
Ø31.5
Ø31.5
Ø31.5
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Mated connector length
Fig. 7 Fig. 9
Fig. 8
18
18
49
70.7
Ø22.3
Ø22.3
3.5 3.5
1.6
75
82
UTS7
UTS0
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
23.2
23.2
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
24.5
25.9
2.2 0.7
3.8 5.8
5.1
2 1.4
1
2.2
4.5
5.9
1
0.3
2.9
5.5
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front mounting
Ø21.5
Rear mounting
Ø25.1
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Free hanging - UTS1
78.5
43
Ø22.3
Fig. 3
11.3 Fig. 2
Ø22.3
23.2
28.8
2.3 10.5
21.9
Ø3.2
Fig. 1 Front view
Female
Male
Mechanics
12 contacts
10A/63V
per IEC 61984
110 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
1412
Accessories and tooling
(1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143
Metal terminal
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
Crimp tooling
Contacts Contact size
Part number
of head
RM/RC 28M1K(1)
Standard contacts
#16
Ø 1.6mm
S16RCM20
RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16
RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450
RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14
SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11
RMDXK10D28K
Coaxial contacts
M10S-1J
RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DXK10D28 +
york090 M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J
Jam nut sealing caps
Part number
UTS14DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGR
Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Part number
UTS614DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGE
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005588A 85005597
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD14B
Gasket
Color coding rings
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR
UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY
UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG
Handle Tool kit
Part number
TOOLKIT
Part number
SHANDLES
Metal terminal
© 2011 – SOURIAU 111
UTS Series
1412
Contacts
UL
10A 500V UL94 V-0
CSA
7A 500V UL94 V-0
IEC
10A 63V 1.5kV 3
Electrical characteristics UTS 1412 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
1.31mm²
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
0 20 40 60 80 100
0
3
5
8
10
13
15
18
20
23
25
28
30
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
120
#16 Contact type AWG
Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
Male Female insulator Ø
Crimp
Machined
30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1
26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6
22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8
22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2
20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2
16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2
16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2
Stamped & formed
reeled contacts
26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 -
22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 -
18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 -
18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 -
14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 -
PCB
Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - -
Coaxial
Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - -
Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Twisted pair Multipiece -
RMDXK10D28 +
york090
RCDXK1D28 +
york090 - -
Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Fiber
optic
POF contacts
Plastic optical fi bre
- RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - -
(1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143
(2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6
(3): For dimensions see page 148
Mechanics
12 contacts
10A/63V
per IEC 61984
112 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
14E12/14D12 (4x#16 + 8x#20)
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.6) UTS014E12P UTS014E12S
Plug
Without (Fig.1) UTS614E12P UTS614E12S
Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC14E12P UTS6JC14E12S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.3) UTS714E12P UTS714E12S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.6) UTS014D12P UTS014D12S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.4) UTS714D12P32 UTS714D12S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.5) UTS714D12P UTS714D12S
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 113
UTS Series
14E12/14D12 (4x#16 + 8x#20)
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
30.4
35.1
18
Ø22.3
3.5
3
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
4.2 18
Ø22.3
3.5
3
18
Ø22.3
3.5
3
Plug - UTS6
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
70
Ø35.1
Ø35.1
25.3
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length
11.3
Ø22.3
2.3
7.5
7.8
23.2
28.8
Ø3.2
Fig. 6 Front view
75
82
UTS7
UTS0
23.2
Panel cut out
23.2
23.2
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
24.5
25.9
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front mounting
Ø21.5
Rear mounting
Ø25.1
Drilling pattern
4.5
4.1
Ø22
Ø30.5
Ø26.2
Ø30.5
30°
68°
10
Ø3.1
1.6
4.5
2.3
6.7
22°
1
Mechanics
12 contacts
4A/50V
per IEC 61984
114 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
14E12/14D12 (4x#16 + 8x#20)
UTS 14E12/14D12 derating curves
Jam nut sealing caps Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Accessories
Electrical characteristics
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS614DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGE
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS14DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGR
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005588A 85005597
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD14B
Gasket
UL
4.5A 250V UL94 HB
CSA
4.5A 250V UL94 HB
IEC
4A 50V 1.5kV 3
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
Color coding rings
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR
UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY
UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
4
2
6
8
10
12
14
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
© 2011 – SOURIAU 115
UTS Series
14E12/14D12 (4x#16 + 8x#20)
Mechanics
116 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
12E14/12D14
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.6) UTS012E14P UTS012E14S
Plug
Without (Fig.1) UTS612E14P UTS612E14S
Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC12E14P UTS6JC12E14S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.3) UTS712E14P UTS712E14S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.7) UTS012D14P UTS012D14S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.4) UTS712D14P32 UTS712D14S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.5) UTS712D14P UTS712D14S
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 117
UTS Series
12E14/12D14
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
14 contacts
5A/32V
per IEC 61984
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
27.2
31.9
18
Ø19
3.5
3
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
4.2 18
Ø19
3.5
3
18
Ø19
3.5
3.1
Plug - UTS6
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
66.7
Ø30.1
Ø30.1
25.3
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
11.7
Ø19
2.4
7.5
7.8
20.8
26.4
Ø3.2
Front view
75.3
81.7
UTS7
UTS0
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
20.8
20.8
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
21.4
22.7
4.4
Ø22
Ø30.5
Ø26.2
30°
68°
10
Ø3.1
2.7
2
4.7 3.8
1.8 1.4
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 22°
Front mounting
Ø18.3
Rear mounting
Ø22.3
Mechanics
118 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
12E14/12D14
UTS 12E14/12D14 derating curves
Jam nut sealing caps Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Accessories
Electrical characteristics
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS612DCG
Part number
UTS12DCGE
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS12DCG
Part number
UTS12DCGR
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005587A 85005596
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD13B
Gasket
UL
4.5A 250V UL94 HB
CSA
4.5A 250V UL94 HB
IEC
5A 32V 1.5kV 3
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
Color coding rings
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS712CCRR UTS612CCRR
UTS712CCRY UTS612CCRY
UTS712CCRG UTS612CCRG
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
4
2
6
8
10
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
© 2011 – SOURIAU 119
UTS Series
12E14/12D14
Mechanics
120 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
14E15/14D15
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.6) UTS014E15P UTS014E15S
Plug
Without (Fig.1) UTS614E15P UTS614E15S
Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC14E15P UTS6JC14E15S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.3) UTS714E15P UTS714E15S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.7) UTS014D15P UTS014D15S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.4) UTS714D15P32 UTS714D15S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.5) UTS714D15P UTS714D15S
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 121
UTS Series
14E15/14D15
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
30.4
35.1
18
Ø22.3
3.5
3
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
4.2 18
Ø22.3
3.5
3
18
Ø22.3
3.5
3
Plug - UTS6
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
70
Ø35.1
Ø35.1
25.3
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
11.3
Ø22.3
2.3
7.5
23.2
28.8
Ø3.2
Front view
7.8
75
82
UTS7
UTS0
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
23.2
23.2
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
24.5
25.9
30°
68°
22°
3.2
5.5
2.5 2.7
6.1
5.1
5.3
6.2
2.8
0.3
5.7
1.9
1
3.5
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front mounting
Ø21.5
Rear mounting
Ø25.1
Mechanics
15 contacts
4A/50V
per IEC 61984
122 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
14E15/14D15
UTS 14E15/14D15 derating curves
Jam nut sealing caps Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Accessories
Electrical characteristics
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS614DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGE
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS14DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGR
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005588A 85005597
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD14B
Gasket
UL
12A 650V UL94 HB
CSA
12A 650V UL94 HB
IEC
4A 50V 1.5kV 3
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
1.31mm²
Color coding rings
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR
UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY
UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
0
5
3
8
10
20
18
15
13
23
25
28
30
© 2011 – SOURIAU 123
UTS Series
14E15/14D15
Mechanics
124 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
14E18/14D18
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.6) UTS014E18P UTS014E18S
Plug
Without (Fig.1) UTS614E18P UTS614E18S
Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC14E18P UTS6JC14E18S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.3) UTS714E18P UTS714E18S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.7) UTS014D18P UTS014D18S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.4) UTS714D18P32 UTS714D18S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.5) UTS714D18P UTS714D18S
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 125
UTS Series
14E18/14D18
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
30.4
35.1
18
Ø22.3
3.5
3
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
4.2 18
Ø22.3
3.5
3
18
Ø22.3
3.5
3
Plug - UTS6
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
70
Ø35.1
Ø35.1
25.3
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
11.3
Ø22.3
2.3
7.5
23.2
28.8
Ø3.2
Front view
7.8
75
82
UTS7
UTS0
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
24.5
25.9
23.2
23.2
Ø3.3
1.6
3.3
6.1
Ø22
Ø26.2
Ø30.5
22°
30°
68°
10
Ø3.1
4.9
2.8
5.7
6.4
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front mounting
Ø21.5
Rear mounting
Ø25.1
Mechanics
18 contacts
5A/50V
per IEC 61984
126 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
14E18/14D18
UTS 14E18/14D18 derating curves
Jam nut sealing caps Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Accessories
Electrical characteristics
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS614DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGE
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS14DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGR
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005588A 85005597
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD14B
Gasket
UL
4A 250V UL94 HB
CSA
4A 250V UL94 HB
IEC
5A 50V 1.5kV 3
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
Color coding rings
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR
UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY
UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
0
6
4
2
8
10
© 2011 – SOURIAU 127
UTS Series
14E18/14D18
Mechanics
128 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
1419 - 14E19/14D19
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Crimp
contacts supply
separately
see page 131
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig.1) UTS1JC1419P UTS1JC1419S
Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS61419P UTS61419S
Plug Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC1419P UTS6JC1419S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.4) UTS71419P UTS71419S
PCB
contacts supply
separately
see page 131
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.4) UTS71419P UTS71419S
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.8) UTS014E19P UTS014E19S
Plug
Without (Fig.2) UTS614E19P UTS614E19S
Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC14E19P UTS6JC14E19S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.5) UTS714E19P UTS714E19S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.9) UTS014D19P UTS014D19S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.6) UTS714D19P32 UTS714D19S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.7) UTS714D19P UTS714D19S
Layout
Sealed unmated
Square fl ange receptacle
© 2011 – SOURIAU 129
UTS Series
1419 - 14E19/14D19
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length
Fig. 8
Fig. 9
11.3
Ø22.3
2.3
7.5
78
23.2
28.8
Ø3.2
Front view
75
82
UTS7
UTS0
Free hanging - UTS1 Plug - UTS6
78.5
Ø22.3
Fig. 1
Female
Male
Fig. 2 Fig. 3
33 70
Ø35.1
Ø35.1
25.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
30.4
35.1
18
3.5 3
12.3
Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7
Fig. 4
4.2 18
Ø22.3
3.5
3
18
Ø22.3
Ø22.3
3.5
3
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
24.5
25.9
23.2
23.2
Ø3.3
1.6
4.9
Ø22
Ø26.2
Ø30.5
30°
68°
10
Ø3.1
3.3
6.6
2.8 5.7
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 22°
Front mounting
Ø21.5
Rear mounting
Ø25.1
Mechanics
19 contacts
5A/32V
per IEC 61984
130 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
1419 - 14E19/14D19
Metal terminal
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
Crimp tooling
Contacts Contact size
Part number
of head
RM/RC 24W3K(1)
Standard contacts
#20
Ø 1mm
S20RM
RM/RC 20W3K(1) S20RM
RM/RC 18W3K(1) S20RM
SM/SC 24W3S(2) S20SCM20
SM/SC 24WL3S(3) S20SCM20
SM/SC 20W3S(2) S20SCM20
SM/SC 20WL3S(3) S20SCM20
Jam nut sealing caps
Part number
UTS14DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGR
Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Part number
UTS614DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGE
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005588A 85005597
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD14B
Gasket
Color coding rings
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR
UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY
UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG
Handle Tool kit
Part number
TOOLKIT
Part number
SHANDLES
(1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143
(2): contact reeled
(3): loose contact
Accessories and tooling
Metal terminal
© 2011 – SOURIAU 131
UTS Series
1419 - 14E19/14D19
Contacts
IEC
5A 32V 1.5kV 3
Electrical characteristics UTS 1419 - 14E19/14D19 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
UTS 1419
UL
5A 250V UL94 V-0
CSA
4A 250V UL94 V-0
UTS 14E19/14D19
UL
4A 250V UL94 HB
CSA
4A 250V UL94 HB
0 20 40 60 80 100
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
120
#20 Contact type AWG
Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
Male Female insulator Ø
Crimp
Machined
26-24 RM24W3K(1) RC24W3K(1) - 1.58
22-20 RM20W3K(1) RC20W3K(1) - 1.58
20-18 RM18W3K(1) RC18W3K(1) - 2.1
stamped & formed
reeled contacts
26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58
26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58
22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08
22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08
PCB
Machined (3) - RMW5016K RCW5016K - -
(1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143
(2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6
(3): For dimensions see page 148
Mechanics
19 contacts
5A/32V
per IEC 61984
132 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR OR OR
WITH
UTS Series
1823
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Crimp
contacts supply
separately
see page 135
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.1) UTS01823P UTS01823S
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS1JC1823P UTS1JC1823S
Plug Without (Fig.3) UTS61823P UTS61823S
Plug Cable gland (Fig.4) UTS6JC1823P UTS6JC1823S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.5) UTS71823P UTS71823S
PCB
contacts supply
separately
see page 135
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.1) UTS01823P UTS01823S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.5) UTS71823P UTS71823S
Layout
134 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
1823
Accessories and tooling
(1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143
Metal terminal
Crimp tooling
Contacts Contact size
Part number
of head
RM/RC 28M1K(1)
Standard contacts
#16
Ø 1.6mm
S16RCM20
RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16
RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450
RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14
SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11
RMDXK10D28K
Coaxial contacts
M10S-1J
RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DXK10D28 +
york090 M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J
Jam nut sealing caps
Part number
UTS18DCG
Part number
UTS18DCGR
Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Part number
UTS618DCG
Part number
UTS18DCGE
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
8500-5590A 8500-5599
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD16B
Gasket
Handle Tool kit
Part number
TOOLKIT
Part number
SHANDLES
Metal terminal
© 2011 – SOURIAU 135
UTS Series
1823
Contacts
120
UL
10A 500V UL94 V-0
CSA
7A 500V UL94 V-0
IEC
9A 63V 1.5kV 3
Electrical characteristics UTS 1823 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
1.31mm²
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
0 20 40 60 80 100
0
3
5
8
10
13
15
18
20
23
25
28
30
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
120
#16 Contact type AWG
Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
Male Female insulator Ø
Crimp
Machined
30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1
26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6
22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8
22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2
20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2
16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2
16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2
Stamped & formed
reeled contacts
26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 -
22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 -
18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 -
18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 -
14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 -
PCB
Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - -
Coaxial
Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - -
Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Twisted pair Multipiece -
RMDXK10D28 +
york090
RCDXK1D28 +
york090 - -
Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Fiber
optic
POF contacts
Plastic optical fi bre
- RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - -
(1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143
(2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6
(3): For dimensions see page 148
Mechanics
23 contacts
9A/63V
per IEC 61984
136 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
1832
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Crimp
contact supply
separately
see page 139
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig.1) UTS1JC1832P UTS1JC1832S
Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS61832P UTS61832S
Plug Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC1832P UTS6JC1832S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.4) UTS71832P UTS71832S
PCB
contacts supply
separately
see page 139
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.4) UTS71832P UTS71832S
Layout
138 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
1832
Metal terminal
Crimp tooling
Contacts Contact size
Part number
of head
RM/RC 24W3K(1)
Standard contacts
#20
Ø 1mm
S20RM
RM/RC 20W3K(1) S20RM
RM/RC 18W3K(1) S20RM
SM/SC 24W3S(2) S20SCM20
SM/SC 24WL3S(3) S20SCM20
SM/SC 20W3S(2) S20SCM20
SM/SC 20WL3S(3) S20SCM20
Jam nut sealing caps
Part number
UTS18DCG
Part number
UTS18DCGR
Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Part number
UTS618DCG
Part number
UTS18DCGE
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
8500-5590A 8500-5599
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD16B
Gasket
Handle Tool kit
Part number
TOOLKIT
Part number
SHANDLES
(1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143
(2): contact reeled
(3): loose contact
Accessories and tooling
Metal terminal
© 2011 – SOURIAU 139
UTS Series
1832
Contacts
UL
5A 250V UL94 V-0
CSA
4A 250V UL94 V-0
IEC
4A 32V 1.5kV 3
Electrical characteristics UTS 1832 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
0 20 40 60 80 100
0
2
4
6
8
10
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
120
#20 Contact type AWG
Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
Male Female insulator Ø
Crimp
Machined
26-24 RM24W3K(1) RC24W3K(1) - 1.58
22-20 RM20W3K(1) RC20W3K(1) - 1.58
20-18 RM18W3K(1) RC18W3K(1) - 2.1
stamped & formed
reeled contacts
26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58
26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58
22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08
22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08
PCB
Machined (3) - RMW5016K RCW5016K - -
(1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143
(2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6
(3): For dimensions see page 148
Mechanics
32 contacts
4A/32V
per IEC 61984
UTS Series
© 2011 – SOURIAU 141
Contacts
UTS Series
Description ....................................................................................................................................... 142
Contact plating selector guide ................................................................................................... 143
Contact selector guide ................................................................................................................. 144
Packaging ......................................................................................................................................... 144
Crimp contacts ................................................................................................................................ 145
#16 coaxial contacts .................................................................................................................... 147
PCB contacts ................................................................................................................................... 148
Fibre optic contacts ....................................................................................................................... 149
142 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
Contacts
Contacts
Description
The UTS series is delivered with (solder and PCB versions) or without contact (crimp version). When contacts are not loaded, this series offers
the unique possibility to use the same contact in any layout as long as it receives the same active part size. Thus it is possible to buy only
one contact reference and equip all connectors even if housings are different.
The main benefit is the standardisation which means reduction of inventory cost.
Bearing in mind that any additional tool or complicated assembly process should be avoided, our contacts are based on a snap-in principle
which avoid the use of an insertion tool.
Crimp contacts are available in different versions:
In addition, UTS series can obviously be equipped with solder contacts, PCB contacts, screw termination.
• machined • stamped & formed • coaxial • fiber optic
© 2011 – SOURIAU 143
UTS Series
Contacts
Contact plating selector guide
As soon as you know what contact size you need, you next have to decide on which type to use.
Souriau proposes mainly two different types of electrical contacts:
- Machined
- Stamped & formed
Machined contacts are generally chosen for low quantities purpose as well as a better solution for power applications.
Stamped & formed contacts offer the ability to be crimped automatically which makes them more suitable for high volume production
applications.
Then comes the question: What plating should I choose ?
Hereunder is a graph with criteria to guide you:
NB: do not mix different plating (e.g. tin plated pin contact with gold plated socket contact).
250
100
0.4μm of gold
min
Gold fl ash
Silver
Tin
5mA
5mV
Contact
size
#20 #12
#16 #8
Vibration
Number of
cycles
Current /
Voltage
Contacts
144 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
Contacts
Electrical characteristics:
contact resistance
#20
Ø1mm
Machined < 6m
Stamped & formed < 15m
#16
Ø1.6mm
Machined < 3m
Stamped & formed < 6m
#12
Ø2.4mm
Machined < 5m
#8
Ø3.6mm
Machined < 5m
Available platings (contact supply separately)
A 2μ Ni + 2μ Ag
J Gold fl ash over 2μ Ni
K Min 0.4μ gold over 2μ Ni
S31
Active part: Gold fl ash over Ni
Crimp area: Nickel
S18
Active part: 0.75μ gold min
over 2μ Ni
Crimp area: 1.3μ tin over Ni
Other: Nickel
S25
S26
Active part: 0.75μ Au over Ni
Crimp area: fl ash Au over Ni
T
T: 2μm Ni mini all over +
3 to 5 μm Sn all over
TK6 2-5μ Sn pre-plated
Conscious of the wide variety of applications, contact packaging has been considered for small series (bulk packaging) and high volume
production (reeled contacts):
Size contacts #20 & #16
• 100 pieces bulk packing
(stamped & formed contacts)
Electrical characteristics:
contact resistance
#20
Ø1mm
Machined < 4m
#16
Ø1.6mm
Machined < 3m
Available platings (contact preloaded)
Min 0.4μ gold over 2μ Ni
Contact preloaded
Contact supply separately
• 50 pieces bulk packing
(machined contacts)
• 25 pieces bulk packing
(stamped & formed
contacts)
• 1000 pieces bulk
packing
(machined contacts)
• 5000 pieces reeled
(machined contacts)
• 3000 pieces reeled
(stamped & formed
contacts)
Size contacts #12 & #8
Contact selector guide
Packaging
© 2011 – SOURIAU 145
UTS Series
Contacts
Crimp contacts
(1) contact reeled (2) loose contact
Exemple: RM24W3K - Size #20, Machined, AWG24 wire.
Contact
size
Type
Wire size Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
insulator Ø
Plating
AWG mm² Male Female available
#20
Ø1 mm
Machined 26-24 0.13-0.20 RM24W3K RC24W3K 1.58 max K
Stamped &
Formed
26-24 0.13-0.25
SM24W3-(1) SC24W3-(1)
0.89-1.58
TK6
S25 (female)
SM24WL3-(2) SC24WL3-(2) S26 (male)
Machined 22-20 0.32-0.52 RM20W3K RC20W3K 1.58 max K
Stamped &
Formed
22-20 0.35-0.5
SM20W3-(1) SC20W3-(1)
1.17-2.08
TK6
S25 (female)
SM20WL3-(2) SC20WL3-(2) S26 (male)
Machined 20-18 0.50-0.93 RM18W3K RC18W3K 2.10 max K
#16
Ø1.6
mm
Machined 30-28 0.05-0.08 RM28M1- RC28M1- 0.55 1.1 K, J, T
Machined 26-24 0.13-0.2 RM24M9- RC24M9- 0.8 1.6 K, J, T
Stamped &
Formed
26-24 0.13-0.25
SM24M1-(1)
SM24ML1-(2)
SC24M1-(1)
SC24ML1-(2) 0.89-1.28
Insulation
grip
S31, S18, TK6
Machined 22-20 0.32-0.52
RM20M13- RC20M13-
1.18
1.8
K, J, T
RM20M12- RC20M12- 2.2
Stamped &
Formed
22-20 0.35-0.5
SM20M1-(1)
SM20ML1-(2)
SC20M1-(1)
SC20ML1-(2) 1.17-2.08
Insulation
grip
S31, S18, TK6
Machined 20-16 0.52-1.5 RM16M23- RC16M23- 1.8 3.2 K, J, T
Stamped &
Formed
18-16 0.8-1.5
SM16M1-(1)
SM16ML1-(2)
SC16M1-(1)
SC16ML1-(2) 3.0
No insulation
grip
S31, S18, TK6
Stamped &
Formed
18-16 0.8-1.5
SM16M11-(1)
SM16ML11-(2)
SC16M11-(1)
SC16ML11-(2) 2.0-3.0
Insulation
grip
S31, S18, TK6
Machined 16-14 1.5-2.5 RM14M50- RC14M50- 2.05 3.2 K, J, T
Machined 16-14 1.5-2.5 RM14M30- RC14M30- 2.28 3.2 K, J, T
Stamped &
Formed
14 2.0-2.5
SM14M1-(1)
SM14ML1-(2)
SC14M1-(1)
SC14ML1-(2) 3.2
No insulation
grip
S31, S18, TK6
#12
Ø2.4
mm
Machined
22 0.13-0.4 82911457NA 82911456A
- 4.9 A, K
20 0.5 82911459NA 82911458A
18 0.75-1.0 82911461NA 82911460A
16 1.5 82911463NA 82911462A
14 2.5 82911465NA 82911464A
12 4 82911467NA 82911466A
#8
Ø3.6
mm
Machined
16 1.5 82913601A 82913600A
- 6.5 A
14 2.5 82913603A 82913602A
12 4 82913605A 82913604A
10 6.0 82913607A 82913606A
8 10.0 82913609A 82913608A
Standard version
Contacts
146 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Contact 1
Contact 2
Standard male
contact
Standard female
contact
Longer male
contact
Standard male
contact
Standard female
contact
FMLB
Shorter female
contact
LMFB
UTS Series
Contacts
Crimp contacts
Exemple: RM16M3GE1K - Size #16, Machined, Longer male, AWG16 wire.
First Mate Last Break contacts should
be chosen only if the cavity is not
marked with the earth symbol. For
cavities marked with the earth symbol,
standard contacts will fulfi ll the same
role as a fi rst mate, last break contact
used in a standard cavity.
Ground symbol
How to make FMLB / LMFB connection
First Mate Last Break contacts
Contact
size
Type
Wire size Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
insulator Ø
Color band
Plating
available
AWG mm² Male Female Front Rear
#16
Ø1.6 mm
Longer male
contact
(+1mm)
Machined
30-28 0.05-0.08 RM28M1GE1□
-
0.55 1.1 - Red
□ =
K, J or T
26-24 0.13-0.2 RM24M9GE1□ 0.8 1.6 Red Red
22-20 0.32-0.52
RM20M13GE1□
1.18
1.8 Black Red
RM20M12GE1□ 2.2 Blue Red
20-16 0.52-1.5 RM16M23GE1□ 1.8 3.2 - Red
16-14 1.5-2.5 RM14M50GE1□ 2.05 - - Red
16-14 1.5-2.5 RM14M30GE1□ 2.28 - - Red
#16
Ø1.6 mm
Shorter
female
contact
(-0.7mm)
Machined
30-28 0.05-0.08
-
RC28M1GE7□ 0.55 1.1 - Blue
□ =
K, J or T
26-24 0.13-0.2 RC24M9GE7□ 0.8 1.6 Red Blue
22-20 0.32-0.52
RC20M13GE7□
1.18
1.8 Black Blue
RC20M12GE7□ 2.2 Blue Blue
20-16 0.52-1.5 RC16M23GE7□ 1.8 3.2 - Blue
16-14 1.5-2.5 RC14M50GE7□ 2.05 - - Blue
16-14 1.5-2.5 RC14M30GE7□ 2.28 - - Blue
ont Re
© 2011 – SOURIAU 147
UTS Series
Contacts
#16 coaxial contacts
We provide 2 types of coaxial contacts suitable for 50 or 75, coaxial cable or twisted pair cable.
Monocrimp coaxial contact
• The monocrimp one-piece coaxial contacts offer high reliability plus
the economic advantage of a 95% reduction in installation time over
conventional assembly methods.
• This economy is achieved by simultaneously crimping both the inner
conductor and outer braid or drain wire.
Multipiece crimp coaxial contact
• The inner conductor and outer braid is crimped individually.
• The thermoplastic insulating bushing in the outer body is designed
to accept and permanently retain the inner contact.
• An outer ferrule is used to connect the braid to the outer contact
and provide cable support to ensure against bending and vibration.
Suitable for Coaxial cable or Twisted cable
• For jacket diameter from 1.78 to 3.05mm
Inner conductor up to 2.44mm diameter
• For jacket diameter from 0.64 to 1.45mm
Inner conductor from AWG30 to AWG24
Contacts for coaxial cable summary
Contact type
Contact range
Contact part number with
cable combination
Cabling notice
Male contact Female contact
Multipiece RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28
See page 176
See pages 180 & 181
Monocrimp RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 See page 182
Contacts for twisted pairs cable summary
Contact type
Contact range Contact part number with
cable combination
Cabling notice
Male contact Female contact
Multipiece RMDXK10D28
+ YORK090
RCDXK1D28
+ YORK090 See page 177
See page 178
Monocrimp RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 See page 179
Coaxial contact range
Contacts
148 © 2011 – SOURIAU
PCB contacts
PCB contacts
PCB soldering
UTS range can be carried out with a wave soldering process, but not refl ow soldering
process.
All high temperature processes are prohibited.
Nominal length (G)
Dimension of dipsolder contacts out of connector
(contacts to be ordered separately).
Contact size Type
Part number
Plating
Male Female
#20
Ø1mm
Short version RMW50A7K RCW50A7K
K
Long version RMW5016K RCW5016K
#16
Ø1.6mm
Short version RM20M12E8□ RC20M12E8□
□=K or T
Long version RM20M12E83□
RC20M12E83□
RC20M12E84□
Exemple: RM50A7K - Size #20, Short version, male.
UTS Series
Contacts
G
* Plating indication: see plating table
Connector size
Pin contact Socket contact
RM20M12E8*□ RM20M12E83*□ RC20M12E8*□ RC20M12E83*□ RC20M12E84*□
10 4 9.1 3.3 8.5 12.1
12 4 9.1 3.3 8.5 12.1
14 4 9.1 3.3 8.5 12.1
16 4 9.1 3.3 8.5 12.1
Connector size
Pin contact Socket contact
RM20M
12E8*□
RM20M
12E83*□
RMW
50A7K
RMW
5016K
RC20M
12E8*□
RC20M
12E83*□
RCW
50A7K
RCW
5016K
10 4.1 9.2 9.51 10.41 4.65 8.5 2.4 3.04
12 4 9.2 9.51 10.41 3.3 8.5 2.4 3.04
14 4 9.2 9.51 10.41 3.3 8.5 2.4 3.04
16 4 9.2 9.51 10.41 3.3 8.5 2.4 3.04
UTS0
UTS7
© 2011 – SOURIAU 149
Fibre optic contacts
Size 16 Fibre optic contacts for TRIM TRIO® connectors
Size 16 Fibre optic contacts are optical contacts designed for the integration of optical links in all TRIM TRIO® cable connectors.
The Fibre optic contacts are designed to accommodate:
• Plastic Optical Fibre (POF)
1 mm core and 2.2 mm jacket
• Plastic Clad Fibre (PCF)
230μm core and 2.2 mm jacket
Typical features and benefits are:
• Socket contact is spring loaded to avoid any air gap between the two optical faces.
• Low insertion loss is provided by high precision pieces.
• Single jumpers, multiway harness and active device housings can be supplied regarding customer requirement.
Performance
• Fibre type: ................................................................................................................................POF
• Wave length: ........................................................................................................................650 nm
• Optical insertion loss (typ.): ..........................................................................................2 dB max.
• Jacketed external diameter: ............................................................................................2.2mm
• Temperature range: ....................................................................................................-25°C to +70°C
• Cable retention: ..................................................................................................................... 49N
• Mating cycles without cleaning: .........................................................................................50
• Max. mating cycles: ...............................................................................................................500
Construction
• Contact body: Copper alloy
Connector accommodation
Any TRIM TRIO® size 16 contact can be used in any contact position in any connector in the TRIM TRIO® size 16 interconnection system :
UTP, UTS, UTG, UTO.
UTS Series
Contacts
Description
Technical characteristics
Contacts
150 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Fibre optic contacts
UTS Series
Contacts
POF Contact (Plastic Optical Fibre)
Ordering information
Part numbers Descriptions
80WD0005 Stripping tool
80WD0025 Automatic stripping tool for Ø 0.5 mm,
0.6 mm, 0.7 mm & 3.8 mm
80WM0006 Ruler
80WP0005 Polishing plate
80WP0013 Non slip base (to hold the polishing plate)
80WP0014 Polishing disk (grain size 9μm)
80WP0018 Polishing tool
80WP0019 Polishing disk (grain size 30μm)
80WS0002 Crimping plier
STANDARD TOOLING KIT - P/N 80MS0004
The standard tooling kit is made of the part numbers below
that can be ordered separately as well.
Part numbers Descriptions
80WG0010 Needle
80WG0015 Capsule
80WG0016 Syringe
80WN0005 Dry air spray
80WN0006 Optical paper
80WN0012 Dropping bottle
80WN0008 Wiping solvent
SPECIFIC TOOLING LIST - can be ordered only separately
POF Contacts (Plastic Optical Fibre)
Male contact ................................................RMPOF1000
Female contact ......................................... RCPOF1000B
© 2011 – SOURIAU 151
UTS Series
Contacts
Contacts
UTS Series
© 2011 – SOURIAU 153
Technical information
UTS Series
Tooling ............................................................................................................................................... 154
Assembly intruction ....................................................................................................................... 156
Dimensions overmoulded harnesses ...................................................................................... 162
Extraction tools ............................................................................................................................... 162
Rated current & working voltage ............................................................................................... 163
UV resistance .................................................................................................................................. 164
UL94 + UL1977 ............................................................................................................................. 165
IEC 61984 & IP codes explained ............................................................................................. 168
What is NEMA rating ? ................................................................................................................. 170
Ethernet for the layman ................................................................................................................ 171
154 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
Technical information
Souriau has been working in partnership with Mecal for a good number of years. With sales offi ces located
in all major industrial regions of the world, the combined strengths of both organisations has resulted in a
truly global solution to all your production tooling needs.
Mecal sales network:
Mecal is leader in manufacturing tooling for
crimping terminals over a stripped wire.
Established in 1976, Mecal has become one of the
world's leading companies dedicated to the design
and manufacture of semi automatic production tools
for strip fed, open barrel crimp terminals, serving
the Automotive, Telecom and Datacomm industry.
The extreme environment interconnect specialist
“from deep sea to deep space”.
Souriau designs manufactures and markets high
performance interconnect solutions for severe
environments dedicated to the aerospace, defence,
light and heavy industry markets.
Mini Applicator Stripper Presses
Tooling
www.mecal.net/eng/retevendita.php
Automatic crimping tools
© 2011 – SOURIAU 155
UTS Series
Technical information
Contact size Part number Head Handles
#20
1mm
RM/RC 24W3 -
S20RCM
SHANDLES
RM/RC 20W3 -
RM/RC 18W3 -
SM 24W3S-(1)
SC 24W3S-(1)
S20SCM20 SM 24WL3S-(2)
SC 24WL3S-(2)
SM/SC 20W3S-(1)
SM/SC 20WL3S-(2)
#16
1.6mm
RM/RC 28M1-
S16RCM20 RM/RC 24M9-
RM/RC 20M13-
RM/RC 20M12-
RM/RC 16M23- S16RCM16
RM/RC 14M50- S16RCM1450
RM/RC 14M30- S16RCM14
SM/SC 24M1-
SM/SC 24ML1- S16SCM20 SM/SC 20M1-
SM/SC 20ML1-
SM/SC 16M1-
SM/SC 16ML1- S16SCML1 SM/SC 14M1-
SM/SC 14ML1-
SM/SC 16M11-
SM/SC 16ML11- S16SCML11
Specifi c contacts
Contact size Part number
Tool with separate locator
Extraction tools
Hand tool Positioner + locator setting
#12
2.4mm
8291 1457N- / 8291 1456-
M317 VGE10077A
1-2
5106020924
8291 1459N- / 8291 1458- 2
8291 1461N- / 8291 1460- 2
8291 1463N- / 8291 1462- 3
8291 1465N- / 8291 1464- 3
8291 1467N- / 8291 1466- 4
#8
3.6mm
8291 3601A / 8291 3600A
M317 VGE10078A
3
51060210936
8291 3603A / 8291 3602A 3
8291 3605A / 8291 3604A 4
8291 3607A / 8291 3606A 5
8291 3609A / 8291 3608A 6/7
Contact size Part number
Hand tools
(SHANDLES) head
Tool with separate locator
Extraction tools
Hand tool Positioner + locator setting
#16
Ø 1.6mm
Longer RM
contact
RM28M1GE1-
S16RCM20
RX2025GE1
RM24M9GE1-
RM20M13GE1-
RM16M23 GE1- S16RCM16 MH860 MH86186 6/8
RM14M50 GE1- S16RCM1450
M317 UH25 3
RM14M30 GE1- S16RCM14
#16
Ø 1.6mm
Shorter RC
contact
RC28M1GE7-
S16RCM20
MH860 MH86164G
4/6
RC24M9GE7- 5/6
RC20M13GE7-
RC20M12GE7- 5/7
RC16M23GE7- S16RCM16 6/8
RC14M50GE7- S16RCM1450
M317 UH25 3
RC14M30GE7- S16RCM14
Standard contacts
Coaxial contacts
See cabling notice chapter Appendices, pages 178 to 182.
(1) contact reeled (2) loose contact
Note: endurance of SHANDLES tool = 5 000 cycles.
51060210924
51060210936
SHANDLES
Crimptooling table
Technical information
156 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Assembly instruction
Part number Stripping
length L
Male Female (mm)
Machined contact #16
RM28M1- / RM24M9-
RM20M13- / RM20M12-
RC28M1- / RC24M9-
RC20M13- / RC20M12- 4.8
RM16M23- / RM14M50-
RM14M30-
RC16M23- / RC14M50-
RC14M30- 7.1
#20
RM24W3- / RM20W3-
RM18W3-
RC24W3- / RC20W3-
RC18W3- 4.8
Stamped & formed #16
SM24M1- / SM24ML1-
SM20M1- / SM20ML1
SC24M1- / SC24ML1-
SC20M1- / SC20ML1- 4
SM16M11- / SM16ML11- SC16M11- / SC16ML11- 4.65
SM16M1- / SM16ML1- SC16M1- / SC16ML1- 6.35
SM14M1- / SM14ML1- SC16M11- / SC16ML11- 6.35
Screw contacts Power contacts #12
8291 1457- / 8291 1459- /
8291 1461- / 8291 1463- /
8291 1465- / 8291 1467-
8291 1456- / 8291 1458- /
8291 1460- /8291 1462- /
8291 1464- / 8291 1466 -
7 to 8
Power contacts #8
8291 3601- / 8291 3603- /
8291 3605-
8291 3607- / 8291 3609-
8291 3600- / 8291 3602- /
8291 3604- / 8291 3606- /
8291 3608-
6.5 to 7.5
Contact delivered with connector 5.8
Part number Stripping
length L
Male Female (mm)
Machined contact #16 & #20 5
L
L
L
L
Without insulation support
With insulation support
L
UTS Series
Technical information
Wire stripping crimp version
Wire stripping solder version
© 2011 – SOURIAU 157
One of the key factors which affects the performance of a connector,
is the way contacts are terminated. Crimped connections are
nowadays seen as the best solution to ensure quality throughout the
lifetime of the product. Here are some reasons why we recommend
this method of termination for UTS connectors:
Advantages (Extract from the IEC 60352-2):
- Effi cient processing of connections at each production level
- Processing by fully-automatic or semi- automatic crimping
machines, or with hand operated tools
- No cold-soldered joints
- No degradation of the spring characteristic of female contacts
by the soldering temperature
- No health risk from heavy metal and fl ux steam
- Preservation of conductor fl exibility behind the crimped
connection
- No burnt, discolored and overheated wire insulation
- Good connections with reproducible electrical and mechanical
performances
- Easy production control.
To ensure that the crimp tooling is performing according tooriginal
specifi cations, it is important to carry out regular checks. A common
way to check the performance of tooling is with a simple pull
test, ideally using a dedicated electric pull tester. Minimum recommended
full forces are indicated in the tables below:
Active
contact
part
Contact type
Die
location
on heads
Wire
section
range
Section
(mm²)
Tensile
straight
test (mini)
Height
(Mm)
H (±0.075)
Width
(Mm)
W (±0.075)
Head's P/N
Machined
contacts
size 20
RM/RC 24W3* 26/24
AWG 26 0.12 min 15 N
0.95 1.27
S20RCM
AWG 24 0.25 max 32 N
RM/RC 20W3* 22/20
AWG 22 0.32 min 40 N
1.26 1.78
AWG 20 0.50 max 60 N
RM/RC 18W3* 20/18
AWG 20 0.50 max 60 N
1.35 1.86
AWG 18 0.82 max 90 N
S & F
contacts
size 20
SM/SC 24WL3TK6* 26/24
AWG 26 0.12 min 15 N
0.80 1.49
S20SCM20
AWG 24 0.25 max 32 N
SM/SC 20WL3TK6* 22/20
AWG 22 0.32 min 40 N
1.01 1.53
AWG 20 0.50 max 60 N
Machined
contacts
size 16
RM/RC 28M1K* 30/28
AWG 30 0.05 min 11 N
1.14 1.41
S16RCM20
AWG 28 0.08 max 11 N
RM/RC 24M9K* 26/24
AWG 26 0.12 min 15 N
1.15 1.41
AWG 24 0.25 max 32 N
RM/RC 20M13K*
22/20
AWG 22 0.32 min 40 N
1.26 1.76
AWG 20 0.50 max 60 N
RM/RC 20M12K*
AWG 22 0.32 min 40 N
AWG 20 0.50 max 60 N
RM/RC 16M23K*
20 AWG 20 0.50 max 60 N 1.66 2.18
18 AWG 18 0.82 max 90 N 1.80 2.28 S16RCM16
16 AWG 16 1.50 max 150 N 1.96 2.43
RM/RC 14M30K*
16 AWG 16 1.50 min 150 N 2.10 2.68
S16RCM14
14 AWG 14 2.50 min 230 N 2.30 2.78
RM/RC 14M50K*
16 AWG 16 1.50 min 150 N 2.09 2.59
S16RCM1450
14 AWG 14 2.50 max 230 N 2.26 2.71
S & F
contacts
size 16
SM/SC 24ML1TK6* 26/24
AWG 26 0.12 min 15 N
0.84 1.50
S16SCM20
AWG 24 0.25 max 32 N
SM/SC 20ML1TK6* 22/20
AWG 22 0.32 min 40 N
1.02 1.54
AWG 20 0.50 max 60 N
SM/SC
16ML11TK6*
18 AWG 18 0.82 min 90 N 1.32 2.09
S16SCML11
16 AWG 16 1.50 max 150 N 1.36 2.10
SM/SC 16ML1TK6*
18 AWG 18 0.82 min 90 N 1.49 2.02
16 AWG 16 1.50 max 150 N 1.7 2.05 S16SCML1
SM/SC14ML1TK6* 14 AWG 14 2.50 max 230 N 1.79 2.58
(1): example of plating, for other plating see page 143
W W
H
H
Machined
contact
Stamped & Formed
contact
UTS Series
Technical information
Crimping
Technical information
158 © 2011 – SOURIAU
• Strip wires, crimp or solder contacts
• Insert contacts into connector cavities (insert manually or use tool RTM205 crimp contacts only)
• Place receptacle in the panel cut-out, with optional gasket
• Secure receptacle with screws (not supplied)
Gasket (optional) Gasket (optional)
Front mounting : Crimp version Rear mounting : Crimp version
Optional
coding ring
Optional
coding ring
Panel thickness:
2.5mm max
Panel
Receptacle fl ange Receptacle fl ange
3mm max 3mm max
Pa
Gasket (optional) Optional
coding ring
Optional
coding ring
Front mounting : Solder version Rear mounting : Solder version
Gasket (optional)
UTS Series
Technical information
UTS 0 assembly (mounting suggestion)
© 2011 – SOURIAU 159
Shell size
Nut tightening
torque (Nm)
Ø Wire
10 1 from
1.7 mm to
3.0 mm
12 1.5
14 1.5
Nut
Grommet
+ Compression ring
Optional
coding ring
• Slide accessories on the cable (make sure to keep compression ring on the grommet)
• Strip wires and crimp contacts
• Insert fi rst contact into the grommet (fi rst contact in cavity A, use male contact to
pierce the grommet, no tool is required), then insert the contact in the connector
cavity A (insert manually or use tool RTM205)
• Place the grommet and compression ring on the insulator
• Insert the other contacts
• Tighten nut (recommended torque: see note)
Shell size
Jam nut
torque
(Nm)
Tool
tightening
Ø Wire
Standard
version
Discrete
wire
sealing
8 1.5 19.05
3.2 mm
max.
from
1.7 mm
to
3.0 mm
10 3 22.25
12 4 27.15
14 5 30.19
18 5 36.5
• Strip wires, crimp or solder contacts
• Insert contacts into connector cavities (insert
manually or use tool RTM205 crimp contacts only)
• Seat o-ring, place receptacle in the panel cut-out
• Tighten jam nut
O-ring
O-ring
Jam nut
Jam nut
Panel thickness:
3.2mm max
Panel thickness:
3.2mm max
Optional
coding ring
Optional
coding ring
Crimp version
Solder version
Finally
UTS Series
Technical information
UTS 7 assembly (mounting suggestion)
UTS 6 GN / UTS 7 GN assembly
Technical information
160 © 2011 – SOURIAU
• Slide accessories on the cable
• Strip external cable jacket
• Strip wires and crimp contacts
• Insert contacts into connector
cavities (insert manually or use tool
RTM205)
• Tight adapter with plug, choose right
seal (waste the other seal), tight nut
with adapter (recommended torque
values to be applied according to
the table - right)
• Caution: only one of both delivered
gasket should be used !
Shell
size
Recommended
jacket strip
length (mm)
Adapter
tightening
torque
(Nm)
Nut
tightening
torque
(Nm)
Ø Cable
range
Standard
seal
Ø Cable
range
Reducing
seal
Ø Wire
Male Female
10 21 29 1.5 2 2.5/8.0 1.5/5.0
3.2 mm
max.
12 25 33 2 2.5 5.0/12.0 3.0/9.0
14 29 36 3 2.5 7.0/14.0 5.0/12.0
18 37 45 4 3.5 9.0/18.0 7.0/16.0
Coding ring
Nut
Adapter + mounted gasket
Make sure the seal is positioned as shown.
• Slide accessories on the cable
• Strip external cable jacket
• Strip wires and solder contacts
• Tight adapter with plug, choose right
seal (waste the other seal), tight nut
with adapter (recommended torque
values to be applied according to
the table - right)
• Caution: only one of both delivered
gasket should be used !
Shell
size
Recommended
jacket strip
length (mm)
Adapter
tightening
torque
(Nm)
Nut
tightening
torque
(Nm)
Ø Cable
range
Standard
seal
Ø Cable
range
Reducing
seal
Ø Wire
Male
8 17 1 0.75 2.5/6.5 1.5/5.0
3.2 mm
max.
10 21 1.5 2 2.5/8.0 1.5/5.0
12 25 2 2.5 5.0/12.0 3.0/9.0
14 29 3 2.5 7.0/14.0 5.0/12.0
Make sure the seal is positioned as shown.
Assembly instruction
Coding ring
Nut
Adapter + mounted gasket
UTS Series
Technical information
UTS 1 JC / UTS 6 JC assembly: Crimp version
UTS 6 JC assembly: Solder version
© 2011 – SOURIAU 161
Shell size
UTS0
+ UTS6 EN JC & CJC
UTS0
+ UTS6 EN GN
UTS7
+ UTS6 EN JC & CJC
UTS7
+ UTS6 EN GN
A max B max C max D max
8 61.1 - 66.6 -
10 73.2 39.6 77.3 43.7
12 77.6 39.4 81.7 43.5
14 83.5 40 87.6 44.1
18 93.1 - 97.2 -
UTS0 + UTS6
A
B
UTS7 + UTS6
C
D
• Slide accessories on the cable (make sure to keep
compression ring on the grommet)
• Strip external cable jacket
• Strip wires and crimp contacts
• Insert fi rst contact into the grommet (fi rst contact
in cavity A, the contact pierces the grommet, no
tool is required), then insert the contact in the
connector cavity A (insert manually or use tool
RTM205)
• Place the grommet and compression
ring on the insulator
• Insert the other contacts
• Tight adapter with plug, choose right
seal (waste the other seal), tight nut
with adapter (recommended torque
values to be applied according to
the table - right).
Nut
Adapter + mounted gasket
Grommet + Compression ring
Optional coding ring
Shell
size
Recommended
jacket strip
length (mm)
Adapter
tightening
torque
(Nm)
Nut
tightening
torque
(Nm)
Ø Cable
range
Standard
seal
Ø Cable
range
Reducing
seal
Ø Wire
Male Female
10 21 29 1.5 2 2.5/8.0 1.5/5.0 from
1.7 mm
to
3.0 mm
12 25 33 2 2.5 5.0/12.0 3.0/9.0
14 29 36 3 2.5 7.0/14.0 5.0/12.0
UTS Series
Technical information
UTS 1 GJC / UTS 6 GJC assembly
Mated connector length
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Technical information
162 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Extraction:
Place the tool into the cavity from
front face of the connector, push
on the handle, then remove the
contact..
Special case with the tool RX2025GE1:
A - When setting up in the cell, keep fi rmly
the tool by the hexagonal metallic part and
insert tool in cavity.
B - Push the tool by the handle to extract
the contact.
UTS Series
Technical information
51060210924
51060210936
RX2025GE1
Contact size Extractor
#20 RX20D44
#16 RX2025GE1
#12 51060210924
#8 51060210936
L
L1
Shell
size
UTS0 UTS7
L max L1 max L2 max L3 max L max L1 max L2 max L3 max
8 42.8 36.8 80.7 57.2 46.8 36.8 85.8 57.2
10 55.8 50.3 98.6 92 60.5 50.3 102.7 92
12 57.1 51.4 99.3 93.7 61.4 51.4 106.4 93.7
14 62.5 56.3 100.3 94.6 67.6 56.3 104.8 94.6
L2
L3
Dimensions overmoulded harnesses
Extraction tools
Extraction tools instruction for size 16
RX20D44
© 2011 – SOURIAU 163
Rated current & working voltage
The current carrying capacity of a connector is limited by the thermal properties of materials used in it's construction. The amount of current
that can be handled depends on the size of cable used, the ambient temperature and the heat that is generated inside the connector. Part 3
of the IEC 60512 standard determines through a derating curve, the maximum current permissible, which varies from one layout to another
(Fig.1 & Fig.2). Wire size plays an important role as well, since they help to dissipate heat and avoid overheating (Fig.1 & Fig.3).
Please note that the curve should be adjusted when dealing with potential hot spots, which can occur as a result of unequal loading of current
across a number of contacts. As a general rule, it is best to avoid locating power handling contacts in the middle of the connector; try to locate
them towards the edge where heat can be dissipated more effectively. Eventually you should fi nd a level which represents the permissible
operating range:
The rated current is defi ned as uninterrupted continuous current that a connector can take when all contacts are energized simultaneously
without exceeding the maximum limit of temperature. The earth contact is never loaded.
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
3
5
8
10
13
15
18
20
23
25
28
30
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
Fig.1: UTS 12-4 – 1.5mm² wires
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
3
5
8
10
13
15
18
20
23
25
28
30
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
Fig.2: UTS 12-8 – 1.5mm² wires
Current use
Limited use
Not recommended use
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
3
5
8
10
13
15
18
20
23
25
28
30
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
Fig.3: UTS 12-4 – 2.5mm² wires
33
35
UTS Series
Technical information
Current carrying capacity
Technical information
164 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Solar radiation affects all materials, but plastics can be
susceptible to extreme degradation over time.
The choice of materials for the UTS series was therefore
a critical consideration.
All over the world we are not exposed to the same
amount of energy given by the sun. The chart shown
here clearly illustrates this.
So we performed test according to the ISO 4892-2 and
simulated 5 years exposure to outdoor environments
(temperature, humidity, etc...)
After this period there was no signifi cant colour variation,
no crazing, no cracking and no major variation of
mechanical properties.
Yearly mean of daily irradiation in UV (280-400 nm)
on horizontal plane (J/cm²) (1990-2004)
90°
60°
30°
0°
- 30°
- 90°
- 60°
- 180° - 150° - 120° - 90° - 60° - 30° 0° 30° 60° 90° 120° 150° 180°
J/cm²
0
10
20
30
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
150
160
170
180
190
40
140
UTS Series
Technical information
UV resistance
© 2011 – SOURIAU 165
There are two main standards for industrial connectors: UL94 & UL1977
UL94
This standard is dedicated to plastics fl ammability. It characterises how the material burns in various orientation and thicknesses.
The UTS series has been rated at V-0 & HB.
Procedure: A specimen is supported in a vertical or horizontal position and a fl ame is applied to the bottom of the specimen. The fl ame is
applied for ten seconds and then removed until fl aming stops, at which time the fl ame is reapplied for another ten seconds and then removed.
Two sets of fi ve specimens are tested. The two sets are conditioned under different conditions.
V-0 Vertical burning:
• Specimens must not burn with fl aming combustion for more
than 10 seconds after either test fl ame application.
• Total fl aming combustion time must not exceed 50 seconds
for each set of 5 specimens.
• Specimens must not burn with fl aming or glowing combustion
up to the specimen holding clamp.
• Specimens must not drip fl aming particles that ignite the
cotton.
• No specimen can have glowing combustion remain for longer
than 30 seconds after removal of the test fl ame.
~~
5’’
12’’
45°
Cotton
Material
Underwriter Laboratories
HB Horizontal burning:
• A material classed HB shall not have a burning rate exceeding
40 mm per minute over a 75 mm span for specimens having
a thickness of 3.0 to 13 mm.
• A material classed HB shall not have a burning rate exceeding
75 mm per minute over a 75 mm span for specimens having
a thickness less than 3.0 mm.
• A material classed HB shall cease to burn before the 100 mm
reference mark.
45°
45°
Material
100±1mm
25±1mm
10±1mm
Wire gauze
Wire gauze
UTS Series
Technical information
Technical information
166 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Underwriter Laboratories
UL1977
There are several standards which deal with plug and receptacle. Each of them is only for a small area of applications. It could be
telecommunication, Etc. The UL 1977 covers single and multipole connectors intended for factory assembly.
Requirements apply to devices in taking into account intensity and voltage. There a categories as follows:
Type 0 Type 1A
Tybe 1B
Type 2
Type 3
Type 4
0
0
8.3 A
31 A
200 A
1000 A
600 V
30 V
(42 V peak)
According to above table, the level of performance that has to be reached could be different. Most of them are explained in the following page.
Assembly:
Connector has to be keyed to prevent any mismating that can damage the machine or hurt the user. In the same way, plugs and sockets have
to be equipped to protect persons against contact with live parts.
Finally the identifi ed grounding contact shall be located so that the corresponding electrical continuity has to be completed before any other
contact.
Insulating materials:
Material uses for electrical insulation, as a minimum, have to comply with the characteristics shown below:
• Minimum ratings for polymeric materials
Type Flame rating
Relative thermal index (RTI)
Electrical/mechanical w/o impact */**
0 - 50/50
1A HB 50/50
1B HB 50/50
2 HB 50/50
3 HB 50/50
4 HB 50/50
* The RTI of the material shall not be lower than the temperature measured during
the Temperature Test.
** For a thickness less than that for which a value has been established, the RTI of
the minimum thickness with an established value shall be used.
UTS Series
Technical information
© 2011 – SOURIAU 167
Underwriter Laboratories
UL1977
Spacing:
For a 250V max connector, distance through air or over material shall be 1.2mm whereas from 250V to 600V connector the spacing is 3.2
minimum. These distances have to be taken between uninsulated live parts as shown in the matrix below:
An alternative way to determine voltage rating is with the Dielectric-Withstand test. If during one minute there is no arc-over or breakdown
the rated voltage is given as given below:
a) 500 volts for a type 1B device
b) 1000 volts plus twice rated voltage for types 1A, 2, 3 and 4 devices.
• Applicability of spacing requirements
Type
Uninsulated live part - uninsulated
live part of opposite polarity
Uninsulated live part - uninsulated
grounded metal part
Uninsulated live part - exposed
dead metal part
0 No No No
1A Yes Yes Yes
1B Yes Yes No
2 Yes Yes Yes
3 Yes Yes Yes
4 Yes Yes Yes
Marking:
A device shall be legibly marked with the manufacturer's trade name, trade mark, or other descriptive marking by which the organisation
responsible for the product may be identifi ed. (Exception: If the device is too small, or where the legibility would be diffi cult to attain, the
manufacturer’s name, trademark, or other descriptive marking may appear on the smallest unit container or carton)
The following shall be marked on the device or on the smallest unit container or carton or on a stuffer sheet in the smallest unit container or
carton:
a) The catalogue number or an equivalent designation
b) The electrical rating in both volts and amperes, if assigned
c) Whether ac or dc, if restricted
d) Flammability class, if identifi ed
Example - Marking for the arrangement 10-3: 10A 500V UL94 V-0
UTS Series
Technical information
Technical information
168 © 2011 – SOURIAU
The norm is dedicated to connectors with rated voltage above 50V and up to 1000V and rated currents up to 125A per contact. But
depending of your application connectors should be compliant with another standard. This has to be double checked with the customer.
There are lot of constructional requirements and performances specifi ed in that standard. Most of them are illustrated in greater details
hereafter.
Provisions for earthing:
The UTS connector is intended to be used on Class II systems. Even if the purpose of our connector is not to interrupt current, we often
see a need to add a protective earth contact. Then this one shall be a “First mate, last break” style. Critically, among all of the normal
assumptions we make in designing a connector, this contact has to be considered as a live part and must be protected against electric shock
by double or reinforced insulation.
IP Code:
IP is a coding system defi ned by the IEC 60529 to indicate the
degrees of protection provided by an enclosure. The aim of this is to
give information regarding the accessibility of live parts against ingress
of water and other foreign bodies.
1st digit Degree of protection 2nd digit Degree of protection
0 No protection against accidental contact.
No protection against solid foreign bodies.
0 No protection against water.
1 Protection against contacts with any large area by hand and
against large solid foreign bodies with a diameter bigger than 50
mm.
1 Drip-proof.
Protection against vertical water drips.
2 Protection against contacts with the fi ngers.
Protection against solid foreign bodies with a diameter bigger
than 12 mm.
2 Drip-proof.
Protection against water drips up to a 15° angle.
3 Protection against tools, wires or similar objects with a diameter
bigger than 2.5 mm.
Protection against small solid bodies with a diameter bigger than
2.5 mm.
3 Spray-proof.
Protection against diagonal water drips up to a 60° angle.
4 As 3 however diameter is bigger than 1 mm. 4 Splash-proof.
Protection against splashed water from all directions.
5 Full protection against contacts. Protection against interior injurious
dust deposits.
5 Hose-proof.
Protection against water (out of a nozzle) from all directions.
6 Total protection against contacts.
Protection against penetration of dust.
6 Protection against temporary fl ooding.
7 Protection against temporary immersions.
8 Protection against water pressure.
Pressure to be specifi ed by supplier.
9K High pressure hose-proof.
Protection against high pressure water (out of a nozzle) from all
directions.
IP 6 8
First digit
(foreign bodies
protection)
Second digit
(water
protection)
Code letters
(international
Protection)
UTS offers high sealing
performance IP68 / 69K…
Even in dynamic situations.
In addition to the IEC 60529 we conjointly use the DIN 40050 part 9
which are dedicated to road vehicles. The main differences are:
• First digit: 5 replaced by 5K, 6 by 6K. In the DIN the tested
equipment is not depressurized as it is in the IEC.
• Second digit: 5K and 6K has been added and are equivalent
respectively to 5 and 6 but with higher pressure.
9K which represents the High pressure cleaning.
IEC 61984 ed.2.0 “Copyright © 2008 IEC Geneva, Switzerland.www.iec.ch"
IEC 60664-1 ed.2.0 “Copyright © 2007 IEC Geneva, Switzerland.www.iec.ch”
UTS Series
Technical information
IEC 61984
© 2011 – SOURIAU 169
Overvoltage
UTS connectors are qualifi ed to be used on systems rated at Overvoltage category III
Per the IEC 60664-1 (formely VDE 0110) each category is linked to the end application and where the device will be implemented:
• Category IV (primary overcurrent protection equipment):
Origin of the installation
• Category III (Any fi xed installation with a permanent connection)
Fixed installation and equipment and for cases where the reliability and the availability is subject to special requirements
• Category II (Domestic applicances):
Energy consuming equipment to be supplied from the fi xed installation
• Category I (Protected electronic circuit):
For connection to circuit in which measures are taken to limit transient overvoltage.
Pollution degree
Per the IEC 60664-1 (formerly VDE 0110) the environment affects the performance of the insulation. Particles can build a bridge between
two metal parts. As a rule dust mixed with water can be conductive and more generally speaking metal dust is conductive. Finally, the
standard defi nes 4 levels of pollution:
• Degree 1 (Air conditioned dry room):
No pollution or only dry, non conductive pollution occurs. The pollution has no infl uence.
• Degree 2 (Personal computer in a residential area):
Only non conductive pollution occurs except that occasionally a temporary conductivity caused by condensation is to be
expected.
• Degree 3 (Machine tools):
Conductive pollution occurs or dry non-conductive pollution occurs which becomes conductive due to condensation which is to
be expected.
• Degree 4 (Equipments on roof, locomotives):
Continuous conductivity occurs due to conductive dust, rain or other wet conditions.
Finally, the harsher the environment is, the longer clearance and creepage distances should be. Nonetheless, according the IEC 61984,
enclosure rated at IP54 or higher can be dimensioned for a lower pollution degree. This applies to mated connectors disengaged for test
and maintenance.
Marking
The marking should give enough details to the user to know what the main characteristics are and without going deep in technical
documentation. Below examples identify the suitability of the connector:
• Example 1:
Marking of a connector with rated current 16A, rated voltage 400V, rated impulse voltage 6kV and pollution degree 3, 2 and 1 for
use in any system, preferably unearthed or delta-earthed systems:
16A 400V 6kV 3
• Example 2:
Marking of a connector with rated current 16A, rated insulation voltages line-to-earth 250V, line-to-line 400V, rated impulse
voltage 4kV and pollution degree 3, 2 and 1 for use in earthed systems:
1166AA 225500VV 440000VV 44kkVV 33
16A 400V 6kV 3
UTS Series
Technical information
IEC 61984
Technical information
170 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Enclosure
rating
IP20 IP22 IP55 IP64 IP65 IP66 IP67
Type 1 •
Type 3 •
Type 3R •
Type 3S •
Type 4 •
Type 4X •
Type 6 •
Type 12 •
Type 13 •
• indicates compliance
6 IP67 Enclosures constructed for either indoor or outdoor use to provide a degree of protection
to personnel against incidental contact with the enclosed equipment, falling dirt, hosedirected
water, the entry of water during occasional temporary submersion at a limited depth
and damage from external ice formation.
6P IP67 Enclosures constructed for either indoor or outdoor use to provide a degree of protection to
personnel against incidental contact with the enclosed equipment, falling dirt, hose-directed
water, the entry of water during prolonged submersion at a limited depth and damage from
external ice formation.
Type 6 rating can be either Type 6 or Type 6P - please see below:
• NEMA ratings vs IP ratings
Whereas IP ratings only consider protection against ingress of foreign bodies - first digit - and ingress of water
(second digit), NEMA ratings consider these but also verify protection from external ice, corrosive materials, oil
immersion, etc.
The correlation between NEMA & IP being limited only to dust and water, we can state that a NEMA type is
equivalent to an IP rating but it is not possible to say the contrary.
Below a list of some NEMA standards:
UTS Series
Technical information
What is NEMA rating ?
© 2011 – SOURIAU 171
Ethernet Basics
Ethernet is a widely used communications protocol that is used to transmit data packets (datagrams) between network devices. Imagine a
highway in a large metropolitan area six lanes wide at rush hour. The vehicles on the highway need rules to follow so that they get to their
destination without crashing into each other. In an Ethernet network link, there could be 100 million bits of information transmitted in one
second. In the Ethernet standard, there exist rules to govern packet structure, transmission requirements, error correction, communication
with end equipment, etc.
Examining the differences between 100Mhz, 100 Base TX, Cat5e; what does it all mean?
When discussing connectors and Ethernet, there are a few key details to be aware of:
• 100Mhz is a measurement of Frequency for the signal
- Comparable to the Speed Limit of a highway
• 100BaseTX (or Fast Ethernet) is an Ethernet link standard and identifi es available link bandwidth The bandwidth is measured in units of
MBits/S (megabits per second)
- Comparable to the number of cars that pass a point in one second
• Cat5e is an EIA/TIA standard for performance and physical characteristics for cables and connectors
- Comparable to performance specifi cations of the car and highway
In connectors and cables, Fast Ethernet uses 2 pairs, one for transmit, one for receive. This, way data traffi c can fl ow in both directions
simultaneously.
In order to explain basic Ethernet theory, we can use a functional comparison to a busy city with highways, buildings, and cars. To illustrate
this, the table below provides correlation between the different components/pieces/links that encompass Ethernet network connectivity, and
the larger scale infrastructure of a metropolitan city.
• City: The network itself
• Buildings: End equipment, PC, server, etc.
• Roads: Ethernet cabling
• Cars: Data packets, datagrams, bits, bytes, etc.
• Tolls: Firewalls
• Bridges: Connectors
• Traffi c laws: Protocol/communication specifi cations
UTS Series
Technical information
Ethernet for the layman
Technical information
172 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Souriau offering:
UTS Hi seal size 8, 4 contacts
1 (Pair 1) ‹ A
2 (Pair 1) ‹ C
3 (Pair 2) ‹ B
4 (Pair 2) ‹ D
UTS size 10, 6 contacts
1 (Pair 1) ‹ A
2 (Pair 1) ‹ B
3 (Pair 2) ‹ E
4 (Pair 2) ‹ D
UTS size 12, 10 contacts
1 (Pair 1) ‹ C
2 (Pair 1) ‹ B
3 (Pair 2) ‹ G
4 (Pair 2) ‹ H
Standard solutions.
8E4/8D4
4 Ø 1 (#20)
106/10E6/10D6
6 Ø 1 (#20)
1210/12E10/12D10
10 Ø 1 (#20)
What about using coax contacts ?
Ethernet twisted pairs carry a symmetrical (balanced) signal. Once terminated into a coax contact, the inner core will be protected by a shield -
but not the outer contact. Because of EMI issues, the signal will no longer be balanced. Conclusion - it does not work and is not recommended.
Conclusion
To carry 100Mb/s data signal, 100BaseTX or Fast Ethernet recommends the use of Cat5e connectors as well as Cat5e cable with the support
of a 100MHz signal. Nevertheless, a 100Mb/s signal can be transmitted in certain conditions (short distance, only one connector, lower
frequency but a different code) thru many other connection materials - not necessarily Cat5e rated.
What about using Quadrax contacts ?
The Quadrax contact is used in railway applications because of the use of quad cable. In this specifi c market, the standard Ethernet twisted
pairs wires cannot be offered, they are too thin and often solid (not stranded).
In the rest of industry, UTP (Unshielded Twisted Pairs) cables are widely used. The Quadrax contact is not designed to terminate them. And
thus, are not advised for industrial applications.
Shielding continuity done in cavity C&F.
Note: Shielding can be replaced by
DC power.
UTS Series
Technical information
Ethernet for the layman
© 2011 – SOURIAU 173
UTS Series
Technical information
Technical information
UTS Series
© 2011 – SOURIAU 175
Appendices
UTS Series
#16 coaxial contacts - cabling notices ................................................................................... 176
Glossary of terms ........................................................................................................................... 183
Discrimination/Keying methods ................................................................................................ 184
Part number Index ......................................................................................................................... 185
176 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
Appendices
#16 coaxial contacts
Cable
type
Impedance
Contact
type
Ø over
jacket
Ø over
dielectric
Inner
cond
size
Ø outer braid Male contact
kit for coaxial
cable
Female contact
kit for coaxial
cable
inch mm inch mm
Ext. Ø
mm
inch mm
RG161/U 75
Multi
piece
0.09 2.29 0.057 1.45
RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28
RG179A/U 75 0.105 2.67 0.063 1.6 0.3 0.084 2.13 max
RG179B/U 75 0.105 2.67 0.063 1.6 0.3 0.084 2.13 max
RG187/U 75 0.11 2.79 max 0.06 1.52 0.3
RG188/U 50 0.11 2.79 max 0.06 1.52 0.51 0.078 1.98 max
RG174/U 50 0.11 2.92 0.06 1.52 0.48 0.088 2.24 max
AMPHENOL 21-598 50 0.105 2.67 0.06 1.52 0.48
RG196/U 50 0.08 2.03 max 0.034 0.086 0.3
RG178A/U 50 0.075 1.91 0.034 0.86 0.3 0.054 1.37 max
RG/188A/U 50
Mono
crimp
0.110 2.79 0.06 1.52 0.51 0.078 1.98 max RMDX6036D28 RCDX6036D28
KX21TVT (europe)
RG178 B/U
50 0.075 1.91 0.034 0.86 0.3 0.054 1.37 max RMDX6034D28 RCDX6034D28
RG178 / BU 50 0.075 1.91 0.034 0.86 0.3 0.054 1.37 max RMDX6050D28 RCDX6016D28
RG174/U 50 0.115 2.92 0.06 1.52 0.48 0.088 2.24 max RMDX6032D28 RCDX6032D28
RG188A/U 50 0.11 2.79 0.06 1.52 0.51 0.078 1.98 max RMDX6036D28 RCDX6036D28
RG316/U 50 0.107 2.72 0.6 1.52 0.51 0.078 2.05 max RMDX6036D28 RCDX6036D28
raychem 5024A3111 50 0.12 3.05 0.083 2.11 0.64 0.097 2.46 RMDX6052D28 RCDX6052D28
raychem 5026e1614 50 0.083 2.11 0.05 1.27 0.48 0.067 1.7 RMDX6036D28 RCDX6036D28
surprenant pn 8134 -
Multi
piece
0.1 2.54 0.058 1.47 0.3 RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28
PRD PN 247ASC1123-
001
-
Mono
crimp
0.103 2.62 0.06 1.52 0.51 0.078 1.98 RMDX6018D28 RCDX6018D28
PRD PN 247AS-C1251 - 0.092 2.34 0.05 1.27 0.64 0.067 1.7 RMDX6018D28 RCDX6018D28
JUDD C15013010902 - 0.087 2.13 0.05 1.27 0.48 0.066 1.67 RMDX6036D28 RCDX6036D28
CDC PIN22939200 - 0.09 2.29 0.048 1.22 0.3 0.064 1.63 RMDX6046D28 RCDX6016D28
CDC PIN22939200 - 0.09 2.29 0.048 1.22 0.3 0.064 1.63 RMDX6050D28 RCDX6016D28
CDC PIN245670000 - 0.104 2.64 0.067 1.7 0.3 0.083 2.11 RMDX6050D28 RCDX6016D28
ampex - 0.114 2.9 0.075 1.91 0.38 0.09 1.29 RMDX6032D28 RCDX6032D28
TI PN 920580 - 0.7 1.78 0.038 0.96 0.48 0.054 1.37 RMDX6024D28 RCDX6024D28
Honeywell PN
58000062
- 0.12 3.05 0.077 1.96
0.41
solid
0.096 2.44 RMDX6026D28 RCDX6026D28
- - 0.104 2.64 0.067 1.7 0.3 2.11 RMDX6050D28 -
- - 0.09 2.29 0.048 1.22 0.3 1.63 RMDX6050D28 -
- - 0.114 2.9 0.075 1.91 0.38 1.29 RMDX6032D28 RCDX6032D28
- - 0.07 1.78 0.038 0.96 0.48 1.37 RMDX6024D28 RCDX6024D28
- - 0.12 3.05 0.077 1.96 0.41 2.44 RMDX6026D28 RCDX6026D28
Coaxial cable - Contact monocrimp and multipiece
© 2011 – SOURIAU 177
UTS Series
Appendices
Cable
type
Contact
type
Inner
AWG
cond
Ø over
jacket
(single wire)
Inner cond size
Ø outer
braid Male
contact kit for
coaxial cable
Female
contact kit for
coaxial cable
inch mm
Stranded
defi nition
Ext. Ø
mm
inch mm
2#24 stranded mil w 16878 type B
Multi
piece
24 0.049
1.24
max
7/.008 - - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28
2 #24 solid mil-w-76 type LW 24 0.047
1.12
max
1/.0201 - - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28
2 #26 stranded mil w 76 type LW
or mil w16878 type b&e
26 0.043
1.09
max
7/.0063 0.16 - - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28
2 #28 solid mil-w-81822/3 28 0.028
0.71
max
- - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28
TWISTED PAIR 1/.201 SOLID MIL w
76 TYPE lw or MIL W 16878
26 0.044
1.12
max
1/.0201 0.511 - - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28
twisted pair solid mil w 81822/3 28 0.028
0.71
max
1/.0126 0.32 - - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28
#28 7/.0036 per Hitachi spec
ec-711 (13-2820)
Mono
crimp
- 0.046 1.17 7/.0036 - - -
RMDX6031D28
+ YORX090
RCDX6031D28
+ YORX090
20218201 - 0.028 0.71 - - - -
RMDX6031D28
+ YORX090
RCDX6031D28
+ YORX090
#30 solid - 0.025 0.64 - - - -
RMDX6015D28
+ YORX090
RCDX6015D28
+ YORX090
#26 7/.0063 26 0.028 0.71 7/.063 0.16 - -
RMDX6031D28
+ YORX090
RCDX6031D28
+ YORX090
#26 19/.004 26 0.049 1.24 19/.004 - - -
RMDX6019D28
+ YORX090
RCDX6019D28
+ YORX090
#24 7/.008 24 0.049 1.24 7/.008 - - -
RMDX6019D28
+ YORX090
RCDX6019D28
+ YORX090
#24 19/.005 24 0.057 1.45 19/.005 - - -
RMDX6019D28
+ YORX090
RCDX6019D28
+ YORX090
- 26 - 1.25 - - - 19x0.1
RMDX6019D28
+ YORX090
RCDX6019D28
+ YORX090
- 24 - 1.25 - - - 7x0.2
RMDX6019D28
+ YORX090
RCDX6019D28
+ YORX090
- 24 - 1.45 - - - 19x0.13
RMDX6019D28
+ YORX090
RCDX6019D28
+ YORX090
- 26 - 0.7 - - - 7x0.16
RMDX6031D28
+ YORX090
RCDX6031D28
+ YORX090
Twisted cable - Contact monocrimp and multipiece
Appendices
178 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Twisted pair cable multipiece contact cabling
UTS Series
Appendices
#16 coaxial contacts
Cable
reference
Contact
type
Male
contact
Female
contact
Crimp
tool
Die
set
Stop
bushing
Cable strip
length
Inner conductor
crimp
Braid crimp
A B C g dim t dim g dim t dim
2#24 stranded mil
w 16878 type B
Multi
piece RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 M10S1J - - See assembly notice
2 #24 solid mil-w-76
type LW
2 #26 stranded
mil w 76 type LW or
mil w16878 type B & E
2 #28 solid
mil-w-81822/3
twisted pair 1/.201
solid mil w 76 type LW
or mil w 16878
twisted pair solid mil w
81822/3
Male contact
Outer male contact
RMDX60-2
Inner socket
RFD26L-1
Outer hyring
YOC074
Inner supporting
sleeve
RMDXB-055-3
Twisted pair adapter
YORK-090
Conductor "Y"
Conductor "Z"
Strip lengths
of cable
7.95±0.41
15.54±0.41
7.95±0.41
Inner supporting Outer hyring
sleeve
Twisted pair adapter
Locking louver typical
Grounding louver typical
Step 1: Step 2: Step 3:
7.54
0.25±0.05
5.94±0.41
7.54±0.41
15.54±0.41
7.95±0.41
When using solid wire fl atten
conductor "X" and "Z" using
N24FL-1 die as shown
Female contact
Step 1: Step 2: Step 3:
Outer hyring
Supporting
sleeve
Twisted pair adapter
Conductor "W"
Conductor "X"
Strip lengths
of cable
6.35±0.41
13.49±0.41
7.95±0.41
Outer female contact
RCDX60-2
Inner pin
RMD26L-1
Outer hyring
YOC074
Inner supporting
sleeve
RCDXB-055-1
Twisted pair adapter
YORK-090
Note : all dimensions are in mm
© 2011 – SOURIAU 179
Twisted pair cable monocrimp contact cabling
UTS Series
Appendices
Cable reference
Contact
type
Male
contact
Female
contact
Crimp
tool
Die
set
Stop
bushing
Cable strip
length
Inner conductor
crimp
Braid crimp
A B C g dim t dim g dim t dim
#28 7/.0036 per Hitachi
spec ec-711 (13-2820)
Mono
crimp
RMDX6031D28
+ YORX090
RCDX6031D28
+ YORX090
M10S1J
S80 SL105 4.7 6.1 4.32
1.30 to
1.12
1.4 to 1.22
2.97 to
2.84
3.07 to 2.9
20218204 S80 SL105 3.94 6.1 3.16
1.30 to
1.17
1.4 to 1.22
2.97 to
2.84
3.07 to
2.79
#30 solid S83 SL105 4.7 6.1 4.06
1.22 to
1.12
1.35 to
1.22
2.97 to
2.84
3.12 to
2.95
#26 7/.0063 S80 SL105 4.7 6.1 4.06
1.30 to
1.17
1.4 to 1.22
2.97 to
2.84
3.07 to 2.9
#26 19/.004
M10SG8 ASSY'Y
TOOL DIE SET
STOP BUSHING
M10S1J TOOL
4.7 6.1 4.06
1.22 to
1.17
1.35 to
1.22
2.84 to
2.79
3.12 to
2.97
#24 7/.008 4.7 6.1 4.06
1.22 to
1.17
1.35 to
1.22
2.84 to
2.79
3.12 to
2.97
#24 19/.005 4.7 6.1 4.06
1.22 to
1.17
1.35 to
1.22
2.84 to
2.79
3.12 to
2.97
AWG26 (19x0.1)
M10SG8
crimping kit 4.7 6 4
AWG24 (7x0.2)
AWG24 (19x0.13)
AWG26 (7x0.16) S80 SL150
G
G
Braid crimp (G) to be measured
with die set fully closed
Inner conductor crimp (G) to be
measured with die set fully closed
RCDX60
Female coax contact
RMDX60
Male coax contact
See cable strip lengths
Cable strip length
A
B C
16 min.
• Select appropriate monocrimp coax twisted pair contact and cable combination.
• Select appropriate crimp tooling (hand tool, S-die set, stop bushing).
• Strip the twisted pair cable to the designated wire strip lengths.
• Insert the stripped cable into the contact. One cable is to be inserted into the
inside diameter of hyring, and pushed forwaerd into the inner contact. The
second cable is to be inserted between the outside diameter of hyring and the
inside diameter of the outer contact body.
• Crimp the contact.
Note : all dimensions are in mm
Appendices
180 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Multipiece male contact with coax cable
UTS Series
Appendices
Multipiece kit details
RMDXK10D28
includes
RMDX602D28 Outer contact
RFD26L1D28 Inner contact
YOC074 Outer hyring
RMDXB0553 Inner supporting
sleeve
Cable stip length
A
B
C
Dielectric
diameter
Contact assembly with dielectric diameter over 1.4mm - without inner supporting sleeve
Outer male contact
RMDX60-2 Inner socket
RFD26L-1
Outer hyring
YOC074
Strip lengths
of cable
15.88±0.41
4.37±0.41
7.95±0.41
Step 1:
- Assemble outer hyring onto cable
- Assemble inner socket to inner conductor and crimp
Step 2:
- Insert the assembly into the outer male contact
until the inner socket snaps into place
- The cable braid (shield) should now cover the
barrel of the outer male contact as shown
Step 3:
- Slide outer hyring forward against spring and
crimp in place as shown
Locking louver typical
Grounding louver typical
Contact assembly with dielectric diameter under 1.4mm - with inner supporting sleeve
Outer male contact
RMDX60-2 Inner socket
RFD26L-1
Outer hyring
YOC074 Strip lengths
of cable
17.53±0.41
7.54±0.41
Inner supporting 9.12±0.41
sleeve
RMDXB-055-3
Step 1:
- Assemble outer hyring onto cable
- Assemble supporting sleeve over dielectric and under braid
- Assemble inner socket to inner conductor, push back against
sleeve and crimp
Supporting
sleeve Outer hyring
Step 2:
- Insert the assembly into the outer male contact
until the inner socket snaps into place
- The cable braid (shield) should now cover the
barrel of the outer male contact as shown
Step 3:
- Slide outer hyring forward against spring and
crimp in place as shown
Locking louver typical
Grounding louver typical
Note : all dimensions are in mm
#16 coaxial contacts
Cable
reference
Contact
Hyring
complementary
compoments
Outer contact crimp tool Inner contact crimp tool
Crimp tool M10S1J Crimp tool M10S1J Cable strip length
Die set Stop bushing Die set Stop bushing
A B C
RG161U
Male:
RMDXK10D28
YOC074
S221 SL471
S23D2
SL46D2
4.37 7.95 15.88
RG179 4.37 7.95 15.88
RG187U 4.37 7.95 15.88
RG188/U
S26D2
4.37 7.95 15.88
RG174/U 4.37 7.95 15.88
RG178A/U YOC074 +
RMDXB0553 S23D2
7.54 9.12 17.53
RG196U 7.54 9.12 17.53
AMPHENOL
21-598
YOC074
- 4.37 7.95 15.88
surprenant
pn 8134 - 4.37 7.95 15.88
© 2011 – SOURIAU 181
Multipiece female contact with coax cable
UTS Series
Appendices
Contact assembly with dielectric diameter over 1.4mm - without inner supporting sleeve
Outer female contact
RCDX60-2
Inner pin
RMD26L-1
Outer hyring
YOC074 Strip lengths
of cable
11.13±0.41
4.37±0.41
Step 1:
- Assemble outer hyring onto cable
- Assemble inner pin to inner conductor and crimp
Step 2:
- Insert the assembly into the outer female contact
until the inner pin snaps into place
- The cable braid (shield) should now cover the
barrel of the outer female contact as shown
Step 3:
- Slide outer hyring forward against spring and
crimp in place as shown
Contact assembly with dielectric diameter under 1.4mm - with inner supporting sleeve
Outer female contact
RCDX60-2028
Inner pin
RMD26L-1
Outer hyring
YOC074
Strip lengths
of cable
11.13±0.41
6.35±0.41
Supporting sleeve
RCDXB-055-1
Supporting
Outer hyring sleeve
Step 1:
- Assemble outer hyring onto cable
- Assemble supporting sleeve over dielectric and under braid
- Assemble inner pin to inner conductor, push back against
sleeve and crimp
Step 2:
- Insert the assembly into the outer female contact
until the inner pin snaps into place
- The cable braid (shield) should now cover the
barrel of the outer female contact as shown
Step 3:
- Slide outer hyring forward against spring and
crimp in place as shown
RCDXK1D28
includes
RCDX602D28 Outer contact
RMD26L1D28 Inner contact
YOC074 Outer hyring
RCDXB0553 Inner supporting
sleeve
Multipiece kit details Cable stip length
A
B
C
Dielectric
diameter
Cable
reference
Contact
Hyring
complementary
compoments
Outer contact crimp tool Inner contact crimp tool
Crimp tool M10S1J Crimp tool M10S1J Cable strip length
Die set Stop bushing Die set Stop bushing
A B C
RG161U
Female:
RCDXK1D28
YOC074
S221 SL471
S23D2
SL46D2
4.37
-
11.13
RG179 4.37 11.13
RG187U 4.37 11.13
RG188/U
S26D2
4.37 11.13
RG174/U 4.37 11.13
RG178A/U YOC074 +
RMDXB0553 S23D2
6.35 11.13
RG196U 6.35 11.13
AMPHENOL
21-598
YOC074
- 4.37 11.13
surprenant
pn 8134 - 4.37 11.13
Note : all dimensions are in mm
Appendices
182 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Coax cable with monocrimp contact cabling
UTS Series
Appendices
RCDX60
Female coax contact
RMDX60
Male coax contact
See cable strip lengths
Cable strip length
A
B
C
• Select appropriate cable and contact combination.
• Select appropriate crimp tooling (hand tool, S-die set, stop bushing).
• Strip coax cable to the designated wire strip lengths.
• Insert the stripped coax into the rear of the contact.
• Crimp the contact.
#16 coaxial contacts
Cable
reference
Male
contact
Female
contact
Crimp
tool
Die
set
Stop
bushing
Cable strip length
Inner conductor
crimp
Braid crimp
A B C g dim t dim g dim t dim
CDC PIN22939200 RMDX6046D28 RCDX6016D28
M10S1J
S80 SL105 4.19 5.97 8.51 1.30/1.17 1.40/1.22 2.77/2.64 3.02/2.84
CDC PIN22939200 RMDX6046D28 RCDX6016D28 S87 SL105 5.08 6.35 8.89 1.30/1.17 1.40/1.22 2.77/2.64 3.02/2.84
CDC PIN245670000 RMDX6050D28 RCDX6016D28 S80 SL105 5.08 6.35 8.89 1.30/1.17 1.40/1.22 2.97/2.84 3.12/2.95
KX21TVT (europe)
RG178 B/U
RMDX6034D28 RCDX6034D28 S82 SL105 5.08 6.35 8.89 1.30/1.17 1.32/1.17 2.84/2.74 3.07/2.9
RG178 / BU RMDX6050D28 RCDX6016D28 S87 SL105 5.08 6.35 8.89 1.30/1.17 1.40/1.22 2.77/2.64 3.02/2.84
ampex RMDX6032D28 RCDX6032D28 S80 SL105 5.08 6.35 11.68 1.30/1.17 1.40/1.22 2.97/2.84 3.12/2.95
TI PN 920580 RMDX6024D28 RCDX6024D28 S82 SL105 5.08 6.35 8.89 1.35/1.19 1.42/1.27 2.87/2.74 3.07/2.9
RG174/U RMDX6032D28 RCDX6032D28 S80 SL105 5.08 6.35 11.68 1.30/1.17 1.40/1.22 2.97/2.84 3.12/2.95
Honeywell PN 58000062 RMDX6026D28 RCDX6026D28 S82 SL105 5.08 6.35 8.89 1.35/1.19 1.42/1.27 2.87/2.74 3.07/2.9
RG188A/U RMDX6036D28 RCDX6036D28 S80 SL105 5.08 6.35 11.68 1.30/1.17 1.40/1.22 2.97/2.84 3.12/2.95
RG316/U RMDX6036D28 RCDX6036D28 S80 SL105 5.08 6.35 11.68 1.30/1.17 1.40/1.22 2.97/2.84 3.12/2.95
PRD PN
247AS-C1123-001
RMDX6018D28 RCDX6018D28 M10SG8 ASSY'Y
TOOL DIE SET
STOP BUSHING
M10S1J TOOL
5.08 6.35 8.89 1.22/1.17 1.35/1.22 2.92/2.79 3.12/2.97
PRD PN 247AS-C1251 RMDX6018D28 RCDX6018D28 5.08 6.35 8.89 1.22/1.17 1.35/1.22 2.92/2.79 3.12/2.97
raychem 5024A3111 RMDX6052D28 RCDX6052D28 S88 SL105 5.08 6.35 11.68 1.37/1.27 1.45/1.32 2.92/2.79
raychem 5026e1614 RMDX6036D28 RCDX6036D28 M10SG8 ASSY'Y
TOOL DIE SET
STOP BUSHING
M10S1J TOOL
5.08 6.35 8.89 1.22/1.17 1.35/1.22 2.92/2.79 3.12/2.97
JUDD C15013010902 RMDX6036D28 RCDX6036D28 5.08 6.35 8.89 1.22/1.17 1.35/1.22 2.92/2.79 3.12/2.97
inner cond. #30,
braid diam 2.64
RMDX6050D28 - S80 SL105 5.1 6.35 8.9 - - - -
inner cond. #30,
braid diam 2.29
RMDX6050D28 - S87 SL105 4.2 6.35 8.5 - - - -
inner cond. #28,
braid diam 2.9
RMDX6032D28 RCDX6032D28 S80 SL105 5.1 6.35 11.7 - - - -
inner cond. #26,
braid diam 1.78
RMDX6024D28 RCDX6024D28 S82 SL105 5.1 6.35 8.9 - - - -
inner cond. #26,
braid diam 3.05
RMDX6026D28 RCDX6026D28 S82 SL105 5.1 6.35 8.9 - - - -
Note : all dimensions are in mm
© 2011 – SOURIAU 183
Glossary of terms
UTS Series
Appendices
• Clearance
Per the IEC 60664-1 it is the shortest
distance between two conductive parts
even over the air.
• Creepage distance
Per the IEC 60664-1 it represents the
shortest distance along the surface
of the insulating material between two
conductive parts.
• Working voltage
Per the IEC 60664-1 it is the highest r.m.s. value of A.C. or D.C.
voltage across any particular insulation which can occur when the
equipment is supplied at rated voltage.
• Rated impulse voltage
Impulse withstands voltage value assigned by the manufacturer to
the equipment or to a part of it characterizing the specifi ed withstand
capability of its insulation against transient overvoltage.
• Working current
It is the maximum continuous and not interrupted current able
to be carried by all contacts without exceeding the maximum
temperature of the insulating material.
• Transient voltage
Extract from the IEC 60664-1: Short duration overvoltage of
a few millisecond or less, oscillatory or non-oscillatory, usually
highly damped.
• CTI (Comparative Tracking Index)
The CTI value is commonly used to characterize the electrical
breakdown properties of an insulating material. It allows users
to know the tendency to create creepage paths. This value
represents the maximum voltage after 50 drops of ammonium
chloride solution without any breakdown.
• RTI (Relative temperature Index):
Extract from ULs website:
“Maximum service temperature for a material, where a class of
critical property will not be unacceptably compromised through
chemical thermal degradation, over the reasonable life of an
electrical product, relative to a reference material having a
confi rmed, acceptable corresponding performance defi ned RTI.
- RTI Elec: Electrical RTI, associated with critical electrical
insulating properties.
- RTI Mech Imp: Mechanical Impact RTI, associated with
critical impact resistance, resilience and fl exibility
properties.
- RTI Mech Str: Mechanical Strength (Mechanical
without Impact) RTI, associated with critical
mechanical strength where impact resistance,
resilience and fl exibility are not essential”
Air gap
Creepage distance
Appendices
184 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Discrimination/Keying methods
UTS Series
Appendices
N (Normal)
Note: Insert rotated in body
(viewed from front face of male insert)
In applications where similar connectors are used
next to each other, mismatching can be a reason for
disturbances, system failure or even danger to operating
personnel.
To eliminate mismatching, all TRIM TRIO® connectors
can be equipped with discrimination keys, which
offer unlimited possibilities for an error avoiding
interconnection system.
The other way around is to rotate the insert into the shell.
Connectors with rotated inserts can be ordered by
adding the suffix W, X, Y or Z to the standard part
number.
e.g. UTS6JC104S (N key) UTS6JC104SW (W key)
Other keys
Shell
size
Layout
Discrimination keys degrees
W X Y Z
8
8E2 58° 122°
8E3
8E3A
60° 210°
8E4 45°
8E33 90°
10
102W2
103
104
106
10E6
10E7
90°
10E98 90° 180° 240° 270°
12
12E2
12E3 180°
124
128
12E8 90° 112° 203° 292°
1210
12E10
60° 155° 270° 295°
12E14 45°
14
14E5 40° 92° 184° 273°
142G1
147
1412 60°
14E12 43° 90°
14E15 17° 110° 155° 234°
14E18 15° 90° 180° 270°
1419 30° 165° 315°
14E19 30° 165° 315°
18
18E11 62° 119° 241° 340°
1823 158° 270°
18E30 180° 193° 285° 350°
1832
18E32
85° 138° 222° 265°
© 2011 – SOURIAU 185
UTS Series
Appendices
Part number Index
Mechanics
UTS0104P................... P. 68
UTS0104S................... P. 68
UTS010D6P.................. P. 68
UTS010D6S.................. P. 68
UTS010D7P.................. P. 68
UTS010D7S.................. P. 68
UTS010D98P................. P. 84
UTS010D98S................. P. 84
UTS010E6P.................. P. 80
UTS010E6S.................. P. 80
UTS010E7P.................. P. 92
UTS010E7S.................. P. 92
UTS010E98P................. P. 84
UTS010E98S................. P. 84
UTS0124P................... P. 52
UTS0128P................... P. 96
UTS0128S................... P. 96
UTS012D10P................. P. 104
UTS012D10S................. P. 104
UTS012D14P................. P. 116
UTS012D14S................. P. 116
UTS012D2P.................. P. 24
UTS012D2S.................. P. 24
UTS012D3P.................. P. 48
UTS012D3S.................. P. 48
UTS012D4P.................. P. 68
UTS012D4S.................. P. 68
UTS012D8P.................. P. 100
UTS012D8S.................. P. 100
UTS012E10P................. P. 104
UTS012E10S................. P. 104
UTS012E14P................. P. 116
UTS012E14S................. P. 116
UTS012E2P.................. P. 24
UTS012E2S.................. P. 24
UTS012E3P.................. P. 48
UTS012E3S.................. P. 48
UTS012E4P.................. P. 52
UTS012E4S.................. P. 52
UTS012E8P.................. P. 100
UTS012E8S.................. P. 100
UTS01412P.................. P. 108
UTS01412S.................. P. 108
UTS0147P................... P. 88
UTS014D12P................. P. 112
UTS014D12S................. P. 112
UTS014D15P................. P. 120
UTS014D15S................. P. 120
UTS014D18P................. P. 124
UTS014D18S................. P. 124
UTS014D5P.................. P. 120
UTS014D5S.................. P. 120
UTS014E12P................. P. 112
UTS014E12S................. P. 112
UTS014E15P................. P. 120
UTS014E15S................. P. 120
UTS014E18P................. P. 124
UTS014E18S................. P. 124
UTS014E19P................. P. 128
UTS014E19S................. P. 128
UTS014E5P.................. P. 120
UTS014E5S.................. P. 120
UTS014E7P.................. P. 88
UTS014E7S.................. P. 88
UTS01823P.................. P. 132
UTS01823S.................. P. 132
UTS08D2P................... P. 20
UTS08D2P................... P. 20
UTS08D2S................... P. 20
UTS08D2S................... P. 20
UTS08D33P.................. P. 44
UTS08D33P.................. P. 44
UTS08D33S.................. P. 44
UTS08D33S.................. P. 44
UTS08D3AP.................. P. 36
UTS08D3AS.................. P. 36
UTS08D3P................... P. 36
UTS08D3P................... P. 36
UTS08D3S................... P. 36
UTS08D3S................... P. 36
UTS08D4P................... P. 60
UTS08D4P................... P. 60
UTS08D4S................... P. 60
UTS08D4S................... P. 60
UTS08D98P.................. P. 40
UTS08D98S.................. P. 40
UTS08E2P................... P. 20
UTS08E2S................... P. 20
UTS08E33P.................. P. 44
UTS08E33S.................. P. 44
UTS08E3AP.................. P. 40
UTS08E3AS.................. P. 40
UTS08E3P................... P. 36
UTS08E3S................... P. 36
UTS08E4P................... P. 60
UTS08E4S................... P. 60
UTS08E98P.................. P. 40
UTS08E98S.................. P. 40
UTS1GJC104P................ P. 68
UTS1GJC128P................ P. 96
UTS1GJC1412P............... P. 108
UTS1GJC147P................ P. 88
UTS1GN104P................. P. 68
UTS1GN128P................. P. 96
UTS1GN1412P................ P. 108
UTS1GN147P................. P. 88
UTS1JC102W2P............... P. 64
UTS1JC102W2S............... P. 64
UTS1JC103P................. P. 40
UTS1JC103S................. P. 40
UTS1JC103W3P............... P. 40
UTS1JC103W3S............... P. 40
UTS1JC104P................. P. 68
UTS1JC104S................. P. 68
UTS1JC106P................. P. 80
UTS1JC106S................. P. 80
UTS1JC1210P................ P. 104
UTS1JC1210S................ P. 104
UTS1JC124P................. P. 52
UTS1JC124PSCR.............. P. 52
UTS1JC124S................. P. 52
UTS1JC128P................. P. 96
UTS1JC128S................. P. 96
UTS1JC1412P................ P. 108
UTS1JC1412S................ P. 108
UTS1JC1419P................ P. 128
UTS1JC1419S................ P. 128
UTS1JC142G1P............... P. 32
UTS1JC142G1S............... P. 32
UTS1JC147P................. P. 88
UTS1JC147PSCR.............. P. 88
UTS1JC147S................. P. 88
UTS1JC1823P................ P. 132
UTS1JC1823S................ P. 132
UTS1JC1832P................ P. 136
UTS1JC1832S................ P. 136
UTS6102W2P................. P. 64
UTS6102W2S................. P. 64
UTS6103P................... P. 40
UTS6103S................... P. 40
UTS6103W3P................. P. 40
UTS6103W3S................. P. 40
UTS6104P................... P. 68
UTS6104S................... P. 68
UTS6106P................... P. 80
UTS6106S................... P. 80
UTS610E6P.................. P. 80
UTS610E6S.................. P. 80
UTS610E7P.................. P. 92
UTS610E7S.................. P. 92
UTS610E98P................. P. 84
UTS610E98S................. P. 84
Appendices
186 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
Appendices
UTS61210P.................. P. 104
UTS61210S.................. P. 104
UTS6124P................... P. 52
UTS6124S................... P. 52
UTS6128P................... P. 96
UTS6128S................... P. 96
UTS612E10P................. P. 104
UTS612E10S................. P. 104
UTS612E14P................. P. 116
UTS612E14S................. P. 116
UTS612E2P.................. P. 24
UTS612E2S.................. P. 24
UTS612E3P.................. P. 48
UTS612E3S.................. P. 48
UTS612E4P.................. P. 52
UTS612E4S.................. P. 52
UTS612E8P.................. P. 100
UTS612E8S.................. P. 100
UTS61412P.................. P. 108
UTS61412S.................. P. 108
UTS61419P.................. P. 128
UTS61419S.................. P. 128
UTS6142G1P................. P. 32
UTS6142G1S................. P. 32
UTS6147P................... P. 88
UTS6147S................... P. 88
UTS614E12P................. P. 112
UTS614E12S................. P. 112
UTS614E15P................. P. 120
UTS614E15S................. P. 120
UTS614E18P................. P. 124
UTS614E18S................. P. 124
UTS614E19P................. P. 128
UTS614E19S................. P. 128
UTS614E5P.................. P. 72
UTS614E5S.................. P. 72
UTS61823P.................. P. 132
UTS61823S.................. P. 132
UTS61832P.................. P. 136
UTS61832S.................. P. 136
UTS6183G1P................. P. 56
UTS68E2P................... P. 20
UTS68E2S................... P. 20
UTS68E33P.................. P. 44
UTS68E33S.................. P. 44
UTS68E3AP.................. P. 40
UTS68E3AS.................. P. 40
UTS68E3P................... P. 36
UTS68E3S................... P. 36
UTS68E4P................... P. 60
UTS68E4S................... P. 60
UTS68E98P.................. P. 40
UTS68E98S.................. P. 40
UTS6GJC104S................ P. 68
UTS6GJC128S................ P. 96
UTS6GJC1412S............... P. 108
UTS6GJC147S................ P. 88
UTS6GN104S................. P. 68
UTS6GN128S................. P. 96
UTS6GN1412S................ P. 108
UTS6GN147S................. P. 88
UTS6JC102W2P............... P. 64
UTS6JC102W2S............... P. 64
UTS6JC103P................. P. 40
UTS6JC103S................. P. 40
UTS6JC103W3P............... P. 40
UTS6JC103W3S............... P. 40
UTS6JC104P................. P. 68
UTS6JC104S................. P. 68
UTS6JC106P................. P. 80
UTS6JC106S................. P. 80
UTS6JC10E6P................ P. 80
UTS6JC10E6S................ P. 80
UTS6JC10E7P................ P. 92
UTS6JC10E7S................ P. 92
UTS6JC10E98P............... P. 84
UTS6JC10E98S............... P. 84
UTS6JC1210P................ P. 104
UTS6JC1210S................ P. 104
UTS6JC124P................. P. 52
UTS6JC124PSCR.............. P. 52
UTS6JC124S................. P. 52
UTS6JC124SSCR.............. P. 52
UTS6JC128P................. P. 96
UTS6JC128S................. P. 96
UTS6JC12E10P............... P. 104
UTS6JC12E10S............... P. 104
UTS6JC12E14P............... P. 116
UTS6JC12E14S............... P. 116
UTS6JC12E2P................ P. 24
UTS6JC12E2S................ P. 24
UTS6JC12E3P................ P. 48
UTS6JC12E3S................ P. 48
UTS6JC12E4P................ P. 52
UTS6JC12E4S................ P. 52
UTS6JC12E8P................ P. 100
UTS6JC12E8S................ P. 100
UTS6JC1412P................ P. 108
UTS6JC1412S................ P. 108
UTS6JC1419P................ P. 128
UTS6JC1419S................ P. 128
UTS6JC142G1P............... P. 32
UTS6JC142G1S............... P. 32
UTS6JC147P................. P. 88
UTS6JC147PSCR.............. P. 88
UTS6JC147S................. P. 88
UTS6JC147SSCR.............. P. 88
UTS6JC14E12P............... P. 112
UTS6JC14E12S............... P. 112
UTS6JC14E15P............... P. 120
UTS6JC14E15S............... P. 120
UTS6JC14E18P............... P. 124
UTS6JC14E18S............... P. 124
UTS6JC14E19P............... P. 128
UTS6JC14E19S............... P. 128
UTS6JC14E5P................ P. 72
UTS6JC14E5S................ P. 72
UTS6JC14E7P................ P. 88
UTS6JC14E7S................ P. 88
UTS6JC1823P................ P. 132
UTS6JC1823S................ P. 132
UTS6JC1832P................ P. 136
UTS6JC1832S................ P. 136
UTS6JC183G1P............... P. 56
UTS6JC8E2P................. P. 20
UTS6JC8E2S................. P. 20
UTS6JC8E33P................ P. 44
UTS6JC8E33S................ P. 44
UTS6JC8E3AP................ P. 40
UTS6JC8E3AS................ P. 40
UTS6JC8E3P................. P. 36
UTS6JC8E3S................. P. 36
UTS6JC8E4P................. P. 60
UTS6JC8E4S................. P. 60
UTS6JC8E98P................ P. 40
UTS6JC8E98S................ P. 40
UTS7102W2P................. P. 64
UTS7102W2S................. P. 64
UTS7103P................... P. 40
UTS7103S................... P. 40
UTS7103W3P................. P. 40
UTS7103W3S................. P. 40
UTS7104P................... P. 68
UTS7104S................... P. 68
UTS7106P................... P. 80
UTS7106S................... P. 80
UTS710D6P.................. P. 80
UTS710D6P32................ P. 80
UTS710D6S.................. P. 80
UTS710D6S32................ P. 80
UTS710D7P.................. P. 92
UTS710D7P32................ P. 92
UTS710D7S.................. P. 92
© 2011 – SOURIAU 187
UTS Series
Appendices
UTS710D7S32................ P. 92
UTS710D98P................. P. 84
UTS710D98P32............... P. 84
UTS710D98S................. P. 84
UTS710D98S32............... P. 84
UTS710E6P.................. P. 80
UTS710E6S.................. P. 80
UTS710E7P.................. P. 92
UTS710E7S.................. P. 92
UTS710E98P................. P. 84
UTS710E98S................. P. 84
UTS71210P.................. P. 104
UTS71210S.................. P. 104
UTS7124P................... P. 52
UTS7124PSCR................ P. 52
UTS7124S................... P. 52
UTS7124SSCR................ P. 52
UTS7128P................... P. 96
UTS7128PSEK9............... P. 96
UTS7128S................... P. 96
UTS712CCRG................. P. 26
UTS712CCRR................. P. 26
UTS712CCRY................. P. 26
UTS712D10P................. P. 104
UTS712D10P32............... P. 104
UTS712D10S................. P. 104
UTS712D10S32............... P. 104
UTS712D14P................. P. 116
UTS712D14P32............... P. 116
UTS712D14S................. P. 116
UTS712D14S32............... P. 116
UTS712D2P.................. P. 24
UTS712D2P32................ P. 24
UTS712D2S.................. P. 24
UTS712D2S32................ P. 24
UTS712D3P.................. P. 48
UTS712D3P32................ P. 48
UTS712D3S.................. P. 48
UTS712D3S32................ P. 48
UTS712D4P.................. P. 52
UTS712D4P32................ P. 52
UTS712D4S.................. P. 52
UTS712D4S32................ P. 52
UTS712D8P.................. P. 100
UTS712D8P32................ P. 100
UTS712D8S.................. P. 100
UTS712D8S32................ P. 100
UTS712E10P................. P. 104
UTS712E10S................. P. 104
UTS712E14P................. P. 116
UTS712E14S................. P. 116
UTS712E2P.................. P. 24
UTS712E2S.................. P. 24
UTS712E3P.................. P. 48
UTS712E3S.................. P. 48
UTS712E4P.................. P. 52
UTS712E4S.................. P. 52
UTS712E8P.................. P. 100
UTS712E8S.................. P. 100
UTS71412P.................. P. 108
UTS71412S.................. P. 108
UTS71419P.................. P. 128
UTS71419S.................. P. 128
UTS7142G1P................. P. 32
UTS7142G1S................. P. 32
UTS7142G1SNPT.............. P. 32
UTS7147P................... P. 88
UTS7147PSCR................ P. 88
UTS7147PSEK9............... P. 88
UTS7147S................... P. 88
UTS7147SSCR................ P. 88
UTS714D12P................. P. 112
UTS714D12P32............... P. 112
UTS714D12S................. P. 112
UTS714D12S32............... P. 112
UTS714D15P................. P. 120
UTS714D15P32............... P. 120
UTS714D15S................. P. 120
UTS714D15S32............... P. 120
UTS714D18P................. P. 124
UTS714D18P32............... P. 124
UTS714D18S................. P. 124
UTS714D18S32............... P. 124
UTS714D19P................. P. 128
UTS714D19P32............... P. 128
UTS714D19S................. P. 128
UTS714D19S32............... P. 128
UTS714D5P.................. P. 120
UTS714D5P32................ P. 120
UTS714D5S.................. P. 120
UTS714D5S32................ P. 120
UTS714E12P................. P. 112
UTS714E12S................. P. 112
UTS714E15P................. P. 120
UTS714E15S................. P. 120
UTS714E18P................. P. 124
UTS714E18S................. P. 124
UTS714E19P................. P. 128
UTS714E19S................. P. 128
UTS714E5P.................. P. 72
UTS714E5S.................. P. 72
UTS714E7P.................. P. 88
UTS714E7S.................. P. 88
UTS71823P.................. P. 132
UTS71823S.................. P. 132
UTS71832P.................. P. 136
UTS71832S.................. P. 136
UTS7183G1SNPT.............. P. 56
UTS78D2P................... P. 20
UTS78D2P32................. P. 20
UTS78D2S................... P. 20
UTS78D2S32................. P. 20
UTS78D33P.................. P. 44
UTS78D33P32................ P. 44
UTS78D33S.................. P. 44
UTS78D33S32................ P. 44
UTS78D3AP.................. P. 40
UTS78D3AP32................ P. 40
UTS78D3AS.................. P. 40
UTS78D3AS32................ P. 40
UTS78D3P................... P. 36
UTS78D3P32................. P. 36
UTS78D3S................... P. 36
UTS78D3S32................. P. 36
UTS78D4P................... P. 60
UTS78D4P32................. P. 60
UTS78D4S................... P. 60
UTS78D4S32................. P. 60
UTS78D98P.................. P. 40
UTS78D98P32................ P. 40
UTS78D98S.................. P. 40
UTS78D98S32................ P. 40
UTS78E2P................... P. 20
UTS78E2S................... P. 20
UTS78E33P.................. P. 44
UTS78E33S.................. P. 44
UTS78E3AP.................. P. 40
UTS78E3AS.................. P. 40
UTS78E3P................... P. 36
UTS78E3S................... P. 36
UTS78E4P................... P. 60
UTS78E4S................... P. 60
UTS78E98P.................. P. 40
UTS78E98S.................. P. 40
UTS7GJC104P................ P. 68
UTS7GJC128P................ P. 96
UTS7GJC1412P............... P. 108
UTS7GJC147P................ P. 88
UTS7GN104P................. P. 68
UTS7GN128P................. P. 96
UTS7GN1412P................ P. 108
UTS7GN147P................. P. 88
Appendices
188 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
Appendices
Accessories
85005585A.................. P. 22
85005586A.................. P. 30
85005587A.................. P. 26
85005588A.................. P. 34
85005590A.................. P. 134
85005594................... P. 22
85005595................... P. 30
85005596................... P. 26
85005597................... P. 34
85005599................... P. 134
UT610CCRG.................. P. 30
UT610CCRR.................. P. 30
UT610CCRY.................. P. 30
UT612CCRG.................. P. 26
UT612CCRR.................. P. 26
UT612CCRY.................. P. 26
UT614CCRG.................. P. 34
UT614CCRR.................. P. 34
UT614CCRY.................. P. 34
UTFD11B.................... P. 22
UTFD12B.................... P. 30
UTFD13B.................... P. 26
UTFD14B.................... P. 34
UTFD16B.................... P. 134
UTS10DCG................... P. 30
UTS10DCGE.................. P. 30
UTS10DCGR.................. P. 30
UTS12DCG................... P. 26
UTS12DCGE.................. P. 26
UTS12DCGR.................. P. 26
UTS14DCG................... P. 34
UTS14DCGE.................. P. 34
UTS14DCGR.................. P. 34
UTS18DCG................... P. 134
UTS18DCGE.................. P. 134
UTS18DCGR.................. P. 134
UTS610DCG.................. P. 30
UTS612DCG.................. P. 26
UTS614DCG.................. P. 34
UTS618DCG.................. P. 134
UTS68C..................... P. 22
UTS710CCRG................. P. 30
UTS710CCRR................. P. 30
UTS710CCRY................. P. 30
UTS712CCRG................. P. 26
UTS712CCRR................. P. 26
UTS712CCRY................. P. 26
UTS714CCRG................. P. 34
UTS714CCRR................. P. 34
UTS714CCRY................. P. 34
UTS8DCG.................... P. 22
UTS8DCGE................... P. 22
UTS8DCGR................... P. 22
Contacts
82911456K.................. P. 145
82911457NK................. P. 145
82911458K.................. P. 145
82911459NK................. P. 145
82911460K.................. P. 145
82911461NK................. P. 145
82911462K.................. P. 145
82911463NK................. P. 145
82911464K.................. P. 145
82911465NK................. P. 145
82911466K.................. P. 145
82911467NK................. P. 145
82913600A.................. P. 145
82913601A.................. P. 145
82913602A.................. P. 145
82913603A.................. P. 145
82913604A.................. P. 145
82913605A.................. P. 145
82913606A.................. P. 145
82913607A.................. P. 145
82913608A.................. P. 145
82913609A.................. P. 145
RC14M30GE7K................ P. 146
RC14M30K................... P. 145
RC14M50GE7K................ P. 146
RC14M50K................... P. 145
RC16M23GE7K................ P. 146
RC16M23K................... P. 145
RC18W3K.................... P. 145
RC20M12E83K................ P. 148
RC20M12E84K................ P. 145
RC20M12E8K................. P. 145
RC20M12GE7K................ P. 146
RC20M12K................... P. 145
RC20M13GE7K................ P. 146
RC20M13K................... P. 145
RC20W3K.................... P. 145
RC24M9GE7K................. P. 146
RC24M9K.................... P. 145
RC24W3K.................... P. 145
RC28M1GE7K................. P. 146
RC28M1K.................... P. 145
RCDX6016D28................ P. 182
RCDX6019D28................ P. 182
RCDX6024D28................ P. 182
RCDX6026D28................ P. 182
RCDX602D28................. P. 181
RCDX6032D28................ P. 182
RCDX6036D28................ P. 182
RCDX6052D28................ P. 182
RCDXK1D28.................. P. 181
RCPOF1000B................. P. 150
RCW5016K................... P. 145
RCW50A7K................... P. 148
RM14M30GE1K................ P. 146
RM14M30K................... P. 145
RM14M50GE1K................ P. 146
RM14M50K................... P. 148
RM16M23GE1K................ P. 146
RM16M23K................... P. 145
RM18W3K.................... P. 145
RM20M12E83K................ P. 145
RM20M12E8K................. P. 145
RM20M12GE1k................ P. 146
RM20M12K................... P. 145
RM20M13GE1k................ P. 146
RM20M13K................... P. 145
RM20W3K.................... P. 145
RM24M9GE1k................. P. 146
RM24M9K.................... P. 145
RM24W3K.................... P. 145
RM28M1GE1k................. P. 146
RM28M1K.................... P. 145
RMDX6019D28................ P. 177
RMDX6024D28................ P. 176
RMDX6026D28................ P. 176
RMDX602D28................. P. 182
RMDX6031D28................ P. 179
RMDX6032D28................ P. 182
RMDX6036D28................ P. 182
RMDX6050D28................ P. 182
RMDXK10D28................. P. 178
RMPOF1000.................. P. 150
RMW5016K................... P. 148
RMW50A7K................... P. 148
SC14M1TK6.................. P. 145
SC14ML1TK6................. P. 145
SC16M11TK6................. P. 145
SC16M1TK6.................. P. 145
SC16ML11TK6................ P. 145
SC16ML1TK6................. P. 145
SC20M1TK6.................. P. 145
SC20ML1TK6................. P. 145
SC20W3TK6.................. P. 145
SC20WL3TK6................. P. 145
© 2011 – SOURIAU 189
UTS Series
Appendices
SC24M1TK6.................. P. 145
SC24ML1TK6................. P. 145
SC24W3TK6.................. P. 145
SC24WL3TK6................. P. 145
SM14M1TK6.................. P. 145
SM14ML1TK6................. P. 145
SM16M11TK6................. P. 145
SM16M1TK6.................. P. 145
SM16ML11TK6................ P. 145
SM16ML1TK6................. P. 145
SM20M1TK6.................. P. 145
SM20ML1TK6................. P. 145
SM20W3TK6.................. P. 145
SM20WL3TK6................. P. 145
SM24M1TK6.................. P. 145
SM24ML1TK6................. P. 145
SM24W3TK6.................. P. 145
SM24WL3TK6................. P. 145
Tooling
51060210924................ P. 155
51060210936................ P. 155
M10S1J..................... P. 178
M10SG8..................... P. 179
M317....................... P. 155
MH860...................... P. 155
MH86164G................... P. 155
MH86186.................... P. 155
RX2025GE1.................. P. 155
RX20D44.................... P.162
S16RCM14................... P. 155
S16RCM1450................. P. 155
S16RCM16................... P. 155
S16SCM20................... P. 155
S16SCML1................... P. 155
S16SCML11.................. P. 155
S20RCM..................... P. 155
S16SCM20................... P. 155
S20SCM20................... P. 155
S221....................... P. 180
S23D2...................... P. 180
S80........................ P. 179
S82........................ P. 182
S83........................ P. 179
S87........................ P. 182
S88........................ P. 182
SHANDLES................... P. 155
SL105...................... P. 179
sl46D2..................... P. 180
sl471...................... P. 180
UH25....................... P. 155
VGE10077A.................. P. 155
VGE10078A.................. P. 155
Appendices
INDUTSCA07EN © Copyright SOURIAU June 2011 - All information in this document presents only general particulars and shall not form part of any contract. All rights reserved to SOURIAU for changes without prior notifi cation or public announcement. Any duplication is prohibited, unless approved in writing.
www.souriau.com
www.souriau-industrial.com
contactindustry@souriau.com
Tiva™ C Series TM4C1294 Connected
LaunchPad Evaluation Kit
EK-TM4C1294XL
User's Guide
Literature Number: SPMU365A
March 2014–Revised March 2014
Contents
1 Board Overview ................................................................................................................... 4
1.1 Kit Contents................................................................................................................... 5
1.2 Using the Connected LaunchPad ......................................................................................... 5
1.3 Features....................................................................................................................... 5
1.4 BoosterPacks................................................................................................................. 6
1.5 Energīa........................................................................................................................ 6
1.6 Specifications................................................................................................................. 6
2 Hardware Description ........................................................................................................... 7
2.1 Functional Description ...................................................................................................... 7
2.1.1 Microcontroller....................................................................................................... 7
2.1.2 Ethernet Connectivity............................................................................................... 8
2.1.3 USB Connectivity ................................................................................................... 8
2.1.4 Motion Control....................................................................................................... 8
2.1.5 User Switches and LED's.......................................................................................... 8
2.1.6 BoosterPacks and Headers ....................................................................................... 9
2.2 Power Management........................................................................................................ 17
2.2.1 Power Supplies .................................................................................................... 17
2.2.2 Low Power Modes ................................................................................................ 18
2.2.3 Clocking ............................................................................................................ 18
2.2.4 Reset................................................................................................................ 18
2.3 Debug Interface............................................................................................................. 18
2.3.1 In-Circuit Debug Interface (ICDI) ................................................................................ 18
2.3.2 External Debugger ................................................................................................ 19
2.3.3 Virtual COM Port .................................................................................................. 19
3 Software Development ........................................................................................................ 20
3.1 Software Description....................................................................................................... 20
3.2 Source Code ................................................................................................................ 20
3.3 Tool Options ................................................................................................................ 20
3.4 Programming the Connected LaunchPad............................................................................... 21
4 References, PCB Layout, and Bill of Materials ....................................................................... 22
4.1 References .................................................................................................................. 22
4.2 Component Locations ..................................................................................................... 23
4.3 Bill of Materials ............................................................................................................. 24
5 Schematic ......................................................................................................................... 26
6 Revision History................................................................................................................. 27
2 Contents SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com
List of Figures
1-1. Tiva C Series Connected LaunchPad Evaluation Board ............................................................... 4
2-1. Tiva Connected LaunchPad Evaluation Board Block Diagram ........................................................ 7
2-2. Default Jumper Locations ................................................................................................. 17
4-1. Connected LaunchPad Dimensions and Component Locations ..................................................... 23
List of Tables
1-1. EK-TM4C1294XL Specifications........................................................................................... 6
2-1. BoosterPack 1 GPIO and Signal Muxing ................................................................................. 9
2-2. BoosterPack 2 GPIO and Signal Muxing ............................................................................... 11
2-3. X11 Breadboard Adapter Odd-Numbered Pad GPIO and Signal Muxing .......................................... 13
2-4. X11 Breadboard Adapter Even-Numbered Pad GPIO and Signal Muxing ......................................... 15
4-1. Connected LaunchPad Bill of Materials ................................................................................. 24
6-1. Revision History ............................................................................................................ 27
SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 List of Figures 3
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Chapter 1
SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014
Board Overview
The Tiva™ C Series TM4C1294 Connected LaunchPad Evaluation Board (EK-TM4C1294XL) is a low-cost
evaluation platform for ARM® Cortex™-M4F-based microcontrollers. The Connected LaunchPad design
highlights the TM4C1294NCPDT microcontroller with its on-chip 10/100 Ethernet MAC and PHY, USB 2.0,
hibernation module, motion control pulse-width modulation and a multitude of simultaneous serial
connectivity. The Connected LaunchPad also features two user switches, four user LEDs, dedicated reset
and wake switches, a breadboard expansion option and two independent BoosterPack XL expansion
connectors. The pre-programmed quickstart application on the Connected LaunchPad also enables
remote monitoring and control of the evaluation board from an internet browser anywhere in the world.
The web interface is provided by 3rd party, Exosite. Each Connected LaunchPad is enabled on the
Exosite platform allowing users to create and customize their own Internet-of-Things applications.
Figure 1-1 shows a photo of the Connected LaunchPad with key features highlighted.
Figure 1-1. Tiva C Series Connected LaunchPad Evaluation Board
Tiva is a trademark of Texas Instruments.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
4 Board Overview SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com Kit Contents
1.1 Kit Contents
The Connected LaunchPad Evaluation Kit contains the following items:
• Tiva™ C Series TM4C1294 Evaluation Board (EK-TM4C1294XL)
• Retractable Ethernet cable
• USB Micro-B plug to USB-A plug cable
• README First document
1.2 Using the Connected LaunchPad
The recommended steps for using the Connected LaunchPad Evaluation Kit are:
1. Follow the README First document included in the kit. The README First helps you get the
Connected LaunchPad up and running in minutes. Within just a few minutes you can be controlling and
monitoring the Connected LaunchPad through the internet using Exosite and the pre-programmed
quickstart application.
2. Experiment with BoosterPacks. This evaluation kit conforms to the latest revision of the BoosterPack
pinout standard. It has two independent BoosterPack connections to enable a multitude of expansion
opportunities.
3. Take the first step towards developing your own applications. The Connected LaunchPad is
supported by TivaWare for C Series. After installing TivaWare, look in the installation directory for
examples\boards\ek-tm4c1294xl. You can find pre-configured example applications for this board as
well as for this board with selected BoosterPacks. Alternately, use Energīa for a wiring frameworkbased
cross-platform, fast-prototyping environment that works with this and other TI LaunchPads. See
Chapter 3 of this document for more details about software development. TivaWare can be
downloaded from the TI website at http://www.ti.com/tool/sw-tm4c. Energīa can be found at
http://energia.nu.
4. Customize and integrate the hardware to suit your end application. This evaluation kit can be
used as a reference for building your own custom circuits based on Tiva C microcontrollers or as a
foundation for expansion with your custom BoosterPack or other circuit. This manual can serve as a
starting point for this endeavor.
5. Get Trained. You can also download hours of written and video training materials on this and related
LaunchPads. Visit the Tiva C Series LaunchPad Workshop Wiki for more information.
6. More Resources. See the TI MCU LaunchPad web page for more information and available
BoosterPacks. (http://www.ti.com/tiva-c-launchpad)
1.3 Features
Your Connected LaunchPad includes the following features:
• Tiva TM4C1294NCPDTI microcontroller
• Ethernet connectivity with fully integrated 10/100 Ethernet MAC and PHY Motion Control PWM
• USB 2.0 Micro A/B connector
• 4 user LEDs
• 2 user buttons
• 1 independent hibernate wake switch
• 1 independent microcontroller reset switch
• Jumper for selecting power source:
– ICDI USB
– USB Device
– BoosterPack
• Preloaded Internet-of-Things Exosite quickstart application
• I/O brought to board edge for breadboard expansion
• Two independent BoosterPack XL standard connectors featuring stackable headers to maximize
expansion through BoosterPack ecosystem
SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Board Overview 5
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
BoosterPacks www.ti.com
– For a complete list of BoosterPacks, see the TI MCU LaunchPad web page:
http://www.ti.com/launchpad
1.4 BoosterPacks
The Connected LaunchPad provides an easy and inexpensive way to develop applications with the
TM4C1294NCPDTI microcontroller. BoosterPacks are add-on boards that follow a pin-out standard
created by Texas Instruments. The TI and third-party ecosystem of BoosterPacks greatly expands the
peripherals and potential applications that you can easily explore with the Connected LaunchPad.
You can also build your own BoosterPack by following the design guidelines on TI’s website. Texas
Instruments even helps you promote your BoosterPack to other members of the community. TI offers a
variety of avenues for you to reach potential customers with your solutions.
1.5 Energīa
Energīa is an open-source electronics prototyping platform started in January of 2012 with the goal of
bringing the Wiring and Arduino framework to the TI LaunchPad community. Energīa includes an
integrated development environment (IDE) that is based on Processing.
Together with Energīa, LaunchPads can be used to develop interactive objects, taking inputs from a
variety of switches or sensors, and controlling a variety of lights, motors, and other physical outputs.
LaunchPad projects can be stand-alone (only run on the target board, i.e. your LaunchPad), or they can
communicate with software running on your computer (Host PC). Energīa projects are highly portable
between supported LaunchPad platforms. Projects written for your Connected LaunchPad can be run on
other LaunchPads with little or no modifications.
More information is available at http://energia.nu.
1.6 Specifications
Table 1-1 summarizes the specifications for the Connected LaunchPad.
Table 1-1. EK-TM4C1294XL Specifications
Parameter Value
4.75 VDC to 5.25 VDC from one of the following sources:
• Debug USB U22 (ICDI) USB Micro-B cable connected to PC or other compatible
power source.
• Target USB (U7) USB Micro-B cable connected to PC or other compatible power
Board Supply Voltage source.
• BoosterPack 1 (X8-4)
• BoosterPack 2 (X6-4)
• Breadboard expansion header (X11-2 or X11-97).
See schematic symbol JP1 for power input selection.
Dimensions 4.9 in x 2.2 in x .425 in (12.45 cm x 5.59 cm x 10.8 mm) (L x W x H)
• 5 VDC to BoosterPacks, current limited by TPS2052B. Nominal rating 1 Amp.
Board input power supply limitations may also apply.
Break-out Power Output • 3.3 VDC to BoosterPacks, limited by output of TPS73733 LDO. This 3.3-V plane is
shared with on-board components. Total output power limit of TPS73733 is 1
Amp.
RoHS Status Compliant
6 Board Overview SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Chapter 2
SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014
Hardware Description
The Connected LaunchPad includes a TM4C1294NCPDTI microcontroller with an integrated 10/100
Ethernet MAC and PHY. This advanced ARM® Cortex™ M4F MCU has a wide range of peripherals that
are made available to users via the on-board accessories and the BoosterPack connectors. This chapter
explains how those peripherals operate and interface to the microcontroller.
Figure 2-1 provides a high-level block diagram of the Connected LaunchPad.
Figure 2-1. Tiva Connected LaunchPad Evaluation Board Block Diagram
2.1 Functional Description
2.1.1 Microcontroller
The TM4C1294NCPDTI is a 32-bit ARM Cortex-M4F based microcontroller with 1024-kB Flash memory,
256-kB SRAM, 6-kB EEPROM, and 120 MHz operation; integrated 10/100 Ethernet MAC and PHY;
integrated USB 2.0 connectivity with external high-speed USB 3.0 PHY capability; a hibernation module, a
multitude of serial connectivity and motion control PWM; as well as a wide range of other peripherals. See
the TM4C1294NCPDTI microcontroller data sheet for more complete details.
Most of the microcontroller’s signals are routed to 0.1-in (2.54-mm) pitch headers or through-hole solder
pads. An internal multiplexor allows different peripheral functions to be assigned to each of these GPIO
pads. When adding external circuitry, consider the additional load on the evaluation board power rails.
The TM4C1294NCPDTI microcontroller is factory-programmed with a quickstart demo program. The
quickstart program resides in on-chip Flash memory and runs each time power is applied, unless the
quickstart application has been replaced with a user program. The quickstart application automatically
connects to http://ti.exosite.com when an internet connection is provided through the RJ45 Ethernet jack
on the evaluation board.
SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Hardware Description 7
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Functional Description www.ti.com
2.1.2 Ethernet Connectivity
The Connected LaunchPad is designed to connect directly to an Ethernet network using RJ45 style
connectors. The microcontroller contains a fully integrated Ethernet MAC and PHY. This integration
creates a simple, elegant and cost-saving Ethernet circuit design. Example code is available for both the
uIP and LwIP TCP/IP protocol stacks. The embedded Ethernet on this device can be programmed to act
as an HTTP server, client or both. The design and integration of the circuit and microcontroller also enable
users to synchronize events over the network using the IEEE1588 precision time protocol.
When configured for Ethernet operation, it is recommended that the user configure LED D3 and D4 to be
controlled by the Ethernet MAC to indicate connection and transmit/receive status.
2.1.3 USB Connectivity
The Connected LaunchPad is designed to be USB 2.0 ready. A TPS2052B load switch is connected to
and controlled by the microcontroller USB peripheral, which manages power to the USB micro A/B
connector when functioning in a USB host. When functioning as a USB device, the entire Connected
LaunchPad can be powered directly from the USB micro A/B connector. Use JP1 to select the desired
power source.
USB 2.0 functionality is provided and supported directly out of the box with the target USB micro A/B
connector. High-speed USB 3.0 functionality can be enabled by adding an external USB PHY. The USB
external PHY control and data signals are provided on the breadboard expansion header X11.
2.1.4 Motion Control
The Connected LaunchPad includes the Tiva C Series Motion Control PWM technology, featuring a PWM
module capable of generating eight PWM outputs. The PWM module provides a great deal of flexibility
and can generate simple PWM signals – for example, those required by a simple charge pump – as well
as paired PWM signals with dead-band delays, such as those required by a half-H bridge driver. Three
generator blocks can also generate the full six channels of gate controls required by a 3-phase inverter
bridge.
A quadrature encoder interface (QEI) is also available to provide motion control feedback.
See the BoosterPacks and Headers section of this document for details about the availability of these
signals on the BoosterPack interfaces.
2.1.5 User Switches and LED's
Two user switches are provided for input and control of the TM4C1294NCPDTI software. The switches
are connected to GPIO pins PJ0 and PJ1.
A reset switch and a wake switch are also provided. The reset switch initiates a system reset of the
microcontroller whenever it is pressed and released. Pressing the reset switch also asserts the reset
signal to the BoosterPack and Breadboard headers. The wake switch is one way to bring the device out of
hibernate mode.
Four user LEDs are provided on the board. D1 and D2 are connected to GPIOs PN1 and PN0. These
LEDs are dedicated for use by the software application. D3 and D4 are connected to GPIOs PF4 and
PF0, which can be controlled by user’s software or the integrated Ethernet module of the microcontroller.
A power LED is also provided to indicate that 3.3 volt power is present on the board.
8 Hardware Description SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com Functional Description
2.1.6 BoosterPacks and Headers
2.1.6.1 BoosterPack 1
The Connected LaunchPad features two fully independent BoosterPack XL connectors. BoosterPack 1, located around the ICDI portion of the
board, is fully compliant with the BoosterPack standard with the single exception of GPIO pin PA6 (X8-16), which does not provide analog
capability. PA6 is located near the bottom of the inner left BoosterPack XL header.
I2C is provided in both the original BoosterPack standard configuration as well as the updated standard location. Use of I2C on the bottom left of
the BoosterPack connections per the updated standard is highly encouraged whenever possible.
Motion control advanced PWM connections are provided on the inner right connector for motion control applications.
Table 2-1 provides a complete listing of the BoosterPack pins and the GPIO alternate functions available on each pin. The TM4C1294NCPDTI
GPIO register GPIOPCTL values are shown for each configuration. The headers in this table are labeled from left to right in ten pin columns. ‘A’
and ‘D’ make up the outer BoosterPack standard pins, ‘B’ and ‘C’ make up the inner BoosterPack XL standard pins.
Table 2-1. BoosterPack 1 GPIO and Signal Muxing
Standard MCU Digital Function (GPIOPCTL Bit Encoding) Header Pin Function GPIO Pin Analog 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 11 13 14 15
A1 1 +3.3 volts 3.3V
A1 2 Analog PE4 123 AIN9 U1RI - - - - - - - - - SSI1XDAT0
A1 3 UART RX PC4 25 C1- U7Rx - - - - - - - - - EPI0S7
A1 4 UART TX PC5 24 C1+ U7Tx - - - - RTCCLK - - - - EPI0S6
A1 5 GPIO PC6 23 C0+ U5Rx - - - - - - - - - EPI0S5
A1 6 Analog PE5 124 AIN8 - - - - - - - - - - SSIXDAT1
A1 7 SPI CLK PD3 4 AIN12 - I2C8SDA T1CCP1 - - - - - - - SSI2CLk
A1 8 GPIO PC7 22 C0- U5Tx - - - - - - - - - EPI0S4
A1 9 I2C SCL PB2 91 - - I2C0SCL T5CCP0 - - - - - - USB0STP EPI0S27
A1 10 I2C SDA PB3 92 - - I2C0SDA T5CCP1 - - - - - - USB0CLK EPI0S28
B1 1 +5 volts 5V
B1 2 ground GND
B1 3 Analog PE0 15 AIN3 U1RTS - - - - - - - - - -
B1 4 Analog PE1 14 AIN2 U1DSR - - - - - - - - - -
B1 5 Analog PE2 13 AIN1 U1DCD - - - - - - - - - -
B1 6 Analog PE3 12 AIN0 U1DTR - - - - - - - - - -
B1 7 Analog PD7 128 AIN4 U2CTS - T4CCP1 USB0PFLT - - NMI - - - SSI2XDAT2
B1 8 Analog PA6 40 - U2Rx I2C6SCL T3CCP0 USB0EPEN - - - - SSI0XDAT2 - EPI0S8
B1 9 A out PM4 74 TMPR3 U0CTS - T4CCP0 - - - - - - - -
B1 10 A out PM5 73 TMPR2 U0DCD - T4CCP1 - - - - - - - -
SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Hardware Description 9
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Functional Description www.ti.com
Table 2-1. BoosterPack 1 GPIO and Signal Muxing (continued)
Standard MCU Digital Function (GPIOPCTL Bit Encoding) Header Pin Function GPIO Pin Analog 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 11 13 14 15
C1 1 PWM PF1 43 - - - - EN0LED2 M0PWM1 - - - - SSI3XDAT0 TRD1
C1 2 PWM PF2 44 - - - - - M0PWM2 - - - - SSI3Fss TRD0
C1 3 PWM PF3 45 - - - - - M0PWM3 - - - - SSI3Clk TRCLK
C1 4 PWM PG0 49 - - I2C1SCL - EN0PPS M0PWM4 - - - - - EPI0S11
C1 5 Capture PL4 85 - - - T0CCP0 - - - - - - USB0D4 EPI0S26
C1 6 Capture PL5 86 - - - T0CCP1 - - - - - - USB0D5 EPI0S33
C1 7 GPIO PL0 81 - - I2C2SDA - - M0FAULT3 - - - - USB0D0 EPI0S16
C1 8 GPIO PL1 82 - - I2C2SCL - - PhA0 - - - - USB0D1 EPI0S17
C1 9 GPIO PL2 83 - - - - C0o PhB0 - - - - USB0D2 EPI0S18
C1 10 GPIO PL3 84 - - - - C1o IDX0 - - - - USB0D3 EPI0S19
D1 1 ground GND
D1 2 PWM PM3 75 - - - T3CCP1 - - - - - - - EPI0S12
D1 3 GPIO PH2 31 - U0DCD - - - - - - - - - EPI0S2
D1 4 GPIO PH3 32 - U0DSR - - - - - - - - - EPI0S3
D1 5 reset RESET
D1 6 SPI MOSI PD1 2 AIN14 - I2C7SDA T0CCP1 C1o - - - - - - SSI2XDAT0
D1 7 SPI MISO PD0 1 AIN15 - I2C7SCL T0CCP0 C0o - - - - - - SSI2XDAT1
D1 8 GPIO PN2 109 - U1DCD U2RTS - - - - - - - - EPI0S29
D1 9 GPIO PN3 110 - U1DSR U2CTS - - - - - - - - EPI0S30
D1 10 GPIO PP2 103 - U0DTR - - - - - - - - USB0NXT EPI0S29
10 Hardware Description SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com Functional Description
2.1.6.2 BoosterPack 2
The second BoosterPack XL interface is located near the middle of the board. This interface is fully compliant with the BoosterPack standard, and
adds features not covered by the BoosterPack standard that enable operation with additional BoosterPacks.
An additional analog signal is provided on the outer left header (X6-9). This signal can be used to monitor the touch panel on the popular Kentec
EB-LM4F120-L35 BoosterPack.
Using the jumpers JP4 and JP5, Controller Area Network (CAN) digital receive and transmit signals can be optionally routed to the BoosterPack 2
interface. The location of these signals is consistent with the CAN interface on the Tiva C Series TM4C123G LaunchPad and the Stellaris
LM4F120 LaunchPad. In the default configuration, UART0 is used for the ICDI virtual UART and CAN is not present on the BoosterPack headers.
In this configuration, the ROM serial bootloader can be used over the ICDI virtual UART. When the jumpers are configured for CAN on the
BoosterPack, then UART4 must be used for the ICDI virtual UART.
To comply with both the original and the new BoosterPack standard, I2C is provided on both sides of the BoosterPack connection. Use of I2C on
the bottom left of the BoosterPack connection is highly encouraged where possible, to be in compliance with the new BoosterPack standard. To
provide I2C capability on the right side of the connector, per the original standard, two zero-ohm resistors (R19 and R20) are used to combine the
SPI and I2C signals. These signals are not shared with any other pins on the LaunchPad and therefore removal of these zero-ohm resistors
should not be required. Software should be certain that unused GPIO signals are configured as inputs.
Table 2-2 provides a complete listing of the BoosterPack pins and the GPIO alternate functions available at each pin. The TM4C1294NCPDT
GPIO register GPIOPCTL values are shown for each configuration. The headers in this table are labeled from left to right in ten pin columns. ‘A’
and ‘D’ make up the outer BoosterPack standard pins, ‘B’ and ‘C’ make up the inner BoosterPack XL standard pins.
Table 2-2. BoosterPack 2 GPIO and Signal Muxing
Standard MCU Digital Function (FPIOPCTL Bit Encoding) Header Pin Function GPIO Pin Analog 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 11 13 14 15
A2 1 3.3V
A2 2 Analog PD2 3 AIN13 - I2C8SCL T1CCP0 C2o - - - - - - SSI2Fss
A2 3 UART RX PP0 118 C2+ U6Rx - - - - - - - - - SSI3XDAT2
A2 4 UART TX PP1 119 C2- U6Tx - - - - - - - - - SSI3XDAT3
GPIO PD4 125 AIN7 U2Rx - T3CCP0 - - - - - - - SSI1XDAT2 A2 5 (See JP4) PA0 33 - U0Rx I2C9SCL T0CCP0 - - CANORx - - - - -
Analog PD5 126 AIN6 U2Tx - T3CCP1 - - - - - - - SSI1XDAT3 A2 6 (See JP5) PA1 34 - U0Tx I2C9SDA T0CCP1 - - CAN0Tx - - - - -
A2 7 SPI CLK PQ0 5 - - - - - - - - - - SSI3Clk EPI0S20
A2 8 GPIO PP4 105 - U3RTS U0DSR - - - - - - - USB0D7 -
A2 9 I2C SCL PN5 112 - U1RI U3CTS I2C2SCL - - - - - - - EPIO0S35
A2 10 I2C SDA PN4 111 - U1DTR U3RTS I2C2SDA - - - - - - - EPIO0S34
B2 1 5V
B2 2 GND
B2 3 Analog PB4 121 AIN10 U0CTS I2C5SCL - - - - - - - - SSI1Fss
SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Hardware Description 11
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Functional Description www.ti.com
Table 2-2. BoosterPack 2 GPIO and Signal Muxing (continued)
Standard MCU Digital Function (FPIOPCTL Bit Encoding) Header Pin Function GPIO Pin Analog 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 11 13 14 15
B2 4 Analog PB5 120 AIN11 U0RTS I2C5SDA - - - - - - - - SSI1Clk
B2 5 Analog PK0 18 AIN16 U4Rx - - - - - - - - - EPI0S0
B2 6 Analog PK1 19 AIN17 U4Tx - - - - - - - - - EPI0S1
B2 7 Analog PK2 20 AIN18 U4RTS - - - - - - - - - EPI0S2
B2 8 Analog PK3 21 AIN19 u4CTS - - - - - - - - - EPI0S3
B2 9 A out PA4 37 - U3Rx I2C7SCL T2CCP0 - - - - - - - SSI0XDAT0
B2 10 A out PA5 38 - U3Tx I2C7SDA T2CCP1 - - - - - - - SSI0XDAT1
C2 1 PWM PG1 50 - - I2C1SDA - - M0PWM5 - - - - - EPI0S10
C2 2 PWM PK4 63 - - I2C3SCL - EN0LED0 M0PWM6 - - - - - EPI0S32
C2 3 PWM PK5 62 - - I2C3SDA - EN0LED2 M0PWM7 - - - - - EPI0S31
C2 4 PWM PM0 78 - - - T2CCP0 - - - - - - - EPI0S15
C2 5 Capture PM1 77 - - - T2CCP1 - - - - - - - EPI0S14
C2 6 Capture PM2 76 - - - T3CCP0 - - - - - - - EPI0S13
C2 7 GPIO PH0 29 - U0RTS - - - - - - - - - EPI0S0
C2 8 GPIO PH1 30 - U0CTS - - - - - - - - - EPI0S1
C2 9 GPIO PK6 61 - - I2C4SCL - EN0LED1 M0FAULT1 - - - - - EPI0S25
C2 10 GPIO PK7 60 - U0RI I2C4SDA - RTCCLK M0FAULT2 - - - - - EPI0S24
D2 1 GND
D2 2 PWM PM7 71 TMPR0 U0RI - T5CCP1 - - - - - - - -
D2 3 GPIO PP5 106 - U3CTS I2C2SDL - - - - - - - USB0D6 -
D2 4 GPIO PA7 41 - U2Tx I2C6SDA T3CCP1 USB0PFLT - - - USB0EPEN SSI0XDAT3 - EPI0S9
D2 5 RESET
SPI MOSI PQ2 11 - - - - - - - - - - SSI3XDAT0 EPI0S22
D2 6
I2C PA3 36 - U4Tx I2C8SDA T1CCP1 - - - - - - - SSI0Fss
SPI MISO PQ3 27 - - - - - - - - - - SSI3XDAT1 EPI0S23
D2 7
I2C PA2 35 - U4Rx I2C8SCL T1CCP0 - - - - - - - SSI0Clk
D2 8 GPIO PP3 104 - U1CTS U0DCD - - - - - - - USB0DIR EPI0S30
D2 9 GPIO PQ1 6 - - - - - - - - - - SSI3Fss EPI0S21
D2 10 GPIO PM6 72 TMPR1 U0DSR - T5CCP0 - - - - - - - -
12 Hardware Description SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com Functional Description
2.1.6.3 Breadboard Connection
The breadboard adapter section of the board is a set of 98 holes on a 0.1 inch grid. Properly combined with a pair of right angle headers, the
entire Connected LaunchPad can be plugged directly into a standard 300 mil (0.3 inch) wide solder-less breadboard. The right angle headers and
breadboard are not provided with this kit. Suggested part numbers are Samtec TSW-149-09-L-S-RE and TSW-149-08-L-S-RA right angle pin
headers and Twin industries TW-E40-1020 solder-less breadboard. Samtec TSW-149-09-F-S-RE and TSW-149-09-F-S-RA may be substituted.
A detailed explanation of how to install the headers is available on the TI LaunchPad Wiki or at
http://users.ece.utexas.edu/~valvano/EE345L/Labs/Fall2011/LM3S1968soldering.pdf.
Nearly all microcontroller signals are made available at the breadboard adapter holes (X11). These signals are grouped by function where
possible. For example, all EPI signals are grouped on one side of the connector. Many of the analog signals are grouped near VREF, and UART,
SSI and I2C signals are grouped by peripheral to make expansion and customization simpler.
Table 2-3 and Table 2-4 show the GPIO pin and signal muxing for the X11 breadboard adapter pads.
Table 2-3. X11 Breadboard Adapter Odd-Numbered Pad GPIO and Signal Muxing
MCU Digital Function (GPIOPCTL Bit Encoding) Pin Port PIN Analog 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 11 13 14 15
1 3V3
3 GND
5 PB4 121 AIN10 U0CTS I2C5SCL - - - - - - - - SSI1Fss
7 PB5 120 AIN11 U0RTS I2C5SDA - - - - - - - - SSI1Clk
9 PH0 29 - U0RTS - - - - - - - - - EPI0S0
11 PH1 30 - U0CTS - - - - - - - - - EPI0S1
13 PH2 31 - U0DCD - - - - - - - - - EPI0S2
15 PH3 32 - U0DSR - - - - - - - - - EPI0S3
17 PC7 22 C0- U5Tx - - - - - - - - - EPI0S4
19 PC6 23 C0+ U5Rx - - - - - - - - - EPI0S5
21 PC5 24 C1+ U7Tx - - - - RTCCLK - - - - EPI0S6
23 PC4 25 C1- U7Rx - - - - - - - - - EPI0S7
25 PA6 40 - U2Rx I2C6SCL T3CCP0 USB0EPEN - - - - SSI0XDAT2 - EPI0S8
27 PA7 41 - U2Tx I2C6SDA T3CCP1 USB0PFLT - - - USB0EPEN SSI0XDAT3 - EPI0S9
29 PG1 50 - - I2C1SDA - - M0PWM5 - - - - - EPI0S10
31 PG0 49 - - I2C1SCL - EN0PPS M0PWM4 - - - - - EPI0S11
33 PM3 75 - - - T3CCP1 - - - - - - - EPI0S12
35 GND
37 PM2 76 - - - T3CCP0 - - - - - - - EPI0S13
39 PM1 77 - - - T2CCP1 - - - - - - - EPI0S14
41 PM0 78 - - - T2CCP0 - - - - - - - EPI0S15
SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Hardware Description 13
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Functional Description www.ti.com
Table 2-3. X11 Breadboard Adapter Odd-Numbered Pad GPIO and Signal Muxing (continued)
MCU Digital Function (GPIOPCTL Bit Encoding) Pin Port PIN Analog 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 11 13 14 15
43 PL0 81 - - I2C2SDA - - M0FAULT3 - - - - USB0D0 EPI0S16
45 PL1 82 - - I2C2SCL - - PhA0 - - - - USB0D1 EPI0S17
47 PL2 83 - - - - C0o PhB0 - - - - USB0D2 EPI0S18
49 PL3 84 - - - - C1o IDX0 - - - - USB0D3 EPI0S19
51 PQ0 5 - - - - - - - - - - SSI3Clk EPI0S20
53 PQ1 6 - - - - - - - - - - SSI3Fss EPI0S21
55 PQ2 11 - - - - - - - - - - SSI3XDAT0 EPI0S22
57 PQ3 27 - - - - - - - - - - SSI3XDAT1 EPI0S23
59 PK7 60 - U0RI I2C4SDA - - - - - - EPI0S24
61 GND
63 PK6 61 - - I2C4SCL - EN0LED1 M0FAULT1 - - - - - EPI0S25
65 PL4 85 - - - T0CCP0 - - - - - - USB0D4 EPI0S26
67 PB2 91 - - I2C0SCL T5CCP0 - - - - - - USB0STP EPI0S27
69 PB3 92 - - I2C0SDA T5CCP1 - - - - - - USB0CLK EPI0S28
71 PP2 103 - U0DTR - - - - - - - - USB0NXT EPI0S29
73 PP3 104 - U1CTS U0DCD - - - RTCCLK - - - USB0DIR EPI0S30
75 PK5 62 - - I2C3SDA - EN0LED2 M0PWM7 - - - - - EPI0S31
77 PK4 63 - - I2C3SCL - EN0LED0 M0PWM6 - - - - - EPI0S32
79 PL5 86 - - - T0CCP1 - - - - - - USB0D5 EPI0S33
81 PN4 111 - U1DTR U3RTS I2C2SDA - - - - - - - EPI0S34
83 PN5 112 - U1RI U3CTS I2C2SCL - - - - - - - EPI0S35
85 PN0 107 - U1RTS - - - - - - - - - -
87 PN1 108 - U1CTS - - - - - - - - - -
89 PN2 109 - U1DCD U2RTS - - - - - - - - EPI0S29
91 PN3 110 - U1DSR U2CTS - - - - - - - - EPI0S30
93 PQ4 102 - U1Rx - - - - - DIVSCLK - - - -
95 WAKE
97 5V
14 Hardware Description SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com Functional Description
Table 2-4. X11 Breadboard Adapter Even-Numbered Pad GPIO and Signal Muxing
MCU Digital Function (GPIOPCTL Bit Encoding) Pin Port PIN Analog 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 11 13 14 15
2 5V
4 GND
6 PA2 35 - U4Rx I2C8SCL T1CCP0 - - - - - - - SSI0Clk
8 PA3 36 - U4Tx I2C8SDA T1CCP1 - - - - - - - SSI0Fss
10 PA4 37 - U3Rx I2C7SCL T2CCP0 - - - - - - - SSI0XDAT0
12 PA5 38 - U3Tx I2C7SDA T2CCP1 - - - - - - - SSI0XDAT1
14 PE0 15 AIN3 U1RTS - - - - - - - - - -
16 PE1 14 AIN2 U1DSR - - - - - - - - - -
18 PE2 13 AIN1 U1DCD - - - - - - - - - -
20 PE3 12 AIN0 U1DTR - - - - - - - - - -
22 PE4 123 AIN9 U1RI - - - - - - - - - SSI1XDAT0
24 PE5 124 AIN8 - - - - - - - - - - SSI1XDAT1
26 PK0 18 AIN16 U4Rx - - - - - - - - - EPI0S0
28 PK1 19 AIN17 U4Tx - - - - - - - - - EPI0S1
30 PK2 20 AIN18 U4RTS - - - - - - - - - EPI0S2
32 PK3 21 AIN19 U4CTS - - - - - - - - - EPI0S3
34 VREF
36 GND
38 PD5 126 AIN6 U2Tx - T3CCP1 - - - - - - - SSI1XDAT3
40 PD4 125 AIN7 U2Rx - T3CCP0 - - - - - - - SSI1XDAT2
42 PD7 128 AIN4 U2CTS - T4CCP1 USB0PFLT - - NMI - - - SSI1XDAT2
44 PD6 127 AIN5 U2RTS - T4CCP0 USB0EPEN - - - - - - SSI1XDAT3
46 PD3 4 AIN12 - I2C8SDA T1CCP1 - - - - - - - SSI2Clk
48 PD1 2 AIN14 - I2C7SDA T0CCP1 C1o - - - - - - SSI1XDAT0
50 PD0 1 AIN15 - I2C7SCL T0CCP0 C0o - - - - - - SSI1XDAT1
52 PD2 3 AIN13 - I2C8SCL T1CCP0 C2o - - - - - - SSI2Fss
54 PP0 118 C2+ U6Rx - - - - - - - - - SSI1XDAT2
56 PP1 119 C2- U6Tx - - - - - - - - - SSI1XDAT3
58 PB0 95 USB0ID U1Rx I2C5SCL T4CCP0 - - CAN1Rx - - - - -
60 PB1 96 USB0VBUS U1Tx I2C5SDA T4CCP1 - - CAN1Tx - - - - -
62 GND
64 PF4 46 - - - - EN0LED1 M0FAULT0 - - - - SSI3XDAT2 TRD3
66 PF0 42 - - - - EN0LED0 M0PWM0 - - - - SSI3XDAT1 TRD2
SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Hardware Description 15
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Functional Description www.ti.com
Table 2-4. X11 Breadboard Adapter Even-Numbered Pad GPIO and Signal Muxing (continued)
MCU Digital Function (GPIOPCTL Bit Encoding) Pin Port PIN Analog 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 11 13 14 15
68 PF1 43 - - - - EN0LED2 M0PWM1 - - - - SSI3XDAT0 TRD1
70 PF2 44 - - - - - M0PWM2 - - - - SSI3Fss TRD0
72 PF3 45 - - - - - M0PWM3 - - - - SSI3Clk TRCLK
74 PA0 33 - U0Rx I2C9SCL T0CCP0 - - CAN0Rx - - - - -
76 PA1 34 - U0Tx I2C9SDA T0CCP1 - - CAN0Tx - - - - -
78 PP4 105 - U3RTS U0DSR - - - - - - - USB0D7 -
80 PP5 106 - U3CTS I2C2SCL - - - - - - - USB0D6 -
82 PJ0 116 - U3Rx - - - - - - - - -
84 PJ1 117 - U3Tx - - - - - - - - - -
86 PM7 71 TMPR0 U0RI - T5CCP1 - - - - - - - -
88 PM6 72 TMPR1 U0DSR - T5CCP0 - - - - - - - -
90 PM5 73 TMPR2 U0DCD - T4CCP1 - - - - - - - -
92 PM4 74 TMPR3 U0CTS - T4CCP0 - - - - - - - -
94 RESET
96 GND
98 3V3
16 Hardware Description SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com Power Management
2.1.6.4 Other Headers and Jumpers
JP1 is provided to select the power input source for the Connected LaunchPad. The top position is for
BoosterPack power; this position also disconnects both USB voltages from the board’s primary 5-volt
input. In the top position, the TPS2052B does not limit current so additional care should be exercised. The
middle position draws power from the USB connector on the left side of the board near the Ethernet jack.
The bottom position is the default, in which power is drawn from the ICDI (Debug) USB connection.
JP2 separates the MCU 3.3-volt power domain from the rest of the 3.3-volt power on the board allowing
an ammeter to be used to obtain more accurate measurements of microcontroller power consumption.
JP3 isolates the output of the TPS73733 LDO from the board’s 3.3-V power domain.
JP4 and JP5 are used to configure CAN signals to the BoosterPack 2 interface. In the default horizontal
configuration, CAN is not present on the BoosterPack. UART 4 goes to the BoosterPack and UART 0
goes to the ICDI virtual serial port to provide ROM serial bootloader capability. In the vertical CAN-enabled
configuration, UART 4 goes to the ICDI virtual serial port and CAN signals are available on the
BoosterPack. The ROM serial bootloader is not available to the ICDI virtual serial port while the jumpers
are in the CAN position.
Figure 2-2 shows the default configuration and relative location of the jumpers on the board.
Figure 2-2. Default Jumper Locations
2.2 Power Management
2.2.1 Power Supplies
The Connected LaunchPad can be powered from three different input options:
• On-board ICDI USB cable (Debug, Default)
• Target USB cable
• BoosterPack or Breadboard adapter connection
The JP1 power-select jumper is used to select one of the power sources.
In addition, the JP3 power jumper can be used to isolate the 3.3-volt output of the TPS73733 from the
board’s 3.3-volt rail.
A TPS2052B load switch is used to regulate and control power to the Target USB connector when the
microcontroller is acting in USB host mode. This load switch also limits current to the BoosterPack and
Breadboard adapter headers when the JP1 jumper is in the ICDI position.
SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Hardware Description 17
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Power Management www.ti.com
2.2.2 Low Power Modes
The Connected LaunchPad demonstrates several low power microcontroller modes. In run mode, the
microcontroller can be clocked from several sources such as the internal precision oscillator or an external
crystal oscillator. Either of these sources can then optionally drive an internal PLL to increase the effective
frequency of the system up to 120 MHz. In this way, the run mode clock speed can be used to manage
run mode current consumption.
The microcontroller also provides sleep and deep sleep modes and internal voltage adjustments to the
flash and SRAM to further refine power consumption when the processor is not in use but peripherals
must remain active. Each peripheral can be individually clock gated in these modes so that current
consumption by unused peripherals is minimized. A wide variety of conditions from internal and external
sources can trigger a return to run mode.
The lowest power setting of the microcontroller is hibernation, which requires a small amount of supporting
external circuitry available on the Connected LaunchPad. The Connected LaunchPad can achieve
microcontroller current consumption modes under 2 micro-Amps using hibernate VDD3ON mode.
Hibernation with VDD3ON mode is not supported on this board. The Connected LaunchPad can be woken
from hibernate by several triggers including the dedicated wake button, the reset button, an internal RTC
timer and a subset of the device GPIO pins. The hibernation module provides a small area of internal
SRAM that can preserve data through a hibernate cycle.
2.2.3 Clocking
The Connected LaunchPad uses a 25 MHz crystal (Y1) to drive the main TM4C1294NCPDTI internal
clock circuit. Most software examples use the internal PLL to multiply this clock to higher frequencies up to
120 MHz for core and peripheral timing. The 25-MHz crystal is required when using the integrated
Ethernet MAC and PHY.
The Hibernation module is clocked from an external 32.768-KHz crystal (Y3).
2.2.4 Reset
The RESET signal to the TM4C1294NCPDTI microcontroller connects to the RESET switch, BoosterPack
connectors, Breadboard adapter and to the ICDI circuit for a debugger-controller reset.
External reset is asserted (active low) under the following conditions:
• Power-on reset (filtered by and R-C network)
• RESET switch is held down.
• By the ICDI circuit when instructed by the debugger (this capability is optional, and may not be
supported by all debuggers)
• By an external circuit attached to the BoosterPack or Breadboard connectors.
2.3 Debug Interface
2.3.1 In-Circuit Debug Interface (ICDI)
The Connected LaunchPad comes with an on-board ICDI. The ICDI allows for the programming and
debugging of the TM4C1294NCPDTI using LM Flash Programmer and/or any of the supported tool
chains. Note that ICDI only supports JTAG debugging at this time. It is possible to use other JTAG
emulators instead of the on board ICDI, by connecting to U6. When the ICDI detects an external debug
adapter connection on the JTAG connector U6 and disables the ICDI outputs to allow the external debug
adapter to drive the debug circuit. For more information, see Section 2.3.2.
Debug out of the ICDI is possible by removing resistors R6, R7, R8, R10, R11, R15, R16 and R40 from
the Connected LaunchPad and use the ICDI to drive JTAG signals out on U6 for the purpose of
programming or debugging other boards. To restore the connection to the on-board TM4C1294NCPDTI
microcontroller, install jumpers from the odd to even pins of X1 or re-install the resistors. Removal of R40
disables the detection of an attached external debugger. R40 must be installed to use an external debug
adapter to program or debug the Connected LaunchPad.
18 Hardware Description SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com Debug Interface
2.3.2 External Debugger
The connector U6 is provided for the attachment of an external debug adapter such as the IAR J-Link or
Keil ULINK. This connector follows the ARM standard 10-pin JTAG pinout. This interface can use either
JTAG or SWD if supported by the external debug adapter.
2.3.3 Virtual COM Port
When plugged into a USB host, the ICDI enumerates as both a debugger and a virtual COM port. JP4 and
JP5 control the selection of which UART from the TM4C1294NCPDTI is connected to the virtual COM
port. In the default configuration, UART0 maps to the virtual COM port of the ICDI. In the CAN jumper
configuration, UART4 maps to the virtual COM port of the ICDI.
SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Hardware Description 19
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Chapter 3
SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014
Software Development
This chapter provides general information on software development as well as instructions for flash
memory programming.
3.1 Software Description
The TivaWare software provides drivers for all of the peripheral devices supplied in the design. The Tiva C
Series Peripheral Driver Library is used to operate the on-chip peripherals as part of TivaWare.
TivaWare includes a set of example applications that use the TivaWare Peripheral Driver Library. These
applications demonstrate the capabilities of the TM4C1294NCPDTI microcontroller, as well as provide a
starting point for the development of the final application for use on the Connected LaunchPad evaluation
board. Example applications are also provided for the Connected LaunchPad when paired with selected
BoosterPacks.
3.2 Source Code
The complete source code including the source code installation instructions are provided at
http://www.ti.com/tool/sw-tm4c. The source code and binary files are installed in the TivaWare software
tree.
3.3 Tool Options
The source code installation includes directories containing projects, makefiles, and binaries for the
following tool-chains:
• Keil ARM RealView® Microcontroller Development System
• IAR Embedded Workbench for ARM
• Sourcery Codebench
• Generic GNU C Compiler
• Texas Instruments' Code Composer Studio™ IDE
Download evaluation versions of these tools from the Tools & Software section of www.ti.com/tiva. Due to
code size restrictions, the evaluation tools may not build all example programs. A full license is necessary
to re-build or debug all examples.
For detailed information on using the tools, see the documentation included in the tool chain installation or
visit the website of the tools supplier.
20 Software Development SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com Programming the Connected LaunchPad
3.4 Programming the Connected LaunchPad
The Connected LaunchPad software package includes pre-built binaries for each of the example
applications. If you installed the TivaWare™ software to the default installation path of
C:\ti\TivaWare_C_Series_, you can find the example applications in C:\ti\TivaWare_C_Series-
\examples\boards\ek-tm4c129xl. The on-board ICDI is used with the LM Flash Programmer tool
to program applications on the Connected LaunchPad.
Follow these steps to program example applications into the Connected LaunchPad evaulation board
using the ICDI:
1. Install LM Flash Programmer on a PC running Microsoft Windows.
2. Place JP1 into the ICDI position on the Connected LaunchPad.
3. Connect the USB-A cable plug in to an available USB port on the PC and plug the Micro-B plug to the
Debug USB port (U22) on the Connected LaunchPad.
4. Verify that LED D0 at the top of the board is illuminated.
5. Install Windows ICDI and Virtual COM Port drivers if prompted. Installation instructions can be found at
http://www.ti.com/lit/pdf/spmu287.
6. Run the LM Flash Programmer application on the PC.
7. In the Configuration tap, use the Quick Set control to select “TM4C1294XL LaunchPad”.
8. Move to the Program tab and click the Browse button. Navigate to the example applications directory
(the default location is C:\ti\TivaWare_C_Series_\examples\boards\ek-tm4c1294xl\)
9. Each example application has its own directory. Navigate to the example directory that you want to
load and then into the sub-directory for one of the supported tool chains which contains the binary
(*.bin) file. Select the binary file and click Open.
10. Set the Erase Method to Erase Necessary Pages, check the Verify After Program box, and check
Reset MCU After Program. The example program starts execution once the verify process is complete.
SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Software Development 21
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Chapter 4
SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014
References, PCB Layout, and Bill of Materials
4.1 References
In addition to this document the following references are available for download at www.ti.com.
• TivaWare for C Series (http://www.ti.com/tool/sw-tm4c)
• TivaWare Peripheral Driver Library Users' Guide (literature number SPMU298)
• EK-TM4C1294XL Getting Started Guide (literature number SPMZ858)
• LM Flash Programmer Tool (http://www.ti.com/lmflashprogrammer)
• TPS73733 Low-Dropout Regulator with Reverse Current Protection
(http://www.ti.com/product/tps79733)
• Texas Instruments Code Composer Studio website (http://www.ti.com/ccs)
• Tiva C Series TM4C1294NCPDT Microcontroller Data Sheet (http://www.ti.com/lit/gpn/tm4c1294ncpdt)
• Build Your Own BoosterPack information regarding the BoosterPack standard (http://www.ti.com/byob)
• ICDI Driver Installation Guide (literature number SPMU287)
Additional Support:
• Keil RealView MDK-ARM (http://www.keil.com/arm/mdk.asp)
• IAR Embedded Workbench for ARM (http://iar.com/ewarm/)
• Sourcery CodeBench development tools (http://www.mentor.com/embedded-software/sourcerytools/
sourcery-codebench/overview)
• Exosite (http://ti.exosite.com)
22 References, PCB Layout, and Bill of Materials SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com Component Locations
4.2 Component Locations
Figure 4-1 is a dimensioned drawing of the Connected LaunchPad. This figure shows the location of
selected features of the board as well as the component locations.
Figure 4-1. Connected LaunchPad Dimensions and Component Locations
SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 References, PCB Layout, and Bill of Materials 23
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Bill of Materials www.ti.com
4.3 Bill of Materials
Table 4-1 is the Connected LaunchPad bill of materials list.
Table 4-1. Connected LaunchPad Bill of Materials
Item Ref Qty Description Mfg Part Number
1 C1 1 Capacitor, 1000pF, 2kV, Kemet C1210C102MGRACTU 20%, X7R, 1210
C3, C4, C5, C10, C11, C12,
C13, C16, C17, C18, C19, Capacitor, 0.1uF 16V, 2 C21, C22, C23, C24, C25, 26 10%,0402 X7R Taiyo Yuden EMK105B7104KV-F C26, C27, C28, C29, C30,
C40, C41, C42, C43, C46
3 C31 1 Capacitor, 4700pF, 2kV, AVX 1812GC472KAT1A 10%,X7R, 1812
4 C32, C33 2 Capacitor, 3300pF, 50V, TDK C1608X7R1H332K 10%, X7R, 0603
5 C6, C14 2 Capacitor, 1uF , X5R, 10V, Johanson 100R07X105KV4T Low ESR, 0402 Dielectrics Inc
6 C7, C15, C20 3 Capacitor, 2.2uF, 16V, Murata GRM188R61C225KE15D 10%, 0603, X5R
7 C8, C9, C44, 6 Capacitor, 12pF, 50V, Murata GRM1555C1H120JZ01D C45, C47, C48 5%, 0402, COG
8 D0, D1, D2, D3, D4 5 Green LED 0603 Everlight 19-217/G7C-AL1M2B/3T
J1, J2, J3, Jumper, 0.100, Gold, 3M 969102-0000-DA 9 J4, J5, J6, J7 7 Black, Open Kobiconn 151-8000-E
Header, 2x3, 0.100, T-Hole,
10 JP1 1 Vertical Unshrouded, FCI 67996-206HLF
0.230 Mate, gold
Header, 1x2, 0.100, T-Hole, 3M 961102-6404-AR
11 JP2, JP3 2 Vertical Unshrouded, 0.220 FCI 68001-102HLF
Mate Anyone 1x2-head
Header, 2x2, 0.100, T-Hole, FCI 67997-104HLF
12 JP4, JP5 2 Vertical Unshrouded, 0.230
Mate 4UCON 00998
13 R1, R2, R3, R4, 8 Resistor, 10k ohm, 1/10W, Yageo RC0402FR-0710KL R5, R29, R35, R44 5%, 0402 Thick Film
14 R17, R26, R36 3 100k 5% 0402 resistor smd Rohm MCR01MRTJ104
15 R18, R51 2 Resistor 0402 100 ohm 5% Rohm MCR1MRTJ101
16 R23, R21, R22, R24 4 Resistor 49.9 ohm 0402. 1 % Rohm MCR01MRTF49R9
17 R25 1 Resistor 4.87k 1% 0402 smd Rohm MCR01MRTF4871
18 R28 1 Resistor, 5.6k ohm, Panasonic ERJ-2GEJ562X 1/10W, 5%, 0402
19 R32, R43, R45, R46 4 resistor 75 ohm 0402 5% Rohm MCR01MRTJ750
20 R34, R52 2 Resistor, 1M OH, Panasonic ERJ-3GEYJ105V 1/10W, 5% 0603 SMD
21 R38 1 Resistor, 51 ohm, Panasonic ERJ-2GEJ510X 1/10W, 5%, 0402
22 R42 1 Resistor, 1M Ohm, Rohm MCR01MRTF1004 1/10W, 5%, 0402
23 R47 1 RES 1M OHM 5% 1206 TF Panasonic ERJ-8GEYJ105V
24 R49, R50 2 Resistor, 2.0k ohm, Panasonic ERJ-3GEYJ202V 1/10W, 5%, 0402
R6, R7, R8, R10, R11, Resistor, 0 ohm, 25 R15, R16, R19, R20, R39, 12 1/10W, 5%, 0402 Panasonic ERJ-2GE0R00X R40, R41
26 R9, R27, R30, R31, R33 5 Resistor, 330 ohm, Yageo RC0402FR-07330RL 1/10W, 5%, 0402
24 References, PCB Layout, and Bill of Materials SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com Bill of Materials
Table 4-1. Connected LaunchPad Bill of Materials (continued)
Item Ref Qty Description Mfg Part Number
27 RESET, USR_SW1, 4 Switch, Tact 6mm SMT, Omron B3S-1000 USR_SW2, WAKE 160gf
Tiva, MCU TM4C1294NCPDT Texas Instruments TM4C1294NCPDT
28 U1 1 128 QFP with Ethernet MAC
+ PHY Texas Instruments XM4C1294NCPDT
29 U10 1 Transformer, ethernet, 1 to 1. Pulse Electronics HX1198FNL SOIC 16
30 U13 1 Diode, 8 chan, +/-15KV, ESD Semtech SLVU2.8-4.TBT Protection Array, SO-8
31 U14 1 Connector, RJ45 NO MAG, TE Connectivity 1-406541-5 shielded THRU HOLE
32 U2, U3 2 IC 4CH ESD SOLUTION Texas Instruments TPD4S012DRYR W/CLAMP 6SON
33 U20 1 Stellaris TIVA MCU Texas Instruments TM4C123GH6PMI TM4C123GH6PMI
34 U22 1 USB Micro B receptacle FCI 10118194-0001LF right angle with guides
35 U4 1 Fault protected power switch, Texas Instruments TPS2052BDRBR dual channel, 8-SON
36 U5 1 3.3V LDO TI TPS73733DRV Texas Instruments TPS73733DRV fixed out 5V in
Samtec SHF-105-01-S-D-SM
37 U6 1 Header 2x5, 0.050, SM, Vertical Shrouded Don Connex C44-10BSA1-G Electronics
USB Micro AB receptacle.
38 U7 1 Right angle with through Hirose ZX62D-AB-5P8
guides
Samtec SSW-110-23-S-D
39 X6, X7, X8, X9 4 Header, 2x10, T-Hole Vertical unshrouded stacking Major League SSHQ-110-D-08-F-LF Electronics
40 Y1 1 Crystal 25 MHz 3.2 x 2.5 mm NDK nx3225ga-25.000m-std-crg-2
41 Y2 1 Crystal 16 MHz 3.2 x 2.5 mm NDK NX3225GA-16.000M-STD-CRG-2 4 pin
42 Y3 1 Crystal, 32.768 KHz Radial Citizen Finetech CMR200T-32.768KDZY-UT Can Miyota
PCB Do Not Populate List (Shown for information only)
43 C2 1 Capacitor, 0.1uF 16V, Taiyo Yuden EMK105B7104KV-F 10%, 0402 X7R
Screw, #4 x 0.625" Pan
44 H1, H4, H6 3 Head, Sheet Metal, McMaster 90077A112 Phillips/Slotted
(for fan)
45 R12, R13, R14 3 Resistor, 5.6k ohm, Panasonic ERJ-2GEJ562X 1/10W, 5%, 0402
46 R48 1 Resistor 0402 1% 52.3k Rohm TRR01MZPF5232
TP1, TP2, TP3, TP4, TP5,
47 TP6, TP7, TP8, TP9, 17 Terminal, Test Point Miniature Keystone 5000 TP10, TP11, TP12, TP13, Loop, Red, T-Hole
TP14, TP15, TP16, TP17
Header, 2x7, 0.100, T-Hole,
48 X1 1 Vertical, Unshrouded, 0.230 FCI 67997-114HLF
Mate
Valvano style bread board
49 X11A 1 connect. Right Angle Samtec TSW-149-09-F-S-RE
extended, 1 x 49 0.100 pitch.
50 X11B 1 valvano style breadboard Samtec TSW-149-08-F-S-RA header.
SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 References, PCB Layout, and Bill of Materials 25
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Chapter 5
SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014
Schematic
This section contains the complete schematics for the Tiva C Series TM4C1294 Connected LaunchPad.
• Microcontroller, USB, Buttons, and LED's
• BoosterPack connectors
• Breadboard connector
• Ethernet and Ethernet LED's
• Power
• In-Circuit Debug Interface
26 Schematic SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
GND
330
GND
GND
SWITCH_TACTILE
SWITCH_TACTILE
GND
330
GND
TPD4S012_DRY_6
GND
GND 100
1M
3300pF
TP4
TP5
TP6
TP7
D1
R33
USR_SW1
USR_SW2
D2
R27
D+
1
D-
2
GND
4
ID
3
N.C.
5
VBUS
6
U2
R18
DM
P2
DP
P3
GND
P5
ID
P4
VBUS
P1
TP14
TP15
TP16
TP17
PA0
P$33
PA1
P$34
PA2
P$35
PA3
P$36
PA4
P$37
PA5
P$38
PA6
P$40
PA7
P$41
PB0
P$95
PB1
P$96
PB2
P$91
PB3
P$92
PB4
P$121
PB5
P$120
PC0
P$100
PC1
P$99
PC2
P$98
PC3
P$97
PC4
P$25
PC5
P$24
PC6
P$23
PC7
P$22
PD0
P$1
PD1
P$2
PD2
P$3
PD3
P$4
PD4
P$125
PD5
P$126
PD6
P$127
PD7
P$128
PE0
P$15
PE1
P$14
PE2
P$13
PE3
P$12
PE4
P$123
PE5
P$124
PF0
P$42
PF1
P$43
PF2
P$44
PF3
P$45
PF4
P$46
PG0
P$49
PG1
P$50
PH0
P$29
PH1
P$30
PH2
P$31
PH3
P$32
PJ0
P$116
PJ1
P$117
PK0
P$18
PK1
P$19
PK2
P$20
PK3
P$21
PK4
P$63
PK5
P$62
PK6
P$61
PK7
P$60
PL0
P$81
PL1
P$82
PL2
P$83
PL3
P$84
PL4
P$85
PL5
P$86
PL6
P$94
PL7
P$93
PM0
P$78
PM1
P$77
PM2
P$76
PM3
P$75
PM4
P$74
PM5
P$73
PM6
P$72
PM7
P$71
PN0
P$107
PN1
P$108
PN2
P$109
PN3
P$110
PN4
P$111
PN5
P$112
PP0
P$118
PP1
P$119
PP2
P$103
PP3
P$104
PP4
P$105
PP5
P$106
PQ0
P$5
PQ1
P$6
PQ2
P$11
PQ3
P$27
PQ4
P$102
R52
C32
GPIO
PA0
PA1
PA2
PA3
PA5
PA6
PA7
PA4
PB0
PB0/3.2C
TARGET_VBUS/3.2C
TARGET_VBUS/3.2C
TARGET_VBUS/3.2C
PB2
PB3
PB4
PB5
PC4
PC5
PC6
PC7
PD0
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
PF0
PF1
PF2
PF3
PF4
PE0
PE1
PE2
PE3
PE4
PE5
PG0
PG1
PH0
PH1
PH2
PJ0 PH3
PJ0/3.2D
PJ1
PJ1/3.2D
PK0
PK1
PK2
PK3
PK4
PK5
PK6
PK7
PL0
PL1
PL2
PL3
PL4
PL5
USBD_P
USBD_P
USBD_P
USBD_N
USBD_N
USBD_N
PM0
PM1
PM2
PM3
PM4
PM5
PM6
PM7
PP0
PP1
PP2
PP3
PP4
PP5
PN0
PN0/3.4D
PN1
PN1/3.4D
PN2
PN3
PN4
PN5
PQ0
PQ1
PQ2
PQ3
PQ4
TARGET_TCK/SWCLK/6.1A
TARGET_TMS/SWDIO/6.1A
TARGET_TDI/6.1E
TARGET_TDO/SWO/6.1E TARGET_ID
TARGET_ID
A
B
C
D
E
A
B
C
D
E
1 2 3 4 5 6
U7G$1
U1G$1
TM4C1294NCPDT
See PF0 and PF4 for additional LED's used for
Ethernet or user application
NOTE: TPD4S012 all protection circuits are identical.
Connections chosen for simple routing.
convienence test points for ground
TSW-110-02-S-D
TSW-110-02-S-D
TSW-110-02-S-D
TSW-110-02-S-D
0
0
+3V3
+3V3
+5V
+5V
0.1uF 0.1uF
0.1uF
0.1uF
GND GND
GND
GND
X6-1 X6-2
X6-3
X6-4
X6-5 X6-6
X6-7 X6-8
X6-9 X6-10
X6-11 X6-12
X6-13 X6-14
X6-15 X6-16
X6-17 X6-18
X6-19 X6-20
X7-1
X7-2
X7-3
X7-4
X7-5
X7-6
X7-7
X7-8
X7-9
X7-10
X7-11
X7-12
X7-13
X7-14
X7-15
X7-17 X7-16
X7-19 X7-18
X7-20
X8-1
X8-2
X8-3
X8-4
X8-5 X8-6
X8-7 X8-8
X8-9 X8-10
X8-11 X8-12
X8-13 X8-14
X8-15 X8-16
X8-17 X8-18
X8-19 X8-20
X9-1
X9-2
X9-3 X9-4
X9-5 X9-6
X9-7 X9-8
X9-9 X9-10
X9-11
X9-13 X9-12
X9-15 X9-14
X9-17 X9-16
X9-19 X9-18
X9-20
R19
R20
JP4
1 2
3 4
JP5
1 2
3 4
C23 C24
C25
C26
PB2
PB3
PL0
PP2
PH2
GND/1.6B
GND/1.6B
GND/1.6B
GND/1.6B
TARGET_RESET/3.2D
TARGET_RESET/3.2D
PA0/3.2C
BP2_A2.5 BP2_A2.5
TARGET_RXD/6.1D
TARGET_TXD/6.1D PA1/3.2C
BP2_A2.6
BP2_A2.6
PE4
PE5
PC5
PC4
PM3
PM4
PM5
PL4
PD5/1.4B
PC6
PD3
PC7
PE0
PE1
PE2
PE3
PD4/1.4B
PD7
PF1
PF2
PF3
PG0
PL5
PL1
PL2
PL3
PH3
PD1
PD0
PN2
PN3
PD2
PP0
PP1
PQ0
PP4
PN5
PN4
PB4
PB5
PK0
PK1
PK2
PK3
PA4
PA5
PG1
PK4
PK5
PM0
PM1
PM2
PH0
PH1
PK6
PK7
PM7
PA7
PA3
PA2
PQ3
PQ2
PP3
PQ1
PM6
PP5
PA6
BoosterPack 2 Interface
BoosterPack 1 Interface
A
B
C
D
E
A
B
C
D
E
1 2 3 4 5 6
JP4 and JP5 CAN and ICDI UART Selection:
Populate Jumpers from 1-2 and 3-4 for Default Mode
This enables ROM UART boot loader. UART 0 to ICDI
Populate from 1-3 and 2-4 for controller area network
on the boosterpack. UART2 is then availabe to ICDI.
R19 and R20 can be populated to enable I2C on
Right side of BP2 interface. This is for legacy
support and the Sensor Hub BoosterPack.
I2C and SSI are available on the corresponding
BoosterPack 1 interface pins without modification to
the board.
PA6 and PA7 are also used by the onboard radio.
Configure the radio to tri-state these GPIO before
using them on the boosterpack interface.
TSW-149-02-S-D
+3V3
+3V3
+5V
+5V
0.1uF 0.1uF
0.1uF 0.1uF
GND GND
GND GND
X11-2 X11-1
X11-4 X11-3
X11-6 X11-5
X11-8 X11-7
X11-10 X11-9
X11-12 X11-11
X11-14 X11-13
X11-16 X11-15
X11-18 X11-17
X11-20 X11-19
X11-22 X11-21
X11-24 X11-23
X11-26 X11-25
X11-28 X11-27
X11-30 X11-29
X11-32 X11-31
X11-34 X11-33
X11-36 X11-35
X11-38 X11-37
X11-40 X11-39
X11-42 X11-41
X11-44 X11-43
X11-46 X11-45
X11-48 X11-47
X11-50 X11-49
X11-52 X11-51
X11-54 X11-53
X11-56 X11-55
X11-58 X11-57
X11-60 X11-59
X11-62 X11-61
X11-64 X11-63
X11-66 X11-65
X11-68 X11-67
X11-70 X11-69
X11-72 X11-71
X11-74 X11-73
X11-76 X11-75
X11-78 X11-77
X11-80 X11-79
X11-82 X11-81
X11-84 X11-83
X11-86 X11-85
X11-88 X11-87
X11-90 X11-89
X11-92 X11-91
X11-94 X11-93
X11-96 X11-95
X11-98 X11-97
C28 C27
C29 C30
VREF+/5.5B
TARGET_RESET/2.4D
GND/2.3C
GND/2.3C GND/4.1A
GND/2.3C GND/4.1A
PB4
PB5
PH0
PH1
PH2
PH3
PC7
PC6
PC5
PC4
PA6
PA7
PG1
PM3
PM2
PM1
PM0
PL0
PL2
PL3
PQ0
PQ1
PK7
PK6
PL4
PB2
PB3
PP2
PP3
PK5
PK4
PL5
PN4
PN5
PG0
PL1
PQ2
PQ3
PN0
PN1
PN2
PN3
PQ4
WAKE/5.5A
PA2
PA3
PA4
PA5
PE0
PE1
PE2
PE3
PE4
PE5
PK0
PK1
PK2
PK3
PD5
PD4
PD7
PD6
PD3
PD1
PD0
PD2
PP0
PP1
PB0
TARGET_VBUS/1.6B
PF4
PF0
PF1
PF2
PF3
PA0
PA1
PP4
PP5
PJ0
PJ1
PM7
PM6
PM5
PM4
A
B
C
D
E
A
B
C
D
E
1 2 3 4 5 6
NOTE: PB0 and PB1 are used in some
configurations with 5V signals especially in USB
Host or OTG mode. Be aware the 5V may be
present on these pins depending on system jumper
configuration
These pins are only 5V tolerant when configured for
USB mode applications.
This is the breadboard connection header.
Samtec TSW-149-08-F-S-RA and TSW-149-09-F-S-RE
can be used together to create a breadboard
connector
see the Users Manual for more information.
49.9
49.9
49.4
49.9
330
GND
330
GND
0.1uF 0.1uF
GND GND
0.1uF 0.1uF
75
75
GND GND
75
75
GND
4700pF
1M
1000pF
R21
R22
R23
R24
D4
R30
D3
R31
C17 C16
C22 C18
P$1
P$1
P$2
P$2
P$3
P$3
P$6
P$6
P$7
P$7
P$8
P$8
P$9
P$9
P$10
P$10
P$11
P$11
P$14
P$14
P$15
P$15
P$16
P$16
P$1
1
P$2
2
P$3
3
P$4
4
P$5
5
P$6
6
P$7
7
P$8
8
R32
R43
CHASSIS
9
CHASSIS
10
RX+
3
RX-
6
TERM1A
4
TERM1B
5
TERM2A
7
TERM2B
8
TX+
1
TX-
2
R45
R46
C31
R47
C1
EN0RXI_N/5.3B
EN0RXI_P/5.3B
EN0TXO_N/5.3B
EN0TXO_P/5.3B
PF4/3.2C PF0/3.2C
MCU_3V3/5.2A
A
B
C
D
E
A
B
C
D
E
1 2 3 4 5 6
U10
U13
U14
For Ethernet example Applications:
LED4 is default configured as Ethernet Link OK
LED3 is default configured as Ethernet TX/RX activity
User may re-configure these pins / LED's for any
application usage.
Place pull up resistors and C16-C17 near TM4C MCU.
Place C18 and C22 near pin 2 and pin 7 of U$10
U10 May be populated with either HX1188FNL or HX1198FNL.
HX1198FNL preferred for best Ethernet performance.
+3V3
+5V
GND
0.1uF
2.2uF
0.1uF
GND
330
GND
100k
4.87k 1%
GND
GND 0.1uF 1.0uF 2.2uF
0.1uF 0.1uF 0.1uF 0.1uF
GND
0
0
GND
1M
SWITCH_TACTILE
12pF
12pF
10k
0.1uF
12pF 12pF
SWITCH_TACTILE
GND
MOUNT-HOLE3.2
MOUNT-HOLE3.2
GND
GND
GND
GND GND
TPS2052B_DRB_8
+5V
10k
100k
GND
51
0.1uF
GND
+3V3
100k
TPS73733_DRV_6
OMIT
2k
MOUNT-HOLE3.2
100
CRYATL_32K_SMD
C19
C20
C21
D0
R9
R17
TP3
R25
C4 C14 C15
C40 C41 C42 C43
TP9
TP10
TP11
TP12
R39
TP13
R41
R42
RESET
C44
C45
NC2
P$2
NC4
P$4
OSC0
P$1
OSC1
P$3
R44
C46
C47 C48
WAKE
H4
H6
*EN1
3
*EN2
4
*OC1
8
*OC2
5
EPAD
9
GND
1
IN
2
OUT1
7
OUT2
6
VIA
V
VIA
V_2
VIA
V_3
VIA
V_4
VIA
V_5
VIA
V_6
U4
JP1
1 2
3 4
5 6
JP2
1
2
JP3
1
2
R35
R36
TP8
R38
C3
R26
EN
4
EPAD
7
GND
3
IN
6
NC
5
NR/FB
2
OUT
1
VIA
V
VIA
V_2
U5
R48
R49
H1
R51
HIB
P$65
RESET
P$70
WAKE
P$64
EN0RXIN
P$53
EN0RXIP
P$54
EN0TXON
P$56
EN0TXOP
P$57
GND
P$17
GND
P$48
GND
P$55
GND
P$58
GND
P$80
GND
P$114
GNDA
P$10
OSC0
P$88
OSC1
P$89
RBIAS
P$59
VBAT
P$68
VDD
P$7
VDD
P$16
VDD
P$26
VDD
P$28
VDD
P$39
VDD
P$47
VDD
P$51
VDD
P$52
VDD
P$69
VDD
P$79
VDD
P$90
VDD
P$101
VDD
P$113
VDD
P$122
VDDA
P$8
VDDC
P$87
VDDC
P$115
VREFA+
P$9
XOSC0
P$66
XOSC1
P$67
P$1
P$1
P$2
P$2
Y3
TARGET_VBUS/3.2C
TARGET_VBUS/3.2C
DEBUG_VBUS/6.4A
EN0RXI_N
EN0RXI_P
EN0TXO_N
EN0TXO_P
RBIAS
WAKE/3.3D
MCU_3V3/6.2A
MCU_3V3/4.1A
VBUS
VBUS
VBUS
PQ4/3.4D
PD6/3.2B
TARGET_RESET/3.2D
A
B
C
D
E
A
B
C
D
E
1 2 3 4 5 6
Y1
25Mhz
U1G$2
Power Control Jumper:
1) To power from Debug install jumper on pins 5 - 6
2) To power from Target USB install jumper on pins 3 - 4
3) To power from BoosterPack 5V install jumper on pins 1 - 2
This is also the off position if BoosterPack does not
supply power
When powered from BoosterPack TPS2052B does not
provide current limit protection.
When powered by BoosterPack, USB host mode does not
supply power to connected devices
Primary 3.3V regulator
Disconnect JP3 to power device from 3V3 BoosterPack
JP2 can be used to measure MCU current
consumption with a multi-meter.
TPS2052B provides current limit for main 5V power.
Also provides power switching for USB host/OTG modes
For Host/OTG:
PD6 configured as USB0EPEN peripheral function.
PQ4 configure as individual pin interrupt. Indicates
power fault on the USB bus. USB0PFLT peipheral pin
not available due to pin mux and use on BoosterPacks.
USB Host mode does not supply power to devices
when powered from a BoosterPack
For Applications that do not use USB:
Configure PD6 as input with internal pull-down
enabled. Turns off power to TARGET_VBUS
R38 and C3 Used to meet
VBAT rise time requirements
R41 may be removed and precision
reference applied to TP13
OMIT
TSW-107-02-S-D
OMIT
+3V3
10k
0.1uF
OMIT
0.1uF 1.0uF
12pF
12pF
0.1uF 0.1uF 0.1uF 0.1uF
+3V3
+3V3
2.2uF
5.6k
OMIT
5.6k
OMIT
5.6k
OMIT
10k
10k
10k
10k
+3V3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
0
+3V3
TPD4S012_DRY_6
5.6k 10k
GND
2k
GND
1M
3300pF
GND
TRST
9
GND
3
NC
5
RESET
10
RTCK
7
TCK
4
TDI
8
TDO
6
TMS
2
VTREF
1
U21
X1-2 X1-1
X1-4 X1-3
X1-6 X1-5
X1-8 X1-7
X1-10 X1-9
X1-12 X1-11
X1-14 X1-13
R3
C2
C5 C6
C8
C9
C10 C11 C12 C13
NC2
P$2
NC4
P$4
OSC0
P$1
OSC1
P$3
C7
R12
R13
R14
R1
R2
R4
R5
TP2
TP1
R6
R7
R8
R10
R11
R15
R16
EXTDBG
P3
RESET
P10
GND
P5
GND1
P9
P$7
P7
TCK
P4
TDI
P8
TDO
P6
TMS
P2
VTARGET
P1
R40
HIB
P$33
RESET
P$38
WAKE
P$32
GND0
P$12
GND1
P$27
GND2
P$39
GND3
P$55
GNDA
P$3
GNDX
P$35
OSC0
P$40
OSC1
P$41
PA0
P$17
PA1
P$18
PA2
P$19
PA3
P$20
PA4
P$21
PA5
P$22
PA6
P$23
PA7
P$24
PB0
P$45
PB1
P$46
PB2
P$47
PB3
P$48
PB4
P$58
PB5
P$57
PB6
P$1
PB7
P$4
PC0/TCK
P$52
PC1/TMS
P$51
PC2/TDI
P$50
PC3/TDO
P$49
PC4
P$16
PC5
P$15
PC6
P$14
PC7
P$13
PD0
P$61
PD1
P$62
PD2
P$63
PD3
P$64
PD4
P$43
PD5
P$44
PD6
P$53
PD7
P$10
PE0
P$9
PE1
P$8
PE2
P$7
PE3
P$6
PE4
P$59
PE5
P$60
PF0
P$28
PF1
P$29
PF2
P$30
PF3
P$31
PF4
P$5
VBAT
P$37
VDD0
P$11
VDD1
P$26
VDD2
P$42
VDD3
P$54
VDDA
P$2
VDDC0
P$25
VDDC1
P$56
XOSC0
P$34
XOSC1
P$36
DM
P2
DP
P3
GND
P5
ID
P4
VBUS
P1
D+
1
D-
2
GND
4
ID
3
N.C.
5
VBUS
6
U3
R28 R29
R50
R34
C33
ICDI_TDI
ICDI_TMS
ICDI_TMS
ICDI_TCK
ICDI_TCK
ICDI_TDO
ICDI_TDO
ICDI_RESET
ICDI_RESET
VCP_RXD
VCP_RXD
VCP_RXD
VCP_TXD
VCP_TXD
VCP_TXD
DEBUG_PC1/TMS/SWDIO
DEBUG_PC1/TMS/SWDIO
DEBUG_PC1/TMS/SWDIO
DEBUG_PC1/TMS/SWDIO
DEBUG_PC1/TMS/SWDIO
DEBUG_PC3/TDO/SWO
DEBUG_PC3/TDO/SWO
DEBUG_PC3/TDO/SWO
DEBUG_PC3/TDO/SWO
DEBUG_PC3/TDO/SWO
DEBUG_PC2/TDI
DEBUG_PC2/TDI DEBUG_PC2/TDI
DEBUG_PC2/TDI
DEBUG_RESET_OUT
DEBUG_RESET_OUT
DEBUG_RESET_OUT
DEBUG_RESET_OUT
EXTERNAL_DEBUG
EXTERNAL_DEBUG
ICDI_VDDC
VERSION_1
VERSION_1
VERSION_2
VERSION_2
VERSION_0
VERSION_0
DEBUG_ACTIVE
ICDI_USBD_N
ICDI_USBD_N
ICDI_USBD_P
TARGET_TXD/2.5D ICDI_USBD_P
TARGET_TXD/2.5D
TARGET_RXD/2.5D
TARGET_RXD/2.5D
TARGET_TCK/SWCLK/1.2A
TARGET_TCK/SWCLK/1.2A
TARGET_TCK/SWCLK/1.2A
TARGET_TMS/SWDIO/1.2B
TARGET_TMS/SWDIO/1.2B
TARGET_TMS/SWDIO/1.2B
TARGET_TDI/1.2B TARGET_TDI/1.2B
TARGET_TDO/SWO/1.2B
TARGET_TDO/SWO/1.2B
TARGET_RESET/5.2A
TARGET_RESET/5.2A
DEBUG_VBUS/5.1B
DEBUG_VBUS/5.1B
DEBUG_VBUS/5.1B
DEBUG_PC0/TCK/SWCLK
DEBUG_PC0/TCK/SWCLK
DEBUG_PC0/TCK/SWCLK
DEBUG_PC0/TCK/SWCLK
DEBUG_PC0/TCK/SWCLK
MCU_3V3/5.6B
A
B
C
D
E
A
B
C
D
E
1 2 3 4 5 6
Y2
16M
U6
JTAG_ARM_10PIN
U20
TM4C123GH6PMI
TM4C123xH6PMI
U22G$1
PE4 ETM_ENn Leave Open
use GPIO Internal weak pullup.
PE5 LS_PRESENTn Leave Open
use GPIO internal weak pullup
VERSION RESISTOR TABLE:
*use internal GPIO weak pullups.
ALL OMITTED: Legacy mode. (Stellaris ICDI)
ALL POPULATED: Everything enabled
Version 0 populated: UART CTS/RTS and Analog inputs
JTAG PULL-UPS
Jumpers to bridge from ICDI to Target portion of LaunchPad
EXTERNAL_DEBUG pull low to use external debugger
to debug the target. Causes ICDI chip to tri-state the JTAG lines
Use this for JTAG IN from external debugger. See X1
jumpers for information about debug out to an
external target.
R40 must be removed for debug out.
R40 must be instaled for debug in.
X1 omitted by default
To debug out from ICDI to off board MCU remove
0 ohm jumper resistors. To go back from debug
out to debugging the target MCU install X1 and
place jumpers on all pins.
Chapter 6
SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014
Revision History
This history highlights the changes made to the SPMU365 user's guide to make it an SPMU365A revision.
Table 6-1. Revision History
SEE ADDITIONS/MODIFICATIONS/DELETIONS
Table 2-3, X11 Breadboard Adapter Odd-Numbered Pad GPIO and Signal Muxing:
• Updated/Changed Pin 1 from "5V" to "3V3"
• Updated/Changed Pin 25 from "PC4" to "PA6"
Section 2.1.6.3 • Updated/Changed Pin 27 from "PA6" to "PA7"
Breadboard Connection • Updated/Changed Pin 29 from "PA7" to "PG1"
• Updated/Changed Pin 61 from "EPI0S12" to "GND"
Table 2-4, X11 Breadboard Adapter Even-Numbered Pad GPIO and Signal Muxing:
• Updated/Changed Pin 2 from "3V3" to "5V"
SPMU365A–March 2014–Revised March 2014 Revision History 27
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, enhancements, improvements and other
changes to its semiconductor products and services per JESD46, latest issue, and to discontinue any product or service per JESD48, latest
issue. Buyers should obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and
complete. All semiconductor products (also referred to herein as “components”) are sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale
supplied at the time of order acknowledgment.
TI warrants performance of its components to the specifications applicable at the time of sale, in accordance with the warranty in TI’s terms
and conditions of sale of semiconductor products. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary
to support this warranty. Except where mandated by applicable law, testing of all parameters of each component is not necessarily
performed.
TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or the design of Buyers’ products. Buyers are responsible for their products and
applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with Buyers’ products and applications, Buyers should provide
adequate design and operating safeguards.
TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any patent right, copyright, mask work right, or
other intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI components or services are used. Information
published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license to use such products or services or a warranty or
endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual property of the
third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI.
Reproduction of significant portions of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration
and is accompanied by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered
documentation. Information of third parties may be subject to additional restrictions.
Resale of TI components or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that component or service
voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated TI component or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice.
TI is not responsible or liable for any such statements.
Buyer acknowledges and agrees that it is solely responsible for compliance with all legal, regulatory and safety-related requirements
concerning its products, and any use of TI components in its applications, notwithstanding any applications-related information or support
that may be provided by TI. Buyer represents and agrees that it has all the necessary expertise to create and implement safeguards which
anticipate dangerous consequences of failures, monitor failures and their consequences, lessen the likelihood of failures that might cause
harm and take appropriate remedial actions. Buyer will fully indemnify TI and its representatives against any damages arising out of the use
of any TI components in safety-critical applications.
In some cases, TI components may be promoted specifically to facilitate safety-related applications. With such components, TI’s goal is to
help enable customers to design and create their own end-product solutions that meet applicable functional safety standards and
requirements. Nonetheless, such components are subject to these terms.
No TI components are authorized for use in FDA Class III (or similar life-critical medical equipment) unless authorized officers of the parties
have executed a special agreement specifically governing such use.
Only those TI components which TI has specifically designated as military grade or “enhanced plastic” are designed and intended for use in
military/aerospace applications or environments. Buyer acknowledges and agrees that any military or aerospace use of TI components
which have not been so designated is solely at the Buyer's risk, and that Buyer is solely responsible for compliance with all legal and
regulatory requirements in connection with such use.
TI has specifically designated certain components as meeting ISO/TS16949 requirements, mainly for automotive use. In any case of use of
non-designated products, TI will not be responsible for any failure to meet ISO/TS16949.
Products Applications
Audio www.ti.com/audio Automotive and Transportation www.ti.com/automotive
Amplifiers amplifier.ti.com Communications and Telecom www.ti.com/communications
Data Converters dataconverter.ti.com Computers and Peripherals www.ti.com/computers
DLP® Products www.dlp.com Consumer Electronics www.ti.com/consumer-apps
DSP dsp.ti.com Energy and Lighting www.ti.com/energy
Clocks and Timers www.ti.com/clocks Industrial www.ti.com/industrial
Interface interface.ti.com Medical www.ti.com/medical
Logic logic.ti.com Security www.ti.com/security
Power Mgmt power.ti.com Space, Avionics and Defense www.ti.com/space-avionics-defense
Microcontrollers microcontroller.ti.com Video and Imaging www.ti.com/video
RFID www.ti-rfid.com
OMAP Applications Processors www.ti.com/omap TI E2E Community e2e.ti.com
Wireless Connectivity www.ti.com/wirelessconnectivity
Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265
Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
UTS Series
Dynamic IP68/69K • UV Resistant • UL/IEC Compliant
© 2011 – SOURIAU 3
How to read our catalogue ........................................ 06
UTS range overview ..................................................... 07
General technical characteristics ............................. 10
Cable assembly ............................................................... 14
2 contacts ....................................................................... 20
2 + ground contacts ................................................... 28
3 contacts ........................................................................ 36
3 + ground contacts .................................................... 52
4 contacts ........................................................................ 60
5 contacts ........................................................................ 72
6 contacts ........................................................................ 76
6 + ground contacts .................................................... 88
7 contacts ........................................................................ 92
8 contacts ........................................................................ 96
10 contacts ..................................................................... 104
12 contacts ...................................................................... 108
14 contacts ...................................................................... 116
15 contacts ...................................................................... 120
18 contacts ..................................................................... 124
19 contacts ..................................................................... 128
23 contacts ..................................................................... 132
32 contacts ..................................................................... 136
Contents
UTS Series
Overview
Mechanics
Description ...................................................................... 142
Contact plating selector guide .................................. 143
Contact selector guide ................................................ 144
Packaging ........................................................................ 144
Crimp contacts ............................................................... 145
#16 coaxial contacts ................................................... 147
PCB contacts .................................................................. 148
Fibre optic contacts ...................................................... 149
Contacts
Tooling .............................................................................. 154
Assembly instruction .................................................... 156
Dimensions overmoulded harnesses ..................... 162
Extraction tools .............................................................. 162
Rated current & working voltage .............................. 163
UV resistance ................................................................. 164
UL94 + UL1977 ............................................................ 165
IEC 61984 with IP code explanation ...................... 168
What is NEMA rating ? ................................................ 170
Ethernet for the layman ............................................... 171
Technical information
#16 coaxial contacts - cabling notices .................. 176
Glossary of terms .......................................................... 183
Discrimination/Keying methods ............................... 184
Part number Index.......................................................... 185
Appendices
Appendices Technical information Contacts Mechanics Overview
UTS Series
© 2011 – SOURIAU 5
Overview
UTS Series
How to read our catalog .............................................................................................................. 06
UTS range overview ...................................................................................................................... 07
General technical characteristics .............................................................................................. 10
6 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
Overview
SOURIAU is pleased to announce the arrival of a brand new catalog
containing some signifi cant improvements to simplify the connector selection
process and provide easy access to key information. In this version you can
see all layouts at a glance, download 2D drawings and 3D models.
Then, when your choice is made, you can click on the part number and buy
online.
Step 3
Step 2
Easy access to supporting material such as prints and CAD models. In just two pages
you can gather together details of all accessories, contacts, tools etc required for
your application.
Interactive zones. Clearer understanding of the range.
Step 1
© 2011 – SOURIAU 7
UTS range overview
The UTS series is a plastic connector
range but rugged enough to withstand
industrial applications.
The philosophy of the UTS series is built around three key elements:
Dynamic IP68/69K UV Resistant UL/IEC Compliant
In most applications, our connectors are
exposed to extreme climatic conditions;
it was therefore key for us to select the
materials best able to cope with the
targeted environment.
Part of our product qualifi cation process
involved subjecting connectors to a
simulated fi ve years of exposure to various
elements including Temperature, UV and
Humidity.
The results were positive in that there
were no visible signs of weakness, such as
cracking or crazing.
The outmost priority for any electrical
installation is to protect personnel from any
shock hazard.
In North America, Underwriters Laboratories
insisted that connector manufacturers,
depending of the application, respect
their standards. The UTS series had thus
been qualifi ed and is certifi ed by this
organisation.
In Europe and in Asia, IEC standards are
better known and trusted by end users. Like
its American equivalent, the IEC refers to
safety rules. The UTS series was obviously
designed to respect these rules.
UTS series is rated at IP68/69K… even
in dynamic conditions. This means
that it remain sealed even when used
continuously underwater or cleaned using
a high pressure hose and cable is moving.
This extreme level of performance is
achievable with jacketed cable or discrete
wires.
If this same level of performance is
required even when connectors are not
mated, we have UTS Hi Seal; a product
designed to remain watertight if an
environmental cap is not fi tted or if the
equipment is likely to get wet when cables
have been disconnected.
Screw termination version
UTS series is a wide range...
Based on multiple power & signal connectors and offers
everything from box mounted receptacles and cable mounted
plugs to cable mounted in-line and PCB mounted receptacles.
Almost all ways to accommodate wires exist: Crimp, Solder,
Screw termination.
UTS Series
Overview
The bayonet coupling system makes it simple to use.
With only a 1/3 twist of the coupling ring, connectors are mated
with an audible and sensitive “click”.
Overview
8 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Just screw the wires
to the connector !
No special tools
required, use a
standard screwdriver
UTS screw
termination
UTS range
UTS discrete
wire sealing
See page 9
Sealed: IP68/69K
UV resistant
UL/IEC compliant
Corrosion-proof
Plastic housing
UTS Series
Plug
Corrosion-proof
Plastic housing
UTS Hi seal
Sealed
Unmated
Sealed unmated: IP68/69K
MIL-C-26482 compatible
UV resistant
UL/IEC compliant
Screw
termination
contact
Solder contact
Crimp
contact
• machined
• stamped and
formed
• coaxial
• fibre optics
UTS Series
Overview
© 2011 – SOURIAU 9
overview
Metal hold down clips
- to lock the connector easily on
the PCB and to release stress on
solder joints
- suitable for soldering in a
metalised hole
Pre-assembled PCB contacts
- machined or stamped versions
available
- different solder tails lengths
possible
- different plating options
Low profi le housing to
limit space between
panel and PCB
Stand-offs to allow
cleaning after
soldering
UTS PCB contacts
Receptacle
No fi ller
plug needed
Grommet
Containment
ring
Backnut
or Easy handling
backshell
UTS discrete wire sealing
Double
Sealing
UTS Series
Overview
Overview
10 © 2011 – SOURIAU
General technical
Mechanical
• Durability:
250 matings & unmatings per MIL-C-26482
• Vibration resistance (all UTS versions except UTS Screw
termination contacts):
Sinusoidal vibrations per CEI 60512-4 - from 10 to 2000 Hz
• Thermal shock:
5 cycles 30 min. from -40°C to 105°C per MIL-STD1344
method 1003
Environmental
• Operating temperature:
from -40°C to +105°C
40/100/21 per NFF 61-030
• Flammability rating:
UL94-V0 (all UTS except the Hi seal) - see page 165
UL94-HB (UTS Hi seal only) - see page 165
I2F3 according to NFF 16101 and NFF 16102
• Salt spray:
500 hours
• UV resistant:
No mechanical degradation or important variation of colour
after 5 years of exposure in natural environment (equivalence
exposure to sun and moisture as per ISO4892)
• Sealing:
- UTS Standard: IP68/IP69K (mated)
- UTS Hi seal: IP68/IP69K (mated and unmated)
- UTS Discrete wire sealing: IP67/69K (up to IP68 with easy
handling backshell)
- UTS Screw termination contacts: IP68/IP69K
Note: IPx8: 10m underwater during 1 week
• Fluid resistance:
- Gasoil
- Mineral oil
- Acid bath
- Basic bath
1
2
3
4
5
1
3
UTS Series
Overview
© 2011 – SOURIAU 11
characteristics
Material
• Body connector + Backshell:
Thermoplastic
• Insert:
- UTS Standard, UTS Discrete wire sealing, UTS Screw
termination contacts:
Thermoplastic
- UTS Hi seal handsolder & UTS Hi seal with PC tails contacts:
Elastomer
• Contacts:
See page 140
• Nut:
Metal
• Halogen free
• RoHS compliant & conform to the Chinese standard
SJ/T1166-2006 (Chinese RoHS equivalent)
• In accordance with:
- UL 1977:
Certifi cat ECBT2
File number: E169916
- CSA C22.2 n°182.3:
Certifi cat ECBT8
File number: E169916
Electrical
• See each layout page
1
2
4
5
UTS Series
Overview
Overview
UTS Series
© 2011 – SOURIAU 13
UTS Series
Mechanics
Cable assembly ................................................................................................. 14
2 contacts
8E2/8D2: 7A 32V ............................................................................................. 20
12E2/12D2: 16A 150V ............................................................................................ 24
2 contacts + ground
103: 16A 300V ............................................................................................ 28
142G1: 40A 300V ............................................................................................ 32
3 contacts
8E3/8D3: 7A 32V ............................................................................................. 36
8E3A/8E98
8D3A/8D98: 7A 50V ............................................................................................. 40
8E33/8D3.: 7A 50V ............................................................................................. 44
12E3/12D3: 16A 150V ............................................................................................ 48
3 contacts + ground
124 - 12E4/12D4: 16A 300V ............................................................................................ 52
183G1: 32A 300V ............................................................................................ 56
4 contacts
8E4/8D4: 7A 32V ............................................................................................. 60
102W2: 25A 150V ............................................................................................ 64
104: 13A 150V ............................................................................................ 68
5 contacts
14E5/14D5: 16A 150V ............................................................................................ 72
6 contacts
103W3: 5A 32V ............................................................................................. 76
106 - 10E6/10D6: 7A 32V ............................................................................................. 80
10E98/10D98: 7A 50V ............................................................................................. 84
6 contacts + ground
147 - 14E7: 16A 300V ............................................................................................ 88
7 contacts
10E7/10D7: 7A 50V ............................................................................................. 92
8 contacts
128: 10A 80V ............................................................................................. 96
12E8/12D8: 6A 32V ............................................................................................. 100
10 contacts
1210 - 12E10/12D10: 6A 50V ............................................................................................. 104
12 contacts
1412: 10A 63V ............................................................................................. 108
14E12/14D12: 4A 50V ............................................................................................. 112
14 contacts
12E14/12D14: 5A 32V ............................................................................................. 116
15 contacts
14E15/14D15: 4A 50V ............................................................................................. 120
18 contacts
14E18/14D18: 5A 50V ............................................................................................. 124
19 contacts
1419 - 14E19/14D19: 5A 32V ............................................................................................. 128
23 contacts
1823: 9A 63V ............................................................................................. 132
32 contacts
1832: 4A 32V ............................................................................................. 136
14 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OUTDOOR (black outer jacket)
INDOOR
Cable assembly
Souriau provides connectors in various applications for more than 90 years in the most extreme environment. Being conscious
about the diffi culty to fi nd a quick and a reliable harness manufacturer, we decided years ago to start in house cable
assembly production. It allows customers to reduce the number of suppliers, and to take advantage of the "best in class" quality of the
Souriau group. Overmoulding is a process that further enhances the sealing properties of the UTS range, especially over many years
of use. Overmoulding provides the opportunity to change the cable exit from straight through 90 degrees and avoid any stress on the cable
terminated to the connector. Also, as the wires are encapsulated inside the moulding, a barrier is created which prevents from any liquid from
entering the equipment through the connector if the cable jacket is breached.
UV resistance
Ambient temperature
PVC
PUR
PTFE
FEP
SILICON
TPE
70°C
Static installation
Static installation Static installation
Static
installation
Static installation
Static or dynamic
installation
Wet
Cleaner,
Immerged chlorine
90°C 180°C 205°C 260°C
Chemical agression
How to choose the outer jacket material
UTS Series
Mechanics
© 2011 – SOURIAU 15
Overmolding description
Discrete connector
Overmoulded connector
Compound
Thermoplastic insert
O ring Overmolding adapter
PVC or PUR
overmolding
...water ingress unhampered, leading to damage.
...prevents water ingress via capillary action.
If cable jacket is breached...
If cable jacket is breached...
UTS Series
Mechanics
Mechanics
16 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
Mechanics
Harnesses
Overmoulded harnesses, straight ending
Connector
type
Number
of ways
Voltage
Current
UL
Current
IEC
Harmonised cable
part number*
Part number (length: 1m.)
Male Female
UTS
standard
2+PE 600 V 44 A 40 A HO5 VV - F 3Gg10 HAUTS0V142G1PST100 HAUTS0V142G1SST100
2+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 3x1.5 HAUTS0V103PST100 HAUTS0V103SST100
3+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 3G1.5 HAUTS0V103PEPST100 HAUTS0V103PESST100
3+PE 250 V 24 A 32 A HO5 VV - F 40G0.5 HAUTS0V183G1PST100 HAUTS0V183G1SST100
3+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 4G1.5 HAUTS0V124PEPST100 HAUTS0V124PESST100
4 500 V 10 A 13 A HO5 VV - F 4x1.5 HAUTS0V104PST100 HAUTS0V104SST100
3 500 V 10 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 7G0.5 HAUTS0V103W3PST100 HAUTS0V103W3SST100
6 250 V 5 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V106PST100 HAUTS0V106SST100
6+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 7G1.5 HAUTS0V147PEPST100 HAUTS0V147PESST100
8 500 V 10 A 10 A HO5 VV - F 8x1.5 HAUTS0V128PST100 HAUTS0V128SST100
10 250 V 5 A 6 A HO5 VV - F 10G0.5 HAUTS0V1210PST100 HAUTS0V1210SST100
12 500 V 10 A 10 A HO5 VV - F 12x1.5 HAUTS0V1412PST100 HAUTS0V1412SST100
19 250 V 5 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 21G0.5 HAUTS0V1419PST100 HAUTS0V1419SST100
23 500 V 10 A 9 A HO5 VV - F 25G1.5 HAUTS0V1823PST100 HAUTS0V1823SST100
32 250 V 5 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 40G0.5 HAUTS0V1832PST100 HAUTS0V1832SST100
UTS
Hi seal
2 250 V 7 A 7 A H05 VV - F 2x0.5 HAUTS0V8E2PST100 HAUTS0V8E2SST100
2 650 V 13 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 2x1.5 HAUTS0V12E2PST100 HAUTS0V12E2SST100
3 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 3x0.5 HAUTS0V8E3PST100 HAUTS0V8E3SST100
3 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 3x0.5 HAUTS0V8E3APST100 HAUTS0V8E3ASST100
3 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 3x0.5 HAUTS0V8E33PST100 HAUTS0V8E33SST100
3 650 V 13 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 3x1.5 HAUTS0V12E3PST100 HAUTS0V12E3SST100
4 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 4x0.5 HAUTS0V8E4PST100 HAUTS0V8E4SST100
5 650 V 12 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 4G1.5 HAUTS0V14E5PST100 HAUTS0V14E5SST100
6 250 V 5 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V10E6PST100 HAUTS0V10E6SST100
6 250 V 6 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V10E98PST100 HAUTS0V10E98SST100
6+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 7G1.5 HAUTS0V14E7PEPST100 HAUTS0V14E7PESST100
7 250 V 6 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V10E7PST100 HAUTS0V10E7SST100
8 250 V 5 A 6 A HO5 VV - F 10G0.5 HAUTS0V12E8PST100 HAUTS0V12E8SST100
10 250 V 5 A 6 A HO5 VV - F 10G0.5 HAUTS0V12E10PST100 HAUTS0V12E10SST100
12 250 V 5 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 12G0.5 HAUTS0V14E12PST100 HAUTS0V14E12SST100
14 250 V 5 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 14G0.5 HAUTS0V12E14PST100 HAUTS0V12E14SST100
15 650 V 12 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 18G0.5 HAUTS0V14E15PST100 HAUTS0V14E15SST100
18 250 V 4 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 18G0.5 HAUTS0V14E18PST100 HAUTS0V14E18SST100
19 250 V 4 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 40G0.5 HAUTS0V14E19PST100 HAUTS0V14E19SST100
* see page 18
3 m & 5 m version available on demand
Eg: 3m HAUTS0V...300
5m HAUTS0V...500
© 2011 – SOURIAU 17
UTS Series
Mechanics
Harnesses
Overmoulded harnesses, right angle ending
Connector
type
Number
of ways
Voltage
Current
UL
Current
IEC
Harmonised cable
part number*
Part number (length: 1m.)
Male Female
UTS
standard
2+PE 600 V 44 A 40 A HO5 VV - F 3Gg10 HAUTS0V142G1PRA100 HAUTS0V142G1SRA100
2+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 3x1.5 HAUTS0V103PRA100 HAUTS0V103SRA100
3+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 3G1.5 HAUTS0V183G1PRA100 HAUTS0V183G1SRA100
3+PE 250 V 24 A 32 A HO5 VV - F 40G0.5 HAUTS0V183G1PRA100 HAUTS0V183G1SRA100
3+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 4G1.5 HAUTS0V124PEPRA100 HAUTS0V124PESRA100
4 500 V 10 A 13 A HO5 VV - F 4x1.5 HAUTS0V104PRA100 HAUTS0V104SRA100
3 500 V 10 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 7G0.5 HAUTS0V103W3PRA100 HAUTS0V103W3SRA100
6 250 V 5 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V106PRA100 HAUTS0V106SRA100
6+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 7G1.5 HAUTS0V147PEPRA100 HAUTS0V147PESRA100
8 500 V 10 A 10 A HO5 VV - F 8x1.5 HAUTS0V128PRA100 HAUTS0V128SRA100
10 250 V 5 A 6 A HO5 VV - F 10G0.5 HAUTS0V1210PRA100 HAUTS0V1210SRA100
12 500 V 10 A 10 A HO5 VV - F 12x1.5 HAUTS0V1412PRA100 HAUTS0V1412SRA100
19 250 V 5 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 21G0.5 HAUTS0V1419PRA100 HAUTS0V1419SRA100
23 500 V 10 A 9 A HO5 VV - F 25G1.5 HAUTS0V1823PRA100 HAUTS0V1823SRA100
32 250 V 5 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 40G0.5 HAUTS0V1832PRA100 HAUTS0V1832SRA100
UTS
Hi seal
2 250 V 7 A 7 A H05 VV - F 2x0.5 HAUTS0V8E2PRA100 HAUTS0V8E2SRA100
2 650 V 13 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 2x1.5 HAUTS0V12E2PRA100 HAUTS0V12E2SRA100
3 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 3x0.5 HAUTS0V8E3PRA100 HAUTS0V8E3SRA100
3 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 3x0.5 HAUTS0V8E3APRA100 HAUTS0V8E3ASRA100
3 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 3x0.5 HAUTS0V8E33PRA100 HAUTS0V8E33SRA100
3 650 V 13 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 3x1.5 HAUTS0V12E3PRA100 HAUTS0V12E3SRA100
4 250 V 7 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 4x0.5 HAUTS0V8E4PRA100 HAUTS0V8E4SRA100
5 650 V 12 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 4G1.5 HAUTS0V14E5PRA100 HAUTS0V14E5SRA100
6 250 V 5 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V10E6PRA100 HAUTS0V10E6SRA100
6 250 V 6 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V10E98PRA100 HAUTS0V10E98SRA100
6+PE 500 V 10 A 16 A HO5 VV - F 7G1.5 HAUTS0V14E7PEPRA100 HAUTS0V14E7PESRA100
7 250 V 6 A 7 A HO5 VV - F 7x0.5 HAUTS0V10E7PRA100 HAUTS0V10E7SRA100
8 250 V 5 A 6 A HO5 VV - F 10G0.5 HAUTS0V12E8PRA100 HAUTS0V12E8SRA100
10 250 V 5 A 6 A HO5 VV - F 10G0.5 HAUTS0V12E10PRA100 HAUTS0V12E10SRA100
12 250 V 5 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 12G0.5 HAUTS0V14E12PRA100 HAUTS0V14E12SRA100
14 250 V 5 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 14G0.5 HAUTS0V12E14PRA100 HAUTS0V12E14SRA100
15 650 V 12 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 18G0.5 HAUTS0V14E15PRA100 HAUTS0V14E15SRA100
18 250 V 4 A 4 A HO5 VV - F 18G0.5 HAUTS0V14E18PRA100 HAUTS0V14E18SRA100
19 250 V 4 A 5 A HO5 VV - F 40G0.5 HAUTS0V14E19PRA100 HAUTS0V14E19SRA100
* see page 18
3 m & 5 m version available on demand
Eg: 3m HAUTS0V...300
5m HAUTS0V...500
Mechanics
18 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
Mechanics
Standardization of European cable - DIN VDE 0281/DIN VDE 0282/DIN VDE 0292
1.
Basic type
2.
Working
voltage
3.
Insulating
4.
Sheathcladding
material
5.
Special
features
6.
Conductor
types
7.
Number of
conductors
8.
Protective
conductor
9.
Conductor
crosssectional
H:
Harmonized
Type
03:
300/300 V.
V:
PVC
V:
PVC
H:
Ribbon cable,
separable
U:
Single wire
X:
Without
protective
conductor
Area specifi ed
in mm2
A:
National Type
05:
300/500 V.
R:
Rubber
R:
Rubber
H2: Ribbon
cable
non-separable
R:
Multi-wire
G:
With
protective
conductor
07:
450/750 V.
S:
Silicone
Rubber
N:
Cloroprene
Rubber
K:
Fine wire
(permanently
installed)
J:
Glass-fi lament
braiding
F:
Fine wire
(fl exible)
T:
Textile
braiding
H:
Super fi ne wire
Y:
Tinsel strand
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Harmonized wire coding system
Example: Harmonized type, 300/500V, PVC insulating, PVC sheath- cladding, Fine wire, 3x1.5 cross-sectional: H05VVF3x1.5
Cable information
Range of temperature: Occasional fl exing: -5°C up to +70°C
Fixed installation: -40°C up to +80°C
Rated voltage: U0/U: 300/500 V
Wire section : Arrangement with #16 contact: wire section 1.5 mm²
Arrangement with #20 contact: wire section 0.5 mm²
Harmonized reference: H05 VVF XX
© 2011 – SOURIAU 19
UTS Series
Mechanics
Standardization of American cable
Nomenclature Key
Defi nitions of Cable Types
S: Service Grade (also means extra hard service when not followed by J, V, or P)
J: Hard Service
V: Vacuum cleaner cord (also light duty cable)
P: Parallel cord (also known as zip cord) – Always light duty
E: Thermoplastic Elastomer (UL/NEC designation ONLY)
O: Oil Resistant*
T: Thermoplastic
W: Outdoor-includes sunlight resistant jacket and wet location rated conductors (formerly "W-A")
H: Heater cable
VW-1: Flame retardant
FT2: Flame retardant
SVT: Thermoplastic insulated vacuum cleaner cord, with or without 3rd conductor for grounding purposes; 300V. (PVC)
SJT: Junior hard service, thermoplastic insulated conductors and jacket. 300V. (PVC)
SJTW: Same as SJT except outdoor rated. (PVC)
SJTO: Same as SJT but oil resistant outer jacket. (PVC)
SJTOW: Same as SJTO except outdoor rated. (PVC)
ST: Hard service cord with all thermoplastic construction, 600V. (PVC)
STW: Same as ST except outdoor rated. (PVC)
STO: Same as ST but with oil resistant outer jacket. (PVC)
STOW: Same as STO except outdoor rated. (PVC)
Mechanics
20 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR OR
WITH
Layout
Specifi cations
UTS Series
8E2/8D2
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.1) UTS08E2P UTS08E2S
Plug
Without (Fig.6) UTS68E2P UTS68E2S
Cable gland (Fig.7) UTS6JC8E2P UTS6JC8E2S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.3) UTS78E2P UTS78E2S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.2) UTS08D2P UTS08D2S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.5) UTS78D2P32 UTS78D2S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
withouthold down clip
Without (Fig.4) UTS78D2P UTS78D2S
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 21
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
UTS Series
8E2/8D2
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front view
11.7 11.7 20.7
Ø12
Ø12
15.3
2.4 2.4
Ø3.2
7.5 7.5 7.8
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
24.2
24.2
18
Ø12
3.5
3.4
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
18 4.2
Ø12
3.5
3.4
18
Ø12
3.5
3.4
Plug - UTS6
25.3
54
Fig. 7
Fig. 6
Ø22.5
Mated connector length
61.1
66.6
UTS7
UTS0
Drilling pattern
1.5
Ø13.5
Ø22
Ø17.7
15°
15°
Ø4
Ø3.1
1.5
Panel cut out
15.3
15.3
Ø3.3
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
13.7
14.6
Front mounting
Ø12.5
Rear mounting
Ø14.5
Mechanics
2 contacts
7A/32V
per IEC 61984
22 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Jam nut sealing caps Square fl ange sealing cap Plug protective cap
Accessories
Electrical characteristics
UL
7A 250V UL94 HB
CSA
7A 250V UL94 HB
IEC
7A 32V 1.5kV 3
UTS 8E2/8D2 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
6
10
18
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
12
14
16
2
4
8
Metal terminal IP40
Part number
UTS8DCGE
Part number
UTS68C
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS8DCG
Part number
UTS8DCGR
UTS Series
8E2/8D2
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005585A 85005594
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD11B
Gasket
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
© 2011 – SOURIAU 23
UTS Series
8E2/8D2
Mechanics
24 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR
WITH
OR
Layout
UTS Series
12E2/12D2
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.1) UTS012E2P UTS012E2S
Plug
Without (Fig.6) UTS612E2P UTS612E2S
Cable gland (Fig.7) UTS6JC12E2P UTS6JC12E2S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.3) UTS712E2P UTS712E2S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.2) UTS012D2P UTS012D2S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.5) UTS712D2P32 UTS712D2S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.4) UTS712D2P UTS712D2S
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 25
UTS Series
12E2/12D2
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
2 contacts
16A/150V
per IEC 61984
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front view
11.7 11.7 26.4
Ø19
Ø19
20.8
2.4 2.4
Ø3.2
7.5 7.5 7.8
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
Plug - UTS6 Mated connector length
25.3
66.7
75.3
81.7
Fig. 7
Fig. 6
Ø30.1
UTS7
UTS0
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
20.8
15.3
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
21.4
22.7
2.3
Ø22
Ø30.5
Ø26.2
30°
68°
10
Ø3.1
2.3
1.4
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 22°
Front mounting
Ø18.3
Rear mounting
Ø22.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
27.2
31.9
18 18 18
Ø19
Ø19
Ø19
3.5 3.5 3.5
3 3 3
4.2
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
Mechanics
26 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Metal terminal
UTS Series
12E2/12D2
Accessories
Metal terminal
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
10
20
30
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
Color coding rings
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS712CCRR UTS612CCRR
UTS712CCRY UTS612CCRY
UTS712CCRG UTS612CCRG
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Part number
UTS612DCG
Part number
UTS12DCGE
Jam nut sealing caps
Part number
UTS12DCG
Part number
UTS12DCGR
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005587A 85005596
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD13B
Gasket
Electrical characteristics
UL
13A 650V UL94 HB
CSA
13A 650V UL94 HB
IEC
16A 150V 2.5kV 3
UTS 12E2/12D2 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
1.31mm²
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
© 2011 – SOURIAU 27
UTS Series
12E2/12D2
Mechanics
28 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR OR
WITH
Layout
UTS Series
103
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Crimp
contacts supply
separately
see page 31
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig.1) UTS1JC103P UTS1JC103S
Plug
Without (Fig.2) UTS6103P UTS6103S
Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC103P UTS6JC103S
PCB
contacts supply
separately
see page 31
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.4) UTS7103P UTS7103S
© 2011 – SOURIAU 29
UTS Series
103
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
2 + ground
16A/300V
per IEC 61984
Free hanging - UTS1
70
Ø15.1
Fig. 1
Mated connector length - UTS7
77.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Fig. 4
18.3
12.3 27.2
22.5
Ø15.1
3.5
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
16.7
17.9
2.6 2.6
1.5 3
Plug - UTS6
Female
Male
Fig. 2 Fig. 3
33 63.2
25.3
Ø26.2
Ø26.2
Mechanics
30 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
103
Accessories and tooling
Crimp tooling
Contacts Contact size
Part number
of head
RM/RC 28M1K(1)
Standard contacts
#16
Ø 1.6mm
S16RCM20
RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16
RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450
RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14
SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11
RMDXK10D28K
Coaxial contacts
M10S-1J
RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DXK10D28 +
york090 M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J
(1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143
Jam nut sealing caps
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS10DCG
Part number
UTS10DCGR
Plug sealing cap
Part number
UTS610DCG
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005586A 85005595
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD12B
Gasket
Color coding rings
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS710CCRR UTS610CCRR
UTS710CCRY UTS610CCRY
UTS710CCRG UTS610CCRG
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
Handle Tool kit
Part number
TOOLKIT
Part number
SHANDLES
© 2011 – SOURIAU 31
Contacts
UTS Series
103
UL
10A 500V UL94 V-0
CSA
7A 500V UL94 V-0
IEC
16A 300V 4kV 3
Temperature elevation: 50°C
Electrical characteristics UTS 103 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
1.31mm²
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
0 20 40 60 80 100
0
3
5
8
10
13
15
18
20
23
25
28
30
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
120
#16 Contact type AWG
Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
Male Female insulator Ø
Crimp
Machined
30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1
26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6
22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8
22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2
20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2
16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2
16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2
Stamped & formed
reeled contacts
26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 -
22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 -
18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 -
18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 -
14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 -
PCB
Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - -
Coaxial
Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - -
Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Twisted pair Multipiece -
RMDXK10D28 +
york090
RCDXK1D28 +
york090 - -
Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Fiber
optic
POF contacts
Plastic optical fi bre
- RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - -
(1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143
(2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6
(3): For dimensions see page 148
Mechanics
2 + ground
16A/300V
per IEC 61984
32 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
142G1
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Crimp
contacts supply
separately
see page 35
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig.1) UTS1JC142G1P UTS1JC142G1S
Plug
Without (Fig.3) UTS6142G1P UTS6142G1S
Cable gland (Fig.4) UTS6JC142G1P UTS6JC142G1S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.2) UTS7142G1P UTS7142G1S
NPT threaded
receptacle
Without (Fig.5) UTS7142G1SNPT
Layout
© 2011 – SOURIAU 33
UTS Series
142G1
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Plug - UTS6
Female
Male
Fig. 3 Fig. 4
33 70
25.3
Ø31.5
Ø35.1
Free hanging - UTS1
70
Ø31.5
Fig. 1
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Fig. 2
18
1.6 35.1
30.4
Ø22.3
3.5
Panel cut out
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
24.5
25.9
Drilling pattern
3.6 3.6
2.1 4.2
NPT threaded receptacle - UTS7
Fig. 5
35.3 25.4
25.4
Ø22.3
23.1
Mechanics
2 + ground
40A/300V
per IEC 61984
34 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
142G1
Accessories and tooling
Jam nut sealing caps
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS14DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGR
Hand tool
Part number
M317
Positioner + locator setting
Part number
VGE10078A
Extraction tool
Part number
51060210936
Plug sealing cap
Part number
UTS614DCG
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005588A 85005597
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD14B
Gasket
Color coding rings
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR
UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY
UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
© 2011 – SOURIAU 35
UL
44A 600V UL94 V-0
CSA
30A 600V UL94 V-0
IEC
40A 300V 4kV 3
Electrical characteristics UTS 142G1 derating curves
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
UTS Series
142G1
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
8.37mm²
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
5
Contacts
#8 Contact type AWG
Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
Male Female insulator Ø
Crimp
Machined
16 82913601A(1) 82913600A(1) -
6.5
14 82913603A(1) 82913602A(1) -
12 82913605A(1) 82913604A(1) -
10 82913607A(1) 82913606A(1) -
8 82913609A(1) 82913608A(1) -
(1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143
Mechanics
2 + ground
40A/300V
per IEC 61984
36 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
8E3/8D3
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.1) UTS08E3P UTS08E3S
Plug
Without (Fig.6) UTS68E3P UTS68E3S
Cable gland (Fig.7) UTS6JC8E3P UTS6JC8E3S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.3) UTS78E3P UTS78E3S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.2) UTS08D3P UTS08D3S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.5) UTS78D3P32 UTS78D3S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.4) UTS78D3P UTS78D3S
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 37
UTS Series
8E3/8D3
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
3 contacts
7A/32V
per IEC 61984
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front view
11.7 11.7 20.7
Ø12
Ø12
15.3
2.4 2.4
Ø3.2
7.5
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
7.5 7.8
Plug - UTS6
25.3
54
Fig. 7
Fig. 6
Ø22.5
Mated connector length
61.1
66.6
UTS7
UTS0
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
15.3
15.3
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
13.7
14.6
1.6
Ø13.5
Ø22
Ø17.7
15°
15°
Ø4
Ø3.1
1.6
1.9
0.9
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front mounting
Ø12.5
Rear mounting
Ø14.5
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
24.2
24.2
18
Ø12
3.5
3.4
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
18 4.2
Ø12
3.5
3.4
18
Ø12
3.5
3.4
Mechanics
38 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS 8E3/8D3 derating curves
UTS Series
8E3/8D3
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
6
10
18
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
12
14
16
2
4
8
Jam nut sealing caps Square fl ange sealing cap Plug protective cap
Accessories
Electrical characteristics
Metal terminal IP40
Part number
UTS8DCGE
Part number
UTS68C
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS8DCG
Part number
UTS8DCGR
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005585A 85005594
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD11B
Gasket
UL
7A 250V UL94 HB
CSA
7A 250V UL94 HB
IEC
7A 32V 1.5kV 3
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
© 2011 – SOURIAU 39
UTS Series
8E3/8D3
Mechanics
40 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
8E3A/8E98 - 8D3A/8D98
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.1)
UTS08E3AP UTS08E3AS
UTS08E98P UTS08E98S
Plug
Without (Fig.6)
UTS68E3AP UTS68E3AS
UTS68E98P UTS68E98S
Cable gland (Fig.7)
UTS6JC8E3AP UTS6JC8E3AS
UTS6JC8E98P UTS6JC8E98S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.3)
UTS78E3AP UTS78E3AS
UTS78E98P UTS78E98S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.2)
UTS08D3AP UTS08D3AS
UTS08D98P UTS08D98S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.5)
UTS78D3AP32 UTS78D3AS32
UTS78D98P32 UTS78D98S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.4)
UTS78D3AP UTS78D3AS
UTS78D98P UTS78D98S
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 41
UTS Series
8E3A/8E98 - 8D3A/8D98
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
24.2
24.2
18
Ø12
3.5
3
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
18 4.2
Ø12
3.5
3
18
Ø12
3.5
3
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front view
11.7 11.7 20.7
Ø12
Ø12
15.3
2.4 2.4
Ø3.2
7.5
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
7.5 7.8
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
15.3
15.3
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
13.7
14.6
1.6
Ø13.5
Ø22
Ø17.7
15°
15°
Ø4
Ø3.1
1.6
1.9
0.9
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front mounting
Ø12.5
Rear mounting
Ø14.5
Plug - UTS6 Mated connector length
25.3
54
Fig. 7
Fig. 6
Ø22.5
66.6
UTS7
UTS0
61.1
Mechanics
3 contacts
7A/50V
per IEC 61984
42 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
8E3A/8E98 - 8D3A/8D98
UTS 8E3A/98 - 8D3A/98 derating curves
Jam nut sealing caps Square fl ange sealing cap Plug protective cap
Accessories
Electrical characteristics
Metal terminal IP40
Part number
UTS8DCGE
Part number
UTS68C
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS8DCG
Part number
UTS8DCGR
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005585A 85005594
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD11B
Gasket
UL
7A 250V UL94 HB
CSA
7A 250V UL94 HB
IEC
7A 50V 1.5kV 3
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
6
10
18
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
12
14
16
2
4
8
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
© 2011 – SOURIAU 43
UTS Series
8E3A/8E98 - 8D3A/8D98
Mechanics
44 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
8E33/8D33
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.1) UTS08E33P UTS08E33S
Plug
Without (Fig.6) UTS68E33P UTS68E33S
Cable gland (Fig.7) UTS6JC8E33P UTS6JC8E33S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.3) UTS78E33P UTS78E33S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.2) UTS08D33P UTS08D33S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.5) UTS78D33P32 UTS78D33S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.4) UTS78D33P UTS78D33S
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 45
UTS Series
8E33/8D33
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
24.2
24.2
18
Ø12
3.5
3.4
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
18 4.2
Ø12
3.5
3.4
18
Ø12
3.5
3.4
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front view
11.7 11.7 20.7
Ø12
Ø12
15.3
2.4 2.4
Ø3.2
7.5
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
7.5 7.8
Plug - UTS6 Mated connector length
25.3
54
61.1
66.6
Fig. 7
UTS7
Fig. 6
Ø22.5
UTS0
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
15.3
15.3
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
13.7
14.6
1.6
Ø13.5
Ø22
Ø17.7
15°
15°
Ø4
Ø3.1
1.6
1.9
0.9
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front mounting
Ø12.5
Rear mounting
Ø14.5
Mechanics
3 contacts
7A/50V
per IEC 61984
46 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
8E33/8D33
UTS 8E33/8D33 de-rating curves
Jam nut sealing caps Square fl ange sealing cap Plug protective cap
Accessories
Electrical characteristics
Metal terminal IP40
Part number
UTS8DCGE
Part number
UTS68C
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS8DCG
Part number
UTS8DCGR
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005585A 85005594
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD11B
Gasket
UL
7A 250V UL94 HB
CSA
7A 250V UL94 HB
IEC
7A 50V 1.5kV 3
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
6
10
18
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
12
14
16
2
4
8
© 2011 – SOURIAU 47
UTS Series
8E33/8D33
Mechanics
48 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
12E3/12D3
OR
WITH
Specifi cations
OR
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.6) UTS012E3P UTS012E3S
Plug
Without (Fig.1) UTS612E3P UTS612E3S
Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC12E3P UTS6JC12E3S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.3) UTS712E3P UTS712E3S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.7) UTS012D3P UTS012D3S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.5) UTS712D3P32 UTS712D3S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.4) UTS712D3P UTS712D3S
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 49
UTS Series
12E3/12D3
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
27.2
31.9
18
Ø19
3.5
3
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
18 4.2
Ø19
3.5
3
18
Ø19
3.5
3
Plug - UTS6
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
66.7
Ø30.1
Ø30.1
25.3
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
11.7
Ø19
2.4
7.5
7.8
20.8
26.4
Ø3.2
Front view
75.3
81.7
UTS7
UTS0
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
20.8
20.8
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
21.4
22.7
2.3
Ø22
Ø30.5
Ø26.2
30°
68°
10
Ø3.1
2.3
2.8 1.4
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 22°
Front mounting
Ø18.3
Rear mounting
Ø22.3
7
Mechanics
3 contacts
16A/150V
per IEC 61984
50 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
12E3/12D3
Metal terminal
Accessories
Metal terminal
Color coding rings
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS712CCRR UTS612CCRR
UTS712CCRY UTS612CCRY
UTS712CCRG UTS612CCRG
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Part number
UTS612DCG
Part number
UTS12DCGE
Jam nut sealing caps
Part number
UTS12DCG
Part number
UTS12DCGR
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005587A 85005596
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD13B
Gasket
Electrical characteristics
UL
13A 650V UL94 HB
CSA
13A 650V UL94 HB
IEC
16A 150V 2.5kV 3
UTS 12E3/12D3 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
1.31mm²
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
10
30
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
20
© 2011 – SOURIAU 51
UTS Series
12E3/12D3
Mechanics
52 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
124 - 12E4/12D4
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Crimp
contacts supply
separately
see page 55
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.1) UTS0124P
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.5) UTS7124P UTS7124S
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig.13) UTS1JC124P UTS1JC124S
Plug
Without (Fig.11) UTS6124P UTS6124S
Cable gland (Fig.12) UTS6JC124P UTS6JC124S
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.3) UTS012E4P UTS012E4S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.10) UTS712E4P UTS712E4S
Plug Without (Fig.11) UTS612E4P UTS612E4S
Plug Cable gland (Fig.12) UTS6JC12E4P UTS6JC12E4S
Screw
contacts loaded
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.7 & 8) UTS7124PSCR UTS7124SSCR
Plug
Without (Fig.11) UTS6124PSCR UTS6124SSCR
Cable gland (Fig.12) UTS6JC124PSCR UTS6JC124SSCR
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig.13) UTS1JC124PSCR
PCB contacts supply
separately
see page 55
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.4) UTS0124P
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.6) UTS7124P UTS7124S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.2) UTS012D4P UTS012D4S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.9) UTS712D4P UTS712D4S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.9) UTS712D4P32 UTS712D4S32
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 53
UTS Series
124 - 12E4/12D4
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Hold
down clip
Male
Female
Fig. 6 Fig. 8 Fig. 10 Front view
Fig. 5 Fig. 7 Fig. 9
31.9
18 18 18 27.2
Ø19
Ø19
Ø19
3.5 3.5 3.5
2.4 2.4 4.2
3
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
11.7 11.7 11.7
Ø19
Ø19
Ø19
20.8
26.4
2.4 2.4
4
2.4
7.5
9.1
7.5
Ø3.2
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Front view
Fig. 2
Fig. 1
7.5 7.8
Free hanging - UTS1 / Plug - UTS6 Mated connector length
25.3
74
66.7
Fig. 13
Fig. 11 Fig. 12
Ø30.1
75.3
81.7
UTS7
UTS0
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
20.8
20.8
Front mounting
Ø18.3
Ø3.3
Rear mounting
Ø22.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
21.4
22.7
3.1
Ø22
Ø30.5
Ø26.2
30°
68°
10
Ø3.1
3.1
3.1 3.1
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 22°
Mechanics
3 + ground
16A/300V
per IEC 61984
54 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Accessories and tooling
(1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143
Metal terminal
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
UTS Series
124 - 12E4/12D4
Crimp tooling
Contacts Contact size
Part number
of head
RM/RC 28M1K(1)
Standard contacts
#16
Ø 1.6mm
S16RCM20
RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16
RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450
RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14
SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11
RMDXK10D28K
Coaxial contacts
M10S-1J
RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DXK10D28 +
york090 M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J
Jam nut sealing caps
Part number
UTS12DCG
Part number
UTS12DCGR
Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Part number
UTS612DCG
Part number
UTS12DCGE
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005587A 85005596
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD13B
Gasket
Color coding rings
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS712CCRR UTS612CCRR
UTS712CCRY UTS612CCRY
UTS712CCRG UTS612CCRG
Handle Tool kit
Part number
TOOLKIT
Part number
SHANDLES
Metal terminal
© 2011 – SOURIAU 55
UL
10A 500V UL94 V-0
CSA
7A 500V UL94 V-0
IEC
16A 300V 4kV 3
Temperature elevation: 50°C
UTS Series
124 - 12E4/12D4
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
10
30
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
20
18
15
13
28
25
23
8
5
3
Contacts
Electrical characteristics UTS 124 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
1.31mm²
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
#16 Contact type AWG
Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
Male Female insulator Ø
Crimp
Machined
30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1
26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6
22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8
22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2
20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2
16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2
16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2
Stamped & formed
reeled contacts
26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 -
22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 -
18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 -
18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 -
14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 -
PCB
Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - -
Coaxial
Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - -
Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Twisted pair Multipiece -
RMDXK10D28 +
york090
RCDXK1D28 +
york090 - -
Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Fiber
optic
POF contacts
Plastic optical fi bre
- RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - -
(1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143
(2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6
(3): For dimensions see page 148
Mechanics
3 + ground
16A/300V
per IEC 61984
56 © 2011 – SOURIAU
WITH
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Crimp
contacts supply
separately
see page 59
NPT threaded
receptacle
Without (Fig.1) UTS7183G1SNPT
Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS6183G1P
Plug Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC183G1P
Layout
UTS Series
183G1
© 2011 – SOURIAU 57
Dimensions
UTS Series
183G1
Note: all dimensions are in mm
NPT threaded receptacle - UTS7
17.3 14.5 31.8
NPT - 3/4˝
Ø28.6
Ø19.6
Fig. 1
Plug - UTS6
Fig. 2 Fig. 3
37.5 81.3
Ø42
Ø42
Mated connector length - UTS6JC
90.5
Drilling pattern
5.1 5.1
5.1 5.1
Mechanics
3 + ground
32A/300V
per IEC 61984
58 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Accessories and tooling
Metal terminal
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
UTS Series
183G1
Jam nut sealing caps
Part number
UTS14DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGR
Hand tool
Part number
M317
Positioner + locator setting
Part number
VGE10078A
Extraction tool
Part number
51060210936
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005588A 85005597
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD14B
Gasket
Color coding rings
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR
UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY
UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG
Plug sealing cap
Part number
UTS614DCG
© 2011 – SOURIAU 59
UL
23A 600V UL94 V-0
CSA
23A 600V UL94 V-0
IEC
32A 300V 4kV 3
Electrical characteristics UTS 183G1 derating curves
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
8.37mm²
UTS Series
183G1
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
Contacts
#8 Contact type AWG
Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
Male Female insulator Ø
Crimp
Machined
16 82913601A(1) 82913600A(1) -
6.5
14 82913603A(1) 82913602A(1) -
12 82913605A(1) 82913604A(1) -
10 82913607A(1) 82913606A(1) -
8 82913609A(1) 82913608A(1) -
(1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143
Mechanics
3 + ground
32A/300V
per IEC 61984
60 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR OR
WITH
UTS Series
8E4/8D4
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.1) UTS08E4P UTS08E4S
Plug
Without (Fig.6) UTS68E4P UTS68E4S
Cable gland (Fig.7) UTS6JC8E4P UTS6JC8E4S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.3) UTS78E4P UTS78E4S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.2) UTS08D4P UTS08D4S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.5) UTS78D4P32 UTS78D4S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.4) UTS78D4P UTS78D4S
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 61
UTS Series
8E4/8D4
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
24.2
24.2
18
Ø12
3.5
3.4
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
18 4.2
Ø12
3.5
3.4
18
Ø12
3.5
3.4
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front view
11.7 11.7 20.7
Ø12
Ø12
15.3
2.4 2.4
Ø3.2
7.5
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
7.5 7.8
Plug - UTS6 Mated connector length
25.3
54
Fig. 7
Fig. 6
Ø22.5
61.1
66.6
UTS7
UTS0
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
15.3
15.3
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
13.7
14.6
1.4
Ø13.5
Ø22
Ø17.7
15°
15°
Ø4
Ø3.1
1.4
1.4
1.4
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front mounting
Ø12.5
Rear mounting
Ø14.5
Mechanics
4 contacts
7A/32V
per IEC 61984
62 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
8E4/8D4
UTS 8E4/8D4 derating curves
Jam nut sealing caps Square fl ange sealing cap Plug protective cap
Accessories
Electrical characteristics
Metal terminal IP40
Part number
UTS8DCGE
Part number
UTS68C
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS8DCG
Part number
UTS8DCGR
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005585A 85005594
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD11B
Gasket
UL
7A 250V UL94 HB
CSA
7A 250V UL94 HB
IEC
7A 32V 1.5kV 3
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
4
2
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
© 2011 – SOURIAU 63
UTS Series
8E4/8D4
Mechanics
64 © 2011 – SOURIAU
WITH
UTS Series
102W2 (2x#12 + 2x#20)
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Crimp
contacts supply
separately
see page 67
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig.1) UTS1JC102W2P UTS1JC102W2S
Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS6102W2P UTS6102W2S
Plug Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC102W2P UTS6JC102W2S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.4) UTS7102W2P UTS7102W2S
Layout
© 2011 – SOURIAU 65
UTS Series
102W2 (2x#12 + 2x#20)
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Free hanging - UTS1
70
Ø15.1
Fig. 1
Plug - UTS6
Fig. 2 Male Fig. 2 Female Fig. 3
33 63.2
Ø26.2
Ø26.2
Ø26.2
25.3
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
16.7
17.9
3 3
3 3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Mated connector length - UTS7
Fig. 4
18.3
27.2
22.5
Ø15.1
3.5
2.4
77.3
Mechanics
4 contacts
25A/150V
per IEC 61984
66 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
102W2 (2x#12 + 2x#20)
Metal terminal
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
Jam nut sealing caps
Part number
UTS10DCG
Part number
UTS10DCGR
Plug sealing cap
Part number
UTS610DCG
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005586A 85005595
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD12B
Gasket
Color coding rings
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS710CCRR UTS610CCRR
UTS710CCRY UTS610CCRY
UTS710CCRG UTS610CCRG
Accessories and tooling
Crimp tooling #20
Crimp tooling #12
Part number
TOOLKIT
Part number
extraction tool
51060210924
(1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 148
(2): contact reeled (3): loose contact
Part number
SHANDLES
Contacts Contact size
Part number
of head
RM/RC 24W3K(1)
Standard contacts
#20
Ø 1mm
S20RM
RM/RC 20W3K(1) S20RM
RM/RC 18W3K(1) S20RM
SM/SC 24W3S(2) S20SCM20
SM/SC 24WL3S(3) S20SCM20
SM/SC 20W3S(2) S20SCM20
SM/SC 20WL3S(3) S20SCM20
Part number
positioner + locator setting
VGE10078A
Part number hand tool
M317
© 2011 – SOURIAU 67
UTS Series
102W2 (2x#12 + 2x#20)
Contacts
#20 Contact type AWG
Part number
Max insulator Ø
Male Female
Crimp
Machined
26-24 RM24W3K(1) RC24W3K(1) 1.58
22-20 RM20W3K(1) RC20W3K(1) 1.58
20-18 RM18W3K(1) RC18W3K(1) 2.1
stamped & formed
reeled contacts
26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) 0.89-1.58
26-24 SM24W3S26(2) SC24W3S25(2) 0.89-1.58
22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) 1.17-2.08
22-20 SM20W3S26(2) SC20W3S25(2) 1.17-2.08
PCB
Machined (3) - RMW5016K RCW5016K -
(1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143
(2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6
(3): For dimensions see page 148
1) E l f l ti f th l ti #12
Crimp
Machined
22 82911457NA 82911456A
4.9
20 82911459NA 82911458A
18 82911461NA 82911460A
16 82911463NA 82911462A
14 82911465NA 82911464A
12 82911467NA 82911466A
UL
20A 500V UL94 V-0
CSA
18A 500V UL94 V-0
IEC
25A 150V 2.5kV 3
Temperature elevation: 50°C
Electrical characteristics UTS 102W2 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
Mechanics
4 contacts
25A/150V
per IEC 61984
68 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR OR OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
104
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Crimp
contact supply
separately
see next page 71
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.1) UTS0104P UTS0104S
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland and grommet
(Fig.2) UTS1GJC104P
Free hanging
receptacle
Nut and grommet (Fig.3) UTS1GN104P
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS1JC104P UTS1JC104S
Plug Without (Fig.4) UTS6104P UTS6104S
Plug
Cable gland and grommet
(Fig.5) UTS6GJC104S
Plug Nut and grommet (Fig.6) UTS6GN104S
Plug Cable gland (Fig.5) UTS6JC104P UTS6JC104S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.7) UTS7104P UTS7104S
Jam nut
receptacle
Cable gland and grommet
(Fig.9) UTS7GJC104P
Jam nut
receptacle
Nut and grommet (Fig.8) UTS7GN104P
Layout
© 2011 – SOURIAU 69
UTS Series
104
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Free hanging - UTS1
11.5
70
40.9
Ø15.1
Ø15.1
20.8
24
2.4
10.5
Ø3.2
Fig. 1 Front view Fig. 3
Fig. 2
Plug - UTS6
Female
Male
Fig. 4 Fig. 5 Fig. 6
33 63.2 32.5
25.3
Ø26.2
Ø26.2
Ø26.2
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
18.5
18.5
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
16.7
17.9
3
3
3
3
Front mounting
Ø15.2
Rear mounting
Ø17.9
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Mated connector length
Fig. 7 Fig. 9
Fig. 8
18.3
18.3
41
70.7
Ø15.1
Ø15.1
3.5 3.5
2.4 70.9
77.3
UTS7
UTS0
Mechanics
4 contacts
13A/150V
per IEC 61984
70 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
104
Accessories and tooling
(1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143
Metal terminal
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
Crimp tooling
Contacts Contact size
Part number
of head
RM/RC 28M1K(1)
Standard contacts
#16
Ø 1.6mm
S16RCM20
RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16
RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450
RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14
SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11
RMDXK10D28K
Coaxial contacts
M10S-1J
RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DXK10D28 +
york090 M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J
Jam nut sealing caps
Part number
UTS10DCG
Part number
UTS10DCGR
Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Part number
UTS610DCG
Part number
UTS10DCGE
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005586A 85005595
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD12B
Gasket
Color coding rings
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS710CCRR UTS610CCRR
UTS710CCRY UTS610CCRY
UTS710CCRG UTS610CCRG
Handle Tool kit
Part number
TOOLKIT
Part number
SHANDLES
Metal terminal
© 2011 – SOURIAU 71
UTS Series
104
Contacts
UL
10A 500V UL94 V-0
CSA
7A 500V UL94 V-0
IEC
13A 150V 2.5kV 3
Electrical characteristics UTS 104 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
1.31mm²
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
0 20 40 60 80 100
0
3
5
8
10
13
15
18
20
23
25
28
30
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
120
#16 Contact type AWG
Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
Male Female insulator Ø
Crimp
Machined
30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1
26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6
22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8
22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2
20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2
16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2
16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2
Stamped & formed
reeled contacts
26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 -
22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 -
18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 -
18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 -
14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 -
PCB
Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - -
Coaxial
Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - -
Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Twisted pair Multipiece -
RMDXK10D28 +
york090
RCDXK1D28 +
york090 - -
Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Fiber
optic
POF contacts
Plastic optical fi bre
- RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - -
(1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143
(2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6
(3): For dimensions see page 148
Mechanics
4 contacts
13A/150V
per IEC 61984
72 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
14E5/14D5
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.6) UTS014E5P UTS014E5S
Plug
Without (Fig.1) UTS614E5P UTS614E5S
Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC14E5P UTS6JC14E5S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.3) UTS714E5P UTS714E5S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.6) UTS014D5P UTS014D5S
Jam nut receptacle
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.4) UTS714D5P32 UTS714D5S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.5) UTS714D5P UTS714D5S
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 73
UTS Series
14E5/14D5
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
30.4
35.1
18
Ø22.3
3.5
3
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
4.2 18
Ø22.3
3.5
3
18
Ø22.3
3.5
3
Plug - UTS6
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
70
Ø35.1
Ø35.1
25.3
Mated connector length
75
82
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Fig. 6
11.3
Ø22.3
2.3
7.5
7.8
23.2
28.8
Ø3.2
Front view
UTS7
UTS0
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
23.2
23.2
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
24.5
25.9
4
Ø22
Ø30.5
Ø26.2
30°
68°
10
Ø3.1
2.3
3.7
0.6
2.5
22°
Front mounting
Ø21.5
Rear mounting
Ø25.1
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Mechanics
5 contacts
16A/150V
per IEC 61984
74 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
14E5/14D5
UTS 14E5/14D5 derating curves
Jam nut sealing caps Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Accessories
Electrical characteristics
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS614DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGE
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS14DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGR
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005588A 85005597
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD14B
Gasket
UL
12A 650V UL94 HB
CSA
12A 650V UL94 HB
IEC
16A 150V 2.5kV 3
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
1.31mm²
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
4
2
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
Color coding rings
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR
UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY
UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
© 2011 – SOURIAU 75
UTS Series
14E5/14D5
Mechanics
76 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
103W3 (3x#16 + 3x#20)
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Crimp
contacts supply
separately
see page 79
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig.1) UTS1JC103W3P UTS1JC103W3S
Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS6103W3P UTS6103W3S
Plug Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC103W3P UTS6JC103W3S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.4) UTS7103W3P UTS7103W3S
PCB
contacts supply
separately
see page 79
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.4) UTS7103W3P UTS7103W3S
OR
WITH
OR
Layout
© 2011 – SOURIAU 77
UTS Series
103W3 (3x#16 + 3x#20)
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Plug - UTS6
Fig. 2 Male Fig. 2 Female Fig. 3
33 63.2
Ø26.2
Ø26.2
Ø26.2
25.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Mated connector length - UTS7
Fig. 4
18.3
27.2
22.5
Ø15.1
3.5
2.4
77.3
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
3 2.5
2.5
0.7 0.8
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
16.7
17.9
Free hanging - UTS1
70
Ø15.1
Fig. 1
Mechanics
6 contacts
5A/32V
per IEC 61984
78 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
103W3 (3x#16 + 3x#20)
Accessories and tooling
Metal terminal
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
Crimp tooling
Jam nut sealing caps
Part number
UTS10DCG
Part number
UTS10DCGR
Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Part number
UTS610DCG
Part number
UTS10DCGE
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005586A 85005595
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD12B
Gasket
Color coding rings
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS710CCRR UTS610CCRR
UTS710CCRY UTS610CCRY
UTS710CCRG UTS610CCRG
Handle Tool kit
Part number
TOOLKIT
Part number
SHANDLES
Metal terminal
Contacts Contact size
Part number
of head
RM/RC 28M1K(1)
Standard contacts
#16
Ø 1.6mm
S16RCM20
RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16
RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450
RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14
SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11
RMDXK10D28K
Coaxial contacts
M10S-1J
RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DXK10D28 +
york090 M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J
RM/RC 24W3K(1)
Standard contacts
#20
Ø 1mm
S20RCM
RM/RC 20W3K(1) S20RCM
RM/RC 18W3K(1) S20RCM
SM/SC 24W3S(2) S20SCM20
SM/SC 24WL3S(3) S20SCM20
SM/SC 20W3S(2) S20SCM20
SM/SC 20WL3S(3) S20SCM20
(1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143
(2): contact reeled
(3): loose contac
© 2011 – SOURIAU 79
UTS Series
103W3 (3x#16 + 3x#20)
UL
10A 500V UL94 V-0
CSA
7A 500V UL94 V-0
IEC
5A 32V 1.5kV 3
Temperature elevation: 50°C
Electrical characteristics UTS 103W3 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
1.31mm²
0.518mm²
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
0 20 40 60 80 100
0
3
5
8
10
13
15
18
20
23
25
28
30
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
Contacts
120
(1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143 (2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6 (3): For dimensions see page 148
#16 Contact type AWG
Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
Male Female insulator Ø
Crimp
Machined
30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1
26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6
22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8
22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2
20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2
16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2
16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2
Stamped & formed
reeled contacts
26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 -
22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 -
18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 -
18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 -
14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 -
PCB
Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - -
Coaxial
Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - -
Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Twisted pair Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 +
york090
RCDXK1D28 +
york090 - -
Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Fiber
optic
POF contacts
Plastic optical fi bre - RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - -
plating L SM20ML1 #20
Crimp
Machined
26-24 RM24W3K(1) RC24W3K(1) - 1.58
22-20 RM20W3K(1) RC20W3K(1) - 1.58
20-18 RM18W3K(1) RC18W3K(1) - 2.1
Stamped & formed
reeled contacts
26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58
26-24 SM24W3S26(2) SC24W3S25(2) - 0.89-1.58
22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08
22-20 SM20W3S26(2) SC20W3S25(2) - 1.17-2.08
PCB
Machined (3) - RMW5016K RCW5016K - -
Mechanics
6 contacts
5A/32V
per IEC 61984
80 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
106 - 10E6/10D6
Specifi cations
OR OR
WITH
OR
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Crimp
contacts supply
separately
see page 83
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig.1) UTS1JC106P UTS1JC106S
Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS6106P UTS6106S
Plug Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC106P UTS6JC106S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.4) UTS7106P UTS7106S
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.9) UTS010E6P UTS010E6S
Plug
Without (Fig.2) UTS610E6P UTS610E6S
Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC10E6P UTS6JC10E6S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.5) UTS710E6P UTS710E6S
PCB contacts
supply separately
see page 83
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.4) UTS7106P UTS7106S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.8) UTS010D6P UTS010D6S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.6) UTS710D6P32 UTS710D6S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.7) UTS710D6P UTS710D6S
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 81
UTS Series
106 - 10E6/10D6
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
6 contacts
7A/32V
per IEC 61984
Free hanging - UTS1
70
Ø15.1
Fig. 1
Plug - UTS6
Female
Male
Fig. 2 Fig. 3
33 63.2
Ø26.2
Ø26.2
25.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
22.5
27.2
18.3
Ø15.1
3.5 3
12.3
Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7
Fig. 4
4.2 18.3
Ø15.1
3.5
3
18.3
Ø15.1
3.5
3
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
18.5
18.5
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
16.7
17.9
2.8
Ø13.5
Ø22
Ø17.7
15°
15°
Ø4
Ø3.1
3.3 1.6
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front mounting
Ø15.2
Rear mounting
Ø17.9
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Fig. 9
Fig. 8
11.7
Ø15.1
2.3
16.2
20.8
24
Ø3.2
Front view
Mated connector length
70.9
77.3
UTS7
UTS0
7.5
Mechanics
82 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
106 - 10E6/10D6
Metal terminal
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
Crimp tooling
Contacts Contact size
Part number
of head
RM/RC 24W3K(1)
Standard contacts
#20
Ø 1mm
S20RM
RM/RC 20W3K(1) S20RM
RM/RC 18W3K(1) S20RM
SM/SC 24W3S(2) S20SCM20
SM/SC 24WL3S(3) S20SCM20
SM/SC 20W3S(2) S20SCM20
SM/SC 20WL3S(3) S20SCM20
Jam nut sealing caps
Part number
UTS10DCG
Part number
UTS10DCGR
Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Part number
UTS610DCG
Part number
UTS10DCGE
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005586A 85005595
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD12B
Gasket
Color coding rings
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS710CCRR UTS610CCRR
UTS710CCRY UTS610CCRY
UTS710CCRG UTS610CCRG
Handle Tool kit
Part number
TOOLKIT
Part number
SHANDLES
(1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143
(2): contact reeled
(3): loose contact
Accessories and tooling
Metal terminal
© 2011 – SOURIAU 83
UTS Series
106 - 10E6/10D6
Contacts
#20 Contact type AWG
Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
Male Female insulator Ø
Crimp
Machined
26-24 RM24W3K(1) RC24W3K(1) - 1.58
22-20 RM20W3K(1) RC20W3K(1) - 1.58
20-18 RM18W3K(1) RC18W3K(1) - 2.1
stamped & formed
reeled contacts
26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58
26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58
22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08
22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08
PCB
Machined (3) - RMW5016K RCW5016K - -
(1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143
(2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6
(3): For dimensions see page 148
IEC
7A 32V 1.5kV 3
Electrical characteristics UTS 106 - 10E6/10D6 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
4
2
6
8
10
12
14
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
UTS 106
UL
5A 250V UL94 V-0
CSA
4A 250V UL94 V-0
UTS 10E6/10D6
UL
6A 250V UL94 HB
CSA
6A 250V UL94 HB
Mechanics
6 contacts
7A/32V
per IEC 61984
84 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR
WITH
OR
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.6) UTS010E98P UTS010E98S
Plug
Without (Fig.1) UTS610E98P UTS610E98S
Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC10E98P UTS6JC10E98S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.3) UTS710E98P UTS710E98S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.7) UTS010D98P UTS010D98S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.4) UTS710D98P32 UTS710D98S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.5) UTS710D98P UTS710D98S
Layout
UTS Series
10E98/10D98
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 85
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
UTS Series
10E98/10D98
Plug - UTS6
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
70
Ø26.2
Ø26.2
25.3
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
18.3
Ø15.1
2.3
16.2
20.8
24
Ø3.2
Front view
70.9
77.3
UTS7
UTS0
Drilling pattern
3.3 1.6
Ø13.5
Ø22
Ø17.7
Ø4
2.8 3.3
Panel cut out
18.5
18.5
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
16.7
17.9
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front mounting
Ø15.2
Rear mounting
Ø17.9
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
22.4
27.2
18.3
3.5
3
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
4.2 18.3
Ø15.1
3.5
3
18.3
Ø15.1
3.5
3
Ø15.1
7.5
30°
Ø3.1 68°
22°
Mechanics
6 contacts
7A/50V
per IEC 61984
86 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
10E98/10D98
UTS 10E98/10D98 derating curves
Jam nut sealing caps Plug protective cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Accessories
Electrical characteristics
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS610DCG
Part number
UTS10DCGE
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS10DCG
Part number
UTS10DCGR
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005586A 85005595
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD12B
Gasket
UL
6A 250V UL94 HB
CSA
6A 250V UL94 HB
IEC
7A 50V 1.5kV 3
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
Color coding rings
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS710CCRR UTS610CCRR
UTS710CCRY UTS610CCRY
UTS710CCRG UTS610CCRG
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
4
2
6
8
10
12
14
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
© 2011 – SOURIAU 87
UTS Series
10E98/10D98
Mechanics
88 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR OR
WITH
OR OR OR
UTS Series
147 - 14E7/14D7
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Crimp
contacts supply
separately
see page 91
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.2) UTS0147P
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland and grommet
(Fig.3) UTS1GJC147P
Free hanging
receptacle
Nut and grommet (Fig.4) UTS1GN147P
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS1JC147P UTS1JC147S
Plug Without (Fig.5) UTS6147P UTS6147S
Plug
Cable gland and grommet
(Fig.6) UTS6GJC147S
Plug Nut and grommet (Fig.7) UTS6GN147S
Plug Cable gland (Fig.6) UTS6JC147P UTS6JC147S
Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.8) UTS7147P UTS7147S
Jam nut receptacle
Cable gland and grommet
(Fig.10) UTS7GJC147P
Jam nut receptacle Nut and grommet (Fig.9) UTS7GN147P
Handsolder
electrical contacts loaded
Square fl ange receptacle Without (Fig.2) UTS014E7P UTS014E7S
Plug Cable gland (Fig.6) UTS6JC14E7P UTS6JC14E7S
Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.11) UTS714E7P UTS714E7S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.1) UTS014D7P UTS014D7S
Jam nut receptacle with stand
off and hold down clips
Without (Fig.11) UTS714D7P32 UTS714D7S32
Jam nut receptacle with stand
off and without hold down clip
Without (Fig.11) UTS714D7P UTS714D7S
Jam nut receptacle
With stand off and hold down clip
(Fig.11) UTS7147PSEK9
Screw
contacts loaded
Jam nut receptacle Without (Fig.8) UTS7147PSCR UTS7147SSCR
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS1JC147PSCR
Plug Cable gland (Fig.6) UTS6JC147PSCR UTS6JC147SSCR
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 89
UTS Series
147 - 14E7/14D7
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Plug - UTS6
Female
Male
Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7
33 70 32
23.5
Ø35.1
Ø35.1
Ø35.1
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Fig. 11 Fig. 10
Fig. 8 Fig. 9
18
18
49
70.7
Ø31.8
Ø22.3
3.5
3.5
1.6
4.2
3
Mated connector length
75
82
UTS7
UTS0
Drilling pattern
6.4 3.2
Ø13.5
Ø22
Ø17.7
Ø4
Ø3.1
5.2
Panel cut out
23.2
23.2
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
24.5
25.9
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front mounting
Ø21.5
Rear mounting
Ø25.1
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Free hanging - UTS1
11.3
Ø22.3
23.2
28.8
2.3
29.1
22
Ø3.2
Fig. 2 Front view
Fig. 1
78.5
43
Ø22.3
Fig. 4
Fig. 3
Mechanics
6 + ground
16A/300V
per IEC 61984
90 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
147 - 14E7/14D7
Accessories and tooling
(1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143
Metal terminal
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
Crimp tooling
Contacts Contact size
Part number
of head
RM/RC 28M1K(1)
Standard contacts
#16
Ø 1.6mm
S16RCM20
RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16
RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450
RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14
SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11
RMDXK10D28K
Coaxial contacts
M10S-1J
RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DXK10D28 +
york090 M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J
Jam nut sealing caps
Part number
UTS14DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGR
Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Part number
UTS614DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGE
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005588A 85005597
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD14B
Gasket
Color coding rings
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR
UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY
UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG
Handle Tool kit
Part number
TOOLKIT
Part number
SHANDLES
Metal terminal
© 2011 – SOURIAU 91
Contacts
#16 Contact type AWG
Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
Male Female insulator Ø
Crimp
Machined
30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1
26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6
22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8
22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2
20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2
16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2
16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2
Stamped & formed
reeled contacts
26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 -
22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 -
18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 -
18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 -
14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 -
PCB
Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - -
Coaxial
Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - -
Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Twisted pair Multipiece -
RMDXK10D28 +
york090
RCDXK1D28 +
york090 - -
Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Fiber
optic
POF contacts
Plastic optical fi bre
- RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - -
(1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143
(2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6
(3): For dimensions see page 148
UTS Series
147 - 14E7/14D7
UL
10A 500V UL94 V-0
CSA
7A 500V UL94 V-0
IEC
16A 300V 4kV 3
Temperature elevation: 50°C
Electrical characteristics UTS 147 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
1.31mm²
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
5
3
8
10
20
18
15
13
23
25
28
30
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
6 + ground
16A/300V
per IEC 61984
Mechanics
92 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
10E7/10D7
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.6) UTS010E7P UTS010E7S
Plug
Without (Fig.1) UTS610E7P UTS610E7S
Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC10E7P UTS6JC10E7S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.3) UTS710E7P UTS710E7S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.7) UTS010D7P UTS010D7S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.4) UTS710D7P32 UTS710D7S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.5) UTS710D7P UTS710D7S
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 93
UTS Series
10E7/10D7
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Plug - UTS6
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
70
Ø26.2
Ø26.2
25.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
22.4
27.2
18.3
3.5
3
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
4.2 18.3
Ø15.1
3.5
3
18.3
Ø15.1
3.5
3
Ø15.1
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
11.7
Ø15.1
2.3
16.2
7.5
20.8
24
Ø3.2
Front view
Mated connector length
70.9
77.3
UTS7
UTS0
Drilling pattern
2.8
Ø13.5
Ø22
Ø17.7
15°
15°
Ø4
Ø3.1
3.3
1.6
Panel cut out
18.5
18.5
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
16.7
17.9
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front mounting
Ø15.2
Rear mounting
Ø17.9
Mechanics
7 contacts
7A/50V
per IEC 61984
94 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
10E7/10D7
UTS 10E7/10D7 derating curves
Jam nut sealing caps Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Accessories
Electrical characteristics
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS610DCG
Part number
UTS10DCGE
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS10DCG
Part number
UTS10DCGR
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005586A 85005595
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD12B
Gasket
UL
6A 250V UL94 HB
CSA
6A 250V UL94 HB
IEC
7A 50V 1.5kV 3
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
Color coding rings
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS710CCRR UTS610CCRR
UTS710CCRY UTS610CCRY
UTS710CCRG UTS610CCRG
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
6
10
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
12
14
2
4
8
© 2011 – SOURIAU 95
UTS Series
10E7/10D7
Mechanics
96 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR OR OR OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
128
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Crimp
contacts supply
separately
see page 99
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.1) UTS0128P UTS0128S
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland and grommet
(Fig.2) UTS1GJC128P
Free hanging
receptacle
Nut and grommet (Fig.3) UTS1GN128P
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS1JC128P UTS1JC128S
Plug Without (Fig.4) UTS6128P UTS6128S
Plug
Cable gland and grommet
(Fig.5) UTS6GJC128S
Plug Nut and grommet (Fig.6) UTS6GN128S
Plug Cable gland (Fig.5) UTS6JC128P UTS6JC128S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.8) UTS7128P UTS7128S
Jam nut
receptacle
Cable gland and grommet
(Fig.10) UTS7GJC128P
Jam nut
receptacle
Nut and grommet (Fig.9) UTS7GN128P
PCB
contacts loaded
Jam nut receptacle
With stand off and hold down clip
(Fig.11) UTS7128PSEK9
Layout
© 2011 – SOURIAU 97
UTS Series
128
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Free hanging - UTS1
11.7
Ø19.1
20.8
26.4
2.3 10.5
18.1
Ø3.2
Fig. 1 Front view
74.5
40.9
Ø19.1
Fig. 3
Fig. 2
Plug - UTS6
Female
Male
Fig. 4 Fig. 5 Fig. 6
33 65.7 33
25.3
Ø30.1
Ø30.1
Ø30.1
Drilling pattern
4.4 3.4
2
4.5 4
2.8 0.9
Panel cut out
20.8
20.8
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
21.4
22.7
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front mounting
Ø18.3
Rear mounting
Ø22.3
Mated connector length
75.3
81.7
UTS7
UTS0
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Fig. 11 Fig. 10
Fig. 8 Fig. 9
18
18
49.1
74.5
Ø19.1
Ø19.1
3.5
3.5
1.6
4.2
3
Mechanics
8 contacts
10A/80V
per IEC 61984
98 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
128
Accessories and tooling
(1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143
Metal terminal
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
Crimp tooling
Contacts Contact size
Part number
of head
RM/RC 28M1K(1)
Standard contacts
#16
Ø 1.6mm
S16RCM20
RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16
RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450
RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14
SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11
RMDXK10D28K
Coaxial contacts
M10S-1J
RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DXK10D28 +
york090 M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J
Jam nut sealing caps
Part number
UTS12DCG
Part number
UTS12DCGR
Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Part number
UTS612DCG
Part number
UTS12DCGE
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005587A 85005596
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD13B
Gasket
Color coding rings
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS712CCRR UTS612CCRR
UTS712CCRY UTS612CCRY
UTS712CCRG UTS612CCRG
Handle Tool kit
Part number
TOOLKIT
Part number
SHANDLES
Metal terminal
© 2011 – SOURIAU 99
UTS Series
128
Contacts
UL
10A 500V UL94 V-0
CSA
7A 500V UL94 V-0
IEC
10A 80V 1.5kV 3
Electrical characteristics UTS 128 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
1.31mm²
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
0 20 40 60 80 100
0
3
5
8
10
13
15
18
20
23
25
28
30
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
120
#16 Contact type AWG
Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
Male Female insulator Ø
Crimp
Machined
30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1
26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6
22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8
22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2
20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2
16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2
16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2
Stamped & formed
reeled contacts
26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 -
22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 -
18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 -
18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 -
14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 -
PCB
Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - -
Coaxial
Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - -
Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Twisted pair Multipiece -
RMDXK10D28 +
york090
RCDXK1D28 +
york090 - -
Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Fiber
optic
POF contacts
Plastic optical fi bre
- RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - -
(1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143
(2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6
(3): For dimensions see page 148
Mechanics
8 contacts
10A/80V
per IEC 61984
100 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
12E8/12D8
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.6) UTS012E8P UTS012E8S
Plug
Without (Fig.1) UTS612E8P UTS612E8S
Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC12E8P UTS6JC12E8S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.3) UTS712E8P UTS712E8S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.7) UTS012D8P UTS012D8S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.4) UTS712D8P32 UTS712D8S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.5) UTS712D8P UTS712D8S
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 101
UTS Series
12E8/12D8
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Plug - UTS6
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
27.2
31.9
18
Ø19
3.5
3
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
4.2 18
Ø19
3.5
3
18
Ø19
3.5
3.1
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
66.7
Ø30.1
Ø30.1
25.3
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
11.7
Ø19
2.4
7.5
7.8
20.8
26.4
Ø3.2
Front view
75.3
81.7
UTS7
UTS0
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
20.8
20.8
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
21.4
22.7
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front mounting
Ø18.3
Rear mounting
Ø22.3
4.3
Ø22
Ø30.5
Ø26.2
30°
68°
10
Ø3.1
3
1.6
3
4.3
1.1
3.9
22°
Mechanics
8 contacts
6A/32V
per IEC 61984
102 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
12E8/12D8
UTS 12E8/12D8 derating curves
Jam nut sealing caps Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Accessories
Electrical characteristics
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS612DCG
Part number
UTS12DCGE
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS12DCG
Part number
UTS12DCGR
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005587A 85005596
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD13B
Gasket
UL
4.5A 250V UL94 HB
CSA
4.5A 250V UL94 HB
IEC
6A 32V 1.5kV 3
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
Color coding rings
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS712CCRR UTS612CCRR
UTS712CCRY UTS612CCRY
UTS712CCRG UTS612CCRG
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
4
2
6
8
10
12
14
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
© 2011 – SOURIAU 103
UTS Series
12E8/12D8
Mechanics
104 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
1210 - 12E10/12D10
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Crimp
contacts supply
separately
see page107
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig.1) UTS1JC1210P UTS1JC1210S
Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS61210P UTS61210S
Plug Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC1210P UTS6JC1210S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.4) UTS71210P UTS71210S
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.6) UTS012E10P UTS012E10S
Plug
Without (Fig.2) UTS612E10P UTS612E10S
Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC12E10P UTS6JC12E10S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.5) UTS712E10P UTS712E10S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.7) UTS012D10P UTS012D10S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.6) UTS712D10P32 UTS712D10S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.7) UTS712D10P UTS712D10S
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 105
UTS Series
1210 - 12E10/12D10
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Free hanging - UTS1 Plug - UTS6
74
Ø19.1
Fig. 1
Female
Male
Fig. 2 Fig. 3
33 66.7
Ø30.1
Ø30.1
25.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
27.2
31.9
18
Ø19.1
3.5 3
12.3
Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7
Fig. 4
4.2 18
Ø19.1
3.5
3
18
Ø19.1
3.5
3.1
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
11.7
Ø19.1
2.3
7.5
7.8
20.8
26.4
Ø3.2
Front view
75.3
81.7
UTS7
UTS0
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
20.8
20.8
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
21.4
22.7
3.3
1.6
Ø22
Ø30.5
Ø26.2
22°
30°
68°
10
Ø3.1
4.9
3
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front mounting
Ø18.3
Rear mounting
Ø22.3
Mechanics
10 contacts
6A/50V
per IEC 61984
106 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
1210 - 12E10/12D10
Metal terminal
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
Crimp tooling
Contacts Contact size
Part number
of head
RM/RC 24W3K(1)
Standard contacts
#20
Ø 1mm
S20RM
RM/RC 20W3K(1) S20RM
RM/RC 18W3K(1) S20RM
SM/SC 24W3S(2) S20SCM20
SM/SC 24WL3S(3) S20SCM20
SM/SC 20W3S(2) S20SCM20
SM/SC 20WL3S(3) S20SCM20
Jam nut sealing caps
Part number
UTS12DCG
Part number
UTS12DCGR
Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Part number
UTS612DCG
Part number
UTS12DCGE
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005587A 85005596
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD13B
Gasket
Color coding rings
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS712CCRR UTS612CCRR
UTS712CCRY UTS612CCRY
UTS712CCRG UTS612CCRG
Handle Tool kit
Part number
TOOLKIT
Part number
SHANDLES
(1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143
(2): contact reeled
(3): loose contact
Accessories and tooling
Metal terminal
© 2011 – SOURIAU 107
UTS Series
1210 - 12E10/12D10
Contacts
IEC
6A 50V 1.5kV 3
Electrical characteristics UTS 1210 - 12E10/12D10 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
UTS 1210
UL
5A 250V UL94 V-0
CSA
4A 250V UL94 V-0
UTS 12E10/12D10
UL
4.5A 250V UL94 HB
CSA
4.5A 250V UL94 HB
0 20 40 60 80 100
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
120
#20 Contact type AWG
Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
Male Female insulator Ø
Crimp
Machined
26-24 RM24W3K(1) RC24W3K(1) - 1.58
22-20 RM20W3K(1) RC20W3K(1) - 1.58
20-18 RM18W3K(1) RC18W3K(1) - 2.1
stamped & formed
reeled contacts
26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58
26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58
22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08
22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08
PCB
Machined (3) - RMW5016K RCW5016K - -
(1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143
(2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6
(3): For dimensions see page 148
Mechanics
10 contacts
6A/50V
per IEC 61984
108 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR OR OR OR
WITH
OR
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Crimp
contacts supply
separately
see page 111
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.1) UTS01412P UTS01412S
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland and grommet
(Fig.2) UTS1GJC1412P
Free hanging
receptacle
Nut and grommet (Fig.3) UTS1GN1412P
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS1JC1412P UTS1JC1412S
Plug Without (Fig.4) UTS61412P UTS61412S
Plug
Cable gland and grommet
(Fig.5) UTS6GJC1412S
Plug Nut and grommet (Fig.6) UTS6GN1412S
Plug Cable gland (Fig.5) UTS6JC1412P UTS6JC1412S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.7) UTS71412P UTS71412S
Jam nut
receptacle
Cable gland and grommet
(Fig.9) UTS7GJC1412P
Jam nut
receptacle
Nut and grommet (Fig.8) UTS7GN1412P
PCB
contacts supply
separately
see page 111
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.1) UTS01412P UTS01412S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.7) UTS71412P UTS71412S
Layout
UTS Series
1412
© 2011 – SOURIAU 109
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
UTS Series
1412
Plug - UTS6
Female
Male
Fig. 4 Fig. 5 Fig. 6
33 70 32
25.3
Ø31.5
Ø31.5
Ø31.5
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Mated connector length
Fig. 7 Fig. 9
Fig. 8
18
18
49
70.7
Ø22.3
Ø22.3
3.5 3.5
1.6
75
82
UTS7
UTS0
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
23.2
23.2
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
24.5
25.9
2.2 0.7
3.8 5.8
5.1
2 1.4
1
2.2
4.5
5.9
1
0.3
2.9
5.5
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front mounting
Ø21.5
Rear mounting
Ø25.1
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Free hanging - UTS1
78.5
43
Ø22.3
Fig. 3
11.3 Fig. 2
Ø22.3
23.2
28.8
2.3 10.5
21.9
Ø3.2
Fig. 1 Front view
Female
Male
Mechanics
12 contacts
10A/63V
per IEC 61984
110 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
1412
Accessories and tooling
(1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143
Metal terminal
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
Crimp tooling
Contacts Contact size
Part number
of head
RM/RC 28M1K(1)
Standard contacts
#16
Ø 1.6mm
S16RCM20
RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16
RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450
RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14
SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11
RMDXK10D28K
Coaxial contacts
M10S-1J
RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DXK10D28 +
york090 M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J
Jam nut sealing caps
Part number
UTS14DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGR
Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Part number
UTS614DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGE
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005588A 85005597
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD14B
Gasket
Color coding rings
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR
UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY
UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG
Handle Tool kit
Part number
TOOLKIT
Part number
SHANDLES
Metal terminal
© 2011 – SOURIAU 111
UTS Series
1412
Contacts
UL
10A 500V UL94 V-0
CSA
7A 500V UL94 V-0
IEC
10A 63V 1.5kV 3
Electrical characteristics UTS 1412 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
1.31mm²
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
0 20 40 60 80 100
0
3
5
8
10
13
15
18
20
23
25
28
30
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
120
#16 Contact type AWG
Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
Male Female insulator Ø
Crimp
Machined
30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1
26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6
22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8
22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2
20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2
16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2
16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2
Stamped & formed
reeled contacts
26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 -
22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 -
18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 -
18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 -
14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 -
PCB
Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - -
Coaxial
Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - -
Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Twisted pair Multipiece -
RMDXK10D28 +
york090
RCDXK1D28 +
york090 - -
Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Fiber
optic
POF contacts
Plastic optical fi bre
- RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - -
(1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143
(2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6
(3): For dimensions see page 148
Mechanics
12 contacts
10A/63V
per IEC 61984
112 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
14E12/14D12 (4x#16 + 8x#20)
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.6) UTS014E12P UTS014E12S
Plug
Without (Fig.1) UTS614E12P UTS614E12S
Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC14E12P UTS6JC14E12S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.3) UTS714E12P UTS714E12S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.6) UTS014D12P UTS014D12S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.4) UTS714D12P32 UTS714D12S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.5) UTS714D12P UTS714D12S
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 113
UTS Series
14E12/14D12 (4x#16 + 8x#20)
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
30.4
35.1
18
Ø22.3
3.5
3
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
4.2 18
Ø22.3
3.5
3
18
Ø22.3
3.5
3
Plug - UTS6
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
70
Ø35.1
Ø35.1
25.3
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length
11.3
Ø22.3
2.3
7.5
7.8
23.2
28.8
Ø3.2
Fig. 6 Front view
75
82
UTS7
UTS0
23.2
Panel cut out
23.2
23.2
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
24.5
25.9
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front mounting
Ø21.5
Rear mounting
Ø25.1
Drilling pattern
4.5
4.1
Ø22
Ø30.5
Ø26.2
Ø30.5
30°
68°
10
Ø3.1
1.6
4.5
2.3
6.7
22°
1
Mechanics
12 contacts
4A/50V
per IEC 61984
114 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
14E12/14D12 (4x#16 + 8x#20)
UTS 14E12/14D12 derating curves
Jam nut sealing caps Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Accessories
Electrical characteristics
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS614DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGE
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS14DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGR
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005588A 85005597
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD14B
Gasket
UL
4.5A 250V UL94 HB
CSA
4.5A 250V UL94 HB
IEC
4A 50V 1.5kV 3
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
Color coding rings
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR
UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY
UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
4
2
6
8
10
12
14
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
© 2011 – SOURIAU 115
UTS Series
14E12/14D12 (4x#16 + 8x#20)
Mechanics
116 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
12E14/12D14
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.6) UTS012E14P UTS012E14S
Plug
Without (Fig.1) UTS612E14P UTS612E14S
Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC12E14P UTS6JC12E14S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.3) UTS712E14P UTS712E14S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.7) UTS012D14P UTS012D14S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.4) UTS712D14P32 UTS712D14S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.5) UTS712D14P UTS712D14S
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 117
UTS Series
12E14/12D14
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
14 contacts
5A/32V
per IEC 61984
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
27.2
31.9
18
Ø19
3.5
3
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
4.2 18
Ø19
3.5
3
18
Ø19
3.5
3.1
Plug - UTS6
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
66.7
Ø30.1
Ø30.1
25.3
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
11.7
Ø19
2.4
7.5
7.8
20.8
26.4
Ø3.2
Front view
75.3
81.7
UTS7
UTS0
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
20.8
20.8
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
21.4
22.7
4.4
Ø22
Ø30.5
Ø26.2
30°
68°
10
Ø3.1
2.7
2
4.7 3.8
1.8 1.4
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 22°
Front mounting
Ø18.3
Rear mounting
Ø22.3
Mechanics
118 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
12E14/12D14
UTS 12E14/12D14 derating curves
Jam nut sealing caps Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Accessories
Electrical characteristics
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS612DCG
Part number
UTS12DCGE
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS12DCG
Part number
UTS12DCGR
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005587A 85005596
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD13B
Gasket
UL
4.5A 250V UL94 HB
CSA
4.5A 250V UL94 HB
IEC
5A 32V 1.5kV 3
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
Color coding rings
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS712CCRR UTS612CCRR
UTS712CCRY UTS612CCRY
UTS712CCRG UTS612CCRG
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
4
2
6
8
10
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
© 2011 – SOURIAU 119
UTS Series
12E14/12D14
Mechanics
120 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
14E15/14D15
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.6) UTS014E15P UTS014E15S
Plug
Without (Fig.1) UTS614E15P UTS614E15S
Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC14E15P UTS6JC14E15S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.3) UTS714E15P UTS714E15S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.7) UTS014D15P UTS014D15S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.4) UTS714D15P32 UTS714D15S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.5) UTS714D15P UTS714D15S
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 121
UTS Series
14E15/14D15
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
30.4
35.1
18
Ø22.3
3.5
3
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
4.2 18
Ø22.3
3.5
3
18
Ø22.3
3.5
3
Plug - UTS6
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
70
Ø35.1
Ø35.1
25.3
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
11.3
Ø22.3
2.3
7.5
23.2
28.8
Ø3.2
Front view
7.8
75
82
UTS7
UTS0
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
23.2
23.2
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
24.5
25.9
30°
68°
22°
3.2
5.5
2.5 2.7
6.1
5.1
5.3
6.2
2.8
0.3
5.7
1.9
1
3.5
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front mounting
Ø21.5
Rear mounting
Ø25.1
Mechanics
15 contacts
4A/50V
per IEC 61984
122 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
14E15/14D15
UTS 14E15/14D15 derating curves
Jam nut sealing caps Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Accessories
Electrical characteristics
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS614DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGE
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS14DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGR
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005588A 85005597
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD14B
Gasket
UL
12A 650V UL94 HB
CSA
12A 650V UL94 HB
IEC
4A 50V 1.5kV 3
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
1.31mm²
Color coding rings
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR
UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY
UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
0
5
3
8
10
20
18
15
13
23
25
28
30
© 2011 – SOURIAU 123
UTS Series
14E15/14D15
Mechanics
124 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
14E18/14D18
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.6) UTS014E18P UTS014E18S
Plug
Without (Fig.1) UTS614E18P UTS614E18S
Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS6JC14E18P UTS6JC14E18S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.3) UTS714E18P UTS714E18S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.7) UTS014D18P UTS014D18S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.4) UTS714D18P32 UTS714D18S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.5) UTS714D18P UTS714D18S
Layout
Sealed unmated
© 2011 – SOURIAU 125
UTS Series
14E18/14D18
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
30.4
35.1
18
Ø22.3
3.5
3
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
4.2 18
Ø22.3
3.5
3
18
Ø22.3
3.5
3
Plug - UTS6
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
70
Ø35.1
Ø35.1
25.3
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
11.3
Ø22.3
2.3
7.5
23.2
28.8
Ø3.2
Front view
7.8
75
82
UTS7
UTS0
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
24.5
25.9
23.2
23.2
Ø3.3
1.6
3.3
6.1
Ø22
Ø26.2
Ø30.5
22°
30°
68°
10
Ø3.1
4.9
2.8
5.7
6.4
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front mounting
Ø21.5
Rear mounting
Ø25.1
Mechanics
18 contacts
5A/50V
per IEC 61984
126 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
14E18/14D18
UTS 14E18/14D18 derating curves
Jam nut sealing caps Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Accessories
Electrical characteristics
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS614DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGE
Metal terminal
Part number
UTS14DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGR
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005588A 85005597
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD14B
Gasket
UL
4A 250V UL94 HB
CSA
4A 250V UL94 HB
IEC
5A 50V 1.5kV 3
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
Color coding rings
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR
UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY
UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
0
6
4
2
8
10
© 2011 – SOURIAU 127
UTS Series
14E18/14D18
Mechanics
128 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
1419 - 14E19/14D19
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Crimp
contacts supply
separately
see page 131
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig.1) UTS1JC1419P UTS1JC1419S
Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS61419P UTS61419S
Plug Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC1419P UTS6JC1419S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.4) UTS71419P UTS71419S
PCB
contacts supply
separately
see page 131
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.4) UTS71419P UTS71419S
Handsolder
electrical contacts
loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.8) UTS014E19P UTS014E19S
Plug
Without (Fig.2) UTS614E19P UTS614E19S
Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC14E19P UTS6JC14E19S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.5) UTS714E19P UTS714E19S
PCB
contacts loaded
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.9) UTS014D19P UTS014D19S
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
with hold down clips
Without (Fig.6) UTS714D19P32 UTS714D19S32
Jam nut receptacle
with stand off and
without hold down clip
Without (Fig.7) UTS714D19P UTS714D19S
Layout
Sealed unmated
Square fl ange receptacle
© 2011 – SOURIAU 129
UTS Series
1419 - 14E19/14D19
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Mated connector length
Fig. 8
Fig. 9
11.3
Ø22.3
2.3
7.5
78
23.2
28.8
Ø3.2
Front view
75
82
UTS7
UTS0
Free hanging - UTS1 Plug - UTS6
78.5
Ø22.3
Fig. 1
Female
Male
Fig. 2 Fig. 3
33 70
Ø35.1
Ø35.1
25.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
Front view
30.4
35.1
18
3.5 3
12.3
Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7
Fig. 4
4.2 18
Ø22.3
3.5
3
18
Ø22.3
Ø22.3
3.5
3
Panel cut out Drilling pattern
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
24.5
25.9
23.2
23.2
Ø3.3
1.6
4.9
Ø22
Ø26.2
Ø30.5
30°
68°
10
Ø3.1
3.3
6.6
2.8 5.7
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 22°
Front mounting
Ø21.5
Rear mounting
Ø25.1
Mechanics
19 contacts
5A/32V
per IEC 61984
130 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
1419 - 14E19/14D19
Metal terminal
* Add G for Green, Y for Yellow, R for Red
G for Green
Y for
Yellow
R for Red
Crimp tooling
Contacts Contact size
Part number
of head
RM/RC 24W3K(1)
Standard contacts
#20
Ø 1mm
S20RM
RM/RC 20W3K(1) S20RM
RM/RC 18W3K(1) S20RM
SM/SC 24W3S(2) S20SCM20
SM/SC 24WL3S(3) S20SCM20
SM/SC 20W3S(2) S20SCM20
SM/SC 20WL3S(3) S20SCM20
Jam nut sealing caps
Part number
UTS14DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGR
Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Part number
UTS614DCG
Part number
UTS14DCGE
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
85005588A 85005597
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD14B
Gasket
Color coding rings
Part numbers
Receptacles Plugs
UTS714CCRR UTS614CCRR
UTS714CCRY UTS614CCRY
UTS714CCRG UTS614CCRG
Handle Tool kit
Part number
TOOLKIT
Part number
SHANDLES
(1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143
(2): contact reeled
(3): loose contact
Accessories and tooling
Metal terminal
© 2011 – SOURIAU 131
UTS Series
1419 - 14E19/14D19
Contacts
IEC
5A 32V 1.5kV 3
Electrical characteristics UTS 1419 - 14E19/14D19 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
UTS 1419
UL
5A 250V UL94 V-0
CSA
4A 250V UL94 V-0
UTS 14E19/14D19
UL
4A 250V UL94 HB
CSA
4A 250V UL94 HB
0 20 40 60 80 100
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
120
#20 Contact type AWG
Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
Male Female insulator Ø
Crimp
Machined
26-24 RM24W3K(1) RC24W3K(1) - 1.58
22-20 RM20W3K(1) RC20W3K(1) - 1.58
20-18 RM18W3K(1) RC18W3K(1) - 2.1
stamped & formed
reeled contacts
26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58
26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58
22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08
22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08
PCB
Machined (3) - RMW5016K RCW5016K - -
(1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143
(2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6
(3): For dimensions see page 148
Mechanics
19 contacts
5A/32V
per IEC 61984
132 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR OR OR
WITH
UTS Series
1823
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Crimp
contacts supply
separately
see page 135
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.1) UTS01823P UTS01823S
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig.2) UTS1JC1823P UTS1JC1823S
Plug Without (Fig.3) UTS61823P UTS61823S
Plug Cable gland (Fig.4) UTS6JC1823P UTS6JC1823S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.5) UTS71823P UTS71823S
PCB
contacts supply
separately
see page 135
Square fl ange
receptacle
Without (Fig.1) UTS01823P UTS01823S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.5) UTS71823P UTS71823S
Layout
© 2011 – SOURIAU 133
UTS Series
1823
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Plug - UTS6
Female
Male
Fig. 3 Fig. 4
33 81.3
25.3
Ø42
Ø42
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0 Free hanging - UTS1
89
Ø28.6
Fig. 2
11.3
Ø28.6
27.1
33.5
2.5 10.3
18.9
Ø3.2
Fig. 1 Front view
Female
Male
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Mated connector length
Front view
41.5
36.9
Fig. 5
18 12.3
Ø28.6
3.5
84.1
90.8
UTS7
UTS0
Panel cut out
27.1
27.1
Ø3.3
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
24.5
25.9
Drilling pattern
3.5
5
8.3
3.7
6.7
3.4
4.8
1.9
8.6 7.7
5.4
Square fl ange receptacle - UTS0
Front mounting
Ø27.9
Rear mounting
Ø31.9
Mechanics
23 contacts
9A/63V
per IEC 61984
134 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
1823
Accessories and tooling
(1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143
Metal terminal
Crimp tooling
Contacts Contact size
Part number
of head
RM/RC 28M1K(1)
Standard contacts
#16
Ø 1.6mm
S16RCM20
RM/RC 24M9K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M13K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 20M12K(1) S16RCM20
RM/RC 16M23K(1) S16RCM16
RM/RC 14M50K(1) S16RCM1450
RM/RC 14M30K(1) S16RCM14
SM/SC 24ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 20ML1TK6(1) S16SCM20
SM/SC 16ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 14ML1TK6(1) S16SCML1
SM/SC 16ML11TK6(1) S16SCML11
RMDXK10D28K
Coaxial contacts
M10S-1J
RCDXK1D28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28K M10S-1J
RM/RC DXK10D28 +
york090 M10S-1J
RM/RC DX60xxD28 M10S-1J
Jam nut sealing caps
Part number
UTS18DCG
Part number
UTS18DCGR
Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Part number
UTS618DCG
Part number
UTS18DCGE
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
8500-5590A 8500-5599
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD16B
Gasket
Handle Tool kit
Part number
TOOLKIT
Part number
SHANDLES
Metal terminal
© 2011 – SOURIAU 135
UTS Series
1823
Contacts
120
UL
10A 500V UL94 V-0
CSA
7A 500V UL94 V-0
IEC
9A 63V 1.5kV 3
Electrical characteristics UTS 1823 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
1.31mm²
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
0 20 40 60 80 100
0
3
5
8
10
13
15
18
20
23
25
28
30
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
120
#16 Contact type AWG
Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
Male Female insulator Ø
Crimp
Machined
30-28 RM28M1K(1) RC28M1K(1) 0.55 1.1
26-24 RM24M9K(1) RC24M9K(1) 0.8 1.6
22-20 RM20M13K(1) RC20M13K(1) 1.18 1.8
22-20 RM20M12K(1) RC20M12K(1) 1.18 2.2
20-16 RM16M23K(1) RC16M23K(1) 1.8 3.2
16-14 RM14M50K(1) RC14M50K(1) 2.05 3.2
16-14 RM14M30K(1) RC14M30K(1) 2.28 3.2
Stamped & formed
reeled contacts
26-24 SM24M1TK6(1)(2) SC24M1TK6(1)(2) 0.89-1.28 -
22-20 SM20M1TK6(1)(2) SC20M1TK6(1)(2) 1.17-2.08 -
18-16 SM16M1TK6(1)(2) SC16M1TK6(1)(2) 3.0 -
18-16 SM16M11TK6(1)(2) SC16M11TK6(1)(2) 2.0-3.0 -
14 SM14M1TK6(1)(2) SC14M1TK6(1)(2) 3.2 -
PCB
Machined (3) - RM20M12E8K(1) RC20M12E84K(1) - -
Coaxial
Cable Multipiece - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 - -
Cable Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Twisted pair Multipiece -
RMDXK10D28 +
york090
RCDXK1D28 +
york090 - -
Twisted pair Monocrimp - RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 - -
Fiber
optic
POF contacts
Plastic optical fi bre
- RMPOF1000 RCPOF1000B - -
(1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143
(2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6
(3): For dimensions see page 148
Mechanics
23 contacts
9A/63V
per IEC 61984
136 © 2011 – SOURIAU
OR
WITH
OR
UTS Series
1832
Specifi cations
Contact type Connector type Backshell
Part number
Male insert Female insert
Crimp
contact supply
separately
see page 139
Free hanging
receptacle
Cable gland (Fig.1) UTS1JC1832P UTS1JC1832S
Plug Without (Fig.2) UTS61832P UTS61832S
Plug Cable gland (Fig.3) UTS6JC1832P UTS6JC1832S
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.4) UTS71832P UTS71832S
PCB
contacts supply
separately
see page 139
Jam nut
receptacle
Without (Fig.4) UTS71832P UTS71832S
Layout
© 2011 – SOURIAU 137
UTS Series
1832
Dimensions
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Plug - UTS6
Female
Male
Fig. 2 Fig. 3
33 81.3
25.3
Ø42
Ø42
Free hanging - UTS1
89
Ø28.6
Fig. 1
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7 Mated connector length - UTS7
90.8
Front view
41.5
36.9
18 12.3
Ø28.6
3.5
Fig. 4
Panel cut out
Drilling pattern
Jam nut receptacle - UTS7
24.5
25.9
1.6
4.4
5.7
8.1
2.4
3.1
5.3
3.3
6.1
9.7
4.8
7.2
8.7
0.8
2.4
3.8
5.6
9.1
4.9
5.8
2.4
5.5
7.7
8.9
4
6.7
8.5
Mechanics
32 contacts
4A/32V
per IEC 61984
138 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
1832
Metal terminal
Crimp tooling
Contacts Contact size
Part number
of head
RM/RC 24W3K(1)
Standard contacts
#20
Ø 1mm
S20RM
RM/RC 20W3K(1) S20RM
RM/RC 18W3K(1) S20RM
SM/SC 24W3S(2) S20SCM20
SM/SC 24WL3S(3) S20SCM20
SM/SC 20W3S(2) S20SCM20
SM/SC 20WL3S(3) S20SCM20
Jam nut sealing caps
Part number
UTS18DCG
Part number
UTS18DCGR
Plug sealing cap Square fl ange sealing cap
Part number
UTS618DCG
Part number
UTS18DCGE
Part numbers
Receptacle
cap
Plug cap
8500-5590A 8500-5599
Plastic protective cap
Part numbers / neoprene
UTFD16B
Gasket
Handle Tool kit
Part number
TOOLKIT
Part number
SHANDLES
(1): example of plating, for other plating see UTS catalog page 143
(2): contact reeled
(3): loose contact
Accessories and tooling
Metal terminal
© 2011 – SOURIAU 139
UTS Series
1832
Contacts
UL
5A 250V UL94 V-0
CSA
4A 250V UL94 V-0
IEC
4A 32V 1.5kV 3
Electrical characteristics UTS 1832 derating curves
Test
conditions
Contact used:
Machined contacts
Wires used:
0.518mm²
Current use Limited use Not recommended use
0 20 40 60 80 100
0
2
4
6
8
10
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
120
#20 Contact type AWG
Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
Male Female insulator Ø
Crimp
Machined
26-24 RM24W3K(1) RC24W3K(1) - 1.58
22-20 RM20W3K(1) RC20W3K(1) - 1.58
20-18 RM18W3K(1) RC18W3K(1) - 2.1
stamped & formed
reeled contacts
26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58
26-24 SM24W3TK6(2) SC24W3TK6(2) - 0.89-1.58
22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08
22-20 SM20W3TK6(2) SC20W3TK6(2) - 1.17-2.08
PCB
Machined (3) - RMW5016K RCW5016K - -
(1): Example of plating, for other plating see page 143
(2): Loose piece contact available if putting L. Example: SM20ML1-TK6
(3): For dimensions see page 148
Mechanics
32 contacts
4A/32V
per IEC 61984
UTS Series
© 2011 – SOURIAU 141
Contacts
UTS Series
Description ....................................................................................................................................... 142
Contact plating selector guide ................................................................................................... 143
Contact selector guide ................................................................................................................. 144
Packaging ......................................................................................................................................... 144
Crimp contacts ................................................................................................................................ 145
#16 coaxial contacts .................................................................................................................... 147
PCB contacts ................................................................................................................................... 148
Fibre optic contacts ....................................................................................................................... 149
142 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
Contacts
Contacts
Description
The UTS series is delivered with (solder and PCB versions) or without contact (crimp version). When contacts are not loaded, this series offers
the unique possibility to use the same contact in any layout as long as it receives the same active part size. Thus it is possible to buy only
one contact reference and equip all connectors even if housings are different.
The main benefit is the standardisation which means reduction of inventory cost.
Bearing in mind that any additional tool or complicated assembly process should be avoided, our contacts are based on a snap-in principle
which avoid the use of an insertion tool.
Crimp contacts are available in different versions:
In addition, UTS series can obviously be equipped with solder contacts, PCB contacts, screw termination.
• machined • stamped & formed • coaxial • fiber optic
© 2011 – SOURIAU 143
UTS Series
Contacts
Contact plating selector guide
As soon as you know what contact size you need, you next have to decide on which type to use.
Souriau proposes mainly two different types of electrical contacts:
- Machined
- Stamped & formed
Machined contacts are generally chosen for low quantities purpose as well as a better solution for power applications.
Stamped & formed contacts offer the ability to be crimped automatically which makes them more suitable for high volume production
applications.
Then comes the question: What plating should I choose ?
Hereunder is a graph with criteria to guide you:
NB: do not mix different plating (e.g. tin plated pin contact with gold plated socket contact).
250
100
0.4μm of gold
min
Gold fl ash
Silver
Tin
5mA
5mV
Contact
size
#20 #12
#16 #8
Vibration
Number of
cycles
Current /
Voltage
Contacts
144 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
Contacts
Electrical characteristics:
contact resistance
#20
Ø1mm
Machined < 6m
Stamped & formed < 15m
#16
Ø1.6mm
Machined < 3m
Stamped & formed < 6m
#12
Ø2.4mm
Machined < 5m
#8
Ø3.6mm
Machined < 5m
Available platings (contact supply separately)
A 2μ Ni + 2μ Ag
J Gold fl ash over 2μ Ni
K Min 0.4μ gold over 2μ Ni
S31
Active part: Gold fl ash over Ni
Crimp area: Nickel
S18
Active part: 0.75μ gold min
over 2μ Ni
Crimp area: 1.3μ tin over Ni
Other: Nickel
S25
S26
Active part: 0.75μ Au over Ni
Crimp area: fl ash Au over Ni
TK6 2-5μ Sn pre-plated
Conscious of the wide variety of applications, contact packaging has been considered for small series (bulk packaging) and high volume
production (reeled contacts):
Size contacts #20 & #16
• 100 pieces bulk packing
(stamped & formed contacts)
Electrical characteristics:
contact resistance
#20
Ø1mm
Machined < 4m
#16
Ø1.6mm
Machined < 3m
Available platings (contact preloaded)
Min 0.4μ gold over 2μ Ni
Contact preloaded
Contact supply separately
• 50 pieces bulk packing
(machined contacts)
• 25 pieces bulk packing
(stamped & formed
contacts)
• 1000 pieces bulk
packing
(machined contacts)
• 5000 pieces reeled
(machined contacts)
• 3000 pieces reeled
(stamped & formed
contacts)
Size contacts #12 & #8
Contact selector guide
Packaging
© 2011 – SOURIAU 145
UTS Series
Contacts
Crimp contacts
(1) contact reeled (2) loose contact
Exemple: RM24W3K - Size #20, Machined, AWG24 wire.
Contact
size
Type
Wire size Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
insulator Ø
Plating
AWG mm² Male Female available
#20
Ø1 mm
Machined 26-24 0.13-0.20 RM24W3K RC24W3K 1.58 max K
Stamped &
Formed
26-24 0.13-0.25
SM24W3-(1) SC24W3-(1)
0.89-1.58
TK6
S25 (female)
SM24WL3-(2) SC24WL3-(2) S26 (male)
Machined 22-20 0.32-0.52 RM20W3K RC20W3K 1.58 max K
Stamped &
Formed
22-20 0.35-0.5
SM20W3-(1) SC20W3-(1)
1.17-2.08
TK6
S25 (female)
SM20WL3-(2) SC20WL3-(2) S26 (male)
Machined 20-18 0.50-0.93 RM18W3K RC18W3K 2.10 max K
#16
Ø1.6
mm
Machined 30-28 0.05-0.08 RM28M1- RC28M1- 0.55 1.1 K, J
Machined 26-24 0.13-0.2 RM24M9- RC24M9- 0.8 1.6 K, J
Stamped &
Formed
26-24 0.13-0.25
SM24M1-(1)
SM24ML1-(2)
SC24M1-(1)
SC24ML1-(2) 0.89-1.28
Insulation
grip
S31, S18, TK6
Machined 22-20 0.32-0.52
RM20M13- RC20M13-
1.18
1.8
K, J
RM20M12- RC20M12- 2.2
Stamped &
Formed
22-20 0.35-0.5
SM20M1-(1)
SM20ML1-(2)
SC20M1-(1)
SC20ML1-(2) 1.17-2.08
Insulation
grip
S31, S18, TK6
Machined 20-16 0.52-1.5 RM16M23- RC16M23- 1.8 3.2 K, J
Stamped &
Formed
18-16 0.8-1.5
SM16M1-(1)
SM16ML1-(2)
SC16M1-(1)
SC16ML1-(2) 3.0
No insulation
grip
S31, S18, TK6
Stamped &
Formed
18-16 0.8-1.5
SM16M11-(1)
SM16ML11-(2)
SC16M11-(1)
SC16ML11-(2) 2.0-3.0
Insulation
grip
S31, S18, TK6
Machined 16-14 1.5-2.5 RM14M50- RC14M50- 2.05 3.2 K, J
Machined 16-14 1.5-2.5 RM14M30- RC14M30- 2.28 3.2 K, J
Stamped &
Formed
14 2.0-2.5
SM14M1-(1)
SM14ML1-(2)
SC14M1-(1)
SC14ML1-(2) 3.2
No insulation
grip
S31, S18, TK6
#12
Ø2.4
mm
Machined
22 0.13-0.4 82911457NA 82911456A
- 4.9 A, K
20 0.5 82911459NA 82911458A
18 0.75-1.0 82911461NA 82911460A
16 1.5 82911463NA 82911462A
14 2.5 82911465NA 82911464A
12 4 82911467NA 82911466A
#8
Ø3.6
mm
Machined
16 1.5 82913601A 82913600A
- 6.5 A
14 2.5 82913603A 82913602A
12 4 82913605A 82913604A
10 6.0 82913607A 82913606A
8 10.0 82913609A 82913608A
Standard version
Contacts
146 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Contact 1
Contact 2
Standard male
contact
Standard female
contact
Longer male
contact
Standard male
contact
Standard female
contact
FMLB
Shorter female
contact
LMFB
UTS Series
Contacts
Crimp contacts
Exemple: RM16M3GE1K - Size #16, Machined, Longer male, AWG16 wire.
First Mate Last Break contacts should
be chosen only if the cavity is not
marked with the earth symbol. For
cavities marked with the earth symbol,
standard contacts will fulfi ll the same
role as a fi rst mate, last break contact
used in a standard cavity.
Ground symbol
How to make FMLB / LMFB connection
First Mate Last Break contacts
Contact
size
Type
Wire size Part number Max
wire Ø
Max
insulator Ø
Color band
Plating
available
AWG mm² Male Female Front Rear
#16
Ø1.6 mm
Longer male
contact
(+1mm)
Machined
30-28 0.05-0.08 RM28M1GE1□
-
0.55 1.1 - Red
□ =
K, J
26-24 0.13-0.2 RM24M9GE1□ 0.8 1.6 Red Red
22-20 0.32-0.52
RM20M13GE1□
1.18
1.8 Black Red
RM20M12GE1□ 2.2 Blue Red
20-16 0.52-1.5 RM16M23GE1□ 1.8 3.2 - Red
16-14 1.5-2.5 RM14M50GE1□ 2.05 - - Red
16-14 1.5-2.5 RM14M30GE1□ 2.28 - - Red
#16
Ø1.6 mm
Shorter
female
contact
(-0.7mm)
Machined
30-28 0.05-0.08
-
RC28M1GE7□ 0.55 1.1 - Blue
□ =
K, J
26-24 0.13-0.2 RC24M9GE7□ 0.8 1.6 Red Blue
22-20 0.32-0.52
RC20M13GE7□
1.18
1.8 Black Blue
RC20M12GE7□ 2.2 Blue Blue
20-16 0.52-1.5 RC16M23GE7□ 1.8 3.2 - Blue
16-14 1.5-2.5 RC14M50GE7□ 2.05 - - Blue
16-14 1.5-2.5 RC14M30GE7□ 2.28 - - Blue
ont Re
© 2011 – SOURIAU 147
UTS Series
Contacts
#16 coaxial contacts
We provide 2 types of coaxial contacts suitable for 50 or 75, coaxial cable or twisted pair cable.
Monocrimp coaxial contact
• The monocrimp one-piece coaxial contacts offer high reliability plus
the economic advantage of a 95% reduction in installation time over
conventional assembly methods.
• This economy is achieved by simultaneously crimping both the inner
conductor and outer braid or drain wire.
Multipiece crimp coaxial contact
• The inner conductor and outer braid is crimped individually.
• The thermoplastic insulating bushing in the outer body is designed
to accept and permanently retain the inner contact.
• An outer ferrule is used to connect the braid to the outer contact
and provide cable support to ensure against bending and vibration.
Suitable for Coaxial cable or Twisted cable
• For jacket diameter from 1.78 to 3.05mm
Inner conductor up to 2.44mm diameter
• For jacket diameter from 0.64 to 1.45mm
Inner conductor from AWG30 to AWG24
Contacts for coaxial cable summary
Contact type
Contact range
Contact part number with
cable combination
Cabling notice
Male contact Female contact
Multipiece RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28
See page 176
See pages 180 & 181
Monocrimp RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 See page 182
Contacts for twisted pairs cable summary
Contact type
Contact range Contact part number with
cable combination
Cabling notice
Male contact Female contact
Multipiece RMDXK10D28
+ YORK090
RCDXK1D28
+ YORK090 See page 177
See page 178
Monocrimp RMDX60xxD28 RCDX60xxD28 See page 179
Coaxial contact range
Contacts
148 © 2011 – SOURIAU
PCB contacts
PCB contacts
PCB soldering
UTS range can be carried out with a wave soldering process, but not refl ow soldering
process.
All high temperature processes are prohibited.
Nominal length (G)
Dimension of dipsolder contacts out of connector
(contacts to be ordered separately).
Contact size Type
Part number
Plating
Male Female
#20
Ø1mm
Short version RMW50A7K RCW50A7K
K
Long version RMW5016K RCW5016K
#16
Ø1.6mm
Short version RM20M12E8K RC20M12E8K
K
Long version RM20M12E83K
RC20M12E83K
RC20M12E84K
Exemple: RM50A7K - Size #20, Short version, male.
UTS Series
Contacts
G
* Plating indication: see plating table
Connector size
Pin contact Socket contact
RM20M12E8*□ RM20M12E83*□ RC20M12E8*□ RC20M12E83*□ RC20M12E84*□
10 4 9.1 3.3 8.5 12.1
12 4 9.1 3.3 8.5 12.1
14 4 9.1 3.3 8.5 12.1
16 4 9.1 3.3 8.5 12.1
Connector size
Pin contact Socket contact
RM20M
12E8*□
RM20M
12E83*□
RMW
50A7K
RMW
5016K
RC20M
12E8*□
RC20M
12E83*□
RCW
50A7K
RCW
5016K
10 4.1 9.2 9.51 10.41 4.65 8.5 2.4 3.04
12 4 9.2 9.51 10.41 3.3 8.5 2.4 3.04
14 4 9.2 9.51 10.41 3.3 8.5 2.4 3.04
16 4 9.2 9.51 10.41 3.3 8.5 2.4 3.04
UTS0
UTS7
© 2011 – SOURIAU 149
Fibre optic contacts
Size 16 Fibre optic contacts for TRIM TRIO® connectors
Size 16 Fibre optic contacts are optical contacts designed for the integration of optical links in all TRIM TRIO® cable connectors.
The Fibre optic contacts are designed to accommodate:
• Plastic Optical Fibre (POF)
1 mm core and 2.2 mm jacket
• Plastic Clad Fibre (PCF)
230μm core and 2.2 mm jacket
Typical features and benefits are:
• Socket contact is spring loaded to avoid any air gap between the two optical faces.
• Low insertion loss is provided by high precision pieces.
• Single jumpers, multiway harness and active device housings can be supplied regarding customer requirement.
Performance
• Fibre type: ................................................................................................................................POF
• Wave length: ........................................................................................................................650 nm
• Optical insertion loss (typ.): ..........................................................................................2 dB max.
• Jacketed external diameter: ............................................................................................2.2mm
• Temperature range: ....................................................................................................-25°C to +70°C
• Cable retention: ..................................................................................................................... 49N
• Mating cycles without cleaning: .........................................................................................50
• Max. mating cycles: ...............................................................................................................500
Construction
• Contact body: Copper alloy
Connector accommodation
Any TRIM TRIO® size 16 contact can be used in any contact position in any connector in the TRIM TRIO® size 16 interconnection system :
UTP, UTS, UTG, UTO.
UTS Series
Contacts
Description
Technical characteristics
Contacts
150 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Fibre optic contacts
UTS Series
Contacts
POF Contact (Plastic Optical Fibre)
Ordering information
Part numbers Descriptions
80WD0005 Stripping tool
80WD0025 Automatic stripping tool for Ø 0.5 mm,
0.6 mm, 0.7 mm & 3.8 mm
80WM0006 Ruler
80WP0005 Polishing plate
80WP0013 Non slip base (to hold the polishing plate)
80WP0014 Polishing disk (grain size 9μm)
80WP0018 Polishing tool
80WP0019 Polishing disk (grain size 30μm)
80WS0002 Crimping plier
STANDARD TOOLING KIT - P/N 80MS0004
The standard tooling kit is made of the part numbers below
that can be ordered separately as well.
Part numbers Descriptions
80WG0010 Needle
80WG0015 Capsule
80WG0016 Syringe
80WN0005 Dry air spray
80WN0006 Optical paper
80WN0012 Dropping bottle
80WN0008 Wiping solvent
SPECIFIC TOOLING LIST - can be ordered only separately
POF Contacts (Plastic Optical Fibre)
Male contact ................................................RMPOF1000
Female contact ......................................... RCPOF1000B
© 2011 – SOURIAU 151
UTS Series
Contacts
Contacts
UTS Series
© 2011 – SOURIAU 153
Technical information
UTS Series
Tooling ............................................................................................................................................... 154
Assembly intruction ....................................................................................................................... 156
Dimensions overmoulded harnesses ...................................................................................... 162
Extraction tools ............................................................................................................................... 162
Rated current & working voltage ............................................................................................... 163
UV resistance .................................................................................................................................. 164
UL94 + UL1977 ............................................................................................................................. 165
IEC 61984 & IP codes explained ............................................................................................. 168
What is NEMA rating ? ................................................................................................................. 170
Ethernet for the layman ................................................................................................................ 171
154 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
Technical information
Souriau has been working in partnership with Mecal for a good number of years. With sales offi ces located
in all major industrial regions of the world, the combined strengths of both organisations has resulted in a
truly global solution to all your production tooling needs.
Mecal sales network:
Mecal is leader in manufacturing tooling for
crimping terminals over a stripped wire.
Established in 1976, Mecal has become one of the
world's leading companies dedicated to the design
and manufacture of semi automatic production tools
for strip fed, open barrel crimp terminals, serving
the Automotive, Telecom and Datacomm industry.
The extreme environment interconnect specialist
“from deep sea to deep space”.
Souriau designs manufactures and markets high
performance interconnect solutions for severe
environments dedicated to the aerospace, defence,
light and heavy industry markets.
Mini Applicator Stripper Presses
Tooling
www.mecal.net/eng/retevendita.php
Automatic crimping tools
© 2011 – SOURIAU 155
UTS Series
Technical information
Contact size Part number Head Handles
#20
1mm
RM/RC 24W3 -
S20RCM
SHANDLES
RM/RC 20W3 -
RM/RC 18W3 -
SM 24W3S-(1)
SC 24W3S-(1)
S20SCM20 SM 24WL3S-(2)
SC 24WL3S-(2)
SM/SC 20W3S-(1)
SM/SC 20WL3S-(2)
#16
1.6mm
RM/RC 28M1-
S16RCM20 RM/RC 24M9-
RM/RC 20M13-
RM/RC 20M12-
RM/RC 16M23- S16RCM16
RM/RC 14M50- S16RCM1450
RM/RC 14M30- S16RCM14
SM/SC 24M1-
SM/SC 24ML1- S16SCM20 SM/SC 20M1-
SM/SC 20ML1-
SM/SC 16M1-
SM/SC 16ML1- S16SCML1 SM/SC 14M1-
SM/SC 14ML1-
SM/SC 16M11-
SM/SC 16ML11- S16SCML11
Specifi c contacts
Contact size Part number
Tool with separate locator
Extraction tools
Hand tool Positioner + locator setting
#12
2.4mm
8291 1457N- / 8291 1456-
M317 VGE10077A
1-2
5106020924
8291 1459N- / 8291 1458- 2
8291 1461N- / 8291 1460- 2
8291 1463N- / 8291 1462- 3
8291 1465N- / 8291 1464- 3
8291 1467N- / 8291 1466- 4
#8
3.6mm
8291 3601A / 8291 3600A
M317 VGE10078A
3
51060210936
8291 3603A / 8291 3602A 3
8291 3605A / 8291 3604A 4
8291 3607A / 8291 3606A 5
8291 3609A / 8291 3608A 6/7
Contact size Part number
Hand tools
(SHANDLES) head
Tool with separate locator
Extraction tools
Hand tool Positioner + locator setting
#16
Ø 1.6mm
Longer RM
contact
RM28M1GE1-
S16RCM20
RX2025GE1
RM24M9GE1-
RM20M13GE1-
RM16M23 GE1- S16RCM16 MH860 MH86186 6/8
RM14M50 GE1- S16RCM1450
M317 UH25 3
RM14M30 GE1- S16RCM14
#16
Ø 1.6mm
Shorter RC
contact
RC28M1GE7-
S16RCM20
MH860 MH86164G
4/6
RC24M9GE7- 5/6
RC20M13GE7-
RC20M12GE7- 5/7
RC16M23GE7- S16RCM16 6/8
RC14M50GE7- S16RCM1450
M317 UH25 3
RC14M30GE7- S16RCM14
Standard contacts
Coaxial contacts
See cabling notice chapter Appendices, pages 178 to 182.
(1) contact reeled (2) loose contact
Note: endurance of SHANDLES tool = 5 000 cycles.
51060210924
51060210936
SHANDLES
Crimptooling table
Technical information
156 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Assembly instruction
Part number Stripping
length L
Male Female (mm)
Machined contact #16
RM28M1- / RM24M9-
RM20M13- / RM20M12-
RC28M1- / RC24M9-
RC20M13- / RC20M12- 4.8
RM16M23- / RM14M50-
RM14M30-
RC16M23- / RC14M50-
RC14M30- 7.1
#20
RM24W3- / RM20W3-
RM18W3-
RC24W3- / RC20W3-
RC18W3- 4.8
Stamped & formed #16
SM24M1- / SM24ML1-
SM20M1- / SM20ML1
SC24M1- / SC24ML1-
SC20M1- / SC20ML1- 4
SM16M11- / SM16ML11- SC16M11- / SC16ML11- 4.65
SM16M1- / SM16ML1- SC16M1- / SC16ML1- 6.35
SM14M1- / SM14ML1- SC16M11- / SC16ML11- 6.35
Screw contacts Power contacts #12
8291 1457- / 8291 1459- /
8291 1461- / 8291 1463- /
8291 1465- / 8291 1467-
8291 1456- / 8291 1458- /
8291 1460- /8291 1462- /
8291 1464- / 8291 1466 -
7 to 8
Power contacts #8
8291 3601- / 8291 3603- /
8291 3605-
8291 3607- / 8291 3609-
8291 3600- / 8291 3602- /
8291 3604- / 8291 3606- /
8291 3608-
6.5 to 7.5
Contact delivered with connector 5.8
Part number Stripping
length L
Male Female (mm)
Machined contact #16 & #20 5
L
L
L
L
Without insulation support
With insulation support
L
UTS Series
Technical information
Wire stripping crimp version
Wire stripping solder version
© 2011 – SOURIAU 157
One of the key factors which affects the performance of a connector,
is the way contacts are terminated. Crimped connections are
nowadays seen as the best solution to ensure quality throughout the
lifetime of the product. Here are some reasons why we recommend
this method of termination for UTS connectors:
Advantages (Extract from the IEC 60352-2):
- Effi cient processing of connections at each production level
- Processing by fully-automatic or semi- automatic crimping
machines, or with hand operated tools
- No cold-soldered joints
- No degradation of the spring characteristic of female contacts
by the soldering temperature
- No health risk from heavy metal and fl ux steam
- Preservation of conductor fl exibility behind the crimped
connection
- No burnt, discolored and overheated wire insulation
- Good connections with reproducible electrical and mechanical
performances
- Easy production control.
To ensure that the crimp tooling is performing according tooriginal
specifi cations, it is important to carry out regular checks. A common
way to check the performance of tooling is with a simple pull
test, ideally using a dedicated electric pull tester. Minimum recommended
full forces are indicated in the tables below:
Active
contact
part
Contact type
Die
location
on heads
Wire
section
range
Section
(mm²)
Tensile
straight
test (mini)
Height
(Mm)
H (±0.075)
Width
(Mm)
W (±0.075)
Head's P/N
Machined
contacts
size 20
RM/RC 24W3* 26/24
AWG 26 0.12 min 15 N
0.95 1.27
S20RCM
AWG 24 0.25 max 32 N
RM/RC 20W3* 22/20
AWG 22 0.32 min 40 N
1.26 1.78
AWG 20 0.50 max 60 N
RM/RC 18W3* 20/18
AWG 20 0.50 max 60 N
1.35 1.86
AWG 18 0.82 max 90 N
S & F
contacts
size 20
SM/SC 24WL3TK6* 26/24
AWG 26 0.12 min 15 N
0.80 1.49
S20SCM20
AWG 24 0.25 max 32 N
SM/SC 20WL3TK6* 22/20
AWG 22 0.32 min 40 N
1.01 1.53
AWG 20 0.50 max 60 N
Machined
contacts
size 16
RM/RC 28M1K* 30/28
AWG 30 0.05 min 11 N
1.14 1.41
S16RCM20
AWG 28 0.08 max 11 N
RM/RC 24M9K* 26/24
AWG 26 0.12 min 15 N
1.15 1.41
AWG 24 0.25 max 32 N
RM/RC 20M13K*
22/20
AWG 22 0.32 min 40 N
1.26 1.76
AWG 20 0.50 max 60 N
RM/RC 20M12K*
AWG 22 0.32 min 40 N
AWG 20 0.50 max 60 N
RM/RC 16M23K*
20 AWG 20 0.50 max 60 N 1.66 2.18
18 AWG 18 0.82 max 90 N 1.80 2.28 S16RCM16
16 AWG 16 1.50 max 150 N 1.96 2.43
RM/RC 14M30K*
16 AWG 16 1.50 min 150 N 2.10 2.68
S16RCM14
14 AWG 14 2.50 min 230 N 2.30 2.78
RM/RC 14M50K*
16 AWG 16 1.50 min 150 N 2.09 2.59
S16RCM1450
14 AWG 14 2.50 max 230 N 2.26 2.71
S & F
contacts
size 16
SM/SC 24ML1TK6* 26/24
AWG 26 0.12 min 15 N
0.84 1.50
S16SCM20
AWG 24 0.25 max 32 N
SM/SC 20ML1TK6* 22/20
AWG 22 0.32 min 40 N
1.02 1.54
AWG 20 0.50 max 60 N
SM/SC
16ML11TK6*
18 AWG 18 0.82 min 90 N 1.32 2.09
S16SCML11
16 AWG 16 1.50 max 150 N 1.36 2.10
SM/SC 16ML1TK6*
18 AWG 18 0.82 min 90 N 1.49 2.02
16 AWG 16 1.50 max 150 N 1.7 2.05 S16SCML1
SM/SC14ML1TK6* 14 AWG 14 2.50 max 230 N 1.79 2.58
(1): example of plating, for other plating see page 143
W W
H
H
Machined
contact
Stamped & Formed
contact
UTS Series
Technical information
Crimping
Technical information
158 © 2011 – SOURIAU
• Strip wires, crimp or solder contacts
• Insert contacts into connector cavities (insert manually or use tool RTM205 crimp contacts only)
• Place receptacle in the panel cut-out, with optional gasket
• Secure receptacle with screws (not supplied)
Gasket (optional) Gasket (optional)
Front mounting : Crimp version Rear mounting : Crimp version
Optional
coding ring
Optional
coding ring
Panel thickness:
2.5mm max
Panel
Receptacle fl ange Receptacle fl ange
3mm max 3mm max
Pa
Gasket (optional) Optional
coding ring
Optional
coding ring
Front mounting : Solder version Rear mounting : Solder version
Gasket (optional)
UTS Series
Technical information
UTS 0 assembly (mounting suggestion)
© 2011 – SOURIAU 159
Shell size
Nut tightening
torque (Nm)
Ø Wire
10 1 from
1.7 mm to
3.0 mm
12 1.5
14 1.5
Nut
Grommet
+ Compression ring
Optional
coding ring
• Slide accessories on the cable (make sure to keep compression ring on the grommet)
• Strip wires and crimp contacts
• Insert fi rst contact into the grommet (fi rst contact in cavity A, use male contact to
pierce the grommet, no tool is required), then insert the contact in the connector
cavity A (insert manually or use tool RTM205)
• Place the grommet and compression ring on the insulator
• Insert the other contacts
• Tighten nut (recommended torque: see note)
Shell size
Jam nut
torque
(Nm)
Tool
tightening
Ø Wire
Standard
version
Discrete
wire
sealing
8 1.5 19.05
3.2 mm
max.
from
1.7 mm
to
3.0 mm
10 3 22.25
12 4 27.15
14 5 30.19
18 5 36.5
• Strip wires, crimp or solder contacts
• Insert contacts into connector cavities (insert
manually or use tool RTM205 crimp contacts only)
• Seat o-ring, place receptacle in the panel cut-out
• Tighten jam nut
O-ring
O-ring
Jam nut
Jam nut
Panel thickness:
3.2mm max
Panel thickness:
3.2mm max
Optional
coding ring
Optional
coding ring
Crimp version
Solder version
Finally
UTS Series
Technical information
UTS 7 assembly (mounting suggestion)
UTS 6 GN / UTS 7 GN assembly
Technical information
160 © 2011 – SOURIAU
• Slide accessories on the cable
• Strip external cable jacket
• Strip wires and crimp contacts
• Insert contacts into connector
cavities (insert manually or use tool
RTM205)
• Tight adapter with plug, choose right
seal (waste the other seal), tight nut
with adapter (recommended torque
values to be applied according to
the table - right)
• Caution: only one of both delivered
gasket should be used !
Shell
size
Recommended
jacket strip
length (mm)
Adapter
tightening
torque
(Nm)
Nut
tightening
torque
(Nm)
Ø Cable
range
Standard
seal
Ø Cable
range
Reducing
seal
Ø Wire
Male Female
10 21 29 1.5 2 2.5/8.0 1.5/5.0
3.2 mm
max.
12 25 33 2 2.5 5.0/12.0 3.0/9.0
14 29 36 3 2.5 7.0/14.0 5.0/12.0
18 37 45 4 3.5 9.0/18.0 7.0/16.0
Coding ring
Nut
Adapter + mounted gasket
Make sure the seal is positioned as shown.
• Slide accessories on the cable
• Strip external cable jacket
• Strip wires and solder contacts
• Tight adapter with plug, choose right
seal (waste the other seal), tight nut
with adapter (recommended torque
values to be applied according to
the table - right)
• Caution: only one of both delivered
gasket should be used !
Shell
size
Recommended
jacket strip
length (mm)
Adapter
tightening
torque
(Nm)
Nut
tightening
torque
(Nm)
Ø Cable
range
Standard
seal
Ø Cable
range
Reducing
seal
Ø Wire
Male
8 17 1 0.75 2.5/6.5 1.5/5.0
3.2 mm
max.
10 21 1.5 2 2.5/8.0 1.5/5.0
12 25 2 2.5 5.0/12.0 3.0/9.0
14 29 3 2.5 7.0/14.0 5.0/12.0
Make sure the seal is positioned as shown.
Assembly instruction
Coding ring
Nut
Adapter + mounted gasket
UTS Series
Technical information
UTS 1 JC / UTS 6 JC assembly: Crimp version
UTS 6 JC assembly: Solder version
© 2011 – SOURIAU 161
Shell size
UTS0
+ UTS6 EN JC & CJC
UTS0
+ UTS6 EN GN
UTS7
+ UTS6 EN JC & CJC
UTS7
+ UTS6 EN GN
A max B max C max D max
8 61.1 - 66.6 -
10 73.2 39.6 77.3 43.7
12 77.6 39.4 81.7 43.5
14 83.5 40 87.6 44.1
18 93.1 - 97.2 -
UTS0 + UTS6
A
B
UTS7 + UTS6
C
D
• Slide accessories on the cable (make sure to keep
compression ring on the grommet)
• Strip external cable jacket
• Strip wires and crimp contacts
• Insert fi rst contact into the grommet (fi rst contact
in cavity A, the contact pierces the grommet, no
tool is required), then insert the contact in the
connector cavity A (insert manually or use tool
RTM205)
• Place the grommet and compression
ring on the insulator
• Insert the other contacts
• Tight adapter with plug, choose right
seal (waste the other seal), tight nut
with adapter (recommended torque
values to be applied according to
the table - right).
Nut
Adapter + mounted gasket
Grommet + Compression ring
Optional coding ring
Shell
size
Recommended
jacket strip
length (mm)
Adapter
tightening
torque
(Nm)
Nut
tightening
torque
(Nm)
Ø Cable
range
Standard
seal
Ø Cable
range
Reducing
seal
Ø Wire
Male Female
10 21 29 1.5 2 2.5/8.0 1.5/5.0 from
1.7 mm
to
3.0 mm
12 25 33 2 2.5 5.0/12.0 3.0/9.0
14 29 36 3 2.5 7.0/14.0 5.0/12.0
UTS Series
Technical information
UTS 1 GJC / UTS 6 GJC assembly
Mated connector length
Note: all dimensions are in mm
Technical information
162 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Extraction:
Place the tool into the cavity from
front face of the connector, push
on the handle, then remove the
contact..
Special case with the tool RX2025GE1:
A - When setting up in the cell, keep fi rmly
the tool by the hexagonal metallic part and
insert tool in cavity.
B - Push the tool by the handle to extract
the contact.
UTS Series
Technical information
51060210924
51060210936
RX2025GE1
Contact size Extractor
#20 RX20D44
#16 RX2025GE1
#12 51060210924
#8 51060210936
L
L1
Shell
size
UTS0 UTS7
L max L1 max L2 max L3 max L max L1 max L2 max L3 max
8 42.8 36.8 80.7 57.2 46.8 36.8 85.8 57.2
10 55.8 50.3 98.6 92 60.5 50.3 102.7 92
12 57.1 51.4 99.3 93.7 61.4 51.4 106.4 93.7
14 62.5 56.3 100.3 94.6 67.6 56.3 104.8 94.6
L2
L3
Dimensions overmoulded harnesses
Extraction tools
Extraction tools instruction for size 16
RX20D44
© 2011 – SOURIAU 163
Rated current & working voltage
The current carrying capacity of a connector is limited by the thermal properties of materials used in it's construction. The amount of current
that can be handled depends on the size of cable used, the ambient temperature and the heat that is generated inside the connector. Part 3
of the IEC 60512 standard determines through a derating curve, the maximum current permissible, which varies from one layout to another
(Fig.1 & Fig.2). Wire size plays an important role as well, since they help to dissipate heat and avoid overheating (Fig.1 & Fig.3).
Please note that the curve should be adjusted when dealing with potential hot spots, which can occur as a result of unequal loading of current
across a number of contacts. As a general rule, it is best to avoid locating power handling contacts in the middle of the connector; try to locate
them towards the edge where heat can be dissipated more effectively. Eventually you should fi nd a level which represents the permissible
operating range:
The rated current is defi ned as uninterrupted continuous current that a connector can take when all contacts are energized simultaneously
without exceeding the maximum limit of temperature. The earth contact is never loaded.
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
3
5
8
10
13
15
18
20
23
25
28
30
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
Fig.1: UTS 12-4 – 1.5mm² wires
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
3
5
8
10
13
15
18
20
23
25
28
30
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
Fig.2: UTS 12-8 – 1.5mm² wires
Current use
Limited use
Not recommended use
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0
3
5
8
10
13
15
18
20
23
25
28
30
Current (A)
Ambient Operating Temperature (°C)
Fig.3: UTS 12-4 – 2.5mm² wires
33
35
UTS Series
Technical information
Current carrying capacity
Technical information
164 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Solar radiation affects all materials, but plastics can be
susceptible to extreme degradation over time.
The choice of materials for the UTS series was therefore
a critical consideration.
All over the world we are not exposed to the same
amount of energy given by the sun. The chart shown
here clearly illustrates this.
So we performed test according to the ISO 4892-2 and
simulated 5 years exposure to outdoor environments
(temperature, humidity, etc...)
After this period there was no signifi cant colour variation,
no crazing, no cracking and no major variation of
mechanical properties.
Yearly mean of daily irradiation in UV (280-400 nm)
on horizontal plane (J/cm²) (1990-2004)
90°
60°
30°
0°
- 30°
- 90°
- 60°
- 180° - 150° - 120° - 90° - 60° - 30° 0° 30° 60° 90° 120° 150° 180°
J/cm²
0
10
20
30
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
150
160
170
180
190
40
140
UTS Series
Technical information
UV resistance
© 2011 – SOURIAU 165
There are two main standards for industrial connectors: UL94 & UL1977
UL94
This standard is dedicated to plastics fl ammability. It characterises how the material burns in various orientation and thicknesses.
The UTS series has been rated at V-0 & HB.
Procedure: A specimen is supported in a vertical or horizontal position and a fl ame is applied to the bottom of the specimen. The fl ame is
applied for ten seconds and then removed until fl aming stops, at which time the fl ame is reapplied for another ten seconds and then removed.
Two sets of fi ve specimens are tested. The two sets are conditioned under different conditions.
V-0 Vertical burning:
• Specimens must not burn with fl aming combustion for more
than 10 seconds after either test fl ame application.
• Total fl aming combustion time must not exceed 50 seconds
for each set of 5 specimens.
• Specimens must not burn with fl aming or glowing combustion
up to the specimen holding clamp.
• Specimens must not drip fl aming particles that ignite the
cotton.
• No specimen can have glowing combustion remain for longer
than 30 seconds after removal of the test fl ame.
~~
5’’
12’’
45°
Cotton
Material
Underwriter Laboratories
HB Horizontal burning:
• A material classed HB shall not have a burning rate exceeding
40 mm per minute over a 75 mm span for specimens having
a thickness of 3.0 to 13 mm.
• A material classed HB shall not have a burning rate exceeding
75 mm per minute over a 75 mm span for specimens having
a thickness less than 3.0 mm.
• A material classed HB shall cease to burn before the 100 mm
reference mark.
45°
45°
Material
100±1mm
25±1mm
10±1mm
Wire gauze
Wire gauze
UTS Series
Technical information
Technical information
166 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Underwriter Laboratories
UL1977
There are several standards which deal with plug and receptacle. Each of them is only for a small area of applications. It could be
telecommunication, Etc. The UL 1977 covers single and multipole connectors intended for factory assembly.
Requirements apply to devices in taking into account intensity and voltage. There a categories as follows:
Type 0 Type 1A
Tybe 1B
Type 2
Type 3
Type 4
0
0
8.3 A
31 A
200 A
1000 A
600 V
30 V
(42 V peak)
According to above table, the level of performance that has to be reached could be different. Most of them are explained in the following page.
Assembly:
Connector has to be keyed to prevent any mismating that can damage the machine or hurt the user. In the same way, plugs and sockets have
to be equipped to protect persons against contact with live parts.
Finally the identifi ed grounding contact shall be located so that the corresponding electrical continuity has to be completed before any other
contact.
Insulating materials:
Material uses for electrical insulation, as a minimum, have to comply with the characteristics shown below:
• Minimum ratings for polymeric materials
Type Flame rating
Relative thermal index (RTI)
Electrical/mechanical w/o impact */**
0 - 50/50
1A HB 50/50
1B HB 50/50
2 HB 50/50
3 HB 50/50
4 HB 50/50
* The RTI of the material shall not be lower than the temperature measured during
the Temperature Test.
** For a thickness less than that for which a value has been established, the RTI of
the minimum thickness with an established value shall be used.
UTS Series
Technical information
© 2011 – SOURIAU 167
Underwriter Laboratories
UL1977
Spacing:
For a 250V max connector, distance through air or over material shall be 1.2mm whereas from 250V to 600V connector the spacing is 3.2
minimum. These distances have to be taken between uninsulated live parts as shown in the matrix below:
An alternative way to determine voltage rating is with the Dielectric-Withstand test. If during one minute there is no arc-over or breakdown
the rated voltage is given as given below:
a) 500 volts for a type 1B device
b) 1000 volts plus twice rated voltage for types 1A, 2, 3 and 4 devices.
• Applicability of spacing requirements
Type
Uninsulated live part - uninsulated
live part of opposite polarity
Uninsulated live part - uninsulated
grounded metal part
Uninsulated live part - exposed
dead metal part
0 No No No
1A Yes Yes Yes
1B Yes Yes No
2 Yes Yes Yes
3 Yes Yes Yes
4 Yes Yes Yes
Marking:
A device shall be legibly marked with the manufacturer's trade name, trade mark, or other descriptive marking by which the organisation
responsible for the product may be identifi ed. (Exception: If the device is too small, or where the legibility would be diffi cult to attain, the
manufacturer’s name, trademark, or other descriptive marking may appear on the smallest unit container or carton)
The following shall be marked on the device or on the smallest unit container or carton or on a stuffer sheet in the smallest unit container or
carton:
a) The catalogue number or an equivalent designation
b) The electrical rating in both volts and amperes, if assigned
c) Whether ac or dc, if restricted
d) Flammability class, if identifi ed
Example - Marking for the arrangement 10-3: 10A 500V UL94 V-0
UTS Series
Technical information
Technical information
168 © 2011 – SOURIAU
The norm is dedicated to connectors with rated voltage above 50V and up to 1000V and rated currents up to 125A per contact. But
depending of your application connectors should be compliant with another standard. This has to be double checked with the customer.
There are lot of constructional requirements and performances specifi ed in that standard. Most of them are illustrated in greater details
hereafter.
Provisions for earthing:
The UTS connector is intended to be used on Class II systems. Even if the purpose of our connector is not to interrupt current, we often
see a need to add a protective earth contact. Then this one shall be a “First mate, last break” style. Critically, among all of the normal
assumptions we make in designing a connector, this contact has to be considered as a live part and must be protected against electric shock
by double or reinforced insulation.
IP Code:
IP is a coding system defi ned by the IEC 60529 to indicate the
degrees of protection provided by an enclosure. The aim of this is to
give information regarding the accessibility of live parts against ingress
of water and other foreign bodies.
1st digit Degree of protection 2nd digit Degree of protection
0 No protection against accidental contact.
No protection against solid foreign bodies.
0 No protection against water.
1 Protection against contacts with any large area by hand and
against large solid foreign bodies with a diameter bigger than 50
mm.
1 Drip-proof.
Protection against vertical water drips.
2 Protection against contacts with the fi ngers.
Protection against solid foreign bodies with a diameter bigger
than 12 mm.
2 Drip-proof.
Protection against water drips up to a 15° angle.
3 Protection against tools, wires or similar objects with a diameter
bigger than 2.5 mm.
Protection against small solid bodies with a diameter bigger than
2.5 mm.
3 Spray-proof.
Protection against diagonal water drips up to a 60° angle.
4 As 3 however diameter is bigger than 1 mm. 4 Splash-proof.
Protection against splashed water from all directions.
5 Full protection against contacts. Protection against interior injurious
dust deposits.
5 Hose-proof.
Protection against water (out of a nozzle) from all directions.
6 Total protection against contacts.
Protection against penetration of dust.
6 Protection against temporary fl ooding.
7 Protection against temporary immersions.
8 Protection against water pressure.
Pressure to be specifi ed by supplier.
9K High pressure hose-proof.
Protection against high pressure water (out of a nozzle) from all
directions.
IP 6 8
First digit
(foreign bodies
protection)
Second digit
(water
protection)
Code letters
(international
Protection)
UTS offers high sealing
performance IP68 / 69K…
Even in dynamic situations.
In addition to the IEC 60529 we conjointly use the DIN 40050 part 9
which are dedicated to road vehicles. The main differences are:
• First digit: 5 replaced by 5K, 6 by 6K. In the DIN the tested
equipment is not depressurized as it is in the IEC.
• Second digit: 5K and 6K has been added and are equivalent
respectively to 5 and 6 but with higher pressure.
9K which represents the High pressure cleaning.
IEC 61984 ed.2.0 “Copyright © 2008 IEC Geneva, Switzerland.www.iec.ch"
IEC 60664-1 ed.2.0 “Copyright © 2007 IEC Geneva, Switzerland.www.iec.ch”
UTS Series
Technical information
IEC 61984
© 2011 – SOURIAU 169
Overvoltage
UTS connectors are qualifi ed to be used on systems rated at Overvoltage category III
Per the IEC 60664-1 (formely VDE 0110) each category is linked to the end application and where the device will be implemented:
• Category IV (primary overcurrent protection equipment):
Origin of the installation
• Category III (Any fi xed installation with a permanent connection)
Fixed installation and equipment and for cases where the reliability and the availability is subject to special requirements
• Category II (Domestic applicances):
Energy consuming equipment to be supplied from the fi xed installation
• Category I (Protected electronic circuit):
For connection to circuit in which measures are taken to limit transient overvoltage.
Pollution degree
Per the IEC 60664-1 (formerly VDE 0110) the environment affects the performance of the insulation. Particles can build a bridge between
two metal parts. As a rule dust mixed with water can be conductive and more generally speaking metal dust is conductive. Finally, the
standard defi nes 4 levels of pollution:
• Degree 1 (Air conditioned dry room):
No pollution or only dry, non conductive pollution occurs. The pollution has no infl uence.
• Degree 2 (Personal computer in a residential area):
Only non conductive pollution occurs except that occasionally a temporary conductivity caused by condensation is to be
expected.
• Degree 3 (Machine tools):
Conductive pollution occurs or dry non-conductive pollution occurs which becomes conductive due to condensation which is to
be expected.
• Degree 4 (Equipments on roof, locomotives):
Continuous conductivity occurs due to conductive dust, rain or other wet conditions.
Finally, the harsher the environment is, the longer clearance and creepage distances should be. Nonetheless, according the IEC 61984,
enclosure rated at IP54 or higher can be dimensioned for a lower pollution degree. This applies to mated connectors disengaged for test
and maintenance.
Marking
The marking should give enough details to the user to know what the main characteristics are and without going deep in technical
documentation. Below examples identify the suitability of the connector:
• Example 1:
Marking of a connector with rated current 16A, rated voltage 400V, rated impulse voltage 6kV and pollution degree 3, 2 and 1 for
use in any system, preferably unearthed or delta-earthed systems:
16A 400V 6kV 3
• Example 2:
Marking of a connector with rated current 16A, rated insulation voltages line-to-earth 250V, line-to-line 400V, rated impulse
voltage 4kV and pollution degree 3, 2 and 1 for use in earthed systems:
1166AA 225500VV 440000VV 44kkVV 33
16A 400V 6kV 3
UTS Series
Technical information
IEC 61984
Technical information
170 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Enclosure
rating
IP20 IP22 IP55 IP64 IP65 IP66 IP67
Type 1 •
Type 3 •
Type 3R •
Type 3S •
Type 4 •
Type 4X •
Type 6 •
Type 12 •
Type 13 •
• indicates compliance
6 IP67 Enclosures constructed for either indoor or outdoor use to provide a degree of protection
to personnel against incidental contact with the enclosed equipment, falling dirt, hosedirected
water, the entry of water during occasional temporary submersion at a limited depth
and damage from external ice formation.
6P IP67 Enclosures constructed for either indoor or outdoor use to provide a degree of protection to
personnel against incidental contact with the enclosed equipment, falling dirt, hose-directed
water, the entry of water during prolonged submersion at a limited depth and damage from
external ice formation.
Type 6 rating can be either Type 6 or Type 6P - please see below:
• NEMA ratings vs IP ratings
Whereas IP ratings only consider protection against ingress of foreign bodies - first digit - and ingress of water
(second digit), NEMA ratings consider these but also verify protection from external ice, corrosive materials, oil
immersion, etc.
The correlation between NEMA & IP being limited only to dust and water, we can state that a NEMA type is
equivalent to an IP rating but it is not possible to say the contrary.
Below a list of some NEMA standards:
UTS Series
Technical information
What is NEMA rating ?
© 2011 – SOURIAU 171
Ethernet Basics
Ethernet is a widely used communications protocol that is used to transmit data packets (datagrams) between network devices. Imagine a
highway in a large metropolitan area six lanes wide at rush hour. The vehicles on the highway need rules to follow so that they get to their
destination without crashing into each other. In an Ethernet network link, there could be 100 million bits of information transmitted in one
second. In the Ethernet standard, there exist rules to govern packet structure, transmission requirements, error correction, communication
with end equipment, etc.
Examining the differences between 100Mhz, 100 Base TX, Cat5e; what does it all mean?
When discussing connectors and Ethernet, there are a few key details to be aware of:
• 100Mhz is a measurement of Frequency for the signal
- Comparable to the Speed Limit of a highway
• 100BaseTX (or Fast Ethernet) is an Ethernet link standard and identifi es available link bandwidth The bandwidth is measured in units of
MBits/S (megabits per second)
- Comparable to the number of cars that pass a point in one second
• Cat5e is an EIA/TIA standard for performance and physical characteristics for cables and connectors
- Comparable to performance specifi cations of the car and highway
In connectors and cables, Fast Ethernet uses 2 pairs, one for transmit, one for receive. This, way data traffi c can fl ow in both directions
simultaneously.
In order to explain basic Ethernet theory, we can use a functional comparison to a busy city with highways, buildings, and cars. To illustrate
this, the table below provides correlation between the different components/pieces/links that encompass Ethernet network connectivity, and
the larger scale infrastructure of a metropolitan city.
• City: The network itself
• Buildings: End equipment, PC, server, etc.
• Roads: Ethernet cabling
• Cars: Data packets, datagrams, bits, bytes, etc.
• Tolls: Firewalls
• Bridges: Connectors
• Traffi c laws: Protocol/communication specifi cations
UTS Series
Technical information
Ethernet for the layman
Technical information
172 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Souriau offering:
UTS Hi seal size 8, 4 contacts
1 (Pair 1) ‹ A
2 (Pair 1) ‹ C
3 (Pair 2) ‹ B
4 (Pair 2) ‹ D
UTS size 10, 6 contacts
1 (Pair 1) ‹ A
2 (Pair 1) ‹ B
3 (Pair 2) ‹ E
4 (Pair 2) ‹ D
UTS size 12, 10 contacts
1 (Pair 1) ‹ C
2 (Pair 1) ‹ B
3 (Pair 2) ‹ G
4 (Pair 2) ‹ H
Standard solutions.
8E4/8D4
4 Ø 1 (#20)
106/10E6/10D6
6 Ø 1 (#20)
1210/12E10/12D10
10 Ø 1 (#20)
What about using coax contacts ?
Ethernet twisted pairs carry a symmetrical (balanced) signal. Once terminated into a coax contact, the inner core will be protected by a shield -
but not the outer contact. Because of EMI issues, the signal will no longer be balanced. Conclusion - it does not work and is not recommended.
Conclusion
To carry 100Mb/s data signal, 100BaseTX or Fast Ethernet recommends the use of Cat5e connectors as well as Cat5e cable with the support
of a 100MHz signal. Nevertheless, a 100Mb/s signal can be transmitted in certain conditions (short distance, only one connector, lower
frequency but a different code) thru many other connection materials - not necessarily Cat5e rated.
What about using Quadrax contacts ?
The Quadrax contact is used in railway applications because of the use of quad cable. In this specifi c market, the standard Ethernet twisted
pairs wires cannot be offered, they are too thin and often solid (not stranded).
In the rest of industry, UTP (Unshielded Twisted Pairs) cables are widely used. The Quadrax contact is not designed to terminate them. And
thus, are not advised for industrial applications.
Shielding continuity done in cavity C&F.
Note: Shielding can be replaced by
DC power.
UTS Series
Technical information
Ethernet for the layman
© 2011 – SOURIAU 173
UTS Series
Technical information
Technical information
UTS Series
© 2011 – SOURIAU 175
Appendices
UTS Series
#16 coaxial contacts - cabling notices ................................................................................... 176
Glossary of terms ........................................................................................................................... 183
Discrimination/Keying methods ................................................................................................ 184
Part number Index ......................................................................................................................... 185
176 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
Appendices
#16 coaxial contacts
Cable
type
Impedance
Contact
type
Ø over
jacket
Ø over
dielectric
Inner
cond
size
Ø outer braid Male contact
kit for coaxial
cable
Female contact
kit for coaxial
cable
inch mm inch mm
Ext. Ø
mm
inch mm
RG161/U 75
Multi
piece
0.09 2.29 0.057 1.45
RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28
RG179A/U 75 0.105 2.67 0.063 1.6 0.3 0.084 2.13 max
RG179B/U 75 0.105 2.67 0.063 1.6 0.3 0.084 2.13 max
RG187/U 75 0.11 2.79 max 0.06 1.52 0.3
RG188/U 50 0.11 2.79 max 0.06 1.52 0.51 0.078 1.98 max
RG174/U 50 0.11 2.92 0.06 1.52 0.48 0.088 2.24 max
AMPHENOL 21-598 50 0.105 2.67 0.06 1.52 0.48
RG196/U 50 0.08 2.03 max 0.034 0.086 0.3
RG178A/U 50 0.075 1.91 0.034 0.86 0.3 0.054 1.37 max
RG/188A/U 50
Mono
crimp
0.110 2.79 0.06 1.52 0.51 0.078 1.98 max RMDX6036D28 RCDX6036D28
KX21TVT (europe)
RG178 B/U
50 0.075 1.91 0.034 0.86 0.3 0.054 1.37 max RMDX6034D28 RCDX6034D28
RG178 / BU 50 0.075 1.91 0.034 0.86 0.3 0.054 1.37 max RMDX6050D28 RCDX6016D28
RG174/U 50 0.115 2.92 0.06 1.52 0.48 0.088 2.24 max RMDX6032D28 RCDX6032D28
RG188A/U 50 0.11 2.79 0.06 1.52 0.51 0.078 1.98 max RMDX6036D28 RCDX6036D28
RG316/U 50 0.107 2.72 0.6 1.52 0.51 0.078 2.05 max RMDX6036D28 RCDX6036D28
raychem 5024A3111 50 0.12 3.05 0.083 2.11 0.64 0.097 2.46 RMDX6052D28 RCDX6052D28
raychem 5026e1614 50 0.083 2.11 0.05 1.27 0.48 0.067 1.7 RMDX6036D28 RCDX6036D28
surprenant pn 8134 -
Multi
piece
0.1 2.54 0.058 1.47 0.3 RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28
PRD PN 247ASC1123-
001
-
Mono
crimp
0.103 2.62 0.06 1.52 0.51 0.078 1.98 RMDX6018D28 RCDX6018D28
PRD PN 247AS-C1251 - 0.092 2.34 0.05 1.27 0.64 0.067 1.7 RMDX6018D28 RCDX6018D28
JUDD C15013010902 - 0.087 2.13 0.05 1.27 0.48 0.066 1.67 RMDX6036D28 RCDX6036D28
CDC PIN22939200 - 0.09 2.29 0.048 1.22 0.3 0.064 1.63 RMDX6046D28 RCDX6016D28
CDC PIN22939200 - 0.09 2.29 0.048 1.22 0.3 0.064 1.63 RMDX6050D28 RCDX6016D28
CDC PIN245670000 - 0.104 2.64 0.067 1.7 0.3 0.083 2.11 RMDX6050D28 RCDX6016D28
ampex - 0.114 2.9 0.075 1.91 0.38 0.09 1.29 RMDX6032D28 RCDX6032D28
TI PN 920580 - 0.7 1.78 0.038 0.96 0.48 0.054 1.37 RMDX6024D28 RCDX6024D28
Honeywell PN
58000062
- 0.12 3.05 0.077 1.96
0.41
solid
0.096 2.44 RMDX6026D28 RCDX6026D28
- - 0.104 2.64 0.067 1.7 0.3 2.11 RMDX6050D28 -
- - 0.09 2.29 0.048 1.22 0.3 1.63 RMDX6050D28 -
- - 0.114 2.9 0.075 1.91 0.38 1.29 RMDX6032D28 RCDX6032D28
- - 0.07 1.78 0.038 0.96 0.48 1.37 RMDX6024D28 RCDX6024D28
- - 0.12 3.05 0.077 1.96 0.41 2.44 RMDX6026D28 RCDX6026D28
Coaxial cable - Contact monocrimp and multipiece
© 2011 – SOURIAU 177
UTS Series
Appendices
Cable
type
Contact
type
Inner
AWG
cond
Ø over
jacket
(single wire)
Inner cond size
Ø outer
braid Male
contact kit for
coaxial cable
Female
contact kit for
coaxial cable
inch mm
Stranded
defi nition
Ext. Ø
mm
inch mm
2#24 stranded mil w 16878 type B
Multi
piece
24 0.049
1.24
max
7/.008 - - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28
2 #24 solid mil-w-76 type LW 24 0.047
1.12
max
1/.0201 - - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28
2 #26 stranded mil w 76 type LW
or mil w16878 type b&e
26 0.043
1.09
max
7/.0063 0.16 - - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28
2 #28 solid mil-w-81822/3 28 0.028
0.71
max
- - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28
TWISTED PAIR 1/.201 SOLID MIL w
76 TYPE lw or MIL W 16878
26 0.044
1.12
max
1/.0201 0.511 - - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28
twisted pair solid mil w 81822/3 28 0.028
0.71
max
1/.0126 0.32 - - RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28
#28 7/.0036 per Hitachi spec
ec-711 (13-2820)
Mono
crimp
- 0.046 1.17 7/.0036 - - -
RMDX6031D28
+ YORX090
RCDX6031D28
+ YORX090
20218201 - 0.028 0.71 - - - -
RMDX6031D28
+ YORX090
RCDX6031D28
+ YORX090
#30 solid - 0.025 0.64 - - - -
RMDX6015D28
+ YORX090
RCDX6015D28
+ YORX090
#26 7/.0063 26 0.028 0.71 7/.063 0.16 - -
RMDX6031D28
+ YORX090
RCDX6031D28
+ YORX090
#26 19/.004 26 0.049 1.24 19/.004 - - -
RMDX6019D28
+ YORX090
RCDX6019D28
+ YORX090
#24 7/.008 24 0.049 1.24 7/.008 - - -
RMDX6019D28
+ YORX090
RCDX6019D28
+ YORX090
#24 19/.005 24 0.057 1.45 19/.005 - - -
RMDX6019D28
+ YORX090
RCDX6019D28
+ YORX090
- 26 - 1.25 - - - 19x0.1
RMDX6019D28
+ YORX090
RCDX6019D28
+ YORX090
- 24 - 1.25 - - - 7x0.2
RMDX6019D28
+ YORX090
RCDX6019D28
+ YORX090
- 24 - 1.45 - - - 19x0.13
RMDX6019D28
+ YORX090
RCDX6019D28
+ YORX090
- 26 - 0.7 - - - 7x0.16
RMDX6031D28
+ YORX090
RCDX6031D28
+ YORX090
Twisted cable - Contact monocrimp and multipiece
Appendices
178 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Twisted pair cable multipiece contact cabling
UTS Series
Appendices
#16 coaxial contacts
Cable
reference
Contact
type
Male
contact
Female
contact
Crimp
tool
Die
set
Stop
bushing
Cable strip
length
Inner conductor
crimp
Braid crimp
A B C g dim t dim g dim t dim
2#24 stranded mil
w 16878 type B
Multi
piece RMDXK10D28 RCDXK1D28 M10S1J - - See assembly notice
2 #24 solid mil-w-76
type LW
2 #26 stranded
mil w 76 type LW or
mil w16878 type B & E
2 #28 solid
mil-w-81822/3
twisted pair 1/.201
solid mil w 76 type LW
or mil w 16878
twisted pair solid mil w
81822/3
Male contact
Outer male contact
RMDX60-2
Inner socket
RFD26L-1
Outer hyring
YOC074
Inner supporting
sleeve
RMDXB-055-3
Twisted pair adapter
YORK-090
Conductor "Y"
Conductor "Z"
Strip lengths
of cable
7.95±0.41
15.54±0.41
7.95±0.41
Inner supporting Outer hyring
sleeve
Twisted pair adapter
Locking louver typical
Grounding louver typical
Step 1: Step 2: Step 3:
7.54
0.25±0.05
5.94±0.41
7.54±0.41
15.54±0.41
7.95±0.41
When using solid wire fl atten
conductor "X" and "Z" using
N24FL-1 die as shown
Female contact
Step 1: Step 2: Step 3:
Outer hyring
Supporting
sleeve
Twisted pair adapter
Conductor "W"
Conductor "X"
Strip lengths
of cable
6.35±0.41
13.49±0.41
7.95±0.41
Outer female contact
RCDX60-2
Inner pin
RMD26L-1
Outer hyring
YOC074
Inner supporting
sleeve
RCDXB-055-1
Twisted pair adapter
YORK-090
Note : all dimensions are in mm
© 2011 – SOURIAU 179
Twisted pair cable monocrimp contact cabling
UTS Series
Appendices
Cable reference
Contact
type
Male
contact
Female
contact
Crimp
tool
Die
set
Stop
bushing
Cable strip
length
Inner conductor
crimp
Braid crimp
A B C g dim t dim g dim t dim
#28 7/.0036 per Hitachi
spec ec-711 (13-2820)
Mono
crimp
RMDX6031D28
+ YORX090
RCDX6031D28
+ YORX090
M10S1J
S80 SL105 4.7 6.1 4.32
1.30 to
1.12
1.4 to 1.22
2.97 to
2.84
3.07 to 2.9
20218204 S80 SL105 3.94 6.1 3.16
1.30 to
1.17
1.4 to 1.22
2.97 to
2.84
3.07 to
2.79
#30 solid S83 SL105 4.7 6.1 4.06
1.22 to
1.12
1.35 to
1.22
2.97 to
2.84
3.12 to
2.95
#26 7/.0063 S80 SL105 4.7 6.1 4.06
1.30 to
1.17
1.4 to 1.22
2.97 to
2.84
3.07 to 2.9
#26 19/.004
M10SG8 ASSY'Y
TOOL DIE SET
STOP BUSHING
M10S1J TOOL
4.7 6.1 4.06
1.22 to
1.17
1.35 to
1.22
2.84 to
2.79
3.12 to
2.97
#24 7/.008 4.7 6.1 4.06
1.22 to
1.17
1.35 to
1.22
2.84 to
2.79
3.12 to
2.97
#24 19/.005 4.7 6.1 4.06
1.22 to
1.17
1.35 to
1.22
2.84 to
2.79
3.12 to
2.97
AWG26 (19x0.1)
M10SG8
crimping kit 4.7 6 4
AWG24 (7x0.2)
AWG24 (19x0.13)
AWG26 (7x0.16) S80 SL150
G
G
Braid crimp (G) to be measured
with die set fully closed
Inner conductor crimp (G) to be
measured with die set fully closed
RCDX60
Female coax contact
RMDX60
Male coax contact
See cable strip lengths
Cable strip length
A
B C
16 min.
• Select appropriate monocrimp coax twisted pair contact and cable combination.
• Select appropriate crimp tooling (hand tool, S-die set, stop bushing).
• Strip the twisted pair cable to the designated wire strip lengths.
• Insert the stripped cable into the contact. One cable is to be inserted into the
inside diameter of hyring, and pushed forwaerd into the inner contact. The
second cable is to be inserted between the outside diameter of hyring and the
inside diameter of the outer contact body.
• Crimp the contact.
Note : all dimensions are in mm
Appendices
180 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Multipiece male contact with coax cable
UTS Series
Appendices
Multipiece kit details
RMDXK10D28
includes
RMDX602D28 Outer contact
RFD26L1D28 Inner contact
YOC074 Outer hyring
RMDXB0553 Inner supporting
sleeve
Cable stip length
A
B
C
Dielectric
diameter
Contact assembly with dielectric diameter over 1.4mm - without inner supporting sleeve
Outer male contact
RMDX60-2 Inner socket
RFD26L-1
Outer hyring
YOC074
Strip lengths
of cable
15.88±0.41
4.37±0.41
7.95±0.41
Step 1:
- Assemble outer hyring onto cable
- Assemble inner socket to inner conductor and crimp
Step 2:
- Insert the assembly into the outer male contact
until the inner socket snaps into place
- The cable braid (shield) should now cover the
barrel of the outer male contact as shown
Step 3:
- Slide outer hyring forward against spring and
crimp in place as shown
Locking louver typical
Grounding louver typical
Contact assembly with dielectric diameter under 1.4mm - with inner supporting sleeve
Outer male contact
RMDX60-2 Inner socket
RFD26L-1
Outer hyring
YOC074 Strip lengths
of cable
17.53±0.41
7.54±0.41
Inner supporting 9.12±0.41
sleeve
RMDXB-055-3
Step 1:
- Assemble outer hyring onto cable
- Assemble supporting sleeve over dielectric and under braid
- Assemble inner socket to inner conductor, push back against
sleeve and crimp
Supporting
sleeve Outer hyring
Step 2:
- Insert the assembly into the outer male contact
until the inner socket snaps into place
- The cable braid (shield) should now cover the
barrel of the outer male contact as shown
Step 3:
- Slide outer hyring forward against spring and
crimp in place as shown
Locking louver typical
Grounding louver typical
Note : all dimensions are in mm
#16 coaxial contacts
Cable
reference
Contact
Hyring
complementary
compoments
Outer contact crimp tool Inner contact crimp tool
Crimp tool M10S1J Crimp tool M10S1J Cable strip length
Die set Stop bushing Die set Stop bushing
A B C
RG161U
Male:
RMDXK10D28
YOC074
S221 SL471
S23D2
SL46D2
4.37 7.95 15.88
RG179 4.37 7.95 15.88
RG187U 4.37 7.95 15.88
RG188/U
S26D2
4.37 7.95 15.88
RG174/U 4.37 7.95 15.88
RG178A/U YOC074 +
RMDXB0553 S23D2
7.54 9.12 17.53
RG196U 7.54 9.12 17.53
AMPHENOL
21-598
YOC074
- 4.37 7.95 15.88
surprenant
pn 8134 - 4.37 7.95 15.88
© 2011 – SOURIAU 181
Multipiece female contact with coax cable
UTS Series
Appendices
Contact assembly with dielectric diameter over 1.4mm - without inner supporting sleeve
Outer female contact
RCDX60-2
Inner pin
RMD26L-1
Outer hyring
YOC074 Strip lengths
of cable
11.13±0.41
4.37±0.41
Step 1:
- Assemble outer hyring onto cable
- Assemble inner pin to inner conductor and crimp
Step 2:
- Insert the assembly into the outer female contact
until the inner pin snaps into place
- The cable braid (shield) should now cover the
barrel of the outer female contact as shown
Step 3:
- Slide outer hyring forward against spring and
crimp in place as shown
Contact assembly with dielectric diameter under 1.4mm - with inner supporting sleeve
Outer female contact
RCDX60-2028
Inner pin
RMD26L-1
Outer hyring
YOC074
Strip lengths
of cable
11.13±0.41
6.35±0.41
Supporting sleeve
RCDXB-055-1
Supporting
Outer hyring sleeve
Step 1:
- Assemble outer hyring onto cable
- Assemble supporting sleeve over dielectric and under braid
- Assemble inner pin to inner conductor, push back against
sleeve and crimp
Step 2:
- Insert the assembly into the outer female contact
until the inner pin snaps into place
- The cable braid (shield) should now cover the
barrel of the outer female contact as shown
Step 3:
- Slide outer hyring forward against spring and
crimp in place as shown
RCDXK1D28
includes
RCDX602D28 Outer contact
RMD26L1D28 Inner contact
YOC074 Outer hyring
RCDXB0553 Inner supporting
sleeve
Multipiece kit details Cable stip length
A
B
C
Dielectric
diameter
Cable
reference
Contact
Hyring
complementary
compoments
Outer contact crimp tool Inner contact crimp tool
Crimp tool M10S1J Crimp tool M10S1J Cable strip length
Die set Stop bushing Die set Stop bushing
A B C
RG161U
Female:
RCDXK1D28
YOC074
S221 SL471
S23D2
SL46D2
4.37
-
11.13
RG179 4.37 11.13
RG187U 4.37 11.13
RG188/U
S26D2
4.37 11.13
RG174/U 4.37 11.13
RG178A/U YOC074 +
RMDXB0553 S23D2
6.35 11.13
RG196U 6.35 11.13
AMPHENOL
21-598
YOC074
- 4.37 11.13
surprenant
pn 8134 - 4.37 11.13
Note : all dimensions are in mm
Appendices
182 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Coax cable with monocrimp contact cabling
UTS Series
Appendices
RCDX60
Female coax contact
RMDX60
Male coax contact
See cable strip lengths
Cable strip length
A
B
C
• Select appropriate cable and contact combination.
• Select appropriate crimp tooling (hand tool, S-die set, stop bushing).
• Strip coax cable to the designated wire strip lengths.
• Insert the stripped coax into the rear of the contact.
• Crimp the contact.
#16 coaxial contacts
Cable
reference
Male
contact
Female
contact
Crimp
tool
Die
set
Stop
bushing
Cable strip length
Inner conductor
crimp
Braid crimp
A B C g dim t dim g dim t dim
CDC PIN22939200 RMDX6046D28 RCDX6016D28
M10S1J
S80 SL105 4.19 5.97 8.51 1.30/1.17 1.40/1.22 2.77/2.64 3.02/2.84
CDC PIN22939200 RMDX6046D28 RCDX6016D28 S87 SL105 5.08 6.35 8.89 1.30/1.17 1.40/1.22 2.77/2.64 3.02/2.84
CDC PIN245670000 RMDX6050D28 RCDX6016D28 S80 SL105 5.08 6.35 8.89 1.30/1.17 1.40/1.22 2.97/2.84 3.12/2.95
KX21TVT (europe)
RG178 B/U
RMDX6034D28 RCDX6034D28 S82 SL105 5.08 6.35 8.89 1.30/1.17 1.32/1.17 2.84/2.74 3.07/2.9
RG178 / BU RMDX6050D28 RCDX6016D28 S87 SL105 5.08 6.35 8.89 1.30/1.17 1.40/1.22 2.77/2.64 3.02/2.84
ampex RMDX6032D28 RCDX6032D28 S80 SL105 5.08 6.35 11.68 1.30/1.17 1.40/1.22 2.97/2.84 3.12/2.95
TI PN 920580 RMDX6024D28 RCDX6024D28 S82 SL105 5.08 6.35 8.89 1.35/1.19 1.42/1.27 2.87/2.74 3.07/2.9
RG174/U RMDX6032D28 RCDX6032D28 S80 SL105 5.08 6.35 11.68 1.30/1.17 1.40/1.22 2.97/2.84 3.12/2.95
Honeywell PN 58000062 RMDX6026D28 RCDX6026D28 S82 SL105 5.08 6.35 8.89 1.35/1.19 1.42/1.27 2.87/2.74 3.07/2.9
RG188A/U RMDX6036D28 RCDX6036D28 S80 SL105 5.08 6.35 11.68 1.30/1.17 1.40/1.22 2.97/2.84 3.12/2.95
RG316/U RMDX6036D28 RCDX6036D28 S80 SL105 5.08 6.35 11.68 1.30/1.17 1.40/1.22 2.97/2.84 3.12/2.95
PRD PN
247AS-C1123-001
RMDX6018D28 RCDX6018D28 M10SG8 ASSY'Y
TOOL DIE SET
STOP BUSHING
M10S1J TOOL
5.08 6.35 8.89 1.22/1.17 1.35/1.22 2.92/2.79 3.12/2.97
PRD PN 247AS-C1251 RMDX6018D28 RCDX6018D28 5.08 6.35 8.89 1.22/1.17 1.35/1.22 2.92/2.79 3.12/2.97
raychem 5024A3111 RMDX6052D28 RCDX6052D28 S88 SL105 5.08 6.35 11.68 1.37/1.27 1.45/1.32 2.92/2.79
raychem 5026e1614 RMDX6036D28 RCDX6036D28 M10SG8 ASSY'Y
TOOL DIE SET
STOP BUSHING
M10S1J TOOL
5.08 6.35 8.89 1.22/1.17 1.35/1.22 2.92/2.79 3.12/2.97
JUDD C15013010902 RMDX6036D28 RCDX6036D28 5.08 6.35 8.89 1.22/1.17 1.35/1.22 2.92/2.79 3.12/2.97
inner cond. #30,
braid diam 2.64
RMDX6050D28 - S80 SL105 5.1 6.35 8.9 - - - -
inner cond. #30,
braid diam 2.29
RMDX6050D28 - S87 SL105 4.2 6.35 8.5 - - - -
inner cond. #28,
braid diam 2.9
RMDX6032D28 RCDX6032D28 S80 SL105 5.1 6.35 11.7 - - - -
inner cond. #26,
braid diam 1.78
RMDX6024D28 RCDX6024D28 S82 SL105 5.1 6.35 8.9 - - - -
inner cond. #26,
braid diam 3.05
RMDX6026D28 RCDX6026D28 S82 SL105 5.1 6.35 8.9 - - - -
Note : all dimensions are in mm
© 2011 – SOURIAU 183
Glossary of terms
UTS Series
Appendices
• Clearance
Per the IEC 60664-1 it is the shortest
distance between two conductive parts
even over the air.
• Creepage distance
Per the IEC 60664-1 it represents the
shortest distance along the surface
of the insulating material between two
conductive parts.
• Working voltage
Per the IEC 60664-1 it is the highest r.m.s. value of A.C. or D.C.
voltage across any particular insulation which can occur when the
equipment is supplied at rated voltage.
• Rated impulse voltage
Impulse withstands voltage value assigned by the manufacturer to
the equipment or to a part of it characterizing the specifi ed withstand
capability of its insulation against transient overvoltage.
• Working current
It is the maximum continuous and not interrupted current able
to be carried by all contacts without exceeding the maximum
temperature of the insulating material.
• Transient voltage
Extract from the IEC 60664-1: Short duration overvoltage of
a few millisecond or less, oscillatory or non-oscillatory, usually
highly damped.
• CTI (Comparative Tracking Index)
The CTI value is commonly used to characterize the electrical
breakdown properties of an insulating material. It allows users
to know the tendency to create creepage paths. This value
represents the maximum voltage after 50 drops of ammonium
chloride solution without any breakdown.
• RTI (Relative temperature Index):
Extract from ULs website:
“Maximum service temperature for a material, where a class of
critical property will not be unacceptably compromised through
chemical thermal degradation, over the reasonable life of an
electrical product, relative to a reference material having a
confi rmed, acceptable corresponding performance defi ned RTI.
- RTI Elec: Electrical RTI, associated with critical electrical
insulating properties.
- RTI Mech Imp: Mechanical Impact RTI, associated with
critical impact resistance, resilience and fl exibility
properties.
- RTI Mech Str: Mechanical Strength (Mechanical
without Impact) RTI, associated with critical
mechanical strength where impact resistance,
resilience and fl exibility are not essential”
Air gap
Creepage distance
Appendices
184 © 2011 – SOURIAU
Discrimination/Keying methods
UTS Series
Appendices
N (Normal)
Note: Insert rotated in body
(viewed from front face of male insert)
In applications where similar connectors are used
next to each other, mismatching can be a reason for
disturbances, system failure or even danger to operating
personnel.
To eliminate mismatching, all TRIM TRIO® connectors
can be equipped with discrimination keys, which
offer unlimited possibilities for an error avoiding
interconnection system.
The other way around is to rotate the insert into the shell.
Connectors with rotated inserts can be ordered by
adding the suffix W, X, Y or Z to the standard part
number.
e.g. UTS6JC104S (N key) UTS6JC104SW (W key)
Other keys
Shell
size
Layout
Discrimination keys degrees
W X Y Z
8
8E2 58° 122°
8E3
8E3A
60° 210°
8E4 45°
8E33 90°
10
102W2
103
104
106
10E6
10E7
90°
10E98 90° 180° 240° 270°
12
12E2
12E3 180°
124
128
12E8 90° 112° 203° 292°
1210
12E10
60° 155° 270° 295°
12E14 45°
14
14E5 40° 92° 184° 273°
142G1
147
1412 60°
14E12 43° 90°
14E15 17° 110° 155° 234°
14E18 15° 90° 180° 270°
1419 30° 165° 315°
14E19 30° 165° 315°
18
18E11 62° 119° 241° 340°
1823 158° 270°
18E30 180° 193° 285° 350°
1832
18E32
85° 138° 222° 265°
© 2011 – SOURIAU 185
UTS Series
Appendices
Part number Index
Mechanics
UTS0104P................... P. 68
UTS0104S................... P. 68
UTS010D6P.................. P. 68
UTS010D6S.................. P. 68
UTS010D7P.................. P. 68
UTS010D7S.................. P. 68
UTS010D98P................. P. 84
UTS010D98S................. P. 84
UTS010E6P.................. P. 80
UTS010E6S.................. P. 80
UTS010E7P.................. P. 92
UTS010E7S.................. P. 92
UTS010E98P................. P. 84
UTS010E98S................. P. 84
UTS0124P................... P. 52
UTS0128P................... P. 96
UTS0128S................... P. 96
UTS012D10P................. P. 104
UTS012D10S................. P. 104
UTS012D14P................. P. 116
UTS012D14S................. P. 116
UTS012D2P.................. P. 24
UTS012D2S.................. P. 24
UTS012D3P.................. P. 48
UTS012D3S.................. P. 48
UTS012D4P.................. P. 68
UTS012D4S.................. P. 68
UTS012D8P.................. P. 100
UTS012D8S.................. P. 100
UTS012E10P................. P. 104
UTS012E10S................. P. 104
UTS012E14P................. P. 116
UTS012E14S................. P. 116
UTS012E2P.................. P. 24
UTS012E2S.................. P. 24
UTS012E3P.................. P. 48
UTS012E3S.................. P. 48
UTS012E4P.................. P. 52
UTS012E4S.................. P. 52
UTS012E8P.................. P. 100
UTS012E8S.................. P. 100
UTS01412P.................. P. 108
UTS01412S.................. P. 108
UTS0147P................... P. 88
UTS014D12P................. P. 112
UTS014D12S................. P. 112
UTS014D15P................. P. 120
UTS014D15S................. P. 120
UTS014D18P................. P. 124
UTS014D18S................. P. 124
UTS014D5P.................. P. 120
UTS014D5S.................. P. 120
UTS014E12P................. P. 112
UTS014E12S................. P. 112
UTS014E15P................. P. 120
UTS014E15S................. P. 120
UTS014E18P................. P. 124
UTS014E18S................. P. 124
UTS014E19P................. P. 128
UTS014E19S................. P. 128
UTS014E5P.................. P. 120
UTS014E5S.................. P. 120
UTS014E7P.................. P. 88
UTS014E7S.................. P. 88
UTS01823P.................. P. 132
UTS01823S.................. P. 132
UTS08D2P................... P. 20
UTS08D2P................... P. 20
UTS08D2S................... P. 20
UTS08D2S................... P. 20
UTS08D33P.................. P. 44
UTS08D33P.................. P. 44
UTS08D33S.................. P. 44
UTS08D33S.................. P. 44
UTS08D3AP.................. P. 36
UTS08D3AS.................. P. 36
UTS08D3P................... P. 36
UTS08D3P................... P. 36
UTS08D3S................... P. 36
UTS08D3S................... P. 36
UTS08D4P................... P. 60
UTS08D4P................... P. 60
UTS08D4S................... P. 60
UTS08D4S................... P. 60
UTS08D98P.................. P. 40
UTS08D98S.................. P. 40
UTS08E2P................... P. 20
UTS08E2S................... P. 20
UTS08E33P.................. P. 44
UTS08E33S.................. P. 44
UTS08E3AP.................. P. 40
UTS08E3AS.................. P. 40
UTS08E3P................... P. 36
UTS08E3S................... P. 36
UTS08E4P................... P. 60
UTS08E4S................... P. 60
UTS08E98P.................. P. 40
UTS08E98S.................. P. 40
UTS1GJC104P................ P. 68
UTS1GJC128P................ P. 96
UTS1GJC1412P............... P. 108
UTS1GJC147P................ P. 88
UTS1GN104P................. P. 68
UTS1GN128P................. P. 96
UTS1GN1412P................ P. 108
UTS1GN147P................. P. 88
UTS1JC102W2P............... P. 64
UTS1JC102W2S............... P. 64
UTS1JC103P................. P. 40
UTS1JC103S................. P. 40
UTS1JC103W3P............... P. 40
UTS1JC103W3S............... P. 40
UTS1JC104P................. P. 68
UTS1JC104S................. P. 68
UTS1JC106P................. P. 80
UTS1JC106S................. P. 80
UTS1JC1210P................ P. 104
UTS1JC1210S................ P. 104
UTS1JC124P................. P. 52
UTS1JC124PSCR.............. P. 52
UTS1JC124S................. P. 52
UTS1JC128P................. P. 96
UTS1JC128S................. P. 96
UTS1JC1412P................ P. 108
UTS1JC1412S................ P. 108
UTS1JC1419P................ P. 128
UTS1JC1419S................ P. 128
UTS1JC142G1P............... P. 32
UTS1JC142G1S............... P. 32
UTS1JC147P................. P. 88
UTS1JC147PSCR.............. P. 88
UTS1JC147S................. P. 88
UTS1JC1823P................ P. 132
UTS1JC1823S................ P. 132
UTS1JC1832P................ P. 136
UTS1JC1832S................ P. 136
UTS6102W2P................. P. 64
UTS6102W2S................. P. 64
UTS6103P................... P. 40
UTS6103S................... P. 40
UTS6103W3P................. P. 40
UTS6103W3S................. P. 40
UTS6104P................... P. 68
UTS6104S................... P. 68
UTS6106P................... P. 80
UTS6106S................... P. 80
UTS610E6P.................. P. 80
UTS610E6S.................. P. 80
UTS610E7P.................. P. 92
UTS610E7S.................. P. 92
UTS610E98P................. P. 84
UTS610E98S................. P. 84
Appendices
186 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
Appendices
UTS61210P.................. P. 104
UTS61210S.................. P. 104
UTS6124P................... P. 52
UTS6124S................... P. 52
UTS6128P................... P. 96
UTS6128S................... P. 96
UTS612E10P................. P. 104
UTS612E10S................. P. 104
UTS612E14P................. P. 116
UTS612E14S................. P. 116
UTS612E2P.................. P. 24
UTS612E2S.................. P. 24
UTS612E3P.................. P. 48
UTS612E3S.................. P. 48
UTS612E4P.................. P. 52
UTS612E4S.................. P. 52
UTS612E8P.................. P. 100
UTS612E8S.................. P. 100
UTS61412P.................. P. 108
UTS61412S.................. P. 108
UTS61419P.................. P. 128
UTS61419S.................. P. 128
UTS6142G1P................. P. 32
UTS6142G1S................. P. 32
UTS6147P................... P. 88
UTS6147S................... P. 88
UTS614E12P................. P. 112
UTS614E12S................. P. 112
UTS614E15P................. P. 120
UTS614E15S................. P. 120
UTS614E18P................. P. 124
UTS614E18S................. P. 124
UTS614E19P................. P. 128
UTS614E19S................. P. 128
UTS614E5P.................. P. 72
UTS614E5S.................. P. 72
UTS61823P.................. P. 132
UTS61823S.................. P. 132
UTS61832P.................. P. 136
UTS61832S.................. P. 136
UTS6183G1P................. P. 56
UTS68E2P................... P. 20
UTS68E2S................... P. 20
UTS68E33P.................. P. 44
UTS68E33S.................. P. 44
UTS68E3AP.................. P. 40
UTS68E3AS.................. P. 40
UTS68E3P................... P. 36
UTS68E3S................... P. 36
UTS68E4P................... P. 60
UTS68E4S................... P. 60
UTS68E98P.................. P. 40
UTS68E98S.................. P. 40
UTS6GJC104S................ P. 68
UTS6GJC128S................ P. 96
UTS6GJC1412S............... P. 108
UTS6GJC147S................ P. 88
UTS6GN104S................. P. 68
UTS6GN128S................. P. 96
UTS6GN1412S................ P. 108
UTS6GN147S................. P. 88
UTS6JC102W2P............... P. 64
UTS6JC102W2S............... P. 64
UTS6JC103P................. P. 40
UTS6JC103S................. P. 40
UTS6JC103W3P............... P. 40
UTS6JC103W3S............... P. 40
UTS6JC104P................. P. 68
UTS6JC104S................. P. 68
UTS6JC106P................. P. 80
UTS6JC106S................. P. 80
UTS6JC10E6P................ P. 80
UTS6JC10E6S................ P. 80
UTS6JC10E7P................ P. 92
UTS6JC10E7S................ P. 92
UTS6JC10E98P............... P. 84
UTS6JC10E98S............... P. 84
UTS6JC1210P................ P. 104
UTS6JC1210S................ P. 104
UTS6JC124P................. P. 52
UTS6JC124PSCR.............. P. 52
UTS6JC124S................. P. 52
UTS6JC124SSCR.............. P. 52
UTS6JC128P................. P. 96
UTS6JC128S................. P. 96
UTS6JC12E10P............... P. 104
UTS6JC12E10S............... P. 104
UTS6JC12E14P............... P. 116
UTS6JC12E14S............... P. 116
UTS6JC12E2P................ P. 24
UTS6JC12E2S................ P. 24
UTS6JC12E3P................ P. 48
UTS6JC12E3S................ P. 48
UTS6JC12E4P................ P. 52
UTS6JC12E4S................ P. 52
UTS6JC12E8P................ P. 100
UTS6JC12E8S................ P. 100
UTS6JC1412P................ P. 108
UTS6JC1412S................ P. 108
UTS6JC1419P................ P. 128
UTS6JC1419S................ P. 128
UTS6JC142G1P............... P. 32
UTS6JC142G1S............... P. 32
UTS6JC147P................. P. 88
UTS6JC147PSCR.............. P. 88
UTS6JC147S................. P. 88
UTS6JC147SSCR.............. P. 88
UTS6JC14E12P............... P. 112
UTS6JC14E12S............... P. 112
UTS6JC14E15P............... P. 120
UTS6JC14E15S............... P. 120
UTS6JC14E18P............... P. 124
UTS6JC14E18S............... P. 124
UTS6JC14E19P............... P. 128
UTS6JC14E19S............... P. 128
UTS6JC14E5P................ P. 72
UTS6JC14E5S................ P. 72
UTS6JC14E7P................ P. 88
UTS6JC14E7S................ P. 88
UTS6JC1823P................ P. 132
UTS6JC1823S................ P. 132
UTS6JC1832P................ P. 136
UTS6JC1832S................ P. 136
UTS6JC183G1P............... P. 56
UTS6JC8E2P................. P. 20
UTS6JC8E2S................. P. 20
UTS6JC8E33P................ P. 44
UTS6JC8E33S................ P. 44
UTS6JC8E3AP................ P. 40
UTS6JC8E3AS................ P. 40
UTS6JC8E3P................. P. 36
UTS6JC8E3S................. P. 36
UTS6JC8E4P................. P. 60
UTS6JC8E4S................. P. 60
UTS6JC8E98P................ P. 40
UTS6JC8E98S................ P. 40
UTS7102W2P................. P. 64
UTS7102W2S................. P. 64
UTS7103P................... P. 40
UTS7103S................... P. 40
UTS7103W3P................. P. 40
UTS7103W3S................. P. 40
UTS7104P................... P. 68
UTS7104S................... P. 68
UTS7106P................... P. 80
UTS7106S................... P. 80
UTS710D6P.................. P. 80
UTS710D6P32................ P. 80
UTS710D6S.................. P. 80
UTS710D6S32................ P. 80
UTS710D7P.................. P. 92
UTS710D7P32................ P. 92
UTS710D7S.................. P. 92
© 2011 – SOURIAU 187
UTS Series
Appendices
UTS710D7S32................ P. 92
UTS710D98P................. P. 84
UTS710D98P32............... P. 84
UTS710D98S................. P. 84
UTS710D98S32............... P. 84
UTS710E6P.................. P. 80
UTS710E6S.................. P. 80
UTS710E7P.................. P. 92
UTS710E7S.................. P. 92
UTS710E98P................. P. 84
UTS710E98S................. P. 84
UTS71210P.................. P. 104
UTS71210S.................. P. 104
UTS7124P................... P. 52
UTS7124PSCR................ P. 52
UTS7124S................... P. 52
UTS7124SSCR................ P. 52
UTS7128P................... P. 96
UTS7128PSEK9............... P. 96
UTS7128S................... P. 96
UTS712CCRG................. P. 26
UTS712CCRR................. P. 26
UTS712CCRY................. P. 26
UTS712D10P................. P. 104
UTS712D10P32............... P. 104
UTS712D10S................. P. 104
UTS712D10S32............... P. 104
UTS712D14P................. P. 116
UTS712D14P32............... P. 116
UTS712D14S................. P. 116
UTS712D14S32............... P. 116
UTS712D2P.................. P. 24
UTS712D2P32................ P. 24
UTS712D2S.................. P. 24
UTS712D2S32................ P. 24
UTS712D3P.................. P. 48
UTS712D3P32................ P. 48
UTS712D3S.................. P. 48
UTS712D3S32................ P. 48
UTS712D4P.................. P. 52
UTS712D4P32................ P. 52
UTS712D4S.................. P. 52
UTS712D4S32................ P. 52
UTS712D8P.................. P. 100
UTS712D8P32................ P. 100
UTS712D8S.................. P. 100
UTS712D8S32................ P. 100
UTS712E10P................. P. 104
UTS712E10S................. P. 104
UTS712E14P................. P. 116
UTS712E14S................. P. 116
UTS712E2P.................. P. 24
UTS712E2S.................. P. 24
UTS712E3P.................. P. 48
UTS712E3S.................. P. 48
UTS712E4P.................. P. 52
UTS712E4S.................. P. 52
UTS712E8P.................. P. 100
UTS712E8S.................. P. 100
UTS71412P.................. P. 108
UTS71412S.................. P. 108
UTS71419P.................. P. 128
UTS71419S.................. P. 128
UTS7142G1P................. P. 32
UTS7142G1S................. P. 32
UTS7142G1SNPT.............. P. 32
UTS7147P................... P. 88
UTS7147PSCR................ P. 88
UTS7147PSEK9............... P. 88
UTS7147S................... P. 88
UTS7147SSCR................ P. 88
UTS714D12P................. P. 112
UTS714D12P32............... P. 112
UTS714D12S................. P. 112
UTS714D12S32............... P. 112
UTS714D15P................. P. 120
UTS714D15P32............... P. 120
UTS714D15S................. P. 120
UTS714D15S32............... P. 120
UTS714D18P................. P. 124
UTS714D18P32............... P. 124
UTS714D18S................. P. 124
UTS714D18S32............... P. 124
UTS714D19P................. P. 128
UTS714D19P32............... P. 128
UTS714D19S................. P. 128
UTS714D19S32............... P. 128
UTS714D5P.................. P. 120
UTS714D5P32................ P. 120
UTS714D5S.................. P. 120
UTS714D5S32................ P. 120
UTS714E12P................. P. 112
UTS714E12S................. P. 112
UTS714E15P................. P. 120
UTS714E15S................. P. 120
UTS714E18P................. P. 124
UTS714E18S................. P. 124
UTS714E19P................. P. 128
UTS714E19S................. P. 128
UTS714E5P.................. P. 72
UTS714E5S.................. P. 72
UTS714E7P.................. P. 88
UTS714E7S.................. P. 88
UTS71823P.................. P. 132
UTS71823S.................. P. 132
UTS71832P.................. P. 136
UTS71832S.................. P. 136
UTS7183G1SNPT.............. P. 56
UTS78D2P................... P. 20
UTS78D2P32................. P. 20
UTS78D2S................... P. 20
UTS78D2S32................. P. 20
UTS78D33P.................. P. 44
UTS78D33P32................ P. 44
UTS78D33S.................. P. 44
UTS78D33S32................ P. 44
UTS78D3AP.................. P. 40
UTS78D3AP32................ P. 40
UTS78D3AS.................. P. 40
UTS78D3AS32................ P. 40
UTS78D3P................... P. 36
UTS78D3P32................. P. 36
UTS78D3S................... P. 36
UTS78D3S32................. P. 36
UTS78D4P................... P. 60
UTS78D4P32................. P. 60
UTS78D4S................... P. 60
UTS78D4S32................. P. 60
UTS78D98P.................. P. 40
UTS78D98P32................ P. 40
UTS78D98S.................. P. 40
UTS78D98S32................ P. 40
UTS78E2P................... P. 20
UTS78E2S................... P. 20
UTS78E33P.................. P. 44
UTS78E33S.................. P. 44
UTS78E3AP.................. P. 40
UTS78E3AS.................. P. 40
UTS78E3P................... P. 36
UTS78E3S................... P. 36
UTS78E4P................... P. 60
UTS78E4S................... P. 60
UTS78E98P.................. P. 40
UTS78E98S.................. P. 40
UTS7GJC104P................ P. 68
UTS7GJC128P................ P. 96
UTS7GJC1412P............... P. 108
UTS7GJC147P................ P. 88
UTS7GN104P................. P. 68
UTS7GN128P................. P. 96
UTS7GN1412P................ P. 108
UTS7GN147P................. P. 88
Appendices
188 © 2011 – SOURIAU
UTS Series
Appendices
Accessories
85005585A.................. P. 22
85005586A.................. P. 30
85005587A.................. P. 26
85005588A.................. P. 34
85005590A.................. P. 134
85005594................... P. 22
85005595................... P. 30
85005596................... P. 26
85005597................... P. 34
85005599................... P. 134
UT610CCRG.................. P. 30
UT610CCRR.................. P. 30
UT610CCRY.................. P. 30
UT612CCRG.................. P. 26
UT612CCRR.................. P. 26
UT612CCRY.................. P. 26
UT614CCRG.................. P. 34
UT614CCRR.................. P. 34
UT614CCRY.................. P. 34
UTFD11B.................... P. 22
UTFD12B.................... P. 30
UTFD13B.................... P. 26
UTFD14B.................... P. 34
UTFD16B.................... P. 134
UTS10DCG................... P. 30
UTS10DCGE.................. P. 30
UTS10DCGR.................. P. 30
UTS12DCG................... P. 26
UTS12DCGE.................. P. 26
UTS12DCGR.................. P. 26
UTS14DCG................... P. 34
UTS14DCGE.................. P. 34
UTS14DCGR.................. P. 34
UTS18DCG................... P. 134
UTS18DCGE.................. P. 134
UTS18DCGR.................. P. 134
UTS610DCG.................. P. 30
UTS612DCG.................. P. 26
UTS614DCG.................. P. 34
UTS618DCG.................. P. 134
UTS68C..................... P. 22
UTS710CCRG................. P. 30
UTS710CCRR................. P. 30
UTS710CCRY................. P. 30
UTS712CCRG................. P. 26
UTS712CCRR................. P. 26
UTS712CCRY................. P. 26
UTS714CCRG................. P. 34
UTS714CCRR................. P. 34
UTS714CCRY................. P. 34
UTS8DCG.................... P. 22
UTS8DCGE................... P. 22
UTS8DCGR................... P. 22
Contacts
82911456K.................. P. 145
82911457NK................. P. 145
82911458K.................. P. 145
82911459NK................. P. 145
82911460K.................. P. 145
82911461NK................. P. 145
82911462K.................. P. 145
82911463NK................. P. 145
82911464K.................. P. 145
82911465NK................. P. 145
82911466K.................. P. 145
82911467NK................. P. 145
82913600A.................. P. 145
82913601A.................. P. 145
82913602A.................. P. 145
82913603A.................. P. 145
82913604A.................. P. 145
82913605A.................. P. 145
82913606A.................. P. 145
82913607A.................. P. 145
82913608A.................. P. 145
82913609A.................. P. 145
RC14M30GE7K................ P. 146
RC14M30K................... P. 145
RC14M50GE7K................ P. 146
RC14M50K................... P. 145
RC16M23GE7K................ P. 146
RC16M23K................... P. 145
RC18W3K.................... P. 145
RC20M12E83K................ P. 148
RC20M12E84K................ P. 145
RC20M12E8K................. P. 145
RC20M12GE7K................ P. 146
RC20M12K................... P. 145
RC20M13GE7K................ P. 146
RC20M13K................... P. 145
RC20W3K.................... P. 145
RC24M9GE7K................. P. 146
RC24M9K.................... P. 145
RC24W3K.................... P. 145
RC28M1GE7K................. P. 146
RC28M1K.................... P. 145
RCDX6016D28................ P. 182
RCDX6019D28................ P. 182
RCDX6024D28................ P. 182
RCDX6026D28................ P. 182
RCDX602D28................. P. 181
RCDX6032D28................ P. 182
RCDX6036D28................ P. 182
RCDX6052D28................ P. 182
RCDXK1D28.................. P. 181
RCPOF1000B................. P. 150
RCW5016K................... P. 145
RCW50A7K................... P. 148
RM14M30GE1K................ P. 146
RM14M30K................... P. 145
RM14M50GE1K................ P. 146
RM14M50K................... P. 148
RM16M23GE1K................ P. 146
RM16M23K................... P. 145
RM18W3K.................... P. 145
RM20M12E83K................ P. 145
RM20M12E8K................. P. 145
RM20M12GE1k................ P. 146
RM20M12K................... P. 145
RM20M13GE1k................ P. 146
RM20M13K................... P. 145
RM20W3K.................... P. 145
RM24M9GE1k................. P. 146
RM24M9K.................... P. 145
RM24W3K.................... P. 145
RM28M1GE1k................. P. 146
RM28M1K.................... P. 145
RMDX6019D28................ P. 177
RMDX6024D28................ P. 176
RMDX6026D28................ P. 176
RMDX602D28................. P. 182
RMDX6031D28................ P. 179
RMDX6032D28................ P. 182
RMDX6036D28................ P. 182
RMDX6050D28................ P. 182
RMDXK10D28................. P. 178
RMPOF1000.................. P. 150
RMW5016K................... P. 148
RMW50A7K................... P. 148
SC14M1TK6.................. P. 145
SC14ML1TK6................. P. 145
SC16M11TK6................. P. 145
SC16M1TK6.................. P. 145
SC16ML11TK6................ P. 145
SC16ML1TK6................. P. 145
SC20M1TK6.................. P. 145
SC20ML1TK6................. P. 145
SC20W3TK6.................. P. 145
SC20WL3TK6................. P. 145
© 2011 – SOURIAU 189
UTS Series
Appendices
SC24M1TK6.................. P. 145
SC24ML1TK6................. P. 145
SC24W3TK6.................. P. 145
SC24WL3TK6................. P. 145
SM14M1TK6.................. P. 145
SM14ML1TK6................. P. 145
SM16M11TK6................. P. 145
SM16M1TK6.................. P. 145
SM16ML11TK6................ P. 145
SM16ML1TK6................. P. 145
SM20M1TK6.................. P. 145
SM20ML1TK6................. P. 145
SM20W3TK6.................. P. 145
SM20WL3TK6................. P. 145
SM24M1TK6.................. P. 145
SM24ML1TK6................. P. 145
SM24W3TK6.................. P. 145
SM24WL3TK6................. P. 145
Tooling
51060210924................ P. 155
51060210936................ P. 155
M10S1J..................... P. 178
M10SG8..................... P. 179
M317....................... P. 155
MH860...................... P. 155
MH86164G................... P. 155
MH86186.................... P. 155
RX2025GE1.................. P. 155
RX20D44.................... P.162
S16RCM14................... P. 155
S16RCM1450................. P. 155
S16RCM16................... P. 155
S16SCM20................... P. 155
S16SCML1................... P. 155
S16SCML11.................. P. 155
S20RCM..................... P. 155
S16SCM20................... P. 155
S20SCM20................... P. 155
S221....................... P. 180
S23D2...................... P. 180
S80........................ P. 179
S82........................ P. 182
S83........................ P. 179
S87........................ P. 182
S88........................ P. 182
SHANDLES................... P. 155
SL105...................... P. 179
sl46D2..................... P. 180
sl471...................... P. 180
UH25....................... P. 155
VGE10077A.................. P. 155
VGE10078A.................. P. 155
Appendices
INDUTSCA07EN © Copyright SOURIAU June 2011 - All information in this document presents only general particulars and shall not form part of any contract. All rights reserved to SOURIAU for changes without prior notifi cation or public announcement. Any duplication is prohibited, unless approved in writing.
www.souriau.com
www.souriau-industrial.com
contactindustry@souriau.com
1-866-9-OHMITE • Int’l 1-847-258-0300 • Fax 1-847-574-7522 • www.ohmite.com • info@ohmite.com 113
270 Series
Vitreous Enamel Power
Series Wattage Ohms Core Code Voltage Std. Terminal
L12 12 0.1-51K D 565 57
L25 25 0.15-100K K 625 40
L50 50 0.38-260K K 1625 40
L100 100 0.23-101K M 2845 40
L175 175 0.13-101K P 3595 46
L225 225 0.16-129K P 4595 46
L500 500 0.38-218K S 4970 45
L1000 1000 0.69-392K S 8900 45
Non-Inductive versions available;
Other sizes available; Also available in
low cost Centohm or Silicone coating;
Consult Ohmite.
* Maximum Voltage is based on
Ohm’s Law [V=√P*R] as limited by the
resistance value of specified product
Coating Lead free vitreous enamel. Large models (500 watts and up) are supplied in Silicone Ceramic.
Also available in low-cost Centohm coating; Consult factory.
Core Tubular ceramic.
Terminals Solder coated radial lug. RoHS solder composition is 96% Sn, 3.5% Ag, 0.5% Cu
Derating Linearly from 100% @ +25°C to 0% @ +350°C.
Tolerance ±5% 1Ω and over (J); ±10% under 1Ω (K)
Power rating Based on 25°C free air rating.
Overload 10 times rated wattage for 5 seconds.
Temperature coefficient 1 to 20Ω: ±400 ppm/°C; Above 20Ω: ±260 ppm/°C
Dielectric withstanding voltage 1000 VAC: 12 to 100 watt rating. 3000 VAC: 175 to 225 watt rating (Measured from terminal to
mounting bracket)
Max. amps use the formula √P/R
Power limitations for
high resistance values
When resistance exceeds the resistance values listed, derate the Power Rating by 25% to
improve reliability. No power derating necessary for ratings higher than 100W.
Power Resistance
rating value
12W 3,900Ω
25W 12,000Ω
50W 35,000Ω
100W 75,000Ω
Mounting Hardware see http://www.ohmite.com/techdata/lug-mounting.php
Select 270 Type fixed resistors for applications
requiring wattage ratings from 12 to 1000 watts.
The 270 Type resistors are equipped with lug terminals
suitable for soldering or sturdy bolt connection.
When secure mounting is required, the hollow core
of these resistors permit fastening with spring-type
brackets, thru bolts or thru bolts with slotted-steel
brackets.
Suitable for rugged applications, the 270 Type
resistors feature all-welded construction and durable
lead free vitreous enamel coating. Mounting brackets
not included with resistors.
Features
• Terminals suitable for soldering
or bolt connection
• High wattage applications
• Rugged lead free vitreous enamel coating
• Flame resistant coating
• All-welded construction
• RoHS compliant available
• “Fast on” option – see terminal 538,
http://www.ohmite.com/techdata/terminals.pdf
SERIES SPECIFICAT IONS
characteristics
(continued)
114 1-866-9-OHMITE • Int’l 1-847-258-0300 • Fax 1-847-574-7522 • www.ohmite.com • info@ohmite.com
Standard part numbers for 270 series
= Standard values; check availability using the worldwide
inventory search at www.ohmite.com
Red outlined values supplied in Silicone-Ceramic coatings
instead of vitreous enamel.
0.51 L12JKR51E
1 L12J1R0E
3.3 L12J3R3E
4.7 L12J4R7E
10 L12J10RE
12 L12J12RE
15 L12J15RE
22 L12J22RE
27 L12J27RE
33 L12J33RE
47 L12J47RE
68 L12J68RE
82 L12J82RE
100 L12J100E
150 L12J150E
1 –––1R0E
2 –––2R0E
3 –––3R0E
4 –––4R0E
5 –––5R0E
10 –––10RE
15 –––15RE
25 –––25RE
50 –––50RE
75 –––75RE
100 –––100E
125 –––125E
150 –––150E
200 –––200E
250 –––250E
500 –––500E
750 –––750E
800 –––800E
1,000 –––1K0E
1,500 –––1K5E
2,000 –––2K0E
180 L12J180E
270 L12J270E
330 L12J330E
390 L12J390E
470 L12J470E
560 L12J560E
1000 L12J1K0E
1200 L12J1K2E
1500 L12J1K5E
2200 L12J2K2E
2700 L12J2K7E
4700 L12J4K7E
10000 L12J10KE
18000 L12J18KE
22000 L12J22KE
51000 L12J51KE
2,500 –––2K5E
3,000 –––3K0E
3,500 –––3K5E
4,000 –––4K0E
5,000 –––5K0E
6,000 –––6K0E
7,500 –––7K5E
10,000 –––10KE
12,000 –––12KE
15,000 –––15KE
20,000 –––20KE
25,000 –––25KE
30,000 –––30KE
35,000 –––35KE
40,000 –––40KE
50,000 –––50KE
60,000 –––60KE
75,000 –––75KE
100,000 –––100KE
150,000 –––150KE
200,000 –––200KE
250,000 –––250KE
Ohmic
value 12 Watt
Ohmic
value 12 Watt
Ohmic value
L25J––– 25
L50J––– 50
L100J––– 100
L175J––– 175
Wattage
Part No.
Prefix
Suffix
L225J––– 225
L500J––– 500
L1000J–––1000
Ohmic value
L25J––– 25
L50J––– 50
L100J––– 100
L175J––– 175
Wattage
Part No.
Prefix
Suffix
L225J––– 225
L500J––– 500
L1000J–––1000
Tolerance
J = 5%
K = 10%
Core Diameter
See “Core and
Terminal Selection”
Ohms
R500 = 0.500Ω
1R00 = 1Ω
250R = 250Ω
1K00 = 1,000Ω
25K0 = 25,000Ω
25K5 = 25,500Ω
RoHS Compliant
Coating
270 = Vitreous
470 = Silicone Ceramic
Wattage
Terminal Type
See “Resistor Terminals
for Tubular Cores”
Non-inductive
Blank = Standard
N = Non-inductive
L 2 5 J 1 0 0 E
Tolerance
J = 5%
K = 10%
Ohms
1R0 = 1Ω
250 = 250Ω
1K0 = 1,000Ω
25K = 25,000Ω
25K5 = 25,500Ω
RoHS
Compliant
Series Wattage
Coating
Blank = Vitreous
C = Centohm
S = Silicone
Non-inductive
Blank = Standard
N = Non-inductive
F = Fast on
(optional)
See website for
custom core and
terminal info
L
D C
Series Wattage L D C Core Code* Std. Term.**
L12 12 1.75 / 44.4 0.313 / 7.94 0.188 / 4.76 D 57
L25 25 2.0 / 50.8 0.562 / 14.3 0.313 / 7.94 K 40
L50 50 4.0 / 101.6 0.562 / 14.3 0.313 / 7.94 K 40
L100 100 6.5 / 165.1 0.750 / 19.1 0.50 / 12.7 M 40
L175 175 8.5 / 215.9 1.125 / 28.6 0.75 / 19.1 P 46
L225 225 10.5 / 266.7 1.125 / 28.6 0.75 / 19.1 P 46
L500 500 12.0 / 304.8 2.50 / 63.5 1.75 / 44.5 S 45
L1000 1000 20.0 / 508.0 2.50 / 63.5 1.75 / 44.5 S 45
* http://www.ohmite.com/techdata/200-210-270-custom.pdf
** http://www.ohmite.com/techdata/terminals.pdf
dimensions
in./mm
ordering information
270 Series
Vitreous Enamel Power
Standard Made-to-order
1-866-9-OHMITE • Int’l 1-847-258-0300 • Fax 1-847-574-7522 • www.ohmite.com • info@ohmite.com
REV 4602
High
Power
Wirewound
Heatsinkable
BA Series
Aluminum Cased Resistor
Overload 5 times rated wattage for 10 sec.
Power Rating Free air; greater with heatsink
Dielectric Withstanding Voltage 2.5KV, 1 min., 50/60 Hz
Insulation Resistance ≥100MΩ
Working Voltage ≥800V
Surface Temp. Rise 385°C
Wire UL listed 3199
Features
• Three extrusion forms
available
• Heatsinkable
• Rugged design
• Up to 1000 watts
• Thermal cut-off available
• Scalable, custom lengths
available
• Custom leads available
A p p l i c at i o n s
• Dynamic Braking
• Motor Starting
• Power Control
characteristics
SERIES SPECIFICATIONS
Series Wattage* Resistance range Tolerance Length
BA1160 500 0.5Ω - 18KΩ ±10% 160mm
BA2320 700 10Ω - 10KΩ ±10% 320mm
BA3266 1000 10Ω - 10KΩ ±10% 266mm
* Free air rating
1-866-9-OHMITE • Int’l 1-847-258-0300 • Fax 1-847-574-7522 • www.ohmite.com • info@ohmite.com
REV 4602
High
Power
Wirewound
Heatsinkable
DIMENSIONS
BA Series
Aluminum Cased Resistor
ORDERING INFORMATION
10"
254mm
1.18"
30mm
L
ø0.24" / 6.2mm
4.92"
95mm
2.80"
71mm
3.15 ~ 3.31"
80 ~ 84mm 4.33"
110mm
Thermostat
(optional)
3.94"
100.0mm
L 31.50"
800.1mm 1.18"
30.0mm
5.49"
139.5mm
5.49"
139.5mm
3.43"
87.1mm
17.72"
450.1mm
ø 0.23" / 5.8mm
Thermostat (optional)
Thermostat
(optional)
5.00"
127.0mm
2.95"
74.9mm
L
Wire, 12ga., 600v
5.50"
139.7mm
6.50"
165.1mm
2.13"
54.1mm
B A C 1 1 6 0 1 0 0 R K E
Series
B = block
aluminum
Length
(mm)
Termination
A = wire leads
B = solid terminals
Tolerance
K = ±10%
Resistance
RoHS Compliant
Thermal switch
(optional)
Form
1 = extrusion
BA1 BA2
BA3
20 www.bulgin.com
BUCCANEER FOR POWER
BUCCANEER POWER
bulgin
a brand of Elektron Technology
900 Series Buccaneer®
Terminals
Terminals
Sealing Gasket
O Ring
O Ring
O Ring
Contact Insert
Contact Insert
Locking Ring
Main Body
Gland Nut
Cable Gland
Gland Cage
Panel Body
Retaining
Nut
IP68 rating tested at 1.054kg/sq cm (15lb/sq in)
10m depth for 2 weeks
IP69K rating tested to DIN 40050-9
32A, 600V ac/dc rating
2, 3, 4, 5, 7 and 10 pole
Plug or socket connection in each body style
Water and dustproof to IP68 when mated
‘Scoop proof’ contacts
Field termination - screw terminations
Positive locating keyways - cannot be
mis-connected
Sealing caps available to maintain IP68 rating of
unmated connectors
Leading earth contact for 3, 4, 5 and 7 pole versions
Trailing Neutral on 5 pole
Compact design
Easy assembly - no special tools required
Single or 3 phase applications
Bulkhead moulding available for use with flange
mounting body for 45° or 90° mounting (order each
separately)
Cost effective solution
Cable accomodation 7-22mm O/D
Two cable connector versions for 15mm and 22mm
(maximum) cable diameters
Separate strain relief on large cable version
UL, CSA and VDE approvals
www.bulgin.com 21
BUCCANEER FOR POWER
BUCCANEER POWER
bulgin
a brand of Elektron Technology
900 Series Buccaneer®
PX0911
Mates with in-line flex or
panel mounting versions
Positive, fast acting locking
ring - can be turned with a
gloved hand
Plug or socket versions
PX0 Series13-15mm cable
dia. as standard, 7-13mm
with additional gland pack
PXA Series 20-22mm cable
dia. as standard, 14-20mm
with additional gland pack
Strain Relief Clamp
(PXA Series only)
Standard Cable Large Cable Description Standard Cable Large Cable Description
PX0911/02/P PXA911/02/P 2 pole Plug PX0911/02/S PXA911/02/S 2 pole Socket
PX0911/03/P PXA911/03/P 3 pole Plug PX0911/03/S PXA911/03/S 3 pole Socket
PX0911/04/P PXA911/04/P 4 pole Plug PX0911/04/S PXA911/04/S 4 pole Socket
PX0911/05/P PXA911/05/P 5 pole Plug PX0911/05/S PXA911/05/S 5 pole Socket
PX0911/07/P PXA911/07/P 7 pole Plug PX0911/07/S PXA911/07/S 7 pole Socket
PX0911/10/P PXA911/10/P 10 pole Plug PX0911/10/S PXA911/10/S 10 pole Socket
Standard Cable Large Cable Description Standard Cable Large Cable Description
PX0921/02/P PXA921/02/P 2 pole Plug PX0921/02/S PXA921/02/S 2 pole Socket
PX0921/03/P PXA921/03/P 3 pole Plug PX0921/03/S PXA921/03/S 3 pole Socket
PX0921/04/P PXA921/04/P 4 pole Plug PX0921/04/S PXA921/04/S 4 pole Socket
PX0921/05/P PXA921/05/P 5 pole Plug PX0921/05/S PXA921/05/S 5 pole Socket
PX0921/07/P PXA921/07/P 7 pole Plug PX0921/07/S PXA921/07/S 7 pole Socket
PX0921/10/P PXA921/10/P 10 pole Plug PX0921/10/S PXA921/10/S 10 pole Socket
PXA911
PX0921
PXA921
Mates with either PX0911 or
PXA911 connectors
Plug or socket versions
PX0 Series 13-15mm cable
dia. as standard, 7-13mm
with additional gland pack
PXA Series 20-22mm cable
dia. as standard, 14-20mm
with additional gland pack
Strain Relief Clamp
(PXA Series only)
FLEX CABLE CONNECTOR
IN-LINE FLEX CABLE CONNECTOR
22 www.bulgin.com
BUCCANEER FOR POWER
BUCCANEER POWER
bulgin
a brand of Elektron Technology
PX0941
Mates with PX0911 and
PXA911 connectors
Supplied with high grade
sealing gasket
Supplied with sealing
grommets for panel fixing
screws (M6 thread
recommended)
Flange Mounting
PX0941/02/P 2 pole Plug PX0941/02/S 2 pole Socket
PX0941/03/P 3 pole Plug PX0941/03/S 3 pole Socket
PX0941/04/P 4 pole Plug PX0941/04/S 4 pole Socket
PX0941/05/P 5 pole Plug PX0941/05/S 5 pole Socket
PX0941/07/P 7 pole Plug PX0941/07/S 7 pole Socket
PX0941/10/P 10 pole Plug PX0941/10/S 10 pole Socket
Panel Mounting
PX0931/02/P 2 pole Plug PX0931/02/S 2 pole Socket
PX0931/03/P 3 pole Plug PX0931/03/S 3 pole Socket
PX0931/04/P 4 pole Plug PX0931/04/S 4 pole Socket
PX0931/05/P 5 pole Plug PX0931/05/S 5 pole Socket
PX0931/07/P 7 pole Plug PX0931/07/S 7 pole Socket
PX0931/10/P 10 pole Plug PX0931/10/S 10 pole Socket
PX0931
Mates with PX0911 and
PXA911 connectors
Single hole fixing
Anti-rotation key
High grade sealing gasket
3-7mm panel thickness
900 Series Buccaneer®
PANEL MOUNTING CONNECTOR
FLANGE MOUNTING CONNECTOR
www.bulgin.com 23
Sealing Caps
PX0960 Sealing cap for use with PX0911/xx/x and
PXA911/xx/x
PX0970 Sealing cap for use with all other styles
PX0990 Heavy duty sealing cap for use with
PX0911/xx/x and PXA911/xx/x
PX0991 Heavy duty sealing cap for use with
PX0921/xx/x and PXA921/xx/x
PX0992 Heavy duty sealing cap for use with PX0931
and PX0941
Gland Packs
PX0980 Pack of 3 additional cable glands for
PX0911 and PX0921 to suit cable sizes;
11-13mm, 9-11 and 7-9mm dia.
PXA980 Pack of 3 additional cable glands for
PXA911 and PXA921 to suit cable sizes;
18-20mm, 16-18 and 14-16mm dia.
BUCCANEER FOR POWER
BUCCANEER POWER
bulgin
a brand of Elektron Technology
900 Series Buccaneer®
PX0950
PX0950 & PX0941
PX0960, PX0970
For use with flange mounting
connector PX0941, to give
45° or 90° angle
Supplied with high grade
sealing gasket
Supplied with sealing
grommets for panel fixing
screws (M6 thread
recommended)
Sealing caps to maintain IP68
& IP69K rating of unmated
connectors, with plastic straps
ADDITIONAL BULKHEAD ADAPTOR MOULDING
ACCESSORIES
PX0990, PX0991, PX0992
Heavy duty sealing caps to
maintain IP68 & IP69K rating
of unmated connectors, with
stainless steel straps
24 www.bulgin.com
Electrical:
No Poles: 2, 3 4, 5 7 10†
Current Rating: 32A 32A 32A 10A
30A, CSA 25A, CSA 25A, CSA*
Voltage Rating: 600V ac/dc 600V ac/dc 430V ac/dc 250V ac/dc
Contact Resistance: <10m (initial)
Insulation Resistance: >106M (@ 500V dc)
Dielectric strength: 2.2kV ac min
AC Breakdown voltage: 6kV
Operating
Temperature Range: –40°C to +85°C
Approvals:
UL E214972
CSA 1211899
VDE 40003148
CCC 2011020203500396 – 10 Amp Rated
2011020203500396 – 32 Amp Rated
900 Series Buccaneer®
Mechanical:
Sealing: IP68, EN60529 :1992 tested @
1.054kg/sq.cm. (15lb/sq.in.) 10m depth for
2 weeks
IP69K, DIN 40050-9
Cable Acceptance: PX0911-PX0921 13 - 15mm O/D standard,
7-13mm with gland pack
PXA911-PXA921 20 - 22mm O/D standard,
14 - 20mm with gland pack
Contact Accommodation: 2-7 pole - 2.5 to 4mm2 (13 to10AWG)
conductor, single or multi stranded
10 pole - 0.75 to 2mm2 (14 to 18AWG)
conductor, single or multi stranded
Termination: Axial screw terminals
Cable Retention force: 22mm dia, 150N
15mm dia, 150N
7mm dia, 80N
Gland Nut Torques:
PX0 range
13-15mm (Yellow - std.) 3.16Nm (28 lbf.in.)
11-13mm (black) 3.16Nm (28 lbf.in.)
9-11mm (white) 3.16Nm (28 lbf.in.)
7-9mm (dark grey) 3.16Nm (28 lbf.in.)
PXA range
20-22mm (Yellow - std.) 3.16Nm (28 lbf.in.)
18-20mm (black) 3.16Nm (28 lbf.in.)
16-18mm (white) 3.16Nm (28 lbf.in.)
14-16mm (dark grey) 3.16Nm (28 lbf.in.)
Tightening Torques:
Panel mount nut 2.25Nm (20 lbf.in.)
Flange & Bulkhead
fixing screws 0.9Nm (8 lbf.in.)
Inserts into Bodies 1.13Nm (10 lbf.in.) to 1.36Nm (12 lbf.in.)
Term screws - 2 to 5 poles 1.0Nm (9 lbf.in.) max
Term screws - 7 pole 0.4Nm (3.5 lbf.in.) max
Term screws - 10 pole 0.25Nm (2.2 lbf.in.) max
Rear thread PX0931 series M36 x 2-6g
Material:
Body Mouldings: Polyamide
Flammability Rating: UL94V-0
UV Resistance: To EN50021: 1999
Contacts: Machined Solid Brass, Nickel plated
O Rings: Nitrile
Panel Sealing Gasket: Silicone Rubber
Compliant
SPECIFICATION
Dimensions:
Overall dimensions of connectors when mated together
PX0911 + PX0921 230 mm max.
PXA911 + PXA921 270 mm max.
PX0911 + PX0931 135 mm max. (to panel)
PXA911 + PX0931 175 mm max. (to panel)
PX0911 + PX0941 145 mm max. (to panel, mid point on flange)
PXA911 + PX0941 174 mm max. (to panel, mid point on flange)
*with 75ºC min. rated cable
†approvals pending for 10 Pole version
CONTACT LAYOUT
2 pole 3 pole 4 pole 5 pole 7 pole
10 pole
BUCCANEER FOR POWER
BUCCANEER POWER
bulgin
a brand of Elektron Technology
www.bulgin.com 25
900 Series Buccaneer®
PXx9 x x / x x / x / x x
PART NO SYSTEM
Series Designation
09 = Standard Cable Accommodation (7-13mm)
A9 = Large Cable Accommodation (14-22mm)
Body Styles
1 = Flex, 2 = Flex In-line,
3 = Panel, 4 = Flange Panel
Contact Termination
1 = Screw Terminal
Number Contacts
02 = 2 pole, 03 = 3 pole, 04 = 4 pole,
05 = 5 pole, 07 = 7 pole, 10 = 10 pole
Contact Type
P = Plug, S = Socket
Cable Acceptance
PX0 version:
Blank = 13-15mm Yellow cable gland (standard)
03 = 11-13mm Black cable gland
02 = 9-11mm White cable gland
01 = 7-9mm Dark Grey cable gland
PXA version:
Blank = 20-22mm Yellow cable gland (standard)
09 = 18-20mm Black cable gland
08 = 16-18mm White cable gland
07 = 14-16mm Dark Grey cable gland
Example:
PX0911/07/P/03 = Flex cable connector with standard cable accommodation body, seven
pin contacts, with gland to suit 11-13mm cable.
BUCCANEER FOR POWER
BUCCANEER POWER
bulgin
a brand of Elektron Technology
High precision instrument gearhead P5 series
P5 series instrument gearheads conform to the international ovoid
standard. The units have established a reputation for excellent running
consistency, strength and reliability & have been engineered to enable a
wide range of permanent magnet stepper motors, ac synchronous &
instrument dc servo motors to be readily fitted.
Typical applications include:
• Scientific instrument drives
• Medical instruments drives
• Laboratory & test equipment drives
• Optical equipment drives
• Valve actuators
• Process control equipment
Precision construction with built-in flexibility:
P5 series gearheads incorporate precision spur cut brass gears and steel
pinions mounted on spindles running in bronze alloy bearings which
feature lubrication reservoirs for extended life, control accuracy and high
dynamic performance. P5 series units have been designed to readily
accept a wide range of motors and offer a comprehensive programme of
options including integral torque limiting clutches and freewheels. These,
together with three standard shaft options and the ability to offer
customised versions make the P5 series gearhead an ideal choice where
precision control of a wide variety of mechanisms where high control
accuracy is required.
Standard gear ratios:
Fast-track delivery of a wide range of P5 series gearheads ensures rapid response to customer demand.
The wide range of stock ratios are ideal when using permanent magnet stepper motors, ac synchronous
motors and high quality dc instrument motors
Order
Code
Ratio Efficiency
( % )
Max Output
Torque
( Nm )
Steps per rev
@ output using.
Stepper motor *
Output speed using
synchronous motor
( rpm ) #
Output speed
Using dc motor
( rpm ) **
P5-G01 25:6 80 0.20 200 60 720-1200
P5-G03 25:4 80 0.25 300 40 500-800
P5-G04 25:3 80 0.35 400 30 360-600
P5-G05 10:1 70 0.40 480 25 300-500
P5-G06 25:2 70 0.45 600 20 240-400
P5-G08 50:3 70 0.60 800 15 180-300
P5-G09 20:1 70 0.65 960 12.5 150-250
P5-G11 25:1 70 0.70 1200 10 120-200
P5-G14 100:3 70 0.75 1600 7.5 90-150
P5-G16 125:3 70 0.80 2000 6 72-120
P5-G17 50:1 70 0.80 2400 5 60-100
P5-G19 125:2 65 0.80 3000 4 48-80
P5-G21 250:3 65 0.80 4000 3 36-60
P5-G23 125:1 65 0.80 6000 2 24-40
P5-G27 250:1 65 0.80 12000 1 12-20
P5-G34 500:1 58 0.85 24000 0.5 6-10
P5-G41 1250:1 58 0.90 60000 12 revs/hour 2.4 - 4
P5-G62 15,000:1 43 1.0 720,000 1 rev / hour 0.1-0.3
Notes: * Based on the use of a stepper motor with 7.5 degree step angle
# Based on the use of a 250 rpm ac synchronous motor
** Based on the use of instrument dc motors with speed ratings of 3000 & 5000 rpm.
Mclennan Servo Supplies Ltd. Tel: +44 (0)8707 700 700 www.mclennan.co.uk
Construction
Precision brass gears
Motor Steel Pinion- shaft
assembly
Precision bearings
Issue 001
High precision instrument gearhead P5 series
P5 Gearbox Dimensions: mm.
Standard output shaft dimensions: mm.
L82 shaft with internal clutch & freewheel
P5 series gearbox may be specified with optional internal
friction clutch or freewheels.
The L82C internal clutch is set to a slip torque of 0.6 Nm and
is designed to protect the gearhead against damage
resulting from excessive torque in a stall condition.
The freewheel options provide a maximum torque of 0.4 Nm
and provide free rotation in the direction of drive.
Typical applications include chart recorder paper feeds.
General specification:
Max recommended input speed rpm 5000
Max Radial load N 50 ( @ 8 mm from mounting face )
Max Static Axial load N 150 N ( for press fit on shaft )
Ambient temperature range Deg. C -30 to +65
Max Axial shaft play μm 250
Max radial shaft play μm 25
Direction of rotation @ output with respect to input:
Ratio Codes Number of stages Direction of rotation
P5-G01 to G04 2 Same
P5-G05 to G17 3 Opposite
P5-G19-G27 4 Same
P5-G34-G41 5 Opposite
P5-G62 7 Opposite
eneral specification:
16.5 Ls 47.6
2.8 ∅ 4 + 0 12
- 0.02
12.7
∅ 3.2 26.2
typical
motor ∅ 8.0
( see following )
( options )
R 24.6
1.2
20
∅ 4.0
2.8
8.0
L81 shaft
12.8
∅ 4.0
9 3.3
L82 shaft
36.3
12.8
∅ 4.0
9
∅ 4.0 3.25
L35 shaft
Mclennan Servo Supplies Ltd. Tel: +44 (0)8707 700 700 www.mclennan.co.uk
Friction Clutch Option Freewheel Option
L82F: clockwise rotation
L82C L82R: counter-clockwise rotation
Output shaft dimensions as L82 standard shaft
20 20
∅ 4
∅ 8 .
∅ 4 . 2.8
L 3396 Shaft
Issue 001
Positional Servodrive assembly P5 series
The P5 positional servodrive incorporates a potentiometer which
is connected to the output shaft to provide an analogue reference
signal proportional to output shaft position.
A variety of potentiometer options are available to provide the
choice of single or multi-turn operation. Although conforming to
the standard panel mount design, the feedback potentiometers
utilised in P5 positional servodrives have a reinforced internal
construction to provide long life in motor driven applications.
The feedback potentiometer is coupled directly to the servodrive’s
output shaft via a backlash-free coupling which incorporates a
friction clutch to protect the potentiometer against an overtravel
condition when an option fitted with end stops is specified.
P5 series Servodrives may be specified with any of the gear ratios
shown on earlier pages to provide a wide choice of speed options.
P5 series Positional Servodrive assembly Dimensions: mm
Standard Potentiometer options
Gearhead ratio code Potentiometer code Description Electrical rotation
P5-G01 to G62- L100 Single turn , continuous rotation > 340 degrees
L101 Single turn with end stops > 300 degrees
L102 Three turn with end stops > 1080 degrees
L103 Ten turn with end stops > 3600 degrees
20 33.5 16.5 12.8 47.6
typical typical
9 R 16
Potentiometer coupling
2.8 ∅ 4 + 0 12
- 0.02
12.7
∅3.2 26.2
motor ∅8
dia. motor
∅ Dm
motor length R 24.6
Lm 1.2
Standard shaft with flat ∅ 4
∅ 38 Flat length: 9 mm
3.3 + 0
- 0.1
Maximum motor diameter ( ∅ Dm ) : 36 mm
Mclennan Servo Supplies Ltd. Tel: +44 (0)8707 700 700 www.mclennan.co.uk Issue 001
High precision instrument gearhead P5 series
Motor options
A wide range of permanent magnet stepper motors,
instrument dc motors and ac synchronous motors may
be fitted to the P5 gearhead using standard mounting
kits.
A wide variety of motors may be factory-fitted to meet a
wide range of performance requirements.
If alternative motors are to be fitted to the P5 gearhead
the following details can be components
Standard Motor mounting kits:
Motor type 1 dimensions for screw mounting to P5 gearbox
8.2 min
11.4 max
1.8 Max 42
∅36 max.
∅2 or 3 ∅3.2
∅ 10
Motor fits directly to gearbox backplate using 2 x M2.5 screws
Motor types 2 dimensions for mounting to P5 gearbox using clip
8.2 min 22 25
11.4 max Motor flange cropped as shown
1.8 Max 49.2
∅51 max ∅ 42 ∅ 50.8
∅2 or 3
∅ 10
Clip type 204CLP00002 Clip type 204CLP00001
Motor types 3 dimensions for mounting to P5 gearbox via adapter
8.1 min 3.5
12.5 max KIT 3A KIT 3B
3 X M2 on 12 mm PCD 3 x M2 on 17 mm PCD
1.5 Max 3 X M2 X 6 long
screws
∅29 max.
∅2 or 3
∅ 7 ∅ 10
Use adapter 204ADT00006 Use adapter 204ADT00015 Adapter
Motor type 4 dimensions for mounting to P5 gearbox via adapter
3.5
12.5
2 X M3 on 28 mm PCD
1.5 Max
∅40. ∅ 18
∅ 3
Use adapter 204ADT00007 Adapter
This motor
must be
factory fitted
Mclennan Servo Supplies Ltd. Tel: +44 (0)8707 700 700 www.mclennan.co.uk Issue 001
High precision instrument gearhead P5 series
Ordering code
Example: P5-G17 L82
Gearbox Code
Ratio Code
Shaft or Potentiometer code
• Specify motor shaft diameter so correct pinion bore is provided
• Specify fitting components such as adapter or fixing clip
• If in doubt please contact your local sales office
• If a special output shaft is required enter details in drawing provided:
Fitting the motor to P5 gearheads:
The pinion is either fitted to the motor shaft by means of high strength Loctitie 638 adhesive or it is press fitted
when the motor rear shaft can be supported. The pinion can be accurately located, in one of two positions, using
the pinion fitting tool 204SPC00001 as shown below:
Pinion Positions
Order
Code
Ratio Pinion
Position
Standard Pinion bores
( motor shaft diameters )
Maximum Pinion bore
( max. motor shaft diameter )
P5-G01 25:6 H 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 3 mm
P5-G03 25:4 H 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 4 mm
P5-G04 25:3 H 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 3 mm
P5-G05 10:1 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm
P5-G06 25:2 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm
P5-G08 50:3 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm
P5-G09 20:1 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm
P5-G11 25:1 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm
5 mm
P5-G14 100:3 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm
P5-G16 125:3 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm
P5-G17 50:1
L
1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm
3 mm
P5-G19 125:2 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm
P5-G21 250:3 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm
P5-G23 125:1 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm
5 mm
P5-G27 250:1 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 3 mm
P5-G34 500:1 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 5 mm
P5-G41 1250:1
H
1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 3 mm
P5-G62 15,000:1 L 1.8 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 3 mm
( 20 max.) ( 20 max )
∅
( ∅ 4 max. )
∅ ( 8 min. )
∅ 4.0 max 2.8
Special shaft detail
Motor mounted directly to gearhead Motor mounted to gearhead via adapter
Pinion High (‘H’ ) position Pinion High (‘H’ ) position
Pinion Low (‘L’ ) position Pinion Low (‘L’ ) position
Spacer 204SPC00001 Spacer 204SPC00001
Mclennan Servo Supplies Ltd. Tel: +44 (0)8707 700 700 www.mclennan.co.uk Issue 001
High precision instrument gearhead P5 series
Complete geared motor assemblies
A wide range of complete assemblies with factory fitted motors can be provided, data on which is available on
request.
When supplied as a complete assembly the motor part number is inserted in the geared motor order code
Examples:
Dc servo motor 9904 120 18 105 Stepper motor 9904 112 32 101
Geared motor code: P5 18 DC 105-G17 L82 P5 32 ST 101-G17 L82
Typical factory fitted geared motor assemblies
Reversible geared ac synchronous motors
• Reversible fixed speed operation
• Choice of two motor power options
• Choice of output speeds from 1 rev/second to 1 rev/ hour
• Choice of 24, 110 or 230 Vac – 50 Hz operation
P532 & P531 SP series
Geared reversible ac synchronous motors
Geared permanent magnet stepper motors
• High precision 7.5 degree stepper motors Choice of four power options
• Choice of 5V or 12 V windings Optional positional feedback potentiometer assembly
P531 ST series P532 ST & P535 series P542 series
Geared stepper motors Geared stepper motors Geared stepper motors
Geared ironless rotor dc servo motors
• High precision coreless servo motors Choice of 6 power options from 22 –40 mm diameter
• Choice of 6, 12 or 24 Vdc windings Optional dc tachogenerator or encoder feedback
• Standard speed options from 1200 – 0.1 rpm Optional positional feedback potentiometer assembly
P522 DC series P528 DC Series P518 DC series
Geared dc motors Geared dc motors Geared dc motors with position feedback
Mclennan Servo Supplies Ltd. Tel: +44 (0)8707 700 700 www.mclennan.co.uk Issue 001
SMU INSTRUMENTS
A Greater Measure of Confidence
www.keithley.com
1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only)
A Tektronix Company
2450 SourceMeter ® SMU Instrument
• Capabilities of analyzers,
curve tracers, and I-V systems
at a fraction of their cost.
• Five-inch, high resolution
capacitive touchscreen GUI
• 0.012% basic measure accuracy
with 6½-digit resolution
• Enhanced sensitivity with
new 20mV and 10nA source/
measure ranges
• Source and sink (4-quadrant)
operation
• Four “Quickset” modes for fast
setup and measurements
• Built-in, context-sensitive front
panel help
• Front panel input banana
jacks; rear panel input triaxial
connections
• 2450 SCPI and TSP® scripting
programming modes
• Model 2400 SCPI-compatible
programming mode
• Front panel USB memory
port for data/programming/
configuration I/O
The Model 2450 is Keithley’s next-generation SourceMeter source measure
unit (SMU) Instrument that truly brings Ohm’s law (current, voltage, and
resistance) testing right to your fingertips. Its innovative graphical user
interface (GUI) and advanced, capacitive touchscreen technology allow
intuitive usage and minimize the learning curve to enable engineers and
scientists to learn faster, work smarter, and invent easier. The 2450 is the
SMU for everyone: a versatile instrument, particularly well-suited for characterizing
modern scaled semiconductors, nano-scale devices and materials,
organic semiconductors, printed electronics, and other small-geometry
and low-power devices. All this combined with Keithley SMU precision and
accuracy allow users to Touch, Test, InventTM with the new favorite go-to
instrument in the lab for years to come.
Learn Faster, Work Smarter, Invent Easier
Unlike conventional instruments with dedicated pushbutton technology and small, obscure, limited-
character displays, the 2450 features a five-inch, full-color, high resolution touchscreen that facilitates
ease of use, learning, and optimizes overall speed and productivity. A simple icon-based menu
structure reduces configuration steps by as much as 50 percent and eliminates the cumbersome
multi-layer menu structures typically used on soft-key instruments. Built-in, context-sensitive help
enables intuitive operation and minimizes the need to review a separate manual. These capabilities
combined with its application versatility make the 2450 the SMU instrument inherently easy to
use for basic and advanced measurement applications, regardless of your experience level with
SMU instruments.
2450 main home screen. View of 2450 menu.
Fourth-Generation,
All-in-One SMU Instrument
The 2450 is the fourth-generation member of
Keithley’s award-winning SourceMeter family
of SMU instruments and leverages the proven
capabilities of the Model 2400 SourceMeter SMU
Instrument. It offers a highly flexible, four-quadrant
voltage and current source/load coupled with
precision voltage and current meters. This all-inone
instrument can be used as a:
• Precision power supply with V and I readback
• True current source
• Digital multimeter (DCV, DCI, ohms, and
power with 6½-digit resolution).
• Precision electronic load
• Trigger controller
-200V -20V +20V +200V
+100mA
+1A
-100mA
-1A
Quad. II Quad. I
Quad. III Quad. IV
2450 power envelope.
Model 2450 SourceMeter® SMU Instrument
SMU INSTRUMENTS
www.keithley.com
1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only)
A Greater Measure of Confidence A Tektronix Company
Online
HELP key
USB 2.0
memory I/O
Front/rear
input selector
Rotary
navigation/
control knob
5˝ color graphical touchscreen display
2450 SourceMeter ® SMU Instrument
Ordering Information
2450 200V, 1A, 20W
SourceMeter Instrument
2450-NFP 200V, 1A, 20W
SourceMeter Instrument,
with No Front Panel
2450-RACK
200V, 1A, 20W
SourceMeter Instrument,
without Handle
2450-NFP-RACK
200V, 1A, 20W
SourceMeter Instrument,
with No Front Panel
and No Handle
Accessories Supplied
8608 High Performance
Test Leads
USB-B-1 USB Cable, Type A to
Type B, 1m (3.3 ft)
CS-1616-3 Safety Interlock
Mating Connector
CA-180-3A TSP-Link/Ethernet Cable
Documentation CD
2450 QuickStart Guide
Test Script Builder Software
(supplied on CD)
KickStart Startup Software
(supplied on CD)
LabVIEW and IVI Drivers
available at www.keithley.com
Model 2400 Model 2450
V-Ranges: 200mV – 200V V-Ranges: 20mV – 200V
I-Ranges: 1μA – 1A I-Ranges: 10nA – 1A
0.012% Basic Accuracy 0.012% Basic Accuracy
Wideband Noise: 4mVrms Typ. Wideband Noise: 2mVrms Typ.
Sweep Types:
Linear, Log, Custom,
Source-Memory
Sweep Types:
Linear, Log, Dual Linear, Dual Log, Custom,
Source-Memory (SCPI 2400 Mode)
5000 Point Reading Buffer >250,000 Point Reading Buffer
>2000 Readings/Sec. >3000 Readings/Sec.
SCPI Programming SCPI (2400 + 2450) + TSP Programming
GPIB GPIB, USB, Ethernet (LXI)
Front/Rear Banana Jacks Front: Banana Jacks, Rear: Triax
Comparison of Model 2400 vs Model 2450.
Ease of Use Beyond the Touchscreen
In addition to its five-inch, color touchscreen, the 2450 front panel has many features that
supplement its speed, user-friendliness, and learnability, including a USB 2.0 memory I/O port, a
HELP key, a rotary navigation/control knob, a front/rear input selector button, and banana jacks for
basic bench applications. The USB 2.0 memory port supports easy data storing, saving instrument
configurations, loading test scripts, and system upgrades. Plus, all front panel buttons are backlit to
enhance visibility in low-light environments.
Model 2450 front panel with high resolution, capacitive touchscreen.
Four “Quickset” modes simplify user setup. With one touch, the instrument can be quickly configured
for various operating modes without the need to configure the instrument indirectly for this operation.
Comprehensive Built-in Connectivity
Rear panel access to rear-input triax connectors,
remote control interfaces (GPIB, USB 2.0, and
LXI/Ethernet), D-sub 9-pin digital I/O port (for
internal/external trigger signals and handler
control), instrument interlock control, and
TSP-Link® jacks enables easy configuration
of multiple instrument test solutions and
eliminates the need to invest in additional
adapter accessories. Quickset modes enable fast setup and time
to measurements.
Model 2450 SourceMeter® SMU Instrument
SMU INSTRUMENTS
A Greater Measure of Confidence
www.keithley.com
1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only)
A Tektronix Company
2450 SourceMeter ® SMU Instrument
Ethernet
Triax inputs
Digital I/O TSP-Link GPIB
Interlock
USB
Rear panel connections are optimized for signal integrity.
Convert Raw Data to Information
The 2450 provides a full plotting and sheet view to display sweeps,
measurement data, and charting right on the screen. It also supports
exporting to a spreadsheet for further analysis, dramatically improving
productivity for research, bench-top testing, device qualification,
and debugging.
Full data display, charting, and export to a spreadsheet lets you
convert raw data to useful information.
TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
Ideal for current/voltage characterization and
functional test of a wide range of today’s modern
electronics and devices, including:
• Nanomaterials and Devices
––Graphene
––Carbon nanotubes
––Nanowires
––Low power nanostructures
• Semiconductor Structures
––Wafers
––Thin films
• Organic Materials and Devices
––E-inks
––Printable electronics
• Energy Efficiency and Lighting
––LEDs/AMOLEDs
––Photovoltaics/Solar Cells
––Batteries
• Discrete and Passive Components
––Two-leaded: Resistors, diodes,
zener diodes, LEDs, disk drive
heads, sensors
––Three-leaded: Small signal
bipolar junction transistors
(BJTs), field effect transistors
(FETs), and more
• Material Characterization
––Resistivity
––Hall Effect
TriggerFlow™ Building Blocks for
Instrument Control and Execution
The 2450 incorporates Keithley’s new TriggerFlow triggering
system that allows user control of instrument execution. Similar to
developing a flow chart, TriggerFlow diagrams are created using
four fundamental building blocks:
• Wait – Waits for an event to occur before the flow continues
• Branch – Branches when a condition has been satisfied
• Action – Initiates an action in the instrument, for example,
measure, source, delay, set digital I/O, etc.
• Notify – Notifies other equipment that an event has occurred
Side text
Model 2450 SourceMeter® SMU Instrument
SMU INSTRUMENTS
www.keithley.com
1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only)
A Greater Measure of Confidence A Tektronix Company
2450 SourceMeter ® SMU Instrument
TriggerFlow building blocks let users create very simple to very
complex triggering models.
A TriggerFlow model using a combination of these building blocks can
be created from the front panel or by sending remote commands. With
the TriggerFlow system, users can build triggering models from very simple
to complex with up to 255 block levels. The 2450 also includes basic
triggering functions, including immediate, timer, and manual triggering.
Unmatched System Integration and
Programming Flexibility
When the 2450 is integrated as part of a multi-channel I-V test
system, the Test Script Processor (TSP®) embedded scripting capability
allows test scripts to be run by the instrument, enabling the user to
create powerful measurement applications with significantly reduced
development times. TSP technology also offers channel expansion
without a mainframe. Keithley’s TSP-Link® channel expansion bus,
which uses a 100 Base T Ethernet cable, connects multiple 2450
instruments and other TSP instruments such as Keithley’s Series 2600B
SourceMeter SMU instruments and Series 3700A Switch/Multimeter
systems in a master-slave configuration that behaves as one integrated
system. The TSP-Link expansion bus supports up to 32 units per GPIB
or IP address, making it easy to scale a system to fit an application’s
particular requirements.
The 2450 also includes a SCPI programming mode that optimizes the
instrument’s new features, as well as a SCPI 2400 mode that provides
backwards compatibility with the existing Model 2400 SourceMeter
instrument. Not only does this preserve your 2400 investment, but it
also eliminates re-work normally associated with upgrading to a new
instrument with new capabilities.
Parallel Test Capability
With the TSP technology in the 2450, multiple devices can be
tested in parallel to meet the needs of device research, advanced
semiconductor lab applications, and even high throughput production test.
This parallel testing capability enables each instrument in the system to
run its own complete test sequence, creating a fully multi-threaded test
environment. The number of tests that can be run in parallel on a 2450
can be as high as the number of instruments in the system.
Free Instrument Control Start-up
Software and Web Interface
KickStart, Keithley’s new instrument control non-programming start-up
software, lets users start taking measurements in minutes. In most cases,
users merely need to make quick measurements, graph the data, and
store the data to disk to perform analysis in software environments
such as Excel.
KickStart offers the following functionality:
• Instrument configuration control to perform I-V characterization
• Native X-Y graphing, panning, and zooming
• Spreadsheet/tabular viewing of data
• Saving and exporting data for further analysis
• Saving of test setups
• Screenshot capturing of graph
• Annotation of tests
• Command line dialog for sending and receiving data
• HTML help
• GPIB, USB 2.0, Ethernet compliant
With KickStart start-up software, users are ready to take
measurements in minutes.
Simplified Programming
with Ready-to-Use Instrument Drivers
For users who want to create their own customized application software,
native National Instruments LabVIEW® drivers, IVI-C, and IVI-COM
drivers are available at www.keithley.com.
Model 2450 SourceMeter® SMU Instrument
Side text
SMU INSTRUMENTS
A Greater Measure of Confidence
www.keithley.com
1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only)
A Tektronix Company
2450 SourceMeter ® SMU Instrument
Voltage Specifications1,2
Source Measure3
Range Resolution
Accuracy (23° ± 5°C)
1 Year
±(% setting + volts)
Noise
(RMS)
(<10Hz) Resolution
Input
Resistance
Accuracy (23° ± 5°C)
1 Year
±(% rdg. + volts)
20.00000 mV 500 nV 0.100% + 200 μV 1 μV 10 nV >10 GW 0.100% + 150 μV
200.0000 mV 5 μV 0.015% + 200 μV 1 μV 100 nV >10 GW 0.012% + 200 μV
2.000000 V 50 μV 0.020% + 300 μV 10 μV 1 μV >10 GW 0.012% + 300 μV
20.00000 V 500 μV 0.015% + 2.4 mV 100 μV 10 μV >10 GW 0.015% + 1 mV
200.0000 V 5 mV 0.015% + 24 mV 1 mV 100 μV >10 GW 0.015% + 10 mV
Current Specifications1,2
Source Measure3
Range Resolution
Accuracy (23° ±5°C)4
1 Year
±(% setting + amps)
Noise
(RMS)
(<10Hz) Resolution
Voltage
Burden
Accuracy (23° ±5°C)
1 Year
±(% rdg. + amps)
10.00000 nA5 500 fA 0.100% + 100 pA 500 fA 10 fA <100 μV 0.100% + 50 pA
100.0000 nA5 5 pA 0.060% + 150 pA 500 fA 100 fA <100 μV 0.060% + 100 pA
1.000000 μA 50 pA 0.025% + 400 pA 5 pA 1 pA <100 μV 0.025% + 300 pA
10.00000 μA 500 pA 0.025% + 1.5 nA 40 pA 10 pA <100 μV 0.025% + 700 pA
100.0000 μA 5 nA 0.020% + 15 nA 400 pA 100 pA <100 μV 0.020% + 6 nA
1.000000 mA 50 nA 0.020% + 150 nA 5 nA 1 nA <100 μV 0.020% + 60 nA
10.00000 mA 500 nA 0.020% + 1.5 μA 40 nA 10 nA <100 μV 0.020% + 600 nA
100.0000 mA 5 μA 0.025% + 15 μA 100 nA 100 nA <100 μV 0.025% + 6 μA
1.000000 A 50 μA 0.067% + 900 μA 3 μA 1 μA <100 μV 0.030% + 500 μA
TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT (0°–18°C and 28°–50°C): ±(0.15 × accuracy specification)/°C.
1. Speed = 1 PLC.
2. All specifications are guaranteed with output ON.
3. Accuracies apply to 2- and 4-wire mode when properly zeroed.
4. For sink mode, 1μA to 100mA range accuracy is ±(0.15% + offset × 4). For 1A range, accuracy is ±(1.5% + offset × 8).
5. Rear panel triax connections only.
Resistance Measurement Accuracy (Local or Remote Sense)2,3
Range
Default
Resolution6
Default
Test Current
Normal Accuracy
(23°C ±5°C)
1 Year, ±(% rdg. + ohms)
Enhanced Accuracy7
(23°C ±5°C)
1 Year, ±(% rdg. + ohms)
<2.000000 W8 1 μW User defined Source IACC + Meas. VACC Meas. IACC + Meas. VACC
20.00000 W 10 μW 100 mA 0.098% + 0.003 W 0.073% + 0.001 W
200.0000 W 100 μW 10 mA 0.077% + 0.03 W 0.053% + 0.01 W
2.000000 kW 1 mW 1 mA 0.066% + 0.3 W 0.045% + 0.1 W
20.00000 kW 10 mW 100 μA 0.063% + 3 W 0.043% + 1 W
200.0000 kW 100 mW 10 μA 0.065% + 30 W 0.046% + 10 W
2.000000 MW 1 W 1 μA 0.110% + 300 W 0.049% + 100 W
20.00000 MW 10 W 1 μA 0.110% + 1 kW 0.052% + 500 W
200.0000 MW 100 W 100 nA 0.655% + 10 kW 0.349% + 5k W
>200.0000 MW8 — User defined Source IACC + Meas. VACC Meas. IACC + Meas. VACC
TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT (0°–18°C and 28°–50°C): ±(0.15 × accuracy specification)/°C.
SOURCE CURRENT, MEASURE RESISTANCE MODE:
Total uncertainty = Isource accuracy + Vmeasure accuracy (4-wire remote sense).
SOURCE VOLTAGE, MEASURE RESISTANCE MODE:
Total uncertainty = Vsource accuracy + Imeasure accuracy (4-wire remote sense).
GUARD OUTPUT IMPEDANCE: 0.5W (DC) in ohms mode.
6. 6.5 digit measure resolution
7. Source readback enabled. Offset compensation ON.
8. Source Current, Measure Resistance or Source Voltage, Measure Resistance only.
ACCESSORIES AVAILABLE
TEST LEADS AND PROBES
1754 2-wire Universal 10-Piece Test Lead Kit
5804 Kelvin (4-Wire) Universal 10-Piece Test Lead Kit
5805 Kelvin (4-Wire) Spring-Loaded Probes
5806 Kelvin Clip Lead Set
5808 Low Cost Single-pin Kelvin Probe Set
5809 Low Cost Kelvin Clip Lead Set
8605 High Performance Modular Test Leads
8606 High Performance Modular Probe Kit
8608 High Performance Clip Lead Set
CABLES, CONNECTORS, ADAPTERS
237-ALG-2 3-slot Male Triax Connector to 3 Alligator Clips
237-BAN-3A Triax to Banana Plug
2450-TRX-BAN Triax to Banana Adapter. Converts the 4 Triax
adapters on the rear panel to 5 banana jacks
7078-TRX-* 3-slot, Low Noise Triax Cable
7078-TRX-GND 3-slot Male Triax To BNC Adapter
(guard removed)
8607 2-wire, 1000V Banana Cables, 1m (3.3 ft)
CA-18-1 Shielded Dual Banana Cable, 1.2m (4 ft)
CAP-31 Protective Shield/Cap for 3-lug Triax Connectors
CS-1546 Triax 3-lug Special Shorting Plug. Shorts center
pin to outer shield
CS-1616-3 Safety Interlock Mating Connector
COMMUNICATION INTERFACES & CABLES
KPCI-488LPA IEEE-488 Interface for PCI Bus
KUSB-488B IEEE-488 USB-to-GPIB Interface Adapter
7007-1 Shielded GPIB Cable, 1m (3.3 ft)
7007-2 Shielded GPIB Cable, 1m (6.6 ft)
CA-180-3A CAT5 Crossover Cable for TSP-Link/Ethernet
USB-B-1 USB Cable, Type A to Type B, 1m (3.3 ft)
TRIGGERING AND CONTROL
2450-TLINK DB-9 to Trigger Link Connector Adapter.
8501-1 Trigger Link Cable, DIN-to-DIN, 1m (3.3 ft)
8501-2 Trigger Link Cable, DIN-to-DIN, 2m (6.6 ft)
RACK MOUNT KITS
4299-8 Single Fixed Rack Mount Kit
4299-9 Dual Fixed Rack Mount Kit
4299-10 Dual Fixed Rack Mount Kit. Mount one 2450
and one Series 26xxB
4299-11 Dual Fixed Rack Mount Kit. Mount one 2450
and one Series 2400, Series 2000, etc.
2450-BenchKit Ears and Handle for 2450-NFP-RACK and
2450-RACK models
TEST FIXTURES
8101-PIV DC Test Fixture
SERVICES AVAILABLE
2450-3Y-EW 1 Year Factory Warranty extended to 3 years
from date of shipment
2450-5Y-EW 1 Year Factory Warranty extended to 5 years
from date of shipment
C/2450-3Y-17025 KeithleyCare® 3 Year ISO 17025 Calibration Plan
C/2450-3Y-DATA KeithleyCare 3 Year Calibration w/Data Plan
C/2450-3Y-STD KeithleyCare 3 Year Std. Calibration Plan
C/2450-5Y-17025 KeithleyCare 5 Year ISO 17025 Calibration Plan
C/2450-5Y-DATA KeithleyCare 5 Year Calibration w/Data Plan
C/2450-5Y-STD KeithleyCare 5 Year Std. Calibration Plan
Model 2450 specifications
Model 2450 specifications
SMU INSTRUMENTS
www.keithley.com
1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only)
A Greater Measure of Confidence A Tektronix Company
OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
MAX. OUTPUT POWER: 20W, four-quadrant source or sink operation.
SOURCE LIMITS: Vsource: ±21V (≤ 1A range), ±210V (≤ 100mA range)
Isource: ±1.05A (≤ 20V range), ±105mA (≤ 200V range)
OVERRANGE: 105% of range, source and measure.
REGULATION: Voltage: Line: 0.01% of range. Load: 0.01% of range + 100µV.
Current: Line: 0.01% of range. Load: 0.01% of range + 100pA.
SOURCE LIMITS: Voltage Source Current Limit: Bipolar current limit set with single value. Min. 10% of range.
Current Source Voltage Limit: Bipolar voltage limit set with single value. Min. 10% of range.
V-LIMIT / I-LIMIT ACCURACY: Add 0.3% of setting and ±0.02% of reading to base specification.
OVERSHOOT: Voltage Source: <0.1% typical (full scale step, resistive load, 20V range, 10mA I-Limit.
Current Source: <0.1% typical (1mA step, RLoad = 10kW, 20V range)
RANGE CHANGE OVERSHOOT: Overshoot into a fully resistive 100kW load, 10Hz to 20MHz BW, adjacent ranges: 250mV typical
OUTPUT SETTLING TIME: Time required to reach 0.1% of final value, 20V range, 100mA I-Limit: <200µs typical.
MAXIMUM SLEW RATE: 0.2V/μs, 200V range, 100mA limit into a 2kW load (typical)
OVER VOLTAGE PROTECTION: User selectable values, 5% tolerance. Factory default = none.
VOLTAGE SOURCE NOISE: 10Hz–1MHz (RMS): 2mV typical into a resistive load.
COMMON MODE VOLTAGE: 250V DC.
COMMON MODE ISOLATION: >1GW, <1000pF.
NOISE REJECTION (TYPICAL):
LOAD IMPEDANCE: 20nF typical (standard). Stable into 50μF typical (High-C mode).
High-C mode valid for ≥100µA ranges, ≥200mV ranges.
MAX. VOLTAGE DROP BETWEEN FORCE and SENSE TERMINALS: 5V.
MAX. SENSE LEAD RESISTANCE: 1MW for rated accuracy.
SENSE INPUT IMPEDANCE: >10GW.
GUARD OFFSET VOLTAGE: <300µV, typical
System Measurement Speeds 9
READING RATES (READINGS/SECOND) TYPICAL FOR 60Hz (50Hz):
SCRIPT (TSP) Programmed
Measure Source-Measure Sweep
NPLC/Trigger Origin To Mem. To GPIB To USB To LAN To Mem. To GPIB To USB To LAN
0.01 / Internal 3130 (2800) 2830 (2570) 2825 (2600) 2790 (2530) 1710 (1620) 1620 (1540) 1630 (1540) 1620 (1540)
0.01 / External 2170 (2050) 2150 (2030) 2170 (2040) 2160 (1990) 1670 (1590) 1580 (1500) 1590 (1510) 1580 (1510)
0.1 / Internal 540 (460) 530 (450) 530 (450) 530 (450) 470 (410) 460 (400) 470 (400) 470 (400)
0.1 / External 500 (430) 490 (420) 500 (430) 500 (420) 470 (400) 460 (390) 460 (400) 460 (400)
1.00 / Internal 59 (49) 58 (49) 59 (49) 59 (49) 58 (48) 58 (48) 58 (48) 58 (48)
1.00 / External 58 (48) 57 (48) 58 (48) 58 (48) 57 (48) 57 (47) 57 (48) 57 (48)
SCPI Programmed 10
Measure Source-Measure Sweep
NPLC/Trigger Origin To Mem. To GPIB To USB To LAN To Mem. To GPIB To USB To LAN
0.01 / Internal 3130 (2800) 3060 (2760) 3000 (2790) 3010 (2710) 1710 (1630) 1610 (1600) 1440 (1380) 1690 (1590)
0.01 / External 2350 (2200) 2320 (2170) 2340 (2190) 2320 (2130) 1680 (1590) 1560 (1570) 1410 (1360) 1660 (1560)
0.1 / Internal 540 (460) 540 (450) 540 (460) 540 (450) 470 (410) 470 (410) 450 (390) 470 (410)
0.1 / External 510 (440) 510 (430) 510 (440) 510 (430) 470 (400) 470 (400) 450 (390) 470 (400)
1.00 / Internal 59 (49) 59 (49) 59 (49) 59 (49) 58 (48) 58 (48) 57 (48) 58 (48)
1.00 / External 58 (49) 58 (49) 58 (49) 58 (49) 58 (48) 58 (48) 57 (47) 58 (48)
9. Reading rates applicable for voltage or current measurements, autozero off, autorange off, filter off, binary reading format, and source readback off.
10. SCPI programming mode. Speeds do not apply to SCPI 2400 mode.
2450 SourceMeter ® SMU Instrument
NPLC NMRR CMRR
0.01 — 60 dB
0.1 — 60 dB
1 60 dB 100 dB*
* Except lowest two current ranges ~90dB.
Model 2450 specifications
SMU INSTRUMENTS
2450 SourceMeter ® SMU Instrument
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS (default mode unless specified)
FACTORY DEFAULT STANDARD POWER-UP: SCPI MODE.
SOURCE OUTPUT MODES: Fixed DC Level, Memory/Configuration
List (mixed function), Stair (linear and log).
SOURCE MEMORY LIST: 100 points max. (SCPI 2400 Mode only).
MEMORY BUFFER: >250,000 readings. Includes selected measured value(s)
and time stamp.
REAL-TIME CLOCK: Lithium battery backup (3 yr. + battery life).
REMOTE INTERFACES:
GPIB: IEEE-488.1 compliant. Supports IEEE-488.2 common commands
and status model topology.
USB Device (rear panel, type B): 2.0 Full Speed USBTMC.
USB Host (front panel, type A): USB 2.0, support for flash drives, FAT32.
Ethernet: RJ-45 (10/100BT)
PROGRAMMABILITY: SCPI or TSP command sets.
TSP MODE: Embedded Test Script Processor (TSP) accessible from any host interface.
IP CONFIGURATION: Static or DHCP
EXPANSION INTERFACE: The TSP-Link expansion interface allows TSP enabled
instruments to trigger and communicate with each other.
LXI COMPLIANCE: 1.4 LXI Core 2011.
DISPLAY: 5 inch capacitive touch, color TFT WVGA (800x480) with LED backlight.
INPUT SIGNAL CONNECTIONS: Front: Banana. Rear: Triaxial (3-Lug)
INTERLOCK: Active High Input
DIGITAL I/O INTERFACE:
Lines: 6 Input/Output user defined for digital I/O or triggering
Connector: 9-pin female D
Input Signal Levels: 0.7 V (maximum logic low), 3.7 V (minimum logic high)
Input Voltage Limits: -0.25 V (Abs. minimum), +5.25 V (Abs. maximum)
Maximum Source Current: +2.0 mA @ >2.7 V (per pin)
Maximum Sink Current: -50 mA @ 0.7 V (per pin, solid-state fuse protected)
5 V Power Supply Pin: Limited to 500 mA @ >4V (solid-state fuse protected)
Handler: User definable Start of Test, End of Test, 4 category bits
COOLING: Forced air, variable speed.
OVER TEMPERATURE PROTECTION: Internally sensed temperature overload puts unit in
standby mode.
POWER SUPPLY: 100V to 240V RMS, 50–60Hz (automatically detected at power up).
VA RATING: 190 volt-amps max.
ALTITUDE: Maximum 2000 meters above sea level.
EMC: Conforms to European Union EMC Directive.
SAFETY: NRTL listed to UL61010-1 and UL61010-2-30. Conforms with European Union Low
Voltage Directive.
VIBRATION: MIL-PRF-28800F Class 3 Random.
WARM-UP: 1 hour to rated accuracies.
DIMENSIONS: (With handle and bumpers): 106mm high × 255mm wide × 425mm deep
(4.18 in × 10.05 in × 16.75 in). (Without handle and bumpers): 88mm high × 213mm wide
× 403mm deep (3.46 in × 8.39 in × 15.87 in).
WEIGHT: With bumpers & handle: 4.04 kg (8.9 lbs.). Without bumpers & handle 3.58 kg (7.9 lbs.).
ENVIRONMENT: Operating: 0°–50°C, 70% R.H. up to 35°C. Derate 3% R.H./°C, 35°–50°C.
Storage: –25°C to 65°C.
ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED: Test Leads, USB Cable, Ethernet/TSP Cable, Interlock Adapter, Power
Cord, Quick Start Guide, CD User’s Manual.
Model 2450 specifications
SMU INSTRUMENTS
2450
SourceMeter ® SMU Instrument
Model 2450 SourceMeter® SMU Instrument
Specifications are subject to change without notice. All Keithley trademarks and trade names are the property of Keithley Instruments, Inc.
All other trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective companies.
KEITHLEY INSTRUMENTS, INC. ■ 28775 AURORA RD. ■ CLEVELAND, OH 44139-1891 ■ 440-248-0400 ■ Fax: 440-248-6168 ■ 1-888-KEITHLEY ■ www.keithley.com
A Greater Measure of Confidence
BENELUX
+31-40-267-5506
www.keithley.nl
BRAZIL
55-11-4058-0229
www.keithley.com
CHINA
86-10-8447-5556
www.keithley.com.cn
FRANCE
+33-01-69-86-83-60
www.keithley.fr
GERMANY
+49-89-84-93-07-40
www.keithley.de
INDIA
080-30792600
www.keithley.in
ITALY
+39-049-762-3950
www.keithley.it
JAPAN
81-120-441-046
www.keithley.jp
KOREA
82-2-6917-5000
www.keithley.co.kr
MALAYSIA
60-4-643-9679
www.keithley.com
MEXICO
52-55-5424-7907
www.keithley.com
RUSSIA
+7-495-664-7564
www.keithley.ru
SINGAPORE
01-800-8255-2835
www.keithley.com.sg
TAIWAN
886-3-572-9077
www.keithley.com.tw
UNITED KINGDOM
+44-1344-39-2450
www.keithley.co.ukw
For further information on how to purchase or to locate a sales partner please visit www.keithley.com/company/buy
© Copyright 2013 Keithley Instruments, Inc. Printed in the U.S.A No. 3219 07.26.13
SN54HC244, SN74HC244
OCTAL BUFFERS AND LINE DRIVERS
WITH 3-STATE OUTPUTS
SCLS130D – DECEMBER 1982 – REVISED AUGUST 2003
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 1
Wide Operating Voltage Range of 2 V to 6 V
High-Current Outputs Drive Up To
15 LSTTL Loads
3-State Outputs Drive Bus Lines or Buffer
Memory Address Registers
Low Power Consumption, 80-μA Max ICC
Typical tpd = 11 ns
±6-mA Output Drive at 5 V
Low Input Current of 1 μA Max
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
1OE
1A1
2Y4
1A2
2Y3
1A3
2Y2
1A4
2Y1
GND
VCC
2OE
1Y1
2A4
1Y2
2A3
1Y3
2A2
1Y4
2A1
SN54HC244 . . . J OR W PACKAGE
SN74HC244 . . . DB, DW, N, NS, OR PW PACKAGE
(TOP VIEW)
3 2 1 20 19
9 10 11 12 13
4
5
6
7
8
18
17
16
15
14
1Y1
2A4
1Y2
2A3
1Y3
1A2
2Y3
1A3
2Y2
1A4
SN54HC244 . . . FK PACKAGE
(TOP VIEW)
2Y4
1A1
1OE
1Y4
2A2 2OE
2Y1
GND
2A1
VCC
description/ordering information
These octal buffers and line drivers are designed specifically to improve both the performance and density of
3-state memory address drivers, clock drivers, and bus-oriented receivers and transmitters. The ’HC244
devices are organized as two 4-bit buffers/drivers with separate output-enable (OE) inputs. When OE is low,
the device passes noninverted data from the A inputs to the Y outputs. When OE is high, the outputs are in the
high-impedance state.
ORDERING INFORMATION
TA PACKAGE† ORDERABLE
PART NUMBER
TOP-SIDE
MARKING
PDIP – N Tube of 20 SN74HC244N SN74HC244N
–40 C to 85 C
SOIC – DW
Tube of 25 SN74HC244DW
HC244
Reel of 2000 SN74HC244DWR
40°85°SOP – NS Reel of 2000 SN74HC244NSR HC244
SSOP – DB Reel of 2000 SN74HC244DBR HC244
Tube of 70 SN74HC244PW
TSSOP – PW
Reel of 2000 SN74HC244PWR HC244
Reel of 250 SN74HC244PWT
55 125 CDIP – J Tube of 20 SNJ54HC244J SNJ54HC244J
–55°C to 125°C
CFP – W Tube of 85 SNJ54HC244W SNJ54HC244W
LCCC – FK Tube of 55 SNJ54HC244FK SNJ54HC244FK
† Package drawings, standard packing quantities, thermal data, symbolization, and PCB design guidelines are
available at www.ti.com/sc/package.
Copyright 2003, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Please be aware that an important notice concerning availability, standard warranty, and use in critical applications of
Texas Instruments semiconductor products and disclaimers thereto appears at the end of this data sheet.
PRODUCTION DATA information is current as of publication date.
Products conform to specifications per the terms of Texas Instruments
standard warranty. Production processing does not necessarily include
testing of all parameters.
On products compliant to MIL-PRF-38535, all parameters are tested
unless otherwise noted. On all other products, production
processing does not necessarily include testing of all parameters.
SN54HC244, SN74HC244
OCTAL BUFFERS AND LINE DRIVERS
WITH 3-STATE OUTPUTS
SCLS130D – DECEMBER 1982 – REVISED AUGUST 2003
2 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
FUNCTION TABLE
(each buffer/driver)
INPUTS OUTPUT
OE A
Y
L H H
L L L
H X Z
logic diagram (positive logic)
1
2
4
6
8
19
11
13
15
17 3
5
7
9
12
14
16
18
1Y1 2Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4
1OE 2OE
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
absolute maximum ratings over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)†
Supply voltage range, VCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –0.5 V to 7 V
Input clamp current, IIK (VI < 0 or VI > VCC) (see Note 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ±20 mA
Output clamp current, IOK (VO < 0 or VO > VCC) (see Note 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ±20 mA
Continuous output current, IO (VO = 0 to VCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ±35 mA
Continuous current through VCC or GND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ±70 mA
Package thermal impedance, θJA (see Note 2): DB package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70°C/W
DW package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58°C/W
N package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69°C/W
NS package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60°C/W
PW package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83°C/W
Storage temperature range, Tstg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –65°C to 150°C
† Stresses beyond those listed under “absolute maximum ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings only, and
functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under “recommended operating conditions” is not
implied. Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.
NOTES: 1. The input and output voltage ratings may be exceeded if the input and output current ratings are observed.
2. The package thermal impedance is calculated in accordance with JESD 51-7.
SN54HC244, SN74HC244
OCTAL BUFFERS AND LINE DRIVERS
WITH 3-STATE OUTPUTS
SCLS130D – DECEMBER 1982 – REVISED AUGUST 2003
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 3
recommended operating conditions (see Note 3)
SN54HC244 SN74HC244
UNIT
MIN NOM MAX MIN NOM MAX
VCC Supply voltage 2 5 6 2 5 6 V
V VCC = 2 V 1.5 1.5
VIH High-level input voltage
VCC = 4.5 V 3.15 3.15 V
VCC = 6 V 4.2 4.2
V Low-level input voltage
VCC = 2 V 0.5 0.5
VIL VCC = 4.5 V 1.35 1.35 V
VCC = 6 V 1.8 1.8
VI Input voltage 0 VCC 0 VCC V
VO Output voltage 0 VCC 0 VCC V
t/ v VCC = 2 V 1000 1000
Δt/Δv Input transition rise/fall time
VCC = 4.5 V 500 500 ns
VCC = 6 V 400 400
TA Operating free-air temperature –55 125 –40 85 °C
NOTE 3: All unused inputs of the device must be held at VCC or GND to ensure proper device operation. Refer to the TI application report,
Implications of Slow or Floating CMOS Inputs, literature number SCBA004.
electrical characteristics over recommended operating free-air temperature range (unless
otherwise noted)
PARAMETER TEST CONDITIONS VCC
TA = 25°C SN54HC244 SN74HC244
UNIT
MIN TYP MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX
V V = V or V
I = –20 A
2 V 1.9 1.998 1.9 1.9
V
IOH μA 4.5 V 4.4 4.499 4.4 4.4
VOH VI VIH VIL OH
OH I IH IL 6 V 5.9 5.999 5.9 5.9 IOH = –6 mA 4.5 V 3.98 4.3 3.7 3.84
IOH = –7.8 mA 6 V 5.48 5.8 5.2 5.34
V V = V or V
I = 20 A
2 V 0.002 0.1 0.1 0.1
V
IOL μA 4.5 V 0.001 0.1 0.1 0.1
VOL VI VIH VIL OL
OL I IH IL 6 V 0.001 0.1 0.1 0.1 IOL = 6 mA 4.5 V 0.17 0.26 0.4 0.33
IOL = 7.8 mA 6 V 0.15 0.26 0.4 0.33
II VI = VCC or 0 6 V ±0.1 ±100 ±1000 ±1000 nA
IOZ VO = VCC or 0, VI = VIH or VIL 6 V ±0.01 ±0.5 ±10 ±5 μA
ICC VI = VCC or 0, IO = 0 6 V 8 160 80 μA
Ci 2 V to 6 V 3 10 10 10 pF
SN54HC244, SN74HC244
OCTAL BUFFERS AND LINE DRIVERS
WITH 3-STATE OUTPUTS
SCLS130D – DECEMBER 1982 – REVISED AUGUST 2003
4 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
switching characteristics over recommended operating free-air temperature range, CL = 50 pF
(unless otherwise noted) (see Figure 1)
PARAMETER
FROM
TO
VCC
TA = 25°C SN54HC244 SN74HC244
UNIT
(INPUT)
(OUTPUT)
MIN TYP MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX
t 2 V 40 115 170 145
tpd A Y
4.5 V 13 23 34 29 ns
6 V 11 20 29 25
t 2 V 75 150 225 190
ten OE Y
4.5 V 15 30 45 38 ns
6 V 13 26 38 32
t 2 V 75 150 225 190
tdis OE Y
4.5 V 15 30 45 38 ns
6 V 13 26 38 32
t 2 V 28 60 90 75
tt Y
4.5 V 8 12 18 15 ns
6 V 6 10 15 13
switching characteristics over recommended operating free-air temperature range, CL = 150 pF
(unless otherwise noted) (see Figure 1)
PARAMETER
FROM
TO
VCC
TA = 25°C SN54HC244 SN74HC244
UNIT
(INPUT)
(OUTPUT)
MIN TYP MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX
t 2 V 56 165 245 210
tpd A Y
4.5 V 18 33 49 42 ns
6 V 15 28 42 35
t 2 V 100 200 300 250
ten OE Y
4.5 V 20 40 60 50 ns
6 V 17 34 51 43
t Y
2 V 45 210 315 265
tt 4.5 V 17 42 63 53 ns
6 V 13 36 53 45
operating characteristics, TA = 25°C
PARAMETER TEST CONDITIONS TYP UNIT
Cpd Power dissipation capacitance per buffer/driver No load 35 pF
SN54HC244, SN74HC244
OCTAL BUFFERS AND LINE DRIVERS
WITH 3-STATE OUTPUTS
SCLS130D – DECEMBER 1982 – REVISED AUGUST 2003
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 5
PARAMETER MEASUREMENT INFORMATION
VOLTAGE WAVEFORM
INPUT RISE AND FALL TIMES
50% 50%
10% 10%
90% 90%
VCC
0 V
tr tf
Input
VOLTAGE WAVEFORMS
PROPAGATION DELAY AND OUTPUT TRANSITION TIMES
50%
50% 50%
10% 10%
90% 90%
VCC
VOH
VOL
0 V
tr tf
Input
In-Phase
Output
50%
tPLH tPHL
50% 50%
10% 10%
90% 90%
VOH
VOL
tf tr
tPHL tPLH
Out-of-Phase
Output
50%
10%
90%
VCC
≈VCC
VOL
0 V
Output
Control
(Low-Level
Enabling)
Output
Waveform 1
(See Note B)
50%
tPZL tPLZ
VOLTAGE WAVEFORMS
ENABLE AND DISABLE TIMES FOR 3-STATE OUTPUTS
VOH
≈0 V
50%
50%
tPZH tPHZ
Output
Waveform 2
(See Note B)
≈VCC
Test
From Output Point
Under Test
CL
(see Note A)
RL
VCC
S1
S2
LOAD CIRCUIT
PARAMETER CL
tPZH
tpd or tt
tdis
ten
tPZL
tPHZ
tPLZ
1 kΩ
1 kΩ
50 pF
or
150 pF
50 pF
Open Closed
RL S1
Closed Open
S2
Open Closed
Closed Open
50 pF
or
150 pF
–– Open Open
NOTES: A. CL includes probe and test-fixture capacitance.
B. Waveform 1 is for an output with internal conditions such that the output is low except when disabled by the output control.
Waveform 2 is for an output with internal conditions such that the output is high except when disabled by the output control.
C. Phase relationships between waveforms were chosen arbitrarily. All input pulses are supplied by generators having the following
characteristics: PRR ≤ 1 MHz, ZO = 50 Ω, tr = 6 ns, tf = 6 ns.
D. The outputs are measured one at a time with one input transition per measurement.
E. tPLZ and tPHZ are the same as tdis.
F. tPZL and tPZH are the same as ten.
G. tPLH and tPHL are the same as tpd.
Figure 1. Load Circuit and Voltage Waveforms
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com 22-Feb-2014
Addendum-Page 1
PACKAGING INFORMATION
Orderable Device Status
(1)
Package Type Package
Drawing
Pins Package
Qty
Eco Plan
(2)
Lead/Ball Finish
(6)
MSL Peak Temp
(3)
Op Temp (°C) Device Marking
(4/5)
Samples
5962-8409601VRA ACTIVE CDIP J 20 1 TBD A42 N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 5962-8409601VR
A
SNV54HC244J
5962-8409601VSA ACTIVE CFP W 20 25 TBD A42 N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 5962-8409601VS
A
SNV54HC244W
84096012A ACTIVE LCCC FK 20 1 TBD POST-PLATE N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 84096012A
SNJ54HC
244FK
8409601RA ACTIVE CDIP J 20 1 TBD A42 N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 8409601RA
SNJ54HC244J
8409601SA ACTIVE CFP W 20 1 TBD A42 N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 8409601SA
SNJ54HC244W
JM38510/65705B2A ACTIVE LCCC FK 20 1 TBD POST-PLATE N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 JM38510/
65705B2A
JM38510/65705BRA ACTIVE CDIP J 20 1 TBD A42 N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 JM38510/
65705BRA
JM38510/65705BSA ACTIVE CFP W 20 1 TBD A42 N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 JM38510/
65705BSA
M38510/65705B2A ACTIVE LCCC FK 20 1 TBD POST-PLATE N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 JM38510/
65705B2A
M38510/65705BRA ACTIVE CDIP J 20 1 TBD A42 N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 JM38510/
65705BRA
M38510/65705BSA ACTIVE CFP W 20 1 TBD A42 N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 JM38510/
65705BSA
SN54HC244J ACTIVE CDIP J 20 1 TBD A42 N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 SN54HC244J
SN74HC244ADBLE OBSOLETE SSOP DB 20 TBD Call TI Call TI -40 to 85
SN74HC244APWLE OBSOLETE TSSOP PW 20 TBD Call TI Call TI -40 to 85
SN74HC244DBLE OBSOLETE SSOP DB 20 TBD Call TI Call TI -40 to 85
SN74HC244DBR ACTIVE SSOP DB 20 2000 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244
SN74HC244DBRE4 ACTIVE SSOP DB 20 2000 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com 22-Feb-2014
Addendum-Page 2
Orderable Device Status
(1)
Package Type Package
Drawing
Pins Package
Qty
Eco Plan
(2)
Lead/Ball Finish
(6)
MSL Peak Temp
(3)
Op Temp (°C) Device Marking
(4/5)
Samples
SN74HC244DBRG4 ACTIVE SSOP DB 20 2000 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244
SN74HC244DW ACTIVE SOIC DW 20 25 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244
SN74HC244DWE4 ACTIVE SOIC DW 20 25 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244
SN74HC244DWG4 ACTIVE SOIC DW 20 25 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244
SN74HC244DWR ACTIVE SOIC DW 20 2000 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU | CU SN Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244
SN74HC244DWRE4 ACTIVE SOIC DW 20 2000 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244
SN74HC244DWRG4 ACTIVE SOIC DW 20 2000 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244
SN74HC244N ACTIVE PDIP N 20 20 Pb-Free
(RoHS)
CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type -40 to 85 SN74HC244N
SN74HC244N3 OBSOLETE PDIP N 20 TBD Call TI Call TI -40 to 85
SN74HC244NE4 ACTIVE PDIP N 20 20 Pb-Free
(RoHS)
CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type -40 to 85 SN74HC244N
SN74HC244NSR ACTIVE SO NS 20 2000 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244
SN74HC244NSRE4 ACTIVE SO NS 20 2000 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244
SN74HC244NSRG4 ACTIVE SO NS 20 2000 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244
SN74HC244PW ACTIVE TSSOP PW 20 70 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244
SN74HC244PWE4 ACTIVE TSSOP PW 20 70 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244
SN74HC244PWG4 ACTIVE TSSOP PW 20 70 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244
SN74HC244PWLE OBSOLETE TSSOP PW 20 TBD Call TI Call TI -40 to 85
SN74HC244PWR ACTIVE TSSOP PW 20 2000 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244
SN74HC244PWRE4 ACTIVE TSSOP PW 20 2000 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com 22-Feb-2014
Addendum-Page 3
Orderable Device Status
(1)
Package Type Package
Drawing
Pins Package
Qty
Eco Plan
(2)
Lead/Ball Finish
(6)
MSL Peak Temp
(3)
Op Temp (°C) Device Marking
(4/5)
Samples
SN74HC244PWRG4 ACTIVE TSSOP PW 20 2000 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244
SN74HC244PWT ACTIVE TSSOP PW 20 250 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244
SN74HC244PWTE4 ACTIVE TSSOP PW 20 250 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244
SN74HC244PWTG4 ACTIVE TSSOP PW 20 250 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 HC244
SN74HC244QDWRG4Q1 ACTIVE SOIC DW 20 2000 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM HC244Q
SNJ54HC244FK ACTIVE LCCC FK 20 1 TBD POST-PLATE N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 84096012A
SNJ54HC
244FK
SNJ54HC244J ACTIVE CDIP J 20 1 TBD A42 N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 8409601RA
SNJ54HC244J
SNJ54HC244W ACTIVE CFP W 20 1 TBD A42 N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 8409601SA
SNJ54HC244W
(1) The marketing status values are defined as follows:
ACTIVE: Product device recommended for new designs.
LIFEBUY: TI has announced that the device will be discontinued, and a lifetime-buy period is in effect.
NRND: Not recommended for new designs. Device is in production to support existing customers, but TI does not recommend using this part in a new design.
PREVIEW: Device has been announced but is not in production. Samples may or may not be available.
OBSOLETE: TI has discontinued the production of the device.
(2) Eco Plan - The planned eco-friendly classification: Pb-Free (RoHS), Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt), or Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) - please check http://www.ti.com/productcontent for the latest availability
information and additional product content details.
TBD: The Pb-Free/Green conversion plan has not been defined.
Pb-Free (RoHS): TI's terms "Lead-Free" or "Pb-Free" mean semiconductor products that are compatible with the current RoHS requirements for all 6 substances, including the requirement that
lead not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous materials. Where designed to be soldered at high temperatures, TI Pb-Free products are suitable for use in specified lead-free processes.
Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt): This component has a RoHS exemption for either 1) lead-based flip-chip solder bumps used between the die and package, or 2) lead-based die adhesive used between
the die and leadframe. The component is otherwise considered Pb-Free (RoHS compatible) as defined above.
Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br): TI defines "Green" to mean Pb-Free (RoHS compatible), and free of Bromine (Br) and Antimony (Sb) based flame retardants (Br or Sb do not exceed 0.1% by weight
in homogeneous material)
(3) MSL, Peak Temp. - The Moisture Sensitivity Level rating according to the JEDEC industry standard classifications, and peak solder temperature.
(4) There may be additional marking, which relates to the logo, the lot trace code information, or the environmental category on the device.
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com 22-Feb-2014
Addendum-Page 4
(5) Multiple Device Markings will be inside parentheses. Only one Device Marking contained in parentheses and separated by a "~" will appear on a device. If a line is indented then it is a continuation
of the previous line and the two combined represent the entire Device Marking for that device.
(6) Lead/Ball Finish - Orderable Devices may have multiple material finish options. Finish options are separated by a vertical ruled line. Lead/Ball Finish values may wrap to two lines if the finish
value exceeds the maximum column width.
Important Information and Disclaimer:The information provided on this page represents TI's knowledge and belief as of the date that it is provided. TI bases its knowledge and belief on information
provided by third parties, and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of such information. Efforts are underway to better integrate information from third parties. TI has taken and
continues to take reasonable steps to provide representative and accurate information but may not have conducted destructive testing or chemical analysis on incoming materials and chemicals.
TI and TI suppliers consider certain information to be proprietary, and thus CAS numbers and other limited information may not be available for release.
In no event shall TI's liability arising out of such information exceed the total purchase price of the TI part(s) at issue in this document sold by TI to Customer on an annual basis.
OTHER QUALIFIED VERSIONS OF SN54HC244, SN54HC244-SP, SN74HC244 :
• Catalog: SN74HC244, SN54HC244
• Automotive: SN74HC244-Q1, SN74HC244-Q1
• Enhanced Product: SN74HC244-EP, SN74HC244-EP
• Military: SN54HC244
• Space: SN54HC244-SP
NOTE: Qualified Version Definitions:
• Catalog - TI's standard catalog product
• Automotive - Q100 devices qualified for high-reliability automotive applications targeting zero defects
• Enhanced Product - Supports Defense, Aerospace and Medical Applications
• Military - QML certified for Military and Defense Applications
• Space - Radiation tolerant, ceramic packaging and qualified for use in Space-based application
TAPE AND REEL INFORMATION
*All dimensions are nominal
Device Package
Type
Package
Drawing
Pins SPQ Reel
Diameter
(mm)
Reel
Width
W1 (mm)
A0
(mm)
B0
(mm)
K0
(mm)
P1
(mm)
W
(mm)
Pin1
Quadrant
SN74HC244DBR SSOP DB 20 2000 330.0 16.4 8.2 7.5 2.5 12.0 16.0 Q1
SN74HC244DWR SOIC DW 20 2000 330.0 24.4 10.8 13.3 2.7 12.0 24.0 Q1
SN74HC244DWRG4 SOIC DW 20 2000 330.0 24.4 10.8 13.3 2.7 12.0 24.0 Q1
SN74HC244NSR SO NS 20 2000 330.0 24.4 8.2 13.0 2.5 12.0 24.0 Q1
SN74HC244PWR TSSOP PW 20 2000 330.0 16.4 6.95 7.1 1.6 8.0 16.0 Q1
SN74HC244PWT TSSOP PW 20 250 330.0 16.4 6.95 7.1 1.6 8.0 16.0 Q1
SN74HC244QDWRG4Q1 SOIC DW 20 2000 330.0 24.4 10.8 13.3 2.7 12.0 24.0 Q1
PACKAGE MATERIALS INFORMATION
www.ti.com 20-Dec-2013
Pack Materials-Page 1
*All dimensions are nominal
Device Package Type Package Drawing Pins SPQ Length (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm)
SN74HC244DBR SSOP DB 20 2000 367.0 367.0 38.0
SN74HC244DWR SOIC DW 20 2000 600.0 144.0 84.0
SN74HC244DWRG4 SOIC DW 20 2000 367.0 367.0 45.0
SN74HC244NSR SO NS 20 2000 367.0 367.0 45.0
SN74HC244PWR TSSOP PW 20 2000 367.0 367.0 38.0
SN74HC244PWT TSSOP PW 20 250 367.0 367.0 38.0
SN74HC244QDWRG4Q1 SOIC DW 20 2000 367.0 367.0 45.0
PACKAGE MATERIALS INFORMATION
www.ti.com 20-Dec-2013
Pack Materials-Page 2
MECHANICAL DATA
MSSO002E – JANUARY 1995 – REVISED DECEMBER 2001
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
DB (R-PDSO-G**) PLASTIC SMALL-OUTLINE
4040065 /E 12/01
28 PINS SHOWN
Gage Plane
8,20
7,40
0,55
0,95
0,25
38
12,90
12,30
28
10,50
24
8,50
Seating Plane
7,90 9,90
30
10,50
9,90
0,38
5,60
5,00
15
0,22
14
A
28
1
16 20
6,50 6,50
14
0,05 MIN
5,90 5,90
DIM
A MAX
A MIN
PINS **
2,00 MAX
6,90
7,50
0,65 0,15 M
0°–8°
0,10
0,09
0,25
NOTES: A. All linear dimensions are in millimeters.
B. This drawing is subject to change without notice.
C. Body dimensions do not include mold flash or protrusion not to exceed 0,15.
D. Falls within JEDEC MO-150
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, enhancements, improvements and other
changes to its semiconductor products and services per JESD46, latest issue, and to discontinue any product or service per JESD48, latest
issue. Buyers should obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and
complete. All semiconductor products (also referred to herein as “components”) are sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale
supplied at the time of order acknowledgment.
TI warrants performance of its components to the specifications applicable at the time of sale, in accordance with the warranty in TI’s terms
and conditions of sale of semiconductor products. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary
to support this warranty. Except where mandated by applicable law, testing of all parameters of each component is not necessarily
performed.
TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or the design of Buyers’ products. Buyers are responsible for their products and
applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with Buyers’ products and applications, Buyers should provide
adequate design and operating safeguards.
TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any patent right, copyright, mask work right, or
other intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI components or services are used. Information
published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license to use such products or services or a warranty or
endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual property of the
third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI.
Reproduction of significant portions of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration
and is accompanied by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered
documentation. Information of third parties may be subject to additional restrictions.
Resale of TI components or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that component or service
voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated TI component or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice.
TI is not responsible or liable for any such statements.
Buyer acknowledges and agrees that it is solely responsible for compliance with all legal, regulatory and safety-related requirements
concerning its products, and any use of TI components in its applications, notwithstanding any applications-related information or support
that may be provided by TI. Buyer represents and agrees that it has all the necessary expertise to create and implement safeguards which
anticipate dangerous consequences of failures, monitor failures and their consequences, lessen the likelihood of failures that might cause
harm and take appropriate remedial actions. Buyer will fully indemnify TI and its representatives against any damages arising out of the use
of any TI components in safety-critical applications.
In some cases, TI components may be promoted specifically to facilitate safety-related applications. With such components, TI’s goal is to
help enable customers to design and create their own end-product solutions that meet applicable functional safety standards and
requirements. Nonetheless, such components are subject to these terms.
No TI components are authorized for use in FDA Class III (or similar life-critical medical equipment) unless authorized officers of the parties
have executed a special agreement specifically governing such use.
Only those TI components which TI has specifically designated as military grade or “enhanced plastic” are designed and intended for use in
military/aerospace applications or environments. Buyer acknowledges and agrees that any military or aerospace use of TI components
which have not been so designated is solely at the Buyer's risk, and that Buyer is solely responsible for compliance with all legal and
regulatory requirements in connection with such use.
TI has specifically designated certain components as meeting ISO/TS16949 requirements, mainly for automotive use. In any case of use of
non-designated products, TI will not be responsible for any failure to meet ISO/TS16949.
Products Applications
Audio www.ti.com/audio Automotive and Transportation www.ti.com/automotive
Amplifiers amplifier.ti.com Communications and Telecom www.ti.com/communications
Data Converters dataconverter.ti.com Computers and Peripherals www.ti.com/computers
DLP® Products www.dlp.com Consumer Electronics www.ti.com/consumer-apps
DSP dsp.ti.com Energy and Lighting www.ti.com/energy
Clocks and Timers www.ti.com/clocks Industrial www.ti.com/industrial
Interface interface.ti.com Medical www.ti.com/medical
Logic logic.ti.com Security www.ti.com/security
Power Mgmt power.ti.com Space, Avionics and Defense www.ti.com/space-avionics-defense
Microcontrollers microcontroller.ti.com Video and Imaging www.ti.com/video
RFID www.ti-rfid.com
OMAP Applications Processors www.ti.com/omap TI E2E Community e2e.ti.com
Wireless Connectivity www.ti.com/wirelessconnectivity
Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265
Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
SLLS047L − FEBRUARY 1989 − REVISED MARCH 2004
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 1
Meets or Exceeds TIA/EIA-232-F and ITU
Recommendation V.28
Operates From a Single 5-V Power Supply
With 1.0-F Charge-Pump Capacitors
Operates Up To 120 kbit/s
Two Drivers and Two Receivers
±30-V Input Levels
Low Supply Current . . . 8 mA Typical
ESD Protection Exceeds JESD 22
− 2000-V Human-Body Model (A114-A)
Upgrade With Improved ESD (15-kV HBM)
and 0.1-F Charge-Pump Capacitors is
Available With the MAX202
Applications
− TIA/EIA-232-F, Battery-Powered Systems,
Terminals, Modems, and Computers
description/ordering information
The MAX232 is a dual driver/receiver that includes a capacitive voltage generator to supply TIA/EIA-232-F
voltage levels from a single 5-V supply. Each receiver converts TIA/EIA-232-F inputs to 5-V TTL/CMOS levels.
These receivers have a typical threshold of 1.3 V, a typical hysteresis of 0.5 V, and can accept ±30-V inputs.
Each driver converts TTL/CMOS input levels into TIA/EIA-232-F levels. The driver, receiver, and
voltage-generator functions are available as cells in the Texas Instruments LinASIC library.
ORDERING INFORMATION
TA PACKAGE† ORDERABLE
PART NUMBER
TOP-SIDE
MARKING
PDIP (N) Tube of 25 MAX232N MAX232N
SOIC (D)
Tube of 40 MAX232D
MAX232
0°C to 70°C
Reel of 2500 MAX232DR
SOIC (DW)
Tube of 40 MAX232DW
MAX232
Reel of 2000 MAX232DWR
SOP (NS) Reel of 2000 MAX232NSR MAX232
PDIP (N) Tube of 25 MAX232IN MAX232IN
SOIC (D)
Tube of 40 MAX232ID
MAX232I
−40°C to 85°C
Reel of 2500 MAX232IDR
40 85 SOIC (DW)
Tube of 40 MAX232IDW
MAX232I
Reel of 2000 MAX232IDWR
† Package drawings, standard packing quantities, thermal data, symbolization, and PCB design
guidelines are available at www.ti.com/sc/package.
!"# $"%&! ' #( Copyright 2004, Texas Instruments Incorporated
'"! ! $#!! $# )# # #* " #
' ' + ,( '"! $!# - '# #!# &, !&"'#
# - && $ # # (
Please be aware that an important notice concerning availability, standard warranty, and use in critical applications of
Texas Instruments semiconductor products and disclaimers thereto appears at the end of this data sheet.
LinASIC is a trademark of Texas Instruments.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
C1+
VS+
C1−
C2+
C2−
VS−
T2OUT
R2IN
VCC
GND
T1OUT
R1IN
R1OUT
T1IN
T2IN
R2OUT
MAX232 . . . D, DW, N, OR NS PACKAGE
MAX232I . . . D, DW, OR N PACKAGE
(TOP VIEW)
SLLS047L − FEBRUARY 1989 − REVISED MARCH 2004
2 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
Function Tables
EACH DRIVER
INPUT
TIN
OUTPUT
TOUT
L H
H L
H = high level, L = low
level
EACH RECEIVER
INPUT
RIN
OUTPUT
ROUT
L H
H L
H = high level, L = low
level
logic diagram (positive logic)
T1IN T1OUT
R1OUT R1IN
T2IN T2OUT
R2OUT R2IN
11
10
12
9
14
7
13
8
SLLS047L − FEBRUARY 1989 − REVISED MARCH 2004
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 3
absolute maximum ratings over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)†
Input supply voltage range, VCC (see Note 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −0.3 V to 6 V
Positive output supply voltage range, VS+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VCC − 0.3 V to 15 V
Negative output supply voltage range, VS− . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −0.3 V to −15 V
Input voltage range, VI: Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −0.3 V to VCC + 0.3 V
Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ±30 V
Output voltage range, VO: T1OUT, T2OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS− − 0.3 V to VS+ + 0.3 V
R1OUT, R2OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −0.3 V to VCC + 0.3 V
Short-circuit duration: T1OUT, T2OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unlimited
Package thermal impedance, θJA (see Notes 2 and 3): D package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73°C/W
DW package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57°C/W
N package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67°C/W
NS package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64°C/W
Operating virtual junction temperature, TJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150°C
Storage temperature range, Tstg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −65°C to 150°C
† Stresses beyond those listed under “absolute maximum ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings only, and
functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under “recommended operating conditions” is not
implied. Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.
NOTES: 1. All voltages are with respect to network GND.
2. Maximum power dissipation is a function of TJ(max), θJA, and TA. The maximum allowable power dissipation at any allowable
ambient temperature is PD = (TJ(max) − TA)/θJA. Operating at the absolute maximum TJ of 150°C can affect reliability.
3. The package thermal impedance is calculated in accordance with JESD 51-7.
recommended operating conditions
MIN NOM MAX UNIT
VCC Supply voltage 4.5 5 5.5 V
VIH High-level input voltage (T1IN,T2IN) 2 V
VIL Low-level input voltage (T1IN, T2IN) 0.8 V
R1IN, R2IN Receiver input voltage ±30 V
TA Operating free-air temperature
MAX232 0 70
°C
MAX232I −40 85
electrical characteristics over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air
temperature (unless otherwise noted) (see Note 4 and Figure 4)
PARAMETER TEST CONDITIONS MIN TYP‡ MAX UNIT
ICC Supply current
VCC = 5.5 V,
TA = 25°C
All outputs open,
8 10 mA
‡ All typical values are at VCC = 5 V and TA = 25°C.
NOTE 4: Test conditions are C1−C4 = 1 μF at VCC = 5 V ± 0.5 V.
SLLS047L − FEBRUARY 1989 − REVISED MARCH 2004
4 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
DRIVER SECTION
electrical characteristics over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air
temperature range (see Note 4)
PARAMETER TEST CONDITIONS MIN TYP† MAX UNIT
VOH High-level output voltage T1OUT, T2OUT RL = 3 kΩ to GND 5 7 V
VOL Low-level output voltage‡ T1OUT, T2OUT RL = 3 kΩ to GND −7 −5 V
ro Output resistance T1OUT, T2OUT VS+ = VS− = 0, VO = ±2 V 300 Ω
IOS§ Short-circuit output current T1OUT, T2OUT VCC = 5.5 V, VO = 0 ±10 mA
IIS Short-circuit input current T1IN, T2IN VI = 0 200 μA
† All typical values are at VCC = 5 V, TA = 25°C.
‡ The algebraic convention, in which the least-positive (most negative) value is designated minimum, is used in this data sheet for logic voltage
levels only.
§ Not more than one output should be shorted at a time.
NOTE 4: Test conditions are C1−C4 = 1 μF at VCC = 5 V ± 0.5 V.
switching characteristics, VCC = 5 V, TA = 25°C (see Note 4)
PARAMETER TEST CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX UNIT
SR Driver slew rate
RL = 3 kΩ to 7 kΩ,
See Figure 2
30 V/μs
SR(t) Driver transition region slew rate See Figure 3 3 V/μs
Data rate One TOUT switching 120 kbit/s
NOTE 4: Test conditions are C1−C4 = 1 μF at VCC = 5 V ± 0.5 V.
RECEIVER SECTION
electrical characteristics over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air
temperature range (see Note 4)
PARAMETER TEST CONDITIONS MIN TYP† MAX UNIT
VOH High-level output voltage R1OUT, R2OUT IOH = −1 mA 3.5 V
VOL Low-level output voltage‡ R1OUT, R2OUT IOL = 3.2 mA 0.4 V
VIT+
Receiver positive-going input
threshold voltage
R1IN, R2IN VCC = 5 V, TA = 25°C 1.7 2.4 V
VIT−
Receiver negative-going input
threshold voltage
R1IN, R2IN VCC = 5 V, TA = 25°C 0.8 1.2 V
Vhys Input hysteresis voltage R1IN, R2IN VCC = 5 V 0.2 0.5 1 V
ri Receiver input resistance R1IN, R2IN VCC = 5, TA = 25°C 3 5 7 kΩ
† All typical values are at VCC = 5 V, TA = 25°C.
‡ The algebraic convention, in which the least-positive (most negative) value is designated minimum, is used in this data sheet for logic voltage
levels only.
NOTE 4: Test conditions are C1−C4 = 1 μF at VCC = 5 V ± 0.5 V.
switching characteristics, VCC = 5 V, TA = 25°C (see Note 4 and Figure 1)
PARAMETER TYP UNIT
tPLH(R) Receiver propagation delay time, low- to high-level output 500 ns
tPHL(R) Receiver propagation delay time, high- to low-level output 500 ns
NOTE 4: Test conditions are C1−C4 = 1 μF at VCC = 5 V ± 0.5 V.
SLLS047L − FEBRUARY 1989 − REVISED MARCH 2004
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 5
PARAMETER MEASUREMENT INFORMATION
≤10 ns
VCC
R1IN
or
R2IN
R1OUT
or
R2OUT
RL = 1.3 kΩ
See Note C
CL = 50 pF
(see Note B)
TEST CIRCUIT
≤10 ns
Input
Output
tPHL
tPLH
1.5 V
VOL
VOH
0 V
3 V
10%
90%
50%
500 ns
WAVEFORMS
1.5 V
90%
50% 10%
NOTES: A. The pulse generator has the following characteristics: ZO = 50 Ω, duty cycle ≤ 50%.
B. CL includes probe and jig capacitance.
C. All diodes are 1N3064 or equivalent.
Pulse
Generator
(see Note A)
Figure 1. Receiver Test Circuit and Waveforms for tPHL and tPLH Measurements
SLLS047L − FEBRUARY 1989 − REVISED MARCH 2004
6 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
PARAMETER MEASUREMENT INFORMATION
T1IN or T2IN T1OUT or T2OUT
CL = 10 pF
(see Note B)
TEST CIRCUIT
≤10 ns ≤10 ns
Input
Output
tPHL
tPLH
VOL
VOH
0 V
3 V
10%
90%
50%
5 μs
WAVEFORMS
90%
50%
10%
RL
90%
10%
90%
10%
t tTLH THL
SR
0.8 (VOH – VOL)
tTLH
or
0.8 (VOL – VOH)
tTHL
NOTES: A. The pulse generator has the following characteristics: ZO = 50 Ω, duty cycle ≤ 50%.
B. CL includes probe and jig capacitance.
Pulse
Generator
(see Note A)
EIA-232 Output
Figure 2. Driver Test Circuit and Waveforms for tPHL and tPLH Measurements (5-μs Input)
EIA-232 Output
−3 V
3 V
−3 V
3 V
3 kΩ
1.5 V 10%
90%
WAVEFORMS
20 μs
1.5 V
90%
10%
VOH
VOL
t tTLH THL
≤10 ns ≤10 ns
TEST CIRCUIT
CL = 2.5 nF
Pulse
Generator
(see Note A)
Input
Output
SR
6 V
tTHL or tTLH
NOTE A: The pulse generator has the following characteristics: ZO = 50 Ω, duty cycle ≤ 50%.
Figure 3. Test Circuit and Waveforms for tTHL and tTLH Measurements (20-μs Input)
SLLS047L − FEBRUARY 1989 − REVISED MARCH 2004
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 7
APPLICATION INFORMATION
1 μF
1 μF VS+
VS−
2
6
14
7
13
8
C1+
C1−
C2+
C2−
1
3
4
5
11
10
12
9
GND
15
0 V
VCC
16
5 V
EIA-232 Output
EIA-232 Output
EIA-232 Input
EIA-232 Input
1 μF
8.5 V
−8.5 V
1 μF
From CMOS or TTL
To CMOS or TTL
CBYPASS = 1 μF
C1
C2
C3†
C4
† C3 can be connected to VCC or GND.
NOTES: A. Resistor values shown are nominal.
B. Nonpolarized ceramic capacitors are acceptable. If polarized tantalum or electrolytic capacitors are used, they should be
connected as shown. In addition to the 1-μF capacitors shown, the MAX202 can operate with 0.1-μF capacitors.
+
+
−
Figure 4. Typical Operating Circuit
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com 18-Oct-2013
Addendum-Page 1
PACKAGING INFORMATION
Orderable Device Status
(1)
Package Type Package
Drawing
Pins Package
Qty
Eco Plan
(2)
Lead/Ball Finish
(6)
MSL Peak Temp
(3)
Op Temp (°C) Device Marking
(4/5)
Samples
MAX232D ACTIVE SOIC D 16 40 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 MAX232
MAX232DE4 ACTIVE SOIC D 16 40 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 MAX232
MAX232DG4 ACTIVE SOIC D 16 40 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 MAX232
MAX232DR ACTIVE SOIC D 16 2500 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU | CU SN Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 MAX232
MAX232DRE4 ACTIVE SOIC D 16 2500 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 MAX232
MAX232DRG4 ACTIVE SOIC D 16 2500 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 MAX232
MAX232DW ACTIVE SOIC DW 16 40 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 MAX232
MAX232DWE4 ACTIVE SOIC DW 16 40 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 MAX232
MAX232DWG4 ACTIVE SOIC DW 16 40 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 MAX232
MAX232DWR ACTIVE SOIC DW 16 2000 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU | CU SN Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 MAX232
MAX232DWRE4 ACTIVE SOIC DW 16 2000 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 MAX232
MAX232DWRG4 ACTIVE SOIC DW 16 2000 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 MAX232
MAX232ID ACTIVE SOIC D 16 40 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 MAX232I
MAX232IDE4 ACTIVE SOIC D 16 40 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 MAX232I
MAX232IDG4 ACTIVE SOIC D 16 40 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 MAX232I
MAX232IDR ACTIVE SOIC D 16 2500 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 MAX232I
MAX232IDRE4 ACTIVE SOIC D 16 2500 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 MAX232I
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com 18-Oct-2013
Addendum-Page 2
Orderable Device Status
(1)
Package Type Package
Drawing
Pins Package
Qty
Eco Plan
(2)
Lead/Ball Finish
(6)
MSL Peak Temp
(3)
Op Temp (°C) Device Marking
(4/5)
Samples
MAX232IDRG4 ACTIVE SOIC D 16 2500 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 MAX232I
MAX232IDW ACTIVE SOIC DW 16 40 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 MAX232I
MAX232IDWE4 ACTIVE SOIC DW 16 40 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 MAX232I
MAX232IDWG4 ACTIVE SOIC DW 16 40 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 MAX232I
MAX232IDWR ACTIVE SOIC DW 16 2000 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU | CU SN Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 MAX232I
MAX232IDWRE4 ACTIVE SOIC DW 16 2000 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 MAX232I
MAX232IDWRG4 ACTIVE SOIC DW 16 2000 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 MAX232I
MAX232IN ACTIVE PDIP N 16 25 Pb-Free
(RoHS)
CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type -40 to 85 MAX232IN
MAX232INE4 ACTIVE PDIP N 16 25 Pb-Free
(RoHS)
CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type -40 to 85 MAX232IN
MAX232N ACTIVE PDIP N 16 25 Pb-Free
(RoHS)
CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type 0 to 70 MAX232N
MAX232NE4 ACTIVE PDIP N 16 25 Pb-Free
(RoHS)
CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type 0 to 70 MAX232N
MAX232NSR ACTIVE SO NS 16 2000 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 MAX232
MAX232NSRE4 ACTIVE SO NS 16 2000 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 MAX232
MAX232NSRG4 ACTIVE SO NS 16 2000 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 MAX232
(1) The marketing status values are defined as follows:
ACTIVE: Product device recommended for new designs.
LIFEBUY: TI has announced that the device will be discontinued, and a lifetime-buy period is in effect.
NRND: Not recommended for new designs. Device is in production to support existing customers, but TI does not recommend using this part in a new design.
PREVIEW: Device has been announced but is not in production. Samples may or may not be available.
OBSOLETE: TI has discontinued the production of the device.
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com 18-Oct-2013
Addendum-Page 3
(2) Eco Plan - The planned eco-friendly classification: Pb-Free (RoHS), Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt), or Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) - please check http://www.ti.com/productcontent for the latest availability
information and additional product content details.
TBD: The Pb-Free/Green conversion plan has not been defined.
Pb-Free (RoHS): TI's terms "Lead-Free" or "Pb-Free" mean semiconductor products that are compatible with the current RoHS requirements for all 6 substances, including the requirement that
lead not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous materials. Where designed to be soldered at high temperatures, TI Pb-Free products are suitable for use in specified lead-free processes.
Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt): This component has a RoHS exemption for either 1) lead-based flip-chip solder bumps used between the die and package, or 2) lead-based die adhesive used between
the die and leadframe. The component is otherwise considered Pb-Free (RoHS compatible) as defined above.
Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br): TI defines "Green" to mean Pb-Free (RoHS compatible), and free of Bromine (Br) and Antimony (Sb) based flame retardants (Br or Sb do not exceed 0.1% by weight
in homogeneous material)
(3) MSL, Peak Temp. - The Moisture Sensitivity Level rating according to the JEDEC industry standard classifications, and peak solder temperature.
(4) There may be additional marking, which relates to the logo, the lot trace code information, or the environmental category on the device.
(5) Multiple Device Markings will be inside parentheses. Only one Device Marking contained in parentheses and separated by a "~" will appear on a device. If a line is indented then it is a continuation
of the previous line and the two combined represent the entire Device Marking for that device.
(6) Lead/Ball Finish - Orderable Devices may have multiple material finish options. Finish options are separated by a vertical ruled line. Lead/Ball Finish values may wrap to two lines if the finish
value exceeds the maximum column width.
Important Information and Disclaimer:The information provided on this page represents TI's knowledge and belief as of the date that it is provided. TI bases its knowledge and belief on information
provided by third parties, and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of such information. Efforts are underway to better integrate information from third parties. TI has taken and
continues to take reasonable steps to provide representative and accurate information but may not have conducted destructive testing or chemical analysis on incoming materials and chemicals.
TI and TI suppliers consider certain information to be proprietary, and thus CAS numbers and other limited information may not be available for release.
In no event shall TI's liability arising out of such information exceed the total purchase price of the TI part(s) at issue in this document sold by TI to Customer on an annual basis.
TAPE AND REEL INFORMATION
*All dimensions are nominal
Device Package
Type
Package
Drawing
Pins SPQ Reel
Diameter
(mm)
Reel
Width
W1 (mm)
A0
(mm)
B0
(mm)
K0
(mm)
P1
(mm)
W
(mm)
Pin1
Quadrant
MAX232DR SOIC D 16 2500 330.0 16.4 6.5 10.3 2.1 8.0 16.0 Q1
MAX232DR SOIC D 16 2500 330.0 16.4 6.5 10.3 2.1 8.0 16.0 Q1
MAX232DR SOIC D 16 2500 330.0 16.8 6.5 10.3 2.1 8.0 16.0 Q1
MAX232DRG4 SOIC D 16 2500 330.0 16.4 6.5 10.3 2.1 8.0 16.0 Q1
MAX232DRG4 SOIC D 16 2500 330.0 16.4 6.5 10.3 2.1 8.0 16.0 Q1
MAX232DWR SOIC DW 16 2000 330.0 16.4 10.75 10.7 2.7 12.0 16.0 Q1
MAX232DWRG4 SOIC DW 16 2000 330.0 16.4 10.75 10.7 2.7 12.0 16.0 Q1
MAX232IDR SOIC D 16 2500 330.0 16.4 6.5 10.3 2.1 8.0 16.0 Q1
MAX232IDWR SOIC DW 16 2000 330.0 16.4 10.75 10.7 2.7 12.0 16.0 Q1
MAX232IDWRG4 SOIC DW 16 2000 330.0 16.4 10.75 10.7 2.7 12.0 16.0 Q1
PACKAGE MATERIALS INFORMATION
www.ti.com 5-Oct-2013
Pack Materials-Page 1
*All dimensions are nominal
Device Package Type Package Drawing Pins SPQ Length (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm)
MAX232DR SOIC D 16 2500 367.0 367.0 38.0
MAX232DR SOIC D 16 2500 333.2 345.9 28.6
MAX232DR SOIC D 16 2500 364.0 364.0 27.0
MAX232DRG4 SOIC D 16 2500 333.2 345.9 28.6
MAX232DRG4 SOIC D 16 2500 367.0 367.0 38.0
MAX232DWR SOIC DW 16 2000 366.0 364.0 50.0
MAX232DWRG4 SOIC DW 16 2000 367.0 367.0 38.0
MAX232IDR SOIC D 16 2500 333.2 345.9 28.6
MAX232IDWR SOIC DW 16 2000 366.0 364.0 50.0
MAX232IDWRG4 SOIC DW 16 2000 367.0 367.0 38.0
PACKAGE MATERIALS INFORMATION
www.ti.com 5-Oct-2013
Pack Materials-Page 2
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, enhancements, improvements and other
changes to its semiconductor products and services per JESD46, latest issue, and to discontinue any product or service per JESD48, latest
issue. Buyers should obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and
complete. All semiconductor products (also referred to herein as “components”) are sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale
supplied at the time of order acknowledgment.
TI warrants performance of its components to the specifications applicable at the time of sale, in accordance with the warranty in TI’s terms
and conditions of sale of semiconductor products. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary
to support this warranty. Except where mandated by applicable law, testing of all parameters of each component is not necessarily
performed.
TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or the design of Buyers’ products. Buyers are responsible for their products and
applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with Buyers’ products and applications, Buyers should provide
adequate design and operating safeguards.
TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any patent right, copyright, mask work right, or
other intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI components or services are used. Information
published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license to use such products or services or a warranty or
endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual property of the
third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI.
Reproduction of significant portions of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration
and is accompanied by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered
documentation. Information of third parties may be subject to additional restrictions.
Resale of TI components or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that component or service
voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated TI component or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice.
TI is not responsible or liable for any such statements.
Buyer acknowledges and agrees that it is solely responsible for compliance with all legal, regulatory and safety-related requirements
concerning its products, and any use of TI components in its applications, notwithstanding any applications-related information or support
that may be provided by TI. Buyer represents and agrees that it has all the necessary expertise to create and implement safeguards which
anticipate dangerous consequences of failures, monitor failures and their consequences, lessen the likelihood of failures that might cause
harm and take appropriate remedial actions. Buyer will fully indemnify TI and its representatives against any damages arising out of the use
of any TI components in safety-critical applications.
In some cases, TI components may be promoted specifically to facilitate safety-related applications. With such components, TI’s goal is to
help enable customers to design and create their own end-product solutions that meet applicable functional safety standards and
requirements. Nonetheless, such components are subject to these terms.
No TI components are authorized for use in FDA Class III (or similar life-critical medical equipment) unless authorized officers of the parties
have executed a special agreement specifically governing such use.
Only those TI components which TI has specifically designated as military grade or “enhanced plastic” are designed and intended for use in
military/aerospace applications or environments. Buyer acknowledges and agrees that any military or aerospace use of TI components
which have not been so designated is solely at the Buyer's risk, and that Buyer is solely responsible for compliance with all legal and
regulatory requirements in connection with such use.
TI has specifically designated certain components as meeting ISO/TS16949 requirements, mainly for automotive use. In any case of use of
non-designated products, TI will not be responsible for any failure to meet ISO/TS16949.
Products Applications
Audio www.ti.com/audio Automotive and Transportation www.ti.com/automotive
Amplifiers amplifier.ti.com Communications and Telecom www.ti.com/communications
Data Converters dataconverter.ti.com Computers and Peripherals www.ti.com/computers
DLP® Products www.dlp.com Consumer Electronics www.ti.com/consumer-apps
DSP dsp.ti.com Energy and Lighting www.ti.com/energy
Clocks and Timers www.ti.com/clocks Industrial www.ti.com/industrial
Interface interface.ti.com Medical www.ti.com/medical
Logic logic.ti.com Security www.ti.com/security
Power Mgmt power.ti.com Space, Avionics and Defense www.ti.com/space-avionics-defense
Microcontrollers microcontroller.ti.com Video and Imaging www.ti.com/video
RFID www.ti-rfid.com
OMAP Applications Processors www.ti.com/omap TI E2E Community e2e.ti.com
Wireless Connectivity www.ti.com/wirelessconnectivity
Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265
Copyright © 2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
LM555
www.ti.com SNAS548C –FEBRUARY 2000–REVISED MARCH 2013
LM555 Timer
Check for Samples: LM555
1FEATURES DESCRIPTION
The LM555 is a highly stable device for generating 2• Direct Replacement for SE555/NE555
accurate time delays or oscillation. Additional
• Timing from Microseconds through Hours terminals are provided for triggering or resetting if
• Operates in Both Astable and Monostable desired. In the time delay mode of operation, the time
Modes is precisely controlled by one external resistor and
• Adjustable Duty Cycle capacitor. For astable operation as an oscillator, the
free running frequency and duty cycle are accurately
• Output Can Source or Sink 200 mA controlled with two external resistors and one
• Output and Supply TTL Compatible capacitor. The circuit may be triggered and reset on
• Temperature Stability Better than 0.005% per falling waveforms, and the output circuit can source
°C or sink up to 200mA or drive TTL circuits.
• Normally On and Normally Off Output
• Available in 8-pin VSSOP Package
APPLICATIONS
• Precision Timing
• Pulse Generation
• Sequential Timing
• Time Delay Generation
• Pulse Width Modulation
• Pulse Position Modulation
• Linear Ramp Generator
Schematic Diagram
1
Please be aware that an important notice concerning availability, standard warranty, and use in critical applications of
Texas Instruments semiconductor products and disclaimers thereto appears at the end of this data sheet.
2All trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
PRODUCTION DATA information is current as of publication date. Copyright © 2000–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Products conform to specifications per the terms of the Texas
Instruments standard warranty. Production processing does not
necessarily include testing of all parameters.
LM555
SNAS548C –FEBRUARY 2000–REVISED MARCH 2013 www.ti.com
Connection Diagram
Top View
Figure 1. PDIP, SOIC,
and VSSOP Packages
These devices have limited built-in ESD protection. The leads should be shorted together or the device placed in conductive foam
during storage or handling to prevent electrostatic damage to the MOS gates.
Absolute Maximum Ratings(1) (2)
Supply Voltage +18V
Power Dissipation (3)
LM555CM, LM555CN(4) 1180 mW
LM555CMM 613 mW
Operating Temperature Ranges
LM555C 0°C to +70°C
Storage Temperature Range −65°C to +150°C
Soldering Information
PDIP Package
Soldering (10 Seconds) 260°C
Small Outline Packages
(SOIC and VSSOP)
Vapor Phase (60 Seconds) 215°C
Infrared (15 Seconds) 220°C
(1) Absolute Maximum Ratings indicate limits beyond which damage to the device may occur. Operating Ratings indicate conditions for
which the device is functional, but do not ensure specific performance limits. Electrical Characteristics state DC and AC electrical
specifications under particular test conditions which ensures specific performance limits. This assumes that the device is within the
Operating Ratings. Specifications are not ensured for parameters where no limit is given, however, the typical value is a good indication
of device performance.
(2) If Military/Aerospace specified devices are required, please contact the TI Sales Office/Distributors for availability and specifications.
(3) For operating at elevated temperatures the device must be derated above 25°C based on a +150°C maximum junction temperature and
a thermal resistance of 106°C/W (PDIP), 170°C/W (S0IC-8), and 204°C/W (VSSOP) junction to ambient.
(4) Refer to RETS555X drawing of military LM555H and LM555J versions for specifications.
2 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2000–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Product Folder Links: LM555
LM555
www.ti.com SNAS548C –FEBRUARY 2000–REVISED MARCH 2013
Electrical Characteristics (1) (2)
(TA = 25°C, VCC = +5V to +15V, unless otherwise specified)
Limits
Parameter Test Conditions LM555C Units
Min Typ Max
Supply Voltage 4.5 16 V
Supply Current VCC = 5V, RL = ∞ 3 6
VCC = 15V, RL = ∞ 10 15 mA
(Low State) (3)
Timing Error, Monostable
Initial Accuracy 1 %
Drift with Temperature RA = 1k to 100kΩ, 50 ppm/°C
C = 0.1μF, (4)
Accuracy over Temperature 1.5 %
Drift with Supply 0.1 %/V
Timing Error, Astable
Initial Accuracy 2.25 %
Drift with Temperature RA, RB = 1k to 100kΩ, 150 ppm/°C
C = 0.1μF, (4)
Accuracy over Temperature 3.0 %
Drift with Supply 0.30 %/V
Threshold Voltage 0.667 x VCC
Trigger Voltage VCC = 15V 5 V
VCC = 5V 1.67 V
Trigger Current 0.5 0.9 μA
Reset Voltage 0.4 0.5 1 V
Reset Current 0.1 0.4 mA
Threshold Current (5) 0.1 0.25 μA
Control Voltage Level VCC = 15V 9 10 11
V
VCC = 5V 2.6 3.33 4
Pin 7 Leakage Output High 1 100 nA
Pin 7 Sat (6)
Output Low VCC = 15V, I7 = 15mA 180 mV
Output Low VCC = 4.5V, I7 = 4.5mA 80 200 mV
Output Voltage Drop (Low) VCC = 15V
ISINK = 10mA 0.1 0.25 V
ISINK = 50mA 0.4 0.75 V
ISINK = 100mA 2 2.5 V
ISINK = 200mA 2.5 V
VCC = 5V
ISINK = 8mA V
ISINK = 5mA 0.25 0.35 V
(1) All voltages are measured with respect to the ground pin, unless otherwise specified.
(2) Absolute Maximum Ratings indicate limits beyond which damage to the device may occur. Operating Ratings indicate conditions for
which the device is functional, but do not ensure specific performance limits. Electrical Characteristics state DC and AC electrical
specifications under particular test conditions which ensures specific performance limits. This assumes that the device is within the
Operating Ratings. Specifications are not ensured for parameters where no limit is given, however, the typical value is a good indication
of device performance.
(3) Supply current when output high typically 1 mA less at VCC = 5V.
(4) Tested at VCC = 5V and VCC = 15V.
(5) This will determine the maximum value of RA + RB for 15V operation. The maximum total (RA + RB) is 20MΩ.
(6) No protection against excessive pin 7 current is necessary providing the package dissipation rating will not be exceeded.
Copyright © 2000–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback 3
Product Folder Links: LM555
LM555
SNAS548C –FEBRUARY 2000–REVISED MARCH 2013 www.ti.com
Electrical Characteristics (1) (2) (continued)
(TA = 25°C, VCC = +5V to +15V, unless otherwise specified)
Limits
Parameter Test Conditions LM555C Units
Min Typ Max
Output Voltage Drop (High) ISOURCE = 200mA, VCC = 15V 12.5 V
ISOURCE = 100mA, VCC = 15V 12.75 13.3 V
VCC = 5V 2.75 3.3 V
Rise Time of Output 100 ns
Fall Time of Output 100 ns
4 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2000–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Product Folder Links: LM555
LM555
www.ti.com SNAS548C –FEBRUARY 2000–REVISED MARCH 2013
Typical Performance Characteristics
Minimum Pulse Width Supply Current vs.
Required for Triggering Supply Voltage
Figure 2. Figure 3.
High Output Voltage vs. Low Output Voltage vs.
Output Source Current Output Sink Current
Figure 4. Figure 5.
Low Output Voltage vs. Low Output Voltage vs.
Output Sink Current Output Sink Current
Figure 6. Figure 7.
Copyright © 2000–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback 5
Product Folder Links: LM555
LM555
SNAS548C –FEBRUARY 2000–REVISED MARCH 2013 www.ti.com
Typical Performance Characteristics (continued)
Output Propagation Delay vs. Output Propagation Delay vs.
Voltage Level of Trigger Pulse Voltage Level of Trigger Pulse
Figure 8. Figure 9.
Discharge Transistor (Pin 7) Discharge Transistor (Pin 7)
Voltage Voltage
vs. vs.
Sink Current Sink Current
Figure 10. Figure 11.
6 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2000–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Product Folder Links: LM555
LM555
www.ti.com SNAS548C –FEBRUARY 2000–REVISED MARCH 2013
APPLICATIONS INFORMATION
MONOSTABLE OPERATION
In this mode of operation, the timer functions as a one-shot (Figure 12). The external capacitor is initially held
discharged by a transistor inside the timer. Upon application of a negative trigger pulse of less than 1/3 VCC to
pin 2, the flip-flop is set which both releases the short circuit across the capacitor and drives the output high.
Figure 12. Monostable
The voltage across the capacitor then increases exponentially for a period of t = 1.1 RA C, at the end of which
time the voltage equals 2/3 VCC. The comparator then resets the flip-flop which in turn discharges the capacitor
and drives the output to its low state. Figure 13 shows the waveforms generated in this mode of operation. Since
the charge and the threshold level of the comparator are both directly proportional to supply voltage, the timing
interval is independent of supply.
VCC = 5V Top Trace: Input 5V/Div.
TIME = 0.1 ms/DIV. Middle Trace: Output 5V/Div.
RA = 9.1kΩ Bottom Trace: Capacitor Voltage 2V/Div.
C = 0.01μF
Figure 13. Monostable Waveforms
During the timing cycle when the output is high, the further application of a trigger pulse will not effect the circuit
so long as the trigger input is returned high at least 10μs before the end of the timing interval. However the circuit
can be reset during this time by the application of a negative pulse to the reset terminal (pin 4). The output will
then remain in the low state until a trigger pulse is again applied.
When the reset function is not in use, it is recommended that it be connected to VCC to avoid any possibility of
false triggering.
Figure 14 is a nomograph for easy determination of R, C values for various time delays.
NOTE
In monostable operation, the trigger should be driven high before the end of timing cycle.
Copyright © 2000–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback 7
Product Folder Links: LM555
LM555
SNAS548C –FEBRUARY 2000–REVISED MARCH 2013 www.ti.com
Figure 14. Time Delay
ASTABLE OPERATION
If the circuit is connected as shown in Figure 15 (pins 2 and 6 connected) it will trigger itself and free run as a
multivibrator. The external capacitor charges through RA + RB and discharges through RB. Thus the duty cycle
may be precisely set by the ratio of these two resistors.
Figure 15. Astable
In this mode of operation, the capacitor charges and discharges between 1/3 VCC and 2/3 VCC. As in the
triggered mode, the charge and discharge times, and therefore the frequency are independent of the supply
voltage.
Figure 16 shows the waveforms generated in this mode of operation.
VCC = 5V Top Trace: Output 5V/Div.
TIME = 20μs/DIV. Bottom Trace: Capacitor Voltage 1V/Div.
RA = 3.9kΩ
RB = 3kΩ
C = 0.01μF
Figure 16. Astable Waveforms
8 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2000–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Product Folder Links: LM555
LM555
www.ti.com SNAS548C –FEBRUARY 2000–REVISED MARCH 2013
The charge time (output high) is given by:
t1 = 0.693 (RA + RB) C (1)
And the discharge time (output low) by:
t2 = 0.693 (RB) C (2)
Thus the total period is:
T = t1 + t2 = 0.693 (RA +2RB) C (3)
The frequency of oscillation is:
(4)
Figure 17 may be used for quick determination of these RC values.
The duty cycle is:
(5)
Figure 17. Free Running Frequency
FREQUENCY DIVIDER
The monostable circuit of Figure 12 can be used as a frequency divider by adjusting the length of the timing
cycle. Figure 18 shows the waveforms generated in a divide by three circuit.
VCC = 5V Top Trace: Input 4V/Div.
TIME = 20μs/DIV. Middle Trace: Output 2V/Div.
RA = 9.1kΩ Bottom Trace: Capacitor 2V/Div.
C = 0.01μF
Figure 18. Frequency Divider
PULSE WIDTH MODULATOR
When the timer is connected in the monostable mode and triggered with a continuous pulse train, the output
pulse width can be modulated by a signal applied to pin 5. Figure 19 shows the circuit, and in Figure 20 are
some waveform examples.
Copyright © 2000–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback 9
Product Folder Links: LM555
LM555
SNAS548C –FEBRUARY 2000–REVISED MARCH 2013 www.ti.com
Figure 19. Pulse Width Modulator
VCC = 5V Top Trace: Modulation 1V/Div.
TIME = 0.2 ms/DIV. Bottom Trace: Output Voltage 2V/Div.
RA = 9.1kΩ
C = 0.01μF
Figure 20. Pulse Width Modulator
PULSE POSITION MODULATOR
This application uses the timer connected for astable operation, as in Figure 21, with a modulating signal again
applied to the control voltage terminal. The pulse position varies with the modulating signal, since the threshold
voltage and hence the time delay is varied. Figure 22 shows the waveforms generated for a triangle wave
modulation signal.
Figure 21. Pulse Position Modulator
10 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2000–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Product Folder Links: LM555
LM555
www.ti.com SNAS548C –FEBRUARY 2000–REVISED MARCH 2013
VCC = 5V Top Trace: Modulation Input 1V/Div.
TIME = 0.1 ms/DIV. Bottom Trace: Output 2V/Div.
RA = 3.9kΩ
RB = 3kΩ
C = 0.01μF
Figure 22. Pulse Position Modulator
LINEAR RAMP
When the pullup resistor, RA, in the monostable circuit is replaced by a constant current source, a linear ramp is
generated. Figure 23 shows a circuit configuration that will perform this function.
Figure 23.
Figure 24 shows waveforms generated by the linear ramp.
The time interval is given by:
(6)
VBE ≃ 0.6V (7)
Copyright © 2000–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback 11
Product Folder Links: LM555
LM555
SNAS548C –FEBRUARY 2000–REVISED MARCH 2013 www.ti.com
VCC = 5V Top Trace: Input 3V/Div.
TIME = 20μs/DIV. Middle Trace: Output 5V/Div.
R1 = 47kΩ Bottom Trace: Capacitor Voltage 1V/Div.
R2 = 100kΩ
RE = 2.7 kΩ
C = 0.01 μF
Figure 24. Linear Ramp
50% DUTY CYCLE OSCILLATOR
For a 50% duty cycle, the resistors RA and RB may be connected as in Figure 25. The time period for the output
high is the same as previous, t1 = 0.693 RA C. For the output low it is t2 =
(8)
Thus the frequency of oscillation is:
(9)
Figure 25. 50% Duty Cycle Oscillator
Note that this circuit will not oscillate if RB is greater than 1/2 RA because the junction of RA and RB cannot bring
pin 2 down to 1/3 VCC and trigger the lower comparator.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Adequate power supply bypassing is necessary to protect associated circuitry. Minimum recommended is 0.1μF
in parallel with 1μF electrolytic.
Lower comparator storage time can be as long as 10μs when pin 2 is driven fully to ground for triggering. This
limits the monostable pulse width to 10μs minimum.
Delay time reset to output is 0.47μs typical. Minimum reset pulse width must be 0.3μs, typical.
Pin 7 current switches within 30ns of the output (pin 3) voltage.
12 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 2000–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Product Folder Links: LM555
LM555
www.ti.com SNAS548C –FEBRUARY 2000–REVISED MARCH 2013
REVISION HISTORY
Changes from Revision B (March 2013) to Revision C Page
• Changed layout of National Data Sheet to TI format .......................................................................................................... 12
Copyright © 2000–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback 13
Product Folder Links: LM555
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com 27-Mar-2014
Addendum-Page 1
PACKAGING INFORMATION
Orderable Device Status
(1)
Package Type Package
Drawing
Pins Package
Qty
Eco Plan
(2)
Lead/Ball Finish
(6)
MSL Peak Temp
(3)
Op Temp (°C) Device Marking
(4/5)
Samples
LM555CM NRND SOIC D 8 95 TBD Call TI Call TI 0 to 70 LM
555CM
LM555CM/NOPB ACTIVE SOIC D 8 95 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
SN | CU SN Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 LM
555CM
LM555CMM NRND VSSOP DGK 8 1000 TBD Call TI Call TI 0 to 70 Z55
LM555CMM/NOPB ACTIVE VSSOP DGK 8 1000 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU SN Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 Z55
LM555CMMX/NOPB ACTIVE VSSOP DGK 8 3500 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU SN Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 Z55
LM555CMX NRND SOIC D 8 2500 TBD Call TI Call TI 0 to 70 LM
555CM
LM555CMX/NOPB ACTIVE SOIC D 8 2500 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
SN | CU SN Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 LM
555CM
LM555CN LIFEBUY PDIP P 8 40 TBD Call TI Call TI 0 to 70 LM
555CN
LM555CN/NOPB ACTIVE PDIP P 8 40 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU SN Level-1-NA-UNLIM 0 to 70 LM
555CN
MC1455P1 LIFEBUY PDIP P 8 40 TBD Call TI Call TI 0 to 70 LM
555CN
NE555V LIFEBUY PDIP P 8 40 TBD Call TI Call TI 0 to 70 LM
555CN
(1) The marketing status values are defined as follows:
ACTIVE: Product device recommended for new designs.
LIFEBUY: TI has announced that the device will be discontinued, and a lifetime-buy period is in effect.
NRND: Not recommended for new designs. Device is in production to support existing customers, but TI does not recommend using this part in a new design.
PREVIEW: Device has been announced but is not in production. Samples may or may not be available.
OBSOLETE: TI has discontinued the production of the device.
(2) Eco Plan - The planned eco-friendly classification: Pb-Free (RoHS), Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt), or Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) - please check http://www.ti.com/productcontent for the latest availability
information and additional product content details.
TBD: The Pb-Free/Green conversion plan has not been defined.
Pb-Free (RoHS): TI's terms "Lead-Free" or "Pb-Free" mean semiconductor products that are compatible with the current RoHS requirements for all 6 substances, including the requirement that
lead not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous materials. Where designed to be soldered at high temperatures, TI Pb-Free products are suitable for use in specified lead-free processes.
Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt): This component has a RoHS exemption for either 1) lead-based flip-chip solder bumps used between the die and package, or 2) lead-based die adhesive used between
the die and leadframe. The component is otherwise considered Pb-Free (RoHS compatible) as defined above.
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com 27-Mar-2014
Addendum-Page 2
Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br): TI defines "Green" to mean Pb-Free (RoHS compatible), and free of Bromine (Br) and Antimony (Sb) based flame retardants (Br or Sb do not exceed 0.1% by weight
in homogeneous material)
(3) MSL, Peak Temp. - The Moisture Sensitivity Level rating according to the JEDEC industry standard classifications, and peak solder temperature.
(4) There may be additional marking, which relates to the logo, the lot trace code information, or the environmental category on the device.
(5) Multiple Device Markings will be inside parentheses. Only one Device Marking contained in parentheses and separated by a "~" will appear on a device. If a line is indented then it is a continuation
of the previous line and the two combined represent the entire Device Marking for that device.
(6) Lead/Ball Finish - Orderable Devices may have multiple material finish options. Finish options are separated by a vertical ruled line. Lead/Ball Finish values may wrap to two lines if the finish
value exceeds the maximum column width.
Important Information and Disclaimer:The information provided on this page represents TI's knowledge and belief as of the date that it is provided. TI bases its knowledge and belief on information
provided by third parties, and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of such information. Efforts are underway to better integrate information from third parties. TI has taken and
continues to take reasonable steps to provide representative and accurate information but may not have conducted destructive testing or chemical analysis on incoming materials and chemicals.
TI and TI suppliers consider certain information to be proprietary, and thus CAS numbers and other limited information may not be available for release.
In no event shall TI's liability arising out of such information exceed the total purchase price of the TI part(s) at issue in this document sold by TI to Customer on an annual basis.
TAPE AND REEL INFORMATION
*All dimensions are nominal
Device Package
Type
Package
Drawing
Pins SPQ Reel
Diameter
(mm)
Reel
Width
W1 (mm)
A0
(mm)
B0
(mm)
K0
(mm)
P1
(mm)
W
(mm)
Pin1
Quadrant
LM555CMM VSSOP DGK 8 1000 178.0 12.4 5.3 3.4 1.4 8.0 12.0 Q1
LM555CMM/NOPB VSSOP DGK 8 1000 178.0 12.4 5.3 3.4 1.4 8.0 12.0 Q1
LM555CMMX/NOPB VSSOP DGK 8 3500 330.0 12.4 5.3 3.4 1.4 8.0 12.0 Q1
LM555CMX SOIC D 8 2500 330.0 12.4 6.5 5.4 2.0 8.0 12.0 Q1
LM555CMX/NOPB SOIC D 8 2500 330.0 12.4 6.5 5.4 2.0 8.0 12.0 Q1
PACKAGE MATERIALS INFORMATION
www.ti.com 26-Mar-2013
Pack Materials-Page 1
*All dimensions are nominal
Device Package Type Package Drawing Pins SPQ Length (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm)
LM555CMM VSSOP DGK 8 1000 210.0 185.0 35.0
LM555CMM/NOPB VSSOP DGK 8 1000 210.0 185.0 35.0
LM555CMMX/NOPB VSSOP DGK 8 3500 367.0 367.0 35.0
LM555CMX SOIC D 8 2500 367.0 367.0 35.0
LM555CMX/NOPB SOIC D 8 2500 367.0 367.0 35.0
PACKAGE MATERIALS INFORMATION
www.ti.com 26-Mar-2013
Pack Materials-Page 2
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, enhancements, improvements and other
changes to its semiconductor products and services per JESD46, latest issue, and to discontinue any product or service per JESD48, latest
issue. Buyers should obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and
complete. All semiconductor products (also referred to herein as “components”) are sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale
supplied at the time of order acknowledgment.
TI warrants performance of its components to the specifications applicable at the time of sale, in accordance with the warranty in TI’s terms
and conditions of sale of semiconductor products. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary
to support this warranty. Except where mandated by applicable law, testing of all parameters of each component is not necessarily
performed.
TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or the design of Buyers’ products. Buyers are responsible for their products and
applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with Buyers’ products and applications, Buyers should provide
adequate design and operating safeguards.
TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any patent right, copyright, mask work right, or
other intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI components or services are used. Information
published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license to use such products or services or a warranty or
endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual property of the
third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI.
Reproduction of significant portions of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration
and is accompanied by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered
documentation. Information of third parties may be subject to additional restrictions.
Resale of TI components or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that component or service
voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated TI component or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice.
TI is not responsible or liable for any such statements.
Buyer acknowledges and agrees that it is solely responsible for compliance with all legal, regulatory and safety-related requirements
concerning its products, and any use of TI components in its applications, notwithstanding any applications-related information or support
that may be provided by TI. Buyer represents and agrees that it has all the necessary expertise to create and implement safeguards which
anticipate dangerous consequences of failures, monitor failures and their consequences, lessen the likelihood of failures that might cause
harm and take appropriate remedial actions. Buyer will fully indemnify TI and its representatives against any damages arising out of the use
of any TI components in safety-critical applications.
In some cases, TI components may be promoted specifically to facilitate safety-related applications. With such components, TI’s goal is to
help enable customers to design and create their own end-product solutions that meet applicable functional safety standards and
requirements. Nonetheless, such components are subject to these terms.
No TI components are authorized for use in FDA Class III (or similar life-critical medical equipment) unless authorized officers of the parties
have executed a special agreement specifically governing such use.
Only those TI components which TI has specifically designated as military grade or “enhanced plastic” are designed and intended for use in
military/aerospace applications or environments. Buyer acknowledges and agrees that any military or aerospace use of TI components
which have not been so designated is solely at the Buyer's risk, and that Buyer is solely responsible for compliance with all legal and
regulatory requirements in connection with such use.
TI has specifically designated certain components as meeting ISO/TS16949 requirements, mainly for automotive use. In any case of use of
non-designated products, TI will not be responsible for any failure to meet ISO/TS16949.
Products Applications
Audio www.ti.com/audio Automotive and Transportation www.ti.com/automotive
Amplifiers amplifier.ti.com Communications and Telecom www.ti.com/communications
Data Converters dataconverter.ti.com Computers and Peripherals www.ti.com/computers
DLP® Products www.dlp.com Consumer Electronics www.ti.com/consumer-apps
DSP dsp.ti.com Energy and Lighting www.ti.com/energy
Clocks and Timers www.ti.com/clocks Industrial www.ti.com/industrial
Interface interface.ti.com Medical www.ti.com/medical
Logic logic.ti.com Security www.ti.com/security
Power Mgmt power.ti.com Space, Avionics and Defense www.ti.com/space-avionics-defense
Microcontrollers microcontroller.ti.com Video and Imaging www.ti.com/video
RFID www.ti-rfid.com
OMAP Applications Processors www.ti.com/omap TI E2E Community e2e.ti.com
Wireless Connectivity www.ti.com/wirelessconnectivity
Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265
Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
L293, L293D
QUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
SLRS008C − SEPTEMBER 1986 − REVISED NOVEMBER 2004
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 1
Featuring Unitrode L293 and L293D
Products Now From Texas Instruments
Wide Supply-Voltage Range: 4.5 V to 36 V
Separate Input-Logic Supply
Internal ESD Protection
Thermal Shutdown
High-Noise-Immunity Inputs
Functionally Similar to SGS L293 and
SGS L293D
Output Current 1 A Per Channel
(600 mA for L293D)
Peak Output Current 2 A Per Channel
(1.2 A for L293D)
Output Clamp Diodes for Inductive
Transient Suppression (L293D)
description/ordering information
The L293 and L293D are quadruple high-current
half-H drivers. The L293 is designed to provide
bidirectional drive currents of up to 1 A at voltages
from 4.5 V to 36 V. The L293D is designed to
provide bidirectional drive currents of up to
600-mA at voltages from 4.5 V to 36 V. Both
devices are designed to drive inductive loads such
as relays, solenoids, dc and bipolar stepping
motors, as well as other high-current/high-voltage
loads in positive-supply applications.
All inputs are TTL compatible. Each output is a
complete totem-pole drive circuit, with a
Darlington transistor sink and a pseudo-
Darlington source. Drivers are enabled in pairs, with drivers 1 and 2 enabled by 1,2EN and drivers 3 and 4
enabled by 3,4EN. When an enable input is high, the associated drivers are enabled, and their outputs are active
and in phase with their inputs. When the enable input is low, those drivers are disabled, and their outputs are
off and in the high-impedance state. With the proper data inputs, each pair of drivers forms a full-H (or bridge)
reversible drive suitable for solenoid or motor applications.
ORDERING INFORMATION
TA PACKAGE† ORDERABLE
PART NUMBER
TOP-SIDE
MARKING
HSOP (DWP) Tube of 20 L293DWP L293DWP
0°C to 70°C
PDIP (N) Tube of 25 L293N L293N
PDIP (NE)
Tube of 25 L293NE L293NE
Tube of 25 L293DNE L293DNE
† Package drawings, standard packing quantities, thermal data, symbolization, and PCB design guidelines are available at
www.ti.com/sc/package.
PRODUCTION DATA information is current as of publication date. Copyright 2004, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Products conform to specifications per the terms of Texas Instruments
standard warranty. Production processing does not necessarily include
testing of all parameters.
Please be aware that an important notice concerning availability, standard warranty, and use in critical applications of
Texas Instruments semiconductor products and disclaimers thereto appears at the end of this data sheet.
HEAT SINK AND
GROUND
HEAT SINK AND
GROUND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
1,2EN
1A
1Y
2Y
2A
VCC2
VCC1
4A
4Y
3Y
3A
3,4EN
L293 . . . N OR NE PACKAGE
L293D . . . NE PACKAGE
(TOP VIEW)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
1,2EN
1A
1Y
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
2Y
2A
VCC2
VCC1
4A
4Y
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
3Y
3A
3,4EN
L293 . . . DWP PACKAGE
(TOP VIEW)
HEAT SINK AND
GROUND
HEAT SINK AND
GROUND
L293, L293D
QUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
SLRS008C − SEPTEMBER 1986 − REVISED NOVEMBER 2004
2 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
description/ordering information (continued)
On the L293, external high-speed output clamp diodes should be used for inductive transient suppression.
A VCC1 terminal, separate from VCC2, is provided for the logic inputs to minimize device power dissipation.
The L293and L293D are characterized for operation from 0°C to 70°C.
block diagram
1
0
3
4
5
6
7
8 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1 16
1 2
0
1
1
0
2
4
3
M
M
M
1
0
1
0
1
0
VCC2
VCC1
NOTE: Output diodes are internal in L293D.
FUNCTION TABLE
(each driver)
INPUTS† OUTPUT
A EN
Y
H H H
L H L
X L Z
H = high level, L = low level, X = irrelevant,
Z = high impedance (off)
† In the thermal shutdown mode, the output is
in the high-impedance state, regardless of
the input levels.
L293, L293D
QUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
SLRS008C − SEPTEMBER 1986 − REVISED NOVEMBER 2004
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 3
logic diagram
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
2
1
7
10
9
15
3
6
11
14
1A
1,2EN
2A
3A
3,4EN
4A
1Y
2Y
3Y
4Y
schematics of inputs and outputs (L293)
Input
VCC2
Output
GND
EQUIVALENT OF EACH INPUT TYPICAL OF ALL OUTPUTS
VCC1
Current
Source
GND
L293, L293D
QUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
SLRS008C − SEPTEMBER 1986 − REVISED NOVEMBER 2004
4 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
schematics of inputs and outputs (L293D)
Input
VCC2
Output
GND
EQUIVALENT OF EACH INPUT TYPICAL OF ALL OUTPUTS
VCC1
Current
Source
GND
absolute maximum ratings over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)†
Supply voltage, VCC1 (see Note 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 V
Output supply voltage, VCC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 V
Input voltage, VI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 V
Output voltage range, VO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −3 V to VCC2 + 3 V
Peak output current, IO (nonrepetitive, t ≤ 5 ms): L293 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ±2 A
Peak output current, IO (nonrepetitive, t ≤ 100 μs): L293D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ±1.2 A
Continuous output current, IO: L293 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ±1 A
Continuous output current, IO: L293D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ±600 mA
Package thermal impedance, θJA (see Notes 2 and 3): DWP package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TBD°C/W
N package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67°C/W
NE package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TBD°C/W
Maximum junction temperature, TJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150°C
Storage temperature range, Tstg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −65°C to 150°C
† Stresses beyond those listed under “absolute maximum ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings only, and
functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under “recommended operating conditions” is not
implied. Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.
NOTES: 1. All voltage values are with respect to the network ground terminal.
2. Maximum power dissipation is a function of TJ(max), JA, and TA. The maximum allowable power dissipation at any allowable
ambient temperature is PD = (TJ(max) − TA)/JA. Operating at the absolute maximum TJ of 150°C can affect reliability.
3. The package thermal impedance is calculated in accordance with JESD 51-7.
L293, L293D
QUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
SLRS008C − SEPTEMBER 1986 − REVISED NOVEMBER 2004
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 5
recommended operating conditions
MIN MAX UNIT
Supply voltage
VCC1 4.5 7
V
VCC2 VCC1 36
V High level input voltage
VCC1 ≤ 7 V 2.3 VCC1 V
VIH High-VCC1 ≥ 7 V 2.3 7 V
VIL Low-level output voltage −0.3† 1.5 V
TA Operating free-air temperature 0 70 °C
† The algebraic convention, in which the least positive (most negative) designated minimum, is used in this data sheet for logic voltage levels.
electrical characteristics, VCC1 = 5 V, VCC2 = 24 V, TA = 25°C
PARAMETER TEST CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX UNIT
VOH High-level output voltage
L293: IOH = −1 A
L293D: IOH = − 0.6 A
VCC2 − 1.8 VCC2 − 1.4 V
VOL Low-level output voltage
L293: IOL = 1 A
L293D: IOL = 0.6 A
1.2 1.8 V
VOKH High-level output clamp voltage L293D: IOK = − 0.6 A VCC2 + 1.3 V
VOKL Low-level output clamp voltage L293D: IOK = 0.6 A 1.3 V
I High level input current
A
V 7 V
0.2 100
IIH High-A
EN
VI = 0.2 10
μA
I Low level input current
A
V 0
−3 −10
IIL Low-A
EN
VI = −2 −100
μA
All outputs at high level 13 22
ICC1 Logic supply current IO = 0 All outputs at low level 35 60 mA
All outputs at high impedance 8 24
All outputs at high level 14 24
ICC2 Output supply current IO = 0 All outputs at low level 2 6 mA
All outputs at high impedance 2 4
switching characteristics, VCC1 = 5 V, VCC2 = 24 V, TA = 25°C
PARAMETER TEST CONDITIONS
L293NE, L293DNE
UNIT
MIN TYP MAX
tPLH Propagation delay time, low-to-high-level output from A input 800 ns
tPHL Propagation delay time, high-to-low-level output from A input
C = 30 pF See Figure 1
400 ns
tTLH Transition time, low-to-high-level output
CL pF, 300 ns
tTHL Transition time, high-to-low-level output 300 ns
switching characteristics, VCC1 = 5 V, VCC2 = 24 V, TA = 25°C
PARAMETER TEST CONDITIONS
L293DWP, L293N
L293DN UNIT
MIN TYP MAX
tPLH Propagation delay time, low-to-high-level output from A input 750 ns
tPHL Propagation delay time, high-to-low-level output from A input
C = 30 pF See Figure 1
200 ns
tTLH Transition time, low-to-high-level output
CL pF, 100 ns
tTHL Transition time, high-to-low-level output 350 ns
L293, L293D
QUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
SLRS008C − SEPTEMBER 1986 − REVISED NOVEMBER 2004
6 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
PARAMETER MEASUREMENT INFORMATION
Output
CL = 30 pF
(see Note A)
VCC1
Input
3 V
TEST CIRCUIT
tf tr
3 V
0
tPHL
VOH
tTHL tTLH
VOLTAGE WAVEFORMS
tPLH
Output
Input
VOL
tw
NOTES: A. CL includes probe and jig capacitance.
B. The pulse generator has the following characteristics: tr ≤ 10 ns, tf ≤ 10 ns, tw = 10 μs, PRR = 5 kHz, ZO = 50 Ω.
Pulse
Generator
(see Note B)
5 V 24 V
VCC2
A
EN
Y
90% 90%
50%
10%
50%
10%
90% 90%
50%
10%
50%
10%
Figure 1. Test Circuit and Voltage Waveforms
L293, L293D
QUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
SLRS008C − SEPTEMBER 1986 − REVISED NOVEMBER 2004
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 7
APPLICATION INFORMATION
5 V 24 V
10 kΩ
VCC1
VCC2
Control A
Control B
4, 5, 12, 13
GND
Thermal
Shutdown
Motor
16 8
3
6
11
14
4Y
3Y
2Y
1Y
1,2EN
1A
2A
3,4EN
3A
4A
15
10
9
7
2
1
Figure 2. Two-Phase Motor Driver (L293)
L293, L293D
QUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
SLRS008C − SEPTEMBER 1986 − REVISED NOVEMBER 2004
8 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
APPLICATION INFORMATION
5 V 24 V
10 kΩ
VCC1 VCC2
16 8
1,2EN
1
1A
2
2A
7
3,4EN
9
3A
10
4A
15
Control A
Control B
4, 5, 12, 13
GND
Thermal
Shutdown
Motor
1Y
3
2Y
6
3Y
11
4Y
14
Figure 3. Two-Phase Motor Driver (L293D)
L293, L293D
QUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
SLRS008C − SEPTEMBER 1986 − REVISED NOVEMBER 2004
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 9
APPLICATION INFORMATION
EN 3A M1 4A M2
H H Fast motor stop H Run
H L Run L Fast motor stop
L X
Free-running motor
stop
X
Free-running motor
stop
L = low, H = high, X = don’t care
EN 1A 2A FUNCTION
H L H Turn right
H H L Turn left
H L L Fast motor stop
H H H Fast motor stop
L X X Fast motor stop
L = low, H = high, X = don’t care
VCC2 SES5001
1/2 L293
4, 5, 12, 13
10
SES5001
VCC1
EN
11 15 14
16
9
M2
M1
3A 4A
8
Figure 4. DC Motor Controls
(connections to ground and to
supply voltage)
GND
2 × SES5001
1/2 L293
4, 5, 12, 13
7 6 3
8
1
2
16
VCC2
2 × SES5001
2A 1A
VCC1
EN
M
Figure 5. Bidirectional DC Motor Control
GND
L293, L293D
QUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
SLRS008C − SEPTEMBER 1986 − REVISED NOVEMBER 2004
10 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
APPLICATION INFORMATION
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
+
+
+
+
D7
D8 D4
D3
L2 IL2
C1
D5 D1
D6 D2
VCC1
L293
IL1/IL2 = 300 mA
0.22 μF
VCC2 L1 IL1
D1−D8 = SES5001
Figure 6. Bipolar Stepping-Motor Control
mounting instructions
The Rthj-amp of the L293 can be reduced by soldering the GND pins to a suitable copper area of the printed
circuit board or to an external heat sink.
Figure 9 shows the maximum package power PTOT and the θJA as a function of the side of two equal square
copper areas having a thickness of 35 μm (see Figure 7). In addition, an external heat sink can be used (see
Figure 8).
During soldering, the pin temperature must not exceed 260°C, and the soldering time must not exceed 12
seconds.
The external heatsink or printed circuit copper area must be connected to electrical ground.
L293, L293D
QUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
SLRS008C − SEPTEMBER 1986 − REVISED NOVEMBER 2004
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 11
APPLICATION INFORMATION
Copper Area 35-μm Thickness
Printed Circuit Board
Figure 7. Example of Printed Circuit Board Copper Area
(used as heat sink)
11.9 mm
17.0 mm
38.0 mm
Figure 8. External Heat Sink Mounting Example
(θJA = 25°C/W)
L293, L293D
QUADRUPLE HALF-H DRIVERS
SLRS008C − SEPTEMBER 1986 − REVISED NOVEMBER 2004
12 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
APPLICATION INFORMATION
3
1
0
2
0 10 20
P
4
MAXIMUM POWER AND JUNCTION
vs
THERMAL RESISTANCE
30
TOT − Power Dissipation − W
60
20
0
40
80
θJA − Thermal Resistance − °C/W
40
Side − mm
Figure 9
θJA
PTOT (TA = 70°C)
50
5
3
1
0
2
−50 0 50
4
MAXIMUM POWER DISSIPATION
vs
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
100
TA − Ambient Temperature − °C
With Infinite Heat Sink
Free Air
Heat Sink With θJA = 25°C/W
Figure 10
150
PTOT − Power Dissipation − W
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com 26-Jan-2014
Addendum-Page 1
PACKAGING INFORMATION
Orderable Device Status
(1)
Package Type Package
Drawing
Pins Package
Qty
Eco Plan
(2)
Lead/Ball Finish
(6)
MSL Peak Temp
(3)
Op Temp (°C) Device Marking
(4/5)
Samples
L293DNE ACTIVE PDIP NE 16 25 Pb-Free
(RoHS)
CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type 0 to 70 L293DNE
L293DNEE4 ACTIVE PDIP NE 16 25 Pb-Free
(RoHS)
CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type 0 to 70 L293DNE
L293DWP OBSOLETE SOIC DW 28 TBD Call TI Call TI 0 to 70 L293DWP
L293DWPG4 OBSOLETE SOIC DW 28 TBD Call TI Call TI 0 to 70
L293DWPTR OBSOLETESO PowerPAD DWP 28 TBD Call TI Call TI 0 to 70
L293N OBSOLETE PDIP N 16 TBD Call TI Call TI 0 to 70 L293N
L293NE ACTIVE PDIP NE 16 25 Pb-Free
(RoHS)
CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type 0 to 70 L293NE
L293NEE4 ACTIVE PDIP NE 16 25 Pb-Free
(RoHS)
CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type 0 to 70 L293NE
L293NG4 OBSOLETE PDIP N 16 TBD Call TI Call TI 0 to 70
(1) The marketing status values are defined as follows:
ACTIVE: Product device recommended for new designs.
LIFEBUY: TI has announced that the device will be discontinued, and a lifetime-buy period is in effect.
NRND: Not recommended for new designs. Device is in production to support existing customers, but TI does not recommend using this part in a new design.
PREVIEW: Device has been announced but is not in production. Samples may or may not be available.
OBSOLETE: TI has discontinued the production of the device.
(2) Eco Plan - The planned eco-friendly classification: Pb-Free (RoHS), Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt), or Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) - please check http://www.ti.com/productcontent for the latest availability
information and additional product content details.
TBD: The Pb-Free/Green conversion plan has not been defined.
Pb-Free (RoHS): TI's terms "Lead-Free" or "Pb-Free" mean semiconductor products that are compatible with the current RoHS requirements for all 6 substances, including the requirement that
lead not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous materials. Where designed to be soldered at high temperatures, TI Pb-Free products are suitable for use in specified lead-free processes.
Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt): This component has a RoHS exemption for either 1) lead-based flip-chip solder bumps used between the die and package, or 2) lead-based die adhesive used between
the die and leadframe. The component is otherwise considered Pb-Free (RoHS compatible) as defined above.
Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br): TI defines "Green" to mean Pb-Free (RoHS compatible), and free of Bromine (Br) and Antimony (Sb) based flame retardants (Br or Sb do not exceed 0.1% by weight
in homogeneous material)
(3) MSL, Peak Temp. - The Moisture Sensitivity Level rating according to the JEDEC industry standard classifications, and peak solder temperature.
(4) There may be additional marking, which relates to the logo, the lot trace code information, or the environmental category on the device.
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com 26-Jan-2014
Addendum-Page 2
(5) Multiple Device Markings will be inside parentheses. Only one Device Marking contained in parentheses and separated by a "~" will appear on a device. If a line is indented then it is a continuation
of the previous line and the two combined represent the entire Device Marking for that device.
(6) Lead/Ball Finish - Orderable Devices may have multiple material finish options. Finish options are separated by a vertical ruled line. Lead/Ball Finish values may wrap to two lines if the finish
value exceeds the maximum column width.
Important Information and Disclaimer:The information provided on this page represents TI's knowledge and belief as of the date that it is provided. TI bases its knowledge and belief on information
provided by third parties, and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of such information. Efforts are underway to better integrate information from third parties. TI has taken and
continues to take reasonable steps to provide representative and accurate information but may not have conducted destructive testing or chemical analysis on incoming materials and chemicals.
TI and TI suppliers consider certain information to be proprietary, and thus CAS numbers and other limited information may not be available for release.
In no event shall TI's liability arising out of such information exceed the total purchase price of the TI part(s) at issue in this document sold by TI to Customer on an annual basis.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, enhancements, improvements and other
changes to its semiconductor products and services per JESD46, latest issue, and to discontinue any product or service per JESD48, latest
issue. Buyers should obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and
complete. All semiconductor products (also referred to herein as “components”) are sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale
supplied at the time of order acknowledgment.
TI warrants performance of its components to the specifications applicable at the time of sale, in accordance with the warranty in TI’s terms
and conditions of sale of semiconductor products. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary
to support this warranty. Except where mandated by applicable law, testing of all parameters of each component is not necessarily
performed.
TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or the design of Buyers’ products. Buyers are responsible for their products and
applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with Buyers’ products and applications, Buyers should provide
adequate design and operating safeguards.
TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any patent right, copyright, mask work right, or
other intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI components or services are used. Information
published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license to use such products or services or a warranty or
endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual property of the
third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI.
Reproduction of significant portions of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration
and is accompanied by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered
documentation. Information of third parties may be subject to additional restrictions.
Resale of TI components or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that component or service
voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated TI component or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice.
TI is not responsible or liable for any such statements.
Buyer acknowledges and agrees that it is solely responsible for compliance with all legal, regulatory and safety-related requirements
concerning its products, and any use of TI components in its applications, notwithstanding any applications-related information or support
that may be provided by TI. Buyer represents and agrees that it has all the necessary expertise to create and implement safeguards which
anticipate dangerous consequences of failures, monitor failures and their consequences, lessen the likelihood of failures that might cause
harm and take appropriate remedial actions. Buyer will fully indemnify TI and its representatives against any damages arising out of the use
of any TI components in safety-critical applications.
In some cases, TI components may be promoted specifically to facilitate safety-related applications. With such components, TI’s goal is to
help enable customers to design and create their own end-product solutions that meet applicable functional safety standards and
requirements. Nonetheless, such components are subject to these terms.
No TI components are authorized for use in FDA Class III (or similar life-critical medical equipment) unless authorized officers of the parties
have executed a special agreement specifically governing such use.
Only those TI components which TI has specifically designated as military grade or “enhanced plastic” are designed and intended for use in
military/aerospace applications or environments. Buyer acknowledges and agrees that any military or aerospace use of TI components
which have not been so designated is solely at the Buyer's risk, and that Buyer is solely responsible for compliance with all legal and
regulatory requirements in connection with such use.
TI has specifically designated certain components as meeting ISO/TS16949 requirements, mainly for automotive use. In any case of use of
non-designated products, TI will not be responsible for any failure to meet ISO/TS16949.
Products Applications
Audio www.ti.com/audio Automotive and Transportation www.ti.com/automotive
Amplifiers amplifier.ti.com Communications and Telecom www.ti.com/communications
Data Converters dataconverter.ti.com Computers and Peripherals www.ti.com/computers
DLP® Products www.dlp.com Consumer Electronics www.ti.com/consumer-apps
DSP dsp.ti.com Energy and Lighting www.ti.com/energy
Clocks and Timers www.ti.com/clocks Industrial www.ti.com/industrial
Interface interface.ti.com Medical www.ti.com/medical
Logic logic.ti.com Security www.ti.com/security
Power Mgmt power.ti.com Space, Avionics and Defense www.ti.com/space-avionics-defense
Microcontrollers microcontroller.ti.com Video and Imaging www.ti.com/video
RFID www.ti-rfid.com
OMAP Applications Processors www.ti.com/omap TI E2E Community e2e.ti.com
Wireless Connectivity www.ti.com/wirelessconnectivity
Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265
Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
GND
TRIG
OUT
RESET
VCC
DISCH
THRES
CONT
3 2 1 20 19
9 10 11 12 13
4
5
6
7
8
18
17
16
15
14
NC
DISCH
NC
THRES
NC
NC
TRIG
NC
OUT
NC
NC
GND
NC
CONT
NC
VCC
NC
NC
RESET
NC
NC – No internal connection
NA555...D OR P PACKAGE
NE555...D, P, PS, OR PW PACKAGE
SA555...D OR P PACKAGE
SE555...D, JG, OR P PACKAGE
(TOP VIEW)
SE555...FK PACKAGE
(TOP VIEW)
NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555
www.ti.com SLFS022H –SEPTEMBER 1973–REVISED JUNE 2010
PRECISION TIMERS
Check for Samples: NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555
1FEATURES
• Timing From Microseconds to Hours • Adjustable Duty Cycle
• Astable or Monostable Operation • TTL-Compatible Output Can Sink or Source up
to 200 mA
DESCRIPTION/ORDERING INFORMATION
These devices are precision timing circuits capable of producing accurate time delays or oscillation. In the
time-delay or monostable mode of operation, the timed interval is controlled by a single external resistor and
capacitor network. In the astable mode of operation, the frequency and duty cycle can be controlled
independently with two external resistors and a single external capacitor.
The threshold and trigger levels normally are two-thirds and one-third, respectively, of VCC. These levels can be
altered by use of the control-voltage terminal. When the trigger input falls below the trigger level, the flip-flop is
set, and the output goes high. If the trigger input is above the trigger level and the threshold input is above the
threshold level, the flip-flop is reset and the output is low. The reset (RESET) input can override all other inputs
and can be used to initiate a new timing cycle. When RESET goes low, the flip-flop is reset, and the output goes
low. When the output is low, a low-impedance path is provided between discharge (DISCH) and ground.
The output circuit is capable of sinking or sourcing current up to 200 mA. Operation is specified for supplies of
5 V to 15 V. With a 5-V supply, output levels are compatible with TTL inputs.
1
Please be aware that an important notice concerning availability, standard warranty, and use in critical applications of Texas
Instruments semiconductor products and disclaimers thereto appears at the end of this data sheet.
PRODUCTION DATA information is current as of publication date. Copyright © 1973–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Products conform to specifications per the terms of the Texas Instruments standard warranty. Production processing does not On products compliant to MIL-PRF-38535, all parameters are necessarily include testing of all parameters. tested unless otherwise noted. On all other products, production processing does not necessarily include testing of all parameters.
NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555
SLFS022H –SEPTEMBER 1973–REVISED JUNE 2010 www.ti.com
ORDERING INFORMATION(1)
T VTHRES MAX A V PACKAGE(2) ORDERABLE PART NUMBER TOP-SIDE MARKING CC = 15 V
PDIP – P Tube of 50 NE555P NE555P
Tube of 75 NE555D
SOIC – D NE555
Reel of 2500 NE555DR
0°C to 70°C 11.2 V
SOP – PS Reel of 2000 NE555PSR N555
Tube of 150 NE555PW
TSSOP – PW N555
Reel of 2000 NE555PWR
PDIP – P Tube of 50 SA555P SA555P
–40°C to 85°C 11.2 V Tube of 75 SA555D
SOIC – D SA555
Reel of 2000 SA555DR
PDIP – P Tube of 50 NA555P NA555P
–40°C to 105°C 11.2 V Tube of 75 NA555D
SOIC – D NA555
Reel of 2000 NA555DR
PDIP – P Tube of 50 SE555P SE555P
Tube of 75 SE555D
SOIC – D SE555D
–55°C to 125°C 10.6 Reel of 2500 SE555DR
CDIP – JG Tube of 50 SE555JG SE555JG
LCCC – FK Tube of 55 SE555FK SE555FK
(1) For the most current package and ordering information, see the Package Option Addendum at the end of this document, or see the TI
web site at www.ti.com.
(2) Package drawings, thermal data, and symbolization are available at www.ti.com/packaging.
Table 1. FUNCTION TABLE
RESET TRIGGER THRESHOLD OUTPUT DISCHARGE VOLTAGE(1) VOLTAGE(1) SWITCH
Low Irrelevant Irrelevant Low On
High <1/3 VCC Irrelevant High Off
High >1/3 VCC >2/3 VCC Low On
High >1/3 VCC <2/3 VCC As previously established
(1) Voltage levels shown are nominal.
2 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 1973–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Product Folder Link(s): NA555 NE555 SA555 SE555
1
S
R
R1
TRIG
THRES
VCC
CONT
RESET
OUT
DISCH
GND ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
8 4
5
6
2
1
7
3
NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555
www.ti.com SLFS022H –SEPTEMBER 1973–REVISED JUNE 2010
FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM
A. Pin numbers shown are for the D, JG, P, PS, and PW packages.
B. RESET can override TRIG, which can override THRES.
Copyright © 1973–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback 3
Product Folder Link(s): NA555 NE555 SA555 SE555
NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555
SLFS022H –SEPTEMBER 1973–REVISED JUNE 2010 www.ti.com
Absolute Maximum Ratings(1)
over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)
MIN MAX UNIT
VCC Supply voltage(2) 18 V
VI Input voltage CONT, RESET, THRES, TRIG VCC V
IO Output current ±225 mA
D package 97
P package 85
qJA Package thermal impedance(3) (4) °C/W
PS package 95
PW package 149
FK package 5.61
qJC Package thermal impedance(5) (6) °C/W
JG package 14.5
TJ Operating virtual junction temperature 150 °C
Case temperature for 60 s FK package 260 °C
Lead temperature 1, 6 mm (1/16 in) from case for 60 s JG package 300 °C
Tstg Storage temperature range –65 150 °C
(1) Stresses beyond those listed under "absolute maximum ratings" may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings
only, and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under "recommended operating
conditions" is not implied. Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.
(2) All voltage values are with respect to GND.
(3) Maximum power dissipation is a function of TJ(max), qJA, and TA. The maximum allowable power dissipation at any allowable ambient
temperature is PD = (TJ(max) - TA)/qJA. Operating at the absolute maximum TJ of 150°C can affect reliability.
(4) The package thermal impedance is calculated in accordance with JESD 51-7.
(5) Maximum power dissipation is a function of TJ(max), qJC, and TC. The maximum allowable power dissipation at any allowable case
temperature is PD = (TJ(max) - TC)/qJC. Operating at the absolute maximum TJ of 150°C can affect reliability.
(6) The package thermal impedance is calculated in accordance with MIL-STD-883.
Recommended Operating Conditions
over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)
MIN MAX UNIT
NA555, NE555, SA555 4.5 16
VCC Supply voltage V
SE555 4.5 18
VI Input voltage CONT, RESET, THRES, and TRIG VCC V
IO Output current ±200 mA
NA555 –40 105
NE555 0 70
TA Operating free-air temperature °C
SA555 –40 85
SE555 –55 125
4 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 1973–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Product Folder Link(s): NA555 NE555 SA555 SE555
NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555
www.ti.com SLFS022H –SEPTEMBER 1973–REVISED JUNE 2010
Electrical Characteristics
VCC = 5 V to 15 V, TA = 25°C (unless otherwise noted)
NA555
SE555 NE555
PARAMETER TEST CONDITIONS SA555 UNIT
MIN TYP MAX MIN TYP MAX
VCC = 15 V 9.4 10 10.6 8.8 10 11.2
THRES voltage level V
VCC = 5 V 2.7 3.3 4 2.4 3.3 4.2
THRES current(1) 30 250 30 250 nA
4.8 5 5.2 4.5 5 5.6
VCC = 15 V
TA = –55°C to 125°C 3 6
TRIG voltage level V
1.45 1.67 1.9 1.1 1.67 2.2
VCC = 5 V
TA = –55°C to 125°C 1.9
TRIG current TRIG at 0 V 0.5 0.9 0.5 2 mA
0.3 0.7 1 0.3 0.7 1
RESET voltage level V
TA = –55°C to 125°C 1.1
RESET at VCC 0.1 0.4 0.1 0.4
RESET current mA
RESET at 0 V –0.4 –1 –0.4 –1.5
DISCH switch off-state 20 100 20 100 nA current
9.6 10 10.4 9 10 11
VCC = 15 V
CONT voltage TA = –55°C to 125°C 9.6 10.4 (open circuit) V 2.9 3.3 3.8 2.6 3.3 4
VCC = 5 V
TA = –55°C to 125°C 2.9 3.8
0.1 0.15 0.1 0.25
VCC = 15 V, IOL = 10 mA
TA = –55°C to 125°C 0.2
0.4 0.5 0.4 0.75
VCC = 15 V, IOL = 50 mA
TA = –55°C to 125°C 1
2 2.2 2 2.5
VCC = 15 V, IOL = 100 mA
Low-level output voltage TA = –55°C to 125°C 2.7 V
VCC = 15 V, IOL = 200 mA 2.5 2.5
VCC = 5 V, IOL = 3.5 mA TA = –55°C to 125°C 0.35
0.1 0.2 0.1 0.35
VCC = 5 V, IOL = 5 mA
TA = –55°C to 125°C 0.8
VCC = 5 V, IOL = 8 mA 0.15 0.25 0.15 0.4
13 13.3 12.75 13.3
VCC = 15 V, IOL = –100 mA
TA = –55°C to 125°C 12
High-level output voltage VCC = 15 V, IOH = –200 mA 12.5 12.5 V
3 3.3 2.75 3.3
VCC = 5 V, IOL = –100 mA
TA = –55°C to 125°C 2
VCC = 15 V 10 12 10 15
Output low, No load
VCC = 5 V 3 5 3 6
Supply current mA
VCC = 15 V 9 10 9 13
Output high, No load
VCC = 5 V 2 4 2 5
(1) This parameter influences the maximum value of the timing resistors RA and RB in the circuit of Figure 12. For example,
when VCC = 5 V, the maximum value is R = RA + RB ≉ 3.4 MΩ, and for VCC = 15 V, the maximum value is 10 MΩ.
Copyright © 1973–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback 5
Product Folder Link(s): NA555 NE555 SA555 SE555
NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555
SLFS022H –SEPTEMBER 1973–REVISED JUNE 2010 www.ti.com
Operating Characteristics
VCC = 5 V to 15 V, TA = 25°C (unless otherwise noted)
NA555
TEST SE555 NE555 PARAMETER CONDITIONS(1) SA555 UNIT
MIN TYP MAX MIN TYP MAX
Initial error of timing Each timer, monostable(3) TA = 25°C 0.5 1.5(4) 1 3 interval(2) % Each timer, astable(5) 1.5 2.25
Temperature coefficient of Each timer, monostable(3) TA = MIN to MAX 30 100(4) 50 ppm/
timing interval Each timer, astable(5) 90 150 °C
Supply-voltage sensitivity of Each timer, monostable(3) TA = 25°C 0.05 0.2(4) 0.1 0.5 timing interval %/V Each timer, astable(5) 0.15 0.3
Output-pulse rise time CL = 15 pF, 100 200(4) 100 300 ns TA = 25°C
Output-pulse fall time CL = 15 pF, 100 200(4) 100 300 ns TA = 25°C
(1) For conditions shown as MIN or MAX, use the appropriate value specified under recommended operating conditions.
(2) Timing interval error is defined as the difference between the measured value and the average value of a random sample from each
process run.
(3) Values specified are for a device in a monostable circuit similar to Figure 9, with the following component values: RA = 2 kΩ to 100 kΩ,
C = 0.1 mF.
(4) On products compliant to MIL-PRF-38535, this parameter is not production tested.
(5) Values specified are for a device in an astable circuit similar to Figure 12, with the following component values: RA = 1 kΩ to 100 kΩ,
C = 0.1 mF.
6 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 1973–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Product Folder Link(s): NA555 NE555 SA555 SE555
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
TA = 125°C ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
TA = 25°C
IOL − Low-Level Output Current − mA ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
VCC = 5 V
LOW-LEVEL OUTPUT VOLTAGE
vs
LOW-LEVEL OUTPUT CURRENT
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
TA = −55°C
0.1
0.04
0.01
1 2 4 7 10 20 40 70 100
0.07
1
0.4
0.7
10
4
7
0.02
0.2
2
VOL − Low-Level Output Voltage − V
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
VCC = 10 V
LOW-LEVEL OUTPUT VOLTAGE
vs
LOW-LEVEL OUTPUT CURRENT
VOL − Low-Level Output Voltage − V
IOL − Low-Level Output Current − mA
0.1
0.04
0.01
1 2 4 7 10 20 40 70 100
0.07
1
0.4
0.7
10
4
7
0.02
0.2
2
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
TA = 125°C ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
TA = 25°C TA= −55°C
TA = 125°C
TA = 25°C
TA = −55°C ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
VCC = 15 V
LOW-LEVEL OUTPUT VOLTAGE
vs
LOW-LEVEL OUTPUT CURRENT
VOL − Low-Level Output Voltage − V
IOL − Low-Level Output Current − mA
0.1
0.04
0.01
1 2 4 7 10 20 40 70 100
0.07
1
0.4
0.7
10
4
7
0.02
0.2
2
1
0.6
0.2
0
1.4
1.8
2.0
0.4
1.6
0.8
1.2
−
IOH − High-Level Output Current − mA ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
TA = 125°C ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
TA = 25°C
1 2 4 7 10 20 40 70 100 ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
VCC = 5 V to 15 V ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
TA = −55°C
(VCC VOH) − Voltage Drop − V
DROP BETWEEN SUPPLY VOLTAGE AND OUTPUT
vs
HIGH-LEVEL OUTPUT CURRENT
NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555
www.ti.com SLFS022H –SEPTEMBER 1973–REVISED JUNE 2010
TYPICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Data for temperatures below 0°C and above 70°C are applicable for SE555 circuits only.
Figure 1. Figure 2.
Figure 3. Figure 4.
Copyright © 1973–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback 7
Product Folder Link(s): NA555 NE555 SA555 SE555
5
4
2
1
0
9
3
5 6 7 8 9 10 11
− Supply Current − mA
7
6
8
SUPPLY CURRENT
vs
SUPPLY VOLTAGE
10
12 13 14 15
TA = 25°C
TA = 125°C
TA = −55°C
Output Low,
No Load
ICC
VCC − Supply Voltage − V
1
0.995
0.990
0.985
0 5 10
1.005
1.010
NORMALIZED OUTPUT PULSE DURATION
(MONOSTABLE OPERATION)
vs
SUPPLY VOLTAGE
1.015
15 20
Pulse Duration Relative to Value at V C C = 10 V
VCC − Supply Voltage − V
1
0.995
0.990
0.985
−75 −25 25
1.005
1.010
NORMALIZED OUTPUT PULSE DURATION
(MONOSTABLE OPERATION)
vs
FREE-AIR TEMPERATURE
1.015
75 125
TA − Free-Air Temperature − °C
−50 0 50 100
VCC = 10 V
Pulse Duration Relative to Value at TA = 25C
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.4
Lowest Level of Trigger Pulse – ×VCC
tPD – Propagation Delay Time – ns
TA = 125°C
TA = 70°C
TA = 25°C
TA = 0°C
TA = –55°C
PROPAGATION DELAY TIME
vs
LOWEST VOLTAGE LEVEL
OF TRIGGER PULSE
NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555
SLFS022H –SEPTEMBER 1973–REVISED JUNE 2010 www.ti.com
TYPICAL CHARACTERISTICS (continued)
Data for temperatures below 0°C and above 70°C are applicable for SE555 circuits only.
Figure 5. Figure 6.
Figure 7. Figure 8.
8 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 1973–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Product Folder Link(s): NA555 NE555 SA555 SE555
VCC
(5 V to 15 V)
RA
RL
Output
GND
OUT
CONT VCC
RESET
DISCH
THRES
Input TRIG ÎÎÎ
5 8
4
7
6
2
3
1
Pin numbers shown are for the D, JG, P, PS, and PW packages.
NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555
www.ti.com SLFS022H –SEPTEMBER 1973–REVISED JUNE 2010
APPLICATION INFORMATION
Monostable Operation
For monostable operation, any of these timers can be connected as shown in Figure 9. If the output is low,
application of a negative-going pulse to the trigger (TRIG) sets the flip-flop (Q goes low), drives the output high,
and turns off Q1. Capacitor C then is charged through RA until the voltage across the capacitor reaches the
threshold voltage of the threshold (THRES) input. If TRIG has returned to a high level, the output of the threshold
comparator resets the flip-flop (Q goes high), drives the output low, and discharges C through Q1.
Figure 9. Circuit for Monostable Operation
Monostable operation is initiated when TRIG voltage falls below the trigger threshold. Once initiated, the
sequence ends only if TRIG is high for at least 10 μs before the end of the timing interval. When the trigger is
grounded, the comparator storage time can be as long as 10 μs, which limits the minimum monostable pulse
width to 10 μs. Because of the threshold level and saturation voltage of Q1, the output pulse duration is
approximately tw = 1.1RAC. Figure 11 is a plot of the time constant for various values of RA and C. The threshold
levels and charge rates both are directly proportional to the supply voltage, VCC. The timing interval is, therefore,
independent of the supply voltage, so long as the supply voltage is constant during the time interval.
Applying a negative-going trigger pulse simultaneously to RESET and TRIG during the timing interval discharges
C and reinitiates the cycle, commencing on the positive edge of the reset pulse. The output is held low as long
as the reset pulse is low. To prevent false triggering, when RESET is not used, it should be connected to VCC.
Copyright © 1973–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback 9
Product Folder Link(s): NA555 NE555 SA555 SE555
− Output Pulse Duration − s
C − Capacitance − mF
10
1
10−1
10−2
10−3
10−4
0.01 0.1 1 10 100
10−5
0.001
tw
RA = 10 MW
RA = 10 kW
RA = 1 kW
RA = 100 kW
RA = 1 MW
Voltage − 2 V/div
Time − 0.1 ms/div ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Capacitor Voltage
Output Voltage
Input Voltage ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
RA = 9.1 kW
CL = 0.01 mF
RL = 1 kW
See Figure 9
Voltage − 1 V/div
Time − 0.5 ms/div
tH
Capacitor Voltage
tL Output Voltage ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
RA = 5 k RL = 1 k
RB = 3 k See Figure 12
C = 0.15 mF
GND
OUT
CONT VCC
RESET
DISCH
THRES
TRIG
C
RB
RA
Output
RL
0.01 mF
VCC
(5 V to 15 V)
(see Note A)
ÎÎÎ NOTE A: Decoupling CONT voltage to ground with a capacitor can
improve operation. This should be evaluated for individual
applications.
Open
5 8
4
7
6
2
3
1
Pin numbers shown are for the D, JG, P, PS, and PW packages.
NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555
SLFS022H –SEPTEMBER 1973–REVISED JUNE 2010 www.ti.com
Figure 10. Typical Monostable Waveforms Figure 11. Output Pulse Duration vs Capacitance
Astable Operation
As shown in Figure 12, adding a second resistor, RB, to the circuit of Figure 9 and connecting the trigger input to
the threshold input causes the timer to self-trigger and run as a multivibrator. The capacitor C charges through
RA and RB and then discharges through RB only. Therefore, the duty cycle is controlled by the values of RA and
RB.
This astable connection results in capacitor C charging and discharging between the threshold-voltage level
(≉0.67 × VCC) and the trigger-voltage level (≉0.33 × VCC). As in the monostable circuit, charge and discharge
times (and, therefore, the frequency and duty cycle) are independent of the supply voltage.
Figure 12. Circuit for Astable Operation Figure 13. Typical Astable Waveforms
10 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 1973–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Product Folder Link(s): NA555 NE555 SA555 SE555
tH 0.693 (RARB) C
tL 0.693 (RB) C
Other useful relationships are shown below.
period tHtL 0.693 (RA2RB) C
frequency 1.44
(RA2RB) C
Output driver duty cycle
tL
tHtL
RB
RA2RB
Output waveform duty cycle
tL
tH
RB
RARB
Low-to-high ratio
tH
tHtL
1–
RB
RA2RB
f − Free-Running Frequency − Hz
C − Capacitance − mF
100 k
10 k
1 k
100
10
1
0.01 0.1 1 10 100
0.1
0.001
RA + 2 RB = 10 MW
RA + 2 RB = 1 MW
RA + 2 RB = 100 kW
RA + 2 RB = 10 kW
RA + 2 RB = 1 kW
Time − 0.1 ms/div
Voltage − 2 V/div ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
VCC = 5 V
RA = 1 kW
C = 0.1 mF
See Figure 15
Capacitor Voltage ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Output Voltage
Input Voltage
VCC (5 V to 15 V)
DISCH
OUT
RESET VCC
RL RA
A5T3644
C
THRES
GND
CONT
TRIG
Input
0.01 mF ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Output
4 8
3
7
6
2
5
1
Pin numbers shown are shown for the D, JG, P, PS, and PW packages.
NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555
www.ti.com SLFS022H –SEPTEMBER 1973–REVISED JUNE 2010
Figure 12 shows typical waveforms generated during astable operation. The output high-level duration tH and
low-level duration tL can be calculated as follows:
Figure . Figure 14. Free-Running Frequency
Missing-Pulse Detector
The circuit shown in Figure 15 can be used to detect a missing pulse or abnormally long spacing between
consecutive pulses in a train of pulses. The timing interval of the monostable circuit is retriggered continuously by
the input pulse train as long as the pulse spacing is less than the timing interval. A longer pulse spacing, missing
pulse, or terminated pulse train permits the timing interval to be completed, thereby generating an output pulse
as shown in Figure 16.
Figure 15. Circuit for Missing-Pulse Detector Figure 16. Completed Timing Waveforms for
Missing-Pulse Detector
Copyright © 1973–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback 11
Product Folder Link(s): NA555 NE555 SA555 SE555
Voltage − 2 V/div
Time − 0.1 ms/div
Capacitor Voltage
Output Voltage
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏInput Voltage
VCC = 5 V
RA = 1250 W
C = 0.02 mF
See Figure 9
NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555
SLFS022H –SEPTEMBER 1973–REVISED JUNE 2010 www.ti.com
Frequency Divider
By adjusting the length of the timing cycle, the basic circuit of Figure 9 can be made to operate as a frequency
divider. Figure 17 shows a divide-by-three circuit that makes use of the fact that retriggering cannot occur during
the timing cycle.
Figure 17. Divide-by-Three Circuit Waveforms
12 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 1973–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Product Folder Link(s): NA555 NE555 SA555 SE555
THRES
GND
C
RL RA
VCC (5 V to 15 V)
Output
DISCH
OUT
RESET VCC
TRIG
CONT
Modulation
Input
(see Note A)
Clock
Input
NOTE A: The modulating signal can be direct or capacitively coupled
to CONT. For direct coupling, the effects of modulation source
voltage and impedance on the bias of the timer should be
considered.
4 8
3
7
6
2
5
Pin numbers shown are for the D, JG, P, PS, and PW packages.
1
Voltage − 2 V/div
Time − 0.5 ms/div ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Capacitor VoltageÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Output Voltage ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Clock Input Voltage ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
RA = 3 kW
C = 0.02 mF
RL = 1 kW
See Figure 18 ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Modulation Input Voltage
NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555
www.ti.com SLFS022H –SEPTEMBER 1973–REVISED JUNE 2010
Pulse-Width Modulation
The operation of the timer can be modified by modulating the internal threshold and trigger voltages, which is
accomplished by applying an external voltage (or current) to CONT. Figure 18 shows a circuit for pulse-width
modulation. A continuous input pulse train triggers the monostable circuit, and a control signal modulates the
threshold voltage. Figure 19 shows the resulting output pulse-width modulation. While a sine-wave modulation
signal is shown, any wave shape could be used.
Figure 18. Circuit for Pulse-Width Modulation Figure 19. Pulse-Width-Modulation Waveforms
Copyright © 1973–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback 13
Product Folder Link(s): NA555 NE555 SA555 SE555
Voltage − 2 V/div
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
RA = 3 kW
RB = 500 W
RL = 1 kW
See Figure 20
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Capacitor Voltage ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Output Voltage ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Modulation Input Voltage
Time − 0.1 ms/div
RB
Modulation
Input
(see Note A)
CONT
TRIG
RESET VCC
OUT
DISCH
VCC (5 V to 15 V)
RL RA
C
GND
THRES
NOTE A: The modulating signal can be direct or capacitively coupled
to CONT. For direct coupling, the effects of modulation
source voltage and impedance on the bias of the timer
should be considered.
Pin numbers shown are for the D, JG, P, PS, and PW packages.
4 8
3
7
6
2
5
Output
NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555
SLFS022H –SEPTEMBER 1973–REVISED JUNE 2010 www.ti.com
Pulse-Position Modulation
As shown in Figure 20, any of these timers can be used as a pulse-position modulator. This application
modulates the threshold voltage and, thereby, the time delay, of a free-running oscillator. Figure 21 shows a
triangular-wave modulation signal for such a circuit; however, any wave shape could be used.
Figure 20. Circuit for Pulse-Position Modulation Figure 21. Pulse-Position-Modulation Waveforms
14 Submit Documentation Feedback Copyright © 1973–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Product Folder Link(s): NA555 NE555 SA555 SE555
S
VCC
RESET VCC
OUT
DISCH
GND
CONT
TRIG
4 8
3
7
6
1
5
2
THRES
RC
CC
0.01
CC = 14.7 mF
RC = 100 kW Output C
RESET VCC
OUT
DISCH
GND
CONT
TRIG
4 8
3
7
6
1
5
2
THRES
RB 33 kW
0.001
0.01
mF
CB = 4.7 mF
RB = 100 kW
RA = 100 kW Output A Output B
CA = 10 mF
mF
0.01
mF
0.001
RA 33 kW
THRES
2
5
1
6
7
3
4 8
TRIG
CONT
GND
DISCH
OUT
RESET VCC
mF
mF
CA CB
Pin numbers shown are for the D, JG, P, PS, and PW packages.
NOTE A: S closes momentarily at t = 0.
Voltage − 5 V/div
t − Time − 1 s/div ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
See Figure 22
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Output A
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Output B
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Output C
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
t = 0 ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
twC = 1.1 RCCC ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
twC ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
twB = 1.1 RBCB ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
twA = 1.1 RACA ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
twA ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
twB
NA555, NE555, SA555, SE555
www.ti.com SLFS022H –SEPTEMBER 1973–REVISED JUNE 2010
Sequential Timer
Many applications, such as computers, require signals for initializing conditions during start-up. Other
applications, such as test equipment, require activation of test signals in sequence. These timing circuits can be
connected to provide such sequential control. The timers can be used in various combinations of astable or
monostable circuit connections, with or without modulation, for extremely flexible waveform control. Figure 22
shows a sequencer circuit with possible applications in many systems, and Figure 23 shows the output
waveforms.
Figure 22. Sequential Timer Circuit
Figure 23. Sequential Timer Waveforms
Copyright © 1973–2010, Texas Instruments Incorporated Submit Documentation Feedback 15
Product Folder Link(s): NA555 NE555 SA555 SE555
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com 2-May-2014
Addendum-Page 1
PACKAGING INFORMATION
Orderable Device Status
(1)
Package Type Package
Drawing
Pins Package
Qty
Eco Plan
(2)
Lead/Ball Finish
(6)
MSL Peak Temp
(3)
Op Temp (°C) Device Marking
(4/5)
Samples
JM38510/10901BPA ACTIVE CDIP JG 8 1 TBD A42 N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 JM38510
/10901BPA
M38510/10901BPA ACTIVE CDIP JG 8 1 TBD A42 N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 JM38510
/10901BPA
NA555D ACTIVE SOIC D 8 75 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 105 NA555
NA555DG4 ACTIVE SOIC D 8 75 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 105 NA555
NA555DR ACTIVE SOIC D 8 2500 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 105 NA555
NA555DRG4 ACTIVE SOIC D 8 2500 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 105 NA555
NA555P ACTIVE PDIP P 8 50 Pb-Free
(RoHS)
CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type -40 to 105 NA555P
NA555PE4 ACTIVE PDIP P 8 50 Pb-Free
(RoHS)
CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type -40 to 105 NA555P
NE555D ACTIVE SOIC D 8 75 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 NE555
NE555DE4 ACTIVE SOIC D 8 75 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 NE555
NE555DG4 ACTIVE SOIC D 8 75 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 NE555
NE555DR ACTIVE SOIC D 8 2500 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU | CU SN Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 NE555
NE555DRE4 ACTIVE SOIC D 8 2500 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 NE555
NE555DRG3 PREVIEW SOIC D 8 2500 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU SN Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 NE555
NE555DRG4 ACTIVE SOIC D 8 2500 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 NE555
NE555P ACTIVE PDIP P 8 50 Pb-Free
(RoHS)
CU NIPDAU | CU SN N / A for Pkg Type 0 to 70 NE555P
NE555PE3 PREVIEW PDIP P 8 50 TBD Call TI Call TI 0 to 70
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com 2-May-2014
Addendum-Page 2
Orderable Device Status
(1)
Package Type Package
Drawing
Pins Package
Qty
Eco Plan
(2)
Lead/Ball Finish
(6)
MSL Peak Temp
(3)
Op Temp (°C) Device Marking
(4/5)
Samples
NE555PE4 ACTIVE PDIP P 8 50 Pb-Free
(RoHS)
CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type 0 to 70 NE555P
NE555PSLE OBSOLETE SO PS 8 TBD Call TI Call TI 0 to 70
NE555PSR ACTIVE SO PS 8 2000 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 N555
NE555PSRE4 ACTIVE SO PS 8 2000 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 N555
NE555PSRG4 ACTIVE SO PS 8 2000 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 N555
NE555PW ACTIVE TSSOP PW 8 150 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 N555
NE555PWE4 ACTIVE TSSOP PW 8 150 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 N555
NE555PWG4 ACTIVE TSSOP PW 8 150 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 N555
NE555PWR ACTIVE TSSOP PW 8 2000 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 N555
NE555PWRE4 ACTIVE TSSOP PW 8 2000 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 N555
NE555PWRG4 ACTIVE TSSOP PW 8 2000 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM 0 to 70 N555
NE555Y OBSOLETE 0 TBD Call TI Call TI 0 to 70
SA555D ACTIVE SOIC D 8 75 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 SA555
SA555DE4 ACTIVE SOIC D 8 75 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 SA555
SA555DG4 ACTIVE SOIC D 8 75 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 SA555
SA555DR ACTIVE SOIC D 8 2500 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU | CU SN Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 SA555
SA555DRE4 ACTIVE SOIC D 8 2500 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 SA555
SA555DRG4 ACTIVE SOIC D 8 2500 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -40 to 85 SA555
SA555P ACTIVE PDIP P 8 50 Pb-Free
(RoHS)
CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type -40 to 85 SA555P
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com 2-May-2014
Addendum-Page 3
Orderable Device Status
(1)
Package Type Package
Drawing
Pins Package
Qty
Eco Plan
(2)
Lead/Ball Finish
(6)
MSL Peak Temp
(3)
Op Temp (°C) Device Marking
(4/5)
Samples
SA555PE4 ACTIVE PDIP P 8 50 Pb-Free
(RoHS)
CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type -40 to 85 SA555P
SE555D ACTIVE SOIC D 8 75 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -55 to 125 SE555
SE555DG4 ACTIVE SOIC D 8 75 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -55 to 125 SE555
SE555DR ACTIVE SOIC D 8 2500 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -55 to 125 SE555
SE555DRG4 ACTIVE SOIC D 8 2500 Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM -55 to 125 SE555
SE555FKB ACTIVE LCCC FK 20 1 TBD POST-PLATE N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 SE555FKB
SE555JG ACTIVE CDIP JG 8 1 TBD A42 N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 SE555JG
SE555JGB ACTIVE CDIP JG 8 1 TBD A42 N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 SE555JGB
SE555N OBSOLETE PDIP N 8 TBD Call TI Call TI -55 to 125
SE555P ACTIVE PDIP P 8 50 Pb-Free
(RoHS)
CU NIPDAU N / A for Pkg Type -55 to 125 SE555P
(1) The marketing status values are defined as follows:
ACTIVE: Product device recommended for new designs.
LIFEBUY: TI has announced that the device will be discontinued, and a lifetime-buy period is in effect.
NRND: Not recommended for new designs. Device is in production to support existing customers, but TI does not recommend using this part in a new design.
PREVIEW: Device has been announced but is not in production. Samples may or may not be available.
OBSOLETE: TI has discontinued the production of the device.
(2) Eco Plan - The planned eco-friendly classification: Pb-Free (RoHS), Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt), or Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) - please check http://www.ti.com/productcontent for the latest availability
information and additional product content details.
TBD: The Pb-Free/Green conversion plan has not been defined.
Pb-Free (RoHS): TI's terms "Lead-Free" or "Pb-Free" mean semiconductor products that are compatible with the current RoHS requirements for all 6 substances, including the requirement that
lead not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous materials. Where designed to be soldered at high temperatures, TI Pb-Free products are suitable for use in specified lead-free processes.
Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt): This component has a RoHS exemption for either 1) lead-based flip-chip solder bumps used between the die and package, or 2) lead-based die adhesive used between
the die and leadframe. The component is otherwise considered Pb-Free (RoHS compatible) as defined above.
Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br): TI defines "Green" to mean Pb-Free (RoHS compatible), and free of Bromine (Br) and Antimony (Sb) based flame retardants (Br or Sb do not exceed 0.1% by weight
in homogeneous material)
(3) MSL, Peak Temp. - The Moisture Sensitivity Level rating according to the JEDEC industry standard classifications, and peak solder temperature.
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com 2-May-2014
Addendum-Page 4
(4) There may be additional marking, which relates to the logo, the lot trace code information, or the environmental category on the device.
(5) Multiple Device Markings will be inside parentheses. Only one Device Marking contained in parentheses and separated by a "~" will appear on a device. If a line is indented then it is a continuation
of the previous line and the two combined represent the entire Device Marking for that device.
(6) Lead/Ball Finish - Orderable Devices may have multiple material finish options. Finish options are separated by a vertical ruled line. Lead/Ball Finish values may wrap to two lines if the finish
value exceeds the maximum column width.
Important Information and Disclaimer:The information provided on this page represents TI's knowledge and belief as of the date that it is provided. TI bases its knowledge and belief on information
provided by third parties, and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of such information. Efforts are underway to better integrate information from third parties. TI has taken and
continues to take reasonable steps to provide representative and accurate information but may not have conducted destructive testing or chemical analysis on incoming materials and chemicals.
TI and TI suppliers consider certain information to be proprietary, and thus CAS numbers and other limited information may not be available for release.
In no event shall TI's liability arising out of such information exceed the total purchase price of the TI part(s) at issue in this document sold by TI to Customer on an annual basis.
OTHER QUALIFIED VERSIONS OF SE555, SE555M :
• Catalog: SE555
• Military: SE555M
• Space: SE555-SP, SE555-SP
NOTE: Qualified Version Definitions:
• Catalog - TI's standard catalog product
• Military - QML certified for Military and Defense Applications
• Space - Radiation tolerant, ceramic packaging and qualified for use in Space-based application
TAPE AND REEL INFORMATION
*All dimensions are nominal
Device Package
Type
Package
Drawing
Pins SPQ Reel
Diameter
(mm)
Reel
Width
W1 (mm)
A0
(mm)
B0
(mm)
K0
(mm)
P1
(mm)
W
(mm)
Pin1
Quadrant
NA555DR SOIC D 8 2500 330.0 12.4 6.4 5.2 2.1 8.0 12.0 Q1
NA555DR SOIC D 8 2500 330.0 12.4 6.4 5.2 2.1 8.0 12.0 Q1
NE555DR SOIC D 8 2500 330.0 12.8 6.4 5.2 2.1 8.0 12.0 Q1
NE555DR SOIC D 8 2500 330.0 12.4 6.4 5.2 2.1 8.0 12.0 Q1
NE555DRG4 SOIC D 8 2500 330.0 12.4 6.4 5.2 2.1 8.0 12.0 Q1
NE555DRG4 SOIC D 8 2500 330.0 12.4 6.4 5.2 2.1 8.0 12.0 Q1
NE555PSR SO PS 8 2000 330.0 16.4 8.2 6.6 2.5 12.0 16.0 Q1
NE555PWR TSSOP PW 8 2000 330.0 12.4 7.0 3.6 1.6 8.0 12.0 Q1
SA555DR SOIC D 8 2500 330.0 12.4 6.4 5.2 2.1 8.0 12.0 Q1
SA555DR SOIC D 8 2500 330.0 12.8 6.4 5.2 2.1 8.0 12.0 Q1
SA555DRG4 SOIC D 8 2500 330.0 12.4 6.4 5.2 2.1 8.0 12.0 Q1
SE555DR SOIC D 8 2500 330.0 12.4 6.4 5.2 2.1 8.0 12.0 Q1
SE555DRG4 SOIC D 8 2500 330.0 12.4 6.4 5.2 2.1 8.0 12.0 Q1
PACKAGE MATERIALS INFORMATION
www.ti.com 15-Oct-2013
Pack Materials-Page 1
*All dimensions are nominal
Device Package Type Package Drawing Pins SPQ Length (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm)
NA555DR SOIC D 8 2500 340.5 338.1 20.6
NA555DR SOIC D 8 2500 367.0 367.0 35.0
NE555DR SOIC D 8 2500 364.0 364.0 27.0
NE555DR SOIC D 8 2500 340.5 338.1 20.6
NE555DRG4 SOIC D 8 2500 340.5 338.1 20.6
NE555DRG4 SOIC D 8 2500 367.0 367.0 35.0
NE555PSR SO PS 8 2000 367.0 367.0 38.0
NE555PWR TSSOP PW 8 2000 367.0 367.0 35.0
SA555DR SOIC D 8 2500 340.5 338.1 20.6
SA555DR SOIC D 8 2500 364.0 364.0 27.0
SA555DRG4 SOIC D 8 2500 340.5 338.1 20.6
SE555DR SOIC D 8 2500 367.0 367.0 35.0
SE555DRG4 SOIC D 8 2500 367.0 367.0 35.0
PACKAGE MATERIALS INFORMATION
www.ti.com 15-Oct-2013
Pack Materials-Page 2
MECHANICAL DATA
MCER001A – JANUARY 1995 – REVISED JANUARY 1997
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
JG (R-GDIP-T8) CERAMIC DUAL-IN-LINE
0.310 (7,87)
0.290 (7,37)
0.014 (0,36)
0.008 (0,20)
Seating Plane
4040107/C 08/96
5
4
0.065 (1,65)
0.045 (1,14)
8
1
0.020 (0,51) MIN
0.400 (10,16)
0.355 (9,00)
0.015 (0,38)
0.023 (0,58)
0.063 (1,60)
0.015 (0,38)
0.200 (5,08) MAX
0.130 (3,30) MIN
0.245 (6,22)
0.280 (7,11)
0.100 (2,54)
0°–15°
NOTES: A. All linear dimensions are in inches (millimeters).
B. This drawing is subject to change without notice.
C. This package can be hermetically sealed with a ceramic lid using glass frit.
D. Index point is provided on cap for terminal identification.
E. Falls within MIL STD 1835 GDIP1-T8
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, enhancements, improvements and other
changes to its semiconductor products and services per JESD46, latest issue, and to discontinue any product or service per JESD48, latest
issue. Buyers should obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and
complete. All semiconductor products (also referred to herein as “components”) are sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale
supplied at the time of order acknowledgment.
TI warrants performance of its components to the specifications applicable at the time of sale, in accordance with the warranty in TI’s terms
and conditions of sale of semiconductor products. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary
to support this warranty. Except where mandated by applicable law, testing of all parameters of each component is not necessarily
performed.
TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or the design of Buyers’ products. Buyers are responsible for their products and
applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with Buyers’ products and applications, Buyers should provide
adequate design and operating safeguards.
TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any patent right, copyright, mask work right, or
other intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI components or services are used. Information
published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license to use such products or services or a warranty or
endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual property of the
third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI.
Reproduction of significant portions of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration
and is accompanied by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered
documentation. Information of third parties may be subject to additional restrictions.
Resale of TI components or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that component or service
voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated TI component or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice.
TI is not responsible or liable for any such statements.
Buyer acknowledges and agrees that it is solely responsible for compliance with all legal, regulatory and safety-related requirements
concerning its products, and any use of TI components in its applications, notwithstanding any applications-related information or support
that may be provided by TI. Buyer represents and agrees that it has all the necessary expertise to create and implement safeguards which
anticipate dangerous consequences of failures, monitor failures and their consequences, lessen the likelihood of failures that might cause
harm and take appropriate remedial actions. Buyer will fully indemnify TI and its representatives against any damages arising out of the use
of any TI components in safety-critical applications.
In some cases, TI components may be promoted specifically to facilitate safety-related applications. With such components, TI’s goal is to
help enable customers to design and create their own end-product solutions that meet applicable functional safety standards and
requirements. Nonetheless, such components are subject to these terms.
No TI components are authorized for use in FDA Class III (or similar life-critical medical equipment) unless authorized officers of the parties
have executed a special agreement specifically governing such use.
Only those TI components which TI has specifically designated as military grade or “enhanced plastic” are designed and intended for use in
military/aerospace applications or environments. Buyer acknowledges and agrees that any military or aerospace use of TI components
which have not been so designated is solely at the Buyer's risk, and that Buyer is solely responsible for compliance with all legal and
regulatory requirements in connection with such use.
TI has specifically designated certain components as meeting ISO/TS16949 requirements, mainly for automotive use. In any case of use of
non-designated products, TI will not be responsible for any failure to meet ISO/TS16949.
Products Applications
Audio www.ti.com/audio Automotive and Transportation www.ti.com/automotive
Amplifiers amplifier.ti.com Communications and Telecom www.ti.com/communications
Data Converters dataconverter.ti.com Computers and Peripherals www.ti.com/computers
DLP® Products www.dlp.com Consumer Electronics www.ti.com/consumer-apps
DSP dsp.ti.com Energy and Lighting www.ti.com/energy
Clocks and Timers www.ti.com/clocks Industrial www.ti.com/industrial
Interface interface.ti.com Medical www.ti.com/medical
Logic logic.ti.com Security www.ti.com/security
Power Mgmt power.ti.com Space, Avionics and Defense www.ti.com/space-avionics-defense
Microcontrollers microcontroller.ti.com Video and Imaging www.ti.com/video
RFID www.ti-rfid.com
OMAP Applications Processors www.ti.com/omap TI E2E Community e2e.ti.com
Wireless Connectivity www.ti.com/wirelessconnectivity
Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265
Copyright © 2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
SN5485, SN54LS85, SN54S85
SN7485, SN74LS85, SN74S85
4-BIT MAGNITUDE COMPARATORS
SDLS123 – MARCH 1974 – REVISED MARCH 1988
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 1
PRODUCTION DATA information is current as of publication date. Copyright W 1988, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Products conform to specifications per the terms of Texas Instruments
standard warranty. Production processing does not necessarily include
testing of all parameters.
SN5485, SN54LS85, SN54S85
SN7485, SN74LS85, SN74S85
4-BIT MAGNITUDE COMPARATORS
SDLS123 – MARCH 1974 – REVISED MARCH 1988
2 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
SN5485, SN54LS85, SN54S85
SN7485, SN74LS85, SN74S85
4-BIT MAGNITUDE COMPARATORS
SDLS123 – MARCH 1974 – REVISED MARCH 1988
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 3
SN5485, SN54LS85, SN54S85
SN7485, SN74LS85, SN74S85
4-BIT MAGNITUDE COMPARATORS
SDLS123 – MARCH 1974 – REVISED MARCH 1988
4 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
SN5485, SN54LS85, SN54S85
SN7485, SN74LS85, SN74S85
4-BIT MAGNITUDE COMPARATORS
SDLS123 – MARCH 1974 – REVISED MARCH 1988
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 5
SN5485, SN54LS85, SN54S85
SN7485, SN74LS85, SN74S85
4-BIT MAGNITUDE COMPARATORS
SDLS123 – MARCH 1974 – REVISED MARCH 1988
6 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
SN5485, SN54LS85, SN54S85
SN7485, SN74LS85, SN74S85
4-BIT MAGNITUDE COMPARATORS
SDLS123 – MARCH 1974 – REVISED MARCH 1988
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 7
TAPE AND REEL INFORMATION
*All dimensions are nominal
Device Package
Type
Package
Drawing
Pins SPQ Reel
Diameter
(mm)
Reel
Width
W1 (mm)
A0
(mm)
B0
(mm)
K0
(mm)
P1
(mm)
W
(mm)
Pin1
Quadrant
SN74LS85DR SOIC D 16 2500 330.0 16.4 6.5 10.3 2.1 8.0 16.0 Q1
SN74LS85NSR SO NS 16 2000 330.0 16.4 8.2 10.5 2.5 12.0 16.0 Q1
PACKAGE MATERIALS INFORMATION
www.ti.com 14-Jul-2012
Pack Materials-Page 1
*All dimensions are nominal
Device Package Type Package Drawing Pins SPQ Length (mm) Width (mm) Height (mm)
SN74LS85DR SOIC D 16 2500 333.2 345.9 28.6
SN74LS85NSR SO NS 16 2000 367.0 367.0 38.0
PACKAGE MATERIALS INFORMATION
www.ti.com 14-Jul-2012
Pack Materials-Page 2
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, enhancements, improvements and other
changes to its semiconductor products and services per JESD46C and to discontinue any product or service per JESD48B. Buyers should
obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and complete. All
semiconductor products (also referred to herein as “components”) are sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale supplied at the time
of order acknowledgment.
TI warrants performance of its components to the specifications applicable at the time of sale, in accordance with the warranty in TI’s terms
and conditions of sale of semiconductor products. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary
to support this warranty. Except where mandated by applicable law, testing of all parameters of each component is not necessarily
performed.
TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or the design of Buyers’ products. Buyers are responsible for their products and
applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with Buyers’ products and applications, Buyers should provide
adequate design and operating safeguards.
TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any patent right, copyright, mask work right, or
other intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI components or services are used. Information
published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license to use such products or services or a warranty or
endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual property of the
third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI.
Reproduction of significant portions of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration
and is accompanied by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered
documentation. Information of third parties may be subject to additional restrictions.
Resale of TI components or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that component or service
voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated TI component or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice.
TI is not responsible or liable for any such statements.
Buyer acknowledges and agrees that it is solely responsible for compliance with all legal, regulatory and safety-related requirements
concerning its products, and any use of TI components in its applications, notwithstanding any applications-related information or support
that may be provided by TI. Buyer represents and agrees that it has all the necessary expertise to create and implement safeguards which
anticipate dangerous consequences of failures, monitor failures and their consequences, lessen the likelihood of failures that might cause
harm and take appropriate remedial actions. Buyer will fully indemnify TI and its representatives against any damages arising out of the use
of any TI components in safety-critical applications.
In some cases, TI components may be promoted specifically to facilitate safety-related applications. With such components, TI’s goal is to
help enable customers to design and create their own end-product solutions that meet applicable functional safety standards and
requirements. Nonetheless, such components are subject to these terms.
No TI components are authorized for use in FDA Class III (or similar life-critical medical equipment) unless authorized officers of the parties
have executed a special agreement specifically governing such use.
Only those TI components which TI has specifically designated as military grade or “enhanced plastic” are designed and intended for use in
military/aerospace applications or environments. Buyer acknowledges and agrees that any military or aerospace use of TI components
which have not been so designated is solely at the Buyer's risk, and that Buyer is solely responsible for compliance with all legal and
regulatory requirements in connection with such use.
TI has specifically designated certain components which meet ISO/TS16949 requirements, mainly for automotive use. Components which
have not been so designated are neither designed nor intended for automotive use; and TI will not be responsible for any failure of such
components to meet such requirements.
Products Applications
Audio www.ti.com/audio Automotive and Transportation www.ti.com/automotive
Amplifiers amplifier.ti.com Communications and Telecom www.ti.com/communications
Data Converters dataconverter.ti.com Computers and Peripherals www.ti.com/computers
DLP® Products www.dlp.com Consumer Electronics www.ti.com/consumer-apps
DSP dsp.ti.com Energy and Lighting www.ti.com/energy
Clocks and Timers www.ti.com/clocks Industrial www.ti.com/industrial
Interface interface.ti.com Medical www.ti.com/medical
Logic logic.ti.com Security www.ti.com/security
Power Mgmt power.ti.com Space, Avionics and Defense www.ti.com/space-avionics-defense
Microcontrollers microcontroller.ti.com Video and Imaging www.ti.com/video
RFID www.ti-rfid.com
OMAP Mobile Processors www.ti.com/omap TI E2E Community e2e.ti.com
Wireless Connectivity www.ti.com/wirelessconnectivity
Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
CC2530 ZigBee Development
Kit User’s Guide
swru209b
swru209b
2/28
Table of contents
CC2530 ZIGBEE DEVELOPMENT KIT USER’S GUIDE............................................................................. 1
1 INTRODUCTION..................................................................................................................................... 3
2 ABOUT THIS MANUAL......................................................................................................................... 3
3 ACRONYMS ............................................................................................................................................. 4
4 ZIGBEE DEVELOPMENT KIT CONTENTS ...................................................................................... 5
5 GETTING STARTED .............................................................................................................................. 7
5.1 SETTING UP THE HARDWARE........................................................................................................................ 7
5.2 RUNNING THE PREPROGRAMMED ZIGBEE SENSOR DEMO ........................................................................... 8
5.3 CC2530 PER TEST....................................................................................................................................... 8
5.4 EVALUATE THE CC2530 RADIO USING SMARTRF STUDIO .......................................................................... 8
5.5 DEVELOPING YOUR OWN SOFTWARE WITH THE CC2530............................................................................ 11
5.6 DEVELOPING YOUR OWN HARDWARE WITH THE CC2530 .......................................................................... 11
6 RF TESTING........................................................................................................................................... 12
6.1 TX PARAMETER TESTING BASICS.............................................................................................................. 12
6.2 RX PARAMETER TESTING BASICS.............................................................................................................. 13
7 CC2530EM .............................................................................................................................................. 14
8 CC2531 USB DONGLE.......................................................................................................................... 15
9 SMARTRF05 EVALUATION BOARD................................................................................................ 17
10 SMARTRF05 BATTERY BOARD ....................................................................................................... 18
10.1 JOYSTICK ................................................................................................................................................... 19
10.2 EMCONNECTORS....................................................................................................................................... 19
10.3 EMSELECTION SWITCH............................................................................................................................. 20
10.4 PROBE CONNECTORS.................................................................................................................................. 22
10.5 SOC DEBUG CONNECTOR........................................................................................................................... 22
10.6 CURRENTMEASUREMENT JUMPER ............................................................................................................ 23
11 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS ................................................................................................ 24
12 REFERENCES........................................................................................................................................ 26
13 DOCUMENT HISTORY........................................................................................................................ 27
APPENDIX A SCHEMATICS.................................................................................................................... 28
swru209b
3/28
1 Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the CC2530 ZigBee Development Kit.
The CC2530 is Texas Instrument’s second generation ZigBee/IEEE 802.15.4 compliant System-on-
Chip with an optimized 8051 MCU core and radio for the 2.4 GHz unlicensed ISM/SRD band. This
device enables industrial grade applications by offering state-of-the-art noise immunity, excellent link
budget, operation up to 125 degrees and low voltage operation.
In addition, the CC2530 provides extensive hardware support for packet handling, data buffering, burst
transmissions, data encryption, data authentication, clear channel assessment, link quality indication
and packet timing information.
Z-Stack™ is TI's ZigBee compliant protocol stack for a growing portfolio of IEEE 802.15.4 products
and platforms. Z-Stack support the CC2530 and is compliant with both the ZigBee® 2007 (ZigBee and
ZigBee PRO) and ZigBee® 2006 specification.
The CC2530 ZigBee Development Kit is well suited for demonstration, evaluation and software
development targeting IEEE 802.15.4 and ZigBee compliant applications with the CC2530.
The CC2530 product folder on the web [1] has more information, with datasheets, user guides and
application notes. For more information about TI’s ZigBee software implementation, refer to the ZStack
product folder on the web [7]. This web site also has links for download of Z-stack.
2 About this manual
This manual describes all the hardware included in the CC2530 ZigBee Development Kit
(CC2530ZDK) and points to other useful information resources.
Chapter 4 briefly describes the contents of the development kit and chapter 5 gives a quick
introduction to how to get started with the kit. In particular, it describes how to install SmartRF Studio
to get the required drivers for the evaluation board, how the hardware can be used, and lists the
software that is available for the development kit. Chapter 6 explains some simple methods for
performing practical RF testing with the development kit. Chapter 7, 8, and 9 describe the hardware in
the kit and where to find more information about how to use it. A troubleshooting guide can be found in
chapter 11.
The CC2530ZDK Quick Start Guide [9] has a short tutorial on how to get started with this kit.
More information and user manuals for the PC tools SmartRF Studio and SmartRF Flash Programmer
can be found on their respective product sites on the web [2] [3].
Please visit the CC2530 ZigBee Development Kit [11] web page and CC2530 product page [1] for
additional information. Further information can be found on the TI LPRF Online Community [16].
Refer also to the document CC2530DK User’s Guide [13] which gives a detailed description of how to
set up the software development environment for the CC2530. This document also lists other available
software solutions for CC2530.
See chapter 12 for a list of relevant documents and links.
swru209b
4/28
3 Acronyms
ACM Abstract Control Model
BB Battery Board
CDC Communications Device Class
DK Development Kit
EB Evaluation Board
EM Evaluation Module
HID Human Interface Device
IC Integrated Circuit
ISM Industrial, Scientific and Medical
KB Kilo Byte (1024 byte)
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light Emitting Diode
LPRF Low Power RF
MCU Micro Controller
NC Not connected
PER Packet Error Rate
RF Radio Frequency
RX Receive
SoC System on Chip
SPI Serial Peripheral Interface
SRD Short Range Device
TI Texas Instruments
TX Transmit
UART Universal Asynchronous Receive Transmit
USB Universal Serial Bus
ZDK ZigBee Development Kit
Z-Stack TI’s ZigBee software implementation
swru209b
5/28
4 ZigBee Development Kit contents
The CC2530 ZigBee Development Kit (CC2530ZDK) includes hardware and software that allows
quick testing of the CC2530 RF performance and offers a complete platform for development of
advanced prototype RF systems and ZigBee applications.
Evaluate the CC2530 and ZigBee right out of the box. The kit can be used to demonstrate a small
sensor network application using ZigBee and the CC2530.
Use the CC2530ZDK to do software development of your own ZigBee applications using ZStack
™ for CC2530.
Use SmartRF Studio to perform RF measurements. The radio can be easily configured to
measure sensitivity, output power and other RF parameters.
Prototype development. All I/O pins from the CC2530 are available on pin connectors on the
SmartRF05EB, allowing easy interconnection to peripherals on the EB board or other external
sensors and devices.
The CC2530ZDK contains the following components
2 x SmartRF05EB (the two large boards)
5 x SmartRF05 Battery Boards
7 x CC2530 Evaluation Modules (with the CC2530 and antenna connector)
o 2 of these CC2530EM’s are pre-programmed with the SensorDemo Collector application1
o 5 of the CC2530EM’s are pre-programmed with the SensorDemo Sensor application
7 x Antennas
1 x CC2531 USB Dongle
Cables
Batteries
Documents
Figure 1 - CC2530 ZigBee Development Kit Contents
1 Consult the CC2530ZDK Quick Start Guide [9] and the CC2530ZDK Sensor Demo User’s Guide [10]
for a description of the software programmed on the CC2530EM’s.
swru209b
6/28
SmartRF05EB
The SmartRF05EB (evaluation board) is the
main board in the kit with a wide range of user
interfaces:
3x16 character serial LCD
Full speed USB 2.0 interface
UART
LEDs
Serial Flash
Potentiometer
Joystick
Buttons
The EB is the platform for the evaluation
modules (EM) and can be connected to the PC
via USB to control the EM.
CC2530EM
The CC2530EM (evaluation module) contains
the RF IC and necessary external components
and matching filters for getting the most out of
the radio. The module can be plugged into the
SmartRF05EB. Use the EM as reference
design for RF layout. The schematics are
included at the end of this document and the
layout files can be found on the web [1].
CC2531 USB Dongle
The CC2531 USB Dongle is a fully operational
USB device that can be plugged into a PC.
The dongle has 2 LEDs, two small pushbuttons
and connector holes that allow
connection of external sensors or devices. The
dongle also has a connector for programming
and debugging of the CC2531 USB controller.
The dongle comes preprogrammed with
firmware such that it can be used as a packet
sniffer device.
SmartRF05BB
The SmartRF05 Battery Board can be used as
an alternative to the EB, providing a
standalone node when the CC2530EM is
connected. It is powered with 2 AA batteries in
the sockets underneath the board. The board
peripherals include 4 LED’s, 2 push buttons
and a joystick. The BB also has a SoC debug
connector for connection to an external
debug/programming tool e.g. the
SmartRF05EB.
swru209b
7/28
5 Getting started
5.1 Setting up the hardware
After opening the kit, make sure you have all components. Please contact your TI Sales
Representative or TI Support [17] if anything is missing.
Start by connecting the antennas to the SMA connector on the RF evaluation boards. Tighten the
antenna’s screw firmly on to the SMA connector. If not properly connected, you might see reduced RF
performance. It is also possible to connect the EM board to RF instruments via coax cables. The EM is
designed to match a 50 Ohm load at the SMA connector.
Figure 2 CC2530ZDK assembled hardware
Next, the evaluation modules should be plugged in to the SmartRF05EB’s and to the SmartRF05BB’s.
A ZigBee sensor demo application is preprogrammed on the CC2530EM’s included in this kit. The
application consists of two different device types; collectors and sensors. 5 of the CC2530EM’s are
programmed as the sensor device type. When running the out of the box demonstration the sensor
EM’s shall be connected to the BB’s. The two EM’s programmed as collector device shall be
connected to the EB’s.
When not using the out of the box demonstration (i.e. the preprogrammed application) e.g, for RF
evaluation or software development, all of the 7 EM’s can be used equally.
The purpose of the SmartRF05EB is to serve as a general I/O board for testing of the various
peripherals of the CC2530 microcontroller. The SmartRF05EB is also used for programming and
debugging of the CC2530, and has several useful peripheral devices like LCD, LED’s, I/O connectors,
push buttons and joystick etc.
The evaluation board can be powered from several different sources:
2 x 1.5V AA batteries (included in this kit)
USB (via the USB connector)
DC power (4 to 10 Volt) (not included in this kit)
swru209b
8/28
External regulated power source (not included in this kit)
The power source can be selected using jumper P11 on the SmartRF05EB. The SmartRF05EB User’s
Guide [6] provides more details.
The SmartRF05 Battery Boards (BB) can be used as a standalone device when equipped with a
CC2530EM. This board is powered by AA batteries. See section 10 in this document for more
information about the SmartRF05BB.
After assembling the hardware, you now have several options for working with the CC2530:
Run the Sensor Demo ZigBee application that is preprogrammed on the CC2530’s. The
CC2530ZDK Quick Start Guide document [9] included in this kit describes the necessary
steps to run the demonstration.
Running the packet error rate (PER) test software available for CC2530EM. Chapter 5.3
describes this application.
Evaluate and explore the RF capabilities of the CC2530 using SmartRF Studio. Chapter
5.4 provides the details how to do so.
Develop your own software for the CC2530. Install IAR Embedded Workbench for 8051
and set up your first software project. Section 5.5 explains how.
Develop your own hardware with the CC2530. See chapter 5.6.
5.2 Running the Preprogrammed ZigBee Sensor Demo
The CC2530EM’s are pre-programmed with a Sensor Demo application used to demonstrate a
temperature monitoring application in a small ZigBee network. The CC2530ZDK Quick Start Guide
document [9] included in this kit describes the necessary steps to run the demonstration.
A software package with the source code for the Sensor Demo, and Intel HEX files ready to be
programmed on the devices, is available on the CC2530ZDK web site [11]. A detailed description
about the Sensor Demo application is found in the document CC2530ZDK Sensor Demo User’s Guide
[10].
5.3 CC2530 PER test
A Packet Error Rate (PER) test application is also available for the CC2530. This application can be
used to evaluate the RF performance of CC2530 using either the hardware included in the kit or other
boards with a CC2530.
More information about the PER test application can be found in the documents CC2530DK Quick
Start Guide [12] and CC2530 Software Examples User's Guide [13].
A software package with the source code for the PER test application, and Intel HEX files ready to be
programmed on the devices, is available on the CC2530DK web site [14].
5.4 Evaluate the CC2530 Radio using SmartRF Studio
SmartRF Studio is a PC application developed for configuration and evaluation of many of the RF-IC
products from Texas Instruments, including the CC2530. The application communicates with the
CC2530 via the USB controller on the SmartRF05EB board. The USB controller uses the debug
interface of the CC2530 to execute commands and to read and write registers.
SmartRF Studio lets you explore the radio on the CC2530, as it gives you full overview and access to
the radio registers. The tool has a control interface for running basic radio performance tests from the
swru209b
9/28
PC. SmartRF Studio also offers a flexible code export function of radio register settings for software
developers.
Before proceeding, please download and install the latest version of SmartRF Studio from the web [2].
By installing Studio, the USB drivers needed for proper interaction between the PC and the hardware
of the CC2530DK will also be installed.
In order to use the SmartRF Studio with CC2530, connect the CC2530EM to the SmartRF05EB. Next,
connect the SmartRF05EB board to the PC via one of the USB cables included in the kit. If you have
installed SmartRF Studio, select automatic installation of driver in the device wizard that appears. The
device wizard will only pop up when you turn on the SmartRF05EB and only once for each board.
Allow Windows to complete the driver installation before proceeding.
With the board connected to the PC, you can start SmartRF Studio. The following window should
appear:
Figure 3 - CC2530 and SmartRF Studio
Make sure you select the tab called “2.4 GHz”. The tab will indicate if there is a board/device
connected, and you should see the CC2530 icon highlighted as in the screenshot above. Double click
on the CC2530 icon, and a new window will appear.
swru209b
10/28
Figure 4 - CC2530 control panel in SmartRF Studio
Figure 4 shows the main control panel for the CC2530. It lets you perform a number of operations:
Run TX Test modes for testing of RF output power and spectrum; e.g. by connecting a
spectrum analyser or a power meter to the CC2530EM SMA connector to perform RF
measurements.
Run Packet TX and RX tests. For this test, you should have two EBs with CC2530EMs
connected to the PC.
o Double click on both of the devices in the device list in SmartRF Studio (Figure 3),
opening two windows, giving control of the two radios at the same time.
o Select one device to be the transmitter, by selecting the “Packet TX” tab shown in the
lower middle of Figure 4.
o On the other device (the receiver), select the “Packet RX” tab.
o Set up basic test parameters and press the “Start” button for the receiver.
o Now you can start transmission by pressing the “Start” button for the transmitter.
o The window will show the number of packets sent on the transmitter side and the
number of received packets and signal strength of the last received packet on the
receiver side.
Read and/or modify registers and common settings, such as RF frequency (or channel) and
output power.
Export RF register values in a user modifiable format by selecting “File Register Export”.
SmartRF Studio offers a lot of possibilities for testing and evaluating the hardware. Download the tool
and try it for yourself.
swru209b
11/28
5.5 Developing your own software with the CC2530
To develop software and debug an application on the CC2530, it is recommended to use IAR
Embedded Workbench. It supports debugging of CC2530 through the SmartRF05EB, so no additional
hardware is required.
IAR EW8051 is bundled with all the required files for CC2530 to start development:
Register definition header file
Linker command file
Driver and device description file needed for debugging and programming
Note that other compilers and linkers can be used, but these tools may have limited debugging
capabilities.
An evaluation version of IAR Embedded Workbench is included in the ZigBee Development Kit. To
install the software, insert the CD and follow the instructions. You will be asked to register on IAR’s
web site to get a license key for the product. As the owner of a CC2530 Development Kit, you are
entitled to a 60 day evaluation period. The evaluation version in the kit automatically gives you 30
days. Please contact your local IAR sales representative for the additional 30-days evaluation period.
For a list of sales offices and distributors in your country, please see this site:
http://www.iar.com/contact.
Refer also to the CC2530DK User’s Guide [13] which will guide you through the steps of setting up
your own IAR project from scratch.
The CC2530DK User’s Guide [13] also gives a brief overview of complete software solutions for
CC2530 from Texas Instruments.
TI’s ZigBee compliant protocol stack Z-Stack™ can be downloaded from the product folder [7]. This
software is needed in order to develop ZigBee application for the CC2530. The product folder include
downloads of Z-Stack™ for the various TI platforms. Make sure the version for CC2530 is selected.
After installation refer to the Z-stack User’s Guide document found in the installation folders of ZStack
™. The default root installation path for Z-Stack is C:\Texas Instruments\.
A software package with the source code for the Sensor Demo, and Intel HEX files ready to be
programmed on the devices, is available on the CC2530ZDK web site [11]. This package also
includes the CC2530ZDK Sensor Demo User’s Guide giving information about how to set up the
software example in the IAR development environment.
5.6 Developing your own hardware with the CC2530
It is recommended to use the CC2530EM as a reference design when designing new hardware using
the CC2530. The CC2530EM reference design files can be downloaded from the CC2530 product
folder on the web [1].
swru209b
12/28
6 RF Testing
NB! When running RF performance tests, it is recommended to disable all other peripherals on the
SmartRF05EB in order to avoid unwanted noise on the on-board voltage. In particular, make sure the
RS232 level converter/line driver is disabled.
RF testing can be performed by using SmartRF Studio together with the Development Kit. The basic
set-up is described in section 5.4. As described in that chapter, SmartRF Studio can be used to set up
basic tests and tune RF registers accordingly.
Since the CC2530 evaluation board is equipped with an SMA connector, both radiated (via antenna)
and conducted (via cable) tests can be performed, and it is easy to hook the EM up to RF
measurement equipment. The RF equipment may be connected in two different ways.
To measure radiated performance, connect an appropriate antenna to the spectrum analyzer
or power meter and an antenna on the EM board.
To measure conducted performance, connect a 50 Ohm coaxial cable directly from the EM to
the RF equipment.
Figure 5 - RF Test Set-Up with a Spectrum analyzer
By using good-quality RF cabling, the loss in the cabling should be negligible. However make sure that
the spectrum analyzer is calibrated. If possible, check it against a calibrated instrument such as an RF
signal generator. Uncalibrated spectrum analyzers can display errors of several dBs.
6.1 TX Parameter Testing Basics
To investigate the TX performance of the CC2530, you can either use a Spectrum Analyzer or an RF
Power Meter. Use the “Simple TX” test mode in SmartRF Studio to set up the device to transmit a
signal at the desired frequency. Both a modulated or unmodulated carrier signal can be generated.
Use the RF Power Meter to observe the output power or the spectrum analyzer to observe the
spectrum and to measure the error vector magnitude (EVM).
swru209b
13/28
6.2 RX Parameter Testing Basics
To investigate the RX performance of the CC2530, you can use a signal generator or “Packet TX” in
SmartRF Studio (with another EB+EM) to generate the packets to receive. The receiver can be
configured by using the “Packet RX” test feature in SmartRF Studio.
By adding a jammer (a third node that generates either noise on the same channel or a strong signal
on an adjacent channel) it is also possible to measure co-channel rejection and selectivity/blocking
performance.
The PER test application, that was described in section 5.3, can be used for simple sensitivity
measurements with the CC2530EM and/or with your own prototype hardware. In this case, connect
the unit you want to test to a known good transmitter with coaxial cables and attenuators. Add more
attenuators until the PER value is 1%. The signal strength at the receiver side is then the sensitivity
limit of the system.
For more information regarding sensitivity measurements, refer to “Design Note 2 – Practical
Sensitivity Testing” [15].
swru209b
14/28
7 CC2530EM
Figure 6 - CC2530 Evaluation Module
The CC2530EM is a complete RF module based on one of the recommended reference designs for
the CC2530 radio. The module is equipped with a 32 MHz crystal, a 32.768 kHz crystal, external
passive components for the balun and antenna match filter, an SMA connector for the antenna or any
other RF instrument connection and general IO headers/connectors.
The table below shows the pin-out from the CC2530 to the two connectors on the backside of the
evaluation module.
CC2530
Signal P1 P1 CC2530
Signal
CC2530
Signal P2 P2 CC2530
Signal
GND 1 2 - - 1 2 -
P0.4 3 4 P1.3 - 3 4 -
P0.1 5 6 P1.0 - 5 6 -
P0.2 7 8 - VDD 7 8 -
P0.3 9 10 P2.1 VDD 9 10 -
P0.0 11 12 P2.2 - 11 12 -
P1.1 13 14 P1.4 - 13 14 -
P0.6 15 16 P1.5 RESET 15 16 -
P0.7 17 18 P1.6 P1.2 17 18 P0.5
GND 19 20 P1.7 P2.0 19 20 -
Table 1 - CC2530EM pin-out
The part number of the EM connector is SFM-110-02-SM-D-A-K-TR from Samtec. It mates with the
TFM-110-02-SM-D-A-K-TR, also from Samtec.
Please refer to the reference design on the web [1] for further details.
CC2530F256
32 kHz Crystal
32MHz Crystal
SMA antenna
connector
EM Connector
P2
(Bottom side)
EM Connector
P1
(Bottom side)
swru209b
15/28
8 CC2531 USB Dongle
Figure 7 - CC2531 USB Dongle
The USB dongle that is included in the kit comes preprogrammed such that it can be used together
with the SmartRF Packet Sniffer [4] to capture packets going over the air. To use the dongle as a
sniffer, just install the Packet Sniffer PC application (available on the web [4]), plug in the USB dongle
and start capturing packets. The Packet Sniffer User Manual [5] has more information.
The USB dongle can also be used as a general development board for USB and RF software. There
is a USB firmware library available from the TI web pages with an implementation of a complete USB
framework, including examples showing both HID and CDC ACM. There is a link to this library on the
CC2530 DK web pages [14].
Table 2 shows which CC2531 signals are connected to what IO on the dongle.
IO
Connector CC2531 Dongle
User IO CC2531
1 P0.2 Green LED P0.0
2 P0.3 Red LED P1.1
3 P0.4 Button S1 P1.2
4 P0.5 Button S2 P1.3
5 P1.7
6 P1.6
7 P1.5
8 P1.4
Table 2 - CC2531 USB Dongle Pinout
In order to debug and program firmware on the CC2531, the CC2531 USB dongle can be connected
to the SmartRF05EB as shown in the picture below. The small adapter board and flat cable is included
in the development kit.
IO Connector
Meandred F-antenna
CC2531F256
Button S1
Button S2
LEDs
Debug connector
Voltage regulator
swru209b
16/28
Figure 8 - CC2531 USB Dongle connected to SmartRF05EB
The debug connector on the CC2531 USB Dongle matches the debug connector on the
SmartRF05EB (and the CC Debugger). Note that, by default, the CC2531 dongle is not powered
through the debug connector, so an external power source must be used while programming. The
easiest solution is to connect it to a USB port on the PC. Alternatively, resistor R2 can be mounted.
The table below shows the pin out of the debug connector.
Pin # Connection
1 GND
2 VCC
3 CC2531 P2.2 (DC)
4 CC2531 P2.1 (DD)
5 NC
6 NC
7 CC2531 RESET
8 NC
9 Optional external VCC (R2 must be mounted)
10 NC
Table 3 – CC2531 USB Dongle Debug Connector
Refer to the schematics (in the appendices) for additional details.
swru209b
17/28
9 SmartRF05 Evaluation Board
The SmartRF05 Evaluation Board is thoroughly described in the SmartRF05EB User’s Guide [6]. That
document will describe the hardware features in detail and provide the schematics for the board.
swru209b
18/28
10 SmartRF05 Battery Board
Figure 9 SmartRF05 Battery Board
The SmartRF05 Battery Board is a smaller and simpler board than the SmartRF05EB. The Battery
Board can together with an EM be used as a standalone node. Figure 9 shows the SmartRF05 Battery
Board. The Battery Board is powered with 2 AA batteries placed in the battery connectors underneath
the board.
The peripherals that are available include 2 push buttons, a joystick with 5 directions and 4 LED’s of
different colours that can be controlled via the EM.
There are 2 switches on the SmartRF05 Battery Board:
The Power switch P6 used to switch the board’s power supply on/off.
The EM selection switch.
NB: The EM selection switch shall be placed in position SoC/TRX when using a SoC EM such as
CC2530EM or a transceiver EM is connected to the Battery Board.
The position MSP is used when the CCMSP-EM430F2618 board (not part of this kit) is connected. More
information about the EM Selection switch is found in section 10.3.
The following sections give the pin out of the different connectors on the SmartRF05 Battery Board.
Refer to the schematics (in the appendices) and layout (available on the web) for additional details.
256kB SPI
EM Flash Module
Connectors
Joystick
EM Selection
Switch
LEDs
Probe
Connectors
Push
Buttons
Power
Switch
swru209b
19/28
10.1 Joystick
The joystick detects five positions (centre, up, down, left, right) and one event (pushed). The two
aggregated signals, JOY_MOVE and JOY_LEVEL, are used to detect a joystick event when using a
SoC (e.g. the CC2530). JOY_MOVE is high whenever the joystick is moved away from the centre
position, including pushing. The other signal, JOY_LEVEL, is a voltage level signal that gives different
values depending on the current position of the joystick. The table below shows these values. Note
that the voltage levels are relative to the voltage on the board.
Joystick position JOY_LEVEL (Volts)
Up 0.31
Down 1.16
Left 1.62
Right 1.81
Centre 2.12
Table 4 - Voltage on JOY_LEVEL for different joystick positions (T=25°C, Vdd=3.0V)
When the EM selection switch is in position MSP, there are 5 discrete signals in addition to
JOY_MOVE and JOY_LEVEL to be used to distinguish which direction the joystick was pressed.
These 5 discrete signals are not used with CC2530 - only with the CCMSP-EM430F2618 board (not
part of this kit). The discrete signals are routed to the EM connectors. See section 10.2 for details.
10.2 EM connectors
The EM connectors P1 and P2 are used to connect an EM to the Battery Board. The pin out for these
connectors is shown below. Table 1 in section 7 gives information about how the signals of the EM
connectors are connected to the CC2530 on the EM board.
Note that some of the signals are shared, e.g. IO_LED4_SOC/IO_BUTTON1. This means that the
signal is shared between IO’s on the board; in this case both LED 4 when in SoC mode and Button 1.
Pressing Button 1 will affect the state of LED 4. Similarly, if a SoC is toggling LED 4, it cannot read
from Button 1 at the same time.
Function on BB Pin Pin Function on BB
GND 1 2 GND
Not in use on BB 3 4 FLASH_CS
IO_LED4_SOC/IO_BUTTON1 5 6 IO_LED1
Not in use on BB 7 8 JOYSTICK_RT
Not in use on BB 9 10 SoC Debug P3.4
Not in use on BB 11 12 SoC Debug P3.3
IO_LED2_SOC 13 14 CS &
SoC Debug P3.5
JOY_LEVEL 15 16 SCLK &
SoC Debug P3.6
Not in use on BB 17 18 MOSI &
SoC Debug P3.8
GND 19 20 MISO &
SoC Debug P3.10
Table 5 - EM connector P1 pin-out
swru209b
20/28
Function on BB Pin Pin Function on BB
JOYSTICK_PUSH 1 2 GND
NC 3 4 IO_LED2_MSP
Not in use on BB 5 6 IO_LED3_MSP
VCC_EM 7 8 IO_LED4_MSP
VCC_EM 9 10 NC
JOYSTICK_UP 11 12 Not in use on BB
JOYSTICK_LEFT 13 14 Not in use on BB
SoC Debug P3.7 &
Flash Reset 15 16 IO_BUTTON2
Not in use on BB 17 18 Not in use on BB
JOY_MOVE 19 20 Not in use on BB
Table 6 EM connector P2 pin out
10.3 EM Selection Switch
The EM selection switch on SmartRF05BB controls a multiplexer on the board that allows either a
connected RF SoC EM or an MSP430 add-on board to access all four LEDs on the evaluation board.
The limitation was caused by the particular pin-out on the RF evaluation modules that needed to be
backwards compatible with other boards and test equipment.
Figure 10 - EM Selection Switch (P8)
The switch will both affect the operation of the LEDs and Button 1.
NB: The EM Selection switch shall be placed in position SoC/TRX when the CC2530EM is used with
SmartRF05BB.
swru209b
21/28
Figure 11 - Switch P8 effect on LED 1-4
Due to lack of pins, some of the signals are shared.
The chip select signal to the EM will also be affected when LED3 is used by the SoC (e.g. CC2530). In
most cases, this will not be a problem, since the SoC does not, by default, implement a SPI slave.
When LED4 is used by the SoC, the signal from Button 1 might interfere. In short, Button 1 and LED 4
can not be used simultaneously by the SoC.
Figure 12 - Switch P8 effect on Button 1
The EM Selection switch will change the polarity of button number 1.
In the MSP position, the button is active low, i.e. low voltage when the button is pressed. In the
inactive position, the level is high (signal is pulled up by a 10k Ohm resistor).
In the SoC position, the button is active high, i.e. high voltage when the button is pressed. In the
inactive position, the level is low (signal is pulled down by a 10k Ohm resistor).
Note that it is possible to use this feature to determine the position of switch P8 (assuming the button
is not pressed).
swru209b
22/28
10.4 Probe connectors
The probe connectors P4 and P5 bring out all the signals from the EM connectors for probing
purposes. The connectors allow easy access to I/O signals and to connect prototyping boards. The
pin-out of these connectors are shown below.
Function on BB Signal name Pin Pin Signal name Function on BB
NC NC 1 2 NC NC
Not in use on BB EM_P2_14 3 4 EM_P1_04 FLASH_CS
Not in use on BB EM_P2_12 5 6 EM_P1_13 IO_LED2_SOC
IO_LED4_SOC/IO_BUT
TON1 EM_P1_05 7 8 EM_P1_10 SoC Debug P3.4
Not in use on BB EM_P1_07 9 10 EM_P1_12 SoC Debug P3.3
Not in use on BB EM_P1_09 11 12 EM_P1_20 MISO &
SoC Debug P3.10
Not in use on BB EM_P1_03 13 14 EM_P1_14 IO_LED3_SOC &
SoC Debug P3.5
Not in use on BB EM_P2_18 15 16 EM_P1_16 SCLK &
SoC Debug P3.6
Not in use on BB EM_P1_17 17 18 EM_P1_18 MOSI &
SoC Debug P3.8
Not in use on BB EM_P2_20 19 20 GND GND
Table 7 I/O connector P4 pin out
Function on BB Signal name Pin Pin Signal name Function on BB
NC NC 1 2 NC NC
VCC_EM VCC_EM 3 4 EM_P1_06 IO_LED1
Not in use on BB EM_P2_05 5 6 EM_P2_04 IO_LED2_MSP
JOYSTICK_RT EM_P1_08 7 8 EM_P2_06 IO_LED3_MSP
JOYSTICK_DN EM_P1_02 9 10 EM_P2_08 IO_LED4_MSP
JOYSTICK_UP EM_P2_11 11 12 EM_P1_11 Not in use on BB
JOYSTICK_LEFT EM_P2_13 13 14 EM_P2_15 SoC Debug P3.7 &
Flash Reset
JOYSTICK_PUSH EM_P2_01 15 16 EM_P2_16 IO_BUTTON2
JOY_LEVEL EM_P1_15 17 18 EM_P2_17 Not in use on BB
JOY_MOVE EM_P2_19 19 20 GND GND
Table 8 I/O connector P5 pin out
10.5 SoC Debug connector
The SoC debug connector P3 is used to program and debug the SoC on the connected EM with an
external programmer/debug tool. The SmartRF05EB can be used for this purpose by connecting a
cable to P3 on the Battery Board as shown in Figure 13 below.
swru209b
23/28
Figure 13 Program/debug with SmartRF05EB
The pin out of this connector is depicted below. For debugging and programming of the SoC the
following signals are used; SoC RESET_N, DD and DC. In addition GND and +3.3V shall be
connected.
Figure 14 SmartRF05BB SoC Debug Connector
As seen on Figure 14 also the SPI signals CS, MISO, MOSI and SCLK can be found on this
connector.
10.6 Current Measurement Jumper
Jumper P7, also called V_EM, has been added to the board to simplify current consumption
measurements. By removing the jumper, an Ampere Meter can easily be connected to the board to
perform current consumption measurements. Similarly, a separate, regulated power supply for the EM
can be connected. Refer to the schematics (in the appendices) for further details.
swru209b
24/28
11 Frequently Asked Questions
Q1 When connecting the SmartRF05EB to my PC via USB, the dialog window below appears.
Why? What should I do?
A1 The SmartRF05EB will be recognized as a USB device by the operating system, and it will ask
the user to provide information about which USB driver that should be associated with the
device.
If you have installed SmartRF Studio, just follow the instructions and select “Automatic
installation”. Windows should find the required driver (cebal2.sys), as specified in an .inf file.
Both files (.inf and .sys) are included in the SmartRF installation.
If you have not installed SmartRF Studio, it is recommended that you do so before proceeding.
Both the SmartRF Studio User Manual and SmartRF05EB User’s Guide has more details.
Q2 SmartRF05EB with the CC2530EM is not detected by IAR/SmartRF Studio. Why?
A2 Make sure you have installed SmartRF Studio as described in section 5.4. Then verify that the
device is associated with the correct driver by opening the Device Manager on your PC. When
the EB is connected, the “Cebal controlled devices” list contains “SmartRF05EB”. If the board is
listed as an unknown device, please follow the steps outlined in the SmartRF05EB User’s Guide.
swru209b
25/28
Q3 How can I measure the current consumption of the CC2530?
A3 The easiest way to measure current consumption of the chip in various modes is to connect the
EM directly to the SmartRF05EB and disconnect everything on the board that consumes power
by removing all jumpers. The jumper on header P13 should not be removed. Connect the
ampere meter between the two terminals on P15. On P10, the jumper for the EM_RESET signal
(connector 35-36) should be mounted. On P1, no jumpers are required, but in order to control
the SoC from a debugger, mount a jumper between 19-20 (DBG_DD) and 21-22 (DBG_DD).
Make sure the RS232 Enable switch is in the “disable” position.
Use SmartRF Studio to set the radio in different modes (RX, TX, etc.), or download an
application on the CC2530 setting the device in the preferred state.
Q4 Can I use another compiler than IAR to develop software for CC2530?
A4 Yes, there are several tools available that can be used for CC2530. Any 8051 compiler (e.g.
Keil, GCC, and SDCC) can, in theory, be used. Note that these tools may have limited
debugging support for CC2530. When working with the TI Z-Stack (and RemoTI) stack for
CC253x, you must use IAR Embedded Workbench for 8051.
swru209b
26/28
12 References
[1] CC2530 product web site
http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/cc2530.html
[2] SmartRF Studio product web site
http://focus.ti.com/docs/toolsw/folders/print/smartrftm-studio.html
[3] SmartRF Flash Programmer product web site
http://focus.ti.com/docs/toolsw/folders/print/flash-programmer.html
[4] SmartRF Packet Sniffer
http://focus.ti.com/docs/toolsw/folders/print/packet-sniffer.html
[5] SmartRF Packet Sniffer User Manual
http://www.ti.com/lit/swru187
[6] SmartRF05EB User’s Guide
http://www.ti.com/lit/swru210
[7] Z-Stack
http://www.ti.com/z-stack
[8] CC2530 Software Examples User’s Guide
http://www.ti.com/lit/swru137
[9] CC2530ZDK Quick Start Guide
http://www.ti.com/lit/swra274
[10]CC2530ZDK Sensor Demo User’s Guide
http://www.ti.com/lit/swru225
[11]CC2530ZDK web site
http://focus.ti.com/docs/toolsw/folders/print/cc2530zdk.html
[12]CC2530DK Quick Start Guide
http://www.ti.com/lit/swra273
[13]CC2530DK User’s Guide
http://www.ti.com/lit/swru208
[14]CC2530DK web site
http://focus.ti.com/docs/toolsw/folders/print/cc2530dk.html
[15]DN002 -- Practical Sensitivity Testing
http://www.ti.com/lit/swra097
[16] Texas Instruments Low Power RF Online Community
http://www.ti.com/lprf-forum
[17] Texas Instruments Support
http://support.ti.com
swru209b
27/28
13 Document history
Revision Date Description/Changes
B 2011-04-05
Clarified that IAR EW8051 is required when working with the Z-Stack.
Updated screenshots of SmartRF Studio.
Include updated schematics.
Fixed a few typos.
A 2009-08-04 Added SmartRF05 Battery Board schematics
- 2009-06-08 First revision.
swru209b
28/28
Appendix A Schematics
Please refer to the following pages for the schematics for
CC2530 Evaluation Module
CC2531 USB Dongle
SmartRF05 Evaluation Board
SmartRF05 Battery Board
The reference design for the CC2530 evaluation module can be found on the CC2530 web page [1].
P0.5
VDD
VDD
3 1
X1
X_32.000/10/15/30/16
1
2
C254
C_2P2_0402_NP0_C_50
2 1
L261
L_2N0_0402_S
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
P1.5
P1.4
P1.3
P1.1
P1.0
P0.7
P0.6
P0.4
P0.3
P0.2
P0.1
P0.0
Reset
P2.2
P2.1
P1.7
P1.6
P0_5
XOSC32M_Q1
P1_5
DVDD
RBIAS
AVDD2
AVDD5/AVDD_SOC
P0_6
P0_7
P0_4
P1_6
P0_2
P1_7
AVDD_DREG
P0_0
DVDD_USB
DGND_USB
USB_M
P0_1
P0_3
GND
USB_P
AVDD4
AVDD3
DCOUPL
P1_0
P1_4
AVDD1
AVDD_GUARD
RESET_N
P2_4
XOSC32M_Q2
P1_1
P1_3
P1_2
RF_P
P2_2
P2_3
P2_0
RF_N
P2_1
U1
CC2530_TX_REDES
1
2
C251
C_18P_0402_NP0_J_50
1 2
L1
L_BEAD_102_0402
2 1
C401
C_1U_0402_X5R_K_6P3
1
2
C271
C_100N_0402_X5R_K_10
1
2
P4
PINROW_1x2
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
P0.4 P1.3
P0.1 P1.0
P0.2
P0.3 P2.1
P0.0 P2.2
P1.1 P1.4
P0.6 P1.5
P0.7 P1.6
P1.7
P1 SMD_SOCKET_2X10
1 2 3 4 5
P3
SMA_SMD
1
2
C211
C_100N_0402_X5R_K_10
1 2
R301
R_56K_0402_F
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
P1.2
P2.0
P2
SMD_SOCKET_2X10
1 2
L252
L_2N0_0402_S
1 2
L251
L_0402
1
2
C311
C_100N_0402_X5R_K_10
1
2
C241
C_100N_0402_X5R_K_10
1
2
C101
C_100N_0402_X5R_K_10
4 1
X2
X_32.768/20/50/40/12
1
2
C221
C_27P_0402_NP0_J_50
1
2
C252
C_1P0_0402_NP0_C_50
1
2
C1
C_2U2_0402_X5R_M_4VDC
1
2 C253
C_0402
1
2
C231
C_27P_0402_NP0_J_50
1
2
C391
C_1U_0402_X5R_K_6P3
1
2
C272
C_220P_0402_NP0_J_50
1
2
C261
C_18P_0402_NP0_J_50
1
2
C262
C_1P0_0402_NP0_C_50
1
2 C255
C_0402
1
2
C331
C_15P_0402_NP0_J_50
1
2
C321
C_15P_0402_NP0_J_50
FM2
FIDUCIAL_MARK
FM1
FIDUCIAL_MARK
FM3
FIDUCIAL_MARK
FM4
FIDUCIAL_MARK
FM5
FIDUCIAL_MARK
FM6
FIDUCIAL_MARK
A4
SCALE SHEET
APPROVALS DATE
DWG NO. REV.
DWG
COMPANY NAME
ISSUED
CHECKED
DRAWN
SIZE FSCM NO.
CONTRACT NO.
Texas Instruments
1 (1)
NN 1.3.1
CC2530EM Discrete
025104
TIK
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
SoC periferials RF-SoC PART
P1_1/LED
P1_2
P0_2
P0_3
PA_DM
P0_0
PA_DP
P1_4
P1_5
P1_6
P1_7
P2_1
P2_2
RESET_N
P0_4
P0_5
P1_0/LED
P1_3
P0_0
P0_2
P0_3
P0_4
P0_5
P1_0/LED
P1_1/LED
P1_2
P1_3
P1_4
P1_5
P1_6
P1_7
P2_1
P2_2
PA_DP
PA_DM
RESET_N
1
FM2
FIDUCIAL_MARK_1mm
1
FM3
FIDUCIAL_MARK_1mm
1
FM1
FIDUCIAL_MARK_1mm
Including PCB antenna
CONTRACT NO.
SIZE FSCM NO.
DRAWN
CHECKED
ISSUED
COMPANY NAME
DWG
DWG NO. REV.
APPROVALS DATE
SCALE SHEET
A4
1(4)
- USB Connector
- Buttons
- LEDs
- SMD sockets
Generated voltage:
3.3 V for CC2531
Texas Instruments
CC2531 USB dongle
2.4
025104
TIK
MAP
VCC_EXT 3.3V
VBUS
Gnd
In Out
/EN NC
VREG
U2
TPS76933
1
2
R2
R_0402
1
2
C2
C_4U7_0603_X5R_K_6
1
2
C1
C_1U_0603_X5R_L_6P3
1
2
R1
R_2_0402_F
1 2
R3
R_0_0402
1
2
C3
C_0402
CONTRACT NO.
SIZE FSCM NO.
DRAWN
CHECKED
ISSUED
COMPANY NAME
DWG
DWG NO. REV.
APPROVALS DATE
SCALE SHEET
A4
CC2531 USB DONGLE VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Not mount: C3, R2
2(4)
To CC2531
From PC
Texas Instruments
2.4
025104
TIK
MAP
P0_0
P0_2
P0_3
P0_4
P0_5
P1_0/LED
P1_1/LED
P1_2
P1_3
P1_4
P1_5
P1_6
P1_7
P2_1
P2_2
PA_DP
PA_DM
RESET_N
VCC 3.3V
1
2
C241
C_100N_0402_X5R_K_10
1
2
C211
C_100N_0402_X5R_K_10
C5
C_0P5_0402_NP0_B_50
1
2
C311
C_100N_0402_X5R_K_10
1
2
C271
C_100N_0402_X5R_K_10
1
2
C221
C_27P_0402_NP0_J_50
1
2
C4
C_2U2_0402_X5R_M_4VDC
1
2
C272
C_220P_0402_NP0_J_50
1
2
C391
C_1U_0402_X5R_K_6P3
1
2
C201
C_1N_0402_NP0_J_50
1
2
R301
R_56K_0402_F
2 1
C401
C_1U_0402_X5R_K_6P3
1
2
C41
C_10P_0402_NP0_J_50
3 1
X1
X_32.000/10/15/30/16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
P0_5
P1_5
RBIAS
AVDD2
P0_6
P0_7
P0_4
P1_6
P0_2
P1_7
P0_0
DVDD_USB
DGND_USB
P0_1
P0_3
GND
AVDD4
AVDD3
DCOUPL
P1_0
P1_4
AVDD1
RESET_N
P2_4
P1_1
P1_3
P1_2
RF_P
P2_2
P2_3
P2_0
RF_N
P2_1
DVDD2
DVDD1
AVDD5
AVDD6
XOSC_Q2
XOSC_Q1
USB_M
USB_P
U1
CC2531
1
2
C231
C_27P_0402_NP0_J_50
1 2
L1
L_BEAD_102_0402
2 1
A2
ANTENNA_IIFA_1_LEFT
2
R9
R_0_0402
1
3 2
4
5 6
B1
JTI_2450BM15A0002
1 2
R201
R_2K2_0402_G
1
2
C101
C_100N_0402_X5R_K_10
L301
L_6N8_0402_J
CONTRACT NO.
SIZE FSCM NO.
DRAWN
CHECKED
ISSUED
COMPANY NAME
DWG
DWG NO. REV.
APPROVALS DATE
SCALE SHEET
A4
3(4)
Texas Instruments
CC2531 USB DONGLE RF-PART
2.4
025104
TIK
MAP
P1_1/LED
P1_2
P0_2
P0_3
PA_DM
P0_0
PA_DP
P1_4
P1_5
P1_6
P1_7
P2_2 P2_1
RESET_N
P0_4
P0_5
P1_0/LED
P1_3
3.3V
VBUS
3.3V
3.3V
VCC_EXT
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
IO
BL_31_008U_NO_SILK
1
2
3
4
5
6
DVBUS
Shield
GND
D+
Shield
P1
USB_A
1 2
R21
R_33_0402_G
1 2
R31
R_33_0402_G
1 2
R91
R_0_0402
1 2
R71
R_270_0402_F
2 1
D2 LED_EL19-21SYGC
1
2
R92
R_0402
1
2
C31
C_47P_0402_NP0_J_50
1 2
R11
R_270_0402_F
1
2
R32
R_1K5_0402_G
1 2
S2
PUSH_BUTTON_SKRK
1 2
S1
PUSH_BUTTON_SKRK
2 1
D1 LED_EL19-21SURC
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
DEBUG
STL21
1
2
C21
C_47P_0402_NP0_J_50
CONTRACT NO.
SIZE FSCM NO.
DRAWN
CHECKED
ISSUED
COMPANY NAME
DWG
DWG NO. REV.
APPROVALS DATE
SCALE SHEET
A4
4(4)
LED_Green
CC2531 USB dongle USB circuitry
SoC debug/flash
button_P_1_3
Texas Instruments
LED_Red
button_P_1_2
2.4
025104
USB Interface
Not mount: R92, IO
TIK
Additional testpins
MAP
Power Supply
Joystick
RS-232
User Interface
USB Interface
EM Interface
POWER_PS
VCC_EM
VCC_IO
VBUS
+3.3V USB
JOYSTICK_PUSH
JOYSTICK_UP
JOYSTICK_RT
JOYSTICK_DN
JOYSTICK_LT
JOY_MOVE
JOY_LEVEL
EM_UART_TX
EM_UART_RTS
EM_UART_RX
EM_UART_CTS
VCC_IO
IO_POT_R
IO_BUTTON2
IO_LED1
IO_LED2_MSP
IO_LED2_SOC
IO_LED3_MSP
IO_LED3_SOC
IO_LED4_MSP
IO_BUTTON1/IO_LED4_SOC
IO_LCD_MODE
IO_LCD_CS
IO_FLASH_CS
VCC_IO
USB_IO_RESET
IO_MISO
IO_MOSI
IO_SCLK
USB_EM_RESET
IO_EM_RESET
USB_EM_RESET
USB_SCLK
USB_CS
USB_MOSI
USB_MISO
USB_LCD_CS
USB_UART_RX
USB_UART_TX
USB_UART_CTS
USB_UART_RTS
USB_DBG_DC
USB_DBG_DD
USB_LCD_MODE
+3.3V USB
VBUS
USB_IO_RESET
USB_JOY_MOVE
USB_DBG_DD_DIR
EM_UART_CTS
EM_UART_RTS
EM_UART_TX
EM_UART_RX
EM_SCLK
EM_MISO
EM_MOSI
EM_CS/EM_LED3_SOC
EM_LCD_CS
EM_LCD_MODE
EM_FLASH_CS
VCC_EM
POWER_PS
EM_BUTTON1/EM_LED4_SOC
EM_BUTTON2
EM_JOY_LEVEL
EM_POT_R
EM_LED2_MSP
EM_LED3_MSP
EM_LED2_SOC
EM_LED4_MSP
JOYSTICK_UP
JOYSTICK_DN
JOYSTICK_LT
JOYSTICK_RT
JOYSTICK_PUSH
EM_DBG_DD
EM_DBG_DC
EM_RESET
EM_LED1
EM_JOY_MOVE
EM_DBG_DD_DIR
EM_SNIFF_CLK
EM_SNIFF_DATA
EM_SNIFF_SFD
EM_SNIFF_MISO
FM1
FIDUCIAL_MARK
FM2
FIDUCIAL_MARK
FM4
FIDUCIAL_MARK
FM3
FIDUCIAL_MARK
FM6
FIDUCIAL_MARK
H1
PCB_FEET_19
H2
PCB_FEET_19
H3
PCB_FEET_19
H4
PCB_FEET_19
FM5
FIDUCIAL_MARK
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
25 26
27 28
29 30
31 32
33 34
35 36
P10
PINROW_2X18
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
25 26
27 28
29 30
31 32
33 34
35 36
P1
PINROW_2X18
A3
SCALE SHEET
APPROVALS DATE
DWG NO. REV.
DWG
COMPANY NAME
ISSUED
CHECKED
DRAWN
SIZE FSCM NO.
- LCD
- Flash
- Potmeter
- Buttons
- LEDs
Sheet 7
Sheet 3
1.8.1
Sheet 6
- CC2511
- CC2511 debug
- USB port
- RS232 driver
- RS232 port
- On/Off jumper
- EM connection
- External SoC debug
TI Norway, LPW
Sheet 2
02587
1(7)
IO peripherals jumpers
All mount as default
CONTRACT NO.
- Regulators
- Power jumpers
- Battery
- Joystick
(EM_CS/EM_LED3_SOC)
Sheet 4
USB MCU IO
jumpers
Default setting:
1-2: open
3-4: open
5-6: mount
7-8: mount
9-10: open
11-12: open
13-14: open
15-16: open
17-18: mount
19-20: mount
21-22: mount
23-24: mount
25-26: mount
27-28: mount
29-30: mount
31-32: mount
33-34: mount
35-36: mount
Sheet 5
PEH
SmartRF05EB Top Level
USB_EM_RESET
USB_SCLK
USB_CS
USB_MOSI
USB_MISO
USB_LCD_CS
USB_UART_RX
USB_UART_TX
USB_UART_CTS
USB_UART_RTS
USB_DBG_DC
USB_DBG_DD
USB_LCD_MODE
+3.3V USB
VBUS
USB_IO_RESET
USB_JOY_MOVE
USB_DBG_DD_DIR
USB_RESET
USB_RESET
+3.3V USB +3.3V USB
+3.3V USB
VCC_IO
VCC_IO
+3.3V USB
VCC_IO
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
P2
PINROW_2X5
1
2
3
4 GND
X1
X_48.000/15/18/60/16
1
2
C35
C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50
1
2
C37
C_2U2_0603_X5R_K_10
1
2
3 4
56789
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
AVDD
AVDD
AVDD
AVDD
P2_0
RESET_N
RF_N
RF_P
PADM
P2_2
PADP
XOSC_Q1
XOSC_Q2
DGUARD
P1_7
P2_1
DCOUPL
P1_6
P1_4
P1_1/LED
P1_0/LED
P1_2
P1_3
P1_5
P0_0/ATEST
P0_3
P0_1
P0_2
P0_4
P0_5
P2_4/XOSC32_Q2
P2_3/XOSC32_Q1
DVDD
DVDD
RBIAS
GND Exposed
AVDD_DREG
U3
CC2511
1
2
3
4
5
6
DVBUS
Shield
GND
D+
Shield
P12
USB_B
1
2
C17
C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50
1
2
C18
C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50
1
2
C2
C_47P_0603_NP0_J_50
1 2
R18
R_0603
1 2
R10
R_0_0603
1 2
R11
R_33_0603_G
1 2
L4
L_BEAD_102_0603
1
2
R9
R_1K5_0603_G
1
2
C3
C_47P_0603_NP0_J_50
1 2
R42
R_10K_0603_G
1 2
R12
R_33_0603_G
1
2
C6
C_10N_0603_X7R_K_50
1
2
C34
C_220P_0603_NP0_J_50
1
2
C36
C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50
1
2
R44
R_56K_0603_F
1
2
C20
C_33P_0603_NP0_J_50
1
2
C19
C_33P_0603_NP0_J_50
1
2
C33
C_220P_0603_NP0_J_50
1 2
R43
R_270_0603_J
1
2
D6
LED_CL150YCD
1 2
R52
R_10K_0603_G
1 2
R41
R_10K_0603_G
1 2
R60
R_10K_0603_G
1 2
S3
PUSH_BUTTON_SKRK
1 2
S4
PUSH_BUTTON_SKRK
1
2 C16
C_1U_0603_X5R_K_10
A3
SCALE SHEET
APPROVALS DATE
DWG NO. REV.
DWG
COMPANY NAME
ISSUED
CHECKED
DRAWN
SIZE FSCM NO.
USB Interface
1.8.1
TI Norway, LPW
Do Not Mount
USB LED
USB BUTTON
02587
2(7)
CONTRACT NO.
USB SoC Debug
PEH
EM_UART_CTS
EM_UART_RTS
EM_UART_TX
EM_UART_RX
EM_SCLK
EM_MISO
EM_MOSI
EM_CS/EM_LED3_SOC
EM_LCD_CS
EM_LCD_MODE
EM_FLASH_CS
VCC_EM
EM_BUTTON1/EM_LED4_SOC POWER_PS
EM_JOY_LEVEL EM_BUTTON2
EM_POT_R
EM_LED2_MSP
EM_LED3_MSP
EM_LED2_SOC
EM_LED4_MSP
JOYSTICK_UP
JOYSTICK_DN
JOYSTICK_LT
JOYSTICK_RT
JOYSTICK_PUSH
EM_DBG_DD
EM_DBG_DC
EM_RESET
EM_LED1
EM_JOY_MOVE
EM_DBG_DD_DIR
EM_SNIFF_CLK
EM_SNIFF_DATA
EM_SNIFF_SFD EM_SNIFF_MISO
EM_DBG_DD_DIR
EM_UART_RTS
EM_DBG_DD
EM_DBG_DC
EM_MISO
EM_UART_CTS
JOYSTICK_UP
JOYSTICK_LT
EM_LCD_CS
EM_FLASH_CS
EM_POT_R
EM_UART_TX
EM_JOY_MOVE
EM_LED4_MSP
EM_LED1
EM_LED3_MSP
EM_LCD_MODE
EM_RESET
EM_BUTTON2
EM_LED2_MSP
JOYSTICK_RT
POWER_PS
JOYSTICK_DN
JOYSTICK_PUSH
EM_JOY_LEVEL
VCC_EM
EM_BUTTON1/EM_LED4_SOC
EM_SCLK
EM_MOSI
EM_UART_RX
EM_RESET
EM_DBG_DD DUT_DD
DUT_VCC
DUT_VCC
EM_DBG_DC
DUT_DD
VCC_EM
VCC_IO
VCC_EM
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
DUT_VCC
DUT_DD
P4
PINROW_SMD_2X5_1.27MM
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
P3
PINROW_2X5
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
EM_USB1
EM_USB2 EM_LED2_SOC
EM_CS/EM_LED3_SOC
EM_DBG_DD_DIR
P18
PINROW_2X10
1
2
C21
C_10U_0805_X5R_K_10
1
2
C28
C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
EM_USB2
EM_USB1
P6
SMD_HEADER_2x10
1 2
R33
R_0603
1
2
C29
C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GND
VCCA
1A1
1A2
2DIR
2A1
2A2
1B1
2B1
VCCB
2B2
1DIR
GND
1B2
U9
SN74AVC4T245
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
P5
SMD_HEADER_2x10
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
P20
PINROW_2X10
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
P22
SMD_HEADER_2x10
1
2
C27
C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50
1
2
C30
C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50
1 2
R30
R_0603
A3
SCALE SHEET
APPROVALS DATE
DWG NO. REV.
DWG
COMPANY NAME
ISSUED
CHECKED
DRAWN
SIZE FSCM NO.
DO NOT MOUNT
External SOC Debug
R33 DO NOT MOUNT
Mount 0 ohm resistor in position R30
to power DUT from +3.3V USB through
connector P3
1.8.1
EM Connectors
TI Norway, LPW
EM Interface
02587
Debug Connectors
CONTRACT NO.
3(7)
PEH
POWER_PS
VCC_EM
VCC_IO
VBUS
+3.3V USB
1
2
C9
C_4U7_0805_X5R_K_25
4
5
8
6
7
9 11
3
10
1
2
GND
EN FB
PGND
VIN
PPAD
L1
VINA
L2
VOUT
PS/SYNC
U4 TPS63030
1 2
R34
R_0_0603
2 L1 1
LPS3015-222ML
1 2
R63
R_6K2_0603_G
2
1
3 6
5
In 4
Gnd Gnd
Out
ADJ
U2
TPS7A4501
A K
D8
BAT254
1 P13 2
STRAP_1
1 2
R45
R_1M0_0603_J
2
1
+ B1
1xAA_1_5V
1 2
R68
R_1M0_0603_J
1 2
R65
R_0603
123
P11
PINROW_1X3
1
2
C1
C_10U_0805_X5R_L_25
1 2
R35
R_0_0603
1
2
C38
C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50
1
2
C8
C_10U_0805_X5R_K_10
1 2 3
6 5 4
P8
Switch_6pin
1 2
R70
R_0603
1
2
C10
C_4U7_0805_X5R_K_25
1 2
R64
R_3K6_0603_G
2
1
+ B2
1xAA_1_5V
1P15 2
STRAP_1
1
2
3
P7
DC_JACK_2.5
1
2
C11
C_10U_0805_X5R_K_10
1 2
R2
R_0_0603
A K
D5
BAT254
1 2
R29
R_0_0603
1 2
R7
R_0603
1 2
R69
R_180K_0603_G
TP2
TESTPOINT_PAD
TP3
TP1 TESTPOINT_PAD
TESTPOINT_PAD
TP4
TESTPOINT_PAD
A3
SCALE SHEET
APPROVALS DATE
DWG NO. REV.
DWG
COMPANY NAME
ISSUED
CHECKED
DRAWN
SIZE FSCM NO.
Power supply
Power source jumper:
1-2: Battery
2-3: USB/DC (default)
Do Not Mount
1.8.1
VCC_EM jumper
TI Norway, LPW
Current is drawn from
input with highest voltage
02587
4(7)
2.2uH
Do Not Mount
Do Not Mount
CONTRACT NO.
VCC_IO jumper
Power On/Off
PEH
Battery
IO_POT_R
IO_BUTTON2
IO_LED1
IO_LED2_MSP
IO_LED2_SOC
IO_LED3_MSP
IO_LED3_SOC
IO_LED4_MSP
IO_BUTTON1/IO_LED4_SOC
IO_LCD_MODE
IO_LCD_CS
IO_FLASH_CS
VCC_IO
USB_IO_RESET
IO_MOSI IO_MISO
IO_SCLK
USB_EM_RESET IO_EM_RESET
BUTTON1_POWER_MSP
BUTTON1_POWER_SOC
USB_IO_RESET
VCC_IO
VCC_IO
VCC_IO
VCC_IO
VCC_IO
VCC_IO
VCC_IO
VCC_IO
VCC_IO
VCC_IO
VCC_IO
VCC_IO
VCC_IO
VCC_IO
VCC_IO
VCC_IO
VCC_IO
VCC_IO
12 34
S2
PUSH_BUTTON
1
2
R39
R_270_0603_J
1
2
3
4
56
7
8
C
Reset
TSL
Vcc
Q
Vss
D
S
U5 M25PEx0
1 2 3
6 5 4
P19
Switch_6pin
1
2
C5
C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50
12 34
BUTTON1_POWER_SOC
S1
PUSH_BUTTON
2 1
R13
R_10K_0603_G
1
2
R37
R_270_0603_J
1 2
R20
R_10K_0603_G
11 10
U11-E
SN74ALVC14
1 2
R40
R_1K0_0603_J
13 12
U11-F
SN74ALVC14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12 13
14
15
16
4B1
S
3B1
2B2
OE
VDD
GND
4B2
1A
2A
3A
4A
1B1
1B2
2B1
3B2
U10
SN74CBTLV3257PW
12 34
S5
PUSH_BUTTON
2 1
14
U11-A 7
SN74ALVC14
1
2
LED4
LED_CL150DCD
2 1
R15
R_10K_0603_G
LCD 7 - not use
8 - not use
12- not use
13- not use
14- not use
15- not use
16- not use
1 - backlight supply -
2 - backlight supply +
3 - logic power supply -
4 - logic power supply +
5 - Reset (active low)
6 - register selection
9 - serial data in
10- serial clock input
11- chip select
M1
HMC16311SF-PY
8 9
U11-D
SN74ALVC14
1
2
LED1
LED_CL150GCD
1 2
3
CW
RT1
R_0-10K_TRIM
1 2
R14
R_10K_0603_G
1 2
R53
R_100K_0603_F
1
2
R38
R_270_0603_J
6 5
U11-C
SN74ALVC14
1 2
R8
R_0_0603
1
2
C7
C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50
1
2
R36
R_270_0603_J
123456789
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
P9
HMC_CON
2 1
R16
R_10K_0603_G
1
2
LED3
LED_CL150YCD
1
2
C4
C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50
1 2 BUTTON1_POWER_MSP
R21
R_10K_0603_G
1
2
LED2
LED_CL150URCD
1
2
C13
C_1U_0603_X5R_K_10
4 3
U11-B
SN74ALVC14
A3
SCALE SHEET
APPROVALS DATE
DWG NO. REV.
DWG
COMPANY NAME
ISSUED
CHECKED
DRAWN
SIZE FSCM NO.
Orange
1.8.1
EM RESET
FLASH
BUTTON 2
TI Norway, LPW
Yellow
02587
User Interface
POTMETER
5(7)
Red
LED
BUTTON 1
CONTRACT NO.
LCD
Green
PEH
EM_UART_TX
EM_UART_RTS
EM_UART_RX
EM_UART_CTS
VCC_IO
VCC_IO
3 2 1
4 5 6
P14
Switch_6pin
1
2
C15
C_1U_0603_X5R_K_10
1
2
C14
C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50
1
2
C22
C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50
1
2
C25
C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50
1
2
C23
C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50
1
2
C24
C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
P16
DSUB_9F
1 2
R47
R_0_0603
1 2
R49
R_0_0603
1 2
R48
R_0_0603
1 2
R28
R_0_0603
1 2
R46
R_0_0603
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14 15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
C1+ 28
R2OUT
R1OUT
T1IN
R3OUT
R4OUT
V+
VCC
GND
R2OUTB
FORCEON
T3IN
T2IN
T3OUT
R5OUT
C1-
T2OUT
T1OUT
R5IN
R4IN
R3IN
R2IN
R1IN
VC2-
C2+
U6
SN65C3243DBR
A3
SCALE SHEET
APPROVALS DATE
DWG NO. REV.
DWG
COMPANY NAME
ISSUED
CHECKED
DRAWN
SIZE FSCM NO.
PC RS232-port
2-RXD
3-TXD
5-GND
7-RTS
8-CTS
1.8.1
RS-232 Interface
02587 TI Norway, LPW
6(7)
CONTRACT NO.
PEH
JOYSTICK_PUSH
JOYSTICK_UP JOYSTICK_RT
JOYSTICK_LT JOYSTICK_DN
JOY_MOVE
JOY_LEVEL
UP
DN
PUSH
LT
RT
UP
RT
VCC_IO
VCC_IO
VCC_IO
VCC_IO
VCC_IO
VCC_IO
4
5
6
U7-B
SN74HC32
1
2
3
U7-A
SN74HC32
1 2
R26
R_100K_0603_F
1
2
3
4
5
6
A
COMMON
C
left
CENTRE
down
up right
B
D
push
U1
skrhab_e010
1
2
C32 C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50
1
2
C12
C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50
1 2
R55
R_10K_0603_G
2 1
R22
R_100K_0603_F
1
2
C31
C_100N_0603_X7R_K_50
14 VDD 7
POWER CONN.
GND
U7-E
SN74HC32
1 2
R62
R_0_0603
3
2
1
8
4
V+
V-
+
-
U8-A
TLV272
1 2
R56
R_10K_0603_G
5
6
+ 7
-
U8-B
TLV272
1
2
C26
C_100P_0603_NP0_J_50
13
12
11
PUSH
U7-D
SN74HC32
1 2
DN
R17
R_200K_0603_F
1 2
R6
R_100K_0603_F
1 2
R59
R_0_0603
1 2
R61
R_0_0603
1 2
R57
R_0_0603
1 2
R23
R_100K_0603_F
2 1
R24
R_100K_0603_F
1 2
R51
R_330K_0603_F
1 2
R50
R_330K_0603_F
1 2
R32
R_200K_0603_F
LT 1 2
R31
R_200K_0603_F
2 1
R25
R_100K_0603_F
10
9
8
U7-C
SN74HC32
1 2
R1
R_220K_0603_F
2 1
R3
R_100K_0603_F
1 2
R4
R_100K_0603_F
1 2
R5
R_100K_0603_F
1 2
R58
R_0_0603
1 2
R54
R_47K_0603_G
A3
SCALE SHEET
APPROVALS DATE
DWG NO. REV.
DWG
COMPANY NAME
ISSUED
CHECKED
DRAWN
SIZE FSCM NO.
Joystick
1.8.1
02587 TI Norway, LPW
7(7)
CONTRACT NO.
JOYSTICK
PEH
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, modifications, enhancements, improvements,
and other changes to its products and services at any time and to discontinue any product or service without notice. Customers should
obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and complete. All products are
sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale supplied at the time of order acknowledgment.
TI warrants performance of its hardware products to the specifications applicable at the time of sale in accordance with TI’s standard
warranty. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary to support this warranty. Except where
mandated by government requirements, testing of all parameters of each product is not necessarily performed.
TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or customer product design. Customers are responsible for their products and
applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with customer products and applications, customers should provide
adequate design and operating safeguards.
TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any TI patent right, copyright, mask work right,
or other TI intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI products or services are used. Information
published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license from TI to use such products or services or a
warranty or endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual
property of the third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI.
Reproduction of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration and is accompanied
by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. Reproduction of this information with alteration is an unfair and deceptive
business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered documentation. Information of third parties may be subject to additional
restrictions.
Resale of TI products or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that product or service voids all
express and any implied warranties for the associated TI product or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not
responsible or liable for any such statements.
TI products are not authorized for use in safety-critical applications (such as life support) where a failure of the TI product would reasonably
be expected to cause severe personal injury or death, unless officers of the parties have executed an agreement specifically governing
such use. Buyers represent that they have all necessary expertise in the safety and regulatory ramifications of their applications, and
acknowledge and agree that they are solely responsible for all legal, regulatory and safety-related requirements concerning their products
and any use of TI products in such safety-critical applications, notwithstanding any applications-related information or support that may be
provided by TI. Further, Buyers must fully indemnify TI and its representatives against any damages arising out of the use of TI products in
such safety-critical applications.
TI products are neither designed nor intended for use in military/aerospace applications or environments unless the TI products are
specifically designated by TI as military-grade or "enhanced plastic." Only products designated by TI as military-grade meet military
specifications. Buyers acknowledge and agree that any such use of TI products which TI has not designated as military-grade is solely at
the Buyer's risk, and that they are solely responsible for compliance with all legal and regulatory requirements in connection with such use.
TI products are neither designed nor intended for use in automotive applications or environments unless the specific TI products are
designated by TI as compliant with ISO/TS 16949 requirements. Buyers acknowledge and agree that, if they use any non-designated
products in automotive applications, TI will not be responsible for any failure to meet such requirements.
Following are URLs where you can obtain information on other Texas Instruments products and application solutions:
Products Applications
Audio www.ti.com/audio Communications and Telecom www.ti.com/communications
Amplifiers amplifier.ti.com Computers and Peripherals www.ti.com/computers
Data Converters dataconverter.ti.com Consumer Electronics www.ti.com/consumer-apps
DLP® Products www.dlp.com Energy and Lighting www.ti.com/energy
DSP dsp.ti.com Industrial www.ti.com/industrial
Clocks and Timers www.ti.com/clocks Medical www.ti.com/medical
Interface interface.ti.com Security www.ti.com/security
Logic logic.ti.com Space, Avionics and Defense www.ti.com/space-avionics-defense
Power Mgmt power.ti.com Transportation and www.ti.com/automotive
Automotive
Microcontrollers microcontroller.ti.com Video and Imaging www.ti.com/video
RFID www.ti-rfid.com Wireless www.ti.com/wireless-apps
RF/IF and ZigBee® Solutions www.ti.com/lprf
TI E2E Community Home Page e2e.ti.com
Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265
Copyright © 2011, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.dedicatedmicros.com
INSTALLATION MANUAL
MANUEL D’INSTALLATION
INSTALLATIONSHANDBUCH
MANUAL DE INSTALACIÓN
MANUALE D'INSTALLAZIONE 2020
1. Introduction
Congratulations on choosing the Dedicated Micros Type 2020/300 (300Watt) &/or 2020/500
(500Watt) infra-red illuminators designed to offer a cost effective solution to night surveillance by
providing a source of illumination for cameras with spectrol responses that extend into the infra-red
region. Clean designs with pressure die cast componentry ensure high quality finishes & fits with a
striking & innovative appearance to complement the series 2000 range of products currently offered
by Dedicated Micros. The units are weatherproof to BS.EN 60529 Level IP66
2. Index
1. Introduction 1
2. Index 1
3. List of contents 2
4. Mounting instructions 3
5. Wiring instructions 4
6. Bulb replacement 5
7. Optional equipment 6
8. Component spares 7
9. Troubleshooting 7
This product guide will provide all the necessary information to set-up, install and run the
Type 2020 illuminator.
Type 2020 Installation Manual Page. 1
3. List of contents
Components supplied
Before installation please remove the unit from
the packaging and check that all items listed
below have been supplied.
A. 1 x Type 2020 Infra-red Illuminator
B. 1 x Stone Guard ( Optional )
C. 1 x 4mm A/F Hexagonal socket key
D. 1 x Fixing bag containing the following:
2 x M10 x 16 Hex. hd. screws
2 x M10 Plain washers
2 x M10 Spring washers
In addition to the above components, a type 2020
product guide and a final test procedure are
supplied.
Type 2020 Installation Manual Page. 2
Fig.1 Components supplied
B
C
D
A
4. Mounting instruction
Mounting configurations.
Fig. 2 & 3 show typical positions for I.R. Illuminators when mounted to a remotely controlled pan &
tilt head. Mount the Type 2020 Illuminator via the cradle (fig.4 item A) and secure using 2 off
M10x16 Hex. hd. machine screws (fig.4 item D), 2 off M10 spring washers (fig.4 item C) and 2 off
M10 plain washers (fig.4 item B) supplied with unit.
Note: Please ensure the lamp bulb filament is mounted horizontally to receive the required
life expectantcy and beam coverage. See bulb replacement (page 5)
Bulb filament is
factory set to comply
with this type of
mounting. See page 7
to re-orientate the
bulb if mounting in
other orientations
Type 2020 Installation Manual Page. 3
Fig.2 Twin lamp mounting
Pan & Tilt (Type 2000)
Type 2020 IR.Illuminator
B
C
D
A
Fig.3 Single lamp mount Fig.4 Mounting fixings
5. Wiring instructions
Wiring connections
Electrical connections to the Type 2020 I.R.
illuminator are made via a terminal block situated
inside the rear polycarbonate photo-electric switch
enclosure as shown in fig.5. Access to which is
achieved by unscrewing the four captive cover fixings
and removing the cover as shown in fig.6. Using a
suitable 3 core x 0.75mm2 230V.ac rated outdoor
cable (Dedicated Micros recommend the use of a
silicon covered cable due to the extreme
temperatures generated by the illuminator) prepare
the cable end for connection and feed the cable
through the spare cable gland and terminate as
shown in figs 7 & 8. Replace and secure the cover to
finish. The cable gland should be tightened
sufficiently to ensure that any strain put upon the
cable is not transmitted to the terminal connections
and that a watertight seal is achieved. It is
recommended that the incoming electrical supply is
protected by a fuse rated at 2 Amp for a type
2020/300 (300Watt) and 3 Amp for a type 2020/500
(500Watt) illuminator.
Type 2020 Installation Manual Page. 4
Fig.5
Fig.6
Fig.7
Earth
230V.ac Customer input
Fig.8 Live
Terminal block
Photoelectric
Switch
To Bulb
Neutral
6. Bulb replacement
Bulb replacement.
HAVING TURNED OFF POWER TO THE UNIT open the casing by releasing the 4 off fastenings
(item A, fig.9) a quarter turn anti-clockwise using a No.2 Philips screwdriver. The front assembly can
now be removed from the rear and suspended on the safety/earth bond to expose the bulb.
Remove the push on spade terminals (item B, fig.10) from the rear of the bulb and release the bulb
from its mounting clips by springing one of the 3 clips outward while lifting the bulb free.
Note: The bulb filament lies directly in-line between the spade terminals (item C, fig.11)
please align by rotating the bulb within its spring clips ensuring the filament is horizontal
when mounting the I.R Illuminator. The spade terminal connections can be made to either
terminal.
Type 2020 Installation Manual Page. 5
A
B
Fig.9 Opening illuminator enclosure Fig.10
Terminals
Fig.11 Bulb removal Fig.12 Spring clips
C
C
7. Optional equipment
Optional Stone guard.
An optional stone guard (order suffix /SG) is available for the Type 2020 illuminator. Designed to
protect the filter from flying objects / vandalism the guard can be fitted in seconds with 4 off fixings
supplied. (fig.13)
Optional Voltage reducer.
The Manufacturers stated life expectancy for the 300W bulb is 2000 hours and 4000 hours for the
500W. This stated life is conditional on the supply being 230V, a 5% increase in voltage will reduce
lamp life by 50%.
NB. There are some parts of the UK where the standing voltage is over 250V, in a situation
such as this Dedicated Micros can supply a Type 621 voltage reduction device which will
reduce the incoming supply by 9% to increase the bulbs life. (fig.14) Box dimensions 110W x
130L x 50H for indoor use only.
Optional ‘no photoelectric switch’ version
A optional version is available without the rear photoelectric switch installed. (order suffix / No PE)
Optional White light illuminator.
An optional white light version of the Type 2020 can be supplied to any bulb variant.
(order suffix /WL)
Type 2020 Installation Manual Page. 6
Fig.13 Fig.14
8. Component spares
9. Troubleshooting
Under normal operating conditions the stated bulb life times should be readily achieved, but there
are circumstances under which life expectancy is much reduced.
Spikes & surges: Illuminators running from supplies that are subject to spikes & power surges will
have reduced life.
Orientation: Bulb filaments must be horizontal, a filament positioned vertically will burn out before
the stated life time.
Operation: When mounted on a pan & tilt head the illuminator will be subject to vibration which, if
sufficiently severe, could cause a reduction in life. Although the 500 Watt bulbs have been designed
specifically for this use, 300 Watt bulbs are of standard manufacture and as such are more
susceptible to damage.
The information contained in this document is for guidance only.
Specification and availability of goods are subject to change without notice
Type 2020 Installation Manual Page. 7
Ref. No.
F56
F57
F2
F3
F4
F42
H92,a & b
1-2020/13
1-2020/17
F14
F15
F48
1-2020/22
BS152
1-2020/6
Qty.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
Description
500W Spot Bulb
500W M/Flood Bulb
300W Spot Bulb
300W M/Flood Bulb
300W W/Flood Bulb
Photo-electric switch
Cable gland assembly
Bulb mounting clips
Stone guard
Filter assembly 715nm
Filter assembly 830nm
Filter assembly Dichroic
Front ‘O’ ring seal
Rear ‘O’ ring seal
Quarter-turn fastenings
External Safety bond
1. Introduction
Nous vous félicitons d’avoir choisi les projecteurs infrarouge Type 2020/300 (300 Watts) et/ou
2020/500 (500 Watts) conçus pour offrir une solution rentable à la surveillance nocturne, qui
consiste à assurer aux caméras une source d’éclairage à réponses spectrales s’étendant à la zone
infrarouge. Des conceptions nettes avec composants moulés sous pression garantissent des
finitions et ajustements de haute qualité, avec un look impressionant et innovateur pour compléter
la gamme de produits de la série 2000 actuellement offerts par Dedicated Micros. Les boîtiers sont
résistants aux intempéries conformément à la norme BS.EN 60529, indice IP66
2. Index
1. Introduction 8
2. Index 8
3. Sommaire 9
4. Instructions de montage 10
5. Instructions de câblage 11
6. Remplacement de l’ampoule 12
7. Equipement en option 13
8. Pièces de rechange 14
9. Dépannage 14
Ce guide de produit offre toutes les informations nécessaires pour la configuration, l’installation et le
fonctionnement du projecteur Type 2020.
Type 2020 Manuel d’installation Page. 8
Type 2020 Manuel d’installation Page. 9
3. Sommaire
Composants fournis
Avant de procéder à l’installation, veuillez sortir
le projecteur de l’emballage et vérifier que tous
les éléments listés ci-dessous sont inclus.
A. 1 projecteur à infrarouge Type 2020
B. 1 grille de protection (en option)
C. 1 clé hexagonale de 4 mm
D. 1 sachet de fixations contenant:
2 vis à tête hexagonale M10 x 16
2 rondelles lisses M10
2 rondelles élastiques M10
En plus des composants ci-dessus, un guide de
produit pour le projecteur Type 2020 et une
procédure d’essai final sont fournis.
Fig. 1 Composants fournis
B
C
D
A
Type 2020 Manuel d’installation Page. 10
4. Instructions de montage
Configurations de montage
Les Fig. 2 et 3 illustrent les positions typiques des projecteurs infrarouge lorsqu’ils sont montés sur une tête
panoramique et inclinaison télécommandée. Montez le projecteur Type 2020 en utilisant le support (fig. 4
repère A) et immobilisez-le à l’aide des 2 vis à tête hexagonale M10x16 (fig. 4 repère D), 2 rondelles
élastiques M10 (fig. 4 repère C) et 2 rondelles lisses M10 (fig. 4 repère B) fournies avec le projecteur.
Remarque: Veillez à ce que le filament de l’ampoule du projecteur soit monté bien à l’horizontale pour
une durée de vie utile et une couverture de faisceau optimales. Voir remplacement de l’ampoule (page 12)
Le filament de
l’ampoule est réglé
en usine pour
assurer sa
conformité avec ce
type de montage.
Voir la page 14 pour
la réorientation de
l’ampoule en cas de
montage dans
d’autres orientations.
Fig. 2 Montage à deux projecteurs
Panoramique et
inclinaison (Type 2000)
Projecteur infrarouge Type 2020
B
C
D
A
Fig. 4 Fixations de
Fig. 3 Montage à un projecteur montage
Type 2020 Manuel d’installation Page. 11
5. Instructions de câblage
Raccordements de câbles
Les raccordements électriques au projecteur
infrarouge Type 2020 s’effectuent au moyen d’un
bornier situé à l’intérieur du boîtier arrière en
polycarbonate du commutateur photoélectrique,
comme illustré à la fig. 5. Pour accéder à ce boîtier,
dévissez les quatres vis prisonnières du couvercle et
retirez le couvercle comme illustré à la fig. 6. A l’aide
d’un câble pour extérieur à 3 âmes x 0,75 mm2 de
230 V. c.a. (Dedicated Micros recommande
l’utilisation d’un câble siliconé en raison des
températures extrêmes générées par le projecteur),
préparez l’extrémité du câble pour le raccordement,
et passez le câble dans le presse-étoupe libre et
terminez-le comme illustré aux figs 7 et 8. Remettez
et immobilisez le couvercle pour terminer. Le presseétoupe
doit être suffisamment serré pour éviter de
transmettre les contraintes exercées sur le câble aux
raccordements de bornes et pour produire un joint
étanche à l’eau. Il est recommandé de protéger
l’entrée de l’alimentation électrique par un fusible de
2 A pour un projecteur type 2020/300 (300 Watts) et
de 3 A pour un projecteur type 2020/500 (500 Watts).
Fig. 5
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
Terre
Entrée 230 V c.a. client
Fig. 8
Conducteur
Bornier
Commutateur
photoélectrique
A l’ampoule
Neutre
Type 2020 Manuel d’installation Page. 12
6. Remplacement de l’ampoule
Remplacement de l’ampoule
APRES AVOIR MIS LE PROJECTEUR HORS TENSION ouvrez le boîtier en dévissant les 4 vis de
fixation (repère A, fig. 9) d’un quart de tour à l’aide d’un tournevis Philips No. 2. L’ensemble avant peut
maintenant être retiré de l’arrière et suspendu à l’élingue pour exposer l’ampoule. Retirez les bornes
enfichables (repère B, fig. 10) à l’arrière de l’ampoule et libérez l’ampoule de ses pattes élastiques en
poussant l’une des 3 pattes vers l’extérieur tout en soulevant l’ampoule pour la dégager.
Remarque: Le filament de l’ampoule est positionné directement en ligne entre les bornes
enfichables (repère C, fig. 11), veuillez aligner l’ampoule en la tournant dans ses pattes élastiques
pour que le filament soit bien à l’horizontale lors du montage du projecteur infragrouge. Les
raccordements de bornes enfichables peuvent être effectués à n’importe quelle borne.
A
B
Fig. 9 Ouverture du boîtier du projecteur Fig. 10
Bornes
Fig. 11 Retrait de l’ampoule Fig. 12 Pattes élastiques
C
C
Type 2020 Manuel d’installation Page. 13
7. Equipement en option
Grille de protection en option.
Une grille de protection (indiquez le suffixe /SG lors de la commande) est disponible en option pour
le projecteur Type 2020. Conçu pour protéger le filtre des projectiles / vandalisme, la grille de
protection se pose en quelques secondes avec les 4 vis de fixation fournies. (fig. 13)
Réducteur de tension en option.
La durée de vie indiquée par les fabricants est de 2000 heures pour l’ampoule de 300 W et de
4000 heures pour l’ampoule de 500 W. Cette durée de vie indiquée correspond à une alimentation
de 230 V, une augmentation de 5 % de la tension réduit la durée de vie du projecteur de moitié.
NB. Dans certaines régions du Royaume-Uni, la tension normale est supérieure à 250 V :
dans ce cas, Dedicated Micros peut fournir un dispositif de réduction de tension Type 621
qui réduit l’entrée de l’alimentation de 9 % pour augmenter la durée de vie de l’ampoule.
(fig. 14) Dimensions du boîtier 110 l x 130 L x 50 H pour usage intérieur uniquement.
Version ‘sans commutateur photoélectrique’ en option
Un version en option est disponible sans commutateur photoélectrique arrière. (indiquez le suffixe /
No PE lors de la commande)
Projecteur blanc en option.
Une version à éclairage blanc du projecteur Type 2020 est disponible en option et peut être fournie
dans tous les types d’ampoule. (indiquez le suffixe /WL lors de la commande)
Fig. 13 Fig. 14
Type 2020 Manuel d’installation Page. 14
8. Pièces de rechange
9. Dépannage
Dans les conditions d’utilisation normales, les durées de vie d’ampoule indiquées sont parfaitement
possibles, mais dans certains cas, la durée de vie est fortement réduite.
Pointes et surtensions : La durée de vie des projecteurs dont l’alimentation électrique est
soumise à des pointes et surtensions sera réduite.
Orientation : Les filaments des ampoules doivent être posés bien à l’horizontale, un filament posé
verticalement grillera avant la fin de sa durée de vie indiquée.
Fonctionnement : Monté sur une tête panoramique et inclinaison, le projecteur sera soumis à des
vibrations qui, si suffisamment sévères, sont susceptibles d’entraîner une réduction de sa vie utile.
Bien que les ampoules de 500 Watts aient été conçues spécialement pour cet usage, les ampoules
de 300 Watts sont de fabrication standard et de ce fait plus vulnérables aux dégâts.
Les informations figurant dans le présent document sont fournies à titre indicatif uniquement.
Les spécifications et la disponibilité des produits peuvent faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis.
Réf.
F56
F57
F2
F3
F4
F42
H92,a & b
1-2020/13
1-2020/17
F14
F15
F48
1-2020/22
BS152
1-2020/6
Qté.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
Désignation
Ampoule faisceau concentré (spot) 500 W
Ampoule Faisceau moyen 500 W
Ampoule faisceau concentré (spot) 300 W
Ampoule faisceau moyen 300 W
Ampoule faisceau large 300 W
Commutateur photoélectrique
Ensemble presse-étoupe
Pattes élastique de montage d’ampoule
Grille de protection
Ensemble filtre 715 nm
Ensemble filtre 830 nm
Ensemble filtre Dichroïque
Joint torique avant
Joint torique arrière
Fixations quart de tour
Elingue
1. Einleitung
Herzlichen Glückwunsch zur Wahl der Infrarot-Illuminatoren aus der Serie 2020/300 (300 Watt)
und/oder 2020/500 (500 Watt) von Dedicated Micros. Diese Serien stellen eine kostengünstige
Lösung zur Überwachung bei Nacht dar. Sie bieten eine Lichtquelle für Kameras, deren
Spektralempfindlichkeit sich auf den Infrarotbereich erstreckt. Klares Design und druckgegossene
Bauteile gewährleisten hochwertige Verarbeitung und Passform. Das beeindruckende und
innovative Äußere ergänzt die Produktpallette der Serie 2000 von Dedicated Micros. Die
Illuminatoren sind nach Schutzklasse IP66 (BS EN 60529) wettergeschützt.
2. Inhaltsverzeichnis
1. Einleitung 15
2. Inhaltsverzeichnis 15
3. Lieferumfang 16
4. Montageanleitung 17
5. Verkabelungsanleitung 18
6. Auswechseln der Glühlampe 19
7. Optionale Ausstattung 20
8. Ersatzteilliste 21
9. Fehlersuche 21
Dieses Produkthandbuch bietet alle erforderlichen Informationen für die Einrichtung, Installation und
den Betrieb der Illuminatoren aus der Serie 2020.
Serie 2020 Installationshandbuch Seite. 15
3. Lieferumfang
Im Lieferumfang enthaltene
Komponenten
Entnehmen Sie den Illuminator vor der
Installation bitte aus der Verpackung und
vergewissern Sie sich, dass alle nachfolgend
aufgeführten Artikel vorhanden sind.
A. 1 x Infrarot-Illuminator der Serie 2020
B. 1 x Steinschlagschutz ( optional )
C. 1 x 4mm Sechskantschlüssel
D. 1 x Befestigungssatz mit folgendem Inhalt:
2 x M10 x 16 Sechskantschrauben
2 x M10 Unterlegscheiben
2 x M10 Federscheiben
Neben den oben aufgeführten Bestandteilen ist im
Lieferumfang ein Produkthandbuch für die Serie
2020 und ein Abschlusstestverfahren enthalten.
Serie 2020 Installationshandbuch Seite. 16
Abb.1 Im Lieferumfang
enthaltene Komponenten
B
C
D.
A
4. Montageanleitung
Montagekonfigurationen
Abb. 2 & 3 zeigen typischen Positionen für Infrarot-Illuminatoren, die an einem ferngesteuerten Schwenk- und
Neigekopf befestigt sind. Befestigen Sie den Illuminator der Serie 2020 mithilfe der Gabel (Abb. 4 Artikel A) und
sichern Sie ihn mit den beiden M10x16 Sechskantschrauben mit Ganzgewinde (Abb. 4 Artikel D), zwei M10
Federscheiben (Abb. 4 Artikel C) und zwei M10 Unterlegscheiben (Abb. 4 Artikel B), die im Lieferumfang enthalten
sind.
Hinweis: Achten Sie darauf, dass der Glühwendel der Lampe horizontal montiert wird, um maximale
Lebensdauer und Reichweite des Lichtstrahls zu gewährleisten. Siehe Auswechseln der Glühlampe (Seite 19)
Der Glühwendel ist
werkseitig auf diese
Art der Montage
eingestellt. Auf Seite
21 finden Sie
Informationen zur
Neuausrichtung der
Lampe im Falle einer
Montage mit anderer
Ausrichtung.
Serie 2020 Installationshandbuch Seite. 17
Abb .2 Befestigung einer Doppellampe
Schwenk- und
Neigekopf (Serie 2000)
Infrarot-Illuminator Serie 2020
B
C
D.
A
Abb. 4
Befestigungsarmaturen
Abb. 3 Befestigung einer
Einzellampe
5. Verkabelungsanleitung
Leitungsanschlüsse
Die Elektroanschlüsse an den Infrarot-Illuminator der
Serie 2020 werden über einen Klemmenblock
vorgenommen, der sich auf der Rückseite im
Polycarbonat-Gehäuse des fotoelektrischen Schalters
befindet. Für den Zugang zu diesem Klemmenblock
lösen Sie die vier unverlierbaren Schrauben des
Gehäuses und nehmen Sie die Abdeckung ab, wie in
Abb. 6 dargestellt. Verwenden Sie ein geeignetes 3 x
0,75 mm2 Freileitungskabel mit 230 VAC Nennleistung
(Dedicated Micros empfiehlt aufgrund der extremen
Temperaturen, die vom Illuminator erzeugt werden, die
Verwendung eines silikonbeschichteten Kabels).
Bereiten Sie das Kabelende für den Anschluss vor,
führen Sie das Kabel durch den freien Kabelstutzen
und terminieren Sie es, wie in Abb. 7 & 8 dargestellt.
Setzen Sie zum Abschluss die Abdeckung wieder auf
und befestigen Sie sie. Der Kabelstutzen sollte
ausreichend fest angezogen werden, damit eine
eventuelle Belastung des Kabels sich nicht auf die
Kabelanschlüsse überträgt und damit eine wasserfeste
Dichtung entsteht. Wir empfehlen, die Stromzufuhr für
Modelle der Serie 2020/300 (300 Watt) mit einer 2 A
Sicherung bzw. Modelle der Serie 2020/500 (500 Watt)
mit einer 3 A Sicherung abzusichern.
Serie 2020 Installationshandbuch Seite.18
Abb. 5
Abb. 6
Abb. 7
Erde
230 VAC Kundenseitiger Eingang
Abb. 8 Spannungsführend
Klemmenblock
Fotoelektrischer
Schalter
Zur Lampe
Neutral
6. Auswechseln der Glühlampe
Auswechseln der Glühlampe
SCHALTEN SIE DIE STROMZUFUHR ZUM GERÄT AUS. Öffnen Sie das Gehäuse, indem Sie die 4
Befestigungen (Artikel A, Abb. 9) eine Vierteldrehung entgegen dem Uhrzeigersinn drehen. Verwenden Sie dazu
einen Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher Nr. 2. Jetzt kann der vordere Teil des Illuminators von der hinteren Hälfte gelöst
und am Sicherungsseil/Erdungsseil abgehängt werden, um die Glühlampe freizulegen. Nehmen Sie die
aufgesetzten Kabelschuhe (Artikel B, Abb. 10) von der Rückseite der Lampe ab und lösen Sie die Lampe aus den
Befestigungsklemmen. Drücken Sie dazu eine der 3 Klemmen zurück, während Sie die Glühlampe heraus heben.
Hinweis: Der Glühwendel liegt direkt zwischen den Kabelschuhen (Artikel C, Abb. 11). Richten Sie ihn
durch Drehen der Lampe in den Federklemmen so aus, dass der Wendel horizontal liegt, wenn der
Infrarot-Illuminator montiert wird. Die Kabelschuhe können beliebig an einer der beiden Klemmen
angeschlossen werden.
Serie 2020 Installationshandbuch Seite. 19
A
B
Abb. 9 Öffnen des Illuminatorgehäuses Abb. 10
Anschlussklemmen
Abb. 11 Ausbau der Glühlampe Abb. 12 Federklemmen
C
C
7. Optionale Ausstattung
Optionaler Steinschlagschutz.
Für den Illuminator der Serie 2020 ist ein optionaler Steinschlagschutz (Bestellendung /SG)
lieferbar. Er dient dazu, den Filter vor umherfliegenden Objekten / Vandalismus zu schützen und
kann innerhalb weniger Sekunden mithilfe der 4 im Lieferumfang enthaltenen Schrauben installiert
werden. (Abb.13)
Optionaler Spannungswandler
Die vom Hersteller angegebenen Lebensdauer liegt für die 300 W Glühlampe bei 2000 Stunden
und für die 500 W Lampe bei 4000 Stunden. Die angegebenen Lebensdauer hängt von einer
Stromzufuhr bei 230 V ab; eine Steigerung der Spannung um 5% reduziert die Lebensdauer der
Lampe um 50%.
NB. In einigen Teilen Großbritanniens liegt die Standspannung über 250 V. In einer
derartigen Situation kann Dedicated Micros einen Spannungswandler (Typ 621) liefern, der
die Eingangsspannung um 9% reduziert, um die Lebensdauer der Glühbirne zu verlängern.
(Abb. 14) Kastenmaße 110B x 130L x 50H, nur zur Verwendung im Innenbereich.
Optionales Modell ‘ohne fotoelektrischen Schalter’
Wir bieten auch ein Modell ohne fotoelektrischen Schalters an der Rückseite. (Bestellendung / No PE)
Optionaler Weißlicht-Illuminator
Für jede Glühlampe der Serie 2020 kann eine optionale Weißlichtvariante geliefert werden.
(Bestellendung /WL)
Serie 2020 Installationshandbuch Seite. 20
Abb. 13 Abb. 14
8. Ersatzteilliste
9. Fehlersuche
Unter normalen Betriebsbedingungen sollte die angegebene Lebensdauer der Glühlampe
problemlos erreicht werden. Es gib jedoch einige Umstände, unter denen die Lebensdauer stark
reduziert wird.
Spannungsstöße und -spitzen: Illuminatoren, die an eine Stromquelle angeschlossen sind,
welche Spannungsstößen und -spitzen unterliegt, haben eine verkürzte Lebensdauer.
Ausrichtung: Glühwendel müssen horizontal ausgerichtet sein; ein vertikal ausgerichteter Wendel
wird vor Ablauf der angegebenen Lebensdauer ausbrennen.
Betrieb: Bei der Installation auf einem Schwenk- und Neigekopf ist der Illuminator Schwingungen
ausgesetzt, die je nach Schweregrad eine Reduktion der Lebensdauer verursachen könnten.
Obwohl die 500 W Glühlampen speziell für diesen Einsatz konzipiert wurden, handelt es sich bei
den 300 W Lampen um Standardprodukte, die deshalb wesentlich anfälliger für Schäden sind.
Die Informationen in diesem Dokumenten dienen ausschließlich zur Orientierung.
Die technischen Details und die Verfügbarkeit der Waren können jederzeit ohne Vorankündigung
geändert werden.
Serie 2020 Installationshandbuch Seite. 21
Ref. Nr.
F56
F57
F2
F3
F4
F42
H92,a & b
1-2020/13
1-2020/17
F14
F15
F48
1-2020/22
BS152
1-2020/6
Stck.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
Beschreibung
500 W Punktlampe
500 W M/Flutlicht
300 W Punktlampe
300 W M/Flutlicht
300 W W/Flutlicht
Fotoelektrischer Schalter
Kabelstutzen
Befestigungsklemmen für Lampe
Steinschlagschutz
Filtersatz 715 nm
Filtersatz 830 nm
Dichroitischer Filter
Dichtungsring Vorderseite
Dichtungsring Rückseite
Bajonettverschlüsse
Externes Sicherheitsseil
Type 2020 Manual de instalación Página. 22
1. Introducción
Felicidades por elegir los proyectores por infrarrojos Dedicated Micros Type 2020/300 (300 vatios)
y/o 2020/500 (500 vatios) diseñados para ofrecer una solución económica para la vigilancia
nocturna facilitando una fuente de luz para las cámaras con respuesta espectral que cubran la
zona de infrarrojos. Su diseño impecable con componentes fundidos a presión garantizan un
acabado y montaje de primera calidad con un aspecto sorprendente e innovador que completan la
gama de productos de la serie 2000 comercializada actualmente por Dedicated Micros. Las
unidades son a prueba de intemperie en cumplimiento de BS.EN 60529 Nivel IP66
2. Índice
1. Introducción 22
2. Índice 22
3. Índice 23
4. Instrucciones de montaje 24
5. Instrucciones de cableado 25
6. Cambio de la lámpara 26
7. Equipamiento opcional 27
8. Repuestos de componentes 28
9. Resolución de problemas 28
La guía de este producto le proporcionara toda la información necesaria para configurar, instalar y
utilizar el proyector del type 2020.
Type 2020 Manual de instalación Página. 23
3. Índice
Componentes suministrados
Antes de proceder a la instalación extraiga la
unidad de la caja y asegúrese de que se han
suministrado todos los elementos que se
indican a continuación.
A. 1 x Proyector por infrarrojos Type 2020
B. 1 x Protección contra pedradas (opcional)
C. 1 x Llave de enchufe hexagonal A/F de 4mm
D. 1 x Bolsa de piezas de fijación que incluye lo
siguiente:
2 x M10 x 16 Tornillos con cabeza hex.
2 x Arandelas planas M10
2 x Arandelas elásticas M10
Además de los componentes anteriores, se
proporciona una guía de producto del type 2020 y
un procedimiento para una prueba final.
Fig.1 Componentes
suministrados
B
C
D
A
Type 2020 Manual de instalación Página. 24
4. Instrucciones de montaje
Parámetros de montaje.
Las Fig. 2 y 3 muestran las posiciones típicas de los proyectores por infrarrojos cuando se montan en un
cabezal de toma panorámica e inclinación controlado de forma remota. Monte el proyector Type 2020 con
el soporte (fig.4 elemento A) y asegúrelo con los 2 M10x16 tornillos de cabeza hexagonal (fig.4 elemento
D), las 2 arandelas elásticas M10 (fig.4 elemento C) y las 2 arandelas planas M10 (fig.4 elemento B) que
se suministran con la unidad.
Nota: Asegúrese de que el filamento de la bombilla esté colocado horizontalmente para obtener la
expectativa de vida y la cobertura esperada. Consulte cómo reemplazar la bombilla (página 26)
El filamento de la
bombilla viene
preajustado de
fábrica para este tipo
de montaje. Consulte
la página 27 para
volver a orientar la
bombilla si la coloca
en otras posiciones
Fig.2 Montaje de lámpara doble
Toma panorámica e
inclinación (Type 2000)
Proyector por infrarrojos
Type 2020
B
C
D
A
Fig.4 Piezas de fijación
del montaje
Fig.3 Montaje de lámpara
sencilla
Type 2020 Manual de instalación Página. 25
5. Instrucciones de cableado
Conexiones de cableado
Las conexiones eléctricas del proyector por infrarrojos
Type 2020 se realizan con el bloque de terminales
situado en el interior de la caja de policarbonato del
conmutador fotoeléctrico de la parte posterior, tal y como
se muestra en la fig.5. El acceso se logra aflojando las
cuatro piezas de fijación imperdibles de la tapa y
retirando ésta, tal y como se muestra en la fig.6. Utilice
un cable para exteriores adecuado de 3 hilos x 0,75mm2
230V de C.A. (Dedicated Micros recomienda el uso de
un cable con cobertura de silicona debido a las
temperaturas extremas que genera el proyectos),
prepare el extremo del cable para la conexión e
introdúzcalo a través del casquillo. Finalice la operación
tal y como se muestra en las figuras 7 y 8. Para acabar
vuelva a colocar la tapa, y fíjela. El casquillo para cables
deberá estar lo suficientemente apretado para que
cualquier tirón que sufra el cable no se transmita a las
conexiones de los terminales, así como para lograr una
estanqueidad al agua. Se aconseja proteger la corriente
eléctrica de entrada con un fusible de 2A para el
proyector type 2020/300 (300Watt) y uno de 3A para el
type 2020/500 (500Watt).
Fig.5
Fig.6
Fig.7
Tierra
Entrada del cliente de 230V de C.A.
Fig.8
Activo
Bloque de
terminales
Conmutador
fotoeléctrico
A la bombilla
Neutro
Type 2020 Manual de instalación Página. 26
6. Cambio de la lámpara
Cambio de la lámpara.
UNA VEZ APAGADA LA UNIDAD, abra la carcasa soltando las 4 piezas de sujeción (elemento A, fig.9)
girándolos un cuarto de vuelta en el sentido contrario a las agujas del reloj con un destornillador Philips Nº2.
Ahora podrá separar la plataforma delantera de la trasera y dejarla suspendida de la toma de tierra o anclaje
de seguridad para descubrir la bombilla. Retire los terminales de pala (elemento b, fig.10) de la parte
posterior de la bombilla y suéltela de sus abrazaderas de montaje accionando hacia afuera una de las tres,
mientras libera la bombilla.
Nota: El filamento de la bombilla está alineado directamente con los terminales de pala (elemento C,
fig.11). Alinéelo girando la bombilla en las abrazaderas y asegúrese de que esté horizontal cuando
coloque el proyector por infrarrojos. Las conexiones de los terminales de pala puede realizarse a
cada terminal.
A
B
Fig.9 Cómo abrir la carcasa del proyector Fig.10
Terminales
Fig.11 Cómo retirar la bombilla Fig.12 Abrazaderas
C
C
Type 2020 Manual de instalación Página. 27
7. Equipamiento opcional
Rejilla de protección opcional.
Existe una rejilla de protección opcional (código de pedido /SG) para el proyector Type 2020.
Diseñada para proteger el filtro de objetos voladores o vandalismo, la protección puede colocarse
en segundos con las cuatro piezas de fijación suministradas. (fig.13)
Reductor de tensión opcional.
Para el fabricante, la expectativa de vida de la bombilla de 300W es de 2.000 horas y de 4.000
horas para la de 500W. Dicha expectativa está condicionada a una tensión de 230V y un
incremento del 5% en el voltaje reducirá dicha expectativa de vida en un 50%.
Nota: Hay lugares en el Reino Unido donde la tensión es de 250V. En este tipo de casos,
Dedicated Micros puede suministrar un dispositivo reductor Type 621 que reducirá la
tensión en un 9% para prolongar la vida de la bombilla. (fig.14) Dimensiones de la caja 110
Ancho x 130 Largo x 50 Alto sólo para usarse en interior.
Versión opcional “sin conmutador fotoeléctrico”
Existe una versión opcional sin conmutador fotoeléctrico instalado en la parte trasera. (código de
pedido / No PE)
Proyector de luz blanca opcional.
Puede suministrarse una versión opcional de luz blanca del Type 2020 para cualquier variante de
bombilla. (código de pedido /WL)
Fig.13 Fig.14
Type 2020 Manual de instalación Página. 28
8. Repuestos de componentes
9. Resolución de problemas
En condiciones normales de funcionamiento la expectativa de vida de la bombilla debe alcanzarse
facilmente, pero hay circunstancias en las que puede verse seriamente reducida.
Picos y sobretensiones: Los proyectores que funcionan con tensiones con picos y
sobretensiones tendrán una vida más breve.
Orientación: Los filamentos de la bombilla deberá estar horizontal. Un filamento colocado
verticalmente se quemará antes de lo previsto.
Funcionamiento: Cuando coloque el proyector en un cabezal de toma panorámica e inclinación
sufrirá vibraciones que, si son lo bastante fuertes, provocarán una reducción en la vida de la
bombilla. Aunque las bombillas de 500 vatios se han diseñado específicamente para este uso, las
lámpara de 300 vatios son de fabricación estándar y son más susceptibles de sufrir daños.
La información incluida en este documento es meramente orientativa.
Las características técnicas y disponibilidad de los materiales está sujetos a cambio sin previo
aviso
Núm. de
ref.
F56
F57
F2
F3
F4
F42
H92,a y b
1-2020/13
1-2020/17
F14
F15
F48
1-2020/22
BS152
1-2020/6
Cant.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
Descripción
Bombilla de haz fino de 500W
Bombilla de luz ambiente/M de 500W
Bombilla de haz fino de 300W
Bombilla de luz ambiente/M de 300W
Bombilla de luz ambiente/W de 300W
Conmutador fotoeléctrico
Plataforma del casquillo de cables
Abrazaderas de montaje de la bombilla
Protección contra pedradas.
Plataforma de filtro de 715nm
Plataforma de filtro de 830nm
Plataforma de filtro dicroico
Junta tórica delantera
Junta tórica trasera
Sujeciones de cuarto de vuelta
Anclaje de seguridad externa
Type 2020 Manuale d’installazione Pag. 29
1. Introduzione
Congratulazioni per aver scelto i proiettori a infrarossi Type 2020/300 (300 Watt) e/o Type 2020/500
(500 Watt) di Dedicated Micros, progettati per la sorveglianza notturna e in grado di fornire una
fonte di illuminazione per telecamere con tecnologia Spectrol che si estende nell’area degli
infrarossi. Il design essenziale con componenti pressofusi garantisce l’alta qualità di finiture e
accessori con un aspetto originale e innovativo per completare la gamma di prodotti della serie
2000 offerta da Dedicated Micros. Le unità offrono un livello di protezione dall’acqua IP66 conforme
alla normativa BS.EN 60529.
2. Indice
1. Introduzione 29
2. Indice 29
3. Elenco dei contenuti 30
4. Istruzioni per il montaggio 31
5. Istruzioni per il cablaggio 32
6. Sostituzione della lampadina 33
7. Apparecchiatura opzionale 34
8. Componenti di ricambio 35
9. Risoluzione dei problemi 35
Questa guida del prodotto fornirà tutte le informazioni necessarie per la configurazione,
l’installazione e l’esecuzione del proiettore Type 2020.
Type 2020 Manuale d’installazione Pag. 30
3. Elenco dei contenuti
Componenti forniti
Prima di procedere all’installazione, rimuovere
l’unità dall’imballaggio e verificare che siano
presenti tutti gli elementi elencati di seguito.
A. 1 Proiettore a infrarossi Type 2020
B. 1 Griglia di protezione (opzionale)
C. 1 chiave esagonale A/F da 4mm
D. 1 kit di fissaggio contenente i seguenti elementi:
2 viti a testa esagonale M10 x 16
2 rondelle piane M10
2 rondelle elastiche M10
Oltre ai componenti elencati, vengono fornite una
guida del prodotto e una procedura di prova finale
del Type 2020.
Fig.1 Componenti forniti
B
C
D
A
Type 2020 Manuale d’installazione Pag. 31
4. Istruzioni per il montaggio
Configurazione di montaggio
Le figure 2 e 3 mostrano il posizionamento tipico dei proiettori a infrarossi, quando vengono montati su
un gruppo panoramica e illuminazione controllato remotamente. Montare il proiettore Type 2020 tramite il
supporto (elemento A. fig. 4) e fissarlo utilizzando 2 viti a testa esagonale (elemento D, fig. 4), 2 rondelle
elastiche M10 (elemento C, fig. 4) e 2 rondelle piane M10 (elemento B, fig. 4), in dotazione con l’unità.
Nota: verificare che il filamento della lampadina sia montato orizzontalmente per ottenere la
durata della lampadina e la copertura del fascio luminoso previste. Consultare le istruzioni per la
sostituzione della lampadina (pagina 5)
Il filamento della
lampadina è adatto
per questo tipo di
montaggio.
Consultare le
istruzioni a pagina 7
per riorientare la
lampadina se si
esegue il montaggio
con un orientamento
diverso
Fig.2 Montaggio a lampada doppia
Panoramica e
inclinazione (Type 2000)
Proiettore a infrarossi Type 2020
B
C
D
A
Fig.4 Supporti di
fissaggio per il
montaggio
Fig.2 Montaggio a lampada
singola
Type 2020 Manuale d’installazione Pag. 32
5. Istruzioni per il cablaggio
Connessioni per il cablaggio
Le connessioni elettriche del proiettore a infrarossi
Type 2020 vengono effettuate tramite la morsettiera
posizionata all’interno dell’alloggiamento in
policarbonato dell’interruttore fotoelettrico sul retro,
come mostrato nella figura 5. Per accedere
all’alloggiamento è necessario rimuovere la copertura
svitando le quattro viti di fissaggio della stessa come
mostrato nella figura 6. Utilizzare un cavo a tre anime
per esterni da 0,75 mm2 e 230 V CA (Dedicated
Micros consiglia l’utilizzo di un cavo rivestito in
silicone a causa delle temperature estreme generate
del proiettore). Preparare l’estremità del cavo per la
connessione, inserire il cavo attraverso il pressacavi
libero e terminarlo come mostrato nelle figure 7 e 8.
Al termine, riposizionare la copertura e fissarla
nuovamente. È necessario stringere sufficientemente
il pressacavi per assicurare che una eventuale
tensione esercitata sul cavo venga trasmessa alle
connessioni dei morsetti e per garantire
l’impermeabilità. Si consiglia di proteggere
l’alimentazione in entrata tramite un fusibile da 2 A
per il proiettore Type 2020/300 (300 Watt) e da 3 A
per il Type 2020/500 (500 Watt).
Fig.5
Fig.6
Fig.7
Terra
Ingresso utente 230 V CA
Fig.8
Fase
Morsettiera
Interruttore
fotoelettrico
Alla lampadina
Neutro
Type 2020 Manuale d’installazione Pag. 33
6. Sostituzione della lampadina
Sostituzione della lampadina.
DOPO AVER SCOLLEGATO L’UNITÀ DALL’ALIMENTAZIONE aprire l’alloggiamento: rilasciare le 4
chiusure (elemento A, fig.9) ruotandole di un quarto di giro in senso antiorario utilizzando un cacciavite a
stella No.2. A questo punto sarà possibile rimuovere il gruppo frontale da quello posteriore e lasciarlo
sospeso sui cavi della messa a terra per esporre la lampadina. Rimuovere i terminali a forcella (elemento
B, fig.10) dal retro della lampadina e rilasciare la lampadina dalle 3 molle d’ancoraggio, spostandone una
verso l’esterno e sollevando contemporaneamente la lampadina.
Nota: il filamento della lampadina è posizionato direttamente tra i terminali a forcella (elemento C,
fig.11). Per allinearlo, ruotare la lampadina all’interno delle molle d’ancoraggio per assicurarsi che il
filamento sia in posizione orizzontale durante il montaggio del proiettore a infrarossi. È possibile
effettuare le connessioni del terminale a forcella su uno dei due terminali.
A
B
Fig.9 Apertura dell’alloggiamento del proiettore Fig.10
Terminali
Fig.11 Rimozione della lampadina Fig.12 Molle d’ancoraggio
C
C
Type 2020 Manuale d’installazione Pag. 34
7. Apparecchiatura opzionale
Griglia di protezione opzionale.
Una griglia di protezione opzionale (suffisso ordinazione: /SG) è disponibile per il proiettore Type
2020. Progettata per proteggere il filtro da oggetti in volo e da attacchi vandalici, la protezione può
essere montata in pochi secondi, utilizzando i 4 supporti di fissaggio in dotazione (fig.13).
Riduttore di tensione opzionale.
La durata prevista dichiarata dai produttori è di 2000 ore per la lampadina da 300 W e di 4000 ore per
quella da 500W. La durata prevista dichiarata è calcolata sulla base di un’alimentazione a 230 V. In
caso di un aumento del 5% del voltaggio, la durata della lampada si ridurrà del 50%.
NB. In alcune parti del Regno Unito il voltaggio in vigore è superiore ai 250 V. In questi casi
Dedicated Micros può fornire un dispositivo di riduzione del voltaggio Type 621 in grado di
ridurre il voltaggio dell’alimentazione del 9% per aumentare la durata della lampadina. (fig.14).
Dimensioni del dispositivo, utilizzabile solo in interni: L 110 x P 130 lunghezza x A 50.
Versione opzionale “senza interruttore fotoelettrico”
È disponibile una versione opzionale priva del selettore fotoelettrico sul retro
(suffisso ordinazione: / No PE)
Proiettore a luce bianca opzionale
Il proiettore Type 2020 è disponibile in una versione opzionale a luce bianca per qualsiasi tipo di
lampadina (suffisso ordinazione: /WL)
Fig.13 Fig.14
Type 2020 Manuale d’installazione Pag. 35
8. Componenti di ricambio
9. Risoluzione dei problemi
In condizioni di funzionamento normali, la durata della lampadina dovrebbe corrispondere a quella
dichiarata. Tuttavia alcune circostanze potrebbero ridurre sensibilmente la durata.
Picchi e sovracorrenti: Se l’alimentazione è soggetta a picchi e sovracorrenti, si ridurrà la durata dei
proiettori.
Orientamento: I filamenti della lampadina devono trovarsi in posizione orizzontale. Un filamento
posizionato verticalmente si brucerà prima del tempo previsto.
Funzionamento: Se viene montato su un gruppo panoramica e inclinazione, il proiettore sarà
soggetto a vibrazioni le quali, se raggiungono un’intensità eccessiva, potrebbero ridurne la durata.
Mentre le lampadine da 500 Watt sono progettate specificamente per questo scopo, quelle da 300 W
sono progettate per l’utilizzo normale e pertanto non garantiscono le stesse prestazioni.
Il presente documento viene fornito soltanto a scopo informativo.
Le specifiche e la disponibilità dei prodotti sono soggette a modifica senza preavviso.
Numero rif.
F56
F57
F2
F3
F4
F42
H92, a e b
1-2020/13
1-2020/17
F14
F15
F48
1-2020/22
BS152
1-2020/6
Quantità
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
Descrizione
Lampadina spot da 500 W
Lampadina a media diffusione da 500 W
Lampadina spot da 300 W
Lampadina a media diffusione da 300 W
Lampadina ad ampia diffusione da 300 W
Interruttore fotoelettrico
Gruppo pressacavi
Molle d’ancoraggio della lampadina
Griglia di protezione
Gruppo filtro 715 nm
Gruppo filtro 830 nm
Gruppo filtro dicroico
Guarnizione toroidale frontale
Guarnizione toroidale posteriore
Chiusure a un quarto di giro
Fissaggio di sicurezza esterno
Issue 1
Doc 74 0009
www.dedicatedmicros.com
UK Technical Help
Dennard Limited
Unit 4, Park Iron Works, Kingsley, Nr Bordon,
Hampshire GU35 9LY
Tel: +44 (0)1420 485713 Fax: +44 (0)1420 485714
e-mail: sales@dennard-cctv.com
European Technical Help
Dedicated Micros Europa
Neckarstraße 15, 41836 Hückelhoven, Deutschland
Tel.: +49 (0) 24 33 52 58 26 Fax: +49 (0) 24 33 52 58 20.
E-Mail: eusupport@dmicros.com
Dedicated Micros France
9-13 rue du Moulinet, 75013 Paris, France
Tél. : +33 1 45 81 99 99, Fax : +33 1 45 81 99 89.
e-mail: dmfrance@dmicros.com
Dedicated Micros Belgique
Joseph Chantraineplantsoen 1, 3070 Kortenberg, Belgique
Tél. : +32 2751 3480, Fax : +32 2751 3481
e-mail: dmbenelux@dmicros.com
Dedicated Micros Ltd. Slovenija
Delavska cesta 26, 4208 Sencur-Slovenija
Tel: +386 (4) 279 18 90, Fax: +386 (4) 279 18 91
e-mail: dmslovenia@dmicros.com
tesasas
15rueduBoisdesSaintsPères
FR-77176SavignyleTemple
Tel:+33(0)1.64.87.82.30
Fax:+33(0).1.64.87.82.50
contact.france@tesa.com
www.tesa.fr
Touslesproduitstesa®sontsoumisàdescontrôlesrigoureuxquigarantissentunequalitéirréprochable.Lesconseils
etrecommandationssontdonnésdebonnefoisurlabasedenotreexpérience.Cependant,tesaSEnepeutdonnerde
garantiesexpressesouimplicitesdequalitémarchandeoud'adéquationàunusageparticulier.C'estpourquoiilestdu
devoirdel'acheteur(duclient)detesterl'adéquationdesproduitsàunusagespécifiqueparuntestapproprié.Encas
dedoute,notreservicetechniqueseferaunplaisirdevousvenirenaide.
tesa®pack6300Dévidoirmanuel
Dévidoiréconomiquepouradhésifsd'emballage
INFORMATIONPRODUIT
Descriptionproduit
Ledévidoirmanueltesa®6300estd'unbonrapportqualité/prixpourlafermetureprofessionnelleetreçoittouttyped'adhésif
d'emballagetesa®.Ledévidoirestmunid'uncontrôledetensionpermettantainsid'utilisersansdifficultélesadhésifstesa®,mêmeceux
avecundéroulementrapide.Lalameestprotégéepourévitertouteblessure.
Principaleapplication
Placezledévidoirsurlecartonettirezleversvous.Lerouleauencaoutchoucappuiefortementsurl'adhésifpendantqu'ils'applique.
L'adhésifestensuitecoupéparlalamedenteléeeninclinantledévidoir.Lafindel'adhésifestappliquésurlecartongrâceàlaplaque
d'applicationsouple.Miseenplace:Lerouleautesa®estposésurleporte-mandrinaveclafaceadhésivesedéroulantverslapoignée.
Placerlafindurouleauentrelerouleaudeguidagedel'adhésifetlaplaqueenmétaljusqu'àcequelerubannefasseplusdeplis.
Donnéestechniques
Typed'applicateur main Largeurmaximaledurouleau 50mm
Propriétés
Objectifdel'application emballage
Longueur 220mm
Largeur 65mm
Hauteur 150mm
Poids 400gram
Diamètremaximumdurouleau 120mm
Diamètremaximumdumandrin 3pouce
Infoscomplémentaires
• dévidoirmanuelsolidegrâceàsastructureenmétal
• lameprotégéepouruneutilisationentoutesécurité
• contrôledetensionréglableàlamain
Page1sur1/Endatedu25.02.2010
Encodeur USB Série 450
Manuel de l'utilisateur
www.storm-interface.com Encodeur USB Série 450 Manuel FR Ver 1.02 août 2013 Page 1 / 8
Contenu
Page
Présentation du produit, caractéristiques 2
Gamme et accessoires
Téléchargements
Guide de prise en main rapide 3
Installation
Initialisation unique
Questions fréquentes et spécifications 4
Produits compatibles 5
Disposition des claviers 6
Tables des codes – Valeurs par défaut 7
Encodeur USB Série 450
Manuel de l'utilisateur
www.storm-interface.com Encodeur USB Série 450 Manuel FR Ver 1.02 août 2013 Page 2 / 8
Présentation du produit
Ce dispositif autonome est prêt à l'utilisation. Il peut être facilement fixé sur la surface arrière de la plupart des claviers Storm afin d'offrir la connectivité et la communication nécessaires pour des systèmes hôtes compatibles. Configuré en usine pour la saisie de données numériques standard, ce dispositif polyvalent peut aussi être programmé par l'utilisateur pour produire tout code compatible USB. Cette caractéristique fait de l'encodeur Série 450 l'interface idéale pour la plupart des applications.
Caractéristiques
Périphérique clavier générique (Interface Homme Machine) – Ne nécessite aucun pilote additionnel
Configuration usine pour encoder les claviers numériques selon les dispositions téléphone ou calculatrice
Table des codes de sortie personnalisable grâce à un utilitaire de configuration Storm
Alimentation intégrée pour l'éclairage des claviers
La version 450i possède des contrôles additionnels pour l'éclairage des claviers
La version 450i comporte un avertisseur sonore piézo-électrique pour la confirmation optionnelle de la frappe ou pour un générer un signal d'état piloté par l'applicatif.
Connexion unique par prise USB Mini-B
Forme compacte, autonome
Compatible avec la plupart des claviers Storm en dispositions 4, 12 et 16 touches
(y compris les claviers Storm des séries 700, 720, 1000, 2000, 3000, GFX et PLX)
Gamme et accessoires
Référence Description
4500-10 450i Encodeur avec buzzer et contrôle d'éclairage
4500-00 450 Encodeur
4500-01 Câble USB 1 mètre - type A vers mini B coudé
Note :
Pour commander en ligne directement chez Storm Interface, utiliser les références ci-dessus.
Les références approvisionnées par les circuits de distribution possèdent un suffixe pour permettre des étiquetages/marquages spécifiques. Exemple :
4500-102 450i Encodeur avec Buzzer
Téléchargements
4500-SW01 Utilitaire de configuration USB
450i-LIT-01 Brochure
450-xx-08KT Notice d'installation
450 USB Manual FR Manuel de l'utilisateur ( ce document )
Encodeur USB Série 450
Manuel de l'utilisateur
www.storm-interface.com Encodeur USB Série 450 Manuel FR Ver 1.02 août 2013 Page 3 / 8
Guide de prise en main rapide
Avant de commencer, vérifiez que vous avez :
• L'encodeur
• Un clavier compatible Storm
• Un câble USB avec une prise mini-B entre votre clavier et votre ordinateur
• Un panneau déjà découpé aux dimensions de votre clavier
• Une copie de l'utilitaire de configuration si vous voulez personnaliser la configuration
Installation
• Vérifiez que votre ordinateur est sous tension avant de connecter l'encodeur.
• Notez que pour la connexion avec le clavier il y a deux connecteurs distincts pour brancher les claviers 4 touches ou les claviers 12/16 touches. Bien s'assurer du connecteur utilisé avant de positionner les plaquettes autocollantes et fixer l'encodeur en place.
Connecteur pour clavier 4 touches Connecteur pour claviers 12/16 touches
Les plaquettes autocollantes se placent ici
(Une seule par emplacement, exception faite pour la Série 700
qui nécessite 2 plaquettes par position)
• Pressez l'encodeur sur le clavier et vérifiez que les plaquettes soient bien collées
• Connectez la prise mini-B du câble USB sur le côté de l'encodeur
Initialisation unique
Cette procédure d'initialisation devra être faite à la première mise en service. L'encodeur doit reconnaître le clavier et vous devez choisir la disposition des touches correspondant au type de clavier utilisé.
a) APPUYEZ ET MAINTENIR la touche en bas à droite du clavier – ceci indique à l'encodeur quel clavier est connecté
b) Branchez le câble de l'encodeur au PC.
c) RELACHEZ LA TOUHE SI vous souhaitez une table de codes pour les dispositions 4 touches de fonction et 12/16 touches téléphone
ou
d) MAINTENEZ LA TOUCHE ENFONCEE 10 SECONDES SI vous souhaitez une table de codes pour les dispositions 4 touches fléchées et 12/16 touches calculatrice
Vérifiez maintenant que l'écran affiche les caractères corrects. Si vous avez besoin de reconfigurer l'encodeur, vous pouvez changer la table des codes ou réinitialiser l'unité avec une table pré-chargée au moyen de l'utilitaire de configuration USB disponible sur www.storm-interface.com
Encodeur USB Série 450
Manuel de l'utilisateur
www.storm-interface.com Encodeur USB Série 450 Manuel FR Ver 1.02 août 2013 Page 4 / 8
Questions fréquentes
Est-ce que cet encodeur a besoin d'un pilote particulier? Non – il est reconnu par le pilote de clavier USB
standard
Est-ce que l'utilitaire fonctionne sur tout type de PC? Actuellement il ne fonctionne pas ni sous Linux, ni
sous Mac OS
L'utilitaire nécessite Windows XP ou plus
Quelle est la connexion USB? Prise mini-B
Est-ce que j'ai besoin d'utiliser les plaquettes auto-collantes? Elles sont inclues pour maintenir l'encodeur en
service
Quels codes USB personnalisables puis-je assigner? Voir les tables de codes page 11
Que dois-je faire si j'ai mal initialisé l'encodeur? Télécharger et utiliser l'utilitaire de configuration
pour réinitialiser les valeurs par défaut
Pourquoi la prise du clavier est plus longue que la barrette? Les broches d'extrémité servent à éclairer les
claviers
Spécifications
Température d'utilisation -20ºC à +60ºC
Température de stockage -20ºC à +70ºC
Humidité 10% à 90% sans condensation
Vibrations et chocs ETSI 300 019 5M3
Résistance d'isolement 50 Mohms (minimum)
Tension de claquage 500V a.c. (60 secondes)
Tension d'utilisation 5V +/- 5% (USB)
Consommation 20mA (Le courant nécessaire à éclairer le clavier est en plus)
Sécurité EU Directive Basse Tension
EMC: Emissions et immunité : FCC part 15 class A
EN55022, EN55024
ESD: Décharge dans l'air jusqu'à +/- 15kV, +/- 7.5kV par contact
EU RoHS
Conforme à la Directive WEEE
Encodeur USB Série 450
Manuel de l'utilisateur
www.storm-interface.com Encodeur USB Série 450 Manuel FR Ver 1.02 août 2013 Page 5 / 8
Produits compatibles
4
touches
12 touches
16 touches
Note
Série 700
Fixer la Série 700 sous panneau avec les plaquettes autocollantes additionnelles
Série 720
Série 1000
Série PLX
Série 2000
GFX
Série 3000
3000 Illuminator
L'éclairage n'est supporté que pour les claviers fabriqués à partir de septembre 2013
GFX Illuminator
L'éclairage n'est supporté que pour les claviers fabriqués à partir de septembre 2013
Utiliser la prise 7 broches pour les claviers
4 touches
Utiliser la
prise 10
broches pour les claviers
12/16 touches
Encodeur USB Série 450
Manuel de l'utilisateur
www.storm-interface.com Encodeur USB Série 450 Manuel FR Ver 1.02 août 2013 Page 6 / 8
Dispositions des claviers
Dispositions des claviers Dispositions des claviers
Table des codes par défaut (US English) Table des codes alternatifs (US English)
Encodeur USB Série 450
Manuel de l'utilisateur
www.storm-interface.com Encodeur USB Série 450 Manuel FR Ver 1.02 août 2013 Page 7 / 8
Tables des codes hexa par défaut (rappel : un hôte paramétré UK English produit £ au lieu de #)
Ligne
Colonne
4 touches
fonction
12 touches
téléphone
16 touches
téléphone
A
1
F1 (3A)
1 (1E)
1 (1E)
B
1
F2 (3B)
4 (21)
4 (21)
C
1
F3 (3C)
7 (24)
7 (24)
D
1
F4 (3D)
* (E1, 25)
* (E1, 25)
A
2
-
2 (1F)
2 (1F)
B
2
-
5 (22)
5 (22)
C
2
-
8 (25)
8 (25)
D
2
-
0 (27)
0 (27)
A
3
-
3 (20)
3 (20)
B
3
-
6 (23)
6 (23)
C
3
-
9 (26)
9 (26)
D
3
-
# (E1, 20)
# (E1, 20)
A
4
-
-
A (04)
B
4
-
-
B (05)
C
4
-
-
C (06)
D
4
-
-
. (37)
Tables des codes hexa alternatifs
Ligne
Colonne
4 touches
fléchées
12 touches
calculatrice
16 touches
calculatrice
avec NumLock
off
A
1
↑ (52)
7 (5F)
7 (5F)
HOME
B
1
← (50)
4 (5C)
4 (5C)
←
C
1
→ (4F)
1 (59)
1 (59)
END
D
1
↓ (51)
* (E1, 25)
* (E1, 25)
*
A
2
-
8 (60)
8 (60)
↑
B
2
-
5 (5D)
5 (5D)
C
2
-
2 (5A)
2 (5A)
↓
D
2
-
0 (62)
0 (62)
A
3
-
9 (61)
9 (61)
PgUp
B
3
-
6 (5E)
6 (5E)
→
C
3
-
3 (5B)
3 (5B)
PgDn
D
3
-
# (E1, 20)
# (E1, 20)
#
A
4
-
-
A (04)
A
B
4
-
-
B (05)
B
C
4
-
-
C (06)
C
D
4
-
-
. (37)
.
Encodeur USB Série 450
Manuel de l'utilisateur
www.storm-interface.com Encodeur USB Série 450 Manuel FR Ver 1.02 août 2013 Page 8 / 8
Page laissée intentionnellement blanche
imagine making the
impossible possible
2000
Series controllers
Built on our experience of design and applications
knowledge spanning more than 40 years, the Eurotherm®
2000 series brings you performance you can rely on and
accuracy you can trust.
At the same time no other range of controllers makes
operation so easy. Menu driven operation provides easy
intuitive and consistent access to all the controller
functions.
www.eurotherm.com/2000
Ultimate performance
Simply imagine process excellence… and with Eurotherm you will achieve it. Our ranges
of controllers provide world class control and versatility with clear, user friendly, operator
interfaces. Add to this, a strong sales team of qualified engineers who understand your
process, an absolute commitment to innovation by continuously re-investing in research and
development; we can and do imagine making the impossible possible for our customers.
Internal timer
– A 5 mode timer suitable for simple
time based profiling applications
Universal input
– 9 different thermocouples, PT100, DC
linear and a downloadable custom
curve
Four outputs
– up to 4 outputs including 2 modular
with many options including DC
outputs
Communication protocols
– Modbus RTU, EI-Bisynch, DeviceNet®
Three internal alarms
– Configurable as High, Low, Deviation
and Deviation High or Low alarms
Two outputs
– 1 relay and 1 logic (can be used as a
relay with an external module)
Suitable for • Small ovens • Chillers • Sterilisers • Trace heating • Heat sealing •
Dwell timer
– simple ramp dwell profile applications
Four internal alarms
– configurable as High, Low, Deviation,
Deviation High, Deviation Low, High
and Low current alarms
Suitable for • Cold stores • Ovens and furnaces • Plastic extrusion • Packaging machines • Food and brewing applications •
www.eurotherm.com/2000
Every 2000 Series controller can be tailored to provide the
control solution you need. Modular design and easy, onsite
configuration matches application requirements and
gives you a temperature and process control solution that’s
ready to run the first time you switch it on.
The 2000 Series provides control strategies ranging from
simple ON/OFF to PID with advanced overshoot
protection, providing the best control for the widest range
of applications including valve positioning. Within the 2000
Series there is also the 2500 Modular Controller and the
2604/2704 Controllers which, with their enhanced
functionality and multiloop capability, offer a powerful
addition to the range. Please consult Eurotherm sales for
more information on these products.
Customisable to your control
requirements
imagine process
excellence...
Programming
– up to 20, 16 segment programs (4 in
the 2416) are available with 8 digital
event outputs
Four internal alarms
– configurable as High, Low, Deviation,
Deviation High or Low, high and Low
Current alarms high and low output,
high and low input 2, High and low
setpoint and one Rate of change
alarm
Modular
– up to 4 outputs of which 3 are
modular with many different options
within the different modules
Modules
– up to 16 different types of module
are available
Communication protocols
– Modbus RTU, EI-Bisynch, DeviceNet,
Profibus DP
Suitable for • Single and multi-zone furnaces • Kilns • Environmental chambers • Simple ratio • Humidity • Chemical and pharmaceutical •
Applications • Glass furnaces and lehrs •
For the full stories and all our successes go to www.eurotherm.com/success
Success stories commercial benefits
Prompt, accurate flow detection rate and response
Case Study
2400 series Feedforward control is excellent for chemical dosing
applications
Customer Challenge
The 2400 process controller is very suitable in the treatment of waste water,
petrochemical processes and other additive dosing applications because any
possible disturbance to the levels of chemicals added are detected before they can
affect the ongoing process.
Solution
Feedforward is a method for detecting disturbances in the upstream flow and
forwarding this information to the controller so that it can change the output before
the disturbance affects the downstream ratio.
So, in the diagram shown, the upstream flow rate from the flow meter (FT) forces an
immediate change to the output of the controller (OP) and so causes an immediate
change in the Dosing Pump speed.
This Feedforward method is ideal for any process that is subject to upstream
disturbances. This type of disturbance is invariably found in either liquid or gas
systems.
Customer Benefits
• Feedforward control can avoid the slowness of integral feedback control because
the disturbances are measured and accounted for before they have time to affect
• The dosing rate immediately tracks any changes in flow rate and so prevents any
possibility of over or under dosing
Typical use of technology
• Liquid Level - Boiler Drum Level
• Chemical Dosing - Paint Mixing, Brewing,
• Industrial Distillation – Brewing, Petroleum Refineries, Petrochemical, Chemical
Plants, and Natural Gas Processing Plants.
Setpoint
FF OP
Flow
Meter
FT AT
Analytical
Sensor
PID
Loop PV
+
2400
Dosing
Pump
Setpoint
Easy to use controllers for greater flexibility
Case Study
2100 series 5 Mode Timer feature enables cost effective temperature and
process control
Customer Challenges faced in the food beverage industry
Global market forces are driving the continual evolution of the food and beverage
industry. Consolidation, changing consumer preferences and increasing government
regulations are dramatically impacting manufacturing and business strategy. In this
fiercely competitive marketplace, consistent high quality and cost effectiveness are
critical to meet consumer demand.
Solution 2100 Controller
Eurotherm acknowledge these commercial pressures and our products ensure
simple cost effective process control. Even one of our simplest, compact controllers
has useful cost effective features.
The 5 mode timer in the 2100 temperature process controller may be used to
control batch operations, e.g. food production, ovens, sterilisers, fryers. An ideal
application would be single dwell at the end of either a controlled ramp rate or
natural approach to setpoint without the need for an additional timing device.
Available Timer Operation Modes are:
• Dwell and Switch Off
• Time from Cold and Switch Off
• Delayed Switch On
Benefits
• This maintains a target temperature at the end of a ramp rate without the need for
an additional device, thereby simplifying the process
• Easy operation with customised interface that presents only the parameters that
the operator needs to see. All other parameters can be locked away under
password protection.
Typical use of technology
• Small Ovens, Fryers, Sterilisers, Incubators
Time
Temperature
Setpoint
Dwell
time
Switch off
Ramp
control
Dwell Timer Functionality
For the full stories and all our successes go to www.eurotherm.com/success
Highly flexible temperature values
Case Study
2400 controller 8 segment program, repeatable and simple to change
Customer Challenges faced in Autoclave and Environmental Chamber applications
Many applications need their process values (i.e. Temperature, Pressure, Flow etc) to
be varied with time.
Amongst other applications Autoclaves are used for Sterilisation and for Vacuum
Forming. In these applications there are invariably a number of ramps, and dwell
times required to ensure that the material has been adequately processed.
In Environmental Chambers programmed profiles are generally run repeatedly for
some time and this is a method that is used to produce accelerated ageing. This
process is therefore very useful for determining the likely longevity of a product
before it fails.
Solution 2400 Controller
• The 2400 series process controller offer setpoint programming as an option. The
program is stored as a series of segments which can be ramps, dwells, steps etc.
• All 2400 programmer/controllers have an 8 segment program as standard, and
can optionally have up to 20 off 16 segment programs each with 8 digital events.
The digital events are used to control other ancillary equipment at predetermined
segments in the program. For instance; it may switch on a vibration
table at some stage in the process.
• All of these features make the 2400 programmer/controller ideal for Furnaces,
Environmental Chambers, and Autoclave applications.
Customer Benefits
• Minimises the need for extra equipment which becomes costly to install and
maintain, time and space saving
• Offers high integrity, repeatable processing thus increasing yield consistency and
high product quality
Typical use of technology
• Autoclaves – Steam Sterilization of medical, pharmaceutical and laboratory
equipment
• Environmental chambers –test the effects of environmental conditions such as
accelerated aging on industrial products, materials, biological items and
electronic devices
• Industrial furnaces – Heat Treatment, Glass Furnaces, and Lehrs
Temperature
End Type = Dwell
Time
Holdback at End Type = Off
start of dwell
www.eurotherm.com/2000
Real-world applications
Master
Programmer
Slave
Controllers
PDS communications
M
P g
S
C
In 2000 Series controllers it is possible to use the PDS communication link to
send a setpoint from one controller to a network of slave devices - providing
the economical creation of multi-zone temperature control solutions.
PDS setpoint retransmission
Ratiometric
Pyrometer
Thermocouple
Output
Switchover
between
4-20mA two points
mocouple
Master
Output
Slave
PDS
Retransmission
with
Feedforward
Modbus RTU
Modbus Master
The 2000 Series uses industry standard protocols
such as Modbus RTU, DeviceNet or Profibus DP
to communicate with supervisory systems and
PLCs over EIA232, EIA485 (2 wire) or EIA422 (4
wire). This carries the information and overall
control into the supervisory system while
maintaining local access to the local equipment
ensuring overall plant integrity in all situations.
Communication
Sometimes it is desirable to control a process using two separate inputs to
derive the PV (process value). This could be based on a highest wins, lowest
wins, some function of the two inputs, or switching between the two inputs at
some pre-determined point in the process.
For example, an application could consist of a thermocouple for measuring up
to 800°C and a Ratiometric Pyrometer for measuring the range between
700°C and 1,400°C.
Typically when the temperature is below 740°C the thermocouple provides
the PV and, when between 740°C and 780°C the controller switches gently
from the thermocouple to the Pyrometer which provides the PV up to 1,400°C.
Derived inputs
Using Eurotherm setpoint retransmission over PDS
communications it is possible to use two 2400 controllers
as a cascade control system with the output of the first (or
master controller) forming the setpoint of the second (or
slave controller).
Eurotherm advanced algorithms enable the use of either
setpoint or PV feedforward to limit the slave setpoint - for
example ±10% of the master setpoint or PV.
Cascade control
From a simple ramp and dwell to a 16 segment
program with event outputs, the 2000 Series provides a
powerful platform for setpoint profiling. Programs can
be edited from the instrument HMI and for the 2400
instruments, using iTools Setpoint Program Editor.
iTools configuration software enables you to store and
clone controller configurations, as well as commission
your process control system. This facility significantly
reduces installation and commissioning time while
improving the security of the process. The Eurotherm
advanced customer sensor linearisation tool also
provides for the download of special sensor response
characteristics to the controller.
Reduced installation and
commissioning time
Easy setpoint programming
From fixed build to modular construction, the
Eurotherm flexible 2000 Series offers a truly versatile
solution to all your requirements.
www.eurotherm.com/2000
Selection guide
Features
Panel size (DIN)
IP Rating
Single Loop
Display Type
Supply Voltage
Input Type
PV Accuracy
Control Types
SP Programmer
Analogue IP/OP
Digital IP/OP
Digital Comms
Alarm Types
PC Configuration
2116
1/32 1/16
IP65
2100
2216e 2208e
1/16
DIN rail
1/8
IP65
2200
2204e
1/4
TC, RTD,
mV, mA, V
1 x 4
dig LED
TC, RTD, mV,
mA, Volts
2 x 4 dig LED
<0.25%
On/Off. PID
none
In: 1 Out: 0
In: 1 Out: 2
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
List based
<0.25%
On/Off. PID, VP
none
none none
In: 1 Out: 1
In: 3 Out: 4
Modbus, DeviceNet
List based
24V dc/ac
85-264V ac
85-264V ac
2132
Dual input control
Hi, Lo, Dev,
Sensor break,
Event, Heater fail
Hi, Lo, Dev,
Sensor break,
Event, Heater fail
Hi, Lo, Dev,
Sensor break,
2416 2408 2404
1/16 1/8 1/4
IP65
2400
TC, RTD, mV,
mA, Volts
2 x 4 dig LED
<0.2%
On/Off. PID, VP
20 x 16 segments
In: 2 Out: 3
In: 11 Out: 11
List based
24V dc/ac
85-264V ac
Modbus, DeviceNet,
Profibus
Special Features
Maths Equation
Combinational Logic
Timers/Counters/Totals
Real Time Clock
© Copyright Eurotherm Limited 2011
Invensys, Eurotherm, the Eurotherm logo, Chessell, EurothermSuite, Mini8, Eycon, Eyris, EPower, nanodac and Wonderware are trademarks of
Invensys plc, its subsidiaries and affiliates. All other brands may be trademarks of their respective owners.
All rights are strictly reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced, modified, or transmitted in any form by any means, nor may it be stored
in a retrieval system other than for the purpose to act as an aid in operating the equipment to which the document relates, without
the prior written permission of Eurotherm limited.
Eurotherm Limited pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement. The specifications in this document
may therefore be changed without notice. The information in this document is given in good faith, but is intended for guidance
only.
Eurotherm Limited will accept no responsibility for any losses arising from errors in this document.
Part No. HA026587 Issue 5 Printed in England on recycled paper 03.11
Represented by:
Eurotherm is also represented in the
Eurotherm: following countries:
International sales and service
www.eurotherm.com
Afghanistan
Albania
Algeria
Angola
Argentina
Armenia
Azerbaijan
Bahrain
Bangladesh
Barbados
Belarus
Bermuda
Bolivia
Bosnia and
Herzegovina
Botswana
Brazil
Brunei Darussalam
Bulgaria
Cambodia
Cameroon
Canada
Central African
Republic
Chad
Chile
Colombia
Congo
Costa Rica
Côte d’Ivoire
Croatia
Cyprus
Czech Republic
Denmark
Djibouti
Ecuador
Egypt
El Salvador
Eritrea
Estonia
Ethiopia
Fiji
Finland
Georgia
Ghana
Greece
Greenland
Guinea
Hungary
Iceland
Indonesia
Iraq
Israel
Jamaica
Japan
Jordan
Kazakhstan
Kenya
Kuwait
Kyrgyzstan
Laos
Latvia
Lesotho
Libya
Lithuania
Macedonia
Madagascar
Malaysia
Malta
Micronesia
Moldova
Morocco
Mozambique
Myanmar
Namibia
Nicaragua
Niger
Nigeria
Norway
Oman
Pakistan
Palestinian Territory
Papua New Guinea
Paraguay
Peru
Philippines
Poland
Qatar
Romania
Russia
Rwanda
Saudi Arabia
Senegal
Serbia and
Montenegro
Sierra Leone
Singapore
Slovakia
Slovenia
Somalia
South Africa
Sri Lanka
Sudan
Swaziland
Syria
Tajikistan
Tanzania
Thailand
The Gambia
Tunisia
Turkey
Turkmenistan
Uganda
Ukraine
United Arab Emirates
Uruguay
Uzbekistan
Venezuela
Vietnam
Yemen
Zambia
Zimbabwe
AUSTRALIA Melbourne
Invensys Process Systems
Australia Pty. Ltd.
T (+61 0) 8562 9800
F (+61 0) 8562 9801
E info.eurotherm.au@invensys.com
AUSTRIA Vienna
Eurotherm GmbH
T (+43 1) 7987601
F (+43 1) 7987605
E info.eurotherm.at@invensys.com
BELGIUM & LUXEMBOURG
Moha
Eurotherm S.A/N.V.
T (+32) 85 274080
F (+32) 85 274081
E info.eurotherm.be@invensys.com
BRAZIL Campinas-SP
Eurotherm Ltda.
T (+5519) 3707 5333
F (+5519) 3707 5345
E info.eurotherm.br@invensys.com
CHINA
Eurotherm China
T (+86 21) 61451188
F (+86 21) 61452602
E info.eurotherm.cn@invensys.com
Beijing Office
T (+86 10) 5909 5700
F (+86 10) 5909 5709/5909 5710
E info.eurotherm.cn@invensys.com
FRANCE Lyon
Eurotherm Automation SA
T (+33 478) 664500
F (+33 478) 352490
E info.eurotherm.fr@invensys.com
GERMANY Limburg
Eurotherm Deutschland GmbH
T (+49 6431) 2980
F (+49 6431) 298119
E info.eurotherm.de@invensys.com
INDIA Mumbai
Invensys India Pvt. Ltd.
T (+91 22) 67579800
F (+91 22) 67579999
E info.eurotherm.in@invensys.com
IRELAND Dublin
Eurotherm Ireland Limited
T (+353 1) 4691800
F (+353 1) 4691300
E info.eurotherm.ie@invensys.com
ITALY Como
Eurotherm S.r.l
T (+39 031) 975111
F (+39 031) 977512
E info.eurotherm.it@invensys.com
KOREA Seoul
Invensys Operations Management
Korea
T (+82 2) 2090 0900
F (+82 2) 2090 0800
E info.eurotherm.kr@invensys.com
NETHERLANDS Alphen a/d Rijn
Eurotherm B.V.
T (+31 172) 411752
F (+31 172) 417260
E info.eurotherm.nl@invensys.com
POLAND Katowice
Invensys Eurotherm Sp z o.o.
T (+48 32) 7839500
F (+48 32) 7843608/7843609
E info.eurotherm.pl@invensys.com
SPAIN Madrid
Eurotherm España SA
T (+34 91) 6616001
F (+34 91) 6619093
E info.eurotherm.es@invensys.com
SWEDEN Malmo
Eurotherm AB
T (+46 40) 384500
F (+46 40) 384545
E info.eurotherm.se@invensys.com
SWITZERLAND Wollerau
Eurotherm Produkte (Schweiz) AG
T (+41 44) 7871040
F (+41 44) 7871044
E info.eurotherm.ch@invensys.com
UNITED KINGDOM Worthing
Eurotherm Limited
T (+44 1903) 268500
F (+44 1903) 265982
E info.eurotherm.uk@invensys.com
U.S.A. Ashburn VA
Eurotherm Inc.
T (+1 703) 724 7300
F (+1 703) 724 7301
E info.eurotherm.us@invensys.com
ED63
2116/2132
PID temperature controllers
User Guide
Manuel Utilisateur
Bedienungsanleitung
ENG
FRA
GER
This booklet includes:
User Guide (HA026270 Issue 5)
Manuel Utilisateur (HA026270FRA Indice 5)
Bedienungsanleitung (HA026270GER Ausgabe 5)
Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 1
2132 and 2116 PID Temperature Controllers
Thank you for choosing the 2132 or 2116 Temperature Controller. Supplied in 1/32 and 1/16 DIN panel sizes they
are designed for accurate, stable control of ovens, chillers, sterilisers and other heating and cooling processes.
Two outputs are configurable for heating, cooling and alarms.
The controller is supplied configured according to the order code given in section 5. Check this on the side labels
to determine the configuration of your particular controller.
1. Dimensions and Installation
Model 2132
Model 2116
48mm (1.89in)
45 x 45 mm
-0.0, + 0.6
1.77 x 1.77in
-0.00, +0.02
48mm
24mm Panel cut-out
103mm (4.01in)
45mm -0.0, +0.6
1.77in -0.0, +0.02
Latching ears Panel retaining clips
22mm -0.0, +0.3
0.88in -0.0, +0.10
Panel cut-out
103mm (4.01in)
48mm (1.89in)
2 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07
1.1 To Install the Controller
Please read the safety information in sections 7 before proceeding.
1. Prepare the panel cut-out to the size shown
2. Insert the controller through the cut-out.
3. Spring the panel retaining clips into place. Secure the controller in position by holding it level and pushing
both retaining clips forward.
4. Peel off the protective cover from the display
1.2 Unplugging the Controller
The controller can be unplugged from its sleeve by easing the latching ears outwards and pulling it forward out of
the sleeve. When plugging it back into its sleeve, ensure that the latching ears click back into place to maintain the
IP65 sealing.
1.3 Recommended Minimum Spacing of Controllers
10mm (0.4 in) 38mm (1.5 in)
(Not to scale)
Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 3
2. Electrical Connections
2.1 Wire Sizes
The screw terminals accept wire sizes from 0.5 to 1.5 mm
(16 to 22AWG). Hinged covers prevent hands or metal
making accidental contact with live wires. The rear
terminal screws should be tightened to 0.4Nm (3.5lb in).
Output ratings
Logic Output: 9Vdc, 12mA (non-isolated from
sensor input).
Used for: Heating, Cooling or Alarm.
Relay Output: 2A, 264V ac resistive.
Used for: Heating, Cooling or Alarm.
Contact Closure Input (replaces Logic Output).
Used for: Alarm Acknowledge or Timer start/reset
Model 2116
OR
Solid
State
Relay
(SSR)
+
-
Logic
I/O
Line
Neutral
Output 2 Relay
T/C Pt100 mA
Sensor Inputs
L
N
A
AB
V+
V-
1A
1B
2.49Ω
85-264Vac
50/60Hz
1B 1A
Pt100
T/C Output 2
Relay Neutral
Line
Logic
I/O
Model 2132
External Relay
Module (Operated
by the logic
output)
OR
Solid
State
Relay
(SSR)
2.49Ω
Sensor Inputs
V- V+ AB A N L
- +
mA
85-264Vac 50/60Hz
1B 1A
20-29 Vac/dc
Low voltage supply
24 24
20-29 Vac/dc
Low voltage
24 supply
24
4 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07
2.2 Typical Wiring Diagram
Safety requirements for permanently connected equipment state:
• A switch or circuit breaker shall be included in the building installation
• It shall be in close proximity to the equipment and within easy reach of the operator
It shall be marked as the disconnecting device for the equipment
* When switching
inductive loads such as
contactors or solenoid
valves, wire the
22nF/100Ω ‘snubber’
supplied across relay
terminals AA & AB. This
will prolong contact life
and reduce interference.
! WARNING
Snubbers pass 0.6mA at
110V and 1.2mA at
230Vac, which may be
sufficient to hold on high
impedance loads. Do not
use in these installations.
Relay
output
fuse
2A type T
Neutral
Controller fuse
2A type T
Heater fuse
Heater Thermocouple
Solid State
Relay
(e.g. TE10)
Snubber*
Line
+
-
Model 2132
V+ A
1B
V-
1A
A L N
Cooling or
alarm relay
Circuit
Breaker
Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 5
3. Operation
Switch on the controller. Following a 3 second selftest
sequence, you will see the display shown below.
It is called the HOME display.
OP1 illuminates when the logic output is ON
(normally heating).
OP2 illuminates when the relay output is ON
(normally cooling or alarm).
If
OP1 or
OP2 are configured as alarm outputs
(instead of heating and cooling), they will flash when a
new ‘unacknowledged’ alarm occurs and go steady
when the alarm is acknowledged but still true.
3.1 To Adjust The Required
Temperature (Setpoint)
Press and release quickly the or button.
The setpoint will be displayed for 2 seconds.
20 Output 1
Output 2
Actual
Temperature
(or Process
Value ‘PV’)
OP1
OP2
Press and hold to raise the setpoint
Press and hold to lower the setpoint
60 OP1
OP2
Required
temperature
(Setpoint)
Actual temperature
20 OP1
OP2
6 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07
3.2 To View The Display Units
Press and release quickly the or button. The
display units will be flashed for 0.5 sec.
If you get lost, pressing and together will
always return you to the HOME display.
If, at any time, no key is pressed within 45 seconds,
the display will always return to the HOME display.
3.3 To Acknowledge a New Alarm
Press and together. This will also reset any
latched alarms that are no longer true.
3.4 Alarm Messages
If an alarm occurs a message will be flashed in the
display. This alternates with the measured temperature
as shown below:
Possible messages
-fsH Alarm - Full Scale High
-FSL Alarm - Full Scale Low
-deV Alarm - Deviation
-dHi Alarm - Deviation High
-dLo Alarm - Deviation Low
Sbr Sensor Break
Lbr Loop Break
Ldf Load Fail
End End of Timing
In place of the dash the alarm number is shown -
Alarm 1 or 2 or 3.
Display Units
*C Deg Centigrade
*F Deg Fahrenheit
*K Deg Kelvin
Linear inputs - no
units displayed
0.5 sec
or
oC
20
Alarm 1
Full Scale
Low
Actual
temperature
1fsL
20
Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 7
3.5 To View The Output Power
Do this if you want to see how much heating or
cooling energy is being demanded by the controller.
Note: This is not a measure of actual power.
Warning!
In manual standby mode (see ‘To Use The Timer’) the
output power can be adjusted by the operator, causing
heating or cooling to be permanently applied. To
prevent this make the OP parameter read only (see ‘To
Hide, Reveal And Promote Parameters’)
HOME display
20.0
Press twice quickly
OP 100.0
*C
Press
Controller is
demanding 100% heat
Press or to view the value
8 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07
3.6 To Select or Change Other
Parameters
Parameters are settings in the controller which you can
change to suit the process. They are found under list
headings.
Press the button to step through the list headings
as shown below.
Turn to paragraph 3.8 to see all of the list headings.
These lists are used to:
• Change alarm setpoints
• Tune the controller to the process
• Manually select PID values
• Change setpoint limits and access the in-built
timer
• Change input and output limits
Keep pressing to select
more list headings, eventually
returning to the HOME display.
This is a continuous loop.
HOME display
20.0 aL Atun
X2
Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 9
3.7 To Adjust The Alarm Setpoints
(Trip Levels)
Press twice to choose the AL list.
There are three Alarms. The setpoint for each alarm is
found under the AL list. If an alarm has been disabled, it
will not appear in this list.
Note: The other parameters listed in section 3.8 are
accessed and adjusted in exactly the same way as this
example.
0.5 sec
1st press
2nd press
*C
20
2 secs
Next list
Press or displays List indicating a list heading
LiSt
AL
0
1---
-FSL = Low alarm
-FSH = High alarm
-dEV = Deviation
-dHi = Deviation High
-dLo = Deviation Low
- = the alarm number
0
2---
0
3---
Press and together to return to the HOME display.
Alarm 1
*
Alarm 2
*
Alarm 3
*
* Press or to
change the setpoint.
Press
10 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07
3.8 Parameter Lists
Shaded boxes are hidden when shipped from the factory.
To reveal see ‘’To Hide, Reveal and Promote Parameters” section 3.10
HC.db
Hys.C
HYS.H
Ont.C
Ont.H
OP.Hi
OP.Lo
CJCO
SPrr
SP H
SP L
AdC
Lb t
diSP HY
m A
w.SP
Home
List
Alarm
List
Autotune
List
PID
List(2)
Setpoint
List
Input
List
Output
List(2)
On/Off
List
Access List
20.0 AL Atun Pid SP iP oP On.Of ACCS
1---(1)
2---(1)
3---(1)
OP tunE Pb
ti
td
rES
Lcb
Hcb
rEL.C
OFS.H
FiLt
mV
OFS
CAL.P
CAL
Pnt.L
OFS.L
Pnt.H
CYC.H
CYC.C
codE
Goto
Conf
tmr
dwel
StAt
tm.OP
(2) Either the PID list or the On/Off list
will be present depending upon the
configuration of the controller.
X2
(1) In place of dashes, the last
three letters depend on the
alarm type.
Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 11
3.8.1 Summary
1. Press to step across list headings.
2. Press to step down parameters
3. Press to view the value of a parameter. Keep pressing to decrease the value.
4. Press to view the value of a parameter. Keep pressing to increase the value
12 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07
3.9 Parameter Tables
Home List Adjustable Range Default setting Customer setting
Op Output
Power
-100% = max cooling, 100.0% = max heating.
w.SP Working
Setpoint
Only appears when setpoint rate limit enabled Read only Read only
m-A Manual/
Auto Select
Auto
mAn
Automatic control selected
Manual standby selected
Auto
disp Home
Display
Options
Std
OP
NonE
PV
AL.SP
pv.aL
Standard - Shows the process value
with the setpoint accessed by pressing
the and buttons.
Displays the output power - for use as
a manual station. (Only applies to
software version 1.4)
Blank Display (only alarm messages
flashed)
Displays the Process Value only
Displays the Alarm 2 Setpoint only
Displays the Process Value with Alarm
2 Setpoint accessed by and .
Std
Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 13
AL Alarm List (See
section 3.7)
Adjustable
Range
Default
Setting
Customer setting
1--- Alarm 1 Setpoint 0
2--- Alarm 2 Setpoint 0
3--- Alarm 3 Setpoint
In place of dashes, the last
three letters indicate the
alarm type:
Between low
and high
setpoint limits 0
-FSL Full Scale Low
-FSH Full Scale High
-dEv Deviation
-dHi Deviation High
-dLo Deviation Low
HY Alarm Hysteresis 1 to 9999 in display units (This value is
common to all alarms) Hysterisis is used to
prevent the alarm output ‘chattering’ by setting
a difference between the alarm switch ON and
switch OFF points
1
Lb t Loop Break Time OFF to 9999 minutes OFF
14 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07
Atun Automatic Tuning List (See section 4.3) Adjustable
Range
Default Setting Customer setting
tunE Automatic Tune Enable OFF or on Off
Adc Automatic Manual reset calculation (when P+D
control)
man or
caLc
man
PiD PID List (See section 4.3) Adjustable Range Default Setting Customer setting
Pb Proportional Band 1 to 999.9 display units 20
ti Integral Time OFF to 9999 seconds 360
td Derivative Time OFF to 9999 seconds 60
rES Manual Reset Value
(only present if ti= OFF)
-100 to 100.0 % 0.0
Lcb Low Cutback Auto to 999.9 display units Auto
Hcb High Cutback Auto to 999.9 display units Auto
rEL.C Relative Cool Gain 0.01 to 10.00 1.00
Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 15
SP Setpoint List (See also ‘To Use
the Timer’ section 3.11)
Adjustable Range Default Setting Customer setting
SP L Setpoint Low Limit -1999 to 999.9 As per order
SP H Setpoint High Limit -1999 to 999.9 As per order
sprr Setpoint Rate Limit 0FF to 999.9 display units
per minute
Off
tm.OP Timer Operating Mode Opt.1 to Opt.5 OPt.1
tmr Time Remaining 0 to 9999 minutes 0
dwEl Dwell Time 0FF to 9999 minutes OFF
StAt Timer Status OFF or on OFF
16 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07
iP Input List (See also ‘User
Calibration’ section 4.2)
Adjustable Range Default Setting Customer setting
FiLt Input Filter Time Constant 0FF to 999.9 seconds 1.6
CJC* Cold Junction Temperature measured at rear terminals Read only
mV Millivolt Input measured at the rear terminals Read only
OFS Process value Offset -1999 to 9999 display
units
0
CAL.P Calibration Password 0 to 9999 3
CAL User Calibration Enable FACt Re-instates factory
calibration
USEr Re-instates user
calibration
FACt
Pnt.L Low Calibration Point 0
OFS.L Low Point Calibration Offset 0
Pnt.H High Calibration Point 100
OFS.H High Point Calibration Offset
-1999 to 9999 display
units
0
Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 17
oP Output List Adjustable Range Default Setting Customer setting
OP.Lo Low Output Power Limit -100 to 100.0 % 0
OP.Hi High Output Power Limit -100 to 100.0 % 100.0
CYC.H Heating Output Cycle Time 0.2 to 999.9 seconds 1.0 Lgc 20 Rly
CYC.C Cooling Output Cycle Time 0.2 to 999.9 seconds 5.0 Lgc 20 Rly
ont.H Heating Output Minimum On
Time
Auto to 999.9 seconds
(Auto = 50ms)
Auto
ont.C Cooling Output Minimum On
Time
Auto to 999.9 seconds
(Auto = 50ms)
auto
onOF On Off Output List Adjustable Range Default Setting Customer setting
hYS.H Heating Hysteresis 1 to 9999 display units 1
hYS.C Cooling Hysteresis 1 to 9999 display units 1
HC.db Heat/Cool Deadband 0 to 9999 display units 0
ACCS Access List (See “To Hide, Reveal and
Promote” parameters section 3.10)
Adjustable Range Default
Setting
Customer setting
codE Access Pass Number 0 to 9999 1
Goto Go To Required Access Level Oper, Ful, Edit, conf OPEr
Conf Configuration Pass Number 0 to 9999 2
18 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07
3.10 To Hide, Reveal and Promote
Parameters
You are now in Edit level.
Press and to select a parameter
in the normal way.
Press to return to the Access list header.
ACCS
PASS
codE
Press or to enter the password.
The factory default is 1. ‘PASS’ will be
displayed when the correct password has
been entered.
Press
Press until the Access List Heading is
reached.
Press or to select ‘Edit’ level.
Other options are:
OPEr Operator level - shows selected
parameters
FuLL Reveals the ‘FULL’ set of
parameters
ConF Gives access to configuration
level.
Edit
Goto
Press
ACCS
High alarm 2 has been selected.
When or is pressed, instead of
displaying the parameter value, its
availability to in Operator level is shown as
follows:
ALtr The parameter will be alterable
HidE The parameter will be hidden
.
rEAd The parameter will be read-only
Pro The parmeter will be ‘promoted’
into the HOME list (see below).
Example:
HidE
2FSH
Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 19
3.10.1 The Pro (Promote) option
Up to twelve commonly used parameters can be
‘promoted’ into the HOME list. This will give the
operator quick access to them by simply pressing the
button. This feature, used in combination with
‘hide’ and ‘ read only’, allows you to organise the way
in which you want your controller formatted.
The parameter tmr will now appear in the HOME
list. Repeat the procedure for any other parameters
you wish to promote.
To remove a parameter go to edit level, select the
parameter from the relevant list and change the choice
from Pro back to ALtr, rEAd or HidE.
3.10.2 Returning to Operator level
Repeat the above procedure for all the parameters you
wish to hide, promote, or make read-only then return
to operator level:
Example:
Time remaining has been selected.
Press or to choose Pro.
Pro
tmr
1. Press until you reach the
ACCS list heading
2. Press until you reach
Goto
3. Press or to select
Oper
4. Press to return to Operator
level
OPer
Goto
20 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07
3.11 To Use The Timer
• Press until you reach the SP list
• Press until you reach the tM.OP parameter
• Press or to select the timer operating
mode, Opt.1 to Opt.5 as follows:
3.11.1 Opt.1 - Mode 1, Dwell and Switch Off
In reset
In reset, you can switch between automatic control and
standby mode, using the parameter m-A in the HOME
list.
The controller is supplied with the m-A parameter
hidden. You must first reveal it. See ‘To Hide, Reveal
and Promote Parameters’.
Standby mode
Temperature
Setpoint
Reset Timing
Running
End
Waiting to End flashes
reach
temperature
Auto
m-A
From the HOME display press
until the m-A parameter is displayed.
Press or to select:
Auto Automatic control
mAn Standby mode. (the MAN
beacon below OP2 will
illuminate)
Press and together to return to the HOME
display
Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 21
‘Automatic control’ means control at setpoint, with
heating (and cooling) being applied.
‘Standby mode’ means: the controller is in manual
with zero output power. See ‘Warning!’ in section 3.5.
During Running
The controller will always switch to automatic control.
Heating (or cooling) will be applied and the
temperature will rise (or cool) to the setpoint. When
the temperature is within 1oC of setpoint, the timer will
start counting down.
During End
When the timer times out, the controller will switch to
standby mode. The MAN beacon will light and End
will be flashed in the main display. The process will
cool down. The timer will remain indefinitely in this
state until reset.
When Reset
End will stop flashing. The controller will return to
reset in standby mode. It can be returned to automatic
control by setting the parameter m-A in the HOME list
to Auto.
3.11.2 Opt.2 - Mode 2, Dwell No Switch Off
Indefinite dwell
at setpoint
Temperature
Setpoint
Reset Timing
Running
End
End flashes
Waiting to
reach
temperature
This is the same as mode 1 except that at the end of the
timing period the controller will continue indefinitely in
automatic control.
22 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07
3.11.3 Opt.3 - Mode 3, Time from Cold and
Switch Off
This is the same as mode 1 except that the timer will
start counting down immediately without waiting for
the temperature to reach setpoint.
3.11.4 Opt.4 Mode 4, Time from Cold No
Switch Off
This is the same as mode 2 except that the timer will
start counting down without waiting for the controller
to reach setpoint.
Standby mode
Temperature
Setpoint
Reset Timing End
End flashes
Temperature
Setpoint
Reset Timing End
End flashes
Indefinite dwell
at setpoint
Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 23
3.11.5 Opt.5 Mode 5, Delayed Switch On
This mode applies a time delay before turning on the
heating (or cooling). When the timer is started, the
controller will always switch to standby mode and start
counting down. When the timer has timed out, the
controller will switch into automatic control, apply
heating (or cooling) and control indefinitely at the
setpoint.
3.11.6 To Program a Ramp-Dwell profile
A simple ramp-dwell profile can be programmed using
Sprr (setpoint rate limit) in combination with the
timer. To use this feature, first reveal Sprr and w.SP
(the working setpoint) using the method described in
“To Hide, Reveal and Promote” parameters. w.SP will
then appear in the HOME list.
Set Sprr to the required ramp rate. It is adjustable
in 1/10th of the least significant display units per
minute. That is if the display is configured 0 to
1000oC, setpoint rate limit can be adjusted between 0.1
and 999.9 oC per minute.
When setpoint rate limit has been enabled and the
timer is started, the working setpoint, wsp, will first
step to the measured temperature and then ramp at the
setpoint rate limit, sprr, to the target setpoint.
In modes 1 and 2 timing will start when the measured
temperature is within 1oC of the target setpoint. In
modes 3 and 4 it will start when wsp is within 1oC of
the target setpoint.
Indefinite dwell
at setpoint
Temperature
Setpoint
Reset Timing Reset
24 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07
3.12 To Start And Reset The Timer
There are two methods:
Method 1.
This is the simplest method to control the timer.
• Press until you reach the SP list
• Press until you reach the tMr parameter
(time remaining).
TIP: Promote tmr to the HOME list for quick access,
as described in ‘To Hide, Revealing and Promote
Parameters.
As soon as a value is entered into tmr timing will
commence. tmr will count down towards zero.
During the timing period tmr can be increased or
decreased according to the demands of the process.
Setting the value to zero will end the timing period.
When tmr reaches zero. ‘end’ will flash in the main
display. The timer will remain indefinitely in this state
until a new value is entered, when the timer will
restart.
To reset the timer, press and together.
‘end’ will stop flashing .
To restart the timer, enter a new value into tmr.
1234
Tmr
Press or to enter
the required timing period in
minutes. (0 to 9999).
Press to return to the HOME display
Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 25
Method 2.
Use this method if you want to set a fixed time and use
the stat parameter to start and stop the timer.
The stat parameter can also be switched between
Off and run by configuring the logic I/O as a
Off/run contact closure input.
Open the external contact to select run. This is an
edge triggered action. Close the contact to select Off.
Off is forced whenever the contact is closed.
1234
dwel
run
stat
sp Press to reach the SP List heading.
Press until you reach dwel
Dwell time
Press or to enter a
timing period in minutes
(0-9999).
Timer Status
To start the timer, press or to
select run.
The dwell time will be loaded into tmr
and timing will commence.
To reset the timer, select Off.
The time remaining tmr will be set to
0.
Press and together to return to the HOME display.
26 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07
4. Configuring the Controller
Select configuration level to change: •The type of control •The display units •The input sensor type• The
scaling of linear inputs •The alarm configuration • The passwords.
4.1 To select configuration level
Press to step across the configuration list headings.
Having selected a list heading, press to select a
parameter within a particular list.
Press and to change the setting.
inSt iP AL AA
Exit pASS 1A
To Instrument Configuration Tables
Press
Press
Press
Goto conF Press or to select conf
ACCS Press to reach the Access List Heading.
codE PASS
Press or to enter the
password. The factory default is 1.
PASS will be displayed when the
correct password has been entered.
ConF PASS
Press or to enter the
configuration level password. The
factory default is 2. PASS will be
displayed when the correct password
has been entered.
Press to enter configuration level.
Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 27
4.1.1 Instrument Configuration
inst Instr Conf Options Description
*C Centigrade
*F Fahrenheit
*K Kelvin
unit Display units
nonE None
nnnn None
nnn.n One
dEC.P Decimal
places in
display nn.nn Two
Pid PID Control
On.OF On/off Control
CtrL Control type
AL Convert to an
alarm unit
rEv Reverse
(normal action
for
temperature
control)
Act Control
action
dir Direct (output
decreases as
PV falls below
SP)
Inst Instr Conf Options Description
HoLd
In Auto holds
manual reset
value
Pd.tr Manual
reset
tracking (PD
control) trAc
In Auto tracks
output for
bumpless A/M
transfer
28 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07
4.1.2 Input Configuration
iP Sensor
Input
Options Meaning
j.tc J thermocouple
k.tc K thermocouple
L.tc L thermocouple
r.tc R thermocouple
b.tc B thermocouple
n.tc N thermocouple
t.tc T thermocouple
S.tc S thermocouple
PL 2 Platinell II
rtd 100Ω PRT
mV Linear mV
inPt Input
type
C.tc Custom input
C=default
Auto Automatic
0*C 0°C external ref.
45*C 45°C external ref.
CJC
(TC
only)
Cold
junction
compen
sation
50*C 50°C external ref.
Linear input scaling (Range -12 to +80mV)
InP.L mV input
low
InP.H mV input
high
VaL.L Displayed
value low
VAL.H Displayed
value high
OFF Off (Linear
inputs only)
Auto 1.5KΩ
Hi 5KΩ
ImP Sensor
break
input
impedance
HiHi 15KΩ,
Inp.L Inp.H
VAL.H
VAL.L
mV
Displayed value
Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 29
4.1.3 Alarm Configuration
The AL list configures the three internal ‘soft’ alarms
and causes the appropriate alarm message to be flashed
in the HOME display.
At this stage the alarm is indication only (known as a
‘soft alarm’). To make the alarms operate the relay or
logic outputs, follow the instructions under “Relay and
Logic input/output Configuration.
AL Alarm Type Meaning
OFF The alarm is
disabled
fsL Full Scale Low
alarm
fsH Full Scale High
alarm
dEv Deviation band
alarm
dHi Deviation high
alarm
AL 1 Alarm 1
dLo Deviation low
alarm
AL Alarm Type Meaning
no Non-latching
YES Latched with
automatic*
resetting.
Ltch Alarm
latching
mAn Latched with
manual**
resetting.
bLoc Alarm No No blocking
blocking YES Blocked until
first good
The above sequence is repeated for:
AL 2 (Alarm 2) and AL 3 (Alarm 3)
diS Limited by
display range
Sp.Li Alarm
setpoint
limits Con Limited by
setpoint limits
* Automatic resetting means that, once the alarm has
been acknowledged, it will automatically clear when it
is no longer true.
** Manual resetting means that the alarm must first
clear before it can be reset.
30 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07
4.1.4 Relay and Logic input/output
Configuration
The logic I/O can be configured as an output or a
contact closure input for alarm acknowledge, keylock,
or timer run/reset.
Aa Relay
1a Logic I/O
Options Meaning
id Identity of rELy Relay
output LOG Logic
diG Digital (alarm)
output
HEAt Heating output
Function
COOL Cooling output
SSr.1 PDSIO mode 1
Ac.AL Alarm
Acknowledge
Loc.b Keylock digital
input
Func
These
functions
only
appear for
the logic
I/O rres Run/reset timer
noch No change
CLr Clear all alarms
1FSL Alarm 1 (Note 1)
diG.F Digital
output
functions
See ‘To 2FSH Alarm 2 (Note 1)
Aa Relay
1a Logic I/O
Options Meaning
3FSL Alarm 3 (Note 1)
NW * New alarm
SBR* Sensor break
LBR* Loop break
LDF* Load fail alarm
MAn * Man mode active
EnD* End of timing
TMG* Timer running
Operate
the Relay
or Logic
Output
from an
Alarm or
Digital
Function
section
4.1.5”
TMG* Timer counting
down
(Note 2) TMG3* Timer running
TMG4* Timer counting
down
SenS Sense of nor Normal (Note 3)
the
output
Inv Inverted (Note 3)
* Alarms always non-latching. Process alarms 1, 2
and 3 are configurable as alarm latching or nonlatching,
see the ‘AL’ List
Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 31
Note 1: The last three letters will correspond to the
alarm type configured in the AL list. If the alarm is
disabled, AL1 or AL2 or AL3 will be shown.
Note 2: If tmg.3 and tmG.4 are selected, they
illuminate the logic or relay output beacons, OP1 and
OP2, without operating the actual output. They are
used to indicate that timing is in progress while leaving
the actual outputs to be operated by the other digital
functions such as the END condition which can be
used to operate an external klaxen.
Note 3: Normal is the usual setting for heating or
cooling.
Inverted is the normal setting for alarms - de-energise
in alarm.
4.1.5 To Operate the Relay or Logic output
from an alarm or digital function.
1. Press until you reach Func
2. Press or to select Func = diG
3. Press to reach diG.F
4. Press or to select a alarm or digital
function
5. Leave for 2 seconds. The display returns to
diG.F and connects the selected alarm or digital
function to the relay or logic output.
6. Press or again. Two decimal points will
appear in the function that has been added to the
output.
4.1.6 Multiple Alarms on one Output
Any number of alarms or digital functions can be
added to the relay or logic output by repeating steps 4,
5 and 6 above. Two decimal points will appear in
those functions that has been added to the output.
4.1.7 To Clear Alarms from an Output
1. Press until to reach diG.F
2. Press or to select CLr
3. Leave for 2 seconds. The display returns to
diG.F which disconnects all alarms from the
relay.
32 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07
4.1.8 Passwords
PASS Passwords Range Default
ACC.P Full and Edit
level password
0-9999 1
CnF.P Configuration
level password
0-9999 2
CAL.P User
calibration
password
0-9999 3
4.1.9 To leave Configuration level
Press to reach the ‘exit’ display
Press or to select ‘YES’ After 2 secs the display
will blink and return to the HOME display in Operator level.
Exit YES
Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 33
4.1.10 Diagnostic Alarms
In addition to the normal process alarms, the following
diagnostics alarm messages are provided.
Message Meaning and (Action)
EE.Er Electrically Erasable Memory Error:
A parameter value has been corrupted.
Contact Eurotherm Controls.
HW.Er Hardware error:
(Return for repair)
LLLL Low display range exceeded:
(Check input signal)
HHHH High display range exceeded:
(Check input signal)
Err1 Error 1: ROM self-test fail.
(Return for repair)
Err2 Error 2: RAM self-test fail.
(Return for repair)
Message Meaning and (Action)
Err3 Error 3: Watchdog fail.
(Return for repair)
Err4 Error 4: Keyboard failure. Stuck
button, or a button was pressed during
power up.
Err5 Error 5: Input circuit failure.
(Return for repair)
Pwr.F Power failure. The line voltage is too
low.
TU.Er Tune Error. Appears if auto-tuning
exceeds 2 hours.
34 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07
4.2 User Calibration
Your controller has been calibrated for life against
known reference sources. User calibration allows you
to apply offsets to compensate for sensor and other
system errors. The parameter OFS in the IP list
applies a fixed offset over the whole display range.
You may also apply a 2-point calibration as follows:
• Press until you reach the iP list
• Press until you reach the CAL.P parameter
• Press or to enter the password. The
factory default is 3. PASS will be displayed
when the correct has been entered.
• Press to reach the CAL parameter
• Press or , to select User (FAct will
restore the factory calibration)
• Press to select in turn the four parameters
shown in the graph below. Use or to set
the desired calibration points and the offsets to be
applied at each point. The iP list on section 3.9
describes each of the parameters.
Factory
calibration
Displayed Value
Factory calibration
Pnt.H
OFS.H
OFS.L
Pnt.L
User calibration
Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 35
4.3 Automatic Tuning
In PID control, the output from the controller is the
sum of three terms: Proportional, Integral and
Derivative. These three terms deliver just the right
amount of power to hold the temperature at setpoint
without oscillation. For stable control, the PID values
must be ‘tuned’ to the characteristics of the process
being controlled. In the 2132 and 2116 this is done
automatically using advanced tuning techniques.
Automatic tuning is performed by switching the output
of the controller On and Off to induce an oscillation in
the measured temperature. From the amplitude and
period of the oscillation, the PID values, shown in the
table below, are calculated.
Parameter Display Meaning or Function
Proportional
band
Pb The bandwidth in °C or °f
over which the output
power is proportioned
between minimum and
maximum.
Integral time ti Determines the time taken
by the controller to
remove steady-state error
signals.
Parameter Display Meaning or Function
Derivative
time
td Determines how strongly
the controller will react to
the rate-of-change of
temperature.
Low cutback Lcb The number of °C or °f
below setpoint at which
the controller will cutback
the output power to
prevent overshoot on heat
up.
High
Cutback
Hcb The number of °C or °f
above setpoint at which
the controller will increase
the output power to
prevent undershoot on
cool down.
Relative cool
gain
rEL.C Only present if cooling has
been configured. Sets the
cooling proportional band
by dividing the Pb value by
the rEL.C value.
36 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07
If the process cannot tolerate 100% heating or cooling
during tuning, the power can be restricted by the
heating and cooling limits in the Output list. However,
the measured value must oscillate to some degree for
the tuner to determine values.
Tuning is normally performed only once during the
initial commissioning of the process. However, if the
process under control subsequently becomes unstable
(because its characteristics have changed), you can retune
again at any time.
It is best to tune starting with the process at ambient
temperature. This allows the tuner to calculate more
accurately.
4.3.1 Heating & Cooling Output Cycle Times
Before commencing a tuning cycle, set the values of
CYC.H (heating output cycle time) and CYC.C
(cooling output cycle time) in the oP (output) list.
For a logic heating output (switching a SSR), set
CYC.H to 1.0 sec.
For a relay output, set CYC.H to 20.0 sec.
For a logic cooling output used to control a solenoid
valve, set CYC.C to 5.0 sec.
4.3.2 Tuning Procedure
1. Set the setpoint to the value at which you will
normally operate the process.
2. In the ‘Atun’ list, select ‘tunE’ and set it to
‘on’
3. Press the Page and Scroll buttons together to
return to the HOME display. The display will
flash ‘tunE’ to indicate that tuning is in progress.
4. The controller will induce an oscillation in the
temperature by turning the heating on and then
off.
5. After two cycles of oscillation the tuning will be
completed and the tuner will switch itself off.
6. The controller will then calculate the tuning
parameters and resume normal control action.
If you want ‘Proportional only’ or ‘P+D’ or ‘P+I’
control, you should set the ‘ti’ or ‘td’ parameters to
OFF before commencing the tuning cycle. The tuner
will leave them off and will not calculate a value for
them.
Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 37
4.3.3 Typical automatic tuning cycle
4.3.4 Calculation of the cutback values
When low cutback or high cutback is set to ‘AuTo’
their values will be fixed at three times the
proportional band, and will not be altered during
automatic tuning. If set to any other value, they will
be calculated as part of the tuning process.
4.4 Manual Tuning
If for any reason automatic tuning gives unsatisfactory
results, you can manually tune the controller.
Proceed as follows:
With the process at its normal running temperature:
1. Set the Integral Time ‘ti’ and Derivative Time
‘td’ to OFF.
2. Set High Cutback ‘Hcb’ and Low Cutback
‘Lcb’, to ‘Auto’
3. Ignore the fact that the temperature may not settle
precisely at the setpoint
4. Reduce the proportional band ‘Pb’ until the
temperature just starts to oscillate. If the
temperature is already oscillating, increase the
proportional band until it just stops oscillating.
Allow enough time between each adjustment for
the temperature to stabilise. Make a note of the
proportional band value ‘B’ and the period of
oscillation ‘T’.
5. Set the PID parameter values according to the
formula below:
Type of
control
Proportional
band ‘Pb’
Integral
time
‘ti’
Derivative
time ‘td’
Proportional
only
2xB OFF OFF
P + I 2.2xB 0.8xT OFF
P + I + D 1.7xB 0.5xT 0.12xT
Temperature
Time
38 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07
4.4.1 Setting the cutback values
The above procedure sets up the parameters for
optimum steady state control. If unacceptable levels of
overshoot or undershoot occur during start-up or for
large step changes in temperature, then manually set
the cutback parameters Lcb and Hcb.
Proceed as follows:
1. Set the low and high cutback settings to 3 x the
proportional band (that is to say, Lcb = Hcb =
3 x PB).
2. Note the level of overshoot or undershoot that
occurs for large temperature changes (see the
diagrams below).
In example (a) increase Lcb by the overshoot value.
In example (b) reduce Lcb by the undershoot value.
Example (a)
Example (b)
When the temperature approaches the setpoint from
above, you can set Hcb in a similar manner.
4.4.2 Manual reset
When ti = OFF manual reset (rES) appears in the
PiD List. This parameter sets the output power
when the error signal is zero. It can be manually
adjusted to remove steady state error - the function
normally performed by the Integral term.
Temperature
Time
Overshoot
Temperature
Time
Undershoot
Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 39
5. Ordering Code
The controller is supplied configured according to the ordering code shown below.
Model number Function Supply voltage Manual Output 1 (Logic) Output 2 (Relay)
Function
CC PID controller
NF On/Off
controller
TC PID controller
+ timer
TN On/Off
controller +
timer
Supply voltage
VH 85-264Vac
VL 20 -29Vdc or
ac
Manual
XXX None
ENG English
FRA French
GER German
NED Dutch
SPA Spanish
SWE Swedish
ITA Italian
Output 2: Relay
XX Disabled
RH Heating
RC Cooling
FH High alarm 2
FL Low alarm 2
AL High alarm 2 & low
alarm 3
DB Dev band alarm 2
DL Dev. low alarm 2
DH Dev. high alarm 2
NW New alarm
Output 1: Logic
XX Disabled
Logic output
LH Heating
LC Cooling
M1 PDSIO mode 1
FH High alarm 1
FL Low alarm 1
DB Dev band alarm 1
DL Dev. low alarm 1
DH Dev. high alarm 1
NW New alarm
Logic input
AC Alarm ack/reset
KL Keylock
TM Timer Run/Reset
Model Number
2132 1/16 DIN
2116 1/8 DIN
40 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07
Sensor input Setpoint min Setpoint max Units Ext relay module Input adaptor
External relay module
XX Not fitted
R7 Fitted
(Operated by
the logic
output)
Units
C °C
F ° F
K Kelvin
X Linear I/P
Input Adaptor
XX None
V1 0-10Vdc
A1 0-20mA sense
resistor (2.49Ω.
0.1%)
Sensor input Display range and
Setpoint min & max limits
Thermocouples
°C ° F
J Type J -210 to
1200
-340 to
2192
K Type K -200 to
1372
-325 to
2500
T Type T -200 to 400 -325 to
750
L Type L -200 to 900 -325 to
1650
N Type N -200 to
1300
-325 to
2370
R Type R -50 to 1768 58 to 3200
S Type S -50 to 1768 -58 to 3200
B Type B 0 to 1820 32 to 3308
P Platinell
II
0 to 1369 32 to 2496
Resistance thermometer
Z Pt100 -200 to 850 -325 to
1562
Custom downloaded inputs Range OC Range OF
C Type C -W5%Re/W26%Re (default
custom sensor)
0 to 2319 32 to 4200
D Type D - W3%Re/W25%Re 0 to 2399 32 to 4350
E E thermocouple -200 to 999 -325 to 1830
1 Ni/Ni18%Mo 0 to 1399 32 to 2550
2 Pt20%Rh/Pt40%Rh 0 to 1870 32 to 3398
3 W/W26%Re (Engelhard) 0 to 2000 32 to 3632
4 W/W26%Re (Hoskins) 0 to 2010 32 to 3650
5 W5%Re/W26%Re (Engelhard) 10 to 2300 50 to 4172
6 W5%Re/W26%Re(Bucose) 0 to 2000 32 to 3632
7 Pt10%Rh/Pt40%/Rh 200 to 1800 392 to 3272
8 Exegen K80 I.R. Pyrometer -45 to 650 -49 to 1202
Process inputs (linear) Scaleable -999 to 9999
M -9.99 to +80mV
Y 0 to 20mA
A 4 to 20mA
V 0 to 10Vdc (input adapter required)
Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 41
6. Technical Specification
Panel sealing IP65 (EN 60529), or 4X (NEMA 250)
Operating ambient 0 to 55oC. Ensure that the enclosure is adequately ventilated. 5 to 95%RH, non condensing
Storage temperature -30oC to +75oC. (Protect from humidity and dust)
Atmosphere Not suitable for use above 2000m or in explosive or corrosive atmospheres
Power supply High voltage unit: 100 to 240Vac -15%, +10%, 48-62Hz, 5Watts maximum consumption
Low voltage unit: 24Vdc/ac +/- 20%. DC to 62Hz, 5Watts maximum consumption
Relay rating (isolated) Maximum: 264Vac, 2A resistive. Minimum: 12Vdc, 100mA
Mechanical life > 107 operations. Electrical life at 1A, 240vac resistive load > 5 x106 operations
Wire sizes Use a minimum of 0.5mm2 or 16awg wire for plant connections.
Over current protection Use independent 2A fuses for the supply and relay output. Suitable fuses are EN60127 (type T)
Logic I/O rating 9V at 12mA, non-isolated from sensor input
Electrical safety Meets EN 61010 (Voltage transients on the power supply must not exceed 2.5kV). Pollution
degree 2.
Isolation: All isolated inputs and outputs have reinforced insulation to protect against electric shock. (See live
sensor note)
Cold Junction
Compensation
>30 to 1 rejection of ambient temperature changes in automatic mode. Uses INSTANT
ACCURACY TM sensing technology to reduce warm up drift and respond quickly to ambient
temperature changes.
Installation Category Category II or CAT II
42 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07
7. Safety and EMC Information
This controller is intended for industrial temperature
and process control applications when it will meet the
requirements of the European Directives on Safety and
EMC. Use in other applications, or failure to observe
the installation instructions of this handbook may
impair safety or EMC. The installer must ensure the
safety and EMC of any particular installation.
Safety
This controller complies with the European Low
Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC by the application of the
safety standard EN 61010.
Electromagnetic compatibility
It conforms with the essential protection requirements
of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC, by the application
of a Technical Construction file. It satisfies the
general requirements of the industrial environment
defined in EN 61326. For more information on
product compliance refer to the Technical
Construction File.
GENERAL
The information contained in these instructions is
subject to change without notice. While every effort
has been made to ensure the accuracy of the
information, Eurotherm shall not be held liable for
errors contained herein.
Unpacking and storage
The packaging should contain an instrument mounted
in its sleeve, two mounting brackets for panel
installation and an Installation & Operating guide.
Certain ranges are supplied with an input adapter.
If on receipt, the packaging or the instrument is
damaged, do not install the product but contact your
supplier. If the instrument is to be stored before use,
protect from humidity and dust in an ambient
temperature range of -30oC to +75oC.
SERVICE AND REPAIR
This controller has no user serviceable parts. Contact
your supplier for repair.
Caution: Charged capacitors
Before removing the controller from its sleeve, switch
off the supply and wait at least two minutes to allow
capacitors to discharge. Failure to observe this
Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 43
precaution may damage the indicator or cause some
discomfort to the user.
Electrostatic discharge precautions
When the controller is removed from its sleeve, it is
vulnerable to damage by electrostatic discharge from
someone handling the controller. To avoid this, before
handling the unplugged controller discharge yourself
to ground.
Cleaning
Do not use water or water based products to clean
labels or they will become illegible. Isopropyl alcohol
may be used to clean labels. A mild soap solution may
be used to clean other exterior surfaces of the product.
Safety Symbols
The following safety symbols are used on the
controller:
Caution. Refer to the
! accompanying documents
Personnel
Installation must only be carried out by qualified
personnel in accordance with instructions given in this
handbook.
Enclosure of live parts
The controller must be installed in an enclosure to
prevent hands or metal tools touching parts that may
be electrically live.
Caution: Live sensors
The logic input/output is electrically connected to the
sensor input (e.g. thermocouple). In some installations
the temperature sensor may become live. The
controller is designed to operate under these
conditions, but you must ensure that this will not
damage other equipment connected to the logic
input/output and that service personnel do not touch
this connection while it is live. With a live sensor, all
cables, connectors and switches for connecting the
sensor and non-isolated inputs and outputs must be
mains rated for use in 240V ac CATII.
Wiring
Wire the controller in accordance with the wiring data
given in these instructions. Take particular care not to
connect AC supplies to the low voltage sensor input or
other low level inputs or outputs. Only use copper
conductors for connections, (except thermocouple).
Ensure that the installation complies with local wiring
regulations. In the UK use the latest version of the
44 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07
IEE wiring regulations (BS7671) and in USA use NEC
Class 1 wiring methods.
Power Isolation
The installation must include a power isolating switch
or circuit breaker. This device should be in close
proximity to the controller, within easy reach of the
operator and marked as the disconnecting device for
the instrument.
Voltage rating
The maximum continuous voltage applied between
any of the following terminals must not exceed
240Vac:
• relay output to logic, dc or sensor connections;
• any connection to ground.
The controller must not be wired to a three phase
supply with an unearthed star connection. Under fault
conditions such a supply could rise above 240Vac with
respect to ground and the product would not be safe
Conductive pollution
Electrically conductive pollution must be excluded
from the cabinet in which the controller is mounted.
For example, carbon dust is a form of electrically
conductive pollution. To secure a suitable atmosphere
in conditions of conductive pollution, fit an air filter to
the air intake of the cabinet. Where condensation is
likely, for example at low temperatures, include a
thermostatically controlled heater in the cabinet.
This product has been designed to conform to
BSEN61010 installation category II, pollution degree 2.
These are defined as follows:-
Installation Category II (CAT II)
The rated impulse voltage for equipment on nominal
230V supply is 2500V.
Pollution Degree 2
Normally only non conductive pollution occurs.
Occasionally, however, a temporary conductivity caused
by condensation shall be expected.
Over-temperature protection
When designing any control system it is essential to
consider what will happen if any part of the system
should fail. In temperature control applications the
primary danger is that the heating will remain
constantly on. This could damage the product, the
machinery being controlled, or even cause a fire.
Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07 45
Reasons why the heating might remain constantly on
include:
• the temperature sensor becoming detached from
the process
• thermocouple wiring becoming short circuit;
• the controller failing with its heating output
constantly on
• an external valve or contactor sticking in the
heating condition
• The controller setpoint too high
Where damage or injury is possible, we recommend
fitting a separate over-temperature protection unit,
with an independent temperature sensor, which will
isolate the heating circuit.
Please note that the alarm relays within the controller
will not give protection under all failure conditions.
Installation requirements for EMC
• For general guidance refer to Eurotherm Controls
EMC Installation Guide, HA025464.
• It may be necessary to fit a filter across the relay
output to suppress conducted emissions. The filter
requirements will depend on the type of load. For
typical applications we recommend Schaffner
FN321 or FN612.
• If the unit is used in table top equipment which is
plugged into a standard power socket, then it is
likely that compliance to the commercial and light
industrial emissions standard is required. In this
case to meet the conducted emissions requirement,
a suitable mains filter should be installed. We
recommend Schaffner types FN321 and FN612.
Routing of wires
To minimise the pick-up of electrical noise, the sensor
input wiring should be routed away from high-current
power cables. Where this is impractical, shielded
cables should be used for the signal wiring. Where
signal wiring is carrying (or could carry, under fault
conditions) hazardous voltages*, double insulation
should be used.
* A full definition of ‘Hazardous’ voltages appears
under ‘Hazardous Live’ in BS EN61010. Briefly,
under normal operating conditions Hazardous voltage
levels are defined as >30V RMS (42.2V peak) or
>60V dc.
46 Part Number HA026270 Issue 5.0 Aug 07
8. RoHS Certificate
Product group 2100
Table listing restricted substances
Chinese
产
2100 铅镉铬溴联苯溴苯醚
线组X O X O O O
属O O O O O O
显X O O O O O
块X O X O O O
O
X
English
Product
2100 Pb Hg Cd Cr(VI) PBB PBDE
PCBA X O X O O O
Enclosure O O O O O O
Display X O O O O O
Modules X O X O O O
O
X
Approval
Name: Position: Signature: Date:
Martin Greenhalgh Quality Manager
IA029470U450 (CN23172) Issue 1 Feb 07
Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous
materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006.
该质该质SJ/T11363-2006
标规
Toxic and hazardous substances and elements
Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for
this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006.
Restricted Materials Table
Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)
览
质
该质该质SJ/T11363-2006
标规
2116/2132
Régulateurs de Température PID
Manuel Utilisateur
FRA
N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 1
2132 et 2116 Régulateurs de Température PID
Merci d'avoir choisi le régulateur de température 2132 ou 2116. Disponibles en formats de panneau 1/32 et 1/16
DIN, ils sont conçus pour une régulation précise et stable des fours, compresseurs frigorifiques, stérilisateurs et
autres procédés de chauffage et de refroidissement. Deux sorties sont configurables pour le chauffage, le
refroidissement et les alarmes.
Ce régulateur est livré configuré selon le code de commande de la paragraphe 5. Regarder sur les étiquettes
latérales pour déterminer la configuration du régulateur
1 Dimensions et Installation
Modèle 2132
Modèle 2116
48mm
45 x 45 mm
-0.0, + 0.6
103mm
48mm
Découpe du
24mm panneau
48mm 103mm 45mm -0.0, +0.6
Clips de verrouillage Clips de fixation
22mm -0.0, +0.3
Découpe du
panneau
2 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07
1.1 Installation du régulateur
Il est conseillé de lire les informations relatives à la sécurité, paragraphe 7, avant de continuer.
1. Préparer la découpe du panneau à la taille indiquée.
2. Insérer le régulateur par la découpe du panneau.
3. Mettre en place les clips de fixation. Immobiliser le régulateur en le tenant horizontal et en poussant les deux
clips de fixation vers l'avant.
4. Retirer le film de protection de la face avant.
1.2 Retrait du régulateur
Il est possible de retirer le régulateur de son manchon en tirant les clips de verrouillage vers l'extérieur et en le
sortant du manchon. Lorsqu'on replace le régulateur dans son manchon, il faut veiller à ce que les clips de
verrouillage s'encliquètent afin que l'étanchéité IP65 soit assurée.
1.3 Espace minimal recommandé entre régulateurs
10mm 38mm
(Cette figure n'est pas à l'échelle)
N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 3
2 Branchements
2.1 Section des fils
Les bornes à vis acceptent des fils de section 0,5 à 1,5
mm². Des caches articulés empêchent tout contact
accidental avec les fils sous tension. Les vis des
bornes arrière doivent être serrées à 0,4 Nm
Caractéristiques nominales des sorties
Sortie logique : 9 Vdc, 12 mA (pas isolée de l'entrée capteur).
Utilisée pour : le chauffage, le refroidissement ou les alarmes.
Sortie relais : 2 A, 264 V ac résistive.
Utilisée pour : le chauffage, le refroidissement ou les alarmes.
Entrée de fermeture des contacts (remplace la sortie logique).
Utilisée pour : l'acquittement des alarmes ou le
démarrage et la réinitialisation du timer.
Modèle 2116
OU
+
-
Ligne
Neutre
Sortie 2 Relais
T/C Pt100 mA
Entrées capteurs
L
N
A
AB
V+
V-
1A
1B
2,49Ω
85-264Vac
50/60Hz
1B 1A
Pt100
T/C Sortie 2
Relais
Neutre
Ligne
E/S Logiques
Modèle 2132
Module relais
externe (actionné
par la sortie
logique)
OU
Contacteur
statique
(SSR)
2,49Ω
Entrées capteurs
V- V+ AB A N L
- +
mA
85-264Vac 50/60Hz
1B 1A
Contacteur
statique
(SSR)
- +
E/S Logiques
+
-
20-29 Vac/dc
Alimentation
24 basse tension
24
20-29 Vac/dc
Alimentation
basse tension
24 24
4 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07
2.2 Schéma de Câblage Type
Conditions de sécurité pour les équipements connectés en permanence :
• Un interrupteur ou disjoncteur sera inclus dans l'installation
• Il devra être situé à proximité de l'équipement et à portée de l'opérateur.
• Il sera clairement identifié comme dispositif de sectionnement de l'équipement
* En cas de commutation
de charges conductrices
comme les contacteurs ou
les électrovannes,
brancher un RC de 22
nF/100 Ω fourni entre les
bornes AA & AB, ce qui
prolonge la durée de vie
des contacts et diminue les
interférences
ATTENTION
Le RC laisse passer 0,6
mA à 110 V et 1,2 mA à
230 Vac, ce qui peut être
suffisant pour maintenir
les charges d'impédance
élevée. Ne pas utiliser
dans ces installations.
Fusible de
la sortie
relais
2A type T
Neutre
Fusible du
régulateuer
2A type T
Fusible pour le chauffage
Chauffage
Thermocouple
Contacteur
statique
(par exemple
(e.g. TE10)
Circuit RC*
Ligne
Modèle 2132
V+ A
1B
V-
1A
A L N
Relais de refroidissement
ou d'alarme
Interrupteur
N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 5
3 Utilisation
Mettre le régulateur sous tension. Il effectue une suite
de tests automatiques pendant environ 3 secondes puis
affiche ce qui est représenté ci-dessous. Cet affichage
est appelé PAGE DE REPOS.
OP1 s'allume lorsque la sortie logique est sur ON
(chauffage normalement).
OP2 s'allume lorsque la sortie relais est sur ON
(refroidissement ou alarme normalement).
Si
OP1 ou
OP2 ou les deux est(sont)
configuré(es) comme sortie(s) d'alarme (à la place du
chauffage et du refroidissement), elle(s) clignote(nt) si
une alarme ‘non acquittée’ se produit et s'allume(nt) à
feu fixe lorsque l'alarme est acquittée mais reste vraie.
3.1 Reglage de la temperature
souhaitee (consigne)
Enfoncer puis relâcher rapidement la touche ou
. La consigne est affichée pendant 2 secondes.
20 Sortie 1
Sortie 2
Température
mesurée
(ou valeur de
régulation ‘PV’)
OP1
OP2
Maintenir enfoncée pour augmenter la consigne
Maintenir enfoncée pour diminuer la consigne
60 OP1
OP2
Température
souhaitée
(consigne)
Température
mesurée
20 OP1
OP2
6 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07
3.2 Visualisation des unites affichees
Enfoncer puis relâcher rapidement la touche ou
. Les unités affichées clignotent pendant 0,5 sec.
Si l'on est "perdu", l'appui simultané sur et
provoque le retour systématique à la PAGE DE
REPOS.
Si aucune touche n'est enfoncée pendant 45 secondes,
l'affichage revient toujours à la PAGE DE REPOS.
3.3 Acquittement d'une alarme
nouvelle
Appuyer simultanément sur et . Cette
opération réinitialise également les alarmes
mémorisées qui ne sont plus vraies.
3.4 Messages d'alarme
Si une alarme se produit, un message clignote sur
l'affichage. Ce message apparaît en alternance avec la
température mesurée, comme le montre la figure cidessous:
Ce tableau montre tous les messages possibles.
Messages possibles
-fsH Alarme - pleine échelle haute
-FSL Alarme - pleine échelle basse
-deV Alarme - écart
-dHi Alarme - écart haut
-dLo Alarme - écart bas
Sbr Rupture capteur
Lbr Rupture boucle
Ldf Défaut de charge
End Fin de timing
Le numéro de l'alarme est indiqué à la place du tiret :
alarme 1, 2 ou 3.
Alarme
1 pleine
échelle
basse
Température
mesurée 1fsL
20
Unités affichées
*C Centigrade
*F Fahrenheit
*K Kelvin
Entrées linéaires - aucune
unité n'est affichée
0,5 sec
oC
20
ou
N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 7
3.5 Visualisation de la Puissance de
Sortie
On peut effectuer cette opération si l'on souhaite voir
la quantité d'énergie de chauffage ou de
refroidissement demandée par le régulateur. N.B. : il
ne s'agit pas d'une mesure de la puissance effective.
ATTENTION
En mode manuel attente (standby) (voir Utilisation du
timer), l'opérateur peut régler la puissance de sortie, ce
qui provoquera une chauffe ou un refroidissement
permanent. Pour éviter ceci, mettre le paramètre OP en
lecture seulement (Voir Paramètres cachés, visibles
personnalisés)
Page de repos
20.0
Appuyer deux fois rapidement
OP 100.0
*C
Appuyer
Le régulateur
demande 100 % de
chauffage
Appuyer sur ou pour
visualiser la valeur
8 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07
3.6 Selection ou Modification d'autres
Parametres
Les paramètres sont des valeurs du régulateur que l'on
peut modifier pour les adapter au procédé. Ils se
trouvent sous les en-têtes de listes.
Appuyer sur la touche pour faire défiler les entêtes
de listes, comme le montre la figure ci-dessous.
Aller à la paragraphe 3.8 pour voir l'ensemble des entêtes
de listes.
Ces listes servent à :
• modifier les consignes d'alarme
• adapter le régulateur au procédé
• sélectionner manuellement les valeurs PID
• modifier les limites de consignes et accéder au
timer intégré
• modifier les limites des entrées et des sorties
Maintenir la touche
enfoncée pour sélectionner
d'autres en-têtes de listes (retour
à la PAGE DE REPOS après le
dernier en-tête). La boucle est
continue.
Page de repos
20.0 aL Atun
X2
N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 9
3.7 Reglage des consignes d'alarme
(niveaux de declenchement)
Il existe trois consignes d'alarme. Les consignes d'alarme
se trouvent dans la liste AL. Si une alarme a été
désactivée, elle n'apparaît pas dans cette liste.
Appuyer deux fois sur pour choisir la liste AL.
N.B. : les autres paramètres énumérés paragraphe 3.8
sont accessibles et modifiables de la même manière
que dans cet exemple
0,5 sec
1er appui
2ème appui
*C
20
2 sec
Liste suivante
L'appui sur ou provoque l'affichage de List
pour indiquer qu'il s'agit d'un en-tête de liste.
LiSt
AL
0
1---
-FSL = Alarme basse
-FSH = Alarme haute
-dEV = Ecart
-dHi = Ecart hau
-dHL = Ecart bas
- = numéro d'alarme
0
2---
0
3---
* Appuyer sur ou
pour modifier la consigne
Alarme 1
*
Alarme 2
*
Alarme 3
*
Appuyer simultanément sur et pour revenir à
la PAGE DE REPOS.
Appuyer
10 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07
3.8 Listes de Parametres
(2) La liste PID ou la liste On/Off est
affichée, selon la configuration du
Les cases grisées sont normalement cachées lorsque l'appareil sort régulateur.
d'usine.
Pour les faire apparaître, cf. ‘’Paramètres cachés, visibles et
personnalisés”, paragraphe 3.10
HC.db
Hys.C
HYS.H
Ont.C
Ont.H
OP.Hi
OP.Lo
CJCO
SPrr
SP H
SP L
AdC
Lb t
diSP HY
m A
w.SP
Page de
repos
Liste
Alarme
Liste Autoréglage
Liste
PID(2)
Liste
Consigne
Liste
Entrée
Liste
Sortie
Liste
On/Off (2)
Liste Accès
20.0 AL Atun Pid SP iP oP On.Of ACCS
1---(1)
2---(1)
3---(1)
OP tunE Pb
ti
td
rES
Lcb
Hcb
rEL.C
OFS.H
FiLt
mV
OFS
CAL.P
CAL
Pnt.L
OFS.L
Pnt.H
CYC.H
CYC.C
codE
Goto
Conf
tmr
dwel
StAt
tm.OP
X2
(1) A la place des tirets, les trois
dernières lettres dépendent du type
d'alarme. Cf. “Réglage des consignes
d'alarme paragraphe 3.7.
N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 11
3.8.1 Résumé
1. Appuyer sur pour passer d'un en-tête de liste à l'autre.
2. Appuyer sur pour se déplacer dans les paramètres d'une liste donnée. Une fois que la fin de la liste est
atteinte, on revient à l'en-tête de la liste.
3. Appuyer sur pour voir la valeur d'un paramètre sélectionné. Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour
diminuer la valeur.
4. Appuyer sur pour voir la valeur d'un paramètre sélectionné. Maintenir cette touche enfoncée pour
augmenter la valeur.
12 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07
3.9 Tableaux des Paramètres
Page de repos Plage réglable Réglage
par défaut
Réglage
client
Op Puissance de
sortie demandée
-100% = refroidissement maximal, 100,0% = chauffage
maximal.
w.SP Consigne de
travail
Apparaît uniquement lorsque la limite de la vitesse de
consigne est activée
Lecture
seule
Lecture
seule
m-A Sélection Auto Régulation automatique sélectionnée
Manuel/Auto mAn Attente manuelle sélectionnée
Auto
Std Standard - Montre la valeur de régulation avec la
consigne accessible par appui sur les touches
et .
OP Affiche la puissance - de sortie pour une
utilisation du régulateur en station manuelle
(Version 1.4 seulement)
NonE Affichage vide (seuls les messages d'alarme
clignotent)
PV Affiche uniquement la valeur de régulation
AL.SP Affiche uniquement la consigne de l'alarme 2
disp Options de la
page de repos
pv.aL Affiche la valeur de régulation avec la consigne de
l'alarme 2 accessible par les touches et
Std
N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 13
AL Liste Alarmes (cf. para
3.7)
Plage réglable Réglage
par défaut
Réglage
client
1--- Consigne de l'alarme 1 0
2--- Consigne de l'alarme 2 0
3--- Consigne de l'alarme 3
A la place des tirets, les trois
dernières lettres indiquent le type
de l'alarme
Entre les limites
haute et basse
des consignes 0
-FSL Pleine échelle basse
-FSH Pleine échelle haute
-dEv Ecart
-dHi Ecart haut
-dLo Ecart bas
HY Hystérésis d'alarme 1 à 9999 en unités affichées (cette valeur est
commune à toutes les alarmes). L'hystérésis sert à
empêcher la sortie d'alarme de ‘déclencher trop
souvent’ en fixant une différence entre les points
d’activation et de désactivation de l'alarme
1
Lb t Temps de rupture de
boucle
OFF à 9999 minutes OFF
14 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07
Atun Liste Auto-réglage (cf. paragraphe 4.3) Plage réglable Réglage
par défaut
Réglage
client
tunE Activation du réglage automatique OFF ou on Off
Adc Calcul de réinitialisation manuelle automatique
(régulation P+D)
man ou caLc man
PiD Liste PID (cf paragraphe 4.3) Plage réglable Réglage
par défaut
Réglage
client
Pb Bande proportionnelle 1 à 999.9 unités affichées 20
ti Temps d'intégrale OFF à 9999 secondes 360
td Temps de dérivée OFF à 9999 secondes 60
rES Valeur de l'intégrale
manuelle
(uniquement si ti= OFF)
-100 à 100.0 % 0.0
Lcb Cutback bas Auto à 999.9 unités affichées Auto
Hcb Cutback haut Auto à 999.9 unités affichées Auto
rEL.C Gain relatif de
refroidissement
0.01 à 10.00 1.00
N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 15
SP Liste Consignes (cf.
paragraphe 3.11)
Plage réglable Réglage par
défaut
Réglage
client
SP L Limite basse de la consigne -1999 à 999,9 Selon la
commande
SP H Limite haute de la consigne -1999 à 999,.9 Selon la
commande
sprr Limite de vitesse de la consigne 0FF à 999,9 unités affichées par
minute
Off
tm.OP Mode de fonctionnement du
timer
Opt.1 à Opt.5 OPt.1
tmr Temps restant 0 à 9999 minutes 0
dwEl Temps de palier 0FF à 9999 minutes OFF
StAt Etat du timer OFF ou on OFF
16 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07
iP Liste Entrées (cf. paragraphe
4.2)
Plage réglable Réglage par
défaut
Réglage
client
FiLt Constante de temps de filtrage
des entrées
0FF to 999.9 seconds 1.6
CJC* Température de soudure froide mesurée aux bornes arrière Lecture
seule
mV Entrée mV mesurée aux bornes arrière Lecture
seule
OFS Offset de la valeur de régulation -1999 à 9999 unités affichées 0
CAL.P Code d'accès de la calibration 0 à 9999 3
CAL Activation de la Calibration
utilisateur
FACt Réactive la calibration usine
USEr Réactive la calibration
utilisateur
FACt
Pnt.L Point bas de calibration -1999 à 9999 unités affichées 0
OFS.L Offset de la calibration du point
bas
-1999 à 9999 unités affichées 0
Pnt.H Point haut de calibration -1999 à 9999 unités affichées 100
OFS.H Offset de la calibration du point
haut
-1999 à 9999 unités affichées 0
N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 17
oP Liste Sorties Plage réglable Réglage
par défaut
Réglage
client
OP.Lo Limite basse de puissance -100 à 100,0 % 0
OP.Hi Limite haute de puissance -100 à 100,0 % 100.0
CYC.H Durée du cycle de chauffage 0,2 à 999,9 secondes
CYC.C Durée du cycle de refroidissement 0,2 à 999,9 secondes
1.0 Lgc
20 Rly
ont.H Durée minimale de chauffage
ont.C Durée minimale de refroidissement
Auto à 999,9 secondes (Auto =
50 msec)
Auto
onOF Liste Sorties On Off Plage réglable Réglage
par défaut
Réglage
client
hYS.H Hystérésis de chauffage 1 à 9999 unités affichées 1
hYS.C Hystérésis de refroidissement 1 à 9999 unités affichées 1
HC.db Bande morte de chauffage/refroidissement 0 à 9999 unités affichées 0
ACCS Liste Accès (Cf. paramètres “Cachés,
Visibles et Personnalisés” paragraphe 3.10)
Plage réglable Réglage
par défaut
Réglage
client
codE Code d'accès 0 à 9999 1
Goto Niveau d'accès sélectionné Oper, Ful, Edit, conf OPEr
Conf Code d'accès de configuration 0 à 9999 2
18 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07
3.10 Parametres Caches, Visibles et
Personnalises
Exemple:
HidE
2FSH
L'alarme haute 2 a été sélectionnée.
Lors de l'appui sur ou , au lieu
d'afficher la valeur du paramètre, sa
disponibilité au niveau Opérateur est
indiquée de la manière suivante :
ALtr Le paramètre est modifiable
HidE Le paramètre est caché.
rEAd Le paramètre est en lecture
seule
Pro Le paramètre est
‘personnalisé’ dans a PAGE
DE REPOS (voir ci-après).
On est maintenant au niveau Modification.
Appuyer sur et pour
sélectionner normalement un paramètre
ACCS
PASS
codE
Appuyer sur ou pour saisir le
code d'accès. La valeur par défaut réglée en
usine est 1. ‘PASS’ apparaît lorsque le
code d'accès correct a été saisi
Appuyer sur jusqu'à l'en-tête de liste
Accès.
Appuyer sur ou pour
sélectionner le niveau ‘Edit.
Autres options :
OPEr Niveau Opérateur - montre les
paramètres sélectionnés
FuLL Montre le jeu de paramètres ‘FULL’
ConF Donne accès au niveau
configuration
Edit
Goto
ACCS
Appuyer sur cette touche
Appuyer sur cette touche
Appuyer sur cette touche pour revenir à l'en-tête de liste
Accès.
N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 19
3.10.1 Option Pro (personnaliser)
Il est possible de ‘personnaliser’ un maximum de
douze paramètres couramment utilisés dans la PAGE
DE REPOS. L'opérateur peut ainsi y accéder
rapidement en appuyant simplement sur la touche
. Cette fonction, utilisée en association avec
‘caché’ et ‘lecture seule’, permet d'organiser la
manière dont on souhaite formater le régulateur.
Le paramètre tmr apparaît alors dans la PAGE DE
REPOS. Répéter l'opération pour les autres
paramètres que l'on souhaite personnaliser.
Pour supprimer un paramètre, aller au niveau edit,
sélectionner le paramètre dans la liste qui convient et
passer de Pro à ALtr, rEAd ou HidE.
3.10.2 Retour au niveau Opérateur
Répéter l'opération ci-dessus pour tous les autres
paramètres que l'on souhaite cacher, personnaliser ou
faire passer en lecture seule, puis revenir au niveau
opérateur:
Exemple:
Le temps restant a été sélectionné.
Appuyer sur ou pour
choisir Pro
Pro
tmr
OPer
Goto
1. Appuyer sur jusqu'à
l'en-tête de liste ACCS
2. Appuyer sur jusqu'à
Goto
3. Appuyer sur ou
pour sélectionner Oper
4. Appuyer sur pour
revenir au niveau Opérateur
20 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07
3.11 Utilisation du Timer
• Appuyer sur jusqu'à la liste SP
• Appuyer sur jusqu'au paramètre tM.OP
• Appuyer sur ou pour sélectionner le
mode de fonctionnement du timer, Opt.1 à
Opt.5, de la manière suivante:
3.11.1 Opt.1 - Mode 1, palier et coupure
Lors de la Réinitialisation
Lors de la réinitialisation, on peut alterner entre
régulation automatique et attente, avec le paramètre
m-A dans la PAGE DE REPOS.
Le régulateur est livré avec le paramètre m-A caché. Il
faut commencer par le faire apparaître. Cf. ‘Paramètres
cachés, visibles et personnalisés’.
Mode attente
(Standby)
Température
Consigne
Réinitialisation
Chrono-métrage
Exécution
Fin
End clignote
Attente
jusqu'à ce
que la
température
soit atteinte
Auto
m-A
Dans la PAGE DE REPOS, appuyer sur
jusqu'à ce que le paramètre m-A
apparaisse.
Appuyer sur ou pour
sélectionner :
Auto Régulation automatique
mAn Mode attente. (le voyant MAN
en-dessous d'OP2 s'éclaire)
Appuyer simultanément sur et pour revenir à la
PAGE DE REPOS
N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 21
‘Régulation automatique’ désigne la régulation à la
consigne, avec le chauffage (et le refroidissement) en
service.
‘Mode attente’(Standby) désigne le régulateur en
mode manuel avec une puissance de sortie nulle. (Voir
‘ATTENTION’ paragraphe 3.5)
Pendant "Exécution"
Le régulateur passe toujours en régulation
automatique. Le chauffage (ou le refroidissement) est
appliqué et la température augmente (ou diminue)
jusqu'à la consigne. Lorsque la température diffère de
la consigne de moins d'1oC, le timer commence le
compte à rebours.
Pendant "Fin"
Lorsque le timer est arrivé à la fin de la temporisation,
le régulateur passe en mode attente. Le voyant MAN
s'allume et End clignote sur l'affichage principal. Le
procédé refroidit. Le timer reste indéfiniment dans cet
état jusqu'à la réinitialisation.
Retour à la réinitialisation
End arrête de clignoter. Le régulateur revient en mode
attente. Il est possible de le faire revenir en régulation
automatique en réglant le paramètre m-A de la PAGE
DE REPOS sur Auto.
3.11.2 Opt.2 - Mode 2, sans coupure
palier
Palier indéfini
à la consigne
Température
Consigne
Réinitialisation
Chronométrage
Ex écution
Fin
End clignote
Attente
jusqu'à ce
que la
température
soit atteinte
Ce mode est identique au mode 1, avec une
différence : à la fin de la période de chronométrage,
le régulateur continue indéfiniment en mode de
régulation automatique.
22 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07
3.11.3 Opt.3 - Mode 3, durée à partir de la
position froide puis coupure
Identique au mode 1, sauf que le timer commence
immédiatement le compte à rebours sans attendre que
la température ait atteint la consigne.
3.11.4 Opt.4 - Mode 4, durée à partir de
la position froide sans coupure
Identique au mode 2, sauf que le timer commence
immédiatement le compte à rebours sans attendre que
le régulateur ait atteint la consigne.
Mode attente
Température
Consigne
Réinitialisation
Chronométrage
Fin
End clignote
Réinitialisation
Palier indéfini
à la consigne
Température
Consigne
Chronométrage
End clignote
Réinitialisation
N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 23
3.11.5 Opt.5 Mode 5, temporisation de la
mise sous tension
Ce mode applique une temporisation avant d'activer le
chauffage (ou le refroidissement). Lorsque le timer
démarre, le régulateur passe toujours en mode attente
et commence le compte à rebours. Lorsque le timer a
terminé sa tâche, le régulateur passe en mode
automatique, applique le chauffage (ou le
refroidissement) et régule indéfiniment à la consigne.
3.11.6 Programmation d'un profil rampepalier
Il est possible de programmer un profil simple rampepalier
à l'aide de Sprr (limite de vitesse de consigne) en
combinaison avec le timer. Pour utiliser cette fonction,
commencer par faire apparaître Sprr et w.SP (consigne
de travail) à l'aide de la méthode décrite dans “Paramètres
cachés, visibles et personnalisés”. w.SP apparaît alors
dans la PAGE DE REPOS.
Positionner Sprr sur la vitesse de rampe souhaitée. Ce
paramètre est réglable par pas de 1/10 d’ unités affichées
les moins significatives par minute. Cela signifie que, si
l'affichage est configuré de 0 à 1000oC, la limite de vitesse
de consigne peut être réglée entre 0,1 et 999,9 oC par
minute.
Lorsque la limite de vitesse de consigne a été activée et
que le timer a démarré, la consigne de travail w.sp
commence par passer à la température mesurée puis passe
en rampe à la limite de vitesse de consigne sprr jusqu'à
la consigne cible.
Dans les modes 1 et 2, le compte à rebours commence
lorsque la température mesurée diffère de la consigne cible
de moins d'1oC. Dans les modes 3 et 4, il commence
lorsque w.sp diffère de la consigne cible de moins d'1oC.
Réinitialisation
Palier indéfini
à la consigne
Température
Consigne
Chronométrage
Fin
24 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07
3.12 Demarrage et reinitialisation du
timer
Il existe deux méthodes :
Méthode 1.
Il s'agit de la méthode la plus simple pour commander
le timer.
• Appuyer sur jusqu'à la liste SP
• Appuyer sur jusqu'au paramètre tMr (temps
restant).
CONSEIL : personnaliser tmr dans la PAGE DE
REPOS pour un accès rapide, comme le décrit la
section ‘Paramètres cachés, visibles et personnalisés'.
Dès qu'une valeur est saisie dans tmr, le
chronométrage commence. tmr effectue le compte à
rebours vers zéro. Au cours de la période de
chronométrage, tmr peut augmenter ou diminuer en
fonction des demandes du procédé. Le positionnement
de la valeur sur zéro met fin à la période de
chronométrage.
Lorsque tmr atteint zéro, ‘end’ clignote sur
l'affichage principal. Le timer reste indéfiniment dans
cet état jusqu'à ce qu'une nouvelle valeur soit saisie : le
timer redémarre alors.
Pour réinitialiser le timer, appuyer simultanément sur
et . ‘end’ arrête de clignoter.
Pour redémarrer le timer, saisir une nouvelle valeur
dans tmr.
1234
Tmr
Appuyer sur ou pour
saisir la période de temporisation
souhaitée en minutes. (0 à 9999)
Appuyer sur pour revenir à la PAGE DE REPOS
N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 25
Méthode 2.
Utiliser cette méthode si l'on souhaite définir une durée
fixe et utiliser le paramètre stat pour démarrer et
arrêter le timer.
Il est également possible de faire alterner le paramètre
stat entre Off et run en configurant l'E/S
logique comme entrée de fermeture de contact
arrêt/marche.
Ouvrir le contact externe pour sélectionner run. C'est
une action déclenchée par les flancs. Fermer le contact
pour sélectionner Off. Off est forcé à chaque
fermeture du contact.
1234
dwel
run
stat
sp Appuyer sur pour atteindre l'entête
de liste SP.
Appuyer sur cette touche jusqu'à dwel
Temps de palier
Appuyer sur ou pour
saisir une période de chronométrage
en minutes (0-9999).
Etat du timer
Pour démarrer le timer, appuyer sur
ou pour sélectionner run.
Le temps de palier est chargé dans
tmr et la temporisation commence.
Pour réinitialiser le timer,
sélectionner Off.
Le temps restant tmr est fixé à 0.
Appuyer simultanément sur et pour revenir à la PAGE
DE REPOS.
26 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07
4 Configuration du Regulateur
Sélectionner le niveau configuration pour modifier :
•le type de régulation •les unités affichées •le type de
capteur d'entrée • la mise à l'échelle des entrées
linéaires • la configuration des alarmes • les codes
d'accès.
4.1 Sélection du niveau configuration
Appuyer sur pour se déplacer dans les en-têtes de
listes configuration.
Une fois qu'un en-tête de liste a été sélectionné,
appuyer sur pour sélectionner un
paramètre dans une liste donnée. Appuyer sur
et pour modifier le réglage.
inSt iP AL AA
Exit pASS 1A
Configuration de l'appareil
Appuyer
Appuyer
Appuyer sur ou pour
sélectionner Conf
Appuyer sur pour atteindre l'en-tête de
liste Accès.
Appuyer sur ou pour saisir le
code d'accès. La valeur par défaut réglée
en usine est 1. PASS apparaît lorsque le
code d'accès correct a été saisi.
Appuyer sur ou pour saisir le
code d'accès du niveau configuration.
La valeur par défaut réglée en usine est
2. PASS apparaît lorsqu'un code
d'accès correct a été saisi.
Appuyer sur cette touche pour passer au niveau configuration.
Goto conF
ACCS
codE PASS
ConF PASS
Appuyer
N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 27
4.1.1 Configuration de l'appareil
inst Configuration
de l'appareil
Options Signification
*C Celsius
*F Fahrenheit
*K Kelvin
unit
Unités affichées
nonE Pas d'unité
nnnn Néant
nnn.n Une décimale
dEC.P
Résolution de
l'affichage
nn.nn Deux décimales
Pid PID
On.OF Tout ou rien
CtrL
Type de
régulation
AL Convertit le
régulateur en
unité d'alarme
inst Configuration
de l'appareil
Options Signification
rEv
Inverse (action
normale pour la
régulation de la
température)
Act
Action de
régulation
dir Directe (la
sortie diminue
lorsque la
valeur de
régulation passe
en-dessous de
la consigne)
Pd.tr Suivi de
l’intégrale
manuelle
(régulation PD)
HoLd
En mode Auto,
maintient la
valeur de
l'intégrale
manuelle
trAc
En mode Auto,
suit la sortie
pour le transfert
progressif
Auto/Manuel
28 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07
4.1.2 Configuration des Entrées
iP Entrée
capteur
Options Signification
j.tc Thermocouple J
k.tc Thermocouple K
L.tc Thermocouple L
r.tc Thermocouple R
b.tc Thermocouple B
n.tc Thermocouple N
t.tc Thermocouple T
S.tc Thermocouple S
PL 2 Platinell II
rtd Sonde platine 100 Ω
mV Millivolt linéaire
inPt
Type
d'entrée
C.tc Entrée personnalisée
(C = valeur par
défaut)
Auto Automatique
0*C Référence externe
0°C
45*C Référence externe
45°C
CJC
(TC
seule
ment)
Compensat
ion de
soudure
froide
50*C Référence externe
50°C
Mise à l'échelle des entrées linéaires (plage -12 à +80 mV)
InP.L Entrée mV
basse
InP.H Entrée mV
haute
VaL.L Valeur
affichée
basse
VAL.H Valeur
affichée
haute
OFF Off (entrées
linéaires
uniquement)
Auto 1.5KΩ
Hi 5KΩ
ImP Adaptation
d'impédance
pour rupture
capteur
HiHi 15KΩ,
Inp.L Inp.H
VAL.H
VAL.L
mV
Valeur affichée
N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 29
4.1.3 Configuration des Alarmes
La liste AL configure les trois alarmes internes ‘non
bloquantes' et fait clignoter le message d'alarme qui
convient sur la PAGE DE REPOS.
A ce stade, l'alarme est simplement une indication
(‘alarme non bloquante’). Pour provoquer l'activation
des sorties relais ou logiques par les alarmes, suivre les
instructions de “Configuration des entrées/sorties relais
et logiques".
AL Alarme Type Signification
OFF Alarme désactivée
fsL Alarme pleine
échelle basse
fsH Alarme pleine
échelle haute
dEv Alarme bande
dHi Alarme écart haut
AL 1 Alarme 1
dLo Alarme écart bas
Ltch Alarme no Non mémorisée
mémorisée YES Mémorisée avec
réinitisalisation
automatique *
AL Alarme Type Signification
mAn Mémorisée avec
réinitialisation
manuelle **.
bLoc Alarme no Non bloquante
bloquante YES Bloquée jusqu'au
premier état hors
alarme
La séquence ci-dessus se répète pour:
AL 2 (Alarme 2) et AL 3 (Alarme 3)
diS Limité par la plage
d'affichage
Du capteur
Sp.Li Limites de
la consigne
d'alarme
Con Limité par les
limites de la
consigne
* La réinitialisation automatique signifie que, une fois
que l'alarme a été acquittée, elle s'efface
automatiquement lorsqu'elle n'est plus vraie.
** La réinitialisation manuelle signifie que l'alarme
doit être tout d'abord effacée avant de pouvoir être
réinitialisée.
30 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07
4.1.4 Configuration des Entrées/Sorties
Relais et Logiques
N.B: il est possible de configurer les E/S logiques
comme sorties ou comme entrées de fermeture de
contact pour l'acquittement des alarmes, le verrouillage
du clavier ou la mise en marche/réinitialisation du
timer.
Aa Sortie relais
1a E/S logiques
Options Signification
id Identité de la rELy Relais
sortie LOG Logique
diG Sortie logique
(alarme)
HEAt Sortie chauffage
Fonction
COOL Sortie
refroidissement
SSr.1 Mode PDSIO 1
Ac.AL Acquittement des
alarmes
Loc.b Entrée logique
verrouillage du
clavier
Func
Ces fonctions
apparaissent
uniquement
pour les E/S
logiques
rres Mise en marche
/réinitialisation du
Aa Sortie relais
1a E/S logiques
Options Signification
timer
noch Aucun
changement
CLr Suppression de
toutes les alarmes
1FSL Alarme 1 (Cf.
remarque 1)
2FSH Alarme 2 (Cf.
remarque 1)
3FSL Alarme 3 (Cf.
remarque 1)
nw * Alarme nouvelle
Sbr* Alarme rupture
capteur
Lbr* Alarme rupture de
boucle
LdF* Alarme défaut de
charge
mAn* Mode manuel actif
End* Fin du
chronométrage
tmG1* Timer en marche
diG.F Fonctions
sorties
Numériques
Cf. ci-dessous
“Utilisation
de la
sortie relais
ou
logique à
partir d'une
fonction
logique"
Paragraphe
4.1.5.
tmG2* Timer en compte
N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 31
Aa Sortie relais
1a E/S logiques
Options Signification
à rebours
(Cf. remarque tmG3* Timer en marche
2) tmG4* Timer en compte
à rebours
nor Normal (sorties
chauffage ou
refroidissement)
SenS Sens de la
sortie
Inv Inversé (pour les
alarmes, se coupe
en état d'alarme)
*Ces alarmes sont toujours non mémorisées. Les
alarmes 1,2 et 3 sur la mesure sont configurables en
alarmes mémorisées ou non mémorisées (Voir lisete
Al)
Les Remarque 1 : les trois dernières lettres
correspondent au type d'alarme configuré dans la liste
AL. Si l'alarme est désactivée, AL 1 ou AL 2 ou
AL 3 est affiché.
Remarque 2 : tmg.3 et tmG.4 sont des fonctions
spéciales. Si elles sont sélectionnées, elles provoquent
l'allumage des voyants de sorties relais ou logiques
OP1 et OP2 sans actionner la sortie correspondante.
Elles servent à indiquer que le chronométrage est en
cours, tout en laissant les autres fonctions logiques
activer les sorties effectives (état FIN qui peut servir à
faire fonctionner un klaxon externe, par exemple).
4.1.5 Utilisation de la sortie relais ou
logique à partir d'une fonction
alarme ou logique.
1. Appuyer sur jusqu'à Func
2. Appuyer sur ou pour sélectionner Func
= diG
3. Appuyer sur pour atteindre diG.F
4. Appuyer sur ou pour sélectionner une
fonction alarme ou logique
5. Attendre 2 secondes. L'affichage revient à diG.F
et relie la fonction alarme ou logique
sélectionnée à la sortie relais ou logique.
6. Appuyer à nouveau sur ou . Deux
décimales apparaissent dans la fonction qui a été
ajoutée à la sortie.
32 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07
4.1.6 Alarmes multiples sur une seule
sortie
Il est possible de réaliser le « ou » d’un nombre
quelconque de fonctions alarmes ou logiques à la
sortie relais ou logique en répétant les étapes 4, 5 et 6
ci-dessus. Deux décimales apparaissent sur les
fonctions qui ont été ajoutées à la sortie.
4.1.7 Suppression des alarmes d'une sortie
1. Appuyer sur jusqu'à diG.F
2. Appuyer sur ou pour sélectionner CLr
3. Attendre 2 secondes. L'affichage revient à diG.F
qui annule toutes les alarmes du relais.
4.1.8 Codes d'accès
PASS Codes d'accès Plage Valeur
par
défaut
ACC.P Code d'accès
des niveaux
Régleur et
Modification
0-9999 1
CnF.P Code d'accès
du niveau
Configuration
0-9999 2
CAL.P Code d'accès de
la Calibration
utilisateur
0-9999 3
4.1.9 Sortie du niveau Configuration
Appuyer sur pour atteindre l'affichage ‘exit’.
Appuyer sur ou pour sélectionner ‘YES’.
Après 2 sec, l'affichage clignote et revient à la PAGE
DE REPOS au niveau Opérateur.
Exit YES
N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 33
4.1.10 Alarmes de diagnostic
Outre les alarmes de procédé normales, les messages
d'alarme de diagnostic suivants sont disponibles.
Message Signification et (intervention)
EE.Er Electrically Erasable Memory Error (erreur
de mémoire effaçable électriquement) :
La valeur d'un paramètre a été altérée.
Appeler Eurotherm Automation.
HW.Er Erreur matérielle :
(envoyer le régulateur en réparation)
LLLL Plage basse d'affichage dépassée :
(vérifier le signal d'entrée)
HHHH Plage haute d'affichage dépassée :
(vérifier le signal d'entrée)
Err1 Erreur 1 : échec du test automatique de
la ROM. (envoyer le régulateur en
réparation)
Err2 Erreur 2 : échec du test automatique de
la RAM. (envoyer le régulateur en
réparation)
Err3 Erreur 3 : échec du chien de garde.
(envoyer le régulateur en réparation)
Err4 Erreur 4 : défaut du clavier. Touche
Message Signification et (intervention)
bloquée ou une touche a été enfoncée
lors de la mise en route.
Err5 Erreur 5 : défaut sur circuit d'entrée.
(envoyer le régulateur en réparation)
Pwr.F Défaut alimentation. La tension de ligne
est trop faible.
TU.Er Erreur Réglage. Apparaît si le temps
d’auto-reglage dépasse 2 heures.
34 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07
4.2 Calibration Utilisateur
Le régulateur a été calibré à vie par rapport à des
sources de référence connues. La calibration
utilisateur permet d'appliquer des offsets afin de
compenser les erreurs de capteurs et autres erreurs
système. Le paramètre OFS de la liste IP applique un
offset fixe sur toute la plage d'affichage. Il est
également possible d'appliquer une calibration bi-point
de la manière suivante :
• Appuyer sur jusqu'à la liste iP
• Appuyer sur jusqu'au paramètre CAL.P
• Appuyer sur ou pour saisir le code
d'accès. La valeur par défaut réglée en usine est
3. PASS apparaît lorsque le code d'accès correct
a été saisi.
• Appuyer sur pour atteindre le paramètre
CAL
• Appuyer sur ou pour sélectionner User
(FAct rétablit la calibration réglée en usine)
• Appuyer sur pour sélectionner sucessivement
les quatre paramètres représentés sur le
graphique ci-dessous. Utiliser ou pour
définir les points de calibration souhaités et les
offsets à appliquer à chaque point. La liste iP
de la page 5 décrit chaque paramètre.
Calibration usine
Valeur affichée
Calibration usine
Pnt.H
OFS.H
OFS.L
Pnt.L
Calibration utilisateur
N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 35
4.3 Réglage Automatique
En régulation PID, la sortie du régulateur est la somme
de trois termes : Proportionnel, Intégral et Dérivé. Ces
trois termes délivrent la quantité de puissance qui est
suffisante pour maintenir la température à la consigne
sans oscillation. Pour une régulation stable, les valeurs
PID doivent être ‘réglées’ pour correspondre aux
caractéristiques du procédé régulé. Sur les modèles
2132 et 2116, cela est effectué automatiquement à
l'aide de techniques de réglage évoluées.
Le réglage automatique consiste à activer et désactiver
la sortie du régulateur pour induire une oscillation de
la température mesurée. Les valeurs PID, indiquées
dans le tableau ci-dessous, sont calculées à partir de
l'amplitude et de la période de l'oscillation.
Paramètre Affichage Signification ou fonction
Bande
proportionnelle
Pb Largeur de bande, exprimée en
°C ou °f sur laquelle la
puissance de sortie est
proportionnée entre le
minimum et le maximum.
Temps
d'intégrale
ti Détermine le temps nécessaire
au régulateur pour supprimer
l'erreur de statisme en régime
Paramètre Affichage Signification ou fonction
permanent.
Temps de
dérivée
td Détermine l'ampleur de la
réaction du régulateur à la
vitesse de variation de la
température.
Cutback bas Lcb Nombre de °C ou °f endessous
de la consigne auquel
le régulateur va diminuer la
puissance de sortie pour
empêcher un dépassement de
la consigne lors du chauffage.
Cutback
haut
Hcb Nombre de °C ou °f audessus
de la consigne auquel le
régulateur va augmenter la
puissance de sortie pour
empêcher que l'on soit endessous
de la consigne lors du
refroidissement.
Gain relatif
de refroidissement
rEL.C Uniquement présent si le
refroidissement a été
configuré. Définit la bande
proportionnelle de
refroidissement en divisant la
valeur Pb par la valeur rEL.C.
36 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07
Si le procédé ne peut pas tolérer l'application du
chauffage ou du refroidissement total au cours du
réglage, il est possible de limiter la puissance en fixant
les limites de chauffage et de refroidissement dans la
liste Sorties. Toutefois, la valeur mesurée doit osciller
pour que le régulateur puisse calculer les valeurs.
Le réglage est normalement effectué une seule fois lors
de la mise en service initiale du procédé. Toutefois, si
le procédé régulé devient ensuite instable (à cause d'un
changement de ses caractéristiques), il est possible
d'effectuer un nouveau réglage à tout moment.
Il est préférable de commencer le réglage avec le
procédé à température ambiante. Le régulateur peut
ainsi effectuer les calculs de manière plus précise.
4.3.1 Temps de cycle des sorties Chauffage
et Refroidissement
Avant de commencer un cycle de réglage, définir les
valeurs de CYC.H (temps de cycle de la sortie
Chauffage) et CYC.C (temps de cycle de la sortie
Refroidissement) dans la liste oP (sorties).
Pour une sortie logique de chauffage (commutant un
contacteur statique), positionner CYC.H sur 1.0 sec.
Pour une sortie relais, positionner CYC.H sur 20.0
sec.
Pour une sortie logique de refroidissement servant à
réguler une électrovanne, positionner CYC.C sur 5.0
sec
N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 37
4.3.2 Procédure de réglage
• Régler la consigne sur la valeur à laquelle le
procédé fonctionnera normalement.
• Dans la liste ‘Atun’, sélectionner ‘tunE’ et le
régler sur ‘on’
• Appuyer simultanément sur les touches Page et
Défilement pour revenir à la PAGE DE REPOS.
L'affichage fait clignoter ‘tunE’ pour indiquer
que le réglage est en cours.
• Le régulateur induit une oscillation de la
température en activant puis en désactivant le
chauffage.
• Après deux cycles d'oscillation, le réglage est
terminé et le régulateur s'arrête de lui-même.
• Le régulateur calcule ensuite les paramètres de
réglage et reprend son action normale de
régulation.
Si l'on souhaite une régulation ‘Proportionnelle
uniquement’ ou ‘P+D’ ou ‘P+I’, il faut positionner les
paramètres ‘ti’ ou ‘td’ sur OFF avant de
commencer le cycle de réglage. Le régulateur les
laissera sur la position off (désactivée) et ne calculera
aucune valeur pour ces paramètres.
4.3.3 Cycle type de réglage automatique
4.3.4 Calcul des valeurs de cutback
Lorsque le cutback bas ou haut est positionné sur
‘AuTo’, les valeurs sont fixées à trois fois la bande
proportionnelle et ne seront pas modifiées au cours du
réglage automatique. Si le cutback est positionné sur
une autre valeur, il sera calculé comme faisant partie
du réglage.
Temps
Température
38 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07
4.4 Réglage Manuel
Si, pour une raison quelconque, le réglage automatique
ne donne pas des résultats satisfaisants, il est possible
de régler manuellement le régulateur.
Procéder de la manière suivante :
Le procédé étant à sa température normale de
fonctionnement :
• Positionner le temps d'intégrale ‘ti’et le temps
de dérivée ‘td’ sur OFF.
• Positionner Cutback haut ‘Hcb’ et Cutback bas
‘Lcb’ sur ‘Auto’
• Ne pas tenir compte du fait que la température
peut ne pas se stabiliser avec précision à la
consigne
• Réduire la bande proportionnelle ‘Pb’ jusqu'à ce
que la température commence à osciller. Si la
température oscille déjà, augmenter la bande
proportionnelle jusqu'à ce qu'elle arrête
d'osciller. Laisser suffisamment de temps entre
chaque réglage pour que la température se
stabilise. Noter la valeur de la bande
proportionnelle ‘B’ et la période d'oscillation
‘T’.
• Fixer les valeurs des paramètres PID selon la
formule ci-dessous:
Type de
régulation
‘Pb’ ‘ti’ ‘td’
Proportionnelle
uniquement
2xB OFF OFF
P + I 2,2xB 0,8xT OFF
P + I + D 1,7xB 0,5xT 0,12xT
N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 39
4.4.1 Configuration des valeurs de cutback
La procédure ci-dessus indique comment configurer
les paramètres pour une régulation optimale en régime
permanent. Si, au cours du démarrage ou des
variations importantes de la température, on atteint des
niveaux inacceptables de dépassement ou de mesures
en-dessous de la consigne, il faut configurer
manuellement les paramètres de cutback Lcb et Hcb.
Procéder de la manière suivante :
1. Configurer les valeurs de cutback haut et bas au
triple de la largeur de la bande proportionnelle
(c'est-à-dire Lcb = Hcb = 3 x PB).
2. Noter le niveau de dépassement ou de mesure endessous
de la consigne pour les changements
importants de la température (cf. les courbes cidessous).
Dans l'exemple (a), augmenter Lcb de la valeur du
dépassement. Dans l'exemple (b), diminuer Lcb de la
valeur des mesures en-dessous de la consigne.
Exemple (a)
Exemple (b)
Lorsque la température se rapproche de la consigne par
le haut, il est possible de configurer Hcb de la même
manière.
4.4.2 Réinitialisation manuelle
Lorsque ti = OFF réinitialisation manuelle (rES)
apparaît dans PiD List. Ce paramètre règle la
puissance de sortie lorsque le signal d'erreur est égal à
zéro. Il est possible de le corriger manuellement afin
d'éliminer l'erreur en régime permanent (fonction
normalement exécutée par le terme intégral).
Température
Temps
Dépassement
Température
Temps
Mesures en-dessous de la consigne
40 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07
5 Code de Commande
Le régulateur est livré configuré selon le code de commande indiqué ci-dessous.
Numéro du modèle Fonction Tension d’alimentation Manuel Sortie 1 (logique) Sortie 2 (relais)
Fonction
CC RégulateurPID
NF Régulateur
Tout ou rien
TC Régulateur PID
+ timer
TN Régulateur Tout
ou rien + timer
Tension d’alimetation
VH 85-264Vac
VL 20 -29Vdc ou
ac
Manuel
XXX Pas de
manuel
ENG Anglais
FRA Français
GER Allemand
NED Néerlandais
SPA Espagnol
SWE Suédois
ITA Italien
Sortie 2 (relais)
XX Désactivé
RH Chauffage
RC Refroidissement
FH Alarme haute 2
FL Alarme basse 2
AL Alarme haute 2 &
alarme basse 3
DB Alarme de bande 2
DL Alarme 2 écart bas
DH Alarme 2 écart haut
NW Nouvelle alarme
Sortie 1 (logique)
XX Désactivé
Sortie logique
LH Chauffage
LC Refroidissement
M1 Mode PDSIO 1
FH Alarme haute 1
FL Alarme basse1
DB Alarme de bande 1
DL Alarme 1 écart bas
DH Alarme 1 écart haut
NW Nouvelle alarme
Entrée logique
AC Alarme
acquit./réinit.
KL Verrouillage clavier
TM Timer
Marche/Réinit.
Numéro du modèle
2132 1/16 DIN
2116 1/8 DIN
N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 41
Entrée capteur Consigne mini Consigne maxi Unités Module relais externe Adaptateur d'entrée
Module relais externe
XX Pas installé
R7 Installé
(actionné par la
sortie logique)
Unités
C °C
F ° F
K Kelvin
X Entrée linéaire
Adaptateur d'entrée
XX Néant
V1 0-10 Vdc
A1 Résistance 0-
20mA (2,49 Ω.
0,1 %)
Entrée
capteur
Plage d'affichage et
limites mini & maxi de
consigne
Thermocouples
°C ° F
J Type J -210 à
1200
-340 à
2192
K Type K -200 à
1372
-325 à
2500
T Type T -200 à 400 -325 à 750
L Type L -200 à 900 -325 à
1650
N Type N -200 à
1300
-325 à
2370
R Type R -50 à 1768 58 à 3200
S Type S -50 à 1768 -58 à 3200
B Type B 0 à 1820 32 à 3308
P Platinell
II
0 à 1369 32 à 2496
Sonde
Z Pt100 -200 à 850 -325 à
1562
Entrées personnalisées OC OF
C Type C -W5%Re/W26%Re (capteur
personnalisé par défaut)
0 à 2319 32 à 4200
D Type D - W3%Re/W25%Re 0 à 2399 32 à 4350
E Thermocouple E -200 à 999 -325 à 1830
1 Ni/Ni18%Mo 0 à 1399 32 à 2550
2 Pt20%Rh/Pt40%Rh 0 à 1870 32 à 3398
3 W/W26%Re (Engelhard) 0 à 2000 32 à 3632
4 W/W26%Re (Hoskins) 0 à 2010 32 à 3650
5 W5%Re/W26%Re (Engelhard) 10 à 2300 50 à 4172
6 W5%Re/W26%Re(Bucose) 0 à 2000 32 à 3632
7 Pt10%Rh/Pt40%/Rh 200 à 1800 392 à 3272
8 Pyromètre Exegen K80 I.R. -45 à 650 -49 à 1202
Entrées de procédé (linéaires)
M -9,99 mV à +80mV
Y 0 à 20mA
A 4 à 20mA
V 0 à 10Vdc (adaptateur d'entrée nécessaire)
42 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07
5.1 Specification Technique
Etanchéité de la
face avant
IP65 (EN 60529), ou 4X (NEMA 250)
Conditions
ambiantes de
fonctionnement
0 à 55oC. Vérifier que l'armoire est correctement ventilée. Humidité relative 5 à 95%,
sans condensation
Température de
stockage
-30oC à +75oC. (Protéger contre l'humidité et la poussière)
Atmosphère L'appareil ne doit être utilisé ni à une altitude supérieure à 2000 m ni en atmosphère
explosive ou corrosive
Alimentation Unité haute tension : 100 à 240Vac -15%, +10%, 48-62Hz, puissance consommée 5
Watts maximum
Unité basse tension : 24Vdc/ac +/- 20%. DC à 62Hz, puissance consommée 5 Watts
maximum
Relais (isolé) Maximum: 264Vac, charge résistive 2A. Minimum: 12Vdc, 100mA
Longévité mécanique > 107 opérations. Longévité électrique sous une charge résistive de
1 A, 240 vac > 5 x106 opérations
Sections des fils Utiliser un fil de section minimale de 0,5mm2 (16awg) pour les branchements de
l'installation.
Protection contre Utiliser des fusibles indépendants 2A pour l'alimentation de l'indicateur et les sorties
N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 43
les surintensités relais. Les fusibles à utiliser sont de type EN60127 (type T)
Entrées/sorties
logiques
9V à 12mA, pas isolées de l'entrée capteur
Sécurité électrique EN 61010 (Les surtensions transitoires ne doivent pas dépasser 2,5 kV). Degré de
pollution 2.
Isolation: L'ensemble des entrées et sorties isolées ont une isolation renforcée qui assure une
protection contre l'électrocution (cf. la remarque sur les capteurs sous tension).
Compensation de
soudure froide
Taux de réjection 30:1 pour une variation de température ambiante en mode automatique.
Utilisation d'un procédé de mesure ultra-précis INSTANT ACCURACY TM qui vise à
éliminer les dérives en température lors de la mise en chauffe et à répondre très
rapidement à toute variation de température ambiante.
Catégorie
d'installation
Catégorie II ou CAT II
44 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07
6 Sécurité compatibilité
électromagnétique (CEM)
Ce régulateur a été fabriqué au Royaume-Uni par
Eurotherm Ltd.
Veuillez lire attentivement ce paragraphe avant
d'installer le régulateur
Ce régulateur est conçu pour les applications
industrielles de régulation de procédés et de
température. Il satisfait aux exigences des directives
européennes en matière de sécurité et de compatibilité
électromagnétique. Son utilisation dans le cadre
d'autres applications ou le non-respect des consignes
d'installation contenues dans ce manuel pourrait
affecter la sécurité ou la compatibilité
électromagnétique de cet instrument. Il incombe à
l'installateur de veiller à la sécurité et à la compatibilité
électromagnétique de chaque installation.
1.1 GENERALITES
Les informations contenues dans ce manuel sont
sujettes à modification sans préavis. Bien que tous les
efforts aient été consentis pour assurer l'exactitude des
informations, votre fournisseur décline toute
responsabilité pour les erreurs contenues dans ce
manuel
6.1.1 Sécurité
Ce régulateur est conforme à la directive européenne
sur les basses tensions 73/23/EEC et
à la norme de sécurité EN 61010.
6.1.2 Compatibilité électromagnétique
Ce régulateur est conforme aux exigences de
protection essentielles de la directive EMC
89/336/EEC, sur la base d'un dossier technique de
construction. Cet instrument satisfait aux exigences
générales en matière de milieu industriel définies par
la norme EN 61326. Pour de plus amples informations
sur la conformité de ce produit, veuillez consulter le
dossier de construction technique.
N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 45
6.1.3 Conditionnement et stockage
L'emballage contient un instrument monté sur son
manchon, deux clips de fixation pour l'installation sur
panneau ainsi qu'un guide d'installation et d'utilisation.
Certaines gammes sont fournies avec un adaptateur
d'entrée.
Si l'emballage ou l'instrument est endommagé à la
livraison, n'installez pas le produit et contactez votre
fournisseur. Si l'instrument doit être stocké avant
utilisation, protégez-le contre l'humidité et la poussière
à une température ambiante comprise entre -10oC et
+70oC.
1.2 Entretien et réparation
Ce régulateur ne contient aucune pièce réparable par
l'utilisateur. Contactez votre fournisseur pour les
réparations.
6.1.4 Attention : Condensateurs chargés
Avant de retirer un instrument de son manchon,
débranchez l'alimentation et attendez au moins deux
minutes pour permettre aux condensateurs de se
décharger. Il peut s'avérer plus pratique de retirer
partiellement l'instrument de son manchon et de
marquer ensuite une pause avant de le sortir
complètement. Dans tous les cas, évitez de toucher
aux composants électroniques de l'instrument lors de
son retrait du manchon.
Le non-respect de ces consignes pourra endommager
les composants de l'instrument et exposer l'utilisateur à
des risques.
6.1.5 Précautions en matière de décharges
électrostatiques
Une fois le régulateur retiré de son manchon, certains
de ses composants électroniques exposés pourront être
endommagés par les décharges électrostatiques
accumulées dans le corps. Pour prévenir tout risque,
déchargez-vous de cette énergie en touchant
régulièrement un objet métallique relié à la terre, avant
de manipuler le régulateur débranché.
6.1.6 Nettoyage
N'utilisez pas d'eau ni de produits à base d'eau pour
nettoyer les étiquettes car elles deviendraient alors
illisibles. Utilisez de l'alcool isopropylique pour le
nettoyage des étiquettes. Utilisez une solution
savonneuse douce pour nettoyer les autres surfaces
extérieures du produit.
46 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07
1.3 Consignes de sécurité lors de
l'installation
6.1.7 Symboles de sécurité
Cet instrument utilise divers symboles ayant les
significations suivantes :
! Attention (renvoie aux documents
d'accompagnement)
6.1.8 Personnel
L'installation doit être uniquement confiée à du
personnel adéquatement qualifié.
6.1.9 Protection des composants sous
tension
Afin d'éviter que les mains ou les outils en métal
n'entrent au contact de composants sous tension, le
régulateur devra être installé dans une armoire.
6.1.10 Attention : Capteurs sous tension
Ce régulateur est conçu pour fonctionner avec le
capteur de température directement relié à un élément
de chauffage électrique. Veillez à ce que le personnel
d'entretien ne touche pas ces connexions lorsqu'elles
sont sous tension. Tous les câbles, connecteurs et
commutateurs de connexion d'un capteur sous tension
devront être dimensionnés pour la tension du secteur.
L’E/S logique n’est pas isolée des entrées PV, et tous
les câbles, connecteurs et interrupteurs de connexion
du capteur doivent être dimensionnés pour la tension
du secteur.
6.1.11 Raccordement
Il est important de connecter le régulateur
conformément aux informations de câblage figurant
dans ce guide. Veillez tout particulièrement à ne pas
connecter les alimentations alternatives à l'entrée basse
tension du capteur ou à d'autres entrées et sorties de
bas niveau. Utilisez uniquement des conducteurs en
cuivre pour les connexions (à l'exception des entrées
de thermocouple) et assurez-vous que le câblage des
installations est conforme à toutes les réglementations
N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 47
locales en vigueur. Au Royaume-Uni, utilisez la
version la plus récente des réglementations de câblage
IEE (BS7671). Aux Etats-Unis, utilisez les méthodes
de câblage NEC Classe 1.
6.1.12 Isolation de l'alimentation
L'installation doit être équipée d'un sectionneur ou d'un
disjoncteur. Ce dispositif devra être monté à proximité
immédiate du régulateur, être facilement accessible
pour l'opérateur et être clairement désigné comme
appareil de coupure et de déconnexion de l'instrument.
6.1.13 Protection de surintensité
L'alimentation du système doit être dotée de fusibles
de capacité suffisante pour protéger le câblage des
unités.
6.1.14 Tension nominale
La tension maximale permanente appliquée entre les
bornes suivantes ne doit pas dépasser 264 Vac:
• sortie de relais à connexions logiques dc ou de
capteur ;
• toute connexion à la terre.
Le régulateur ne doit pas être relié à une alimentation
triphasée par une connexion en étoile non mise à la
terre. En cas de défaillance, une telle alimentation
pourrait excéder 264 Vac par rapport à la terre et le
produit présenterait alors des dangers.
6.1.15 Pollution conductrice
L'armoire dans laquelle le régulateur est monté doit
être exempte de toute pollution électriquement
conductrice. La poussière de carbone est une forme de
pollution électriquement conductrice. Pour assurer une
atmosphère convenable, installez un filtre à air sur
l'entrée d'air de l'armoire. Si des risques de
condensation sont probables, par exemple à des
températures basses, montez un chauffage à
commande thermostatique dans l'armoire.
Ce produit a été conçu pour satisfaire aux exigences de
la norme BSEN61010, catégorie d'installation II, degré
de pollution 2, telles qu'elles sont définies ci-après :
48 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07
6.1.16 Catégorie d'installation II
La tension de choc nominale pour un équipement
ayant une alimentation de 230 V nominale est de 2500
V.
6.1.16.1 Degré de pollution 2
Dans des conditions d'utilisation normales, seule une
pollution non conductrice peut se produire.
Une conductivité temporaire due à la condensation
pourra cependant se produire dans certaines
circonstances.
6.1.17 Mise à la terre du blindage du
capteur de température
Certaines installations prévoient généralement le
remplacement du capteur de température, alors que le
régulateur est toujours sous tension. Dans ces
circonstances et afin de renforcer la protection contre
les chocs électriques, il est recommandé de mettre le
blindage du capteur de température à la terre. La mise
à la terre du châssis de la machine n'est pas suffisante.
6.1.18 Protection contre les températures
excessives
Lors de la conception de tout système de commande, il
est essentiel d'examiner les conséquences d'une
défaillance de chaque composant du système. Dans les
applications de régulation de la température, le
principal danger vient d'un chauffage qui resterait
constamment activé. Outre les dommages subis par le
produit, une telle défaillance pourrait endommager les
machines contrôlées ou même provoquer un incendie.
Le chauffage pourra rester constamment activé pour
plusieurs raisons :
• Le capteur de température s'est détaché ;
• Il y a un court-circuit dans le câblage du
thermocouple ;
• Il y a une défaillance du régulateur alors que la
sortie de chauffage est constamment activée ;
• Une vanne ou un contacteur externe est bloqué en
position de chauffage ;
• Le point de consigne du régulateur est trop élevé.
Pour prévenir les risques de dommages ou d'accidents,
il est recommandé d'installer une unité séparée de
protection contre les températures excessives, munie
N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07 49
d'un capteur de température indépendant qui isolera le
circuit de chauffage.
Attention :
Les relais d'alarme du régulateur n'assurent pas une
protection totale pour toutes les conditions de panne.
1.4 Exigences d'installation en matière
de compatibilité
électromagnétique
Afin d'assurer la conformité à la directive EMC
européenne, les précautions d'installation suivantes
devront être prises :
• Pour de plus amples informations, veuillez-vous
reporter au guide d'installation CEM,
HA025464FRA.
• Lors de l'utilisation des sorties de relais, il pourra
s'avérer nécessaire de monter un filtre afin de
supprimer les émissions conduites. Les
caractéristiques du filtre dépendront du type de
charge. Pour les applications typiques,
l'utilisation du modèle Schaffner FN321 ou
FN612 est préconisée.
• Si l'unité doit être utilisée avec un matériel sur
table, branché sur une prise d'alimentation
standard, la conformité aux normes d'émissions
commerciales et de l'industrie légère devra être
observée. Dans un tel cas et afin de satisfaire
aux exigences en matière d'émissions conduites,
un filtre secteur adéquat devra être installé. Nous
recommandons des filtres Schaffner de type
FN321 et FN612.
6.1.19 Cheminement des câbles
Pour réduire les bruits électriques, les connexions dc
basse tension et le câblage d'entrée du capteur devront
être acheminés à l'écart des câbles d'alimentation haute
tension. Si cela est impossible, utilisez des câbles
blindés en prenant soin de relier le câblage à la terre
aux deux extrémités. Il est préférable de réduire au
minimum la longueur des câbles.
Lorsque le signal est une tension dangereuse * (ou
pourrait le devenir sous des conditions anormales de
fonctionnement), une double isolation est nécessaire.
* Une définition plus complète de ‘tensions
dangereuse’ est donnée dans le paragraphe ‘Tension
dangereuse’ dans la BS EN61010. En résumé, dans
des conditions normales de fonctionnement des
niveaux de tension dangereuse sont définis comme
étant >30V RMS (42,2 V crête) ou >60Vdc.
50 N0 Réf HA026270FRA Indice 5.0 08/07
7 RoHS
Product group 2100
Table listing restricted substances
Chinese
产
2100 铅镉铬溴联苯溴苯醚
线组X O X O O O
属O O O O O O
显X O O O O O
块X O X O O O
O
X
English
Product
2100 Pb Hg Cd Cr(VI) PBB PBDE
PCBA X O X O O O
Enclosure O O O O O O
Display X O O O O O
Modules X O X O O O
O
X
Approval
Name: Position: Signature: Date:
Martin Greenhalgh Quality Manager
IA029470U450 (CN23172) Issue 1 Feb 07
Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous
materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006.
该质该质SJ/T11363-2006
标规
Toxic and hazardous substances and elements
Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for
this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006.
Restricted Materials Table
Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)
览
质
该质该质SJ/T11363-2006
标规
2116/2132
PID Temperature oder
Ein/Aus Regler
GER Bedienungsanleitung
HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 1
PID Temperatur- oder EIN/AUS- Regler Typ 2132 und 2116
Die Reglermodelle 2132 und 2116 sind kompakte PID-Temperatur oder EIN/AUS-Regler im Format 48x24
(2132) bzw. 48x48 (2116) mit Selbstoptimierung. Den Eingang können Sie für Widerstandsthermometer,
Thermoelement oder als Lineareingang konfigurieren. Die Regler bieten Ihnen Relais- und einen Logikausgang
zur Ansteuerung eines Solid-State-Relais. Beide Ausgänge können Sie für Heizen. Kühlen oder Alarm
konfigurieren. Das Gerät wird im Werk nach Ihrer Bestellung konfiguriert. Bitte überprüfen Sie mit Hilfe des
Geräteaufklebers auf der Regler-seite, ob die Konfiguration Ihren Anwendungen entspricht.
Die Regler entsprechen den Anforderungen an Sicherheit und elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit.
1. Abmessungen und Installation
Abmessungen 2132
Abmessungen 2116
48mm
45mm
-0.0, + 0.6
48mm
Schalttafel-
24mm ausschnitt
103mm 45mm -0.0, +0.6
Außenklammern Haltelammen
22mm
-0.0, +0.3
Schalttafelausschnitt
103mm
48mm
45mm -0.0, +0.6
2 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07
1.1 Installation
Lesen Sie bitte zuerst die Sicherheitsinformationen auf den Seiten 15.
Bauen Sie das Gerät nach den folgenden Angaben ein:
1. Bereiten Sie den Ausschnitt nach den angegebenen Maßen vor.
2. Stecken Sie das Gerät in den Ausschnitt (ohne Halteklammern).
3. Bringen Sie die Halteklammern an ihren Platz. Zum Sichern des Reglers halten Sie das Gerät in Position und
schieben Sie beide Klammern gegen den Schalttafelausschnitt .
4. Entfernen Sie die Schutzfolie vom Display.
Anmerkung : Die Halteklammern können Sie einfach mit den Fingern oder einem Schraubendreher entfernen.
1.2 Gerätewechsel
Durch Auseinanderziehen der Außenklammern und nach vorne ziehen des Reglers können Sie das Gerät aus dem
Gehäuse entnehmen. Wenn Sie das Gerät zurück in das Gehäuse stecken, versichern Sie sich, daß die
Außenklammern einrasten. Ansonsten kann die Schutzart IP65 nicht garantiert werden.
HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 3
2. Elektrische Installation
3.22.1 Kabelgrößen
Verwenden Sie Kabel mit Querschnitten zwischen 0,5
und 1,5 mm2. Die Klemmen sind durch eine
Kunststoffabdeckung gesichert. Halten Sie bei den
rückseitigen Klemmen einen Drehmoment von 0,4Nm
ein.
Ausgänge
Logik: 9Vdc, 12mA (nicht isoliert).
Anwendung Heizen, Kühlen oder Alarm.
Relais: 2A, 264V ac ohm’sch.
Anwendung Heizen, Kühlen oder Alarm.
Schließkontakteingang (an Stelle des
Logikausgangs).
Anwendung: Alarmquitterung oder Timersart/-stop.
Anschlüsse 2116
+
-
Phase
Null
Alarm 2
Relaisausgang
T/C Pt100 mA
Eingang
L
N
A
AB
V+
V-
1A
1B
2.49Ω
85-264Vac
50/60Hz
1B 1A
Pt100
T/C Relais
Null
Phase
Logikein/-ausgang
Anschlüsse 2132
Alarm 1
externes Relais
oder
Alarmquittierung/Rücksetzen
2.49Ω
Eingang
V- V+ AB A N L
- +
mA
85-264Vac 50/60Hz
24 24 20-29 Vac/dc
20-29 Vac/dc
24
24
- +
Logikein/-ausgang
oder
Alarm 1
externes Relais
Alarmquittierung/
Rücksetzen
+
-
4 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07
2.2 Beispiel Anschlussdiagramm
Sicherheitsanforderungen für permanent angeschlossene Anlagenbauteile:
• Die Schaltschrankinstallation muss einen Schalter oder
Unterbrechungskontakt beinhalten.
• Dieses Bauteil sollte in der Nähe der Anlage und in direkter Reichweite des Bedieners sein.
• Kennzeichnen Sie dieses Bauteil als trennende Einheit.
Anmerkung: Sie können einen Schalter oder Trennkontakt für mehrere Geräte verwenden.
* Schalten Sie induktive
Lasten (Schütze), verbinden
Sie die Klemmen AA und AB
mit einem 22nF/100Ω RCGlied.
Dieser erhöht die
Lebensdauer des Kontaktes
und unterdrückt Störspitzen bei
schalten den Induktivitäten.
! WARNUNG
Bei geöffnetem Relaiskontakt
fließen über den RC-Kreis
0,6mA bei 110Vac und 1,2mA
bei 240Vac. Achten Sie
darauf, daß durch diesen Strom
keine niedrigen Lasten
angezogen werden.
Relaisausgang
Sicherung
2A typ T
N
Regler Sicherung
2A typ T
Heiz-element Sicherung
Heizelement
T/C
Solid State
Relais
(e.g. TE10)
RC-Glied *
L
+
-
Model 2132
V+ A
1B
V-
1A
A L N
Küh-Relais
HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 5
3. Anzeige und Tastenfunktionen
Nachdem Sie den Regler eingeschaltet haben,
durchläuft dieser für ca. 3. Sekunden einen Selbsttest,
bei dem die Softwareversion angezeigt wird. Danach
zeigt das Gerät die Hauptanzeige.
Haben Sie einen der Ausgänge als Alarm konfiguriert,
wechselt die Alarmmeldung mit dem Prozeßwert,
wenn ein neuer, noch nicht bestätigter Alarm ansteht.
Steht die Alarmbedingung nach der Bestätigung noch
an, erlischt die Alarmmeldung. Der Alarmkontakt
bleibt geschaltet.
3.1 Erklärung der Anzeige und der
Tastenfunktionen
Taste/
Anzeige
Name Erklärung
Bild Taste Auswahl eines anderen
Parametermenüs
Parameter
Taste
Auswahl eines Parameters
innerhalb eines Menüs
Mehr Taste Ein Parameterwert kann
vergroßert werden.
Weniger
Taste
Ein Parameterwert kann
verkleinert werden.
OP1 Ausgang 1 Zeigt an, wenn der
Logikausgang aktiv ist.
OP2 Ausgang 2 Zeigt an, wenn der
Relaisausgang aktiv ist
MAN Handbetrieb Zeigt an, wenn sich der
Regler im Handbetrieb
befindet.
20 Ausgang 1
Ausgang 2
Prozeßwert
‘PV’)
OP1
OP2
6 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07
Beispiel der Tastenfunktionen: EIN/AUS Regler für Heizen/Kühlen
Anmerkung: In diesem Beispiel sind nur die Parameter gezeigt, die nach der entsprechenden Konfiguration
tatsächlich im Regler vorhanden sind. Die Erklärung der einzelnen Parameter sowie ein vollständiges
Parameterdiagramm finden Sie in Kapitel 6.
FiLt
CJC
mV
OFS
CAL.P
CAL
Pnt.L
OFS.L
Pnt.H
OFS.H
20.0 AL SP iP oP On.Of ACCS
X2
& & & & & &
oC
OP
w.SP3
m-A
disp
1---(1)
2---(1)
3---(1)
HY
Lbt
spL
SPH
SPrr
(2)
CYC.H
CYC.C
Ont.H
Ont.C
(2)
HYS.H
HYS.C
HC.db
codE
Goto
Conf
(2) Abhängig von der eingestellten
Regelart wird entweder das PID- oder
das EIN/AUS- Menü angezeit
(1) Die letzten 3 Ziffern
bezeichnen den Alarmtyp
HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 7
4. Zugriffsebenen
Der Regler bietet Ihnen zwei Bedien-, eine Editier- und eine Konfigurationsebene. Nach dem Selbsttest arbeitet
der Regler automatisch in der Bedienebene. Der nachstehenden Tabelle können Sie die Möglichkeiten, die Sie in
den einzelnen Ebenen haben, entnehmen.
Zugriffsebenen Anzeige Möglichkeiten Paßwortschutz
Bedienebene Oper In dieser Ebene können Sie die freigegebenen Parameter
auslesen bzw. ändern. Die Freigabe erfolgt in der Edit-
Ebene. (Kapitel 5)
Nein
Full-Ebene Ful Alle im Regler vorhandenen Parameter können von
Ihnen ausgelesen und geändert werden. (Kapitel 6)
Ja
Edit-Ebene Edit In dieser Ebene können Sie den Bedienerzugriff auf
Parameter und Menüs festelgen. (Kapitel 7)
Wählen Sie zwischen:
- Änderbar (ALtr)
- Nur lesbar (read)
- Versteckt (Hide) oder
- Promote (Pro) (Laden des Parameters in die
Bedienebene, siehe Abschnitt 7.3)
Ja
Konfigurationsebene
Conf Diese spezielle Ebene erlaubt es Ihnen, die grundlegende
Charakteristik des Reglers zu ändern. (Kapitel 8)
Ja
Bedienbene
Oper
Ful
Edit
Conf
Bedien-und
Editereben,
erreichbar über
Accs Code,
paßwortgeschützt.
Konfigurationsebene
erreichbar über
Accs Code,
paßwortgeschützt.
8 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07
4.1 Auswahl einer Zugriffsebene
Zugriffs-Menü
Drücken Sie die -Taste, bis Sie in das Zugriffs-Menü (accs) gelangen.
Mit der -Taste kommen Sie in die code Anzeige.
Paßwort
Drücken Sie einmal oder , um zur Paßworteingabe zu gelangen.
Pass zeigt an, daß kein Paßwort für den weiteren Zugriff benötigt wird.
‘0’ zeigt an, daß Sie sich in der Bedienebene befinden und ein Paßwort erwartet wird.
Mit Hilfe der und der Taste können Sie das Paßwort eingeben. 2s nach Eingabeende
zeigt die Anzeige PASS und springt in die Code Anzeige zurück. Mit oder , können
Sie testen, ob Sie das richtige Paßwort eingegeben haben. Wird nicht Pass angezeigt, müssen Sie
das Paßwort erneut eingeben.
Anmerkung: Das Paßwort für die Parameterebenen wird vom Werk auf ‘1’ eingestellt.
Die Freigabe der Ebenen bleibt solange bestehen, bis Sie entweder den Regler neu starten oder
erneut im Zugriffs-Menü ein anderes falsches) Paßwort eingeben.
Wie Sie das Paßwort ändern können, erfahren Sie in Kapitel 8, ‘Konfiguration’.
Wählen Sie ‘0’ als Paßwort, sind die unteren Ebenen nicht gesperrt.
Mit Hilfe der -Taste kommen Sie in die GOTO Anzeige (Siehe nächste Seite).
Accs
code
1
pass
oder
HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 9
Zurück zur Bedienebene
Nachdem Sie die Arbeit in einer der unteren Ebenen beendet haben, sollten Sie zurück in die Bedienebene
(oper) gehen. Aus der ful- oder der Edit-Ebene kommen Sie in die Bedienebene zurück, indem Sie im
Zugriffs-Menü wie vorne beschrieben ein “falsches” Paßwort eingeben. Wählen Sie nur oper, ohne das Paßwort
zu ändern, bleibt der Zugriff auf die weiteren Ebenen frei. Aus der Edit-Ebene geht der Regler nach 45s ohne
Tastendruck in die Bedienebene zurück
Ebenenauswahl
Wähleischen Sie den mit folgenden Ebenen:
Oper; Bedienebene edit: Edit-Ebene
Ful: Full-Ebene conf: Konfigurationsebene
2s nach Eingabeende springt die Anzeige in die goto Anzeige zurück
Zugriffs-Menü
Haben Sie oper, ful oder edit gewählt, befinden Sie sich nun in der gewählten Ebene.
Mit den Tasten und können Sie die gewünschten Parameter erreichen.
Paßwort
Haben Sie conf gewählt, müssen Sie an dieser Stelle erneut ein Paßwort eingeben. Führen
Sie dafür die oben beschriebenen Schritte durch.
Anmerkung: Das Paßwort für die Konfigurationsebene ist werksseitig auf ‘2’ gesetzt. Wie
Sie das Paßwort ändern können, erfahren Sie in Kapitel 8, ‘Konfiguration’.
Konfigurationsebene
Die erste Anzeige der Konfigurationsebene erscheint. Informationen über die einzelnen
Parameter bekommen Sie in Kapitel 8 ‘Konfiguration’. Dort wird auch beschrieben, wie Sie
die Konfigurationsebene wieder verlassen können.
goto
Oper
Ful
edit
conf
pass
goto Conf
accs
2
inst
bzw.
10 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07
5. Bedienung
5.1 Oper-Ebene
Die Oper-Ebene enthält nur die für die Bedienung
wichtigen Parameter. Möchtien Sie Parameter
freigeben oder sperren oder nur den Schreibzugriff
verweigern, müssen Sie diese Einstellungen in der
Edit-Ebene vornehmen (Kapital 7).
5.2 Einstellen des Sollwertes
Damit der Sollwert angzeigt wird, drücken Sie kurz
auf die Taste oder . Der Sollwert wird für 2
Sekunden angezeigt. Den Sollwert ändern können Sie
auch durch Drücken von oder .
5.3 Anzeigeeinheiten
Möchten Sie die anzeigeeinheiten sehen, drücken Sie
kurz die Taste oder . Die Einheit wird für 0,5
Sekunden angezeigt.
Anmerkung: Durch gleichzeitiges Drücken der Tasten
und kommen Sie jederzeit in die
Hauptanzeige zurück. Außerdem erscheint die
Hauptanzeige, wenn für 45s keine Taste betätigt wird.
OC
200.0
Dr ücken einer der
beiden Tasten
Anzeigeeinheiten
*C Grad Cenlsius
*F Grad Fahrenheit
*K Grad Kelvin
Keine Anzeige -
Linear
0,5s
Sollwert
220.0
200.0
Istwert
Drücken, um den Sollwert zu ändern
2s
HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 11
5.4 Ausgangsleistung
Um die Ausgangsleistung ansehen zu können, müssen
Sie zweimal hintereinander die Taste drücken. Es
erscheint der Parameter OP. Drücken Sie oder
, wird der Wert der Ausgangsleistung angezeigt.
Diesen Wert können Sie nicht ändern.
Achtung:
Im manuellen Standby-Modus (siehe auch
“Verwendung des Timers”) können Sie die
Ausgangsleistung auf einen Wert einstellen, das heißt,
der Heiz-oder Kühlausgang ist permanent aktiviert.
Damit der Wert für die Ausgangsleistung nicht
ungewollt verstellt wird, können Sie den Parameter OP
in der Edit-Ebene auf “read only” setzen (siehe auch
“Parameterzugriff ändern”).
20.0
Kurz drücken
OP 100.0
*C
Der Regler hat
einen100%
Heizausgang
Drücken Sie oder um den
Wert zu sehen.
12 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07
5.5 Auswahl eines Parameters
Die Einstellung der Parameter bestimmt die
Arbeitsweise Ihres Reglers. Damit Sie einfach auf
Parameter zugreifen können, sind diese in
verschiedene Menüs eingeteilt. Mit der Taste
können Sie nacheinander alle Menüüberschriften
aufrufen.
Auf Kapitel 6 finden Sie alle vorhandenen Listen
aufgeführt.
Einen Parameter innerhalb der Liste können Sie mit
aufrufen. In der Anzeige erscheint der
Parametername. Den Wert des Parameters rufen Sie
mit oder auf. Mit diesen Tasten können Sie
den Parameterwert (wenn in der Edit-Ebene
freigegben, sonst in die Full-Ebene wechseln) auch
ändern. Ca. 2s nach der Änderung blinkt der
Parameter kurz auf und der Regler übernimmt den
neuen Wert. Den nächsten Parameter in der Liste
erreichen Sie wieder durch Drücken von .
Die Parameter der Liste werden der Reihenfoge nach
aufgerufen. Nach dem letzten Parameter der Liste
erscheint wieder die Menüüberschrift.
Mit den Parametern in den einzelnen Listen können
Sie:
• die Alarmsollwerte einstellen
• den Regler optimieren
• die PID Werte manuell einstellen
• die sollwertgrenzen ändern und auf den Timer
zugreifen
• die Eingangs- und Ausgangsgrenzen ändern
Drücken Sie die Taste
weiter, werden nacheinander alle
Menüüberschriften angezeigt.
Nach der letzten Überschrift
kommen Sie zurück zur
Hauptanzeige.
20.0 aL Atun
X2
HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 13
5.6 Ändern der Alarmsollwerte
Im erstem Menü (AL) können Sie die Alarmsollwerte
einstellen. Die Alarme finden Sie in Kapital 9
beschrieben.
Ein nicht konfigurierter Alarm erscheint nicht in dem
Menü.
Anmerkung: Sie können auf alle Parameter in den
einzelnen Menüs mit dem hier beschriebenen
Vorgehen zugreifen 4.
0.5 s
*C
200.0
Nächst liste
Drücken Sie oder
wird List angezeight LiSt
AL
0
1---
-FSL = Minimalalarm
-FSH = Maximalalarm
-dEV = Abweichungsbandalarm
-dHi = Abweichungsalarm
Übersollwert
-dLo = Abweichungsalarm
Untersollwert
- = Alarmnummer
0
2---
0
3---
Weiteres Drücken der Taste zeigt alle Menüs. Am
Ende springt der Anzeiger in die Hauptanzeiger zurück.
Alarm 1 *
Alarm 2 *
Alarm 3 *
* Mit oder
sollwert ändern.
14 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07
6. Parameterübersicht
In der Full-Ebene sehen Sie alle in Ihrem Regler vorhandenen Bedienparameter. Diese können Sie wie unter 4.1
beschrieben, aufrufen und/oder ändern. Die Einstellungen der Edit-Ebene haben hier keine Bedeutung. Deshalb
ist die Full -Ebene durch ein Paßwort (1) geschützt.
In der folgenden Übersicht sind alle möglichen Parameter dargestellt. Die Anzahl und die Reihenfolge der
Parameter, die in Ihrem Gerät erscheinen, ist abhängig von der Konfiguration. Den Zugriff auf Parameter
sperren oder freigeben können Sie in der Edit-Ebene, Kapital 7. Die grau hinterlegten Felder bezeichnen die
Parameter und Menüs, die in der Oper-Ebene standardmäßig nicht sichtbar sind.
3. W.sP erscheint nur, wenn die
Sollwertrampe aktiv ist.
Hauptanzeige
Alarm
Menü
Selbstoptimierungs
Menü
PID(2)
Menü
Sollwert
Menü
Eingangs
Menü
Ausgangs
Menü
EIN/AUS(2)
Menü
Zugriffs
Menü
20.0 AL Atun Pid SP iP oP On.Of ACCS
X2
oC
OP
w.SP3
m-A
disp
1---(1)
2---(1)
3---(1)
HY
Lbt
Tune
adc
Pb
Ti
Td
Res
Lcb
Hcb
reL.C
spL
SPH
SPrr
Tm.Op
Tmr
Dwel
stat
fiLt
CJCo
MV
OFS
CAL.P
CAL
Pnt.L
OFS.L
Pnt.H
OFS.H
OP.Lo
OP.Hi
CYC.H
CYC.C
ont.H
ont.C
HYS.H
HYS.C
HC.db
code
Goto
Conf
(2) Abhängig von der eingestellten
Regelart wird entweder das PID- oder das
EIN/AUS- Menü angezeit
(1) Die letzten 3 Ziffern
bezeichnen den Alarmtyp.
HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 15
6.1 Parameterlisten
Hauptmenü Einstellbarer Bereich Vorgabe Einstellung
Op Ausgangsleistung -100% bis 0.0% = Kühlen; 0.0% bis 100.0% =
Heizen.
w.SP Arbeitssollwert Erscheint, wenn Sollwertrampe aktiviert ist. Nur-Lessen Nur-Lessen
m-A Automatik-Hand Auto Automatikbetrieb gewählt
Umschaltung mAn Handbetrieb gewählt
Auto
Std
Standard – zeight den Istwert und
nach Drücken der Mehr-
/Weniger-Taste den sollwert
OP
Zeigt die Ausgangleistung an – für
die Benutzung als Handstation
NonE Keine Anzeige, nur Alarme
erscheinen blinkend
PV Zeigt nur den Istwert
AL.SP Zeigt nur den Alarm 2 Sollwert
disp Hauptanzeige-
Optionen
pv.aL
Zeigt Istwert und Alarm 2
Sollwert nach Drücken der Mehr-
/Weniger-Taste
Std
Plus zusätzliche Promote-Parameter (Abschnitt 7.3)
16 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07
AL Alarm-Menü Einstellbarer Bereich Vorgabe Einstellung
1--- Sollwert für
Alarm 1
0
2--- Sollwert für
Alarm 2
0
3--- Sollwert für
Alarm 3
0
Es erscheinen nur die
konfigurieten Alarme.
Die letzten 3 Ziffern zeigen den Alarmtyp.
Die Werte sind innerhalb der Sollwertgrenzen
einstellbar.
-FSL Vollbereichsminimalalarm
-FSH Vollbereichsmaximalalarm
-dEv Regelabweichungsbandalarm
-dLo Regelabweichungsalarm Untersollwert
-dHi Regelabweichungsalarm Übersollwert
HY Alarmhysterese 1 bis 9999 Anzeigeeinheiten. Dieser Wert bezieht
sich auf alle Alarme. Die Hysterese verhindert ein
‘Springen’ des Alarms, wenn der Wert um den
Alarmwert schwankt.
1
Lb t Regelkreis-überwachungszeit
OFF bis 9999 Minuten OFF
HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 17
Atun Selbstoptimierungs-Menü Einstellbarer
Bereich
Vorgabe Einstellung
tunE Selbstoptimierung OFF oder on Off
Adc Automatische Arbeitspunktorrektur (bei PD
Regelung)
mAn oder caLc mAn
PiD PID-Menü Einstellbarer Bereich Vorgabe Einstellung
Pb Proportionalband 1 bis 999.9 Anzeigeeinheiten 20
ti Nachstellzeit OFF bis 9999 Sekunden 360
td Vorhaltzeit OFF bis 9999 Sekunden 60
rES Maueller Reset Nur, wenn ti = OFF;
-100 bis 100.0%
0.0
Lcb Cutback Low Auto bis 999.9 Anzeigeeinheiten Auto
Hcb Cutback High Auto bis 999.9 Anzeigeeinheiten Auto
rEL.C Relative Kühlverstärkung 0.01 bis 10.00 1.00
18 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07
SP Sollwert-Menü
Einstellbarer Bereich Vorgabe Einstellung
SP L Sollwert, untere Grenze -1999 bis 999.9, je nach Meßbereich It. Bestellg.
SP H Sollwert, obere Grenze -1999 bis 999.9, je nach Meßbereich It. Bestellg.
sprr Sollwertrampe 0FF bis 999.9 Anzeigeeinheiten pro
Minute
Off
tm.OP Timer Betriebsart Opt.1 bis Opt.5
OPt.1
tmr Verbleibende Timerzeit 0 bis 9999
minuten
0
dwEl Haltzeit 0FF bis 9999
minuten
OFF
StAt Timer Status OFF oder on
Ab
Softwareversion
1.43
OFF
HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 19
iP Eingangs-Menü
Einstellbarer Bereich Vorgabe Einstellung
FiLt Zeitkonstante des Eingangsfilters 0FF bis 999.9 Sekunden 1.6
CJC* Vergleichsstellentemperatur an den Klemmen Nur Lesen
mV Millivolt-Eingang, gemessen an den Klemmen Nur Lesen
OFS Istwert Offset -1999 bis 9999
Anzeigeeinheiten
0
CAL.P Anpassung Paßwort 0 bis 9999 3
Die folgenden Parameter erscheinen nur, wenn Sie das richtige Paßwort für die Anpassung eingegeben haben.
FACt Stellt die
Werkseinstellung
wieder her
CAL Anpassungsart FACt
USEr Benutzerdefinierte
Anpassung
Pnt.L Unterer Anpassungspunkt 0
OFS.L Offset am unteren Punkt 0
Pnt.H Oberer Anpassungspunkt 100
OFS.H Offset am oberen Punkt
-1999 bis 9999
Anzeigeeinheiten
0
20 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07
oP Ausgangsleistungs-Menü Einstellbarer Bereich Vorgabe Einstellung
OP.Lo Ausgangsleistungs untere Grenze -100 bis 100.0% 0
OP.Hi Ausgangsleistungs obere Grenze -100 bis 100.0% 100.0
CYC.H Zykluszeit Heizen 0.2 bis 999.9 Sekunden 1.0 Lgk 20 Rls
CYC.C Zykluszeit Kühlen 0.2 bis 999.9 Sekunden 5.0 Lgk 20 Rls
ont.H min. EIN-Zeit für Heizausgang Auto bis 999.9 Sekunden
(Auto = 50ms)
Auto
ont.C min. EIN-Zeit für Kühlausgang Auto bis 999.9 Sekunden
(Auto = 50ms)
auto
onOF EIN/AUS-Menü Einstellbarer Bereich Vorgabe Einstellung
hYS.H Heizhysterese 1 bis 9999 Anzeigeeinheiten 1
hYS.C Kühlhysterese 1 bis 9999 Anzeigeeinheiten 1
HC.db Todband Heizen/Kühlen 0 bis 9999 Anzeigeeinheiten 0
ACCS Zugriffs-Menü Einstellbarer Bereich Vorgabe Einstellung
codE Zugriffs-Paßwort 0 bis 9999 1
Goto Auswahl der Parameterebene Oper, Ful, Edit, conf OPEr
Conf Konfigurations-Paßwort 0 bis 9999 2
HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 21
7. Edit-Ebene
In der Edit-Ebene können Sie die Menüs der Bedienebene (Oper) gestalten. Sie haben die Möglichkeit,
Parameter für den normalen Bediener in der Oper-Ebene auszublenden oder mit einem Schreibschutz zu versehen.
Mit der Promote-Funktion können Sie Parameter in das Hauptmenü kopieren und so eine benutzerspezifische
Parameterliste erstellen. Dies gilt nur für Parameter, die standardmäßig nicht in der Hauptanzeige vorhanden sind.
In der Edit-Ebene sehen Sie nicht die Parameterwerte, sondern die Zugriffsmöglichkeit auf den Parameter.
7.1 Ändern des Parameterzugriffs
Sie haben vier Möglichkeiten für den Zugriff auf einen Parameter oder ein Menü:
• ALtr Parameterwert läßt sich in der Bedienebene ändern.
• read Parameter oder Menü kann in der Bedienebene nur gelesen werden.
• Hide Parameter oder Menü erscheinen nicht in der Bedienebene.
• Pro Kopiert einen Parameter in die Hauptanzeige (s. Abschnitt 7.3).
Gehen Sie bei der Zugriffsauswahl wie folgt vor:
- Wahlen Sie wie zuvor beschrieben die Edit-Ebene.
- Suchen Sie mit Hilfe der Tasten und den gewünschten Parameter oder das gewünschte Menü.
- Mit den Tasten und können Sie den Parameterzugriff ändern.
Beispeil: Haben Sie z. B. Alarm 2 (2FSH) gewählt, erscheint nach Drücken der Taste oder der
Zugriffsmodus des Parameters. Mit den gleichen Tasten können Sie einen neuen Zugriffsmodus auswählen.
22 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07
7.2 Ausblenden eines Menüs
Bei der Zugriffsänderung auf ein ganzes Menü haben Sie nur die Auswahl zwischen read und Hide.
Blenden Sie ein ganzes Menü aus, werden alle zugehörigen Parameter ausgeblendet.
Das Zugriffs- Menü (ACCS) läßt sich nicht ausblenden.
7.3 Promote
Sie haben die Möglichkeit, dem Hauptmenü bis zu 12 Parameter hinzuzufügen:
- Gehen Sie in die Edit-Ebene
- Wählen Sie den gewünschten Parameter
- Versehen Sie ihn mit dem Kürsel Pro.
Der Parameter wird an das Ende des Hauptmenüs kopiert. Sie haben somit im Hauptmenü und im Originalmenü
Zugriff auf diesen Parameter.
Diese Parameter können Sie nicht mit einem Schreibschutz versehen.
Beispeil: Haben Sie z. B. den Parameter tmr (verbleibende Timerzeit) gewählt, können Sie mit oder
Pro wählen.
Der Parameter tmr erscheint nun im Hauptmenü. Wiederholen Sie diesen Vorgang mit den gewünschten
Parametern. Möchten Sie einen Parameter aus dem Hauptmenü entfernen, gehen Sie in die Edit-Ebene und
wählen Sie ALtr, read oder Hide.
HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 23
8. Konfiguration
In der Konfigurationsebene können Sie die
Anzeigeeinheiten, den Sensortyp, die Skalierung, die
Alarmkonfiguration und die Paßworter ändern.
8.1 Auswahl der Konfigurationsebene
In der Konfigurationsebene können Sie mit Hilfe der
Taste die einzelnen Konfigurations-Menüs aufrufen.
Innerhalb der Menüs werden die Parameter
mit der Taste aufgerufen. Sie können
die Einstellungen der Parameter mit den
Tasten und ändern.
inSt iP AL AA
Exit pASS 1A
Geräte-Konfiguration
Goto conF
Wählen Sie mit Hilfe der Tasten
oder die Konfigurationsebene
conf
ACCS Drücken Sie die Taste bis Sie das ACCSMenü
erreichen.
codE PASS
Geben Sie mit Hilfe der Tasten
oder das Paßwort ein.
Werksseitig eingesteltes Paßwort ist 1.
PASS erscheint, wenn Sie das richtige
Paßwort eingegeben haben.
ConF PASS
Geben Sie mit Hilfe der Tasten
oder das Paßwort ein.
Paßwort Vorgabe ist 2.
PASS erscheint, wenn Sie das richtige
Paßwort eingegeben haben.
24 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07
Geräte-Konfiguration
inst
Geräte-
Konfiguration
Wert Bedeutung
*C Celsius
*F Fahrenheit
*K Kelvin
unit Anzeigeeinheiten
nonE Keine Einheit
(Linear)
nnnn Keine
nnn.n Eine
dEC.P Dezimalstelle
nn.nn Zwei
Pid PID
On.OF EIN/AUS
CtrL Regelverhalten
AL Gerät als
Alarmeinheit
Act Ausgangskennlinie rEv Revers
dir Direkt
HoLd
Keine
Stoßfreie
Umschaltung
Pd.tr Stoßfreie
Automatik/
Hand Umschaltung
bei PD-Regelung trAc
Stoßfreie
Umschaltung
HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 25
Eingangs-Konfiguration
iP Eingangs-
Konfiguration
Wert Bedeutung
j.tc Thermoelement J
k.tc Thermoelement K
L.tc Thermoelement L
r.tc Thermoelement R
b.tc Thermoelement B
n.tc Thermoelement N
t.tc Thermoelement T
S.tc Thermoelement S
PL 2 Platinell II
rtd PT 100
mV Linear mV
inPt Eingangstyp
C.tc Thermoelement C
* Linerisierung
Off Nur bei
Lineareingang
Auto Automatisch
0*C 0°C ext. Referenz
45*C 45°C ext. Referenz
CJC
(nur
T/C)
Vergleichsstellentempuratur
50*C 50°C ext. Referenz
Folgende Parameter erscheinen nur bei Linereingang (-12
bis +80mV)
InP.L mV–Eingang
min
InP.H mV–Eingang
max
VaL.L Angezeigter
Wert min
VAL.H Angezeigter
Wert max
OFF Aus (nur
Lineareing)
Auto 1,5KΩ
Hi 5KΩ
ImP
HiHi 15KΩ,
* Thermoelement C kann durch eine alternative
kundenspezifische Linearisierung ersetzt werden.
Inp.L Inp.H
VAL.H
VAL.L
mV
Anzeigewert
26 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07
Alarm-Konfiguration
In der Alarm-Konfiguration können Sie bis zu drei
Soft-alarme konfigurieren. Soft-alarme werden nur
angezeigt.
Möchten Sie, daß ein Alarm auf einen Ausgang gelegt
wird, müssen Sie diesen Alarm in der Relais-
/Logikein-/ausgangs-Konfiguration einem Ausgang
zuweisen.
AL Alarmsollwert
-Konfig.
Wert Bedeutung
OFF Kein alarm
fsL Vollbereichsminimalalarm
fsH Vollbereichsmaximalalarm
dEv Abweichungsbandalalarm
dHi Abweichungsalarm
Übersollwert
AL 1 Alarm 1
dLo Abweichungsalarm
Untersollwert
AL Alarmsollwert
-Konfig.
Wert Bedeutung
no Nicht speichern
YES Gespeichert (Auto) *
Ltch Alarm
speichern
mAn Gespeichert (Hand)
**
bLoc Alarm no Keine Unterdrückung
Unterdrücken YES Alarmunterdrückung
Für die Alarme 2 und 3 (AL 2 und AL 3) erscheinen die
gleichen Parameter.
Sp.Li Alarmsollwert diS Anzeigebereich
-grenzen Con Eingestellte Grenzen
*D. h., wurde der Alarm bestätigt, wird der Alarm
automatisch zurückgesetzt, sobald die
Alarmbedingung erlischt.
** D. h., der Alarm kann erst zurückgesetzt werden,
wenn die Alarmbedingung nicht mehr ansteht.
HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 27
Relaisausgangs-Konfiguration
Aa Relaisausgangs Wert Bedeutung
id Art des Ausgangs rELy Relais
diG Digitalausgang
(Alarm)
HEAt Heizausgang
Func Funktion
COOL Kühlausgang
noch Kein Wechsel
CLr Löschen aller
Alarme
1FSL Alarm 1 *
2FSH Alarm 2 *
3FSL Alarm 3 *
NW Neuer alarm
SBR Fühlerbruch
LBR Regelkeisüberwachung
LDF Lastfehler
MAn Handbetrieb
EnD Ende des Timers
TMG1 Timer läuft
TMG2 Timer zählt
abwärts
diG.F Funktion des
Digitalausgangs
(erscheint nicht
bei HEAt und
COOL)
Siehe unten,
“Ansteuern eines
Relais-oder
Logikausgangs
über eine
Digitalfunktion”
Die Parameter
tmg1 bis tmg4
erscheinen nur
bei einem Regler
mit Timer.
TMG3 Timer läuft **
Aa Relaisausgangs Wert Bedeutung
TMG4 Timer zählt
abwärts **
nor Normal (im
Alarmfall
stromführend)
SenS Kennlinie des
Ausgangs
Inv Invertiert (im
Alarmfall
stromlos)
* Die letzen drei Ziffern entsprechen den
konfigurierten Alarmen. Haben Sie keinen Alarm
konfiguriert, erscheint AL1, AL2, und AL3.
** tmg3 und tmg4 sind Spezialfunktionen. Haben
Sie diese gewählt, leuchten die Anzeigen OP1 und
OP2, ohne daß ein Ausgang aktiv ist. Mit dieser
Funktion kann angezeit werden, ob der Timer noch
läuft, während die Ausgänge über andere
Digitalfunktionen, z. B. Ende des Timers,
angesteuert werden.
28 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07
Logikeingangs-Konfiguration
Wählen Sie bei Logik zwischen einem Ausgang oder
einen Eingang zur Alarmquittierung, Tastensperre oder
Timerstart/-stop.
1a Relaisausgangs Wert Bedeutung
id Art des Ausgangs Log Logik
diG Digitalausgang
HEAt Heizausgang
COOL Kühlausgang
Funktion
(Ausgang)
Ssr.1 PDSIO Mode 1
Ac.aL Alarmquittierung
Loc.d Tastensperre
Digitaleingang
Func
Funktion
(Eingang)
rres Timerstart/-stop
noch Kein Wechsel
CLr Löschen aller
Alarme
1FSL Alarm 1 *
2FSH Alarm 2 *
3FSL Alarm 3 *
NW Neuer alarm
SBR Fühlerbruch
diG.F Funktion des
Digitalausgangs
(erscheint nicht
bei HEAt und
COOL)
Siehe unten,
“Ansteuern eines
Relais-oder
Logikausgangs
LBR Regelkeisüberwachung
1a Relaisausgangs Wert Bedeutung
LDF Lastfehler
MAN Handbetrieb
END Ende des Timers
TMG1 Timer läuft
TMG2 Timer zählt
abwärts
TMG3 Timer läuft **
über eine
Digitalfunktion”
Die Parameter
tmg1 bis tmg4
erscheinen nur
bei einem Regler
mit Timer. TMG4 Timer zählt
abwärts **
nor Normal (im
Alarmfall
stromführend)
SenS Kennlinie des
Ausgangs
Inv Invertiert (im
Alarmfall
stromlos)
* Die letzen drei Ziffern entsprechen den konfigurierten
Alarmen. Haben Sie keinen Alarm konfiguriert, erscheint
AL1, AL2, und AL3.
** tmg3 und tmg4 sind Spezialfunktionen. Haben Sie diese
gewählt, leuchten die Anzeigen OP1 und OP2, ohne daß
ein Ausgang aktiv ist. Mit dieser Funktion kann angezeigt
werden, ob der Timer noch läuft, während die Ausgänge
über andere Digitalfunktionen, z. B. Ende des Timers,
angesteuert werden.
HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 29
Ansteuern eine Relais- oder Logikausgangs
über eine Digitalfunktion
1. Drücken Sie die Taste , bis Func erscheint.
2. Wählen Sie mit Hilfe von oder dig.
3. Drücken Sie die Taste , bis dig.f erscheint.
4. Mit Hilfe der Tasten oder können Sie
eine Digitalfunktion wählen
5. Nach 2s springt die Anzeige zurück auf dig.F.
Die gewählte Digitalfunktion ist nun mit dem
Ausgang verbunden.
6. Drücken Sie erneut die Tasten oder . Die
ausgewählte Funktion erscheint mit zwei
Dezimalpukten (z. B. L. b. r.)
7. Möchten Sie keine Veränderung mehr
vornehmen, gehen Sie mit oder auf
noch.
Mehrere Digitalfunktionen auf einem Ausgang
Sie haben die Möglichkeit, mehrere oder auch alle
Digitalfunktionen auf einem Ausgang zu kombinieren,
indem Sie die Schritte 4-6 für jede Funktion
wiederholen.
Löschen von zugeordneten Digitalfunktionen
1. Drücken Sie die Taste , bis dig.f erscheint.
2. Mit Hilfe der Tasten oder können Sie
CLr wählen
3. Nach 2s springt die Anzeige zurück auf dig.F.
Alle Verknüpfungen sind gelöscht.
Paßwort-Konfiguration
PASS Paßwort-Konfiguration Wert Vorgabe
ACC.P Paßwort für Ful und Edit 0-9999 1
Cnf.P Paßwort für Konfiguration 0-9999 2
CAL.P Paßwort für Anpassung 0-9999 3
8.2 Verlassen der Konfigurationsebene
Drücken Sie die Taste , bis Sie
Exit erreichen. Wahlen Sie mit
oder YES. Nach 2s blinkt
die Anzeige und kehrt in die
Bedienebene zurück.
Exit YES
30 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07
9. Alarme
Die Regler der Serie 2100 können Ihnen zwei
verschiedenen Arten von Alarmmeldungen anzeigen:
1. Regelkreisalarme (z. B. Vollbereichsalarme,
Abweichungsalarme)
2. Diagnosealarme (z. B. Fühlerbruch)
Regelkreisalarme können Sie selbst konfigurieren,
einem Ausgang zuweisen und speichern. Diese
gespeicherten Alarm müssen Sie dann bestätigen.
9.1 Alarmmeldungen
Steht ein Alarm an, wird in der Anzeige eine
Alarmmeldung dargestellt. Die Alarmmeldung
wechselt mit dem aktuellen Prozeßwert.
Folgende Alarmmeldungen können in der Anzeige
erscheinen:
Kürzel Erklärung
Regelkreisalarme
-fsh Vollbereichsmaximalalarm
-fsL Vollbereichsminimalalarm
-deV Abweichungsbandalarm
-dHi Abweichungsalarm
Übersollwert
-dLo Abweichungsalarm
Untersollwert
Diese Alarme
können
gespeichert
und bestätigt
werden.
Diagnosealarme
Sbr Fühlerbruch
Lbr Regelkreisfehler
Ldf Lastfehler
End Ende des Timers
An Stelle des Striches erscheint bei einem
Regelkreisalarm die Alarmnummer (1, 2 oder 3), z. B.
1FSH (Alarm 1, Vollbereichsmaximalalarm).
Alarm1 Vollbereichsminimalalarm
1FSL
200.0
Atueller Prozeßwert
HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 31
9.2 Alarmbestätigung
Zur Alarmbestätigung müssen Sie die Tasten und
gemeinsam drücken. Es werden neben den
aktuellen dann auch noch gespeicherte, nicht mehr
anstehende Alarm bestätigt. Nicht gespeichterte
Alarme müssen Sie nicht bestätigen.
9.3 Diagnosealarme
Zusätzlich zu den Prozeßalarmen bietet Ihnen der
Regler die folgenden Diagnosealarme
Kürzel Erklärung
EE.Er Electrically Erasable Memory Error:
Der wert eines Bedien-oder
Konfigurationsparameters wurde zerstört.
Wenden Sie sich an Eurotherm.
HW.Er Hardware-Fehler: Geben Sie den Regler in
Reparatur.
LLLL Unterhalb des Anzeigebereichs: Überprüfen
Sie den Eingang.
HHHH Oberhalb des Anzeigebereichs: Überprüfen
Sie den Eingang.
Err1 Error 1: ROM Selbsttest Fehlerhaft: Geben Sie
den Regler in Reparatur.
Kürzel Erklärung
Err2 Error 2: RAM Selbsttest Fehlerhaft: Geben Sie
den Regler in Reparatur.
Err3 Error 3: Watchdog Fehler: Geben Sie den
Regler in Reparatur.
Err4 Error 4: Tastatur-Fehler: Fehlende Taste oder
Taste während des Starts gedrückt.
Err5 Error 5:. Fehler in der Eingangsschaltung:
Geben Sie den Regler in Reparatur.
Pwr.F Versorgungsfehler. Die Versorgungsspannung
ist zu niedrig. Überprüfen Sie, daß die
Spannung innerhalb der Grenzen ist.
TU.Er Selbstoptimierungsfehler: Erscheint wenn der
Optimierungsprozeß über 2 Stunden dauert.
Kontrollieren Sie Ihren Regelkreis.
Bestätigung wie vorher beschrieben.
Sbr Fühlerbruch: Überprüfen Sie den Fühler.
Lbr Regelkreisfehler: Die Rückführung ist ohne
Signal. Überprüfen Sie die gesamte
Regelstreke.
Ldf Lastfehler: Fehler in Heizkreis oder Solid State
Relais (SSR). Überprüfen Sie den Heizkreis
und das SSR.
End Ende des Timers: Siehe Kapitel 10.
32 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07
10. Timer
Der Timer gibt Ihnen die Möglichkeit, die Regelung
zeitlich zu steuern. Die für den Timer wichtigen
Parameter finden Sie im Sollwert-Menü:
Tm.OP Auswahl der Betriebsart des Timers
Tmr Verbleibende Timerzeit in Minuten
Dwel Eingestelle Timerzeit in Minuten
Stat Status des Timers
10.1 Auswahl der Betreibsart
• Drücken Sie die Taste , bis Sie Sollwert-
Menü erreichen.
• Rufen Sie mit Hilfe der Taste den Parameter
tm.OP auf
• Mit den Tasten oder können Sie die
Betriebsart des Timers wählen (Opt.1 bis
Opt.5)
10.1.1 Opt.1 - Betriebsart 1, Haltezeit und
Ausschalten
Reset
Ist der Timer zurückgesetzt, arbeitet der Regler in der
von Ihnen konfigurierten Regelart. Mit dem Parameter
m-A können Sie zwischen Automatikbetrieb (Auto)
und Handbetrieb (MAN) umschalten. Den Parameter
finden Sie im Hauptmenü.
Im Automatikbetrieb wird der Istwert auf den Sollwert
ausgeregelt.
Im Stanby-Mode befindet sich der Regler im
Handbetrieb. Die Ausgangsleistung ist an allen
Ausgängen Null. (Siehe Warnung auf Seite 11). Bei
der Auslieferung ist der Parameter m-A in der
Bedienebene gesperrt. Sie müssen den Parameter erst
in der Edit-Ebene freigeben.
Standby
Temperatur
Sollwert
Reset Timing
Timer Laufzeit
Ende
End blinkt auf der
Aufwärmzeit Anzeige
HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 33
Während der Timerlaufzeit
Startet der Timer, springt der Regler in den
Automatikbetrieb. Der Istwert wird an den Sollwert
herangefürt (Aufwärmzeit). Befindet sich der Istwert
ca. 1oC entfernt vom Sollwert, beginnt der Timer zu
zählen (Timing in Minuten).
Ende
Am Ende der Zeit (Timing) schaltet der Regler in den
Standby-Mode um. Die Ausgänge werden auf Null
gesetzt. MAN leuchtet und in der Regleranzeige
erscheint blinkend End. Das bedeutet, daß Ihr Prozeß
abkühlt. Der Timer bleibt in diesem Zustand, bis er
erneut mit und zurückgesetzt wird.
Neuer Reset
Haben Sie den Timer zurückgesetzt ( und
gleichzeitig drücken), erlischt End auf der Anzeige.
Der Regler befindet sich weiterhin in Standby-Mode.
Möchten Sie zum normalen Reglerbetreib wechseln,
setzen Sie den Parameter m-A in Haupt-Menü auf
Auto.
10.1.2 Opt.2 - Betriebsart 2, Haltezeit und
nicht Ausschalten
Diese Betriebsart entspricht der Betriebsart 1, nur daß
nach Ablauf der Zeit (Timing) der Regler im
Automatikbetrieb bleibt.
Unendliche Haltezeit
auf Sollwerttemperatur
Temperatur
Sollwert
Reset Timing
Timer Laufzeit
Ende
End blinkt auf der
Anzeige
Aufwärmzeit
Auto
m-A
Drücken Sie solange , bis der
Parameter m-A erscheint. Wählen Sie
mit oder
Auto Automatikbetreib
mAn Standby (Hand - MAN leuchet)
Drücken Sie gleichzeitig und , um in die
Hauptanzeige zurückzukehren.
34 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07
10.1.3 Opt.3 (Betriebsart 3), Aufheizen,
Haltezeit und Ausschalten
Auch die Betriebsart 3 entspricht der Betriebsart 1.
Der einzige Unterschied ist, daß die Zeit sofort bei
Start des Timers losläuft, d. h. die Aufwärmzeit
entfällt. Somit ist die Zeit bis zum Erreichen des
Sollwerts Teil des Timings.
10.1.4 Opt.4 (Betriebsart 4), Aufheizen,
Haltezeit und nicht Ausschalten
Die Betriebsart 4 arbeitet entsprechend der Betriebsart
2, nur daß auch hier die Zeit bis zum Erreichen des
Sollwerts Teil des Timings ist.
Standby
Temperatur
Sollwert
Reset Timing Ende
End blinkt auf der
Anzeige
Reset
Unendliche Haltezeit auf
Sollwerttempuratur
Sollwert
Timing Ende
End blinkt auf der
Anzeige
Temperatur
HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 35
10.1.5 Opt.5 (Betriebsart 5) -
Einschaltverzögerung
Haben Sie die Betriebsart 5 gewählt, wird das
Einschalten des Reglers um die Timerzeit verzögert.
Sobald Sie den Timer starten, schaltet das Gerät in den
Stanby-Modus und startet das Timing. Am Ende der
Zeit schaltet der Regler in den Automatikbetrieb.
10.1.6 Rampe/Haltezeit Profil
Sie haben die Möglichkeit, mit Hilfe der
Sollwertrampe (Sprr) und des Timers ein einfaches
Rampe/Haltezeit Profil zu programmieren. Um die
Programmierung zu vereinfachen, kopieren Sie zuerst
die Parameter Sprr und w.SP in die Bedienebene
(Abschnitt 7.3, Promote).
Geben Sie für den Parameter eine gewünschte
Rampensteigung ein. Sie können den Wert in
Schritten von 1/10 des eingestellten Anzeigebereichs
wählen. Das heißt, haben Sie einen Anzeigebereich,
von 1 bis 1000oC können Sie für die Rampensteigung
einen Wert zwischen 0,01 und 999,9 oC pro Minute
wählen.
Haben Sie die Rampensteigung eingestellt und den
Timer gestartet, springt der Arbeitssollwert w.sp, zur
aktuellen Temperatur und läuft dann mit der
eingestellten Rampensteigung bis zum Zielsollwert.
Haben Sie für den Timer Betriebsart 1 oder 2 gewählt,
startet die Zeit (Timing), wenn Istwert und Sollwert
eine Differenz von 1oC haben. In den Betriebarten 3
und 4 startet der Timer, wenn der Arbeitsollwert w.sp
noch 1oC vom Zielsollwert entfernt ist.
Unendliche Haltezeit
auf Sollwerttemperatur
Temperatur
Sollwert
Reset Timing Reset
Standby
36 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07
10.2 Starten und Rücksetzen des Timers
Es stehen Inhen zwei Metoden zur Verfügung:
Methode 1.
Dies ist die einfachste Methode, um den Timer zu
überwachen.
• Drücken Sie , bis Sie das Sollwert-Menü
erreichen.
• Drücken Sie , bis Sie den Parameter tMr
aufrufen.
Anmerkung: Um diesen Vorgang zu vereinfachen,
können Sie den Parameter tmr in die Hauptanzeige
kopieren (s. Abschnitt 7.3, Promote).
Sobald Sie den Wert für die verbleibende Zeit (tmr)
geändert haben, startet der Timer mit der angegebenen
Zeit. Tmr zählt abwärts bis Null. Sie können auch
während der Laufzeit des Timers die verbleibende Zeit
verändern, um den Timer den Erfordernissen Ihres
Prozesses anzupassen. Setzen Sie tmr auf Null, wird
der Timer gestoppt.
Anmerkung: Bei dieser Methode werden die
Parameter dwel und stat nicht geändert, d. h.
Status und Gesamtlaufzeit des Timers werden nicht
übernommen.
Ist der Timer abgelaufen, erscheint die blinkende
Meldung End auf der Anzeige. Diese bleibt solange
bestehen, bis Sie einen neuen Wert für tmr eingeben
und so den Timer neu starten.
Den Timer können Sie zurücksetzen, indem Sie die
Tasten und gleichzeitig drücken. ‘end’
erlischt.
Stellen Sie in dem Parameter tmr einen neuen Wert
ein, startet der Timer erneut.
1234
Tmr
Betätigen Sie die Tasten
oder , um die verbleibende
Zeit (0 bis 9999 Minuten)
einzustellen.
HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 37
Methode 2.
Mit dieser Methode können Sie einen festen Wert für
den Timer vorgeben und ihn über den Parameter
stat starten und stoppen.
Wenn Sie den Logikein-/-ausgang als EIN/AUSSchließkontakteingang
kongfigurieren, können Sie den
Parameter stat über diesen Eingang umschalten.
Öffnen Sie den Kontakt (flankengetriggert), wird der
Parameter auf run gesetzt, schließen Sie den Kontakt,
steht der Parameter auf Off.
Der Parameter wird immer auf OFF gesetzt (tmr =
0), wenn der Kontakt geschlossen ist.
1234
dwel
run
stat
sp Drücken Sie die Taste , bis Sie das
sollwert-Menü erreichen. Wählen Sie
dann mit Hilfe der Taste den
Parameter dwel
Haltezeit
Wählen Sie mit den Tasten oder
die Timerzeit (0 bis 9999
Minuten).
Timer Status
Möchten Sie den Timer starten, wählen
Sie mit den Tasten oder run.
Die eingegebene Haltzeit wird in den
Parameter tmr kopiert und der Timer
läuft. Möchten Sie den Timer
rücksetzen, wählen Sie Off.
tmr wird sofort auf Null gesetzt.
38 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07
11. Anpassung
Die Werkskalibrierung ist hochgenau. Zur
Kompensation von Sensor-oder Systemfehlern können
Sie der Kalibrierung einen Offset hinzufügen.
Möchten Sie über den gesamten Anzeigerbereich einen
festen Offset einstellen, wählen Sie im Eingangs-Menü
(iP) den Parameter OFS und geben Sie den Wert ein.
Sie können auch die Kurve an zwei Punkten
ausrichten. Gehen Sie bei der Zwei-Punkt-Anpassung
wie folgt vor:
• Drücken Sie die Taste , bis Sie das Eingangs-
Menü erreichen.
• Wählen Sie mit Hilfe der Taste den
Parameter CAL.P
• Geben Sie mit den Tasten oder das
Paßwort ein. Vorgabe ist 3. Pass wird
angezeigt, wenn Sie das richtige Paßwort
eingegeben haben.
• Wählen Sie mit der Taste den Parameter
CAL.
• Wählen Sie mit oder User (Fact ist
die Werkseinstellung)
• Mit der Taste können Sie nacheinander die
vier Anpassungsparameter aufrufen (s. unten).
Stellen Sie mit Hilfe der Tasten oder
den gewünschten Punkt der Anpassung und den
entsprechenden Offset ein. Die Parameter
pnt.H und OFS.H erscheinen nur, wenn Sie
ersten zwei Parameter eingestellt haben.
Eingang
Anzeigewert
Werkskalibrierung
Pnt.H
OFS.H
OFS.L
Pnt.L
Angepaßter Wert
Oberer Anpassungspunkt
Unterer Anpassungspunkt
Angepaßter Wert
Anpassung
HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 39
12. Selbstoptimierung
Bei einer PID Regelung wird der Ausgang durch die
Proportional-Integral- und Differentialanteile
bestimmt. Sind diese Komponenten richtig
dimensioniert, kann der Regler den Ausgang so regeln,
daß der Istwert dem Sollwert entspricht und keine
Schwingungen auftreten.
Die Einstellung der Werte ist abhängig von Ihrem
Prozeß.
Die Reglermodelle 2132 und 2116 arbeiten mit einem
‘One-shot’-Tuner. Der Regelausgang wird an- und
ausgeschaltet und simuliert somit ein Oszillation der
Stellgröße. Der Regler errechnet die Parameterwerte
aus Amplitude und Schwingungsdauer der Oszillation.
Parameter Kürzel Funktion
Proportionalband
Pb Die Bandbreite in
Anzeigeeinheiten, über welche
die Ausgangsleistung zwischen
min und max proportional
verstellt wird.
Nachstellzeit ti Die Zeitspanne, welche bei der
Sprungantwort benötigt wird,
um aufgrund einer I-Wirkung
eine gleich große
Parameter Kürzel Funktion
Stellgrößenänderung zu
erzielen, wie sie infolge des PAnteils
entsteht.
Vorhaltzeit td Die Zeitspanne, um welche die
Anstiegsantwort eines PDReglers
einen bestimmten Wert
der Stellgröße früher erreicht
als er ihn infolge seines PAnteils
allein erreichen würde.
High Cutback Hcb Die Anzahl der
Anzeigeeinheiten oberhalb des
Sollwertes, bei denen der
Regler die Ausgangsleistung
erhöht, um Unterschwinger zu
vermeiden.
Low cutback Lcb Die Anzahl der
Anzeigeeinheiten unterhalb des
Sollwertes, bei denen der
Regler die Ausgangsleistung
vermindert, um Überschwinger
zu vermeiden.
Relative
Kühlverstärkung
rEL.C Ermittelt das Proportionalband
für die Kühlung, indem es Pb
durch rEL dividiert
40 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07
Besteht bei voller Heiz- oder Kühlleistung Gefahr für
Ihren Prozeß, können Sie die Grenzen dieser
Leistungen verändern. Passen Sie die Parameter für
die Grenzen der Ausgangsleistung Ihrem Prozeß an
(siehe op-Menü)
Aktivieren Sie die Selbstoptimierung einmal bei
Inbetriebnahme eines Prozesses.
Sollte die Regelung instabil werden, können Sie
jederzeit eine neue Selbstoptimierung starten.
Starten Sie die Selbstoptimierung bei
Umgebungstemperatur des Prozesses, damit der Tuner
die Cutbackwerte bestimmen kann.
Einstellen der Zykluszeiten
Stellen Sie vor der Selbstoptimierung die Parameter
CYC.H (Zykluszeit Heizen) und CYC.C (Zykluszeit
Kühlen) im Ausgangsleistungs-Menü ein.
Setzen Sie die Werte für einen Logikheizausgang auf
CYC.H = 1s, für einen Relaisausgang auf CYC.H = 20s
und für einen Logikkühlausgang auf CYC.C = 5,0s.
12.1 Aktivierung der Selbstoptimierung
Die Selbstoptimierung ist nur bei ausgeschalteter
Sollwertrampe möglich (sprr = OFF)
1. Geben Sie den Arbeitssollwert ein.
2. Setzen Sie den Parameter ‘tunE’ im Atun-
Menü auf ‘on’
3. Drücken Sie gleichzeitig die Tasten und ,
damit Sie in die Hauptanzeige zurückkehren. Die
Anzeige tune gibt an, daß die Selbstoptimierung
gestartet ist (tune wechselt mit Istwert).
4. Der Regler induziert eine Oszillation in der
Temperatur, indem er die Heizung erst ein- dann
wieder ausschaltet.
5. Nach Beenden der Selbstoptimierung (2 Zyklen)
berechnet der Regler die Parameter und geht zum
normalen Regelbetrieb über.
Arbeiten Sie mit P, PD oder PI – Regelung, setzen Sie
die nicht benötigten Parameter td bzw. ti auf OFF
bevor Sie die Selbstoptimierung starten. Der Tuner
berechnet dann keine Werte für diese Parameter.
HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 41
12.1.1 Berechnung der Cutbackwerte
Mit Hilfe der Parameter Low und High Cutback
werden Über- bzw. Unterschwinger bei großen
Temperaturänderungen vermieden.
Haben Sie die Parameter auf Auto gesetzt, werden sie
auf das Dreifache des Proportionalbandes eingestellt.
Diese Werte werden dann während der
Selbstopmierung nicht mehr geändert.
12.2 Manuelle Optimierung
Sie können den Regler manuell optimieren. In diesem
Abschnitt wird die Optimierung nach dem Ziegler-
Nichols- Verfahren beschrieben.
Der prozeß befindet sich auf Arbeitstemperatur.
1. Setzen Sie die Parameter ti und td auf OFF.
2. Stellen Sie die Parameter Hcb und Lcb, auf Auto.
3. Der Istwert weicht vom Sollwert ab (PAbweichung).
4. Sobald sich die Temperatur stabilisiert hat,
reduzieren Sie den Wert des Proportionalbandes
Pb, bis die Temperatur anfängt zu schwingen.
Erhöhen Sie den Wert des Proportionalbandes
wieder soweit, daß die Temperatur gerade aufhört
zu schwingen. Nehmen Sie sich für diese
Einstellung viel Zeit. Notieren Sie sich den Wert
des Proportionalbandes B und die Periodendauer
T.
5. Berechnen Sie die Werte für ti, td und Pb nach der
folgenden Tabelle. Stellen Sie die berechneten
Werte im Regler ein.
Regelart Pb ti td
Proportional 2xB OFF OFF
P + I 2,2xB 0,8xT OFF
P + I + D 1,7xB 0,5xT 0,12xT
Prozeßgröße
Optimierungssollwert
Fiktiver
sollwert
Geräte mit
Heizund
Kühlausgang
Zeit
Optimierung
beendet (Heizund
Kühlausgang)
Optimierung
beendet nur
(Heizausgang)
Ausgang 0%
-100%
100%
42 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07
12.2.1 Einstellen der Cutbackwerte
Haben Sie die Parameter wie vorher beschrieben
eingestellt, ist der Regler für eine Geradeausregelung
optimiert.
Treten während der Startphase oder bei größeren
Temperatursprüngen unakzeptable Über- oder
Unterschwinger auf, sollten Sie die Parameter Lcb
und Hcb einstellen.
1. Setzen Sie Lcb = Hcb = 3 x PB.
2. Notieren Sie sich die werte der Über- bzw.
Unterschwinger für einen großen
Temperatursprung (siehe unten).
3. Beispiel a) Erhöhen Sie den Parameter Lcb um
den Wert des Überschwingers.
Beispiel b) Verringern Sie den Parameter Lcb um den
wert des Unterschwingers.
Beispiel (a)
Beispiel (b)
Nähert sich der Iswert dem Sollwert von oben, können
Sie Hcb nach dem gleichen Verfahren berechnen.
12.2.2 Manual Reset
Arbeiten Sie mit einem PD-Regler, ist der Parameter
ti auf OFF gesetzt und es bleibt eine Abweichung
zwischen Soll- und Iswert. In diesem Fall erscheint im
PID-Menü der parameter für den Manual reset (res).
Mit diesem Parameter wird der Ausgangsleistung ein
Offset aufgeschatet, um die Abweichung auszuregeln.
Geben Sie diesen Parameterwert manuell ein, um eine
bleibende Abweichung zu vermeiden.
Prozeßgröße
Unterschwingen
Zeit
Sollwert
Prozeßgröße
Zeit
Sollwert Uberschwingen
HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 43
13. Bestellcodierung
Codieren Sie den gewünschten Regler nach dem vorliegenden Schema.
Modell Funktion Versorgung Anleitung Logikein/ausgang Relais
Funktion
CC PID Regler
NF EIN/AUS
Regler
TC PID + Timer
TN EIN/AUS +
Timer
Versorgung
VH 85-264V AC
VL 20 -29V AC/DC
Anleitung
XXX Keine
Anleitung
ENG Englisch
FRA Französisch
GER Deutsch
NED Holländisch
SPA Spanisch
SWE Schwedisch
ITA Italienisch
Relais
XX Keine Ausgang
RH Heizen
RC Kühlen
FH Max Alarm 2
FL Min Alarm 2
AL Max Alarm 2 & Min
Alarm 3
DB Abweichungsband
DL Abw. Untersollwert
DH Abw. Übersollwert
NW Neuer Alarm
Logikein/ausgang
XX Keine Logikausgang
Logikausgang
LH Heizen
LC Kühlen
M1 PDSIO mode 1
FH Max alarm 1
FL Min alarm 1
DB Abweichungsband
DL Abw. Untersollwert
DH Abw. Übersollwert
NW Neuer alarm
Logikeingang
AC Alarmquittierung
KL Tastensperre
TM Timer Start/Stop
Modell
2132 1/16 DIN
2116 1/8 DIN
44 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07
Sensor Bereich min Bereich max Einheit Externes relais Eingangsadapter
Externes relais
XX Kein Relais
R7 Relais (über Logikausgang)
Einheit
C °C
F ° F
K Kelvin
X Linear
Adapter (0-10V)
XX Kein Adapter
V1 0-10Vdc
A1 0-20mA Widerstand (2,49Ω. 0,1%)
Sensor Bereich min & max
Thermoelement
°C
J Typ J -210 bis 1200
K Typ K -200 bis 1372
T Typ T -200 bis 400
L Typ L -200 bis 900
N Typ N -200 bis 1300
R Typ R -50 bis 1768
S Typ S -50 bis 1768
B Typ B 0 bis 1820
P Platinell II 0 bis 1369
Widerstandsthermometer
Z Pt100 -200 bis 850
Kundenspezifische Eingänge (kein Standard) OC
C Typ C -W5%Re/W26%Re (Vorgabe) 0 bis 2319
D Typ D - W3%Re/W25%Re 0 bis 2399
E Typ E -200 bis 999
1 Ni/Ni18%Mo 0 bis 1399
2 Pt20%Rh/Pt40%Rh 0 bis 1870
3 W/W26%Re (Engelhard) 0 bis 2000
4 W/W26%Re (Hoskins) 0 bis 2010
5 W5%Re/W26%Re (Engelhard) 10 bis 2300
6 W5%Re/W26%Re(Bucose) 0 bis 2000
7 Pt10%Rh/Pt40%/Rh 200 bis 1800
8 Exegen K80 I.R. Pyrometer -45 bis 650
Linear
M -9.99 bis +80mV
Y 0 bis 20mA
A 4 bis 20mA
V 0 bis 10Vdc
-1999 bis 9999
HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 45
14. Technische Daten
Schutzart IP65 (EN 60529), oder 4X (NEMA 250)
Umgebungstemperatur Betrieb: 0 bis 55oC. Sorgen Sie für genügend Luftzirkulation; Lagerung: -30oC bis +75oC.
Relative Feuchte 5 bis 95%, nicht kondensierend
Umgebung Die Geräte sind nicht geeignet für den Gebrauch in explosiver oder korrosiver Umgebung; alle
Angaben beziehen sich auf Einsatzbereich unter 2000m NN
Elektrische Voraussetzungen
Netzspannung 100 bis 240Vac -15%, +10%, 48-62Hz, 5Watts max
Kleinspannung 24VDC/AC + 20%. DC bis 62Hz, 5Watts
Relaisausgang (isoliert) Max: 264VAC, 2A ohm’sch;. Min: 12VDC, 100mA
Lebensdauer: Mech: 107 Schaltungen: Elektr: 5 x106 Schaltungen
Verdrahtung Der Kabelquerschnitt darf 0,5mm2 (16AWG) nicht unterschreiten.
Überstromschutz Verwenden Sie unabhängige 2A Sicherungen für Versorgung und Relais, z. B. EN60127 (typ T)
Logikein-und-ausgang 9V bei 12mA, nicht isoliert; der Digitaleingang ist nicht vom Sensoreingang getrennt
Elektrische Sicherheit (nach EN 61010)
Überspannungstransienten Überspannungstransienten der Netzspannung an allen Spannungsversorgungen zum Gerät
maximal 2,5kV
Verschmutzungsgrad 2 Leitend Verschmutzungen dürfen nicht in das Gerät gelangen
Isolation Alle isolierten Ein- und Ausgänge sind durch eine verstärkte Isolierung galvanisch getrennt
Vergleichsstelle >30 bis 1, interne Vergleichsstelle.
Überspannungskategorie Kategorie II oder CAT II
46 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07
15. Informationen zu Sicherheit und
EMV
Dieser Regler wurde in Großbritannien von Eurotherm
Ltd hergestellt.
Bitte lesen Sie dieses Kapitel, bevor Sie den Regler
installieren.
Der Regler ist für industrielle Anwendungen im
Bereich der Temperaturregelung vorgesehen und
entspricht den Europäischen Richtlinien für Sicherheit
und EMV. Andere Anwendungen oder
Nichtbeachtung der Anweisungen in dieser
Bedienungsanleitung kann die Sicherheit des Reglers
beeinträchtigen. Es liegt in der Verantwortlichkeit des
Inbetriebnehmers, diese Richtlinien bei der Installation
des Geräts einzuhalten.
15.1 Allgemein
Die Informationen in dieser Anleitung können ohne
besondere Hinweise geändert werden. Trotz aller
Bemühungen für die Richtigkeit der Angaben kann der
Lieferant nicht für in der Anleitung enthaltene Fehler
verantwortlich gemacht werden.
15.1.1 Sicherheit
Dieses Gerät entspricht der Europäischen
Niederspannungsrichtlinie 73/23/EWG, ergänzt durch
93/68/EWG, unter Anwendung des
Sicherheitsstandards EN 61010.
15.1.2 Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit
Dieser Regler ist konform zu der EMV Richtlinie
89/336/EWG und den erforderlichen
Schutzanforderungen. Die Konformität ist durch eine
Drittstelle geprüft und die technischen Unterlagen sind
dort abgelegt. Das Gerät ist für Anwendungen im
Industriebereich nach EN 61326 vorgesehen.
HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 47
15.1.3 Auspacken und Lagerung
Die Verpackung sollte ein Gerät in einem Gehäuse,
zwei Halteklammern und eine Bedienungsanleitung
enthalten. Geräte für bestimmte Bereiche benötigen
zusätzlich einen Eingangsadapter.
Ist die Verpackung beschädigt, sollten Sie das Gerät
nicht einbauen und Kontakt mit der nächsten
Eurotherm Niederlassung aufnehmen. Möchten Sie
das Gerät vor der Benutzung lagern, schützen Sie es
vor Feuchtigkeit und Verschmutzungen und halten Sie
die Lagertemperaturen von –10 oC bis +70 oC ein.
15.2 Service und Reparatur
Dieses Gerät ist wartungsfrei.
Sollte das Gerät einen Fehler aufweisen, kontaktieren
Sie bitte die nächste Eurotherm Niederlassung.
15.2.1 Achtung: Geladene Kondensatoren
Bevor Sie den Regler aus dem Gehäuse entfernen,
nehmen Sie das Gerät vom Netz und warten Sie etwa 2
Minuten, damit sich Kondensatoren entladen können.
Es ist sinnvoll, den Regler zum Teil aus dem Gehäuse
zu ziehen und dann zu warten, bis Sie ihn ganz aus
dem Gehäuse entfernen. Halten Sie diese Zeit nicht
ein, können Kondensatoren mit gefährlicher Spannung
geladen sein. Vermeiden Sie auf jeden Fall jede
Berührung der Elektronik, wenn Sie das Gerät aus dem
Gehäuse entfernen.
15.2.2 Elektrostatische Entladung
Haben Sie den Regler aus dem Gehäuse entfernt,
können einige der freiliegenden Bauteile durch
elektrostatische Entladungen beschädigt werden.
Beachten Sie deshalb alle Vorsichtsmaßnahmen
bezüglich statischer Entladungen.
15.2.3 Reinigung
Verwenden Sie für die Reinigung der Geräteaufkleber
kein Wasser oder auf Wasser basierende
Reinigungsmittel sondern Isopropyl Alkohol. Die
Oberfläche der Geräte können Sie mit einer milden
Seifenlösung reinigen.
48 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07
15.3 Installation Sicherheitshinweise
15.3.1 Sicherheits Symbole
Folgende Symbole können am Gerät angebracht sein:
! Achtung (siehe Dokumentation)
15.3.2 Personal
Lassen Sie die Installation dieses Geräts nur von
qualifiziertem Personal durchführen.
15.3.3 Berührung
Bauen Sie das System zum Schutz vor Berührung in
ein Gehäuse ein.
15.3.4 Achtung: Fühler unter Spannung
Der Regler ist so konstruiert, dass der
Temperaturfühler direkt mit einem elektrischen
Heizelement verbunden werden kann. Es liegt in Ihrer
Verantwortung dafür zu sorgen, dass Servicepersonal
nicht an unter Spannung stehende Elemente gelangen
kann. Ist der Fühler mit dem Heizelement verbunden,
müssen alle Leitungen, Anschlüsse und Schalter, die
mit dem Fühler verbunden sind, für 240 V AC CATII
ausgestattet sein.
Der Logik EA ist nicht von den PV Eingängen isoliert.
15.3.5 Verdrahtung
Die Verdrahtung muss korrekt, entsprechend den
Angaben in dieser Bedienungsanleitung und den
jeweils gültigen Vorschriften, erfolgen. Achten Sie
besonders darauf, dass die AC Spannungsversorgung
nicht mit dem Sensoreingang oder anderen
Niederspannungsein- oder -ausgängen verbunden wird.
Verwenden Sie Kupferleitung (außer für
Thermoelementanschluss) und achten Sie darauf, dass
alle Zuleitungen und Anschlussklemmen für die
entsprechende Stromstärke dimensioniert sind.
Weiterhin sind alle Anschlüsse nach den gültigen
VDE-Vorschriften bzw. den jeweiligen
Landesvorschriften vorzunehmen.
15.3.6 Isolation
Die Installation muss einen Trennschalter oder einen
Leistungsschalter beinhalten. Bauen Sie diesen
Schalter in der Nähe des Systems und gut erreichbar
für den Bediener ein. Kennzeichnen Sie den Schalter
als trennende Einheit.
HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 49
15.3.7 Überstromschutz
Sichern Sie die DC Spannungsversorgung des Reglers
mit einer Sicherung. Das schützt die Regler-Platinen
vor Überstrom.
15.3.8 Maximalspannungen
Die maximal anliegende Spannung der folgenden
Klemmen muss weniger als 264 V AC betragen:
• Relaisausgang zu Logik-, DC oder
Fühlerverbindungen;
• jede Verbindung gegen Erde.
Schließen Sie den Regler nicht an Drehstromnetze
ohne geerdeten Mittelpunkt an. Im Falle eines Fehlers
kann es bei dieser Versorgung zu Spannungen über
264 V AC kommen. Das Gerät kann dadurch zerstört
werden.
15.3.9 Umgebung
Leitende Verschmutzungen dürfen nicht in den
Schaltschrank gelangen. Um eine geeignete
Umgebungsluft zu erreichen, bauen Sie einen Luftfilter
in den Lufteintritt des Schaltschranks ein. Sollte der
Regler in kondensierender Umgebung stehen (niedrige
Temperaturen), bauen Sie eine thermostatgeregelte
Heizung in den Schaltschrank ein.
Dieses Produkt entspricht der Norm BS EN61010
Überspannungskategorie II, Verschmutzungsgrad 2.
Diese sind wie folgt definiert:
15.3.10 Überspannungskategorie II
Nennspannung: 230 V. Vorzugswerte von Steh-
Stoßspannungen für Überspannungskategorie 2: 2500
V
15.3.10.1 Verschmutzungsgrad 2
Übliche, nicht leitfähige Verschmutzung; gelegentlich
muss mit vorübergehender Leitfähigkeit durch
Betauung gerechnet werden.
15.3.11 Erdung des Fühlerschirms
In manchen Anwendungen wird der Sensor bei
laufendem System gewechselt. In diesem Fall sollten
Sie als zusätzlichen Schutz vor Stromschlag den
Schirm des Temperatursensors erden. Verbinden Sie
den Schirm nicht mit dem Maschinengehäuse.
50 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07
15.3.12 Anlagen- und Personensicherheit
Beim Entwurf eines Regelsystems sollten Sie sich
auch über die Folgen bei Fehlfunktionen Gedanken
machen. Bei einem Temperatur-Regelsystem besteht
die Gefahr einer ständig laufenden Heizung. Das kann
zu Personen- und Anlagenschäden führen.
Gründe für eine fehlerhafte Heizung können sein:
• Beschädigung des Sensors durch den Prozess
• Die Verdrahtung des Thermoelementes wird
kurzgeschlossen
• Reglerausfall in der Heizperiode
• Eine externe Klappe oder Schütz ist in
Heizposition blockiert
• Der Reglersollwert ist zu hoch.
Schützen Sie sich und die Anlage durch eine
zusätzliche Temperatur-Schutzeinheit. Diese sollte
einen unabhängigen Temperaturfühler und ein Schütz
besitzen, der den Heizkreis abschalten kann.
Anmerkung: Das Alarmrelais im Regler dient nicht
zum Schutz der Anlage, sondern nur zum Erkennen
und Anzeigen der Alarme.
15.4 EMV Installationshinweise
Um sicherzustellen, dass die EMV-Anforderungen
eingehalten werden, treffen Sie folgende Maßnahmen:
• Stellen Sie sicher, dass die Installation gemäß den
"Eurotherm EMV-Installationshinweisen",
Bestellnummer
HA025464, durchgeführt wird.
• Bei Relaisausgängen müssen Sie eventuell einen
geeigneten Filter einsetzen, um die
Störaussendung zu unterdrücken. Bei typischen
Anwendungen empfehlen wir Schaffner FN321
oder FN612. Bitte beachten Sie, dass die
Anforderungen an die Filter jedoch von der
verwendeten Lastart abhängen.
• Verwenden Sie den Regler in einem
Tischgehäuse, sind unter Umständen die
Anforderungen der Fachgrundnorm EN 50081-1
(Wohn-, Geschäft- und Gewerbebereich) gültig.
Bauen Sie in diesem Fall einen passenden Filter
in das Gehäuse ein. Wir empfehlen Schaffner
FN321 und FN612.
HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07 51
15.4.1 Leitungsführung
Um die Aufnahme von elektrischem Rauschen zu
minimieren, verlegen Sie die Leitungen von Logikund
Stetigausgang und Sensoreingang weitab von
Netzspannungsleitungen. Ist dies nicht möglich,
verwenden Sie bitte abgeschirmte Kabel. Die
Abschirmung muss an einem Ende geerdet sein.
Achten Sie darauf, die Leitungslänge so kurz wie
möglich zu halten.
Führt die Signalverdrahtung gefährliche
Spannungswerte (oder kann unter Fehlerbedingungen
gefährliche Spannungswerte führen), ist eine doppelte
Isolierung notwendig.
* Eine vollständige Erklärung der 'gefährlichen
Spannung' finden Sie unter 'Hazardous Live' in der
Norm BS EN61010. Zusammengefasst besagt diese,
dass im Normabetrieb Spannungswerte über 30 Veff
(42,2 V Spitze) oder über 60 V DC als gefährlich
eingestuft werden.
52 HA026270GER Ausgabe 5.0 08/07
16. RoHS
Product group 2100
Table listing restricted substances
Chinese
产
2100 铅镉铬溴联苯溴苯醚
线组X O X O O O
属O O O O O O
显X O O O O O
块X O X O O O
O
X
English
Product
2100 Pb Hg Cd Cr(VI) PBB PBDE
PCBA X O X O O O
Enclosure O O O O O O
Display X O O O O O
Modules X O X O O O
O
X
Approval
Name: Position: Signature: Date:
Martin Greenhalgh Quality Manager
IA029470U450 (CN23172) Issue 1 Feb 07
Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous
materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006.
该质该质SJ/T11363-2006
标规
Toxic and hazardous substances and elements
Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for
this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006.
Restricted Materials Table
Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)
览
质
该质该质SJ/T11363-2006
标规
AUSTRALIA Sydney
Eurotherm Pty. Ltd.
Telephone (+61 2) 9838 0099
Fax (+61 2) 9838 9288
E-mail info.au@eurotherm.com
AUSTRIA Vienna
Eurotherm GmbH
Telephone (+43 1) 7987601
Fax (+43 1) 7987605
E-mail info.at@eurotherm.com
BELGIUM & LUXEMBURG Moha
Eurotherm S.A/N.V.
Telephone (+32) 85 274080
Fax (+32 ) 85 274081
E-mail info.be@eurotherm.com
BRAZIL Campinas-SP
Eurotherm Ltda.
Telephone (+5519) 3707 5333
Fax (+5519) 3707 5345
E-mail info.br@eurotherm.com
DENMARK Copenhagen
Eurotherm Danmark AS
Telephone (+45 70) 234670
Fax (+45 70) 234660
E-mail info.dk@eurotherm.com
FINLAND Abo
Eurotherm Finland
Telephone (+358) 22506030
Fax (+358) 22503201
E-mail info.fi@eurotherm.com
FRANCE Lyon
Eurotherm Automation SA
Telephone (+33 478) 664500
Fax (+33 478) 352490
E-mail info.fr@eurotherm.com
GERMANY Limburg
Eurotherm Deutschland GmbH
Telephone (+49 6431) 2980
Fax (+49 6431) 298119
E-mail info.de@eurotherm.com
HONG KONG & CHINA
Eurotherm Limited North Point
Telephone (+85 2) 28733826
Fax (+85 2) 28700148
E-mail info.hk@eurotherm.com
Guangzhou Office
Telephone (+86 20) 8755 5099
Fax (+86 20) 8755 5831
E-mail info.cn@eurotherm.com
Beijing Office
Telephone (+86 10) 6567 8506
Fax (+86 10) 6567 8509
E-mail info.cn@eurotherm.com
Shanghai Office
Telephone (+86 21) 6145 1188
Fax (+86 21) 6145 1187
E-mail info.cn@eurotherm.com
International Sales and Service
http://www.eurotherm.co.uk
HA026270EFG/5 CN23704
INDIA Chennai
Eurotherm India Limited
Telephone (+9144) 24961129
Fax (+9144) 24961831
E-mail info.in@eurotherm.com
IRELAND Dublin
Eurotherm Ireland Limited
Telephone (+353 1) 469 1800
Fax (+353 1) 469 1300
E-mail info.ie@eurotherm.com
ITALY Como
Eurotherm S.r.l
Telephone (+39 31) 975111
Fax (+39 31) 977512
E-mail info.it@eurotherm.com
KOREA Seoul
Eurotherm Korea Limited
Telephone (+82 31) 273 8507
Fax (+82 31) 273 8508
E-mail info.kr@eurotherm.com
NETHERLANDS Alphen a/d Rijn
Eurotherm B.V.
Telephone (+31 172) 411752
Fax (+31 172) 417260
E-mail info.nl@eurotherm.com
NORWAY Oslo
Eurotherm A/S
Telephone (+47 67) 592170
Fax (+47 67) 118301
E-mail info.no@eurotherm.com
POLAND Katowice
Eurotherm A/S
Telephone (+48 32) 2185100
Fax (+48 32) 2177171
E-mail info.pl@eurotherm.com
SPAIN Madrid
Eurotherm España SA
Telephone (+34 91) 6616001
Fax (+34 91) 6619093
E-mail info.es@eurotherm.com
SWEDEN Malmo
Eurotherm AB
Telephone (+46 40) 384500
Fax (+46 40) 384545
E-mail info.se@eurotherm.com
SWITZERLAND Wollerau
Eurotherm Produkte (Schweiz) AG
Telephone (+41 44) 787 1040
Fax (+41 44) 787 1044
E-mail info.ch@eurotherm.com
UNITED KINGDOM Worthing
Eurotherm Limited
Telephone (+44 1903) 268500
Fax (+44 1903) 265982
E-mail info.uk@eurotherm.com
U.S.A Leesburg VA
Eurotherm Inc.
Telephone (+1 703) 443 0000
Fax (+1 703) 669 1300
E-mail info.us@eurotherm.com
ED52
© Copyright Eurotherm Limited 2007
All rights are strictly reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced, modified, or transmitted in
any form by any means, nor may it be stored in a retrieval system other than for the purpose to act as
an aid in operating the equipment to which the document relates, without the prior written permission
of Eurotherm limited.
Eurotherm Limited pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement. The specifications
in this document may therefore be changed without notice. The information in this document is given
in good faith, but is intended for guidance only. Eurotherm Limited will accept no responsibility for any
losses arising from errors in this document.
BK889B PONT DE MESURE RLC DE TABLE AVEC INTERFACE USB
MANUEL D’UTILISATION
RÉSUMÉ DES RÈGLES DE SÉCURITÉ
GÉNÉRALITÉS – Les informations générales de sécurité données ici sont valables à la
fois pour le personnel qui utilise l’appareil et pour le personnel de
maintenance.
TERMES – Dans ce manuel, l’indication ATTENTION identifie les conditions ou
pratiques qui peuvent occasionner des dommages à l’équipement ou
autres biens, et l’indication DANGER identifie les conditions ou
pratiques qui peuvent occasionner des blessures ou présenter un risque
vital pour le personnel. Ne pas passer outre les indications ATTENTION
et DANGER avant d’avoir bien compris et rempli les conditions
indiquées.
FONCTIONNEMENT – Avant la mise sous tension, respecter les instructions d’installation et
d’utilisation.
MISE À LA TERRE – Cet appareil est mis à la terre par le conducteur de terre du câble
d’alimentation. Ne pas détériorer cette connexion. En cas d’absence de
protection par mise à la terre, toutes les parties conductrices accessibles (y
compris les boutons et commandes) peuvent provoquer un choc
électrique.
ADDITIONNELLEMENT – Toute opération de réglage, maintenance ou réparation ne doit être
effectuée que par un personnel qualifié.
– Pour éviter les risques de dommages corporels, ne pas utiliser cet
appareil avec le couvercle ou les panneaux démontés.
– Utiliser uniquement des fusibles du type spécifié dans la liste des
composants. Ne jamais utiliser des fusibles réparés ni court-circuiter les
porte fusibles.
– N’effectuer aucune modification non-autorisée de l’instrument.
– Ne pas utiliser l’instrument en présence de gaz inflammables ou en
atmosphère explosive.
– Déconnecter le câble d’alimentation avant de démonter les panneaux de
protection, de souder ou de remplacer des composants.
– Ne pas entreprendre de manipulations ou réglages internes hors de la
présence d’une personne capable de porter les premiers secours et de
pratiquer une réanimation.
Sommaire
SOMMAIRE......................................................................................................................................................................................... 3
1. INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3
1.1 GENERAL................................................................................................................................................................................................................................3
1.2 PARAMÈTRES D’IMPÉDANCE .................................................................................................................................................................................................4
1.3 SPÉCIFICATIONS .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................5
1.4 ACCESSOIRES .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................12
2. UTILISATION.......................................................................................................................................................................... 13
2.1 DESCRIPTION........................................................................................................................................................................................................................13
2.2 MESURES..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................14
2.2.1 Calibration ouverte/fermée ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................14
2.2.2 Mode Relatif..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................14
2.2.3 Range Hold (maintien de la gamme) ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................14
2.2.4 Mesure de la résistance continue.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................14
2.2.5 Mesure de l’impédance AC...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................15
2.2.6 Mesure de la capacité ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................15
2.2.7 Mesure de l’inductance.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................15
3. MODES................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
3.1 SYNTAXE DE LA COMMANDE DU MODE REMOTE MODE....................................................................................................................................................19
3.2 COMMANDES DU MODE REMOTE........................................................................................................................................................................................19
4. APPLICATION ........................................................................................................................................................................ 25
4.1 CONNEXION DES FILS DE MESURE .......................................................................................................................................................................................25
4.2 COMPENSATION OUVERTE/FERMÉE.....................................................................................................................................................................................27
4.3 CHOIX DU MODE SÉRIE OU PARALLÈLE ...............................................................................................................................................................................28
3
1. Introduction
1.1Général
Le pont de mesure RLC de table avec interface USB BK889B est un instrument très précis utilisé pour mesurer les
inductances, capacités et résistances avec une précision de base de 0.1%. Grâce à ses fonctions intégrées de mesures
de tension/courant AC/DC et de vérifications de la continuité et de test diode, le BK889B ne permet pas seulement de
comprendre les caractéristiques des composants électroniques, c’est aussi un outil essentiel pour tout usage en
laboratoire.
Le BK889B est par défaut en mode gammes automatiques. Cependant, il peut aussi être utilisé en gammes
automatiques et manuelles en appuyant sur la touche Range Hold. Lorsque le mode mesure LCR est sélectionné, l’une
des fréquences de test (100Hz, 120Hz, 1KHz, 10KHz, 100KHz ou 200KHz) peut être sélectionnée sur toutes les
gammes applicables. L’une des tensions de test (50mVeff, 0.25Veff, 1Veff ou 1VDC) (DCR uniquement) peut aussi être
sélectionnée sur toutes les gammes applicables. Le double affichage permet d’effectuer des mesures en simultané.
Lorsque le mode mesure tension/courant DC/AC ou le mode Vérification de la continuité de la diode/audible est
sélectionné, seul l’affichage secondaire sera utilisé pour afficher la mesure.
Le BK889B peut effectuer virtuellement toutes les fonctions des ponts RLC de table. Grâce à sa précision de base de
0.1%, l’instrument économique peut remplacer un pont plus cher dans divers cas. De plus, avec une précision de base
de 0.4% dans les mesures de tension et de courant, le BK889B possède les mêmes fonctions qu’un multimètre
numérique, vous disposez ainsi de plusieurs instruments en un.
Le BK889B peut servir à vérifier les valeurs ESR des condensateurs, régler et/ou sélectionner des composants, mesurer
des composants banalisés et inconnus, puis mesurer la capacité, l’inductance ou la résistance des câbles, des
commutateurs, des circuits imprimés, etc.
Les caractéristiques principales sont les suivantes :
1. Mesures de la tension :
· AC : True RMS, jusqu’à 600Veff @ 40~1 kHz
· DC : jusqu’à 600V
· Impédance d’entrée : 1M-Ohm
2. Mesures du courant :
· AC : True RMS, jusqu’à 2Aeff @ 40~1 kHz
· DC : jusqu’à 2A
· Shunt du courant : 0.1 Ohm@>20mA ; 10Ohm @<20mA
3. Vérifications continuité Diode/Audible :
· Tension en circuit ouvert : 5Vdc
· Courant de court-circuit : 2.5mA
· Buzzer activé : < 25
· Buzzer désactivé : > 50
4. Mesures LCR :
· Conditions de test
· Fréquence : 100Hz/120Hz/ 1KHz/ 100KHz / 200KHz
· Niveau : 1Veff/0.25Veff/50mVeff/1VDC (DCR uniquement)
· Paramètres de mesure : Z, Ls, Lp, Cs, Cp, DCR, ESR, D, Q et θ
· Précision de base : 0.1%
· Double affichage LCD
· Gamme automatique ou gamme Hold
· Interface USB
· Calibration ouverte/fermée
· Affichage principal des paramètres :
· Z : Impédance alternative
· DCR : Résistance continue
· Ls : Inductance série
· Lp : Inductance parallèle
· Cs : Capacité série
· Cp : Capacité parallèle
· Affichage secondaire
· θ: Angle de phase
· ESR : Résistance série équivalente
· D : Facteur de dissipation
· Q : Facteur de qualité
· Combinaisons d’affichage :
· Mode Série : Z-θ, Cs – Q, Cs – ESR, Ls – D, Ls – Q, Ls – ESR
Mode Parallèle : Cp – D, Cp – Q, Lp – D, Lp – Q
4
1.2 Paramètres d’impédance
A cause des différents signaux de test sur l’instrument de mesure d’impédance, il y a l’impédance DC et l’impédance AC. Le
multimètre numérique classique peut uniquement mesurer l'impédance DC mais le BK889B peut mesurer les deux. Il est très
important de comprendre les paramètres d’impédance des composants électroniques.
Lorsque nous analysons l’impédance avec le plan de mesure d’impédance (figure 1.1), elle peut être visualisée par un
élément réel sur l’axe X et un élément imaginaire sur l’axe Y. Le plan de mesure d’impédance peut aussi être perçu comme
des coordonnées polaires. Le Z représente la magnitude et le θ est la phase de l’impédance.
( )
( )
( )
( )
(Ohm )
Reactance
Resistance
Impedance
W =
=
=
=
= = -
= = +
= + = Ð W
S
S
X
R
Z
Rs
X s
X s Z Sin Tan
Rs Z Cos Z Rs X s
Z Rs jX s Z
1
2 2
q q
q
q
Il existe deux types de réactance : Inductive (XL) et Capacitive (XC) pouvant être définies de la manière
suivante :
Il y a aussi le facteur de Qualité (Q) et le facteur de Dissipation (D) qui doivent être traités. Le facteur Qualité
sert de mesure de la pureté de la réactance pour le composant. En réalité, il y a toujours une résistance
associée qui dissipe la puissance en augmentant la quantité d’énergie qui peut être récupérée. Le facteur
Qualité peut être défini comme le rapport énergie stockée (réactance)/énergie dissipée (résistance). Q sert
généralement pour les inductances et D pour les condensateurs.
X s
R s
Z (R s , X s )
Z
q
Axe imaginaire
Axe réel
Figure 1.1
C fC
XC
X L L fL
w p
w p
2
1 1
2
= =
= =
C p R p
L p
R p
X p
R p
G
B
Rs C s Rs
Ls
Rs
X s
D
Q
w
w
w
w
d
= = =
=
= = =
= =
1
tan
1 1
L = Inductance (H)
C = Capacité (F)
f = Fréquence (Hz)
5
Il existe deux types de circuits : le mode série et le mode parallèle. Regarder la figure 1.2 pour découvrir la
relation des modes série et parallèle.
1.3 Spécifications
Gamme de mesure:
Paramètre Gamme
Z 0.000 W à 500.0 MW
L 0.030 μH à 9999 H
C 0.003 pF à 80.00 mF
DCR 0.000 W à 500.0 MW
ESR 0.000 W à 9999 W
D 0.000 à 9999
Q 0.000 à 9999
θ -180.0 ° à 180.0 °
Mesure de tension/courant
V 0.0 mV à +/- 600 V
A 0.000 mA à +/- 2 A
Précision (Ae):
1. Mesure de la tension continue :
Gamme : 2V, 20V, 200V et 600V
Résolution : 1mV, 10mV, 100mV et 1V
Précision :+/- (0.4% + 3 digits)
Impédance d’entrée : 1M-Ohm
2. Mesure de la tension alternative (True RMS)
Gamme : 2V, 20V, 200V et 600V
Résolution : 1mV, 10mV, 100mV et 1V
Précision :+/- (0.8% + 5 digits)
Impédance d’entrée : 1M-Ohm
3. Mesure du courant continu :
Gamme : 2mA, 20mA, 200mA et 2000mA
Résolution : 1μA, 10μA, 100μA et 1μA
Précision :+/- (0.4% + 3 digits)
Shunt du courant : 0.1 Ohm @ >20mA, 10 Ohm @ £20mA
4. Mesure du courant alternatif (True RMS)
Gamme : 2mA, 20mA, 200mA et 2000mA
Résolution : 1μA, 10μA, 100μA et 1μA
Précision :+/- (0.8% + 5 digits)
Shunt du courant : 0.1 Ohm @ >20mA, 10 Ohm @ £20mA
Figure 1.2
Les composants réels et imaginaires sont
en série
Z = Rs + jXs
Rs jXs
Les composants réels et imaginaires sont en
parallèle
G=1/Rp
jB=1/jXp
Y =G+ jB
jXp
Rp
jXP
1
RP
1
Y = +
6
Note : La précision des mesures de tension/courant DC/AC s’applique uniquement sur 5%-10% de la gamme
5. Mesure LCR:
Précision Z (Ae) :
|Zx|
Freq.
20M ~
10M
(W)
10M ~
1M
(W)
1M ~
100K
(W)
100K ~
10K
(W)
10K ~
1K
(W)
1K ~
100
(W)
100 ~ 1
(W)
1 ~ 0.1
(W)
DCR 0.1% ±1 0.2% ±1
100Hz
120Hz
1KHz
2% ±1
1% ±1
10KHz 5% ±1
2% ±1
0.5% ±1 0.2% ±1 0.5% ±1 1% ±1
100KHz
200KHz
NA 5% ±1 2% ±1 1% ±1 0.4% ±1 1% ±1 2% ±1 5% ±1
Note:
1. La précision s’applique lorsque le niveau de test est à 1Veff
2. Ae multiplie 1,25 lorsque le niveau de test est à 250mVeff
3. Ae multiplie 1,50 lorsque le niveau de test est à 50mVeff
4. Lorsque l’on mesure L et C, multiplier Ae par 1+Dx2 si Dx>0.1
: Ae s’applique uniquement lorsque le niveau de test est à 1Vrms.
Précision C :
79.57pF
|
159.1pF
159.1pF
|
1.591nF
1.591nF
|
15.91nF
15.91nF
|
159.1uF
159.1nF
|
1.591uF
1.591uF
|
15.91uF
15.91uF
|
1591uF
1591uF
|
100Hz 15.91mF
2% ± 1
1% ± 1 0.5% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.1% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.5% ± 1 1% ± 1
66.31pF
|
132.6pF
132.6pF
|
1.326nF
1.326nF
|
13.26nF
13.26nF
|
132.6nF
132.6nF
|
1.326uF
1.326uF
|
13.26uF
13.26uF
|
1326uF
1326uF
|
120Hz 13.26mF
2% ± 1
1% ± 1 0.5% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.1% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.5% ± 1 1% ± 1
7.957pF
|
15.91pF
15.91pF
|
159.1pF
159.1pF
|
1.591nF
1.591nF
|
15.91nF
15.91nF
|
159.1nF
159.1nF
|
1.591uF
1.591uF
|
159.1uF
159.1uF
|
1KHz 1.591mF
2% ± 1
1% ± 1 0.5% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.1% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.5% ± 1 1% ± 1
10KHz
0.795pF
|
1.591pF
1.591pF
|
15.91pF
15.91pF
|
159.1pF
159.1pF
|
1.591nF
1.591nF
|
15.91nF
15.91nF
|
159.1nF
159.1nF
|
15.91uF
15.91uF
|
159.1uF
7
5% ± 1
2% ± 1 0.5% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.1% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.5% ± 1 1% ± 1
NA 0.159pF
|
1.591pF
1.591pF
|
15.91pF
15.91pF
|
159.1pF
159.1pF
|
1.591nF
1.591nF
|
15.91nF
15.91nF
|
1.591uF
1.591uF
|
15.91uF
100KHz
NA 5% ± 1 2%± 1 1%± 1 0.4%± 1 1%± 1 2%± 1 5% ± 1
NA 0.079pF
|
0.795pF
0.795pF
|
7.957pF
7.957pF
|
79.57pF
79.57pF
|
795.7pF
795.7pF
|
7.957nF
7.957nF
|
795.7nF
795.7nF
|
7.957uF
200KHz
NA 5% ± 1 2%± 1 1%± 1 0.4%± 1 1%± 1 2%± 1 5% ± 1
Précision L:
31.83KH
|
15.91KH
15.91KH
|
1591H
1591H
|
159.1H
159.1H
|
15.91H
15.91H
|
1.591H
1.591H
|
159.1mH
159.1mH
|
1.591mH
1.591mH
|
100Hz 159.1uH
2% ± 1
1% ± 1 0.5% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.1% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.5% ± 1 1% ± 1
26.52KH
|
13.26KH
13.26KH
|
1326H
1326H
|
132.6H
132.6H
|
13.26H
13.26H
|
1.326H
1.326H
|
132.6mH
132.6mH
|
1.326mH
1.326mH
|
120Hz 132.6uH
2% ± 1
1% ± 1 0.5% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.1% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.5% ± 1 1% ± 1
3.183KH
|
1.591KH
1.591KH
|
159.1H
159.1H
|
15.91H
15.91H
|
1.591H
1.591H
|
159.1mH
159.1mH
|
15.91mH
15.91mH
|
159.1uH
159.1uH
|
1KHz 15.91uH
2% ± 1
1% ± 1 0.5% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.1% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.5%
± 1
1% ± 1
318.3H
|
159.1H
159.1H
|
15.91H
15.91H
|
1.591H
1.591H
|
159.1mH
159.1mH
|
15.91mH
15.91mH
|
1.591mH
1.591mH
|
15.91uH
15.91uH
|
10KHz 1.591uH
5% ± 1
2% ± 1 0.5% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.1% ± 1 0.2% ± 1 0.5% ± 1 1% ± 1
31.83H
|
15.91H
15.91H
|
1.591H
1.591H
|
159.1mH
159.1mH
|
15.91mH
15.91mH
|
1.591mH
1.591mH
|
159.1uH
159.1uH
|
1.591uH
1.591uH
|
0.159uH
100KHz
NA 5% ± 1 2%± 1 1% ± 1 0.4% ± 1 1% ± 1 2%± 1 5% ± 1
15.91H
|
7.957H
7.957H
|
795.7mH
795.7mH
|
79.57mH
79.57mH
|
7.957mH
7.957mH
|
795.7uH
795.7uH
|
79.57uH
79.57uH
|
0.795uH
0.795uH
|
0.079uH
200KHz
NA 5% ± 1 2%± 1 1% ± 1 0.4% ± 1 1% ± 1 2%± 1 5% ± 1
Précision D:
8
|Zx|
Freq.
20M ~
10M
(W)
10M ~
1M
(W)
1M ~
100K
(W)
100K ~
10K
(W)
10K ~
1K
(W)
1K ~
100
(W)
100 ~
1
(W)
1 ~ 0.1
(W)
100Hz ±0.002 ±0.002
120Hz
1KHz
±0.020
±0.010
10KHz ±0.050
±0.020
±0.005 ±0.002 ±0.005 ±0.010
100KHz
200KHz
NA ±0.050 ±0.020 ±0.010 ±0.004 ±0.010 ±0.020 ±0.050
Précision q:
|Zx|
Freq.
20M ~
10M
(W)
10M ~
1M
(W)
1M ~
100K
(W)
100K ~
10K
(W)
10K ~
1K
(W)
1K ~
100
(W)
100 ~
1
(W)
1 ~ 0.1
(W)
100Hz ±0.105 ±0.105
120Hz
1KHz
±1.046
±0.523
10KHz ±2.615
±1.046
±0.261 ±0.105 ±0.261 ±0.523
100KHz
200KHz
NA ±2.615 ±1.046 ±0.409 ±0.209 ±0.409 ±1.046 ±2.615
Précision Z:
Voir tableau 1.
Précision C:
f Cx
Zx
× × ×
=
2 p
1
CAe = Ae of C
f : Fréquence de test (Hz)
Cx : Valeur de capacité mesurée (F)
|Zx| : Valeur d’impédance mesurée ()
La précision s’applique lorsque Dx (valeur D mesurée) < 0.1
Lorsque Dx>0.1, multiplier CAe par 1 + Dx2
Exemple :
Condition de test :
Fréquence : 1KHz
Niveau : 1Veff
DUT : 100nF
Donc
9
- = W × × × ×
=
× × ×
=
1590
2 103 100 10 9
1
2
1
p
p f Cx
Zx
Lire le tableau de précision, obtenir CAe=±0.1%
Précision L:
Zx = 2 ×p × f × Lx
LAe = Ae of L
f : Fréquence de test (Hz)
Lx : Valeur d’inductance mesurée (F)
|Zx| : Valeur d’impédance mesurée ()
La précision s’applique lorsque Dx (valeur D mesurée) < 0.1
Lorsque Dx>0.1, multiplier LAe par 1 + Dx2
Exemple :
Condition de test :
Fréquence : 1KHz
Niveau : 1Veff
DUT : 1mH
Donc
= × × × - = W
= × × ×
2 10 3 10 3 6.283
2
p
Zx p f Lx
Lire le tableau de précision, obtenir LAe = ±0.5%
Précision ESR:
100
Ae
ESRAe = ±Xx ×
f Cx
Xx f Lx
× × ×
= × × × =
p
p
2
1
2
ESRAe = Ae de ESR
f :Fréquence de test (Hz)
Xx :Valeur de réactance mesurée ()
Lx :Valeur d’inductance mesurée (H)
Cx : Valeur de capacité mesurée (F)
La précision s’applique lorsque Dx (valeur D mesurée) £ 0.1
Exemple:
Condition de test :
Fréquence : 1KHz
Niveau : 1Veff
DUT : 100nF
Donc
- = W × × × ×
=
× × ×
=
1590
2 10 3 100 10 9
1
2
1
p
p f Cx
Zx
Lire le tableau de précision, obtenir
CAe=±0.1%,
10
= ± × = ±1.59W
100
Ae
ESR Ae Xx
Précision D:
100
Ae
D Ae = ±
DAe = Ae de D
La précision s’applique lorsque Dx (valeur D mesurée) £ 0.1
Lorsque Dx > 0.1, multiplier Dx par (1+Dx)
Exemple :
Condition de test :
Fréquence : 1KHz
Niveau : 1Veff
DUT : 100nF
Donc
- = W × × × ×
=
× × ×
=
1590
2 10 3 100 10 9
1
2
1
p
p f Cx
Zx
Lire le tableau de précision, obtenir
CAe=±0.1%,
0.002
100
= ± × = ± Ae
D Ae
Précision Q:
Qx De
Qx De
Ae
Q
×
= ± ×
1 m
2
QAe = Ae de Q
Qx : Valeur du facteur Qualité mesuré
De : Valeur de précision relative
La précision s’applique lorsque Qx × De < 1
Exemple :
Condition de test :
Fréquence : 1KHz
Niveau : 1Veff
DUT : 1mH
Donc
= × × × - = W
= × × ×
2 10 3 10 3 6.283
2
p
Zx p f Lx
Lire le tableau de précision, obtenir
LAe=±0.5%,
0.005
100
= ± × = ± Ae
De
Si Qx = 20
Donc
11
1 0.1
2
1
2
m
m
= ±
×
= ± ×
Qx De
Qx De
Q Ae
Précision θ:
100
Ae
π
180 = × Ae q
Exemple :
Condition de test :
Fréquence : 1KHz
Niveau : 1Veff
DUT : 100nF
Donc
- = W × × × ×
=
× × ×
=
1590
2 10 3 100 10 9
1
2
1
p
p f Cx
Zx
Lire le tableau de précision, obtenir
ZAe=±0.1%,
0 .057 deg
100
180 0 .1
100
180
= ± × = ±
= ± ×
p
p
q Ae
Ae
Signal de test :
Précision du niveau : + 10%
Précision de la fréquence : 0.1%
Impédance de sortie : 100W ± 5%
Température : 0°C à 40°C (Utilisation)
-20°C à 70°C (Stockage)
Humidité relative : Jusqu’à 85%
Puissance AC : 110/220V, 60/50Hz
Dimensions : 300mm x 220mm x 150mm
Masse : 4500g
Attention
Lorsque le mode de mesure RLC est sélectionné, les facteurs suivants doivent être pris en compte.
Fréquence de test : elle peut être choisie et modifiée par l’utilisateur. En général, un signal de test de 1KHz ou
plus élevé sert à mesurer les condensateurs qui sont de 0.01μF ou moins, et un signal de test de 120Hz sert
pour les condensateurs de 10 μF ou plus. Un signal de test de 1KHz ou plus sert à mesurer les inductances
utilisés dans les circuits audio et RF (fréquence radio). C’est parce que ces types d’inductances fonctionnent à
de hautes fréquences et exigent d’être mesurés à haute fréquence. En général, les inductances inférieures à
2mH devraient être mesurées à la fréquence de test de 1KHz ou plus, et les inductances supérieures à 200H
devraient être mesurées à 120Hz ou moins.
Il est recommandé de vérifier la feuille des données du composant pour déterminer la meilleure fréquence de
test.
Condensateurs chargés : Toujours décharger un condensateur avant d’effectuer des mesures car cela pourrait
endommager l’instrument.
12
Effet de D sur la précision A: diminuer la mesure D (Facteur de dissipation) est désirable. Les condensateurs
électrolytiques possèdent un facteur de dissipation élevé dû à leur perte normalement élevée. Si D (facteur de
dissipation) est trop élevé, la précision de la mesure de capacité peut se dégrader.
Il est recommandé de vérifier la feuille des données du composant pour déterminer la valeur D souhaitable du
composant.
Capacité de mesure des câbles, commutateurs ou autres éléments : mesurer la capacité des câbles
coaxiaux est très utile pour déterminer la longueur du câble. La majorité des spécifications donnant la
capacité/unité de longueur de câble, c’est pour cela que la longueur du câble peut être déterminée en mesurant
la capacité de ce câble.
Par exemple : les spécifications exigent un certain câble pour avoir une capacité de 10pF par pied. Après avoir
mesuré le câble, la valeur de capacité qui s’affiche est 1.000nF. Diviser 1000pF (1.000nF) par 10pF par pied
donne une longueur du câble d’environ 100 pieds.
Même si les spécifications sont inconnues, la capacité d’une longueur mesuré du câble (comme 10 pieds) peut
être utilisée pour déterminer la capacité/pied. Ne pas utiliser une longueur trop courte car toute erreur sur les
calculs de la longueur totale est proportionnelle.
Mesures série ou Parallèle (pour inductances) : le mode série affiche la mesure la plus précise dans tous les
cas. Le mode série équivalent est essentiel pour obtenir une mesure Q précise de faibles inductances. Là où le
risque de pertes sont plus importantes, le mode série équivalent est préférable. Cependant, il existe des cas où
le mode parallèle équivalent est le plus approprié. Pour le fonctionnement des inductances en fer (hautes
fréquences) où l’hystérésis et les courants de Foucault deviennent important, la mesure en mode parallèle
équivalent est préférable.
1.4Accessoires
· Un manuel d’utilisation
· Un cordon d’alimentation AC
· Une pince Kelvin
· Un câble de mesure pour multimètre numérique
13
2. Utilisation
2.1 Description
1. Affichage du paramètre primaire 2. Affichage du paramètre secondaire
3. Touche Fonction L/C/Z/DCR 4. Touche Fonction DCA/ACA
5. Touche Fréquence de mesure 6. Borne LCUR
7. Touche Niveau de mesure
8. Touche Range Hold (maintenir la
gamme)
9. Référence du modèle
10. Borne LPOT
11. Touche Fonction D/Q/θ/ESR 12. Borne HPOT
13. Touche Calibration ouverte 14. Touche Fonction DCV/ACV
15. Touche Relatif 16. Borne HCUR
17. Touche Calibration 18. Touche Fonction Diode/Continuité
19. Touche Fonction à distance
21. Marche/Arrêt
23. Puissance AC
25. Borne A
20. Borne COM
22. Borne V/Diode/Continuité
24. Port USB
26. Fusible 2A
14
2.2 Mesures
2.2.1 Calibration circuit ouvert/court-circuit
Le BK889B effectue des calibrations circuit ouvert/court-circuit qui permettent à l’utilisateur d’obtenir plus de
précision pour mesurer une impédance haute ou basse. Nous vous recommandons d’effectuer ce type de
calibration si le niveau ou la fréquence de test a été modifiée.
Calibration en circuit ouvert
Les bornes de mesure étant à l’état circuit ouvert, appuyer sur la touche Open puis l’écran suivant apparaît:
Cette calibration dure environ 15 secondes. Une fois la calibration terminée, le BK889B émettra un bip pour
indiquer la fin de la calibration.
Calibration en court-circuit
Pour effectuer une calibration en court-circuit, insérer un court-circuit sur les bornes de mesure. Appuyer sur
Short puis l’écran suivant s’affiche:
Cette calibration dure environ 15 secondes. Une fois la calibration terminée, le BK889B émettra un bip pour
indiquer la fin de la calibration.
2.2.2 Mode Relatif
Le mode relatif permet de trier rapidement les composants. Insérer le composant de la valeur de référence pour
lire la valeur standard. (Environ 5 secondes pour une lecture stable.) Puis appuyer sur Relative , l’affichage
principal se remettra à zéro. Retirer le composant de la valeur de référence et insérer un composant inconnu,
l’écran indiquera la valeur qui représente la différence entre la valeur de référence et la valeur inconnue.
2.2.3 Range Hold (maintien de la gamme)
Pour mettre l’appareil sur Range Hold, insérer un composant de référence sur cette gamme de mesure. (Environ
5 secondes pour une lecture stable.) Puis appuyer sur Range Hold , cela maintiendra la gamme de 0.5 à 2 fois
la gamme de mesure du courant. Lorsque l’on appuie sur Range Hold , l’écran suivant s’affiche:
2.2.4 Mesure de la résistance continue
La mesure de la résistance continue permet de mesurer la résistance d’un composant inconnu sous 1VDC.
Appuyer sur L/C/Z/DCR pour sélectionner la mesure DCR. L’écran affiche:
15
2.2.5 Mesure de l’impédance AC (Z)
La mesure de l‘impédance AC permet de mesurer le Z d’un appareil inconnu. Appuyer sur L/C/Z/DCR pour
sélectionner la mesure Z. L’écran affiche:
Le niveau et la fréquence de test peuvent être sélectionnés en appuyant sur Level et Freq.
2.2.6 Mesure de la capacité
Pour mesurer la capacité d’un composant, appuyer sur L/C/Z/DCR pour sélectionner le mode de mesure Cs
(Mode Série) ou Cp (Mode Parallèle). Si le mode série (Cs) est sélectionné, le D, Q et ESR s’affichent sur
l’afficheur secondaire. Si le mode Parallèle (Cp) est sélectionné, seuls le D et Q s’affichent sur l’afficheur
secondaire. Voici des exemples de mesures de capacité :
Le niveau et la fréquence de test peuvent être sélectionnés en appuyant sur Level et Freq.
2.2.7 Mesure de l’inductance
Appuyer sur L/C/Z/DCR pour sélectionner le mode Ls ou Lp pour mesurer l’inductance en mode série ou en
mode parallèle. Si le mode série (Ls) est sélectionné, le D, Q et ESR s’affichent sur l’afficheur secondaire. Si le
mode Parallèle (Lp) est sélectionné, seuls le D et Q s’affichent sur l’afficheur secondaire. Voici des exemples de
mesures d’inductance :
Le niveau et la fréquence de test peuvent être sélectionnés en appuyant sur Level et Freq.
3. Modes
Le BK889B possède quatre modes de fonctionnement : Normal, Binning , Remote et Remote Binning. En
appuyant sur Remote , l’utilisateur peut sélectionner l’un des 4 modes ci-dessus.
Mode Normal:
16
Le mode Normal est le mode par défaut. C’est un mode local qui fait que le BK889B est piloté par le clavier et
les résultats seront envoyés à l’afficheur et au PC équipé d’un port USB.
Mode Binning:
Le mode Binning est réservé au prochain usage (comme GPIB). Il est réglé pour fonctionner de la même
façon que le mode Normal qui reçoit des commandes depuis le clavier et qui envoie les résultats à l’afficheur
et au PC équipé d’un port USB.
Mode Remote Binning:
En mode Remote Binning, le “RMT Bin” sur l’écran s’allumera, le fonctionnement du BK889B est piloté par
un PC équipé d’un port USB ou par une borne, les résultats seront envoyés à l’afficheur local et au poste de
travail via le port USB.
Dans ce mode, toutes les touches sauf Remote sont verrouillées.
Le mode Remote Binning permet une meilleure et plus rapide utilisation les programmes d’application.
L’utilisateur peut créer un serveur ou un pilote (n’importe quel composant de logiciel peut effectuer la tâche
d’un serveur) avec l’interface Graphic, le modèle de réseau OSI, et le puissant interprète intégré à l’afficheur
Graphique du support, la connectivité du réseau, les interprétations de la commande de structure (SCPI,
IEEE488 etc.) et fera un pont entre le programme d’application de haut niveau comme VB, VISUAL C++,
EXCEL, ACCESS etc. et le BK889B. Voir la figure suivante :
Le protocole de communication entre le BK889B et un PC équipé d’un port USB se décrit de la manière
suivante :
1. Les commandes qui seront envoyées d’un PC à distance à un BK889B sont utilisées pour paramétrer la
machine sur un mode de mesure sélectionné.
La syntaxe de la commande est:
MOD current-state-code
Elle commence toujours par MOD suivi par un espace puis par le code d’état actuel. Le code d’état
actuel qui est défini dans le tableau ci-dessous fait 3 octets (24 bits), bit-23, 22, 21… bit-0, où bit-23 est le
MSB et bit-0 est le LSB.
Position du bit LCR DC/AC V/A
Bit 2 – Bit 0 (freq test) Réservé
000 100 Hz
001 120 Hz
010 1K Hz
011 10K Hz
100 100K Hz
Modèle
BK889B
Serveur:
COM, DCOM, ATL,
CONTROL,
AUTOMATION EXE
Intégrés:
Graphic interface,
Réseau OSI, et/ou
puissant Interprète ou
Analyseur
VB, VISUAL
C++, EXCEL,
ACCESS etc.
17
101 200K Hz
110 Réservé
111 Réservé
Bit 4 – Bit 3 (niveau test) Réservé
00 50 mVeff
01 250 mVeff
10 1 Veff
11 Réservé
Bit 5 Réservé
0 Défaut Défaut
1 Réservé Réservé
Bit 6
0 Relatif Relatif
1 Normal Normal
Bit 7
0 Calibration Calibration
1 Normal Normal
Bit 10 – Bit 8 Réservé
000 Lp
001 Ls
010 Cp
011 Cs
100 Z
101 DCR
110 Réservé
111 Réservé
Bit 12 – Bit 11 Réservé
00 D
01 Q
10 DEG
11 ESR
Bit 16 – Bit 13
0000 RH nH Réservé
0001 RH uH RH mV, mA
0010 RH mH RH V, A
0011 RH H Réservé
0100 RH pF
0101 RH nF
0110 RH uF
0111 RH mF
1000 RH F
1001 RH Ohm
1010 RH K-Ohm
1011 RH M-Ohm
1100 Réservé
1101
1110
1111 Gamme automatique Gamme automatique
Bit 17
0 Calibration court-circuit Calibration court-circuit
1 Calibration circuit ouvert Réservé
18
Bit 21 – Bit 18 Modes de mesure
0000 Réservé
0001 LCR
0010 DCV
0011 ACV
0100 Diode
0101 Continuité
0110 DCA
0111 ACA
Autres Réservé
Bit 23 – Bit 22 Réservé
00
01
10
11
Par exemple : si la fonction LCR, Cp en mode mesure D est sélectionné en gamme automatique en
calibration relative ouverte/fermée sont désactivés et le signal du test est à 1 Veff dans 1KHz, la
commande est la suivante :
MOD 000001111110001011010010
2. Les résultats qui seront envoyés du BK889B au PC à distance seront empaquetés dans un format de 7
octets ou de 11 octets.
Lorsque les données doubles (comme Cp avec D) seront envoyées, les données seront empaquetées
dans un format de 11 octets comme indiqué ci-dessous:
Lead_code1 : 02
Lead_code2 : 09
Data_code : mesure 8 octets; deux formats de nombre de points instables de 32 bits ; les 4 premiers
octets sont la mesure principale (Cp) et la deuxième série de 4 octets représentent la mesure secondaire
(D)
Checksum : -((02+09+data_code) && 0x00FF)
02 09 M-B0 M-B1 M-B2 M-B3 S-B0 S-B1 S-B2 S-B3 CS
Où M-Bx et S-Bx sont la mesure principale et secondaire.
Lorsque seule la mesure principale (comme DCR) est envoyée, les données sont empaquetées dans un
format de 7 octets décrits ci-dessous:
Lead_code1 : 02
Lead_code2 : 03
Data_code : mesure 4 octets
Checksum : -((02+03+data_code) && 0x00FF)
02 03 M-B0 M-B1 M-B2 M-B3 CS
Lorsque seule la mesure secondaire (comme DCV) est envoyée, les données sont empaquetées dans un
format de 11 octets décrits ci-dessous:
Lead_code1 : 02
Lead_code2 : 09
Data_code : mesure 8 octets
Checksum : -((02+09+data_code) && 0x00FF)
02 09 S-B0 S-B1 S-B2 S-B3 S-B0 S-B1 S-B2 S-B3 CS
19
Mode Remote:
En mode Remote, le “RMT” sur l’écran s’allumera et le BK889B pourra communiquer avec le PC équipé
d’une interface USB ou une borne via le port USB. Voici le paramétrage de la connexion :
Mode Transmission : Semi-duplex
Vitesse de transmission : 9600
Parité : Aucune
Bits de données : 8
Stop : 1
Liaison : Aucune
Dans ce mode, l’écran et toutes les touches sauf Remote seront verrouillés. Le programme externe pilote le
BK889B via le port USB.
3.1 Syntaxe de la commande du Mode Remote
La syntaxe de la commande est la suivante:
COMMAND(?) (PARAMETER)
Le format de COMMAND et PARAMETER est le suivant:
1. Il y a au moins un espace entre COMMAND et PARAMETER.
2. Le PARAMETER doit uniquement utiliser la chaîne ASCII pas le code numérique.
3. Le paramètre de la valeur peut être un entier, instable ou exposant avec l’unité. Par exemple :
50mV
0.05V
5.0e1mV
4. Le point d’interrogation (?) à la fin de COMMAND représente une demande ou une commande de mesure.
Par exemple :
“CpD” fixe le mode de mesure sur Cp et D.
“CpD?” fixe le mode de mesure sur Cp et D, mesure les valeurs et les renvoie.
5. COMMAND et PARAMETER peuvent être soit en majuscule soit en minuscule. Mais pour décrire la valeur
dans le PARAMETER, il devrait y avoir une différence entre milli (m) et méga (M). Par exemple:
1mV équivaut à 0.001V.
1MV équivaut à 1000000V.
6. Le caractère à la “fin de la commande” doit être placé à la fin:
ASCII CR (0DH) ou
ASCII LF (0AH)
3.2 Commandes du Mode Remote
Commande de paramétrage (ou de demande) de la mesure
Le paramétrage suivant et les commandes de demande sont pris en charge par le BK889B. Lorsque la commande de
paramétrage du mode de mesure est entrée, le BK889B renvoie “OK” lorsque le paramétrage est terminé. Lorsque la
commande de demande est entrée, le BK889B revoie les valeurs de mesure.
DCR(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de la résistance continue.
CpRp(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de la capacité parallèle et de la
résistance parallèle.
CpQ(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de la capacité parallèle et du
facteur de qualité.
CpD(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de la capacité parallèle et du
facteur de dissipation.
CsRs(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de la capacité série et de la
20
résistance série.
CsQ(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de la capacité série et du facteur
de qualité.
CsD(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de la capacité série et du facteur
de dissipation.
LpRp(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de la résistance parallèle et de
l’inductance parallèle.
LpQ(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de l’inductance parallèle et du
facteur de qualité.
LpD(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de l’inductance parallèle et du
facteur de dissipation.
LsRs(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de l’inductance série et la
résistance série.
LsQ(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de l’inductance série et le facteur
de qualité.
LsD(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de l’inductance série et du facteur
de dissipation.
RsXs(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de l’inductance série et la
réactance série.
RpXp(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de la résistance parallèle et de la
réactance parallèle.
ZTD(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de l’impédance et de l’angle
(Deg).
ZTR(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de l’impédance et de l’angle
(Rad).
DCV(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de la tension continue.
ACV(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure de la tension alternative.
DCA(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure du courant continu.
ACA(?) Paramétrage ou commande de demande du mode de mesure du courant alternatif.
Exemple:
CPD (sur Cp- mode D)
OK
CPD?
0.22724 0.12840 (retour des valeurs)
DCR?
5.1029 (retour de la valeur)
*IDN?
Demande l’identité du BK889B. Cette commande sert à identifier les informations de base du BK889B. La valeur
retournée a quatre champs séparés par une virgule (,). La longueur totale n’est pas supérieure à 100 caractères.
Les quatre champs sont:
1. Nom du fabricant
2. Numéro du modèle
3. Numéro de série
4. Numéro de la version du logiciel
Exemple:
*IDN?
B&K PRECISION CORP. MODEL889B,123456789,4.096
21
*RST
Remet le BK889B dans son état par défaut. L’état par défaut est :
1KHz 1Vrms CpD uF
Une fois le BK889B remis à zéro, il retournera la chaîne d’identité.
ASC
Définit le format de la valeur de retour. Cette commande fixe le retour de la chaîne ASCII ou du code numérique.
PARAMETER:
ON chaîne ASCII
OFF code numérique
Exemple:
ASC ON
OK (retour)
FREQ?
1KHz (retour)
ASC OFF
OK (retour)
FREQ?
2 (retour)
CORR OPEN
Effectue la calibration circuit ouvert.
CORR SHORT
Effectue la calibration court-circuit.
FREQ(?) PARAMETER
Définit (demande) la fréquence de mesure.
FREQ PARAMETER
Définit la fréquence de mesure en fonction du paramètre. Lorsque la commande de paramétrage est entrée,
le BK889B retourne “OK” à la fin du paramétrage.
PARAMETER:
Chaîne ASCII Code numérique
100Hz 0
120Hz 1
1KHz 2
10KHz 3
100KHz 4
200KHz 5
Exemple:
FREQ 100KHz
OK (retour)
FREQ?
Retourne le paramètre de fréquence de la mesure.
Exemple:
ASC ON
OK
FREQ?
1KHz (valeur de retour)
ASC OFF
OK
22
FREQ?
2 (valeur de retour)
LEV(?) PARAMETER
Définit (demande) le niveau de mesure.
LEV PARAMETER
Définit le niveau de mesure en fonction du paramètre. Lorsque le paramétrage est terminé, le BK889B
retourne “OK”.
PARAMETER:
Chaîne ASCII Code numérique
1VDC 0
1Vrms 1
250mVrms 2
50mVrms 3
Exemple:
LEV 1V
OK
LEV?
Retourne le paramètre du niveau de mesure.
Exemple:
ASC ON
OK
LEV?
1Vrms (valeur de retour)
ASC OFF
OK
LEV?
1 (valeur de retour)
MODE?
Demande du mode de mesure. Si en mode LCR, six champs doivent être retournés.
1. Fréquence
2. Niveau
3. Mode de mesure
4. Unité de l’affichage principal
5. Unité de l’affichage secondaire
L’existence du champ 5 dépend du mode de mesure. Par exemple, il n’y a pas de champ 5 si le mode de
mesure est le mode DCR. Les champs sont séparés par un espace (ASCII 20H).
Exemple:
ASC ON
OK
CPD
OK
MODE?
1KHz 1Vrms CpD uF (valeur de retour)
ASC ON
OK
CPRP
OK
MODE?
1KHz 1Vrms CpRp uF Ohm (valeur de retour)
23
Si en mode de mesure de la tension, les trois champs sont retournés.
1. Mode de mesure
2. Unité de l’affichage principal
Exemple:
ASC ON
OK
DCV
OK
MODE?
DCV V (valeur de retour)
RANG mV
OK
MODE?
DCV mV (valeur de retour)
RANG(?) PARAMETER
Définit (demande) l’unité de mesure.
RANG PARAMETER
Définit l’unité de mesure en fonction du paramètre. L’instrument retourne “OK” à la fin du paramétrage.
PARAMETER:
ASCII Code numérique
pF 0
nF 1
uF 2
mF 3
F 4
nH 8
uH 9
mH 10
H 11
KH 12
mOhm 17
Ohm 18
KOhm 19
MOhm 20
mV 21
V 22
mA 23
A 24
Exemple:
RANG pF
OK
RANG?
Retourne le paramètre de l’unité de mesure du courant.
Exemple:
ASC ON
OK
RANG?
pF (valeur de retour)
24
ASC OFF
OK
RANG?
0 (valeur de retour)
READ?
Retourne la valeur de mesure. Cette commande mesurera en fonction du mode de mesure en cours et
retournera la valeur mesurée.
Exemple:
CPD
OK
READ?
0.22724 0.12840 (valeur de retour)
DCR
OK
READ?
5.1029 (valeur de retour)
Les mesures “DCR”, “DCV”, and “ACV” n’enverront qu’une seule valeur mesurée. Les autres modes de mesure
enverront deux valeurs mesurées séparées par un espace (ASCII 20H).
25
4.Application
4.1 Connexion des fils de mesure
Un pont d’équilibre automatique possède 4 bornes (HCUR, HPOT, LCUR and LPOT) à connecter sur l’appareil à
tester (DUT). Il faut comprendre quelle méthode de connexion affectera la précision de la mesure.
Borne 2 (2T) – Mesure 2 fils
La Borne 2 est la manière la plus simple de connecter le DUT, mais elle contient de nombreuses erreurs qui
sont l’inductance et la résistance ainsi que la capacité parasite des câbles de mesure (Figure 4.1).A cause de
ces erreurs, la gamme de mesure d’impédance efficace sera limitée de 100W à 10KW.
R
HCUR
HPOT
DUT
(b) BLOCK DIAGRAM
V DUT
A
Co
o Lo
Ro Lo
(a) CONNECTION
(c) TYPICAL IMPEDANCE MEASUREMENT RANGE(£[)
2T
1m 10m 100m 1 10 100 1K 10K 100K 1M 10M
LPOT
LCUR
Figure 4.1
Borne 3 (3T) – Mesure 3 fils
La borne 3 utilise la câble coaxial pour réduire l’effet du condensateur parasite (Figure 4.2). Le blindage du
câble coaxial doit être relié au boîtier de l’instrument pour augmenter la gamme de mesure jusqu’à 10MW.
DUT
V
A
(d) 2T CONNECTION WITH SHILDING
HCUR
HPOT
DUT
(b) BLOCK DIAGRAM
V DUT
A
Co
Ro Lo
Ro Lo
Co doesn't
effect
measurement
result
(a) CONNECTION
(c) TYPICAL IMPEDANCE MEASUREMENT RANGE(£[)
3T
1m 10m 100m 1 10 100 1K 10K 100K 1M 10M
LPOT
LCUR
Figure 4.2
Borne 4 (4T) – Mesure 4 fils
La connexion de la borne 4 réduit l’effet de la résistance du fil de mesure (Figure 4.3). Cette connexion peut
améliorer la gamme de mesure jusqu’à 10mW min. Cependant, l’effet de l’inductance du fil de mesure ne peut
être éliminée.
26
HCUR
HPOT
DUT
(b) BLOCK DIAGRAM
V DUT
A
(a) CONNECTION
(c) TYPICAL IMPEDANCE MEASUREMENT RANGE (£[)
4T
1m 10m 100m 1 10 100 1K 10K 100K 1M 10M
LPOT
LCUR
Figure 4.3
Borne 5 (5T)
La connexion de la borne 5 est une combinaison de 3T et 4T (Figure 4.4). Elle possède 4 câbles coaxiaux.
Grâce à son avantage de 3T et 4T, cette connexion permet une gamme de mesure de10mW à 10MW.
(d) WRONG 4T CONNECTION
HPOT
DUT
(a) CONNECTION (b) BLOCK DIAGRAM
(c) TYPICAL IMPEDANCE MEASUREMENT RANGE (£[)
5T
1m 10m 100m 1 10 100 1K 10K 100K 1M 10M
HCUR
V DUT
A
V DUT
A
LPOT
LCUR
Figure 4.4
Chemin borne 4 (4TP)
Cette connexion résout le problème causé par l’inductance du câble de mesure. Le 4TP utilise quatre câbles
coaxiaux pour isoler le chemin actuel et le câble de prise de tension (Figure 4.5). Le courant de retour
circulera dans le câble coaxial ainsi que dans le blindage. Le flux magnétique généré par le conducteur
interne neutralisera donc le flux magnétique généré par le conducteur externe (blindage). La connexion du
4TP augmente la gamme de mesure de 1mW à 10MW.
27
(a) CONNECTION (b) BLOCK DIAGRAM
DUT
V
A
(c) TYPICAL IMPEDANCE
MEASUREMENT RANGE(£[)
4T
1m 10m100m 1 10 100 1K 10K 100K 1M 10M
HPOT
DUT
HCUR
LCUR
LPOT
HPOT
DUT
HCUR
LCUR
LPOT
(d) 4T CONNECTION WITH SHILDING
Figure 4.5
Elimination de l’effet du condensateur parasite
Lorsqu’un composant d’impédance élevée est mesuré (i.e. condensateur de faible valeur), le condensateur
parasite devient un problème important (Figure 4.6). Sur la figure 4.6(a), le condensateur parasite Cd est mis
en parallèle avec le DUT ainsi que le Ci et le Ch. Pour corriger ce problème, ajouter une protection (Figure
4.6(b)) entre les bornes H et L pour freiner le Cd. Si la protection est connecté à la garde de l’instrument,
l’effet de Ci et Ch sera supprimé.
(a) Parastic Effect
HCUR HPOT LPOT LCUR
Cd
Connection
Point
DUT
Ch Cl
Ground
(b) Guard Plant reduces
Parastic Effect
HCUR HPOT LPOT LCUR
Guard
Plant
Figure 4.6
4.2 Compensation circuit ouvert/court circuit
Pour ces instruments de mesure d’impédance de précision, la compensation circuit ouvert/court-circuit doit être
utilisée afin de réduire l ‘effet parasite de l’installation de mesure. L’effet parasite de l’installation de mesure peut
être traité comme les composants passifs simples sur la figure 4.7(a). Lorsque le DUT est ouvert, l’instrument a
une conductance Yp = Gp + jwCp (Figure 4.7(b)). Lorsque le DUT est fermé, l’instrument a une impédance Zs =
Rs + jwLs (Figure 4.7(c)). Après la compensation ouverte et fermée, Yp et Zs peuvent donc être utilisés pour le
vrai calcul Zdut (Figure 4.7(d)).
28
HCUR
HPOT
LCUR
LPOT
Co Zdut
Rs Ls
Zm Go
Redundant
Impedance
(Zs) Parastic
Conductance
(Yo)
Parastic of the Test Fixture
(a) Parastic Effect of the Test Fixture
HCUR
HPOT
LCUR
LPOT
Co
Rs Ls
Go
(b) OPEN Measurement
Yo OPEN
Yo = Go + j£sCo
1
(Rs + j£s<< )
Go+j£sCo
HCUR
HPOT
LCUR
LPOT
Co
Rs Ls
Go
(c) SHORT Measurement
Zs SHORT
Zs = Rs + j£sLs
Zm Yo Zdut
Zm - Zs
Zdut =
1-(Zm-Zs)Yo
(d) Compensation Equation
Zs
Figure 4.7
4.3 Choix du mode série ou parallèle
En fonction du besoin de mesure différent, il existe des modes série et parallèle pour décrire les résultats de
mesure. Le choix du mode dépend de la valeur élevée ou basse de l’impédance.
Condensateur
L’impédance et la capacité dans le condensateur sont inversement proportionnelles. La capacité la plus
élevée signifie donc l’impédance la plus basse, la capacité la plus petite signifie l’impédance la plus élevée.
La figure 4.8 indique le circuit équivalent du condensateur. Si la capacité est petite, le Rp est plus important
que le Rs. Si la capacité est grande, le Rs ne doit pas être évitée. Il est donc préférable d‘utiliser le mode
parallèle pour une mesure de capacité basse et le mode série pour une mesure de capacité élevée.
CIRCUIT OUVERT
COURT-CIRCUIT
29
Inductance
L’impédance et l’inductance sont directement proportionnelles lorsque la fréquence test est fixée. C’est pour
cela que l’inductance plus élevée équivaut à l’impédance la plus élevée et vice versa. La figure 4.9 indique le
circuit équivalent de l’inductance. Lorsque l’inductance est faible, le Rs devient plus important que le Rp.
Lorsque l’inductance est importante, le Rp doit être prix en considération. Il est donc convenable d’utiliser le
mode série pour mesurer une inductance basse et le mode parallèle pour mesurer une inductance élevée.
Small capacitor
(High impedance)
C RP
RS
Effect
No Effect
Large capacitor
(Low impedance)
C RP
RS
Effect
No Effect
Figure 4.9
Small inductor
(Low impedance)
L RP
RS
Large inductor
(High impedance)
Effect
No Effect
L RP
RS
No Effect
Effect
30
DECLARATION OF CE CONFORMITY
according to EEC directives and NF EN 45014 norm
DECLARATION DE CONFORMITE CE
suivant directives CEE et norme NF EN 45014
SEFRAM INSTRUMENTS & SYSTEMES
32, rue Edouard MARTEL
42100 SAINT-ETIENNE ( FRANCE)
Declares, that the below mentionned product complies with :
Déclare que le produit désigné ci-après est conforme à :
The European low voltage directive 2006/95/EEC :
La directive Européenne basse tension 2006/95/CE
NF EN 61010-031 Safety requirements for electrical equipement for measurement, control and
laboratory use. Règles de sécurité pour les appareils électriques de mesurage, de régulation et de
laboratoire.
The European EMC directive 2004/108/EEC :
Emission standard EN 50081-1.
Immunity standard EN 50082-1.
La directive Européenne CEM 2004/108/CE :
En émission selon NF EN 50081-1.
En immunité selon NF EN 50082-1.
Pollution degree Degré de pollution : 2
Product name Désignation : LCR/ESR meter RLC mètre
Model Type : BK889B
Compliance was demonstrated in listed laboratory and record in test report number
La conformité à été démontrée dans un laboratoire reconnu et enregistrée dans le rapport numéro RC
BK889B
SAINT-ETIENNE the : Name/Position :
Tuesday, April 28, 2009 T. TAGLIARINO / Quality Manager
31
SEFRAM
32, rue E. Martel – BP55
F42009 – Saint-Etienne Cedex 2
France
Tel : 0825.56.50.50 (0,15€TTC/mn)
Fax : 04.77.57.23.23
Web : www.sefram.fr
E-mails :
Service commercial : sales@sefram.fr
Support technique : support@sefram.fr
Manuel d’utilisation_BK1550_Alimentation
Alimentation à découpage BK1550
Manuel d’utilisation
Manuel d’utilisation_BK1550_Alimentation
Manuel d’utilisation_BK1550_Alimentation
SOMMAIRE
TERMES ET SYMBOLES DE SÉCURITÉ.............................................................................................. 1
CONDITIONS D’UTILISATION............................................................................................................... 2
INTRODUCTION........................................................................................................................................ 2
UTILISER L’ALIMENTATION À DÉCOUPAGE 1550 ......................................................................................... 2
UTILISER LE PORT USB............................................................................................................................... 3
COMMANDES ET INDICATEURS.......................................................................................................... 4
MISE EN OEUVRE....................................................................................................................................... 5
CONNEXION À LA TERRE ............................................................................................................................. 5
MODE DE FONCTIONNEMENT....................................................................................................................... 5
TENSION CONSTANTE (CV), TRANSITION AUTOMATIQUE ET COURANT CONSTANT (CC) ............................ 6
PRÉRÉGLAGE DE LA VALEUR LIMITE DU COURANT (CC) ............................................................................. 6
PROCÉDURE DE CONNEXION ET DE MISE EN ROUTE ..................................................................................... 6
PROTECTION DE LA SORTIE CONTRE LA SURTENSION (OVP) ...................................................................... 7
PROTECTION CONTRE LA SURCHAUFFE........................................................................................................ 7
SPÉCIFICATIONS ...................................................................................................................................... 7
Manuel d’utilisation_BK1550_Alimentation
Manuel d’utilisation_BK1550_Alimentation
1
Termes et symboles de sécurité
Les termes suivants peuvent être utilisés dans ce manuel ou sur l’instrument :
Attention. Se référer au manuel
DANGER ! Haute tension – Risque de chocs électriques
Terre de protection
(Terre) Conducteur de terre
Terre (châssis)
Prescriptions de sécurité :
• L’utilisateur doit être informé des risques liés aux chocs électriques et prendre les précautions
nécessaires.
• Le raccordement au secteur doit impérativement se faire avec une prise de terre
• Toute intervention interne sur le produit (réglages ou réparation) doit se faire par du personnel
qualifié
Manuel d’utilisation_BK1550_Alimentation
2
Conditions d’utilisation
• Humidité relative 10 à 80%
• Humidité relative maximum de 80% pour une température maximum de 31°C (dégression
linéaire pour 50% d’humidité relative à 40°C).
• Altitude maximum de fonctionnement: 2000m
• Catégorie d’installation : CAT 2
• Degré de pollution: 2
• Fluctuation de la tension du secteur jusqu’à ±10% de la tension normale.
Introduction
Utiliser l’alimentation à découpage 1550
Cette alimentation est pilotée par microcontrôleur qui assiste la gestion de la tension et du courant de
sortie avec une capacité d’alimentation totale de 100W. Le contrôle de l’alimentation est réalisé par un
système de commande originale associé à un affichage digital, ainsi vous pouvez facilement
configurer la tension et le courant de sortie. C’est une alimentation faible bruit et ondulation et
silencieuse, idéale pour le travail en laboratoire, en atelier ou dans l’éducation ou l’espace de travail
est limité.
Le 1550 a une borne USB, un fonctionnement en courant constant, une protection contre les
surtensions, les sorties sont isolées, touche activation/désactivation de la sortie, facteur de formes
faibles.
Manuel d’utilisation_BK1550_Alimentation
3
Utiliser le port USB
La sortie USB est destinée à une alimentation USB standard (5VDC et 0.4A).
Vous pouvez mettre en marche ou charger vos portables (I-Pod, lecteur MP3 ou téléphone cellulaire*)
possédant des connecteurs d’alimentation USB pour obtenir un courant continu de l’ordinateur.
* Remarques
Tous les téléphones cellulaires ne peuvent pas être rechargés par USB. Certains nouveaux modèles
requièrent une tension plus élevée que 5V. Veuillez vous référez à la documentation de l’appareil pour
les problèmes de compatibilité.
Manuel d’utilisation_BK1550_Alimentation
4
Commandes et indicateurs
1. Interrupteur marche/arrêt :
Allumer ou éteindre l’alimentation, lorsqu’elle est mise en marche l’écran s’allume.
2. Prise secteur avec fusible
3. Boîtier fusible masqué ( ôter le cache pour avoir accès au fusible)
4. V: Touche de réglage de la tension de sortie
5. A: Touche de réglage du courant de sortie
6. “+” appuyer sur cette touche pour augmenter les valeurs numériques
Manuel d’utilisation_BK1550_Alimentation
5
7. “-” appuyer sur cette touche pour diminuer les valeurs numériques
8. Bouton Output On/Off (activer/désactiver la sortie)
9. Prise USB
Norme USB courant continu 5V, 400mA
Pour charger ou mettre en marche des ordinateurs portables et téléphones cellulaires
10. Borne de sortie polarité positive (rouge)
11. Borne de terre (:) verte
Borne de mise à la masse, normalement elle doit être court-circuitée avec les bornes (+) ou (-)
12. Borne de sortie polarité négative (noir)
13. Ecran LCD affichant:
La tension et le courant sur 3 digits, l’indication (CV) mode tension constante, l’indication (CC)
mode courant constant, l’état de la borne de sortie (activée/désactivée)
Mise en oeuvre
Connexion à la terre
Suivant l’application, les bornes de sortie de l’alimentation peuvent être mises à la terre dans
n’importe laquelle des conditions suivantes :
La borne – ou la borne + peuvent être réunies à la borne terre GND (verte).
Mode de fonctionnement
Cette alimentation a été conçue pour fonctionner comme source de tension constante ou comme
source de courant constant. Passage automatique à l’un de ces deux modes, lorsque la condition de
charge varie d’une des manières suivantes:
Configuration de la valeur de tension: tout d’abord, appuyer sur le clavier (4), puis ajuster la valeur
de tension comme désiré en utilisant le clavier (6) et (7).
Manuel d’utilisation_BK1550_Alimentation
6
Configuration de la valeur du courant: Appuyer sur le clavier (5), puis ajuster la valeur du courant
comme désiré en utilisant le clavier (6) et (7).
Tension constante (CV), Transition automatique et courant constant (CC)
L’alimentation fonctionne comme source de tension constante (CV) aussi longtemps que la charge du
courant est inférieure à la valeur prédéfinie de limitation du courant. Lorsque la charge du courant est
égale ou supérieure à cette valeur de limitation du courant, l’alimentation passe automatiquement en
mode courant constant, la tension baisse, (CC) apparaît à l’écran et l’unité fonctionne en source de
courant constant.
Lorsque le charge de courant repasse en dessous de la valeur prédéfinie de limitation de courant,
l’alimentation repasse en mode de tension constante (CV).
Préréglage de la valeur limite du courant (CC)
Allumer l’alimentation, régler la tension de sortie sur 3V, désactiver la borne de sortie en appuyant sur
la touche (8), l’icône devient .
Court-circuiter les bornes de sortie rouge et noire et activer la borne de sortie en appuyant sur la
touche (8), l’icône devient , régler la valeur de limitation du courant à la limite désirée en
utilisant les touches incrémenter et décrémenter. Désactiver la borne de sortie et enlever le courtcircuit
des bornes.
La limite de courant de l’alimentation a été réglée à x Amp pour toute la gamme de tension de sortie.
Procédure de connexion et de mise en route
1. Après avoir contrôlé les références brancher l’alimentation au secteur
2. Mettre en marche l’alimentation, l’écran LCD doit s’allumer en même temps.
3. L’icône (CV) doit apparaître à l’écran.
Manuel d’utilisation_BK1550_Alimentation
7
4. Régler la valeur de courant au maximum en appuyant sur la touche (6) si vous n’avez besoin
d’aucune valeur de limitation de courant plus basse, sinon effectuer la procédure de limitation
(CC).
5. Régler la tension de sortie à la valeur désirée puis désactiver la borne de sortie en appuyant sur la
touche (8).
6. Connecter le point chaud de votre charge avec la borne positive et le point froid de votre charge
avec la borne négative.
7. Activer de nouveau la borne de sortie et vérifier que l’écran affiche (CV).
8. Si l’écran affiche (CC), soit votre valeur prédéfinie de limitation de courant est trop basse soit
votre charge requière plus de tension et de courant. Vous devez ré-ajuster la tension et le courant
de la charge ou augmenter la tension ou le courant jusqu’à ce que (CV) apparaisse.
Protection de la sortie contre la surtension (OVP)
Ceci sert à protéger la charge connectée dans l’éventualité d’un dysfonctionnement du circuit de
contrôle de la tension de sortie, la tension de sortie maximum n’excèdera pas 40% de la valeur de
tension ajustée au moment de l’opération.
Protection contre la surchauffe
Lorsque la température à l’intérieur de l’alimentation devient plus élevée que la valeur prédéterminée,
la tension et le courant de sortie de l’alimentation diminuera automatiquement à zéro pour prévenir
tout risques de dommages de l’appareil. Lorsque la température à l’intérieur de l’alimentation retombe
à 65°C, l’appareil se remet automatiquement en fonction.
Spécifications
Tension d’entrée 200 – 240Vac (50~60Hz)
Pleine charge du courant d’entrée 120Vac 0.95A (+10%)
Manuel d’utilisation_BK1550_Alimentation
8
Principale sortie:
Gamme d’ajustement de tension de sortie 1.0 – 36VDC
Gamme d’ajustement du courant de sortie 0 – 3A
Régulation de tension pour une variation
de charge de 10% à 100% < 50mV
de secteur < 20mV
d’ondulation (mV eff.) < 5mV
de bruit (Crête-à-crête) < 50mV
Régulation de courant pour une variation
de charge de 10% à 100% < 20mA
de secteur < 20mA
Fréquence de découpage 80KHz à 120KHz
Rendement 83% (+10%)
Affichage voltmètre et ampèremètre 3 Digit
Précision du voltmètre +1% + 5rdg.
Précision de l’ampèremètre +1% + 5rdg.
SORTIE USB:
Tension de sortie 5V (+10%)
Courant de sortie 400mA (+10%)
Régulation tension de charge < 80mV (+10%)
Ondulation et Bruit (sans charge) < 8mV (+10%)
Manuel d’utilisation_BK1550_Alimentation
9
Voyants à l’écran CC, CV, Amp, Volt, Output ON-OFF
Protection Court-circuit, Surcharge, Echauffement
Système de refroidissement Convection naturelle
Dimensions (lxLxP) 2.8 x 6.0 x 9.8 (70 x 150 x 250mm)
Masse 4.4lbs. (2Kgs)
Manuel d’utilisation_BK1550_Alimentation
Manuel d’utilisation_BK1550_Alimentation
SEFRAM Instruments et Systèmes
32, Rue Edouard MARTEL
F42100 – SAINT-ETIENNE
Tel : 0825 56 50 50 (0,15€TTC/mn)
Fax: +33 (0)4 77 57 23 23
Site WEB : www.sefram.fr
e-mail : sales@sefram.fr
CC2531 USB Hardware
User’s Guide
swru221a
swru221a
2/14
Table of Contents
1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................3
2 About this Manual ........................................................................................................................3
3 Acronyms .....................................................................................................................................4
4 Definitions.....................................................................................................................................5
5 Getting Started .............................................................................................................................7
6 Using SmartRF05EB as an In-Circuit Emulator (ICE)..................................................................9
6.1 The Debug Interface................................................................................................................9
7 USB Dongle Hardware Description............................................................................................10
7.1 User Interface........................................................................................................................10
7.2 Debug Connector ..................................................................................................................10
7.3 RF Performance of Antenna ..................................................................................................11
8 USB Dongle Reference Design and Schematics.......................................................................12
9 References..................................................................................................................................13
10 General Information ...................................................................................................................14
10.1 Document History ..............................................................................................................14
swru221a
3/14
1 Introduction
Thank you for purchasing a CC2530 Development Kit.
The CC2530 is Texas Instrument’s second generation ZigBee/IEEE 802.15.4 compliant System-on-
Chip with an optimized 8051 MCU core and radio for the 2.4 GHz unlicensed ISM/SRD band. This
device enables industrial grade applications by offering state-of-the-art noise immunity, excellent link
budget, operation up to 125 degrees and low voltage operation.
In addition, the CC2530 provides extensive hardware support for packet handling, data buffering, burst
transmissions, data encryption, data authentication, clear channel assessment, link quality indication
and packet timing information. The CC2530 product folder on the web [10] has more information, with
datasheets, user guides and application notes.
The CC2531 is identical to CC2530, with the addition of a built in full speed USB 2.0 compliant
interface.
The CC2530 Development Kit includes all the necessary hardware to properly evaluate, demonstrate,
prototype and develop software targeting not only IEEE802.15.4 or ZigBee compliant applications, but
also proprietary applications for which a DSSS radio is required or wanted.
2 About this Manual
This manual covers the CC2531 USB dongle found in the CC2530 Development Kit and the CC2530
ZigBee Development Kit.
The manual covers the CC2531 USB Dongle hardware component of a USB development framework.
Please refer to [3] for a description of the accompanying USB Firmware Library and application
examples.
swru221a
4/14
3 Acronyms
CDC Communications Device Class
DK Development Kit
EB Evaluation Board
EM Evaluation Module
EMK Evaluation Module Kit
HID Human Interface Device
IC Integrated Circuit
ICE In Circuit Emulator
KB Kilo Byte (1024 byte)
LED Light Emitting Diode
LPRF Low Power RF
MCU Micro Controller
NC Not connected
RF Radio Frequency
RX Receive
SoC System on Chip
TI Texas Instruments
TX Transmit
UART Universal Asynchronous Receive Transmit
USB Universal Serial Bus
swru221a
5/14
4 Definitions
SmartRF05EB
The SmartRF05EB (evaluation board) is the main
board in the kit with a wide range of user
interfaces:
3x16 character serial LCD
Full speed USB 2.0 interface
UART
LEDs
Serial Flash
Potentiometer
Joystick
Buttons
The EB is the platform for the evaluation modules
(EM) and can be connected to the PC via USB to
control the EM.
CC2530EM
The CC2530EM (evaluation module) contains the
RF IC and necessary external components and
matching filters for getting the most out of the
radio. The module can be plugged into the
SmartRF05EB. Use the EM as reference
design for RF layout. The schematics are
included at the end of this document and the
layout files can be found on the web CC2530
Product Page [10].
CC2531 USB Dongle
The CC2531 USB Dongle is a fully operational
USB device that can be plugged into a PC. The
dongle has 2 LEDs, two small push-buttons and
connector holes that allow connection of external
sensors or devices. The dongle also has a
connector for programming and debugging of the
CC2531 USB controller.
The dongle comes preprogrammed with firmware
such that it can be used as a packet sniffer
device.
Antenna
2.4 GHz antenna Titanis from Antenova.
swru221a
6/14
SoC System on Chip. A collective term used to refer
to Texas Instruments ICs with on-chip MCU and
RF transceiver. Used in this document to
reference the CC2530 and 2531.
ICE In Circuit Emulator. ICE functionality is built into
the SmartRF05EB and the CC Debugger
USB software application examples Application examples using the CC2531 USB
Dongle together with a CC2530EM.
USB Firmware Library A library of low level USB firmware which is used
by all the USB software examples.
swru221a
7/14
5 Getting Started
Make sure to install SmartRF Studio before connecting the SmartRF05EB to a PC. By installing it, the
required Windows drivers will be provided when connecting the SmartRF05EB.
SmartRF Studio [4] is a PC application for Windows that helps you find and adjust the radio register
settings. Please see [4] for instructions on downloading and installation.
The dongle comes preprogrammed with firmware such that it can be used as a packet sniffer device.
For programming the device with other firmware an external ICE is needed. The SmartRF05EB1 can be
used to program the USB dongle. The CC2531 has a 2 wire debug interface that is used for chip
programming and debugging. When connecting this interface to the SmartRF05EB, the CC2531 can be
programmed from the SmartRF Flash Programmer software [2] and debugged from IAR Embedded
Workbench. To connect the CC2531 USB Dongle to the SmartRF05EB, follow these steps:
1. Turn off the SmartRF05EB power by moving the power switch shown in Figure 2 to the left
position.
2. Remove any evaluation modules (EMs) attached to the SmartRF05EB.
3. Connect the SmartRF05EB to a PC with the supplied USB cable.
4. Connect the USB Dongle to the ExtSoC Debug header (P3) on SmartRF05EB with the supplied
10 pin cable and adapter board (see Figure 1). Make sure pin 1 on the dongle is connected to
pin 1 on P3. This cable connects the debug interface and GND between the two devices;
however the USB Dongle is not powered through this cable.
5. Power the CC2531 USB Dongle. To power the dongle there are two options:
Powered with a USB Cable
Use the supplied USB extension cable to connect the USB Dongle to the PC (see
Figure 1).
Powered from the SmartRF05EB
Mount resistor R2 on the CC2531 USB Dongle and resistor R30 on the SmartRF05EB.
The CC2531 USB Dongle should only be powered by one of the two sources at a time. Do not
connect the USB cable to the USB Dongle while it is powered from the SmartRF05EB.
6. Turn on the power on the SmartRF05EB (see Figure 2).
1 It is also possible to use the SmartRF04EB or the CC Debugger to program the device.
swru221a
8/14
Figure 1 - CC2531 USB Dongle connected to SmartRF05EB
Figure 2 - SmartRF05EB power switch, power on.
The CC2531 can now be programmed with the SmartRF Flash Programmer software. The firmware on
the CC2531 can also be debugged using the IAR Embedded Workbench debugger. Please see the
“SmartRF Flash Programmer User’s Manual” for more details [2].
Please see the “CC2530 Development Kit User Manual” [1] for more information on the SmartRF05EB
and how to use the CC2530EM.
swru221a
9/14
6 Using SmartRF05EB as an In-Circuit Emulator (ICE)
The debug interface on the SmartRF05EB is controlled by the USB MCU. This allows both
programming and an emulator interface over USB, which makes the SmartRF05EB usable as an ICE
for the CC2531 dongle.
To use the SmartRF05EB as ICE, the IAR Embedded Workbench software for 8051 architecture
(EW8051) must be installed. The Embedded Workbench is an integrated development environment with
a complete tool-chain such as C Compiler, Simulator, and ICE debugger. Please see [1] for instructions
on how to set up the ICE debugger for use as an ICE.
When the SmartRF05EB with a SoC is connected to a PC with the USB port, the debugger in IAR
EW8051 will connect to it when started. If several SmartRF05EBs are connected to USB ports
simultaneously, a selection window will display the connected evaluation boards, and the user can
select which device to load.
6.1 The Debug Interface
For custom PCB’s with the CC2531 SoC, it is recommended to include a pin header or test points to
allow in-circuit emulation or programming using a SmartRF05EB or other 3rd party programming tools.
The USB Dongle can be used as a reference.
VDD note: The SmartRF05EB includes a voltage converter to support programming and debugging of
external systems with different voltage than the SmartRF05EB.
When using SmartRF05EB as emulator for external target debugging any evaluation module (EM) must
be removed.
Figure 3 shows the required signal for a minimum connector layout on external target.
Figure 3 - Minimum Debug Connector Pinout (top view)
swru221a
10/14
7 USB Dongle Hardware Description
Figure 4 - CC2531 USB Dongle
7.1 User Interface
The CC2531 USB Dongle has two buttons and two LEDs that can be used to interact with the user.
Table 1 shows which CC2531 signals are connected to what IO on the dongle.
IO
Connector CC2531 Dongle
User IO CC2531
1 P0.2 Green LED P0.0
2 P0.3 Red LED P1.1
3 P0.4 Button S1 P1.2
4 P0.5 Button S2 P1.3
5 P1.7
6 P1.6
7 P1.5
8 P1.4
Table 1 - CC2531 USB Dongle Pinout
7.2 Debug Connector
The CC2531 USB dongle can be connected to a SmartRF Evaluation Board for debugging and
programming.
IO Connector
Meandred F-antenna
CC2531F256
Button S1
Button S2
LEDs
Debug connector
Voltage regulator
swru221a
11/14
Figure 5 - CC2531 USB Dongle connected to SmartRF05EB
The debug connector on the CC2531 USB Dongle matches the debug connector on the SmartRF05EB
(and the CC Debugger). Note that, by default, the CC2531 dongle is not powered through the debug
connector, so an external power source must be used while programming. The easiest solution is to
connect it to a USB port on the PC. Alternatively, resistor R2 can be mounted. The table below shows
the pin out of the debug connector.
Pin # Connection
1 GND
2 VCC
3 CC2531 P2.2 (DC)
4 CC2531 P2.1 (DD)
5 NC
6 NC
7 CC2531 RESET
8 NC
9 Optional external VCC (R2 must be mounted)
10 NC
Table 2 - CC2531 USB Dongle Debug Connector
7.3 RF Performance of Antenna
While the CC2531 USB Dongle has a PCB antenna designed as a meandered inverted F antenna.
The performance of the PCB antenna on the USB Dongle will be affected by its nearby surroundings.
Therefore, when plugged into different computers or a USB extension cable differences in the RF
performance must be expected. Also, if the USB Dongle is put inside a casing, the material and design
of the enclosure will influence the antenna’s performance. For the CC2531 USB Dongle the maximum
antenna gain measured is 5.3 dBi. This means that duty cycling or reduction of output power might be
needed to ensure compliance with regulatory limits. Please see [8] for more information about SRD
regulations in the 2.4 GHz ISM band. The performance of the antenna of the CC2531 USB Dongle is
further described in [9].
swru221a
12/14
8 USB Dongle Reference Design and Schematics
Refer to [1] for the schematics of the CC2531 USB Dongle.
swru221a
13/14
9 References
[1] CC2530 DK Development Kit User Manual (swru208)
[2] SmartRF Flash Programmer (swrc044)
[3] SmartRF Packet Sniffer (swrc045)
[4] SmartRF Studio (swrc046)
[5] CC USB Firmware Library and Examples (swrc088)
[6] CC USB Software Examples User’s Guide (swru222)
[7] SmartRF05EB User’s Guide (swru210)
[8] AN032 – SRD Regulation for License-Free Transceiver Operation in the 2.4 GHz Band (swra060)
[9] AN043 – Small Size 2.4 GHz PCB Antenna (swra117)
[10] CC2530 Product Web Site (http://focus.ti.com/docs/prod/folders/print/cc2530.html)
swru221a
14/14
10 General Information
10.1 Document History
Revision Date Description/Changes
SWRU221A 2009.07.31 Updated info about how to connect dongle to SmartRF05EB. Corrected typos.
SWRU221 2009.05.08 Initial release
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, modifications, enhancements, improvements,
and other changes to its products and services at any time and to discontinue any product or service without notice. Customers should
obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and complete. All products are
sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale supplied at the time of order acknowledgment.
TI warrants performance of its hardware products to the specifications applicable at the time of sale in accordance with TI’s standard
warranty. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary to support this warranty. Except where
mandated by government requirements, testing of all parameters of each product is not necessarily performed.
TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or customer product design. Customers are responsible for their products and
applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with customer products and applications, customers should provide
adequate design and operating safeguards.
TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any TI patent right, copyright, mask work right,
or other TI intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI products or services are used. Information
published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license from TI to use such products or services or a
warranty or endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual
property of the third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI.
Reproduction of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration and is accompanied
by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. Reproduction of this information with alteration is an unfair and deceptive
business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered documentation. Information of third parties may be subject to additional
restrictions.
Resale of TI products or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that product or service voids all
express and any implied warranties for the associated TI product or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not
responsible or liable for any such statements.
TI products are not authorized for use in safety-critical applications (such as life support) where a failure of the TI product would reasonably
be expected to cause severe personal injury or death, unless officers of the parties have executed an agreement specifically governing
such use. Buyers represent that they have all necessary expertise in the safety and regulatory ramifications of their applications, and
acknowledge and agree that they are solely responsible for all legal, regulatory and safety-related requirements concerning their products
and any use of TI products in such safety-critical applications, notwithstanding any applications-related information or support that may be
provided by TI. Further, Buyers must fully indemnify TI and its representatives against any damages arising out of the use of TI products in
such safety-critical applications.
TI products are neither designed nor intended for use in military/aerospace applications or environments unless the TI products are
specifically designated by TI as military-grade or "enhanced plastic." Only products designated by TI as military-grade meet military
specifications. Buyers acknowledge and agree that any such use of TI products which TI has not designated as military-grade is solely at
the Buyer's risk, and that they are solely responsible for compliance with all legal and regulatory requirements in connection with such use.
TI products are neither designed nor intended for use in automotive applications or environments unless the specific TI products are
designated by TI as compliant with ISO/TS 16949 requirements. Buyers acknowledge and agree that, if they use any non-designated
products in automotive applications, TI will not be responsible for any failure to meet such requirements.
Following are URLs where you can obtain information on other Texas Instruments products and application solutions:
Products Applications
Amplifiers amplifier.ti.com Audio www.ti.com/audio
Data Converters dataconverter.ti.com Automotive www.ti.com/automotive
DLP® Products www.dlp.com Broadband www.ti.com/broadband
DSP dsp.ti.com Digital Control www.ti.com/digitalcontrol
Clocks and Timers www.ti.com/clocks Medical www.ti.com/medical
Interface interface.ti.com Military www.ti.com/military
Logic logic.ti.com Optical Networking www.ti.com/opticalnetwork
Power Mgmt power.ti.com Security www.ti.com/security
Microcontrollers microcontroller.ti.com Telephony www.ti.com/telephony
RFID www.ti-rfid.com Video & Imaging www.ti.com/video
RF/IF and ZigBee® Solutions www.ti.com/lprf Wireless www.ti.com/wireless
Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265
Copyright © 2009, Texas Instruments Incorporated
MSP430 Hardware Tools
User's Guide
Literature Number: SLAU278Q
May 2009–Revised February 2014
Contents
Preface ....................................................................................................................................... 7
1 Get Started Now! ............................................................................................................... 10
1.1 Flash Emulation Tool (FET) Overview .................................................................................. 11
1.2 Kit Contents, MSP-FET430PIF .......................................................................................... 12
1.3 Kit Contents, eZ430-F2013 .............................................................................................. 12
1.4 Kit Contents, eZ430-T2012 .............................................................................................. 12
1.5 Kit Contents, eZ430-RF2500 ............................................................................................ 12
1.6 Kit Contents, eZ430-RF2500T ........................................................................................... 12
1.7 Kit Contents, eZ430-RF2500-SEH ...................................................................................... 12
1.8 Kit Contents, eZ430-Chronos-xxx ....................................................................................... 13
1.9 Kit Contents, MSP-FET430UIF .......................................................................................... 13
1.10 Kit Contents, MSP-FET430xx ............................................................................................ 13
1.11 Kit Contents, FET430F6137RF900 ..................................................................................... 14
1.12 Kit Contents, MSP-TS430xx ............................................................................................. 14
1.13 Kit Contents, EM430Fx1x7RF900 ....................................................................................... 16
1.14 Hardware Installation, MSP-FET430PIF ............................................................................... 16
1.15 Hardware Installation, MSP-FET430UIF ............................................................................... 17
1.16 Hardware Installation, eZ430-XXXX, MSP-EXP430G2, MSP-EXP430FR5739, MSP-EXP430F5529 ......... 17
1.17 Hardware Installation, MSP-FET430Uxx, MSP-TS430xxx, FET430F6137RF900, EM430Fx137RF900 ...... 17
1.18 Important MSP430 Documents on the Web ........................................................................... 18
2 Design Considerations for In-Circuit Programming ............................................................... 19
2.1 Signal Connections for In-System Programming and Debugging ................................................... 20
2.2 External Power ............................................................................................................. 24
2.3 Bootstrap Loader (BSL) .................................................................................................. 24
A Frequently Asked Questions and Known Issues ................................................................... 25
A.1 Hardware FAQs ............................................................................................................ 26
A.2 Known Issues .............................................................................................................. 28
B Hardware .......................................................................................................................... 29
B.1 MSP-TS430D8 ............................................................................................................. 31
B.2 MSP-TS430PW14 ......................................................................................................... 34
B.3 MSP-TS430L092 .......................................................................................................... 37
B.4 MSP-TS430L092 Active Cable .......................................................................................... 40
B.5 MSP-TS430PW24 ......................................................................................................... 43
B.6 MSP-TS430DW28 ......................................................................................................... 46
B.7 MSP-TS430PW28 ......................................................................................................... 49
B.8 MSP-TS430PW28A ....................................................................................................... 52
B.9 MSP-TS430DA38 .......................................................................................................... 55
B.10 MSP-TS430QFN23x0 ..................................................................................................... 58
B.11 MSP-TS430RSB40 ........................................................................................................ 61
B.12 MSP-TS430RHA40A ...................................................................................................... 64
B.13 MSP-TS430DL48 .......................................................................................................... 67
B.14 MSP-TS430RGZ48B ...................................................................................................... 70
B.15 MSP-TS430RGZ48C ...................................................................................................... 73
B.16 MSP-TS430PM64 ......................................................................................................... 76
2 Contents SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com
B.17 MSP-TS430PM64A ....................................................................................................... 79
B.18 MSP-TS430RGC64B ..................................................................................................... 82
B.19 MSP-TS430RGC64C ..................................................................................................... 85
B.20 MSP-TS430RGC64USB .................................................................................................. 89
B.21 MSP-TS430PN80 .......................................................................................................... 93
B.22 MSP-TS430PN80A ........................................................................................................ 96
B.23 MSP-TS430PN80USB .................................................................................................... 99
B.24 MSP-TS430PZ100 ....................................................................................................... 103
B.25 MSP-TS430PZ100A ..................................................................................................... 106
B.26 MSP-TS430PZ100B ..................................................................................................... 109
B.27 MSP-TS430PZ100C ..................................................................................................... 112
B.28 MSP-TS430PZ5x100 .................................................................................................... 115
B.29 MSP-TS430PZ100USB ................................................................................................. 118
B.30 MSP-TS430PEU128 ..................................................................................................... 122
B.31 EM430F5137RF900 ..................................................................................................... 125
B.32 EM430F6137RF900 ..................................................................................................... 129
B.33 EM430F6147RF900 ..................................................................................................... 133
B.34 MSP-FET430PIF ......................................................................................................... 137
B.35 MSP-FET430UIF ......................................................................................................... 139
B.35.1 MSP-FET430UIF Revision History .......................................................................... 144
C Hardware Installation Guide .............................................................................................. 145
C.1 Hardware Installation .................................................................................................... 146
Document Revision History ........................................................................................................ 151
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Contents 3
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com
List of Figures
2-1. Signal Connections for 4-Wire JTAG Communication................................................................ 21
2-2. Signal Connections for 2-Wire JTAG Communication (Spy-Bi-Wire) Used by MSP430F2xx,
MSP430G2xx, and MSP430F4xx Devices............................................................................. 22
2-3. Signal Connections for 2-Wire JTAG Communication (Spy-Bi-Wire) Used by MSP430F5xx and
MSP430F6xx Devices .................................................................................................... 23
B-1. MSP-TS430D8 Target Socket Module, Schematic ................................................................... 31
B-2. MSP-TS430D8 Target Socket Module, PCB .......................................................................... 32
B-3. MSP-TS430PW14 Target Socket Module, Schematic ............................................................... 34
B-4. MSP-TS430PW14 Target Socket Module, PCB ...................................................................... 35
B-5. MSP-TS430L092 Target Socket Module, Schematic................................................................. 37
B-6. MSP-TS430L092 Target Socket Module, PCB........................................................................ 38
B-7. MSP-TS430L092 Active Cable Target Socket Module, Schematic................................................. 40
B-8. MSP-TS430L092 Active Cable Target Socket Module, PCB........................................................ 41
B-9. MSP-TS430PW24 Target Socket Module, Schematic ............................................................... 43
B-10. MSP-TS430PW24 Target Socket Module, PCB ...................................................................... 44
B-11. MSP-TS430DW28 Target Socket Module, Schematic ............................................................... 46
B-12. MSP-TS430DW28 Target Socket Module, PCB ...................................................................... 47
B-13. MSP-TS430PW28 Target Socket Module, Schematic ............................................................... 49
B-14. MSP-TS430PW28 Target Socket Module, PCB ...................................................................... 50
B-15. MSP-TS430PW28A Target Socket Module, Schematic.............................................................. 52
B-16. MSP-TS430PW28A Target Socket Module, PCB (Red) ............................................................. 53
B-17. MSP-TS430DA38 Target Socket Module, Schematic ................................................................ 55
B-18. MSP-TS430DA38 Target Socket Module, PCB ....................................................................... 56
B-19. MSP-TS430QFN23x0 Target Socket Module, Schematic ........................................................... 58
B-20. MSP-TS430QFN23x0 Target Socket Module, PCB .................................................................. 59
B-21. MSP-TS430RSB40 Target Socket Module, Schematic .............................................................. 61
B-22. MSP-TS430RSB40 Target Socket Module, PCB ..................................................................... 62
B-23. MSP-TS430RHA40A Target Socket Module, Schematic ............................................................ 64
B-24. MSP-TS430RHA40A Target Socket Module, PCB ................................................................... 65
B-25. MSP-TS430DL48 Target Socket Module, Schematic ................................................................ 67
B-26. MSP-TS430DL48 Target Socket Module, PCB ....................................................................... 68
B-27. MSP-TS430RGZ48B Target Socket Module, Schematic ............................................................ 70
B-28. MSP-TS430RGZ48B Target Socket Module, PCB ................................................................... 71
B-29. MSP-TS430RGZ48C Target Socket Module, Schematic ............................................................ 73
B-30. MSP-TS430RGZ48C Target Socket Module, PCB ................................................................... 74
B-31. MSP-TS430PM64 Target Socket Module, Schematic................................................................ 76
B-32. MSP-TS430PM64 Target Socket Module, PCB....................................................................... 77
B-33. MSP-TS430PM64A Target Socket Module, Schematic .............................................................. 79
B-34. MSP-TS430PM64A Target Socket Module, PCB ..................................................................... 80
B-35. MSP-TS430RGC64B Target Socket Module, Schematic ............................................................ 82
B-36. MSP-TS430RGC64B Target Socket Module, PCB ................................................................... 83
B-37. MSP-TS430RGC64C Target Socket Module, Schematic............................................................ 86
B-38. MSP-TS430RGC64C Target Socket Module, PCB................................................................... 87
B-39. MSP-TS430RGC64USB Target Socket Module, Schematic ........................................................ 89
B-40. MSP-TS430RGC64USB Target Socket Module, PCB ............................................................... 90
B-41. MSP-TS430PN80 Target Socket Module, Schematic ................................................................ 93
B-42. MSP-TS430PN80 Target Socket Module, PCB ....................................................................... 94
B-43. MSP-TS430PN80A Target Socket Module, Schematic .............................................................. 96
4 List of Figures SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com
B-44. MSP-TS430PN80A Target Socket Module, PCB ..................................................................... 97
B-45. MSP-TS430PN80USB Target Socket Module, Schematic .......................................................... 99
B-46. MSP-TS430PN80USB Target Socket Module, PCB ................................................................ 100
B-47. MSP-TS430PZ100 Target Socket Module, Schematic ............................................................. 103
B-48. MSP-TS430PZ100 Target Socket Module, PCB .................................................................... 104
B-49. MSP-TS430PZ100A Target Socket Module, Schematic............................................................ 106
B-50. MSP-TS430PZ100A Target Socket Module, PCB................................................................... 107
B-51. MSP-TS430PZ100B Target Socket Module, Schematic............................................................ 109
B-52. MSP-TS430PZ100B Target Socket Module, PCB................................................................... 110
B-53. MSP-TS430PZ100C Target Socket Module, Schematic ........................................................... 112
B-54. MSP-TS430PZ100C Target Socket Module, PCB .................................................................. 113
B-55. MSP-TS430PZ5x100 Target Socket Module, Schematic .......................................................... 115
B-56. MSP-TS430PZ5x100 Target Socket Module, PCB.................................................................. 116
B-57. MSP-TS430PZ100USB Target Socket Module, Schematic........................................................ 118
B-58. MSP-TS430PZ100USB Target Socket Module, PCB............................................................... 119
B-59. MSP-TS430PEU128 Target Socket Module, Schematic ........................................................... 122
B-60. MSP-TS430PEU128 Target Socket Module, PCB .................................................................. 123
B-61. EM430F5137RF900 Target board, Schematic....................................................................... 125
B-62. EM430F5137RF900 Target board, PCB.............................................................................. 126
B-63. EM430F6137RF900 Target board, Schematic....................................................................... 129
B-64. EM430F6137RF900 Target board, PCB.............................................................................. 130
B-65. EM430F6147RF900 Target Board, Schematic ...................................................................... 133
B-66. EM430F6147RF900 Target Board, PCB ............................................................................. 134
B-67. MSP-FET430PIF FET Interface Module, Schematic ................................................................ 137
B-68. MSP-FET430PIF FET Interface Module, PCB....................................................................... 138
B-69. MSP-FET430UIF USB Interface, Schematic (1 of 4) ............................................................... 139
B-70. MSP-FET430UIF USB Interface, Schematic (2 of 4) ............................................................... 140
B-71. MSP-FET430UIF USB Interface, Schematic (3 of 4) ............................................................... 141
B-72. MSP-FET430UIF USB Interface, Schematic (4 of 4) ............................................................... 142
B-73. MSP-FET430UIF USB Interface, PCB ................................................................................ 143
C-1. Windows XP Hardware Wizard ........................................................................................ 146
C-2. Windows XP Driver Location Selection Folder....................................................................... 147
C-3. Device Manager Using USB Debug Interface using VID/PID 0x2047/0x0010................................... 148
C-4. Device Manager Using USB Debug Interface with VID/PID 0x0451/0xF430 .................................... 149
C-5. Device Manager Using USB Debug Interface with VID/PID 0x0451/0xF432 .................................... 150
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 List of Figures 5
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com
List of Tables
1-1. Flash Emulation Tool (FET) Features and Device Compatibility.................................................... 11
1-2. Individual Kit Contents, MSP-TS430xx ................................................................................. 14
B-1. MSP-TS430D8 Bill of Materials.......................................................................................... 33
B-2. MSP-TS430PW14 Bill of Materials...................................................................................... 36
B-3. MSP-TS430L092 Bill of Materials ....................................................................................... 39
B-4. MSP-TS430L092 JP1 Settings .......................................................................................... 41
B-5. MSP-TS430L092 Active Cable Bill of Materials ....................................................................... 42
B-6. MSP-TS430PW24 Bill of Materials...................................................................................... 45
B-7. MSP-TS430DW28 Bill of Materials...................................................................................... 48
B-8. MSP-TS430PW28 Bill of Materials ..................................................................................... 51
B-9. MSP-TS430PW28A Bill of Materials .................................................................................... 54
B-10. MSP-TS430DA38 Bill of Materials ...................................................................................... 57
B-11. MSP-TS430QFN23x0 Bill of Materials.................................................................................. 60
B-12. MSP-TS430RSB40 Bill of Materials .................................................................................... 63
B-13. MSP-TS430RHA40A Bill of Materials................................................................................... 66
B-14. MSP-TS430DL48 Bill of Materials....................................................................................... 69
B-15. MSP-TS430RGZ48B Bill of Materials................................................................................... 72
B-16. MSP-TS430RGZ48C Revision History ................................................................................. 74
B-17. MSP-TS430RGZ48C Bill of Materials .................................................................................. 75
B-18. MSP-TS430PM64 Bill of Materials ...................................................................................... 78
B-19. MSP-TS430PM64A Bill of Materials .................................................................................... 81
B-20. MSP-TS430RGC64B Bill of Materials .................................................................................. 84
B-21. MSP-TS430RGC64C Bill of Materials .................................................................................. 88
B-22. MSP-TS430RGC64USB Bill of Materials............................................................................... 91
B-23. MSP-TS430PN80 Bill of Materials ...................................................................................... 95
B-24. MSP-TS430PN80A Bill of Materials .................................................................................... 98
B-25. MSP-TS430PN80USB Bill of Materials ............................................................................... 101
B-26. MSP-TS430PZ100 Bill of Materials.................................................................................... 105
B-27. MSP-TS430PZ100A Bill of Materials.................................................................................. 108
B-28. MSP-TS430PZ100B Bill of Materials.................................................................................. 111
B-29. MSP-TS430PZ100C Bill of Materials.................................................................................. 114
B-30. MSP-TS430PZ5x100 Bill of Materials................................................................................. 117
B-31. MSP-TS430PZ100USB Bill of Materials .............................................................................. 120
B-32. MSP-TS430PEU128 Bill of Materials ................................................................................. 124
B-33. EM430F5137RF900 Bill of Materials .................................................................................. 127
B-34. EM430F6137RF900 Bill of Materials .................................................................................. 131
B-35. EM430F6147RF900 Bill of Materials .................................................................................. 135
C-1. USB VIDs and PIDs Used in MSP430 Tools......................................................................... 146
6 List of Tables SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Preface
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Read This First
About This Manual
This manual describes the hardware of the Texas Instruments MSP-FET430 Flash Emulation Tool (FET).
The FET is the program development tool for the MSP430™ ultra-low-power microcontroller. Both
available interface types, the parallel port interface and the USB interface, are described.
How to Use This Manual
Read and follow the instructions in Chapter 1. This chapter lists the contents of the FET, provides
instructions on installing the hardware and according software drivers. After you see how quick and easy it
is to use the development tools, TI recommends that you read all of this manual.
This manual describes the setup and operation of the FET but does not fully describe the MSP430™
microcontrollers or the development software systems. For details of these items, see the appropriate TI
documents listed in Section 1.18.
This manual applies to the following tools (and devices):
• MSP-FET430PIF (debug interface with parallel port connection, for all MSP430 flash-based devices)
• MSP-FET430UIF (debug interface with USB connection, for all MSP430 flash-based devices)
• eZ430-F2013 (USB stick form factor interface with attached MSP430F2013 target, for all
MSP430F20xx, MSP430G2x01, MSP430G2x11, MSP430G2x21, and MSP430G2x31 devices)
• eZ430-T2012 (three MSP430F2012 based target boards)
• eZ430-RF2500 (USB stick form factor interface with attached MSP430F2274 and CC2500 target, for
all MSP430F20xx, MSP430F21x2, MSP430F22xx, MSP430G2x01, MSP430G2x11, MSP430G2x21,
and MSP430G2x31 devices)
• eZ430-RF2500T (one MSP430F2274 and CC2500 target board including battery pack)
• eZ430-RF2500-SEH (USB stick form factor interface with attached MSP430F2274 and CC2500 target
and solar energy harvesting module)
• eZ430-Chronos-xxx (USB stick form factor interface with CC430F6137 based development system
contained in a watch. Includes <1 GHz RF USB access point)
Stand-alone target-socket modules (without debug interface) named as MSP-TS430TSxx.
Tools named as MSP-FET430Uxx contain the USB debug interface (MSP-FET430UIF) and the respective
target socket module MSP-TS430TSxx, where 'xx' is the same for both names. Following tools contain
also the USB debug interface (MSP-FET430UIF):
• FET430F5137RF900 (for CC430F513x devices in 48-pin RGZ packages) (green PCB)
• FET430F6137RF900 (for CC430F612x and CC430F613x devices in 64-pin RGC packages) (green
PCB)
These tools contain the most up-to-date materials available at the time of packaging. For the latest
materials (data sheets, user's guides, software, application information, and so on), visit the TI MSP430
web site at www.ti.com/msp430 or contact your local TI sales office.
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Read This First 7
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Information About Cautions and Warnings www.ti.com
Information About Cautions and Warnings
This document may contain cautions and warnings.
CAUTION
This is an example of a caution statement.
A caution statement describes a situation that could potentially damage your
software or equipment.
WARNING
This is an example of a warning statement.
A warning statement describes a situation that could potentially
cause harm to you.
The information in a caution or a warning is provided for your protection. Read each caution and warning
carefully.
Related Documentation From Texas Instruments
MSP430 development tools documentation:
Code Composer Studio v5.4 for MSP430 User's Guide (literature number SLAU157)
Code Composer Studio v5.x Core Edition (CCS Mediawiki)
IAR Embedded Workbench Version 3+ for MSP430(tm) User's Guide (literature number SLAU138)
IAR Embedded Workbench KickStart installer (literature number SLAC050)
eZ430-F2013 Development Tool User's Guide (literature number SLAU176)
eZ430-RF2480 Demonstration Kit User's Guide (literature number SWRU151)
eZ430-RF2500 Development Tool User's Guide (literature number SLAU227)
eZ430-RF2500-SEH Development Tool User's Guide (literature number SLAU273)
eZ430-Chronos Development Tool User's Guide (literature number SLAU292)
Spectrum Analyzer (MSP-SA430-SUB1GHZ) User's Guide (literature number SLAU371)
MSP-EXP430F5529 Experimenter Board User's Guide (literature number SLAU330)
MSP-EXP430F5438 Experimenter Board User's Guide (literature number SLAU263)
MSP-EXP430G2 LaunchPad Experimenter Board User's Guide (literature number SLAU318)
MSP Gang Programmer (MSP-GANG) User's Guide (literature number SLAU358)
MSP430 Gang Programmer (MSP-GANG430) User's Guide (literature number SLAU101)
MSP430 device user's guides:
MSP430x1xx Family User's Guide (literature number SLAU049)
MSP430x2xx Family User's Guide (literature number SLAU144)
MSP430x3xx Family User's Guide (literature number SLAU012)
MSP430x4xx Family User's Guide (literature number SLAU056)
MSP430x5xx and MSP430x6xx Family User's Guide (literature number SLAU208)
CC430 Family User's Guide (literature number SLAU259)
8 Read This First SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com If You Need Assistance
MSP430FR57xx Family User's Guide (literature number SLAU272)
MSP430FR58xx and MSP430FR59xx Family User's Guide (literature number SLAU367)
If You Need Assistance
Support for the MSP430 devices and the FET development tools is provided by the Texas Instruments
Product Information Center (PIC). Contact information for the PIC can be found on the TI web site at
www.ti.com/support. The Texas Instruments E2E Community support forums for the MSP430 provide
open interaction with peer engineers, TI engineers, and other experts. Additional device-specific
information can be found on the MSP430 web site.
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Read This First 9
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Chapter 1
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Get Started Now!
This chapter lists the contents of the FET and provides instruction on installing the hardware.
Topic ........................................................................................................................... Page
1.1 Flash Emulation Tool (FET) Overview .................................................................. 11
1.2 Kit Contents, MSP-FET430PIF ............................................................................. 12
1.3 Kit Contents, eZ430-F2013 .................................................................................. 12
1.4 Kit Contents, eZ430-T2012 .................................................................................. 12
1.5 Kit Contents, eZ430-RF2500 ................................................................................ 12
1.6 Kit Contents, eZ430-RF2500T .............................................................................. 12
1.7 Kit Contents, eZ430-RF2500-SEH ........................................................................ 12
1.8 Kit Contents, eZ430-Chronos-xxx ........................................................................ 13
1.9 Kit Contents, MSP-FET430UIF ............................................................................. 13
1.10 Kit Contents, MSP-FET430xx .............................................................................. 13
1.11 Kit Contents, FET430F6137RF900 ........................................................................ 14
1.12 Kit Contents, MSP-TS430xx ................................................................................ 14
1.13 Kit Contents, EM430Fx1x7RF900 ......................................................................... 16
1.14 Hardware Installation, MSP-FET430PIF ................................................................ 16
1.15 Hardware Installation, MSP-FET430UIF ................................................................ 17
1.16 Hardware Installation, eZ430-XXXX, MSP-EXP430G2, MSP-EXP430FR5739, MSPEXP430F5529
.................................................................................................... 17
1.17 Hardware Installation, MSP-FET430Uxx, MSP-TS430xxx, FET430F6137RF900,
EM430Fx137RF900 ............................................................................................ 17
1.18 Important MSP430 Documents on the Web ........................................................... 18
10 Get Started Now! SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com Flash Emulation Tool (FET) Overview
1.1 Flash Emulation Tool (FET) Overview
TI offers several flash emulation tools according to different requirements.
Table 1-1. Flash Emulation Tool (FET) Features and Device Compatibility(1)
eZ430-F2013
eZ430-RF2500
eZ430-RF2480
eZ430-RF2560
MSP-WDSxx Metawatch
eZ430-Chronos
MSP-FET430PIF
MSP-FET430UIF
LaunchPad (MSP-EXP430G2)
MSP-EXP430FR5739
MSP-EXP430F5529
Supports all programmable MSP430 and
CC430 devices (F1xx, F2xx, F4xx, F5xx, F6xx, G2xx, L092, FR57xx, FR59xx, x x
MSP430TCH5E)
Supports only F20xx, G2x01, G2x11, x G2x21, G2x31
Supports MSP430F20xx, F21x2, F22xx, x G2x01, G2x11, G2x21, G2x31, G2x53
Supports MSP430F20xx, F21x2, F22xx, x x G2x01, G2x11, G2x21, G2x31
Supports F5438, F5438A x
Supports BT5190, F5438A x
Supports only F552x x
Supports FR57xx, F5638, F6638 x
Supports only CC430F613x x
Allows fuse blow x
Adjustable target supply voltage x
Fixed 2.8-V target supply voltage x
Fixed 3.6-V target supply voltage x x x x x x x x x
4-wire JTAG x x
2-wire JTAG(2) x x x x x x x x x x
Application UART x x x x x x x x
Supported by CCS for Windows x x x x x x x x x x x
Supported by CCS for Linux x
Supported by IAR x x x x x x x x x x x
(1) The MSP-FET430PIF is for legacy device support only. This emulation tool will not support any new devices released after 2011.
(2) The 2-wire JTAG debug interface is also referred to as Spy-Bi-Wire (SBW) interface.
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Get Started Now! 11
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Kit Contents, MSP-FET430PIF www.ti.com
1.2 Kit Contents, MSP-FET430PIF
• One READ ME FIRST document
• One MSP-FET430PIF interface module
• One 25-conductor cable
• One 14-conductor cable
NOTE: This part is obsolete and is not recommended to use in new design.
1.3 Kit Contents, eZ430-F2013
• One QUICK START GUIDE document
• One eZ430-F2013 development tool including one MSP430F2013 target board
1.4 Kit Contents, eZ430-T2012
• Three MSP430F2012-based target boards
1.5 Kit Contents, eZ430-RF2500
• One QUICK START GUIDE document
• One eZ430-RF2500 CD-ROM
• One eZ430-RF2500 development tool including one MSP430F2274 and CC2500 target board
• One eZ430-RF2500T target board
• One AAA battery pack with expansion board (batteries included)
1.6 Kit Contents, eZ430-RF2500T
• One eZ430-RF2500T target board
• One AAA battery pack with expansion board (batteries included)
1.7 Kit Contents, eZ430-RF2500-SEH
• One MSP430 development tool CD containing documentation and development software
• One eZ430-RF USB debugging interface
• Two eZ430-RF2500T wireless target boards
• One SEH-01 solar energy harvester board
• One AAA battery pack with expansion board (batteries included)
12 Get Started Now! SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com Kit Contents, eZ430-Chronos-xxx
1.8 Kit Contents, eZ430-Chronos-xxx
'433, '868, '915
• One QUICK START GUIDE document
• One ez430-Chronos emulator
• One screwdriver
• Two spare screws
eZ430-Chronos-433:
– One 433-MHz eZ430-Chronos watch (battery included)
– One 433-MHz eZ430-Chronos access point
eZ430-Chronos-868:
– One 868-MHz eZ430-Chronos watch (battery included)
– One 868-MHz eZ430-Chronos access point
eZ430-Chronos-915:
– One 915-MHz eZ430-Chronos watch (battery included)
– One 915-MHz eZ430-Chronos access point
1.9 Kit Contents, MSP-FET430UIF
• One READ ME FIRST document
• One MSP-FET430UIF interface module
• One USB cable
• One 14-conductor cable
1.10 Kit Contents, MSP-FET430xx
• One READ ME FIRST document
• One MSP-FET430UIF USB interface module. This is the unit that has a USB B-connector on one end
of the case, and a 2×7-pin male connector on the other end of the case.
• One USB cable
• One 32.768-kHz crystal from Micro Crystal, if the board has an option to use the quartz.
• A 2×7-pin male JTAG connector is also present on the PCB (see different setup for L092)
• One 14-Pin JTAG conductor cable
• One small box containing two MSP430 device samples (See table for Sample Type)
• One target socket module. To determine the devices used for each board and a summary of the board,
see Table 1-2. The name of MSP-TS430xx board can be derived from the name of the MSP-FET430xx
kit; for example, the MSP-FET430U28A kit contains the MSP-TS430PW28A board.
Refer to the device data sheets for device specifications. Device errata can be found in the respective
device product folder on the web provided as a PDF document. Depending on the device, errata may also
be found in the device bug database at www.ti.com/sc/cgi-bin/buglist.cgi.
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Get Started Now! 13
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Kit Contents, FET430F6137RF900 www.ti.com
1.11 Kit Contents, FET430F6137RF900
• One READ ME FIRST document
• One legal notice
• One MSP-FET430UIF interface module
• Two EM430F6137RF900 target socket modules. This is the PCB on which is soldered a CC430F6137
device in a 64-pin RGC package. A 2×7-pin male connector is also present on the PCB.
• Two CC430EM battery packs
• Four AAA batteries
• Two 868-MHz or 915-MHz antennas
• Two 32.768-kHz crystals
• 18 PCB 2x4-pin headers
• One USB cable
• One 14-pin JTAG conductor cable
1.12 Kit Contents, MSP-TS430xx
• One READ ME FIRST document
• One 32.768-kHz crystal from Micro Crystal (except MSP-TS430PW24)
• One target socket module
• A 2×7-pin male JTAG connector is also present on the PCB (see different setup for L092)
• MSP430 Device samples (see Table 1-2 for sample type)
Table 1-2. Individual Kit Contents, MSP-TS430xx
Part Number Socket Type Supported Devices Included Devices Headers and Comment
MSP-TS430D8 8-pin D MSP430G2210, 1 x MSP430G2210 and Two PCB 1×4-pin headers (two male and
(green PCB) (TSSOP ZIF) MSP430G2230 1 x MSP430G2230 two female)
MSP430F20xx,
MSP-TS430PW14 14-pin PW MSP430G2x01, Four PCB 1×7-pin headers (two male and (green PCB) (TSSOP ZIF) MSP430G2x11, 2 x MSP430F2013IPW two female) MSP430G2x21,
MSP430G2x31
Four PCB 1×7-pin headers (two male and
two female). A "Micro-MaTch" 10-pin
MSP-TS430L092 14-pin PW female connector is also present on the (green PCB) (TSSOP ZIF) MSP-TS430L092 2 x MSP430L092IPW PCB which connects the kit with an 'Active Cable' PCB; this 'Active Cable'
PCB is connected by 14-pin JTAG cable
with the FET430UIF
MSP-TS430PW24 24-pin PW MSP430AFE2xx 2 x MSP430AFE253IPW Four PCB 1×12-pin headers (two male (green PCB) (TSSOP ZIF) and two female)
MSP430F11x1,
MSP430F11x2,
MSP-TS430DW28 28-pin DW MSP430F12x, Four PCB 1×12-pin headers (two male (green PCB) (SSOP ZIF) MSP430F12x2, 2 x MSP430F123IDW and two female) MSP430F21xx
Supports devices in 20- and
28-pin DA packages
MSP430F11x1,
MSP-TS430PW28 28-pin PW MSP430F11x2, Four PCB 1×12-pin headers (two male (green PCB) (TSSOP ZIF) MSP430F12x, 2 x MSP430F2132IPW and two female) MSP430F12x2,
MSP430F21xx
MSP430F20xx,
MSP-TS430PW28A 28-pin PW MSP430G2xxx in 14-, 20-, Four PCB 1×12-pin headers (two male (red PCB) (TSSOP ZIF) and 28-pin PW packages, 2 x MSP430G2452IPW20 and two female) MSP430TCH5E in PW
package
MSP-TS430DA38 38-pin DA MSP430F22xx, 2 x MSP430F2274IDA Four PCB 1×19-pin headers (two male (green PCB) (TSSOP ZIF) MSP430G2x44, 2 x MSP430G2744IDA and two female) MSP430G2x55 2 x MSP430G2955IDA
MSP-TS430QFN23x0 40-pin RHA MSP430F23x0 2 x MSP430F2370IRHA Eight PCB 1×10-pin headers (four male (green PCB) (QFN ZIF) and four female)
14 Get Started Now! SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com Kit Contents, MSP-TS430xx
Table 1-2. Individual Kit Contents, MSP-TS430xx (continued)
Part Number Socket Type Supported Devices Included Devices Headers and Comment
MSP-TS430RSB40 40-pin RSB MSP430F51x1, 2 x MSP430F5172IRSB Eight PCB 1×10-pin headers (four male (green PCB) (QFN ZIF) MSP430F51x2 and four female)
MSP-TS430RHA40A 40-pin RHA MSP430FR572x, 2 x MSP430FR5739IRHA Eight PCB 1×10-pin headers (four male (red PCB) (QFN ZIF) MSP430FR573x and four female)
MSP-TS430DL48 48-pin DL MSP430F42x0 2 x MSP430F4270IDL Four PCB 2×12-pin headers (two male (green PCB) (TSSOP ZIF) and two female)
MSP-TS430RGZ48B 48-pin RGZ MSP430F534x 2 x MSP430F5342IRGZ Eight PCB 1×12-pin headers (four male (blue PCB) (QFN ZIF) and four female)
MSP-TS430RGZ48C 48-pin RGZ MSP430FR58xx and 2 x MSP430FR5969IRGZ Eight PCB 1×12-pin headers (four male (black PCB) (QFN ZIF) MSP430FR59xx and four female)
MSP430F13x,
MSP430F14x,
MSP430F14x1,
MSP430F15x,
MSP430F16x,
MSP430F16x1,
MSP430F23x, TS Kit:
MSP-TS430PM64 64-pin PM MSP430F24x, 2 x MSP430F2618IPM; Eight PCB 1×16-pin headers (four male (green PCB) (QFP ZIF) MSP430F24xx, FET Kit: and four female) MSP430F261x, 2 x MSP430F417IPM and
MSP430F41x, 2 x MSP430F169IPM
MSP430F42x,
MSP430F42xA,
MSP430FE42x,
MSP430FE42xA,
MSP430FE42x2,
MSP430FW42x
MSP-TS430PM64A 64-pin PM MSP430F41x2 2 x MSP430F4152IPM Eight PCB 1×16-pin headers (four male (red PCB) (QFP ZIF) and four female)
MSP-TS430RGC64B 64-pin RGC MSP430F530x 2 x MSP430F5310IRGC Eight PCB 1×16-pin headers (four male (blue PCB) (QFN ZIF) and four female)
MSP430F522x,
MSP-TS430RGC64C 64-pin RGC MSP430F521x , Eight PCB 1×16-pin headers (four male (black PCB) (QFN ZIF) MSP430F523x, 2 x MSP430F5229IRGC and four female) MSP430F524x,
MSP430F525x
MSP-TS430RGC64USB 64-pin RGC MSP430F550x, 2 x MSP430F5510IRGC or Eight PCB 1×16-pin headers (four male (green PCB) (QFN ZIF) MSP430F551x, 2 x MSP430F5528IRGC and four female) MSP430F552x
MSP430F241x,
MSP430F261x,
MSP-TS430PN80 80-pin PN MSP430F43x, Eight PCB 1×20-pin headers (four male (green PCB) (QFP ZIF) MSP430F43x1, 2 x MSP430FG439IPN and four female) MSP430FG43x,
MSP430F47x,
MSP430FG47x
MSP-TS430PN80A 80-pin PN MSP430F532x 2 x MSP430F5329IPN Eight PCB 1×20-pin headers (four male (red PCB) (QFP ZIF) and four female)
MSP-TS430PN80USB 80-pin PN MSP430F552x, 2 x MSP430F5529IPN Eight PCB 1×20-pin headers (four male (green PCB) (QFP ZIF) MSP430F551x and four female)
MSP430F43x,
MSP-TS430PZ100 100-pin PZ MSP430F43x1, Eight PCB 1×25-pin headers (four male (green PCB) (QFP ZIF) MSP430F44x, 2 x MSP430FG4619IPZ and four female) MSP430FG461x, MSP430
F47xx
MSP-TS430PZ100A 100-pin PZ MSP430F471xx 2 x MSP430F47197IPZ Eight PCB 1×25-pin headers (four male (red PCB) (QFP ZIF) and four female)
MSP-TS430PZ100B 100-pin PZ MSP430F67xx 2 x MSP430F6733IPZ Eight PCB 1×25-pin headers (four male (blue PCB) (QFP ZIF) and four female)
MSP430F645x,
MSP-TS430PZ100C 100-pin PZ MSP430F643x, 2 x MSP430F6438IPZ Eight PCB 1×25-pin headers (four male (black PCB) (QFP ZIF) MSP430F535x, and four female)
MSP430F533x
MSP-TS430PZ5x100 100-pin PZ MSP430F543x, Eight PCB 1×25-pin headers (four male (green PCB) (QFP ZIF) MSP430BT5190, 2 x MSP430F5438IPZ and four female) MSP430SL5438A
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Get Started Now! 15
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Kit Contents, EM430Fx1x7RF900 www.ti.com
Table 1-2. Individual Kit Contents, MSP-TS430xx (continued)
Part Number Socket Type Supported Devices Included Devices Headers and Comment
MSP-TS430PZ100USB 100-pin PZ MSP430F665x, Eight PCB 1×25-pin headers (four male (green PCB) (QFP ZIF) MSP430F663x, 2 x MSP430F6638IPZ and four female) MSP430F563x
MSP430F677x,
MSP430F676x, Four PCB 1x26-pin headers (two male MSP-TS430PEU128 128-pin PEU MSP430F674x, 2 x MSP430F67791IPEU and two female) and four PCB 1x38-pin (green PCB) (QFP ZIF) MSP430F677x1, headers (two male and two female) MSP430F676x1,
MSP430F674x1
See the device data sheets for device specifications. Device errata can be found in the respective device
product folder on the web provided as a PDF document. Depending on the device, errata may also be
found in the device bug database at www.ti.com/sc/cgi-bin/buglist.cgi.
1.13 Kit Contents, EM430Fx1x7RF900
• One READ ME FIRST document
• One legal notice
• Two target socket module
MSP-EM430F5137RF900: Two EM430F5137RF900 target socket modules. This is the PCB on which
is soldered a CC430F5137 device in a 48-pin RGZ package. A 2×7-pin male connector is also present
on the PCB
MSP-EM430F6137RF900: Two EM430F6137RF900 target socket modules. This is the PCB on which
is soldered a CC430F6137 device in a 64-pin RGC package. A 2×7-pin male connector is also present
on the PCB
MSP-EM430F6147RF900: Two EM430F6147RF900 target socket modules. This is the PCB on which
is soldered a CC430F6147 device in a 64-pin RGC package. A 2×7-pin male connector is also present
on the PCB
• Two CC430EM battery packs
• Four AAA batteries
• Two 868- or 915-MHz antennas
• Two 32.768-kHz crystals
• 18 PCB 2×4-pin headers
1.14 Hardware Installation, MSP-FET430PIF
Follow these steps to install the hardware for the MSP-FET430PIF tools:
1. Use the 25-conductor cable to connect the FET interface module to the parallel port of the PC. The
necessary driver for accessing the PC parallel port is installed automatically during CCS or IAR
Embedded Workbench installation. Note that a restart is required after the CCS or IAR Embedded
Workbench installation for the driver to become active.
2. Use the 14-conductor cable to connect the parallel-port debug interface module to a target board, such
as an MSP-TS430xxx target socket module. Module schematics and PCBs are shown in Appendix B.
16 Get Started Now! SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com Hardware Installation, MSP-FET430UIF
1.15 Hardware Installation, MSP-FET430UIF
Follow these steps to install the hardware for the MSP-FET430UIF tool:
1. Install the IDE (CCS or IAR) you plan to use before connecting USB-FET interface to PC. The IDE
installation installs drivers automatically.
2. Use the USB cable to connect the USB-FET interface module to a USB port on the PC. The USB FET
should be recognized, as the USB device driver is installed automatically. If the driver has not been
installed yet, the install wizard starts. Follow the prompts and point the wizard to the driver files.
The default location for CCS is c:\ti\ccsv5\ccs_base\emulation\drivers\msp430\USB_CDC or
c:\ti\ccsv5\ccs_base\emulation\drivers\msp430\USB_FET_XP_XX, depending of firmware version of
the tool.
The default location for IAR Embedded Workbench is \Embedded Workbench x.x\
430\drivers\TIUSBFET\eZ430-UART or \Embedded Workbench x.x\
430\drivers\, depending of firmware version of the tool.
The USB driver is installed automatically. Detailed driver installation instructions can be found in
Appendix C.
3. After connecting to a PC, the USB FET performs a self-test during which the red LED may flash for
approximately two seconds. If the self-test passes successfully, the green LED stays on.
4. Use the 14-conductor cable to connect the USB-FET interface module to a target board, such as an
MSP-TS430xxx target socket module.
5. Ensure that the MSP430 device is securely seated in the socket, and that its pin 1 (indicated with a
circular indentation on the top surface) aligns with the "1" mark on the PCB.
6. Compared to the parallel-port debug interface, the USB FET has additional features including JTAG
security fuse blow and adjustable target VCC (1.8 V to 3.6 V). Supply the module with up to 60 mA.
1.16 Hardware Installation, eZ430-XXXX, MSP-EXP430G2, MSP-EXP430FR5739, MSPEXP430F5529
To install eZ430-XXXX, MSP-EXP430G2, MSP-EXP430FR5739, MSP-EXP430F5529 tools follow
instructions 1 and 2 of Section 1.15
1.17 Hardware Installation, MSP-FET430Uxx, MSP-TS430xxx, FET430F6137RF900,
EM430Fx137RF900
Follow these steps to install the hardware for the MSP-FET430Uxx and MSP-TS430xxx tools:
1. Follow instructions 1 and 2 of Section 1.15
2. Connect the MSP-FET430PIF or MSP-FET430UIF debug interface to the appropriate port of the PC.
Use the 14-conductor cable to connect the FET interface module to the supplied target socket module.
3. Ensure that the MSP430 device is securely seated in the socket and that its pin 1 (indicated with a
circular indentation on the top surface) aligns with the "1" mark on the PCB.
4. Ensure that the two jumpers (LED and VCC) near the 2×7-pin male connector are in place. Illustrations
of the target socket modules and their parts are found in Appendix B.
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Get Started Now! 17
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Important MSP430 Documents on the Web www.ti.com
1.18 Important MSP430 Documents on the Web
The primary sources of MSP430 information are the device-specific data sheet and user's guide. The
MSP430 web site (www.ti.com/msp430) contains the most recent version of these documents.
PDF documents describing the CCS tools (CCS IDE, the assembler, the C compiler, the linker, and the
librarian) are in the msp430\documentation folder. A Code Composer Studio specific Wiki page (FAQ) is
available, and the Texas Instruments E2E Community support forums for the MSP430 and Code
Composer Studio v5 provide additional help besides the product help and Welcome page.
PDF documents describing the IAR tools (Workbench C-SPY, the assembler, the C compiler, the linker,
and the librarian) are in the common\doc and 430\doc folders. Supplements to the documents (that is, the
latest information) are available in HTML format in the same directories. A IAR specific Wiki Page is also
available.
18 Get Started Now! SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Chapter 2
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Design Considerations for In-Circuit Programming
This chapter presents signal requirements for in-circuit programming of the MSP430.
Topic ........................................................................................................................... Page
2.1 Signal Connections for In-System Programming and Debugging ............................ 20
2.2 External Power .................................................................................................. 24
2.3 Bootstrap Loader (BSL) ..................................................................................... 24
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Design Considerations for In-Circuit Programming 19
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Signal Connections for In-System Programming and Debugging www.ti.com
2.1 Signal Connections for In-System Programming and Debugging
MSP-FET430PIF, MSP-FET430UIF, MSP-GANG, MSP-GANG430, MSP-PRGS430
With the proper connections, the debugger and an FET hardware JTAG interface (such as the MSPFET430PIF
and MSP-FET430UIF) can be used to program and debug code on the target board. In
addition, the connections also support the MSP-GANG430 or MSP-PRGS430 production programmers,
thus providing an easy way to program prototype boards, if desired.
Figure 2-1 shows the connections between the 14-pin FET interface module connector and the target
device required to support in-system programming and debugging for 4-wire JTAG communication.
Figure 2-2 shows the connections for 2-wire JTAG mode (Spy-Bi-Wire). The 4-wire JTAG mode is
supported on most MSP430 devices, except devices with low pin counts (for example, MSP430G2230).
The 2-wire JTAG mode is available on selected devices only. See the Code Composer Studio for MSP430
User's Guide (SLAU157) or IAR Embedded Workbench Version 3+ for MSP430 User's Guide (SLAU138)
for information on which interface method can be used on which device.
The connections for the FET interface module and the MSP-GANG, MSP-GANG430, or MSP-PRGS430
are identical. Both the FET interface module and MSP-GANG430 can supply VCC to the target board
(through pin 2). In addition, the FET interface module, MSP-GANG, and MSP-GANG430 have a VCCsense
feature that, if used, requires an alternate connection (pin 4 instead of pin 2). The VCC-sense feature
senses the local VCC present on the target board (that is, a battery or other local power supply) and
adjusts the output signals accordingly. If the target board is to be powered by a local VCC, then the
connection to pin 4 on the JTAG should be made, and not the connection to pin 2. This uses the VCCsense
feature and prevents any contention that might occur if the local on-board VCC were connected to
the VCC supplied from the FET interface module, MSP-GANG or the MSP-GANG430. If the VCC-sense
feature is not necessary (that is, if the target board is to be powered from the FET interface module, MSPGANG,
or MSP-GANG430), the VCC connection is made to pin 2 on the JTAG header, and no connection
is made to pin 4. Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2 show a jumper block that supports both scenarios of supplying
VCC to the target board. If this flexibility is not required, the desired VCC connections may be hard-wired to
eliminate the jumper block. Pins 2 and 4 must not be connected at the same time.
Note that in 4-wire JTAG communication mode (see Figure 2-1), the connection of the target RST signal
to the JTAG connector is optional when using devices that support only 4-wire JTAG communication
mode. However, when using devices that support 2-wire JTAG communication mode in 4-wire JTAG
mode, the RST connection must be made. The MSP430 development tools and device programmers
perform a target reset by issuing a JTAG command to gain control over the device. However, if this is
unsuccessful, the RST signal of the JTAG connector may be used by the development tool or device
programmer as an additional way to assert a device reset.
20 Design Considerations for In-Circuit Programming SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
TDO/TDI
TDI/VPP
TMS
TCK
GND
TEST/VPP
JTAG
VCC TOOL
VCC TARGET
J1 (see Note A)
J2 (see Note A)
VCC
R1
47 k
(see Note B)
W
C2
10 μF
C3
0.1 μF
VCC/AVCC/DVCC
RST/NMI
TDO/TDI
TDI/VPP
TMS
TCK
TEST/VPP (see Note C)
V /AV /DV SS SS SS
MSP430Fxxx
C1
10 nF/2.2 nF
(see Notes B and E)
RST (see Note D)
Important to connect
www.ti.com Signal Connections for In-System Programming and Debugging
A If a local target power supply is used, make connection J1. If power from the debug or programming adapter is used,
make connection J2.
B The configuration of R1 and C1 for the RST/NMI pin depends on the device family. See the respective MSP430 family
user's guide for the recommended configuration.
C The TEST pin is available only on MSP430 family members with multiplexed JTAG pins. See the device-specific data
sheet to determine if this pin is available.
D The connection to the JTAG connector RST pin is optional when using a device that supports only 4-wire JTAG
communication mode, and it is not required for device programming or debugging. However, this connection is
required when using a device that supports 2-wire JTAG communication mode in 4-wire JTAG mode.
E When using a device that supports 2-wire JTAG communication in 4-wire JTAG mode, the upper limit for C1 should
not exceed 2.2 nF. This applies to both TI FET interface modules (LPT and USB FET).
Figure 2-1. Signal Connections for 4-Wire JTAG Communication
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Design Considerations for In-Circuit Programming 21
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
TEST/SBWTCK
MSP430Fxxx
RST/NMI/SBWTDIO
TDO/TDI
TCK
GND
TEST/VPP
JTAG
VCC TOOL
VCC TARGET
330!
R2
J1 (see Note A)
J2 (see Note A)
Important to connect
VCC/AVCC/DVCC
V /AV /DV SS SS SS
R1
47 k!
See Note B
C1
2.2 nF
See Note B
VCC
C2
10 μF
C3
0.1 μF
Signal Connections for In-System Programming and Debugging www.ti.com
A If a local target power supply is used, make connection J1. If power from the debug or programming adapter is used,
make connection J2.
B The device RST/NMI/SBWTDIO pin is used in 2-wire mode for bidirectional communication with the device during
JTAG access, and any capacitance that is attached to this signal may affect the ability to establish a connection with
the device. The upper limit for C1 is 2.2 nF when using current TI tools.
C R2 protects the JTAG debug interface TCK signal from the JTAG security fuse blow voltage that is supplied by the
TEST/VPP pin during the fuse blow process. If fuse blow functionality is not needed, R2 is not required (populate 0 Ω)
and do not connect TEST/VPP to TEST/SBWTCK.
Figure 2-2. Signal Connections for 2-Wire JTAG Communication (Spy-Bi-Wire) Used by MSP430F2xx,
MSP430G2xx, and MSP430F4xx Devices
22 Design Considerations for In-Circuit Programming SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
TEST/SBWTCK
MSP430Fxxx
RST/NMI/SBWTDIO
TDO/TDI
TCK
GND
JTAG
R1
47 k!
See Note B
VCC TOOL
VCC TARGET
C1
2.2 nF
See Note B
J1 (see Note A)
J2 (see Note A)
Important to connect
VCC/AVCC/DVCC
V /AV /DV SS SS SS
VCC
C2
10 μF
C3
0.1 μF
www.ti.com Signal Connections for In-System Programming and Debugging
A Make connection J1 if a local target power supply is used, or make connection J2 if the target is powered from the
debug or programming adapter.
B The device RST/NMI/SBWTDIO pin is used in 2-wire mode for bidirectional communication with the device during
JTAG access, and any capacitance that is attached to this signal may affect the ability to establish a connection with
the device. The upper limit for C1 is 2.2 nF when using current TI tools.
Figure 2-3. Signal Connections for 2-Wire JTAG Communication (Spy-Bi-Wire) Used by MSP430F5xx and
MSP430F6xx Devices
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Design Considerations for In-Circuit Programming 23
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
External Power www.ti.com
2.2 External Power
The MSP-FET430UIF can supply targets with up to 60 mA through pin 2 of the 14-pin connector. Note
that the target should not consume more than 60 mA, even as a peak current, as it may violate the USB
specification. For example, if the target board has a capacitor on VCC more than 10 μF, it may cause
inrush current during capacitor charging that may exceed 60 mA. In this case, the current should be
limited by the design of the target board, or an external power supply should be used.
The VCC for the target can be selected between 1.8 V and 3.6 V in steps of 0.1 V. Alternatively, the target
can be supplied externally. In this case, the external voltage should be connected to pin 4 of the 14-pin
connector. The MSP-FET430UIF then adjusts the level of the JTAG signals to external VCC automatically.
Only pin 2 (MSP-FET430UIF supplies target) or pin 4 (target is externally supplied) must be connected;
not both at the same time.
When a target socket module is powered from an external supply, the external supply powers the device
on the target socket module and any user circuitry connected to the target socket module, and the FET
interface module continues to be powered from the PC through the parallel port. If the externally supplied
voltage differs from that of the FET interface module, the target socket module must be modified so that
the externally supplied voltage is routed to the FET interface module (so that it may adjust its output
voltage levels accordingly). See the target socket module schematics in Appendix B.
The PC parallel port can source a limited amount of current. Because of the ultra-low-power requirement
of the MSP430, a standalone FET does not exceed the available current. However, if additional circuitry is
added to the tool, this current limit could be exceeded. In this case, external power can be supplied to the
tool through connections provided on the target socket modules. See the schematics and pictorials of the
target socket modules in Appendix B to locate the external power connectors. Note that the MSPFET430PIF
is not recommended for new design.
2.3 Bootstrap Loader (BSL)
The JTAG pins provide access to the memory of the MSP430 and CC430 devices. On some devices,
these pins are shared with the device port pins, and this sharing of pins can complicate a design (or
sharing may not be possible). As an alternative to using the JTAG pins, most MSP430Fxxx devices
contain a program (a "bootstrap loader") that permits the flash memory to be erased and programmed
using a reduced set of signals. The MSP430 Programming Via the Bootstrap Loader User's Guide
(SLAU319) describes this interface. See the MSP430 web site for the application reports and a list of
MSP430 BSL tool developers.
TI suggests that MSP430Fxxx customers design their circuits with the BSL in mind (that is, TI suggests
providing access to these signals by, for example, a header).
See FAQ Hardware #10 for a second alternative to sharing the JTAG and port pins.
24 Design Considerations for In-Circuit Programming SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Appendix A
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Frequently Asked Questions and Known Issues
This appendix presents solutions to frequently asked questions regarding the MSP-FET430 hardware.
Topic ........................................................................................................................... Page
A.1 Hardware FAQs ................................................................................................. 26
A.2 Known Issues ................................................................................................... 28
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Frequently Asked Questions and Known Issues 25
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Hardware FAQs www.ti.com
A.1 Hardware FAQs
1. MSP430F22xx Target Socket Module (MSP-TS430DA38) – Important Information
Due to the large capacitive coupling introduced by the device socket between the adjacent signals
XIN/P2.6 (socket pin 6) and RST/SBWTDIO (socket pin 7), in-system debugging can disturb the
LFXT1 low-frequency crystal oscillator operation (ACLK). This behavior applies only to the Spy-Bi-Wire
(2-wire) JTAG configuration and only to the period while a debug session is active.
Workarounds:
• Use the 4-wire JTAG mode debug configuration instead of the Spy-Bi-Wire (2-wire) JTAG
configuration. This can be achieved by placing jumpers JP4 through JP9 accordingly.
• Use the debugger option "Run Free" that can be selected from the Advanced Run drop-down
menu (at top of Debug View). This prevents the debugger from accessing the MSP430 device
while the application is running. Note that, in this mode, a manual halt is required to see if a
breakpoint was hit. See the IDE documentation for more information on this feature.
• Use an external clock source to drive XIN directly.
2. With current interface hardware and software, there is a weakness when adapting target boards
that are powered externally. This leads to an accidental fuse check in the MSP430 device. This is
valid for PIF and UIF but is seen most often on the UIF. A solution is being developed.
Workarounds:
• Connect the RST/NMI pin to the JTAG header (pin 11). LPT and USB tools are able to pull the
RST line, which also resets the device internal fuse logic.
• Use the debugger option "Release JTAG On Go" that can be selected from the IDE drop-down
menu. This prevents the debugger from accessing the MCU while the application is running. Note
that in this mode, a manual halt is required to see if a breakpoint was hit. See the IDE
documentation for more information on this feature.
• Use an external clock source to drive XIN directly.
3. The 14-conductor cable that connects the FET interface module and the target socket module must
not exceed 8 inches (20 centimeters) in length.
4. The signal assignment on the 14-conductor cable is identical for the parallel port interface and the
USB FET.
5. To use the on-chip ADC voltage references, the capacitor must be installed on the target socket
module. See the schematic of the target socket module to populate the capacitor according to the data
sheet of the device.
6. To use the charge pump on the devices with LCD+ Module, the capacitor must be installed on
the target socket module. See the schematic of the target socket module to populate the capacitor
according to the data sheet of the device.
7. Crystals or resonators Q1 and Q2 (if applicable) are not provided on the target socket module.
For MSP430 devices that contain user-selectable loading capacitors, see the device and crystal data
sheets for the value of capacitance.
8. Crystals or resonators have no effect upon the operation of the tool and the CCS debugger or
C-SPY (as any required clocking and timing is derived from the internal DCO and FLL).
9. On devices with multiplexed port or JTAG pins, to use these pin in their port capability:
For CCS: "Run Free" (in Run pulldown menu at top of Debug View) must be selected.
For C-SPY: "Release JTAG On Go" must be selected.
10. As an alternative to sharing the JTAG and port pins (on low pin count devices), consider using
an MSP430 device that is a "superset" of the smaller device. A very powerful feature of the
MSP430 is that the family members are code and architecturally compatible, so code developed on
one device (for example, one without shared JTAG and port pins) ports effortlessly to another
(assuming an equivalent set of peripherals).
26 Frequently Asked Questions and Known Issues SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com Hardware FAQs
11. Information memory may not be blank (erased to 0xFF) when the device is delivered from TI.
Customers should erase the information memory before its first use. Main memory of packaged
devices is blank when the device is delivered from TI.
12. The device current is higher then expected. The device current measurement may not be accurate
with the debugger connected to the device. For accurate measurement, disconnect the debugger.
Additionally some unused pins of the device should be terminated. See the Connection of Unused Pins
table in the device's family user's guide.
13. The following ZIF sockets are used in the FET tools and target socket modules:
• 8-pin device (D package): Yamaichi IC369-0082
• 14-pin device (PW package): Enplas OTS-14-065-01
• 14-pin package for 'L092 (PW package): Yamaichi IC189-0142-146
• 24-pin package (PW package): Enplas OTS-24(28)-0.65-02
• 28-pin device (DW package): Wells-CTI 652 D028
• 28-pin device (PW package): Enplas OTS-28-0.65-01
• 38-pin device (DA package): Yamaichi IC189-0382-037
• 40-pin device (RHA package): Enplas QFN-40B-0.5-01
• 40-pin device (RSB package): Enplas QFN-40B-0.4
• 48-pin device (RGZ package): Yamaichi QFN11T048-008 A101121-001
• 48-pin device (DL package): Yamaichi IC51-0482-1163
• 64-pin device (PM package): Yamaichi IC51-0644-807
• 64-pin device (RGC package): Yamaichi QFN11T064-006
• 80-pin device (PN package): Yamaichi IC201-0804-014
• 100-pin device (PZ package): Yamaichi IC201-1004-008
• 128-pin device (PEU package): Yamaichi IC500-1284-009P
Enplas: www.enplas.com
Wells-CTI: www.wellscti.com
Yamaichi: www.yamaichi.us
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Frequently Asked Questions and Known Issues 27
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Known Issues www.ti.com
A.2 Known Issues
MSP-FET430UIF Current detection algorithm of the UIF firmware
Problem Description If high current is detected, the ICC monitor algorithm stays in a loop of frequently
switching on and off the target power supply. This power switching puts some MSP430
devices such as the MSP430F5438 in a state that requires a power cycle to return the
device to JTAG control.
A side issue is that if the UIF firmware has entered this switch on and switch off loop, it
is not possible to turn off the power supply to the target by calling MSP430_VCC(0). A
power cycle is required to remove the device from this state.
Solution IAR KickStart and Code Composer Essentials that have the MSP430.dll version
2.04.00.003 and higher do not show this problem. Update the software development tool
to this version or higher to update the MSP-FET430UIF firmware.
MSP-FET430PIF Some PCs do not supply 5 V through the parallel port
Problem Description Device identification problems with modern PCs, because the parallel port often does not
deliver 5 V as was common with earlier hardware.
1. When connected to a laptop, the test signal is clamped to 2.5 V.
2. When the external VCC becomes less than 3 V, up to 10 mA is flowing in the adapter
through pin 4 (sense).
Solution Measure the voltage level of the parallel port. If it is too low, provide external 5 V to the
VCC pads of the interface. The jumper on a the target socket must be switched to
external power.
28 Frequently Asked Questions and Known Issues SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Appendix B
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Hardware
This appendix contains information relating to the FET hardware, including schematics, PCB pictorials,
and bills of materials (BOMs). All other tools, such as the eZ430 series, are described in separate productspecific
user's guides.
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 29
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Appendix B www.ti.com
Topic ........................................................................................................................... Page
B.1 MSP-TS430D8 ................................................................................................... 31
B.2 MSP-TS430PW14 ............................................................................................... 34
B.3 MSP-TS430L092 ................................................................................................ 37
B.4 MSP-TS430L092 Active Cable ............................................................................. 40
B.5 MSP-TS430PW24 ............................................................................................... 43
B.6 MSP-TS430DW28 ............................................................................................... 46
B.7 MSP-TS430PW28 ............................................................................................... 49
B.8 MSP-TS430PW28A ............................................................................................. 52
B.9 MSP-TS430DA38 ............................................................................................... 55
B.10 MSP-TS430QFN23x0 .......................................................................................... 58
B.11 MSP-TS430RSB40 ............................................................................................. 61
B.12 MSP-TS430RHA40A ........................................................................................... 64
B.13 MSP-TS430DL48 ................................................................................................ 67
B.14 MSP-TS430RGZ48B ........................................................................................... 70
B.15 MSP-TS430RGZ48C ........................................................................................... 73
B.16 MSP-TS430PM64 ............................................................................................... 76
B.17 MSP-TS430PM64A ............................................................................................. 79
B.18 MSP-TS430RGC64B ........................................................................................... 82
B.19 MSP-TS430RGC64C ........................................................................................... 85
B.20 MSP-TS430RGC64USB ....................................................................................... 89
B.21 MSP-TS430PN80 ............................................................................................... 93
B.22 MSP-TS430PN80A ............................................................................................. 96
B.23 MSP-TS430PN80USB ......................................................................................... 99
B.24 MSP-TS430PZ100 ............................................................................................ 103
B.25 MSP-TS430PZ100A .......................................................................................... 106
B.26 MSP-TS430PZ100B .......................................................................................... 109
B.27 MSP-TS430PZ100C .......................................................................................... 112
B.28 MSP-TS430PZ5x100 ......................................................................................... 115
B.29 MSP-TS430PZ100USB ...................................................................................... 118
B.30 MSP-TS430PEU128 .......................................................................................... 122
B.31 EM430F5137RF900 ........................................................................................... 125
B.32 EM430F6137RF900 ........................................................................................... 129
B.33 EM430F6147RF900 ........................................................................................... 133
B.34 MSP-FET430PIF ............................................................................................... 137
B.35 MSP-FET430UIF ............................................................................................... 139
30 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
GND
100nF
330R
10uF/10V
47K
2.2nF
GND
330R
GND
GND
green
FE4L FE4H
GND
Ext_PWR
Socket: YAMAICHI
Type: IC369-0082
Vcc
ext
int
to measure supply current DNP
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
2
4
6
12
14
8
10
SBW
C5
R3
C7
R5
C8
1
2
3
J3
1
2
J4
1
2
J6
1
2
3
J5 R2
D1
1
2
3
4
J1
5
6
7
8
J2
DVCC
1
DVSS
8
P1.2/TA1/A2
2
P1.5/TA0/A5/SCLK
3
P1.6/TA1/A6/SDO/SCL
4
TST/SBWTCK
7
RST/SBWTDIO
6
P1.7/A7/SDI/SDA
5
U1
MSP-TS430D8
GND
VCC
RST/SBWTDIO
RST/SBWTDIO
RST/SBWTDIO
SBWTCK
VCC430
TST/SBWTCK
TST/SBWTCK
TST/SBWTCK
P1.5
P1.6 P1.7
P1.2
Date: 28.07.201111:03:35 Sheet: /11
REV:
TITLE:
Document Number:
MSP-TS430D8
+
1.0
MSP-TS430D8 Target Socket Board
www.ti.com MSP-TS430D8
B.1 MSP-TS430D8
Figure B-1. MSP-TS430D8 Target Socket Module, Schematic
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 31
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Connector J5
External power connector
Jumper JP3 to "ext"
Jumper JP2
Open to disconnect LED
D1 LED connected to P1.2
Orient Pin 1 of MSP430 device
14 pin connector for debugging only
in Spy-Bi-Wire mode (4 Wire JTAG
not available)
MSP-TS430D8 www.ti.com
Figure B-2. MSP-TS430D8 Target Socket Module, PCB
32 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com MSP-TS430D8
Table B-1. MSP-TS430D8 Bill of Materials
Position Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board
1 J4, J6 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND place jumper on header
2 J5 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND place jumper on pins 1-2
3 SBW 1 10-pin connector, male, TH HRP10H-ND
4 J3 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND
5 C8 1 2.2nF, CSMD0805 Buerklin 53 D 292
6 C7 1 10uF, 10V, 1210ELKO 478-3875-1-ND
7 R5 1 47K, 0805 541-47000ATR-ND
8 C5 1 100nF, CSMD0805 311-1245-2-ND
9 R2, R3 2 330R, 0805 541-330ATR-ND
10 J1, J2 2 4-pin header, TH SAM1029-04-ND DNP: headers enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of solder.
10,1 J1, J2 1 4-pin socket, TH SAM1029-04-ND DNP: receptacles enclosed with kit.
11 U1 1 SO8 Socket: Type IC369-0082 Manuf.: Yamaichi
12 D1 1 red, LED 0603
13 MSP430 2 MSP430x "DNP: enclosed with kit. Is supplied by TI"
14 PCB 1 50,0mmx44,5mm MSP-TS430D8 Rev. 1.0
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 33
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
12pF
12pF
GND
100nF
330R
10uF/10V
47K
2.2nF
GND
330R
100nF
GND
GND
GND
green
Ext_PWR
Socket: ENPLAS
Type: OTS-14-065
Vcc
ext
int
to measure supply current
DNP
DNP
DNP
DNP
DNP
JTAG ->
SBW ->
JTAG-Mode selection:
4-wire JTAG: Set jumpers J7 to J12 to position 2-3
2-wire "SpyBiWire": Set jumpers J7 to J12 to position 2-1
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
2
4
6
12
14
8
10
JTAG
C2
C1
C5
R3
C7
R5
C8
1
2
3
J3
Q1
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
J2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
J1
1
2
J4
1
2
J6
J5
1
2
3
R2
C3
J7
1
2
3
J8
1
2
3
J9
1
2
3
J10
1
2
3
J11
1
2
3
J12
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 8
9
10
14
13
12
11
D1
P1.0
P1.3
P1.2
P1.1 XOUT XOUT
GND
XIN
XIN
VCC
RST/SBWTDIO
RST/SBWTDIO
SBWTCK
TEST/SBWTCK
TEST/SBWTCK
TEST/SBWTCK
VCC430
P1.4/TCK
P1.4/TCK
P1.5/TMS
P1.5/TMS
P1.6/TDI
P1.6/TDI
P1.7/TDO
P1.7/TDO
TDO/SBWTDIO
RST/NMI
TMS
TDI
Date: 7/16/2007 8:22:36 AM Sheet: 1/1
REV:
TITLE:
Document Number:
MSP-TS430PW14
+
2.0
MSP-TS430PW14 Target Socket Board
MSP-TS430PW14 www.ti.com
B.2 MSP-TS430PW14
Figure B-3. MSP-TS430PW14 Target Socket Module, Schematic
34 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Jumper J4
Open to disconnect LED
Orient Pin 1 of
MSP430 device
Jumper J6
Open to measure current
Connector J3
External power connector
Jumper J5 to 'ext'
LED connected to P1.0
Jumpers J7 to J12
Close 1-2 to debug in
Spy-Bi-Wire Mode.
Close 2-3 to debug in
4-wire JTAG mode.
www.ti.com MSP-TS430PW14
Figure B-4. MSP-TS430PW14 Target Socket Module, PCB
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 35
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
MSP-TS430PW14 www.ti.com
Table B-2. MSP-TS430PW14 Bill of Materials
Position Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board
1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP
2 C7 1 10uF, 10V, Tantal Size 511-1463-2-ND B
3 C3, C5 1 100nF, SMD0805 478-3351-2-ND DNP: C3
4 C8 0 2.2nF, SMD0805 DNP
5 D1 1 green LED, SMD0603 475-1056-2-ND
DNP: Headers and receptacles
enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of
6 J1, J2 0 7-pin header, TH solder
SAM1029-07-ND : Header
SAM1213-07-ND : Receptacle
J3, J5, J7, Place jumpers on headers J5, J7, J8, 7 J8, J9, J10, 8 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND J9, J10, J11, J12; Pos 1-2 J11, J12
8 J4, J6 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header
9 9 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND Place on: J5, J7-J12; Pos 1-2
10 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, HRP14H-ND TH
Micro Crystal MS1V-T1K
12 Q1 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = DNP: keep vias free of solder
12.5pF
13 R2, R3 2 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND
15 R5 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND
16 U1 1 Socket: OTS-14-0.65-01 Manuf.: Enplas
17 PCB 1 56 x 53 mm 2 layers
Adhesive Approximately 6mm For example, 3M 18 plastic feet 4 width, 2mm height Bumpons Part No. SJ- Apply to corners at bottom side 5302
19 MSP430 2 MSP430F2013IPW DNP: enclosed with kit, supplied by TI
36 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com MSP-TS430L092
B.3 MSP-TS430L092
Figure B-5. MSP-TS430L092 Target Socket Module, Schematic
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 37
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
MSP-TS430L092 www.ti.com
Settings of the MSP-TS430L092 Target Socket
Figure B-6 shows the PCB layout of the MSP-TS430L092 target socket. The following pinning is
recommended:
• JP1 is write enable for the EPROM. If this is not set, the EPROM can only be read.
• JP2 and JP3 connect device supply with boost converter. They can be opened to measure device
current consumption. For default operation, they should be closed.
Figure B-6. MSP-TS430L092 Target Socket Module, PCB
38 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com MSP-TS430L092
Table B-3. MSP-TS430L092 Bill of Materials
Pos. Ref Des No. No. Per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board
1 C1, C2 2 330nF, SMD0603
2 C5 1 100n, SMD0603
3 C6 1 10u, SMD0805
4 C10 1 100n, SMD0603
5 EEPROM1 1 M95512 SO08 (SO8) ST Micro M95160R Digikey: 497-8688-1-ND
DNP: headers and
receptacles enclosed with kit.
7 J1, J2 2 7-pin header, TH Keep vias free of solder.
SAM1213-07-ND : Header
SAM1035-07-ND : Receptacle
8 J3 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND
9 J4, J5 2 FE4L, FE4H 4 pol. Stiftreihe DNP; Keep vias free of solder.
11 J13 1 MICRO_STECKV_10 Reichelt: MicroMaTch- Connector: MM FL 10G
12 JP1, JP2,JP3 3 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND place jumper on header
15 L1 1 33uH, SMD0806 LQH2MCN330K02L Farnell: 151-5557
16 LED1, LED4 2 LEDCHIPLED_0603 Farnell: 1686065
17 Q2 1 BC817-16LT1SMD BC817-16LT1SMD SOT23-BEC
18 R0, R6, R7 3 2K7, SMD0603
19 R1 1 1k, SMD0603
20 R2 1 47k, SMD0603
21 R4,R5, R8, 6 10k, SMD0603 R10, RC, RD
22 RA 1 3.9k, SMD0603
23 RB 1 6.8k, SMD0603
24 U1 1 14 Pin Socket - IC189-0142- Manuf. Yamaichi 146
22 MSP430 2 MSP430L092PWR DNP: Enclosed with kit. Is supplied by TI.
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 39
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
MSP-TS430L092 Active Cable www.ti.com
B.4 MSP-TS430L092 Active Cable
Figure B-7. MSP-TS430L092 Active Cable Target Socket Module, Schematic
40 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com MSP-TS430L092 Active Cable
Figure B-8 shows the PCB layout for the Active Cable. The following pinning is possible:
• JP1 has two jumpers (Jumper 1 and Jumper 2) that can be set as shown in Table B-4.
Table B-4. MSP-TS430L092 JP1 Settings
Jumper 1 Jumper 2 Description
Off Off The active cable has no power and does not function.
Off On The active cable receives power from target socket. For this option, the target socket must have its own power supply.
On Off The active cable receives power from the JTAG connector.
The JTAG connector powers the active cable and the target socket. For
On On this option, the target socket must not have its own power source, as this
would cause a not defined state.
• JP2 is for reset. For the standard MSP-TS430L092, this jumper must be set. It sets the reset pin to
high and can also control it. Without this jumper on the MSP-TS430L092, reset is set to zero.
Figure B-8. MSP-TS430L092 Active Cable Target Socket Module, PCB
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 41
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
MSP-TS430L092 Active Cable www.ti.com
Table B-5. MSP-TS430L092 Active Cable Bill of Materials
Pos. Ref Des No. Per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board
1 C1, C3, C5, 4 100nF, SMD0603 C6
2 C2, C4 2 1uF, SMD0805
3 R1, R10 2 10K, SMD0603
4 R2 1 4K7, SMD0603
5 R5, R6, R7, 4 100, SMD0603 R9
6 R8 1 680k, SMD0603
7 R11, R15 2 1K, SMD0603
8 R12 0 SMD0603 DNP
9 R13 0 SMD0603 DNP
10 R14 1 0, SMD0603
11 IC1 1 SN74AUC1G04DBVR Manu: TI
12 IC2, IC3, IC4 3 SN74AUC2G125DCTR Manu: TI
13 J2 1 MICRO_STECKV_10 Reichelt: MicroMaTch- Connector: MM FL 10G
14 JP1 1 2x2 Header JP2Q Put jumper on Position 1 and 2. Do not mix direction.
15 JP2 1 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND place jumper on header
16 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND
17 Q1 1 BC817-25LT1SMD, SOT23- Digi-Key: BC817- BEC 25LT1GOSCT-ND
18 U1, U2 2 TLVH431IDBVR SOT23-5 Manu: TI
42 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com MSP-TS430PW24
B.5 MSP-TS430PW24
Figure B-9. MSP-TS430PW24 Target Socket Module, Schematic
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 43
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Jumper JP2
Open to measure current
Orient Pin 1 of MSP430 device
D1 LED connected to P1.0
Jumper JP3
Open to disconnect LED
Connector J5
External power connector
Jumper JP1 to "ext"
Jumpers JP4 to JP9
Close 1-2 to debug in Spy-Bi-Wire mode
Close 2-3 to debug in 4-wire JTAG mode
MSP-TS430PW24 www.ti.com
Figure B-10. MSP-TS430PW24 Target Socket Module, PCB
44 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com MSP-TS430PW24
Table B-6. MSP-TS430PW24 Bill of Materials
Position Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board
1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP
2 C5 1 2.2nF, SMD0805
3 C3, C7 2 10uF, 10V, SMD0805
4 C4, C6, C8 3 100nF, SMD0805 478-3351-2-ND
5 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 P516TR-ND
"SAM1029-07- DNP: Headers and receptacles 6 J1, J2 0 12-pin header, TH NDSAM1213-07-ND" enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of solder. (Header & Receptacle)
J5, JP1,
7 JP4, JP5, 8 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND Place jumper on 1-2 of JP4-JP9 JP6, JP7, Place on 1-2 on JP1
JP8, JP9
8 JP2, JP3 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header
9 9 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND see Pos 7 an 8
10 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, HRP14H-ND TH
11 Q1 0 Crystal DNP: keep vias free of solder
12 R1, R7 2 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND
13 R5, R6, 2 0 Ohm, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP R5, R6 R8, R9,
14 R4 1 47k Ohm, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND
15 U1 1 Socket: OTS 24(28)- Manuf.: Enplas 065-02-00
16 PCB 1 68.5 x 61 mm 2 layers
Adhesive Approximately 6mm for example, 3M 17 plastic feet 4 width, 2mm height Bumpons Part No. SJ- Apply to corners at bottom side 5302
18 MSP430 2 MSP430AFE2xx DNP: enclosed with kit, supplied by TI
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 45
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
ML14
LED3
12pF
12pF
GND
GND
100nF
560R
ML10
JP1Q
JP1Q
10uF/10V
50K
10nF
0R
0R
0R -
-
0R
-
U1
SOCK28DW
F123
FE14H FE14L
0R
GND
remove R8 and add R9 (0 Ohm)
If external supply voltage:
remove R11 and add R10 (0 Ohm) SMD-Footprint
Socket: Yamaichi
2.0
MSP-TS430DW28 Target Socket DW28
Type: IC189-0282-042
If external supply voltage:
R1, C1, C2
not assembled
not assembled
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
2
4
6
12
14
8
10
JTAG
D1
C2
C1
C5
R3
BOOTST
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
1 2
J5
J4
1 2
C7
R5
C8
R6
R7
R8 R9
R10
R11
R1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14 15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
TST 1
VCC 2
P2.5 3
VSS 4
XOUT 5
XIN 6
RST 7
P2.0 8
P2.1 9
P2.2 10 P2.3 19
P2.4 20
P1.0 21
P1.1 22
P1.2 23
P1.3 24
P1.4 25
P1.5 26
P1.6 27
P1.7 28
P3.0 11
P3.1 12
P3.2 13
P3.3 14 P3.4 15
P3.5 16
P3.6 17
P3.7 18
U2
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
J2 J1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
R2
1
2
3
J3
Q1
QUARZ3
P1.0
P1.0
P1.3
P1.3
P1.2
P1.2
P1.1
P1.1 RST/NMI
RST/NMI
RST/NMI
RST/NMI RST/NMI
TCK
TCK
TCK
TMS
TMS
TMS
TDI
TDI
TDI
TDO
TDO
TDO
XOUT
XOUT
VCC
GND
GND
GND
P2.3
P2.3
P2.4
P2.4
XIN
XIN
P2.5
P2.5
P2.2
P2.2
P2.1
P2.1
P2.0
P2.0
TST/VPP
TST/VPP
TST/VPP
P3.0
P3.0
P3.1
P3.1
P3.2
P3.2
P3.3
P3.3
P3.7
P3.7
P3.6
P3.6
P3.5
P3.5
P3.4
P3.4
VCC430
Ext_PWR
Date: 11/14/2006 1:26:04 PM Sheet: 1/1
REV:
TITLE:
Document Number:
MSP-TS430DW28
+
VCC430
MSP-TS430DW28 www.ti.com
B.6 MSP-TS430DW28
Figure B-11. MSP-TS430DW28 Target Socket Module, Schematic
46 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Jumper J4
Open to disconnect LED
Orient Pin 1 of
MSP430 device
Jumper J5
Open to measure current
Connector J3
External power connector
Remove R8 and jumper R9
LED connected to P1.0
www.ti.com MSP-TS430DW28
Figure B-12. MSP-TS430DW28 Target Socket Module, PCB
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 47
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
MSP-TS430DW28 www.ti.com
Table B-7. MSP-TS430DW28 Bill of Materials
Position Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board
1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP: C1, C2, Cover holes while soldering
2 C5 1 100nF, SMD0805
3 C7 1 10uF, 10V Tantal Elko B
4 C8 1 10nF SMD0805
5 D1 1 LED3 T1 3mm yellow RS: 228-4991
Micro Crystal MS1V-T1K
6 Q1 0 QUARZ, Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = DNP: Cover holes while soldering
12.5pF
DNP: Headers and receptacles
enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of
7 J1, J2 2 14-pin header, TH male solder.
: Header
: Receptacle
DNP: Headers and receptacles
enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of
7.1 2 14-pin header, TH solder. female : Header
: Receptacle
8 J3 1 3-Pin Connector, male
9 J4, J5 2 2-Pin Connector, male With jumper
10 BOOTST 0 ML10, 10-Pin Conn., m RS: 482-115 DNP, Cover holes while soldering
11 JTAG 1 ML14, 14-Pin Conn., m RS: 482-121
R1, R2,
12 R6, R7, 4 0R, SMD0805 DNP: R1, R2, R9, R10 R8,R9,
R10, R11
13 R3 1 560R, SMD0805
14 R5 1 47K, SMD0805
15 U1 1 SOP28DW socket Yamaichi: IC189-0282- 042
16 U2 0 TSSOP DNP
48 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
12pF
12pF
GND
GND
100nF
330R
10uF/10V
-
0R
GND
GND
green
2.2nF
47k
GND
0R 0R
330R
MSP430F12xx
If external supply voltage:
remove R11 and add R10 (0 Ohm)
3.1
MSP-TS430PW28:
OTS-28-0.65-01
Socket: Enplas
Vcc
int
ext
Target Socket Board for MSP430's in PW28 package
DNP
DNP
DNP
DNP
DNP
DNP
DNP
JTAG ->
SBW ->
JTAG-Mode selection:
4-wire JTAG: Set jumpers JP4 to JP9 to position 2-3
2-wire "SpyBiWire": Set jumpers JP4 to JP9 to position 1-2
DNP
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
2
4
6
12
14
8
10
JTAG
C2
C1
C4
R1
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
BOOTST
C3
R2
R3
1
2
3
J5
JP1
1
2
3
JP2
1
2
1
2
JP3
D1
C5 R4
JP4
1
2
3
JP5
1
2
3
JP6
1
2
3
JP7
1
2
3
JP8
1
2
3
JP9
1
2
3
R5 R6
1 2
Q1
R7
J1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
J2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
U1
TST 1
VCC 2
P2.5 3
VSS 4
XOUT 5
XIN 6
RST 7
P2.0 8
P2.1 9
P2.2 10 P2.3 19
P2.4 20
P1.0 21
P1.1 22
P1.2 23
P1.3 24
P1.4 25
P1.5 26
P1.6 27
P1.7 28
P3.0 11
P3.1 12
P3.2 13
P3.3 14 P3.4 15
P3.5 16
P3.6 17
P3.7 18
P1.0
P1.0
RST/NMI
TMS
TDI
VCC
GND
GND
VCC430 VCC430
P2.0
P1.1
P1.1
P3.3
P3.2
P3.1
P3.0
P2.2
P2.2
XIN/P2.6
XIN/P2.6
XOUT/P2.7
XOUT/P2.7
P2.1
RST/SBWTDIO
RST/SBWTDIO
RST/SBWTDIO
P3.4
P3.5
P3.6
P3.7
P2.3
P2.4
P1.2
P1.3
P1.4/TCK
P1.4/TCK
P1.5/TMS
P1.5/TMS
P1.6/TDI
P1.6/TDI
P1.7/TDO
P1.7/TDO
TEST/SBWTCK
TEST/SBWTCK
TEST/SBWTCK
TEST/SBWTCK
P2.5
TCK/SBWTCK
TDO/SBWTDIO
XTLGND
Ext_PWR
+
www.ti.com MSP-TS430PW28
B.7 MSP-TS430PW28
Figure B-13. MSP-TS430PW28 Target Socket Module, Schematic
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 49
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Jumper JP2
Open to measure current
Jumper JP3
Open to disconnect LED
LED D1 connected to P5.1
Jumper JP1
1-2 (int): Power supply via JTAG interface
2-3 (ext): External Power Supply
Jumper JP4 to JP9:
Close 1-2 to debug in Spy-Bi-Wire mode
Close 2-3 to debug in 4-wire JTAG mode
Orient Pin 1 of Device
MSP-TS430PW28 www.ti.com
Figure B-14. MSP-TS430PW28 Target Socket Module, PCB
50 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com MSP-TS430PW28
Table B-8. MSP-TS430PW28 Bill of Materials(1)
Pos. Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board
1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP: C1, C2 , Cover holes while soldering
2 C3 1 10uF, 10V Tantal Elko B
3 C4 1 100nF, SMD0805
4 C5 0 2.2nF, SMD0805 DNP
5 D1 1 LED green SMD0603
Micro Crystal MS1V-T1K DNP: Cover holes and
6 Q1 0 QUARZ, Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = neighboring holes while
12.5pF soldering
DNP: Headers and
receptacles enclosed with
7 J1, J2 2 14-pin header, TH male kit.Keep vias free of solder.
: Header
: Receptacle
DNP: headers and
receptacles enclosed with
7.1 2 14-pin header, TH female kit.Keep vias free of solder.
: Header
: Receptacle
8 J5, IP1 1 3-Pin Connector , male
JP1, JP4,
8a JP5, JP6, 7 3-Pin Connector , male Jumper on Pos 1-2 JP7, JP8,
JP9
9 JP2, JP3 2 2-Pin Connector , male with Jumper
10 BOOTST 0 ML10, 10-Pin Conn. , m RS: 482-115 DNP: Cover holes while soldering
11 JTAG 1 ML14, 14-Pin Conn. , m RS: 482-121
12 R1, R7 2 330R, SMD0805
12 R2, R3, R5, 0 0R, SMD0805 DNP R6
14 R4 1 47K, SMD0805
15 U1 1 SOP28PW socket Enplas: OTS-28-0.65-01
(1) PCB 66 x 79 mm, two layers; Rubber stand off, four pieces
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 51
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
JTAG Mode selection:
4-wire JTAG: Set jumpers J4 to J9 to position 2-3
2-wire "SpyBiWire": Set jumpers J4 to J9 to position 2-1
MSP-TS430PW28A www.ti.com
B.8 MSP-TS430PW28A
Figure B-15. MSP-TS430PW28A Target Socket Module, Schematic
52 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Jumper JP2
Open to measure current
Orient Pin 1 of MSP430 device
Jumper JP3
Open to disconnect LED
D1 LED connected to P1.0
Connector J5
External power connector
Jumper JP1 to "ext"
Jumpers JP4 to JP9
Close 1-2 to debug in Spy-Bi-Wire mode
Close 2-3 to debug in 4-wire JTAG mode
www.ti.com MSP-TS430PW28A
Figure B-16. MSP-TS430PW28A Target Socket Module, PCB (Red)
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 53
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
MSP-TS430PW28A www.ti.com
Table B-9. MSP-TS430PW28A Bill of Materials
Position Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board
1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP
2 C5 1 2.2nF, SMD0805
3 C3 1 10uF, 10V, SMD0805
4 C4, C6, 2 100nF, SMD0805 478-3351-2-ND
5 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 P516TR-ND
DNP: Headers and receptacles
6 J1, J2 0 14-pin header, TH enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of
solder: (Header & Receptacle)
J5, JP1,
7 JP4, JP5, 8 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND Place jumper on 1-2 of JP4-JP9 JP6, JP7, Place on 1-2 on JP1
JP8, JP9
8 JP2, JP3 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header
9 9 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND see Pos 7 an 8
10 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, HRP14H-ND TH
11 BOOTST 0 DNP Keep vias free of solder
Micro Crystal MS3V
12 Q1 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = DNP: keep vias free of solder
12.5pF
13 R1, R7 2 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND
14 R2, R3,R5, 0 0 Ohm, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP R2, R3,R5, R6 R6,
15 R4 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND
16 U1 1 Socket: OTS-28-0.65-01 Manuf.: Enplas
17 PCB 1 63.5 x 64.8 mm 2 layers
Adhesive Approximately 6mm for example, 3M 18 plastic feet 4 width, 2mm height Bumpons Part No. SJ- Apply to corners at bottom side 5302
19 MSP430 2 MSP430G2553IPW28 DNP: enclosed with kit, supplied by TI
54 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
12pF
12pF
GND
GND
100nF
560R
10uF/10V
47k
10nF
-
0R
GND
MSP430F2274IDA
GND
330R
GND
yellow
If external supply voltage:
remove R11 and add R10 (0 Ohm)
IC189-0382-037
Socket:
4-wire JTAG:
2-wire "SpyBiWire":
JTAG-Mode selection:
Set jumpers JP4 to JP9 to position 2-3
Set jumpers JP4 to JP9 to position 2-1
JTAG ->
SBW ->
Yamaichi
DNP
DNP
DNP
DNP
DNP
DNP
DNP
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
2
4
6
12
14
8
10
JTAG
C2
C1
C5
R3
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
BOOTST
C7
R5
C8
R10
R11
1
2
3
J3
Q1
TEST/SBWTCK 1
P3.5 26
P3.6 27
P1.4/TCK 35
RST/SBWDAT 7
DVCC 2
DVSS 4
P4.7 24
P3.7 28
AVSS 15
AVCC 16
P3.0 11
P3.1 12
P3.2 13
P3.3 14
P4.0 17
P4.1 18
P4.2 19
P3.4 25
P2.5 3
P2.4 30
P2.3 29 P2.2 10
P2.1 9
P2.0 8
P1.5/TMS 36
P1.6/TDI 37
P1.7/TDO 38
P2.7 5
P2.6 6
P4.6 23
P4.5 22
P4.4 21
P4.3 20
P1.0 31
P1.1 32
P1.2 33
P1.3 34
U1
JP1
1
2
3
JP2
1
2
1
2
JP3
1
2
3
JP4 JP5
1
2
3
JP6
1
2
3
JP7
1
2
3
JP8
1
2
3
R1
JP9
1
2
3
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1
J1
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
20
J2
D1
P1.0
P1.0
RST/NMI
TMS
TDI
VCC
GND
GND
GND
VCC430
VCC430
VCC430
TCK/SBWTCK
TDO/SBWTDIO
TEST/SBWTCK
TEST/SBWTCK
TEST/SBWTCK
TEST/SBWTCK
P2.5
P2.0
P2.1
P3.0
P3.1
P3.2
P3.3
P4.0
P4.1
P4.2
P1.7/TDO
P1.7/TDO
P1.6/TDI
P1.6/TDI
P1.5/TMS
P1.5/TMS
P1.4/TCK
P1.4/TCK
P1.3
P1.2
P1.1
P1.1
P2.4
P2.3
P3.7
P3.6
P3.5
P3.4
P4.7
P4.6
P4.5
P4.4
P4.3
P2.7/XOUT
P2.7/XOUT
P2.6/XIN
P2.6/XIN
RST/SBWTDIO
RST/SBWTDIO
RST/SBWTDIO
P2.2
P2.2
Ext_PWR
Date: 6/18/2008 11:04:56 AM Sheet: 1/1
REV:
TITLE:
Document Number:
MSP-TS430DA38
+
1.3
MSP-TS430DA38:
Vcc
int
ext
Target Socket Board for MSP430F2247IDA
www.ti.com MSP-TS430DA38
B.9 MSP-TS430DA38
Figure B-17. MSP-TS430DA38 Target Socket Module, Schematic
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 55
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Orient pin 1 of
MSP430 device
LED connected to P1.0
Connector J3
External power connector
Jumper JP1 to 'ext'
Jumper JP3
Open to disconnect LED
Jumper JP2
Open to measure current
Jumpers JP4 to JP9
Close 1-2 to debug in
Spy-Bi-Wire Mode,
Close 2-3 to debug in
4-wire JTAG Mode
MSP-TS430DA38 www.ti.com
Figure B-18. MSP-TS430DA38 Target Socket Module, PCB
56 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com MSP-TS430DA38
Table B-10. MSP-TS430DA38 Bill of Materials
Pos. Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board
1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP
2 C7 1 10uF, 10V, Tantal Size B 511-1463-2-ND
3 C5 1 100nF, SMD0805 478-3351-2-ND
4 C8 0 2.2nF, SMD0805 DNP
5 D1 1 green LED, SMD0603 475-1056-2-ND
DNP: headers and
receptacles enclosed with
6 J1, J2 0 19-pin header, TH kit.Keep vias free of solder.
SAM1029-19-ND : Header
SAM1213-19-ND : Receptacle
"J3, JP1, Place jumpers on headers 7 JP4, JP5, 8 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND JP1, JP4,JP5, JP6, JP7, JP6, JP7, JP8, JP9; Pos 1-2 JP8, JP9"
8 JP2, JP3 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header
9 9 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND Place on: JP1 - JP9; Pos 1- 2
10 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND
11 BOOTST 0 10-pin connector, male, TH DNP: Keep vias free of solder
Micro Crystal MS1V-T1K DNP: Keep vias free of 12 Q1 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = solder 12.5pF
13 R1, R3 2 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND
14 R10, R11 0 0 Ω, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP
15 R5 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND
16 U1 1 Socket: IC189-0382--037 Manuf.: Yamaichi
17 PCB 1 67 x 66 mm 2 layers
18 Adhesive 4 ~6mm width, 2mm height for example, 3M Bumpons Apply to corners at bottom Plastic feet Part No. SJ-5302 side
19 MSP430 2 MSP430F2274IDA DNP: enclosed with kit supplied by TI
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 57
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
MSP-TS430QFN23x0 www.ti.com
B.10 MSP-TS430QFN23x0
Figure B-19. MSP-TS430QFN23x0 Target Socket Module, Schematic
58 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
LED connected
to P1.0
Connector J5
External power connector
Jumper JP1 to 'ext'
Jumper JP3
Open to disconnect LED
Jumper JP2
Open to measure current
www.ti.com MSP-TS430QFN23x0
Figure B-20. MSP-TS430QFN23x0 Target Socket Module, PCB
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 59
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
MSP-TS430QFN23x0 www.ti.com
Table B-11. MSP-TS430QFN23x0 Bill of Materials
Pos. Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board
1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP
2 C3 1 10uF, 10V, Tantal Size B 511-1463-2-ND
3 C4 1 100nF, SMD0805 478-3351-2-ND
4 C5 1 10nF, SMD0805 478-1383-2-ND
5 D1 1 green LED, SMD0603 475-1056-2-ND
DNP: headers and
receptacles enclosed with
6 J1, J2, J3, 0 10-pin header, TH kit.Keep vias free of solder. J4 SAM1034-10-ND : Header
SAM1212-10-ND : Receptacle
7 J5, JP1 2 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND Place jumper on header JP1; Pos 1-2.
8 JP2, JP3 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header
9 3 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND Place on: JP1, JP2, JP3
10 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND
11 BOOTST 0 10-pin connector, male, TH DNP: Keep vias free of solder
Micro Crystal MS1V-T1K DNP: Keep vias free of 12 Q1 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = solder 12.5pF
13 R1 1 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND
14 R2, R3 0 0 Ω, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP
15 R4 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND
16 U1 1 Socket: QFN-40B-0.5-01 Manuf.: Enplas
17 PCB 1 79 x 66 mm 2 layers
18 Adhesive 4 ~6mm width, 2mm height for example, 3M Bumpons Apply to corners at bottom Plastic feet Part No. SJ-5302 side
19 MSP430 2 MSP430F2370IRHA DNP: enclosed with kit supplied by TI
60 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com MSP-TS430RSB40
B.11 MSP-TS430RSB40
Figure B-21. MSP-TS430RSB40 Target Socket Module, Schematic
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 61
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Jumper JP2
Open to measure current
Orient Pin 1 of MSP430 device
Jumper JP3
Open to disconnect LED
D1 LED connected to P1.0
Jumpers JP4 to JP9
Close 1-2 to debug in Spy-Bi-Wire mode
Close 2-3 to debug in 4-wire JTAG mode
Connector J5
External power connector
Jumper JP1 to "ext"
MSP-TS430RSB40 www.ti.com
Figure B-22. MSP-TS430RSB40 Target Socket Module, PCB
62 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com MSP-TS430RSB40
Table B-12. MSP-TS430RSB40 Bill of Materials
Pos. Ref Des No. Per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board
1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP: C1, C2
2 C3, C7, C10, 3 10uF, 10V, SMD 0805 445-1371-1-ND DNP C12 C12
3 C4, C6, C8, 3 100nF, SMD0805 311-1245-2-ND DNP C11 C11
4 C5 1 2.2nF, SMD0805
5 C9 1 470nF, SMD0805
6 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 P516TR-ND
DNP: headers and
receptacles enclosed with kit.
7 J1, J2, J3, J4 4 10-pin header, TH Keep vias free of solder.
: Header
: Receptacle
DNP: headers and
receptacles enclosed with kit.
7.1 4 10-pin header, TH Keep vias free of solder.
: Header
: Receptacle
JP1,
JP4,JP5, Jumper: 1-2 on JP1, JP10; 2- 8 JP6, JP7, 9 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND 3 on JP4-JP9 JP8, JP9, J5,
JP10
9 JP2, JP3 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND place jumper on header
10 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND
11 BOOTST 0 10-pin connector, male, TH DNP. Keep vias free of solder
12 U1 1 QFN-40B-0.4_ Enplas ENPLAS_SOCKET
Micro Crystal MS3V-T1R DNP: Q1. Keep vias free of 13 Q1 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = solder 12.5pF
Place on: JP1, JP2, JP3,
15 10 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND JP4, JP5, JP6, JP7, JP8,
JP9, JP10
16 R1,R7 2 330R SMD0805
R2, R3, R5,
17 R6, R8, R9, 3 0R SMD0805 DNP R2, R3, R5, R6
R10
18 R4 1 47k SMD0805
19 MSP430 2 MSP430F5132 DNP: enclosed with kit. Is supplied by TI
20 Rubber stand 4 select appropriate; for apply to corners at bottom off example, Buerklin: 20H1724 side
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 63
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
MSP-TS430RHA40A www.ti.com
B.12 MSP-TS430RHA40A
Figure B-23. MSP-TS430RHA40A Target Socket Module, Schematic
64 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Jumper JP2
Open to measure current
Connector J5
External power connector
Jumper JP1 to "ext"
Jumpers JP4 to JP9
Close 1-2 to debug in Spy-Bi-Wire mode
Close 2-3 to debug in 4-wire JTAG mode
D1 LED connected to P1.0
Jumper JP3
Open to disconnect LED
Orient Pin 1 of MSP430 device
www.ti.com MSP-TS430RHA40A
Figure B-24. MSP-TS430RHA40A Target Socket Module, PCB
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 65
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
MSP-TS430RHA40A www.ti.com
Table B-13. MSP-TS430RHA40A Bill of Materials
Position Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board
1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP: C1, C2
2 C5 0 2.2nF, SMD0805 DNP C12
3 C3, C7 2 10uF, 10V, SMD0805 5 DNP C11
4 C4, C6 2 100nF, SMD0805 478-3351-2-ND
5 C9 1 470nF, SMD0805
6 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 P516TR-ND
DNP: headers and receptacles
enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of
7 J1, J2, J3, 4 10-pin header, TH solder. J4 : Header
: Receptacle
DNP: headers and receptacles
enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of
7.1 4 10-pin header, TH solder.
: Header
: Receptacle
J5, JP1,
8 JP4, JP5, 8 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND Place jumper on 1-2 of JP4-JP9; JP6, JP7, Place on 1-2 on JP1
JP8, JP9
9 JP2, JP3 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND place jumper on header
10 9 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND see Pos 8 an 9
11 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, HRP14H-ND TH
12 BOOTST 0 10-pin connector, male, DNP. Keep vias free of solder TH
13 U1 1 Socket: QFN-40B-0.5-01 Manuf.: Enplas
Micro Crystal MS3V-T1R
14 Q1 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = DNP: Q1. Keep vias free of solder
12.5pF
15 R1,R7 2 330R SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND
R2, R3,
16 R5, R6, 2 0 Ohm, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP:R2, R3, R5, R6
R8, R9,
17 R4 1 47k SMD0805
18 PCB 1 79 x 66 mm 2 layers
Rubber select appropriate; for 19 stand off 4 example, Buerklin: apply to corners at bottom side 20H1724
20 MSP430 2 MSP430N5736IRHA DNP: enclosed with kit. Is supplied by TI
66 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
ML14
LED3
12pF
12pF
GND
GND
100nF
560R
ML10
JP1Q
JP1Q
10uF/10V
47K
10nF
0R
0R
GND
0R
0R
10uF/10V
GND
IC51-1387.KS-15186
100nF
1.3
MSP-TS430DL48 Target Socket DL48
Q1, C1, C2
not assembled
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
2
4
6
12
14
8
10
JTAG
D1
C2
C1
C5
R3
BOOTST
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
1 2
J5
J4
1 2
C7
R5
C8
R6
R7
1
2
3
J3
Q1
QUARZ3
J2
1
3
5
2
4
6
7
9
8
10
11
13
15
12
14
16
17
19
18
20
21
23
22
24
1
3
5
2
4
6
7
9
8
10
11
13
15
12
14
16
17
19
18
20
21
23
22
24
J1
R12
R4
JP1
1
2
3
1
2
3
JP2
C4
U1
TDO/TDI 1
TDI/TCLK 2
TMS 3
TCK 4
RST/NMI 5
DVCC 6
DVSS 7
XIN 8
XOUT 9
AVSS 10
AVCC 11
VREF+ 12
P6.0 13
P6.1 14
P6.2 15
P6.3 16
P6.4 17
P6.5 18
P6.6 19
P6.7 20
P2.5 39
P2.4 40
P2.3 41
P2.2 42
P2.1 43
P2.0 44
COM0 45
P5.2 46
P5.3 47
P5.4 48
LCDREF 29
LCDCAP 30
P5.1 31
P5.0 32
P5.5 33
P5.6 34
P5.7 35
S5 36
P2.7 37
P2.6 38
P1.7 21
P1.6 22
P1.5 23
P1.4 24
P1.0 28
P1.1 27
P1.2 26
P1.3 25
C3
P1.0
P1.0
RST/NMI
RST/NMI
RST/NMI
TCK
TCK
TCK
TMS
TMS
TDI
TDI
TDO
TDO
XOUT
XOUT
GND
GND GND
XIN
XIN
BSL_TX
VCC
BSL_RX
Ext_PWR
Date: 11/14/2006 1:24:44 PM Sheet: 1/1
REV:
TITLE:
Document Number:
MSP-TS430DL48
+
+
Vcc
ext
int
int ext
Vcc
www.ti.com MSP-TS430DL48
B.13 MSP-TS430DL48
Figure B-25. MSP-TS430DL48 Target Socket Module, Schematic
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 67
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Jumper J4
Open to
disconnect LED
LED connected
to P1.0
Orient pin 1 of
MSP430 device
Jumper J5
Open to measure current
Connector J3
External power connector
Jumper JP1 to ‘ext’
MSP-TS430DL48 www.ti.com
Figure B-26. MSP-TS430DL48 Target Socket Module, PCB
68 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com MSP-TS430DL48
Table B-14. MSP-TS430DL48 Bill of Materials
Pos. Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board
1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP
2 C4, C7 2 10uF, 10V, Tantal Size B 511-1463-2-ND
3 C3, C5 2 100nF, SMD0805 478-3351-2-ND
4 C8 1 10nF, SMD0805 478-1383-2-ND
5 D1 1 yellow LED, TH, 3mm, T1 511-1251-ND
DNP: Headers and
receptacles enclosed with
6 J1, J2 0 24-pin header, TH kit.Keep vias free of solder.
SAM1034-12-ND : Header
SAM1212-12-ND : Receptacle
7 J3, JP1, JP2 2 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND Place jumper on header JP1; Pos 1-2. DNP: JP2
8 J4, J5 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header
9 3 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND Place on: JP1, J4, J5
10 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND
11 BOOTST 0 10-pin connector, male, TH DNP: Keep vias free of solder
Micro Crystal MS1V-T1K DNP: Keep vias free of 12 Q1 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = solder 12.5pF
13 R3 1 560 Ω, SMD0805 541-560ATR-ND
14 R4, R6, R7, 2 0 Ω, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP: R6, R7 R12
15 R5 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND
16 U1 1 Socket: IC51-1387 KS- Manuf.: Yamaichi 15186
17 PCB 1 58 x 66 mm 2 layers
18 Adhesive 4 ~6mm width, 2mm height for example, 3M Bumpons Apply to corners at bottom Plastic feet Part No. SJ-5302 side
19 MSP430 2 MSP430F4270IDL DNP: Enclosed with kit supplied by TI
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 69
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
MSP-TS430RGZ48B www.ti.com
B.14 MSP-TS430RGZ48B
Figure B-27. MSP-TS430RGZ48B Target Socket Module, Schematic
70 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Jumper JP2
Open to disconnect LED
Connector J5
External power connector
Jumper JP1 to "ext"
Jumpers JP5 to JP10
Close 1-2 to debug in Spy-Bi-Wire mode
Close 2-3 to debug in 4-wire JTAG mode
D1 LED connected to P1.0
Jumper JP1
Open to measure current
Orient Pin 1 of MSP430 device
www.ti.com MSP-TS430RGZ48B
Figure B-28. MSP-TS430RGZ48B Target Socket Module, PCB
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 71
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
MSP-TS430RGZ48B www.ti.com
Table B-15. MSP-TS430RGZ48B Bill of Materials
Position Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board
1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP
2 C3, C4 0 47pF, SMD0805 DNP
3 C6, C7, 3 10uF, 6.3V, SMD0805 C12
4 C5, C11, 4 100nF, SMD0805 311-1245-2-ND C13, C14
5 C8 1 2.2nF, SMD0805
6 C9 1 470nF, SMD0805 478-1403-2-ND
7 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 P516TR-ND
J1, J2, J3, SAM1029-12-ND DNP: Headers and receptacles 8 J4 0 12-pin header, TH (Header) SAM1213-12- enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of ND (Receptacle) solder:
9 J5 1 3-pin header, male, TH
JP3, JP5, place jumpers on pins 2-3 on JP5, 10 JP6, JP7, 7 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND JP6, JP7, JP8, JP9, JP10 place JP8, JP9, jumpers on pins 1-2 on JP3, JP10
11 JP1, JP2 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header
12 9 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND See Pos. 10and Pos. 11
13 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, HRP14H-ND TH
14 BOOTST 0 10-pin connector, male, "DNP Keep vias free of solder" TH
Micro Crystal MS3V-T1R
15 Q1 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = DNP: Q1 Keep vias free of solder
12.5pF
16 Q2 0 Crystal Q2: 4MHz Buerklin: DNP: Q2 Keep vias free of solder 78D134
Insulating http://www.ettinger.de/Ar 17 disk to Q2 0 Insulating disk to Q2 t_Detail.cfm?ART_ART NUM=70.08.121
18 R3, R7 2 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND
R1, R2,
R4, R6,
19 R8, 3 0 Ohm, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP: R6, R8, R9, R10, R11,R12
R9,R10,
R11, R12
20 R5 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND
21 U1 1 Socket: QFN11T048- Manuf.: Yamaichi 008_A101121_RGZ48
22 PCB 1 81 x 76 mm 2 layers
Adhesive Approximately 6mm for example, 3M 23 plastic feet 4 width, 2mm height Bumpons Part No. SJ- Apply to corners at bottom side 5302
24 MSP430 2 MSP430F5342IRGZ DNP: enclosed with kit, supplied by TI
72 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DNP
DNP
DNP
GND
GND
100nF
330R
0R -
GND
GND
47k 1.1nF
GND
0R 0R
0R
1uF/10V QUARZ5
1uF/10V 100nF
green
DNP
yellow (DNP)
DNP
red (DNP)
0R
GND
DNP
DNP
0R 0R
QUARZ5
EVQ11
0R
DNP
DNP
If external supply voltage:
remove R3 and add R2 (0 Ohm)
1.3
Ext_PWR
MSP-TS430RGZ48C
Vcc
int
ext
Target Socket Board for MSP430FR58xx, FR59xx IRGZ
DNP
DNP
DNP
DNP
DNP
JTAG ->
SBW ->
JTAG-Mode selection:
4-wire JTAG: Set jumpers JP3 to JP8 to position 2-3
2-wire "SpyBiWire": Set jumpers JP3 to JP8 to position 1-2
connection by via
DNP
DNP
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
2
4
6
12
14
8
10
JTAG
C2
C1
C4
R1
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
BOOTST
R3 R2
1
2
3
J2
J1
1
2
3
JP1
1
2
1
2
JP9
R4 C5
1
2
3
JP3
1
2
3
JP4
1
2
3
JP5
1
2
3
JP6
1
2
3
JP7
1
2
3
JP8
R5 R6
R7
C3 Q1
C7 C6
D1
R10
1
2
JP10
D2
R11
1
2
JP11
D3
R12
JP2
1
2
C8
C9
R9 R8
Q2
SV4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
SV1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
SV2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
SV3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1 1_P1.0
2 2_P1.1
3 3_P1.2
4 4_P3.0
5 5_P3.1
6 6_P3.2
7 7_P3.3
8 8_P4.7
9 9_P1.3
10 10_P1.4
11 11_P1.5
12 12_PJ.0_TDO
13 13_PJ.1_TDI
14 14_PJ.2_TMS
15 15_PJ.3/TCK
16 16_P4.0
17 17_P4.1
18 18_P4.2
19 19_P4.3
20 20_P2.5
21 21_P2.6
22 22_TEST/SBWTCK
23 23_RST/SBWTDIO
24 24_P2.0
25_P2.1 25
26_P2.2 26
27_P3.4 27
28_P3.5 28
29_P3.6 29
30_P3.7 30
31_P1.6 31
32_P1.7 32
33_P4.4 33
34_P4.5 34
35_P4.6 35
36_DVSS 36
37_DVCC 37
38_P2.7 38
39_P2.3 39
40_P2.4 40
41_AVSS 41
42_HFXIN 42
43_HFXOUT 43
44_AVSS 44
45_LFXIN 45
46_LFXOUT 46
47_AVSS 47
48_AVCC 48
U1
SW1
R13
TP1TP2
SW2
R14
P1.0
P1.0
RST/NMI
TMS
TDI
VCC
GND
P1.1
P1.1
RST/SBWTDIO
RST/SBWTDIO
RST/SBWTDIO
TCK/SBWTCK
TDO/SBWTDIO
PJ.0/TDO
PJ.0/TDO
PJ.2/TMS
PJ.2/TMS
PJ.3/TCK
PJ.3/TCK
PJ.1/TDI
PJ.1/TDI
P1.2
P1.2
P2.0
P2.0
P2.1
P2.1
P1.3
P1.3
P1.4
P1.5
AVCC
AVCC
AVSS
AVSS
AVSS
AVSS
LFXOUT
LFXIN
LFGND HFGND
HFXOUT
HFXIN
P2.4
P2.3
P2.7
DVCC DVCC
DVCC
DVCC
DVSS
DVSS
P4.6
P4.5
P4.4
P1.7
P1.6
P3.7
P3.6
P3.5
P3.4
P2.2
P2.6
P2.5
P4.3
P4.2
P4.1
P4.0
P4.7
P3.3
P3.2
P3.1
P3.0
TEST/SBWTCK1
TEST/SBWTCK
TEST/SBWTCK
TEST/SBWTCK
www.ti.com MSP-TS430RGZ48C
B.15 MSP-TS430RGZ48C
Figure B-29. MSP-TS430RGZ48C Target Socket Module, Schematic
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 73
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
MSP-TS430RGZ48C www.ti.com
Figure B-30. MSP-TS430RGZ48C Target Socket Module, PCB
Table B-16. MSP-TS430RGZ48C Revision History
Revision Comments
1.2 Initial release
LFOSC pins swapped at SV1 (9-10).
1.3 HFOSC pins swapped at SV1 (6-7).
BOOTST pin 4 now directly connected to the device RST/SBWTDIO pin.
74 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com MSP-TS430RGZ48C
Table B-17. MSP-TS430RGZ48C Bill of Materials
Number
Pos Ref Des Per Description DigiKey Part Number Comment
Board
1 SV1, SV2, SV3, 4 12-pin header, TH DNP: headers and receptacles enclosed with kit.
SV4 Keep vias free of solder.
SAM1029-12-ND : Header
: Receptacle
1.1 SV1, SV2, SV3, 4 12-pin receptable, TH DNP: headers and receptacles enclosed with kit.
SV4 Keep vias free of solder.
: Header
SAM1213-12-ND : Receptacle
2 JP1, JP2, JP9 3 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header
3 JP10, JP11 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND DNP
4 J1, JP3, JP4, JP5, 7 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND Place jumpers on pins 2-3
JP6, JP7, JP8
5 J2 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND
6 JP1, JP2, JP9, J1, 10 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND Place on: JP1, JP2, JP9, J1, JP3, JP4, JP5, JP6,
JP3, JP4, JP5, JP7, JP8
JP6, JP7, JP8
7 R2, R3, R5, R6, 9 DNP, 0805 DNP
R8, R9, R10, R11,
R14
8 R12, R13, R7 3 0R, 0805 541-000ATR-ND
9 C5 1 1.1nF, CSMD0805 490-1623-2-ND
10 C3, C7 2 1uF, 10V, CSMD0805 490-1702-2-ND
11 R4 1 47k, 0805 541-47000ATR-ND
12 C4, C6 2 100nF, CSMD0805 311-1245-2-ND
13 R1 1 330R, 0805 541-330ATR-ND
14 C1, C2, C8, C9 4 DNP, CSMD0805 DNP
15 SW1, SW2 2 EVQ-11L05R P8079STB-ND DNP, Lacon: 1251459
16 BOOTST 1 10-pin connector, male, TH HRP10H-ND DNP, keep vias free of solder
17 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND
18 Q1 1 DNP: MS3V-TR1 (32768kHz, depends on application Micro Crystal, DNP, enclosed in kit, keep vias
20ppm, 12.5pF) free of solder
19 Q2 1 DNP, Christal depends on application DNP, keep vias free of solder
20 U1 1 Socket: QFN11T048-008 Manuf.: Yamaichi
A101121-001
20.1 U1 1 MSP430 DNP: enclosed with kit. Is supplied by TI.
21 D1 1 green LED, DIODE0805 P516TR-ND
22 D3 1 red (DNP), DIODE0805 DNP
23 D2 1 yellow (DNP), DIODE0805 DNP
24 TP1, TP2 2 Testpoint DNP, keep pads free of solder
25 Rubber stand off 4 Buerklin: 20H1724 apply to corners at bottom side
26 PCB 1 79.6 x 91.0 mm MSP-TS430RGZ48C 2 layers, black solder mask
Rev. 1.2
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 75
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
ML14
LED3
0R
12pF
12pF
12pF
12pF
GND
GND
0R
100nF
560R
ML10
JP1Q
JP1Q
10uF/6,3V
10uF/10V
47K
10nF
0R
0R
0R
-
-
0R
-
0R
0R
FE16-1-1
FE16-1-2
FE16-1-3
FE16-1-4
PWR3
GNDGND
-
MSP64PM
not assembled
not assembled
not assembled
not assembled
enhancement
reserved for
future
JTAG
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
2
4
6
12
14
8
10
D1
R2
C2
C1
C3
C4
R1
C5
R3
BOOTST
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
J7
1 2
J6
1 2
C6
C7
R5
C8
R6
R7
R8
R9
R10
R11
R12
R13
R14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
J1
J2
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
J3
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
J4
J5
1
2
3
R4
Q1
LFXTCLK
XTCLK
U2
DVCC
2
3
4
5
6
7
XIN
XOUT
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
TDO
TDI
TMS
TCK
RST
59
60
61
AVSS
DVSS
AVCC
RST/NMI
TCK
TMS
TDI
TDO
VCC
Date: 3/14/2006 10:46:30 AM Sheet: 1/1
REV:
TITLE:
Document Number:
MSP-TS430PM64
+
+
1
MSP-TS430PM64 Target Socket PM64
Yamaichi
IC51-0644-807
Socket:
1.2
for F14x and F41x
Open J6 if LCD
is connected
If external supply voltage:
remove R8 and add R9 (0 Ohm)
If external supply voltage:
remove R11 and add R10 (0 Ohm)
For BSL usage add:
R6 R7 R13 R14
MSP430F14x : 0 0 open open
MSP430F41x : open open 0 0
MSP-TS430PM64 www.ti.com
B.16 MSP-TS430PM64
NOTE: Connections between the JTAG header and pins XOUT and XIN are no longer required and should not be
made.
Figure B-31. MSP-TS430PM64 Target Socket Module, Schematic
76 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Connector J5
External power connection
Remove R8 and jumper R9
LED connected
to pin 12
Jumper J6
Open to disconnect LED
Jumper J7
Open to measure current
Orient Pin 1 of
MSP430 device
www.ti.com MSP-TS430PM64
Figure B-32. MSP-TS430PM64 Target Socket Module, PCB
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 77
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
MSP-TS430PM64 www.ti.com
Table B-18. MSP-TS430PM64 Bill of Materials
Pos. Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board
1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP
1.1 C3, C4 0 47pF, SMD0805 DNP: Only recommendation. Check your crystal spec.
2 C6, C7 1 10uF, 10V, Tantal Size B 511-1463-2-ND DNP: C6
3 C5 1 100nF, SMD0805 478-3351-2-ND
4 C8 1 10nF, SMD0805 478-1383-2-ND
5 C9 1 470nF, SMD0805 478-1403-2-ND
6 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 P516TR-ND
DNP: Headers and
receptacles enclosed with
7 J1, J2, J3, J4 0 16-pin header, TH kit.Keep vias free of solder.
SAM1029-16-ND : Header
SAM1213-16-ND : Receptacle
8 J5 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND
9 J6, J7 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header
11 2 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND Place on: J6, J7
12 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND
13 BOOTST 0 10-pin connector, male, TH DNP: Keep vias free of solder
Q1: Micro Crystal MS1V-T1K DNP: Keep vias free of 14 Q1, Q2 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = solder 12.5pF
15 R3 1 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND
R1, R2, R4,
R6, R7, R8, DNP: R4, R6, R7, R9, R10, 16 R9, R10, 3 0 Ω, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND R11, R12, R13, R14 R11, R12,
R13, R14
17 R5 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND
18 U1 1 Socket: IC51-0644-807 Manuf.: Yamaichi
19 PCB 1 78 x 75 mm 2 layers
20 Rubber 4 select appropriate Apply to corners at bottom standoff side
21 MSP430 22 MSP430F2619IPM DNP: Enclosed with kit MSP430F417IPM supplied by TI
78 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
0R
12pF
12pF
GND
GND
0R
100nF
330R
10uF/6.3V
0R 0R
0R 0R
PWR3
GND
47k
2.2nF
330R
GND
GND
100nF
GND
0R
0R
MSP-TS430PM64A Target Socket
DNP
Yamaichi
IC51-0644-807
Socket:
DNP
1.1
for F4152
Open JP1 if LCD
is connected
JTAG ->
SBW ->
DNP
DNP
DNP
DNP DNP
DNP DNP
Vcc
ext
int
TEST/SBWTCK RST/SBWTDIO P7.0/TDO P7.1/TDI P7.2/TMS P7.3/TCK
ADD LCD-CAP!
DNP
DNP
JTAG
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
2
4
6
12
14
8
10
R2
C2
C1
R1
C5
R3
BOOTST
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
C6
R10 R11
R13 R14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
J1
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
J2
J3
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
J4
J5
1
2
3
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
12
13
14
15
10
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
1 2
Q1
R4
C3
1
2
3
JP4 JP5
1
2
3
JP6
1
2
3
JP7
1
2
3
JP8
1
2
3
R6
JP9
1
2
3
1
2
JP1
JP2
1
2
JP3
1
2
3
D1
C4
R5
R7
RST/NMI
TMS
TDI
VCC
GND
XTLGND
TCK/SBWTCK
TDO/SBWTDIO
VCC430
VCC430
VCC430
P5.1
P5.1
AVCC
AVCC
AVSS
AVSS
P1.0
P1.1
XIN
XOUT
A
A
A
B
B
B
C
C
D
D
E
E
F
F
Date: 3/29/2011 3:07:02 PM Sheet: 1/1
REV:
TITLE:
Document Number:
MSP-TS430PM64A
+
TEST/SBWTCK
RST/SBWTDIO
If supplied locally: populate R10 (0R), remove R11
If supplied by interface: populate R11 (0R), remove R10
www.ti.com MSP-TS430PM64A
B.17 MSP-TS430PM64A
Figure B-33. MSP-TS430PM64A Target Socket Module, Schematic
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 79
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Jumper JP2
Open to measure current
Jumper JP1
Open to disconnect LED
LED D1 connected to P5.1
Jumper JP3
1-2 (int): Power supply via JTAG interface
2-3 (ext): External Power Supply
Jumper JP4 to JP9:
Close 1-2 to debug in Spy-Bi-Wire mode
Close 2-3 to debug in 4-wire JTAG mode
Orient Pin 1 of Device
MSP-TS430PM64A www.ti.com
Figure B-34. MSP-TS430PM64A Target Socket Module, PCB
80 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com MSP-TS430PM64A
Table B-19. MSP-TS430PM64A Bill of Materials
Pos. Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board
1 C1, C2, 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP
2 C3 0 2.2nF, SMD0805 DNP
3 C6, 1 10uF, 10V, Tantal Size B 511-1463-2-ND
4 C4, C5 2 100nF, SMD0805 478-3351-2-ND
5 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 P516TR-ND
DNP: Headers and
receptacles enclosed with kit.
6 J1, J2, J3, J4 0 16-pin header, TH Keep vias free of solder.
SAM1029-16-ND : Header
SAM1213-16-ND : Receptacle
J5, JP3, JP4,
7 JP5, JP6, 8 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND JP7, JP8,
JP9
8 JP1, JP2 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header
9 2 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND Place on: J6, J7
10 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND
11 BOOTST 0 10-pin connector, male, TH DNP: Keep vias free of solder
Micro Crystal MS1V-T1K DNP: Keep vias free of 12 Q1 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = solder 12.5pF
13 R3, R6 2 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND
R1, R2, R5,
14 R7, R9, R10, 2 0 Ω, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP: R5, R7, R9, R10, R11, R11, R13, R13, R14
R14
15 R4 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND
16 U1 1 Socket: IC51-0644-807 Manuf.: Yamaichi
17 PCB 1 78 x 75 mm 4 layers
18 Rubber stand 4 select appropriate Apply to corners at bottom off side
19 MSP430 2 MSP430F4152IPM DNP: Enclosed with kit supplied by TI
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 81
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
MSP-TS430RGC64B www.ti.com
B.18 MSP-TS430RGC64B
Figure B-35. MSP-TS430RGC64B Target Socket Module, Schematic
82 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Jumper JP2
Open to disconnect LED
Connector J5
External power connector
Jumper JP3 to "ext"
Jumpers JP5 to JP10
Close 1-2 to debug in Spy-Bi-Wire mode
Close 2-3 to debug in 4-wire JTAG mode
D1 LED connected to P1.0
If the system should
be supplied via LDOI (J6),
close JP4 and
set JP3 to external
Orient Pin 1 of MSP430 device
www.ti.com MSP-TS430RGC64B
Figure B-36. MSP-TS430RGC64B Target Socket Module, PCB
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 83
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
MSP-TS430RGC64B www.ti.com
Table B-20. MSP-TS430RGC64B Bill of Materials
Pos. Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board
1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP
2 C3, C4 0 47pF, SMD0805 DNP
3 C6, C7, C10 3 10uF, 6.3V, SMD0805
C5, C11,
4 C13, C14, 5 100nF, SMD0805 311-1245-2-ND
C15
5 C8 1 2.2nF, SMD0805
6 C9 1 470nF, SMD0805 478-1403-2-ND
7 C16 1 4.7uF, SMD0805
8 C17 1 220nF, SMD0805
9 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 P516TR-ND
J1, J2, J3, SAM1029-16-ND DNP: Headers and receptacles 10 J4 0 16-pin header, TH (Header) SAM1213-16- enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of ND (Receptacle) solder:
11 J5 , J6 2 3-pin header, male, TH
JP3, JP5, place jumpers on pins 2-3 on JP5, JP6, 12 JP6, JP7, 7 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND JP7, JP8, JP9, JP10 place jumpers on JP8, JP9, pins 1-2 on JP3, JP10
13 JP1, JP2, 3 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header JP4
14 10 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND See Pos. 12 and Pos. 13
15 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, HRP14H-ND TH
16 BOOTST 0 10-pin connector, male, "DNP Keep vias free of solder" TH
Micro Crystal MS3V-T1R
17 Q1 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = DNP: Q1 Keep vias free of solder
12.5pF
18 Q2 0 Crystal Q2: 4MHz Buerklin: DNP: Q2 Keep vias free of solder 78D134
Insulating http://www.ettinger.de/Art 19 disk to Q2 0 Insulating disk to Q2 _Detail.cfm?ART_ARTNU M=70.08.121
20 R3, R7 2 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND
R1, R2, R4,
21 R6, R8, 3 0 Ohm, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP: R6, R8, R9, R10, R11,R12 R9,R10,
R11, R12
22 R5 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND
23 U1 1 Socket: QFN11T064-006- Manuf.: Yamaichi N-HSP
24 PCB 1 85 x 76 mm 2 layers
Adhesive Approximately 6mm for example, 3M 25 plastic feet 4 width, 2mm height Bumpons Part No. SJ- Apply to corners at bottom side 5302
26 D3,D4
27 MSP430 2 MSP430F5310 RGC DNP: enclosed with kit, supplied by TI
84 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com MSP-TS430RGC64C
B.19 MSP-TS430RGC64C
The MSP-TS430RGC64C target board has been designed with the option to operate with the target
device DVIO input voltage supplied via header J6 (see Figure B-37). This development platform does not
supply the 1.8-V DVIO rail on board and it MUST be provided by external power supply for proper device
operation. For correct JTAG connection, programming, and debug operation, it is important to follow this
procedure:
1. Make sure that the VCC and DVIO voltage supplies are OFF and that the power rails are fully
discharged to 0 V.
2. Enable the 1.8-V external DVIO power supply.
3. Enable the 1.8-V to 3.6-V VCC power supply (alternatively, this supply can be provided from the MSPFET430UIF
JTAG debugger interface).
4. Connect the MSP-FET430UIF JTAG connector to the target board.
5. Start the debug session using IAR or CCS IDE.
For more information on debugging the MSP4and MSP430F525x, see the device-specific data sheets
(MSP430F522x: SLAS718; MSP430F525x: SLAS903) and Designing with MSP430F522x and
MSP430F521x Devices (SLAA558).
For debugging of devices (MSP430F524x and MSP430F523x) without use of the DVIO power domain,
short JP4 with the jumper.
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 85
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
1.1
MSP-TS430RGC64C
TI Friesing
Tools
MSP430
1 1
12/14/10 S.G.
1 2 3 4 5 6
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
Design:
Appr.:
Rev.:
Comment:
Drawing#: Revision:
File: Page: Size:
Title of Schematic
of Mentor Pads Logic V9
Date: Name:
1 2 3 4 5 6
MSP-TS430RGC64C.sch
<-- SBW
<-- JTAG
ext
int
VCC
DVIO Power Circle
BSL
1 P6.0/CB0/A0
2 P6.1/CB1/A1
3 P6.2/CB2/A2
4 P6.3/CB3/A3
5 P6.4/CB4/A4
6 P6.5/CB5/A5
7 P6.6/CB6/A6
8 P6.7/CB7/A7
9 P5.0/A8/VEREF+
10 P5.1/A9/VEREF-
11 AVCC
12 P5.4/XIN
13 P5.5/XOUT
14 AVSS
15 DVCC
16 DVSS
17 VCORE
18 P1.0/TA0CLK/ACLK
19 P1.1/TA0.0
20 P1.2/TA0.1
21 P1.3/TA0.2
22 P1.4/TA0.3
23 P1.5/TA0.4
24 P1.6/TA1CLK/CBOUT
25 P1.7/TA1.0
26 P2.0/TA1.1
27 P2.1/TA1.2
28 P2.2/TA2CLK/SMCLK
29 P2.3/TA2.0
30 P2.4/TA2.1
31 P2.5/TA2.2
32 P2.6/RTCCLK/DMAE0
P2.7/UCB0STE/UCA0CLK 33
P3.0/UCB0SIMO/UCB0SDA 34
P3.1/UCB0SOMI/UCB0SCL 35
P3.2/UCB0CLK/UCA0STE 36
P3.3/UCA0TXD/UCA0SIMO 37
P3.4/UCA0RXD/UCA0SOMI 38
DVSS 39
DVIO 40
P4.0/PM_UCB1STE 41
P4.1/PM_UCB1SIMO 42
P4.2/PM_UCB1SOMI 43
P4.3/PM_UCB1CLK 44
P4.4/PM_UCA1TXD 45
P4.5/PM_UCA1RXD 46
P4.6/PM_NONE 47
P4.7/PM_NONE 48
49 P7.0/TB0.0
50 P7.1/TB0.1
51 P7.2/TB0.2
52 P7.3/TB0.3
53 P7.4/TB0.4
54 P7.5/TB0.5
55 BSLEN
56 RST/NMI
57 P5.2/XT2IN
58 P5.3/XT2OUT
59 TEST/SBWTCK
60 PJ.0/TDO
61 PJ.1/TDI/TCLK
62 PJ.2/TMS
63 PJ.3/TCK
64 RSTDVCC/SBWTDIO
65 THERMAL_1
66 THERMAL_2
67 THERMAL_3
68 THERMAL_4
69 THERMAL_5
70 THERMAL_6
71 THERMAL_7
72 THERMAL_8
U1
MSP430F5229
2 1
4 3
6 5
8 7
10 9
12 11
14 13
JTAG
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 0 1
BOOTST
CN-ML10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
J1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
J2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
J3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
J4
1
2
3
JP5
PINHEAD_1X3
1
2
3
JP6
PINHEAD_1X3
1
2
3
JP7
PINHEAD_1X3
1
2
3
JP8
PINHEAD_1X3
1
2
3
JP9
PINHEAD_1X3
1
2
3
JP10
PINHEAD_1X3
1
2
3
J5
PINHEAD_1X3
R7
330R
1
2
3
JP3
C10
10uF
C14
100nF
C5
10uF
C6
100nF
R1
0R
R2
0R
R6
0R R8
0R
C1 12pF
C2
12pF
C7
10uF
C13
100nF
1
2
JP2
R3
330R
1 2
D1
??? R4
0R
C9
470nF
R5
47K
C8
2.2nF
R11
0R
R12
0R
C16
4.7uF
tbd C3
tbd C4
R9
0R
R10
0R
C15
100nF
1
2
3
J6
PINHEAD_1X3
1
2
JP4
PINHEAD_1X2
D3
Q2
QUARZ_4PIN
26MHz/ASX53
Q1
1
2
JP1
PINHEAD_1X2
SHC1
SHORTCUT2
GND
GND
GND
GND
XTLGND
VCORE
GND
GND
DVCC
DVCC
GND
XTLGND2
GND
GND
DVCC
GND
RST/NMI
TCK
TMS
TDI
TDO
RSTDVCC_SBWTDIO
TDO
RST/NMI
TCK
C
TCK
M
TMS
I
TDI
O
TDO
DVCC
P1.2/TA0.1
P1.1/TA0.0
TEST/SBWTCK
C
M
I
O
DVCC
P1.1/TA0.0
P1.2/TA0.1
RSTDVCC_SBWTDIO
TEST/SBWTCK
AVSS
MSP-TS430RGC64C www.ti.com
Figure B-37. MSP-TS430RGC64C Target Socket Module, Schematic
86 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Connector J5
External power connector for DVCC.
Set jumper JP3 to "ext".
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Rev1.0 of the board does not have
connection from pin 4 of BOOTST to
pin 64 of MCU. To use BSL, these pins
should be connected by a wire.
Jumper JP2
Open to disconnect LED.
D1
LED connected to P1.0
Orient Pin 1 of
MSP430 device
Jumpers JP5 to JP10
-2 to debug in
Spy-Bi-Wire mode.
Close 2-3 to debug in
4-wire JTAG mode.
Close 1
Jumper JP4
For F524x devices, close.
For F522x, F523x and F525x devices,
close only if one power supply is
used for VCC and DVIO, and if VCC is
not higher then 1.98 V. Otherwise.
supply DVIO over J6.
Do not close if VCC > 1.98 V, as it
may damage the chip.
Connector J6
External power connector
to supply DVIO
www.ti.com MSP-TS430RGC64C
Figure B-38. MSP-TS430RGC64C Target Socket Module, PCB
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 87
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
MSP-TS430RGC64C www.ti.com
Table B-21. MSP-TS430RGC64C Bill of Materials
Item Qty Reference Value Description Comment Supplier No.
1 0 C1, C2 12pF CAP, SMD, Ceramic, 0805 DNP C1 C2
2 0 C3, C4 tbd CAP, SMD, Ceramic, 0805 DNP C3 C4
4 3 C5, C7, C10 10uF CAP, SMD, Ceramic, 0805
5 5 C8 C6 C13-15 100nF CAP, SMD, Ceramic, 0805 DigiKey: 311-1245-2-ND
5 5 C8 2.2nF CAP, SMD, Ceramic, 0805
6 1 C9 470nF CAP, SMD, Ceramic, 0805 DigiKey: 478-1403-2-ND
7 1 C16 4.7uF CAP, SMD, Ceramic, 0805
8 1 D1 Green LED LED, SMD, 0805
DNP: headers and
receptacles enclosed with
9 4 J1-J4 16-pin header Pin header 1x16: Grid: 100mil kit. Keep vias free of (2.54 mm) solder.
: Header SAM1029-16-ND
: Receptacle SAM1213-16-ND
10 2 J5, J6 3-pin header, male, TH Pin header 1x3: Grid: 100mil SAM1035-03-ND (2.54 mm)
11 JP5, JP6, JP7, 3-pin header, male, TH Pinheader 1x3: Grid: 100mil place jumpers on pins 2-3 SAM1035-03-ND JP8, JP9, JP10 (2.54 mm)
12 JP3 3-pin header, male, TH Pin header 1x3: Grid: 100mil place jumper on pins 1-2 SAM1035-03-ND (2.54 mm)
13 JP1, JP2, JP4 2-pin header, male, TH Pin header 1x2; Grid: 100mil place jumper on header SAM1035-02-ND (2.54 mm)
Place on: JP1, JP2, JP3,
14 10 Jumper JP4, JP5, JP6, JP7, JP8, 15-38-1024-ND
JP9, JP10
15 1 JTAG 2x7Pin,Wanne Header, THD, Male 2x7 Pin, HRP14H-ND Wanne, 100mil spacing
16 0 BOOTST 2x5Pin,Wanne Header, THD, Male 2x5 Pin, DNP Wanne, 100mil spacing
17 1 Q1 26MHz/ASX53 CRYSTAL, SMD, 5x3MM, Only Kit. 26MHz
18 0 Q2 26MHz/ASX53 CRYSTAL, SMD, 5x3MM, 300-8219-1-ND 26MHz
19 1 D3 LL103A DIODE, SMD, SOD123, Buerklin: 24S3406 Schottky
20 2 R3, R7 330 Ohm, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND
21 1 R5 47k Ohm, SMD0805 RES, SMD, 0805, 1/8W, x% 541-47000ATR-ND
R1, R2, R4, DNP: R6, R8, R9, R10, 22 R6, R8, R9, 0 Ohm, SMD0805 RES, SMD, 0805, 1/8W, x% R11,R12 541-000ATR-ND R10, R11, R12
23 1 U1 Socket: QFN11T064-006-N- Manuf.: Yamaichi HSP
24 2 MSP430 MSP430F5229IRGCR IC, MCU, SMD, 9.15x9.15mm Thermal Pad with Socket
25 4 Rubber stand Rubber stand off apply to corners at bottom Buerklin: 20H1724 off side
26 1 PCB 84 x 76 mm 84 x 76 mm
88 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com MSP-TS430RGC64USB
B.20 MSP-TS430RGC64USB
Due to the use of diodes in the power chain, the voltage on the MSP430F5xx device is approximately
0.3 V lower than is set by the debugging tool. Set the voltage in the IDE to 0.3 V higher than desired; for
example, to run the MCU at 3.0 V, set it to 3.3 V.
Figure B-39. MSP-TS430RGC64USB Target Socket Module, Schematic
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 89
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
MSP-TS430RGC64USB www.ti.com
Figure B-40. MSP-TS430RGC64USB Target Socket Module, PCB
90 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com MSP-TS430RGC64USB
Table B-22. MSP-TS430RGC64USB Bill of Materials
Pos. Ref Des No. Per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board
1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP: C1, C2
1.1 C3, C4 2 47pF, SMD0805
2 C6, C7 2 10uF, 6.3V, Tantal Size B 511-1463-2-ND
3 C5, C11, 4 100nF, SMD0805 311-1245-2-ND C13, C14
3.1 C10, C12 0 10uF, SMD0805 DNP: C10, C12
4 C8 1 2.2nF, SMD0805
5 C9 1 470nF, SMD0805 478-1403-2-ND
6 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 P516TR-ND
DNP: headers and
receptacles enclosed with kit.
7 J1, J2, J3, J4 4 16-pin header, TH Keep vias free of solder.
SAM1029-16-ND : Header
SAM1213-16-ND : Receptacle
8 J5 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND
JP5, JP6,
9 JP7, JP8, 6 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND place jumpers on pins 2-3
JP9, JP10
10 JP1, JP2, 3 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND place jumper on header JP4
11 JP3 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND place jumper on pins 1-2
Place on: JP1, JP2, JP3,
12 10 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND JP4, JP5, JP6, JP7, JP8,
JP9, JP10
13 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND
Q1: Micro Crystal MS1V-T1K DNP: Q1 14 Q1 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = Keep vias free of solder" 12.5pF
15 Q2 1 Crystal Q2: 4MHz Buerklin: 78D134
16 R3, R7 2 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND
R1, R2, R4,
17 R6, R8, R9, 2 0 Ω, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP: R4, R6, R8, R9, R12
R12
18 R10 1 100 Ω, SMD0805 Buerklin: 07E500
18 R11 1 1M Ω, SMD0805
18 R5 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND
19 U1 1 Socket: QFN11T064-006 Manuf.: Yamaichi
20 PCB 1 79 x 77 mm 2 layers
21 Rubber stand 4 Buerklin: 20H1724 apply to corners at bottom off side
22 MSP430 2 MSP430F5509 RGC DNP: enclosed with kit. Is supplied by TI
Insulating http://www.ettinger.de/Art_De 23 disk to Q2 1 Insulating disk to Q2 tail.cfm?ART_ARTNUM=70.0 8.121
27 C33 1 220n SMD0603 Buerklin: 53D2074
28 C35 1 10p SMD0603 Buerklin: 56D102
29 C36 1 10p SMD0603 Buerklin: 56D102
30 C38 1 220n SMD0603 Buerklin: 53D2074
31 C39 1 4u7 SMD0603 Buerklin: 53D2086
32 C40 1 0.1u SMD0603 Buerklin: 53D2068
33 D2, D3, D4 3 LL103A Buerklin: 24S3406
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 91
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
MSP-TS430RGC64USB www.ti.com
Table B-22. MSP-TS430RGC64USB Bill of Materials (continued)
Pos. Ref Des No. Per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board
34 IC7 1 TPD4E004 Manu: TI
36 LED 0 JP3QE SAM1032-03-ND DNP
37 LED1 0 LEDCHIPLED_0603 FARNELL: 852-9833 DNP
38 LED2 0 LEDCHIPLED_0603 FARNELL: 852-9868 DNP
39 LED3 0 LEDCHIPLED_0603 FARNELL: 852-9841 DNP
40 R13, R15, 0 470R Buerklin: 07E564 DNP R16
41 R33 1 1k4 / 1k5 Buerklin: 07E612
42 R34 1 27R Buerklin: 07E444
43 R35 1 27R Buerklin: 07E444
44 R36 1 33k Buerklin: 07E740
45 S1 0 PB P12225STB-ND DNP
46 S2 0 PB P12225STB-ND DNP
46 S3 1 PB P12225STB-ND
47 USB1 1 USB_RECEPTACLE FARNELL: 117-7885
92 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com MSP-TS430PN80
B.21 MSP-TS430PN80
NOTE: For MSP430F47x and MSP430FG47x devices:
Connect pins 7 and 10 (GND) externally to DVSS (see data sheet).
Connect load capacitance on Vref pin 60 when SD16 is used (see data sheet).
For use of BSL: connect pin 1 of BOOST to pin 58 of U1 and pin 3 of BOOST to pin 57 of U1.
Figure B-41. MSP-TS430PN80 Target Socket Module, Schematic
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 93
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Connector J5
External power connection
Remove R8 and jumper R9
LED connected to pin 12
Jumper J6
Open to disconnect LED
Orient Pin 1 of MSP430 device
MSP-TS430PN80 www.ti.com
Figure B-42. MSP-TS430PN80 Target Socket Module, PCB
94 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com MSP-TS430PN80
Table B-23. MSP-TS430PN80 Bill of Materials
Pos. Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board
1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP: C1, C2
1.1 C3, C4 0 47pF, SMD0805 DNP: Only recommendation. Check your crystal spec.
2 C6, C7 1 10uF, 10V, Tantal Size B 511-1463-2-ND
3 C5 1 100nF, SMD0805 478-3351-2-ND
4 C8 1 10nF, SMD0805 478-1383-2-ND
5 D1 1 green LED, SMD0603 475-1056-2-ND
DNP: Headers and
receptacles enclosed with
6 J1, J2, J3, J4 0 25-pin header, TH kit.Keep vias free of solder.
SAM1029-20-ND : Header
SAM1213-20-ND : Receptacle
7 J5, JP1 2 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND
8 J6, JP2 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header
9 3 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND Place on: J6, JP2, JP1/Pos1- 2
10 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND
11 BOOTST 0 10-pin connector, male, TH DNP: Keep vias free of solder
Q1: Micro Crystal MS1V-T1K DNP: Keep vias free of 12 Q1, Q2 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = solder 12.5pF
13 R3 1 560 Ω, SMD0805 541-560ATR-ND
R1, R2, R4, DNP: R4, R6, R7, R10, R11, 14 R6, R7, R10, 2 0 Ω, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND R12 R11, R12
15 R5 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND
16 U1 1 Socket: IC201-0804-014 Manuf.: Yamaichi
17 PCB 1 77 x 77 mm 2 layers
18 Adhesive 4 ~6mm width, 2mm height for example, 3M Bumpons Apply to corners at bottom Plastic feet Part No. SJ-5302 side
19 MSP430 2 MSP430FG439IPN DNP: Enclosed with kit supplied by TI
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 95
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
MSP-TS430PN80A www.ti.com
B.22 MSP-TS430PN80A
Figure B-43. MSP-TS430PN80A Target Socket Module, Schematic
96 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Connector J5
External power connector
Jumper JP3 to "ext"
Orient Pin 1 of MSP430 device
Jumpers JP5 to JP10
Close 1-2 to debug in Spy-Bi-Wire mode
Close 2-3 to debug in 4-wire JTAG mode
D1 LED connected to P1.0
Jumper JP2
Open to disconnect LED
If the system should
be supplied via LDOI (J6),
close JP4 and
set JP3 to external
www.ti.com MSP-TS430PN80A
Figure B-44. MSP-TS430PN80A Target Socket Module, PCB
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 97
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
MSP-TS430PN80A www.ti.com
Table B-24. MSP-TS430PN80A Bill of Materials
Position Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board
1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP
2 C3, C4 0 47pF, SMD0805 DNP
3 C6, C7, 3 10uF, 6.3V, SMD0805 DNP C10 C10, C12
C5, C11,
4 C13, C14, 5 100nF, SMD0805 311-1245-2-ND
C15
5 C8 1 2.2nF, SMD0805
6 C9 1 470nF, SMD0805 478-1403-2-ND
7 C16 1 4.7uF, SMD0805
8 C17 1 220nF, SMD0805
9 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 P516TR-ND
J1, J2, J3, SAM1029-20-ND DNP: Headers and receptacles 10 J4 0 20-pin header, TH (Header) SAM1213-20- enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of ND (Receptacle) solder:
11 J5 , J6 2 3-pin header, male, TH
JP3, JP5, place jumpers on pins 2-3 on JP5, 12 JP6, JP7, 7 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND JP6, JP7, JP8, JP9, JP10 place JP8, JP9, jumpers on pins 1-2 on JP3, JP10
13 JP1, JP2, 3 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header JP4
14 10 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND See Pos. 12 and Pos. 13
15 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, HRP14H-ND TH
16 BOOTST 0 10-pin connector, male, "DNP Keep vias free of solder" TH
Micro Crystal MS3V-T1R
17 Q1 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = DNP: Q1 Keep vias free of solder
12.5pF
18 Q2 0 Crystal Q2: 4MHz Buerklin: DNP: Q2 Keep vias free of solder 78D134
Insulating http://www.ettinger.de/Ar 19 disk to Q2 0 Insulating disk to Q2 t_Detail.cfm?ART_ART NUM=70.08.121
20 D3,D4 2 LL103A Buerklin: 24S3406
21 R3, R7 2 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND
R1, R2,
R4, R6,
22 R8, 3 0 Ohm, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP: R6, R8, R9, R10, R11,R12
R9,R10,
R11, R12
23 R5 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND
24 U1 1 Socket:IC201-0804-014 Manuf.: Yamaichi
25 PCB 1 77 x 91 mm 2 layers
Adhesive Approximately 6mm for example, 3M 26 plastic feet 4 width, 2mm height Bumpons Part No. SJ- Apply to corners at bottom side 5302
27 MSP430 2 MSP430F5329IPN DNP: enclosed with kit, supplied by TI
98 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com MSP-TS430PN80USB
B.23 MSP-TS430PN80USB
Due to the use of diodes in the power chain, the voltage on the MSP430F5xx device is approximately
0.3 V lower than is set by the debugging tool. Set the voltage in the IDE to 0.3 V higher than desired; for
example, to run the MCU at 3.0 V, set it to 3.3 V.
NOTE: R11 should be populated.
Figure B-45. MSP-TS430PN80USB Target Socket Module, Schematic
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 99
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Jumper JP3
1-2 (int): Power supply via JTAG debug interface
2-3 (ext): External power supply
Connector J5
External power connector
Jumper JP3 to ‘ext’
USB Connector
BSL invoke button S3
Jumper JP4
Close for USB bus powered
device
Jumper JP2
Open to disconnect LED
LED connected to P1.0
Jumper JP1
Open to measure current
Jumper JP5 to JP10
Close 1-2 to debug in Spy-Bi-
Wire mode.
Close 2-3 to debug in 4-wire
JTAG mode.
MSP-TS430PN80USB www.ti.com
Figure B-46. MSP-TS430PN80USB Target Socket Module, PCB
100 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com MSP-TS430PN80USB
Table B-25. MSP-TS430PN80USB Bill of Materials
Pos. Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board
1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP: C1, C2
1.1 C3, C4 2 47pF, SMD0805
2 C6, C7 2 10uF, 6.3V, Tantal Size B 511-1463-2-ND
3 C5, C11, 4 100nF, SMD0805 311-1245-2-ND C13, C14
3.1 C10, C12 0 10uF, SMD0805 311-1245-2-ND DNP: C10, C12
4 C8 1 2.2nF, SMD0805
5 C9 1 470nF, SMD0805 478-1403-2-ND
6 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 P516TR-ND
DNP: headers and
7 J1, J2, J3, 4 20-pin header, TH SAM1029-20-ND receptacles enclosed with J4 kit. Keep vias free of
solder.
DNP: headers and
receptacles enclosed with
kit. Keep vias free of
7.1 4 20-pin header, TH solder.
SAM1213-20-ND : Header
: Receptacle
8 J5 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND
JP5, JP6,
9 JP7, 6 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND Place jumpers on pins 2-3 JP8,JP9,
JP10
10 JP1, JP2 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header
JP4 1 SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper only on one pin
11 JP3 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND Place jumper on pins 1-2
Place on: JP1, JP2, JP3,
12 10 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND JP4, JP5, JP6, JP7, JP8,
JP9, JP10
13 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND
Micro Crystal MS1V-T1K DNP: Q1 Keep vias free of 14 Q1 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = solder 12.5pF
15 Q2 1 Crystal "Q2: 4MHzBuerklin: 78D134"
16 R3, R7 2 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND
R1, R2, R4,
17 R6, R8, R9, 2 0 Ω, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP: R4, R6, R8, R9, R12
R12
18 R10 1 100 Ω, SMD0805 Buerklin: 07E500
18 R11 0 1M Ω, SMD0805 DNP
18 R5 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND
19 U1 1 Socket:IC201-0804-014 Manuf.: Yamaichi
20 PCB 1 79 x 77 mm 2 layers
21 Rubber 4 Buerklin: 20H1724 Apply to corners at bottom standoff side
22 MSP430 2 MSP430F5529 DNP: Enclosed with kit supplied by TI
Insulating http://www.ettinger.de/Art_ 23 disk to Q2 1 Insulating disk to Q2 Detail.cfm?ART_ARTNUM =70.08.121
27 C33 1 220n Buerklin: 53D2074
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 101
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
MSP-TS430PN80USB www.ti.com
Table B-25. MSP-TS430PN80USB Bill of Materials (continued)
Pos. Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board
28 C35 1 10p Buerklin: 56D102
29 C36 1 10p Buerklin: 56D102
30 C38 1 220n Buerklin: 53D2074
31 C39 1 4u7 Buerklin: 53D2086
32 C40 1 0.1u Buerklin: 53D2068
33 D2, D3, D4 3 LL103A Buerklin: 24S3406
34 IC7 1 TPD4E004 Manu: TI
36 LED 0 JP3QE SAM1032-03-ND DNP
37 LED1 0 LEDCHIPLED_0603 FARNELL: 852-9833 DNP
38 LED2 0 LEDCHIPLED_0603 FARNELL: 852-9868 DNP
39 LED3 0 LEDCHIPLED_0603 FARNELL: 852-9841 DNP
40 R13, R15, 0 470R Buerklin: 07E564 DNP R16
41 R33 1 1k4 Buerklin: 07E612
42 R34 1 27R Buerklin: 07E444
43 R35 1 27R Buerklin: 07E444
44 R36 1 33k Buerklin: 07E740
45 S1 0 PB P12225STB-ND DNP
46 S2 0 PB P12225STB-ND DNP
46 S3 1 PB P12225STB-ND
47 USB1 1 USB_RECEPTACLE FARNELL: 117-7885
102 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com MSP-TS430PZ100
B.24 MSP-TS430PZ100
NOTE: Connections between the JTAG header and pins XOUT and XIN are no longer required and should not be
made.
Figure B-47. MSP-TS430PZ100 Target Socket Module, Schematic
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 103
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Connector J5
External power connection
Remove R8 and jumper R9
LED connected to pin 12
Jumper J6
Open to disconnect LED
Orient Pin 1 of MSP430 device
Jumper J7
Open to measure current
MSP-TS430PZ100 www.ti.com
Figure B-48. MSP-TS430PZ100 Target Socket Module, PCB
104 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com MSP-TS430PZ100
Table B-26. MSP-TS430PZ100 Bill of Materials
Pos. Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board
1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP
DNP: Only
1b C3, C4 0 47pF, SMD0805 recommendation. Check
your crystal spec.
2 C6, C7 1 10uF, 10V, Tantal Size B 511-1463-2-ND DNP: C6
3 C5 1 100nF, SMD0805 478-3351-2-ND
4 C8 1 10nF, SMD0805 478-1383-2-ND
5 C9 1 470nF, SMD0805 478-1403-2-ND
6 D1 1 yellow LED, TH, 3mm, T1 511-1251-ND
DNP: Headers and
receptacles enclosed with
7 J1, J2, J3, 0 25-pin header, TH kit.Keep vias free of solder. J4 SAM1029-25-ND : Header
SAM1213-25-ND : Receptacle
8 J5 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND
9 J6, J7 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND place jumper on header
10 2 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND Place on: J6, J7
11 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND
12 BOOTST 0 10-pin connector, male, TH DNP: Keep vias free of solder
Q1: Micro Crystal MS1V- DNP: Keep vias free of 13 Q1, Q2 0 Crystal T1K 32.768kHz, C(Load) = solder 12.5pF
14 R3 1 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND
R1, R2, R4,
15 R8, R9, R10, 3 0 Ω, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP: R4, R9, R10, R12
R11, R12
16 R5 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND
17 U1 1 Socket: IC201-1004-008 or Manuf.: Yamaichi IC357-1004-53N
18 PCB 1 82 x 90 mm 2 layers
19 Adhesive 4 ~6mm width, 2mm height for example, 3M Bumpons Apply to corners at bottom Plastic feet Part No. SJ-5302 side
20 MSP430 2 MSP430FG4619IPZ DNP: enclosed with kit supplied by TI
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 105
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
MSP-TS430PZ100A www.ti.com
B.25 MSP-TS430PZ100A
Figure B-49. MSP-TS430PZ100A Target Socket Module, Schematic
106 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Jumper JP1
Open to measure current
Jumper JP2
Open to disconnect LED
LED D1 connected to P5.1
Jumper JP3
1-2 (int): Power supply via JTAG interface
2-3 (ext): External Power Supply
Orient Pin 1 of Device
www.ti.com MSP-TS430PZ100A
Figure B-50. MSP-TS430PZ100A Target Socket Module, PCB
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 107
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
MSP-TS430PZ100A www.ti.com
Table B-27. MSP-TS430PZ100A Bill of Materials
Pos. Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board
1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP
DNP: Only
1b C3, C4 0 47pF, SMD0805 recommendation. Check
your crystal spec.
2 C7, C9 2 10uF, 10V, Tantal Size B 511-1463-2-ND
3 C5, C11, 3 100nF, SMD0805 311-1245-2-ND C14
4 C8 1 10nF, SMD0805 478-1358-1-ND
5 C6 0 470nF, SMD0805 478-1403-2-ND DNP
6 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 67-1553-1-ND
DNP: Headers and
receptacles enclosed with
7 J1, J2, J3, 0 25-pin header, TH kit.Keep vias free of solder. J4 SAM1029-25-ND : Header
SAM1213-25-ND : Receptacle
8 J5 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND
10 JP1, JP2 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND pPlace jumper on header
11 JP3 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND Place jumper on pins 1-2
12 3 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND Place on: JP1, JP2, JP3
13 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND
14 BOOTST 0 10-pin connector, male, TH DNP: Keep vias free of solder
Q1: Micro Crystal MS1V- DNP: Keep vias free of 15 Q1, Q2 0 Crystal T1K 32.768kHz, C(Load) = solder 12.5pF
16 R3 1 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND
R1, R2, R4,
17 R6, R7, R8, 2 0 Ω, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP: R4, R6, R7, R8, R9, R9, R10, R10, R11, R12
R11, R12
18 R5 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND
19 U1 1 Socket: IC357-1004-53N Manuf.: Yamaichi
20 PCB 1 90 x 82 mm 4 layers
21 Rubber 4 Select appropriate Apply to corners at bottom standoff side
22 MSP430 2 MSP430F5438IPZ DNP: Enclosed with kit supplied by TI
108 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com MSP-TS430PZ100B
B.26 MSP-TS430PZ100B
Figure B-51. MSP-TS430PZ100B Target Socket Module, Schematic
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 109
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Connector J5
External power connector
Jumper JP1 to "ext"
Jumper JP1
Open to measure current
Orient Pin 1 of MSP430 device
Jumpers JP5 to JP10
Close 1-2 to debug in Spy-Bi-Wire mode
Close 2-3 to debug in 4-wire JTAG mode
JP11, JP12, JP13
Connect 1-2 to connect
AUXVCCx with DVCC or
drive AUXVCCx externally
D1 LED connected to P1.0
Jumper JP2
Open to disconnect LED
MSP-TS430PZ100B www.ti.com
Figure B-52. MSP-TS430PZ100B Target Socket Module, PCB
110 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com MSP-TS430PZ100B
Table B-28. MSP-TS430PZ100B Bill of Materials
Position Ref Des No. per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board
1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP
C4, C5,
2 C6 , C7, 6 100nF, SMD0805 311-1245-2-ND
C8, C9
3 C10, C26 2 470 nF, SMD0805 478-1403-2-ND
4 C11, C12 1 10 uF / 6.3 V SMD0805 C12 DNP
C13, C14,
5 C16, C18, 6 4.7 uF SMD0805
C19, C29
6 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 P516TR-ND
J1, J2, J3, SAM1029-25-ND DNP: Headers and receptacles 7 J4 0 25-pin header, TH (Header) SAM1213-25- enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of ND (Receptacle) solder:
8 J5 1 3-pin header, male, TH
JP3, JP5, place jumpers on pins 2-3 on JP5, 9 JP6, JP7, 7 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND JP6, JP7, JP8, JP9, JP10 place JP8, JP9, jumpers on pins 1-2 on JP3, JP10
10 JP1, JP2, 3 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header JP4
11 JP11, 3 4-pin header, male, TH place jumper on header 1-2 JP12, JP13
12 13 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND See Pos. 9 and Pos. 10 and Pos. 11
15 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, HRP14H-ND TH
16 BOOTST 0 10-pin connector, male, "DNP Keep vias free of solder" TH
17 Q1 0 Crystal DNP: Q1 Keep vias free of solder
21 R3, R7 2 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND
R1, R2,
22 R4, R6, 2 0 Ohm, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP: R4, R6, R8, R10, R11 R8, R10,
R11
23 R5 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND
24 U1 1 Socket: IC357-1004-53N Manuf.: Yamaichi
25 PCB 1 90 x 82 mm 2 layers
Adhesive Approximately 6mm for example, 3M 26 plastic feet 4 width, 2mm height Bumpons Part No. SJ- Apply to corners at bottom side 5302
27 MSP430 2 MSP430F6733IPZ DNP: enclosed with kit, supplied by TI
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 111
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
DNP
DNP
DNP
DNP
DNP
DNP
0R
12pF
12pF
47pF
47pF
GND
0R
100nF
330R
10uF/6.3V
10uF/6.3V
2.2nF
PWR3
GND
GND
GND
0R GND
330R
47K
100nF
100nF
P516TR-ND
470nF
100nF
100nF
0R
0R
0R
0R
GND
VCC
100nF
GND
100nF
100nF
GND
100nF
LL103A
GND
4.7n
HCTC_XTL_4
HCTC_XTL_4
HCTC_XTL_4
HCTC_XTL_4
GND
0R
0R
GND
GND
GND
4.7uF
GND
100nF
220nF
GND
VCC
LL103A
1.1
MSP430: Target-Socket MSP-TS430PZ100C
Socket:
Yamaichi
IC201-1004-008
LFXTCLK
<- SBW
<- JTAG
Vcc
int
ext
DNP
DNP
DNP
DNP
DNP
DNP
BSL-Rx
BSL-Tx
DNP
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
2
4
6
12
14
8
10
JTAG
R2
C2
C1
C3
C4
C5 R1
R3
C6
C7
C8
1
2
3
J5
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
64
63
62
61
44
43
42
41
37
38
39
40
17
18
19
20
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
U1
QFP100PZ
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
J1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
J2
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
J3
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
J4
1 JP1
2
1
JP2
2
R4
1
2
3
JP5 1
2
3
JP6 1
2
3
JP7 1
2
3
JP8 1
2
3
JP9 1
2
3
R7 JP10
R5
C11
C12
D1
C9
C13
C10
R6
R8
R9
R12
1
2
3
JP3
C17
C18
C19
C14
D3
C16
1
2
3
JP11
4
1 2
Q1G$1
3 4
Q1G$2
2 1
Q2G$1
4 3
Q2G$2
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
BOOTST
R10
R11
C15
C20
C21
1 JP4
2
D4
1
2
3
J6
TMS
TMS
TDI
TDI
TDO
TDO
TDO
XOUT
VCC
GND
GND
GND
XIN
P1.0
DVCC1
DVCC1
DVCC1
DVCC1
DVCC1
DVCC1
AVCC
XT2OUT
AVSS
AVSS
AVSS
M
M
I
I
O
O
XT2IN
RST/NMI
RST/NMI
TCK
TCK
TCK
C
C
TEST/SBWTCK
TEST/SBWTCK
TEST/SBWTCK
RST
RST
RST
XTLGND2
XTLGND1
PU.0
PU.1
P1.6
P1.7
P8.0
P8.1
P8.2
VBAK
VBAT
VBAT
VBAT
P1.1
P1.1
P1.2
P1.2
LDOI
LDOI
LDOO
LDOO
BSL Interface
LDOI/LDOO Interface
+
+
Note: If the system should be
supplied via LDOI (J6) close JP4
and set JP3 to external
MSP-TS430PZ100C www.ti.com
B.27 MSP-TS430PZ100C
Figure B-53. MSP-TS430PZ100C Target Socket Module, Schematic
112 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Connector J5
External power connector
Jumper JP3 to "ext"
If the system should
be supplied via LDOI (J6),
close JP4 and
set JP3 to external
Jumper JP2
Open to disconnect LED
D1 LED connected to P1.0
Orient Pin 1 of MSP430 device
Jumpers JP5 to JP10
Close 1-2 to debug in Spy-Bi-Wire
mode
Close 2-3 to debug in 4-wire JTAG
mode
LDOI/LDOO
14
1
2
GND
GND
VCC
1 5 10 1 5 2 25 0
26 30 3540 45 50
75 70 65 60 55 51
100 95 90 85 80 76
1 2 3
123
123
123
123
123
3 2 1
1 2 3 4
10
1
2
1 2 3
1
SBW JTAG
Vcc
int
ext
GND
VBAT
DVCC
JTAG
R2
C2
C1
C3
C4
R1
C5
R3
+
C6
+
C7
C8
J5
U1
J1
J2
J3
J4
JP1
JP2
R4
JP5
JP6
JP7
JP8
JP9
JP10
R7
R5
C11
C12
D1
C9
C13
C10
R6
R8
R9
R12
JP3
C17
C18
C19
C14
D3
C16
JP11
Q1
Q2
BOOTST
R10
R11 C15
C20
C21
JP4
D4
J6
www.ti.com MSP-TS430PZ100C
Figure B-54. MSP-TS430PZ100C Target Socket Module, PCB
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 113
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
MSP-TS430PZ100C www.ti.com
Table B-29. MSP-TS430PZ100C Bill of Materials
Number
Pos. Ref Des Per Description Digi-Key Part No. Comment
Board
1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP: C1, C2
1.1 C3, C4 2 47pF, SMD0805 DNP: C3, C4
2 C6, C7 2 10uF, 6.3V, Tantal Size B 511-1463-2-ND
C5, C11,
3 C13, C14, 6 100nF, SMD0805 311-1245-2-ND
C19, C20
3.1 C10, C12, 0 100nF, SMD0805 311-1245-2-ND DNP: C10, C12,C18, C17 C18,17
4 C8 1 2.2nF, SMD0805 Buerklin 53 D 292
5 C9 1 470nF, SMD0805 478-1403-2-ND
6 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 P516TR-ND
J1, J2, J3, DNP: headers and receptacles enclosed 7 J4 4 25-pin header, TH SAM1029-25-ND with kit. Keep vias free of solder.
DNP: headers and receptacles enclosed
7.1 4 25-pin header, TH SAM1213-25-ND with kit.
Keep vias free of solder.
8 J5, J6 2 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND
JP5, JP6,
9 JP7, 6 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND place jumpers on pins 2-3 JP8,JP9,
JP10
10 JP1, JP2 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND place jumper on header
10.1 JP4 1 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND place jumper on header
11 JP3 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND place jumper on pins 1-2
12 10 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND Place on: JP1, JP2, JP3, JP4, JP5, JP6, JP7, JP8, JP9, JP10
13 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND
14 BOOTST 1 10-pin connector, male, TH HRP10H-ND DNP, keep vias free of solder
15 Q1 0 Crystal DNP: Q1
Keep vias free of solder
16 Q2 1 Crystal DNP: Q2 Keep vias free of solder
17 R3, R7 2 330 Ohm, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND
R1, R2, R4,
18 R6, R8, R9, 3 0 Ohm, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP: R6, R8, R9, R10, R11, R12 R10, R11,
R12
19 R5 1 47k Ohm, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND
20 U1 1 Socket: IC357-1004-53N Manuf.: Yamaichi
21 PCB 1 79.5 x 99.5 mm MSP-TS430PZ100C 2 layers Rev 1.0
22 Rubber 4 Buerklin: 20H1724 apply to corners at bottom side stand off
23 MSP430 2 MSP430F643x DNP: enclosed with kit. Is supplied by
TI.
24 C16 1 4.7 nF SMD0603 Buerklin 53 D 2042
26 D3, D4 2 LL103A Buerklin: 24S3406
27 JP11 1 4-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-04-ND Place jumper on Pin 1 and Pin 2
28 C15 1 4.7 uF, SMD0805 Buerklin 53 D 2430
29 C21 1 220nF, SMD0805 Buerklin 53 D 2381
114 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com MSP-TS430PZ5x100
B.28 MSP-TS430PZ5x100
Figure B-55. MSP-TS430PZ5x100 Target Socket Module, Schematic
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 115
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Connector J5
External power connector
Jumper J3 to ‘ext’
Jumper JP1
Open to measure current
Jumpers JP5 to JP10
Close 1-2 to debug in
Spy-Bi-Wire mode.
Close 2-3 to debug in
4-wire JTAG mode.
Jumper JP2
Open to disconnect LED
LED connected to P1.0
Jumper JP3
1-2 (int): Power supply via JTAG debug interface
2-3 (ext): External power supply
MSP-TS430PZ5x100 www.ti.com
Figure B-56. MSP-TS430PZ5x100 Target Socket Module, PCB
116 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com MSP-TS430PZ5x100
Table B-30. MSP-TS430PZ5x100 Bill of Materials
Pos. Ref Des No. Per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board
1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP
1b C3, C4 47pF, SMD0805 DNP: Only recommendation. Check your crystal spec.
2 C6, C7 2 10uF, 10V, Tantal Size B 511-1463-2-ND
C5, C10,
3 C11, C12, 4 100nF, SMD0805 311-1245-2-ND DNP: C12, C14
C13, C14
4 C8 0 2.2nF, SMD0805 DNP
5 C9 1 470nF, SMD0805 478-1403-2-ND
6 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 67-1553-1-ND
DNP: headers and
receptacles enclosed with kit.
7 J1, J2, J3, J4 0 25-pin header, TH Keep vias free of solder.
SAM1029-25-ND : Header
SAM1213-25-ND : Receptacle
8 J5 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND
JP5, JP6,
9 JP7, JP8, 6 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND Place jumpers on pins 2-3
JP9, JP10
10 JP1, JP2 2 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header
11 JP3 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND Place jumper on pins 1-2
12 9 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND Place on JP1, JP2, JP3, JP5, JP6, JP7, JP8, JP9, JP10
13 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND
14 BOOTST 0 10-pin connector, male, TH DNP: Keep vias free of solder
Q1: Micro Crystal MS1V-T1K DNP: Keep vias free of 15 Q1, Q2 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = solder 12.5pF
16 R3, R7 2 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND
R1, R2, R4,
17 R6, R8, R9, 3 0 Ω, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP: R6, R8, R9, R10, R11, R10, R11, R12
R12
18 R5 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND
19 U1 1 Socket: IC357-1004-53N Manuf.: Yamaichi
20 PCB 1 90 x 82 mm 2 layers
21 Rubber 4 Select appropriate Apply to corners at bottom standoff side
22 MSP430 2 MSP430F5438IPZ DNP: Enclosed with kit supplied by TI
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 117
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
MSP-TS430PZ100USB www.ti.com
B.29 MSP-TS430PZ100USB
Due to the use of diodes in the power chain, the voltage on the MSP430F5xx device is approximately
0.3 V lower than is set by the debugging tool. Set the voltage in the IDE to 0.3 V higher than desired; for
example, to run the MCU at 3.0 V, set it to 3.3 V.
Figure B-57. MSP-TS430PZ100USB Target Socket Module, Schematic
118 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com MSP-TS430PZ100USB
Figure B-58. MSP-TS430PZ100USB Target Socket Module, PCB
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 119
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
MSP-TS430PZ100USB www.ti.com
Table B-31. MSP-TS430PZ100USB Bill of Materials
Pos. Ref Des No. Per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board
1 C1, C2 0 12pF, SMD0805 DNP: C1, C2
1.1 C3, C4 2 47pF, SMD0805
2 C6, C7 2 10uF, 6.3V, Tantal Size B 511-1463-2-ND
C5, C11,
3 C13, C14, 5 100nF, SMD0805 311-1245-2-ND
C19
3.1 C10, C12, 0 100nF, SMD0805 311-1245-2-ND DNP: C10, C12,C18, C17 C18, C17
4 C8 1 2.2nF, SMD0805
5 C9 1 470nF, SMD0805 478-1403-2-ND
6 D1 1 green LED, SMD0805 P516TR-ND
DNP: headers and
receptacles enclosed with kit.
7 J1, J2, J3, J4 4 25-pin header, TH SAM1029-25-ND Keep vias free of solder.
: Header
: Receptacle
DNP: headers and
receptacles enclosed with kit.
7.1 4 25-pin header, TH SAM1213-25-ND Keep vias free of solder.
: Header
: Receptacle
8 J5 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND
JP5, JP6,
9 JP7, JP8, 6 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND place jumpers on pins 2-3
JP9, JP10
10 JP1, JP2, 3 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND place jumper on header JP4
11 JP3 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND place jumper on pins 1-2
Place on: JP1, JP2, JP3,
12 10 Jumper 15-38-1024-ND JP4, JP5, JP6, JP7, JP8,
JP9, JP10
13 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND
Micro Crystal MS1V-T1K DNP: Q1. Keep vias free of 14 Q1 0 Crystal 32.768kHz, C(Load) = solder 12.5pF
15 Q2 1 Crystal Q2: 4MHz, Buerklin: 78D134
16 R3, R7 2 330 Ω, SMD0805 541-330ATR-ND
R1, R2, R4,
17 R6, R8, R9, 3 0 Ω, SMD0805 541-000ATR-ND DNP: R6, R8, R9, R12
R12
18 R10 1 100 Ω, SMD0805 Buerklin: 07E500
18 R11 1 1M Ω, SMD0603 not existing in Rev 1.0
18 R5 1 47k Ω, SMD0805 541-47000ATR-ND
19 U1 1 Socket:IC201-1004-008 Manuf.: Yamaichi
20 PCB 1 79 x 77 mm 2 layers
21 Rubber stand 4 Buerklin: 20H1724 apply to corners at bottom off side
22 MSP430 2 MSP430F5529 DNP: enclosed with kit. Is supplied by TI
Insulating http://www.ettinger.de/Art_De 23 disk to Q2 1 Insulating disk to Q2 tail.cfm?ART_ARTNUM=70.0 8.121
24 C16 1 4.7 nF SMD0603
27 C33 1 220n SMD0603 Buerklin: 53D2074
28 C35, C36 2 10p SMD0603 Buerklin: 56D102
120 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
www.ti.com MSP-TS430PZ100USB
Table B-31. MSP-TS430PZ100USB Bill of Materials (continued)
Pos. Ref Des No. Per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board
30 C38 1 220n SMD0603 Buerklin: 53D2074
31 C39 1 4u7 SMD0603 Buerklin: 53D2086
32 C40 1 0.1u SMD0603 Buerklin: 53D2068
33 D2, D3, D4 3 LL103A Buerklin: 24S3406
34 IC7 1 TPD4E004 Manu: TI
35 LED 0 JP3QE SAM1032-03-ND DNP
36 LED1, LED2, 0 LEDCHIPLED_0603 FARNELL: 852-9833 DNP LED3
37 R13, R15, 0 470R SMD0603 Buerklin: 07E564 DNP R16
38 R33 1 1k4 / 1k5 SMD0603 Buerklin: 07E612
39 R34 1 27R SMD0603 Buerklin: 07E444
40 R35 1 27R SMD0603 Buerklin: 07E444
41 R36 1 33k SMD0603 Buerklin: 07E740
42 S1, S2, S3 1 PB P12225STB-ND DNP S1 and S2. (Only S3)
43 USB1 1 USB_RECEPTACLE FARNELL: 117-7885
44 JP11 1 4-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-04-ND place jumper only on Pin 1
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 121
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
0R
12pF
12pF
GND
GND
0R
100nF
330R
2.2nF
0R
0R
PWR3
GND
330R
47K
0R
0R
100nF
4.7uF
GND
GND
100nF
470nF
0R
QUARZ5
100nF
10uF/6,3V
10uF/6,3V
100nF 4.7uF
4.7uF 100nF
4.7uF
4.7uF
4.7uF
470nF
FE04-1
VCC
GND
GND
100nF
4.7uF
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
VCC1
VCC1
VCC1
VCC1
VCC1
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
AVSS
AVSS
DVCC AVCC
GND
VCC
VCC
GND
MSP430: Target-Socket
MSP-TS430PEU128 for F6779
Petersen
1080/1/001/01.1
DNP
LFXTCLK
DNP
<- SBW
<- JTAG
DNP
Vcc
int
ext
DNP
DNP
DNP
DNP
DNP
DNP
DNP
DVDSYS
1.1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
J1
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
J2
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
J3
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
J4
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
2
4
6
12
14
8
10
JTAG
R2
C2
C1
R1
C5
R3
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
BOOTST
C3
R10
R11
J5
1
2
3
1
2
JP1
JP2
1
2
1
2
3
JP5 1
2
3
JP6 1
2
3
JP7 1
2
3
JP8 1
2
3
JP9 1
2
3
JP10
R7
R5
D1
R6
R8
C6
C29
C7
C10
R4
Q1
JP12 1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
JP11
JP131
2
3
4
C4
C11
C12
C8 C13
C14 C9
C16
C19
C18
C26
1
2
JP4
JP3
1
2
3
4
C15
C17
TP1 TP2
IC1
MSP430F677XIPEU#
XIN
1
XOUT
2
AUXVCC3
3
RTCCAP1
4
RTCCAP0
5
P1.5/SMCLK/CB0/A5
6
P1.4/MCLK/SDCLK/CB1/A4
7
P1.3/ADC10CLK/TACLK/RTCCLK/A3
8
P1.2/ACLK/TA3.1/A2
9
P1.1/TA2.1/VEREF+/A1
10
P1.0/TA1.1/TA0.0/VEREF-/A0
11
P2.4/PM_TA2.0
12
P2.5/PM_UCB0SOMI/PM_UCB0SCL
13
P2.6/PM_USB0SIMO/PM_UCB0SDA
14
P2.7/PM_UCB0CLK
15
P3.0/PM_UCA0RXD/PM_UCA0SOMI
16
P3.1/PM_UCA0TXD/PM_UCA0SIMO
17
P3.2/PM_UCA0CLK
18
P3.3/PM_UCA1CLK
19
P3.4/PM_UCA1RXD/PM_UCA1SOMI
20
P3.5/PM_UCA1TXD/PM_UCA1SIMO
21
COM0
22
COM1
23
P1.6/COM2
24
P1.7/COM3
25
P5.0/COM4
26
P5.1/COM5
27
P5.2/COM6
28
P5.3/COM7
29
LCDCAP/R33
30
P5.4/SDCLK/R23
31
P5.5/SD0DIO/LCDREF/R13
32
P5.6/SD1DIO/R03
33
P5.7/SD2DIO/CB2
34
P6.0/SD3DIO
35
P3.6/PM_UCA2RXD/PM_UCA2SOMI
36
P3.7/PM_UCA2TXD/PM_UCA2SIMO
37
P4.0/PM_UCA2CLK
38
P4.1/PM_UCA3RXD/PM_UCA3SOMI
39
P4.2/PM_UCA3TXD/PM_UCA3SIMO
40
P4.3/PM_UCA3CLK
41
P4.4/PM_UCB1SOMI/PM_UCB1SCL
42
P4.5/PM_UCB1SIMO/PM_UCB1SDA
43
P4.6/PM_UCB1CLK
44
P4.7/PM_TA3.0
45
P6.1/SD4DIO/S39
46
P6.2/SD5DIO/S38
47
P6.3/SD6DIO/S37
48
P6.4/S36
49
P6.5/S35
50
P6.6/S34
51
P6.7/S33
52
P7.0/S32
53
P7.1/S31
54
P7.2/S30
55
P7.3/S29
56
P7.4/S28
57
P7.5/S27
58
P7.6/S26
59
P7.7/S25
60
P8.0/S24
61
P8.1/S23
62
P8.2/S22
63
P8.3/S21
64
P8.4/S20
65
P8.5/S19
66
P8.6/S18
67
P8.7/S17
68
DVSYS
69
DVSS2
70
P9.0/S16
71
P9.1/S15
72
P9.2/S14
73
P9.3/S13
74
P9.4/S12
75
P9.5/S11
76
P9.6/S10
77
P9.7/S9
78
P10.0/S8
79
P10.1/S7
80
P10.2/S6
81
P10.3/S5
82
P10.4/S4
83
P10.5/S3
84
P10.6/S2
85
P10.7/S1
86
P11.0/S0
87
P11.1/TA3.1/CB3
88
P11.2/TA1.1
89
P11.3/TA2.1
90
P11.4/CBOUT
91
P11.5/TACLK/RTCCLK
92
P2.0/PM_TA0.0
93
P2.1/PM_TA0.1
94
P2.2/PM_TA0.2
95
P2.3/PM_TA1.0
96
TEST/SBWTCK
97
PJ.0/TDO
98
PJ.1/TDI/TCLK
99
PJ.2/TMS
100
PJ.3/TCK
101
~RST/NMI/SBWTDIO
102
SD0P0
103
SD0N0
104
SD1P0
105
SD1N0
106
SD2P0
107
SD2N0
108
SD3P0
109
SD3N0
110
VASYS2
111
AVSS2
112
VREF
113
SD4P0
114
SD4N0
115
SD5P0
116
SD5N0
117
SD6P0
118
SD6N0
119
AVSS1
120
AVCC
121
VASYS1
122
AUXVCC2
123
AUXVCC1
124
VDSYS
125
DVCC
126
DVSS1
127
VCORE
128
P1.0 P1.0
P2.0 P2.0
P2.1 P2.1
SD0P0
SD0N0
SD1P0
SD1N0
SD2P0
SD2N0
SD3P0
SD3N0
SD4P0
SD4N0
SD5P0
SD5N0
SD6P0
SD6N0
VASYS1/2
VASYS1/2
VASYS1/2
VASYS1/2
TMS
TMS
TDI
TDI
TDO
TDO
TDO
XOUT
GND
GND
XIN
DVCC
AVCC
DVDSYS
DVDSYS
DVDSYS
DVDSYS
AVSS
AVSS
PJ.2
PJ.2
PJ.1
PJ.1
PJ.0
PJ.0
RST/NMI
RST/NMI
TCK
TCK
TCK
PJ.3
PJ.3
TEST/SBWTCK
TEST/SBWTCK
TEST/SBWTCK
TEST/SBWTCK
RST
RST
RST
RST
LCDCAP
LCDCAP
VREF
VREF
VEREF+ VEREF+
VCORE
AUXVCC2
AUXVCC2
AUXVCC1
AUXVCC1
AUXVCC3
AUXVCC3
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
Titel:
Datum:
Bearb.:
Seite 1/1
MSP-TS430PEU128
22.05.2012 09:37:33
A3
A B C D E F G H I
A B C D E F G H I
File:
Dok:
Rev.:
MSP-TS430PEU128 www.ti.com
B.30 MSP-TS430PEU128
Figure B-59. MSP-TS430PEU128 Target Socket Module, Schematic
122 Hardware SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
1
P1.0
SBW
JTAG
DVDSYS
ext
int
MSP-TS430PEU128
Rev. 1.1 RoHS
DVCC
AUXVCC
GND
AUXVCC1
AUXVCC2
AUXVCC3
GND
GND
RST/NMI
TCK
TDI
TDO
TEST/SBWTCK
TMS
1 25 5 10 15 20 30 35
40 45 50 55 60 64
65 90 70 75 80 85 95 100
128 125 120 115 110 105
14
1
2
10
1
2
GND
GND
VCC
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
1 2 3 4
1234
1234
1
J1
J2
J3
J4
JTAG
R2
C2
C1
R1
C5
R3
BOOTST
C3
R10 R11
J5
JP1
JP2
JP5
JP6
JP7
JP8
JP9
JP10 R7
R5
D1
R6
R8
C6
C29
C7
C10
R4
JP12
JP11
JP13
C4
C11
C12
C8
C13
C14
C9
C16
C19
C18
C26
JP4
JP3
C15
C17
TP1
TP2
IC1
Connector J5
External power connector
Jumper JP1 to "ext"
Jumper JP1
Open to measure current
Orient Pin 1 of
MSP430 device
Jumpers JP5 to JP10
Close 1-2 to debug in Spy-Bi-Wire mode
Close 2-3 to debug in 4-wire JTAG mode
JP11, JP12, JP13
Connect 1-2 to connect
AUXVCCx with DVCC or
drive AUXVCCx externally
D1 LED connected to P1.0
Jumper JP2
Open to disconnect LED
www.ti.com MSP-TS430PEU128
Figure B-60. MSP-TS430PEU128 Target Socket Module, PCB
NOTE: The MSP-TS430PEU128 Rev 1.1 ships with the following modifications:
• R7 value is changed to 0 Ω instead of 330 Ω.
• JTAG pin 8 is connected only to JP5 pin 3, and not to pin 2.
• JP5 pin 2 is connected to IC1 pin 97.
• BOOTST pin 7 is connected to IC1 pin 97.
SLAU278Q–May 2009–Revised February 2014 Hardware 123
Submit Documentation Feedback
Copyright © 2009–2014, Texas Instruments Incorporated
MSP-TS430PEU128 www.ti.com
Table B-32. MSP-TS430PEU128 Bill of Materials
Pos. Ref Des No. Per Description DigiKey Part No. Comment Board
1 PCB 1 94x119.4mm, 4 layers MSP-TS430PEU128 4 layers, green solder mask Rev. 1.1
2 D1 1 green LED, DIODE0805 516-1434-1-ND
3 JP1, JP2, JP4 3 2-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-02-ND Place jumper on header
4 JP5, JP6, JP7, JP8, 6 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND Place jumpers on pins 1-2 (SBW) JP9, JP10
5 JP11, JP12, JP13 3 4-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-04-ND Place jumpers on pins 1-2 (AVCC=VCC)
6 JP3 1 4-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-04-ND Place jumpers on pins 1-2
JP1, JP2, JP3, JP4, Jumper WM4592-ND
7 JP5, JP6, JP7, JP8, 13 JP9, JP10, JP11,
JP12, JP13
8 R1, R2, R4, R6, R8 5 0R, 0805 541-0.0ATR-ND
9 R10, R11 2 0R, 0805 541-0.0ATR-ND DNP
10 C3 1 2.2nF, CSMD0805 490-1628-2-ND DNP
11 C13, C14, C16, 7 4.7uF, 6.3V, CSMD0805 587-1302-2-ND C17, C18, C19, C29
12 C11 1 10uF, 6.3V, CSMD0805 445-1372-2-ND
13 C12 1 10uF, 6.3V, CSMD0805 445-1372-2-ND DNP
14 C1, C2 2 12pF, CSMD0805 490-5531-2-ND DNP
15 R5 1 47K, 0805 311-47KARTR-ND
16 C4, C5, C6, C7, C8, 6 100nF, CSMD0805 311-1245-2-ND C15
17 C9 1 100nF, CSMD0805 311-1245-2-ND DNP
18 R3, R7 2 330R, 0805 541-330ATR-ND
19 C10, C26 2 470nF, CSMD0805 587-1282-2-ND
20 BOOTST 1 10-pin connector, male, TH HRP10H-ND DNP, keep vias free of solder
21 JTAG 1 14-pin connector, male, TH HRP14H-ND
22 IC1 Socket 1 Socket: IC500-1284-009P Manuf. Yamaichi
23 IC1 2 MSP430F67791IPEU DNP: enclosed with kit. Is supplied by TI
24 J5 1 3-pin header, male, TH SAM1035-03-ND
25 Q1 1 Crystal: MS3V-T1R 32.768kHz DNP: Crystal enclosed with kit. Keep vias 12.5pF ±20ppm free of solder
26 TP1, TP2 2 Test point DNP, keep vias free of solder
27 J2,J4 2 26-pin header, TH SAM1029-26-ND DNP: Headers enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of solder.
28 J2,J4 2 26-pin receptable, TH SAM1213-26-ND DNP: Receptacles enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of solder.
29 J1, J3 2 38-pin header, TH SAM1029-38-ND DNP: Headers enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of solder.
30 J1, J3 2 38-pin receptable, TH SAM1213-38-ND DNP: Receptacles enclosed with kit. Keep vias free of solder.
31 Rubber feet 4 Rubber feet Buerklin: 20H1724 apply to bottom side co